JP2023061825A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine payable even when an unexpected situation occurs, during execution of settlement processing.SOLUTION: When a first counting button switch 180 is broken, the first counting button switch 180 is replaced in units. A new first counting button switch 180 is operated to thereby execute settlement processing.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 2

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine").

In a so-called circulation type (enclosed type) game machine, by increasing or decreasing the number of balls held by an electronic storage means, the game proceeds without paying out game balls. This has the advantage that the player does not need to touch the game ball. However, on the other hand, since the game progresses without the substance of the game ball, careful consideration is required for the handling of the player's own ball. In particular, if the settlement cannot be made at the end of the game, the trust of the hall may be lost.

For example, as in Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-215033 (paragraphs 0038 to 0040)), in an in-machine circulation pachinko machine in which settlement processing is executed when the return button 75 is operated, the return button 75 malfunctions. Otherwise, the settlement process will not be executed.

JP 2016-215033 A (paragraphs 0038 to 0040)

Therefore, in view of the above situation, the following solving means aims to provide a gaming machine capable of performing settlement processing even in an unforeseen situation of the operating unit.

Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game board which is detachably supported from the front by a main body frame and has a game area in which games are played with game balls, and a ball launcher which is provided below the game board and capable of supplying game balls to the game area. means, foul ball recovery means for recovering game balls that have been shot by the ball shooting means but have not been supplied to the game area, and ball shooting means for recovering the game balls shot by the ball shooting means. and ball circulation means for supplying to
A gaming machine in which a game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
A settlement switch is provided for the player to execute settlement processing for the ball data,
The settlement switch is unitized and provided so that each unit can be replaced.”
It is a thing. (Refer to paragraph 0553 and FIG. 2 in [Mode for Carrying out the Invention])

Here, the first counting button switch 180 of this embodiment corresponds to the first settlement switch of the above solution.

Further, the shelf unit 200 itself of the present embodiment, the shelf portion 201 (including the design portion) of the shelf unit 200 to which the first counting button switch 180 is attached, and the like correspond to the unit of the above solution means.

According to the above means 1, when the first counting button switch 180 operated by the player is broken, the first counting button switch 180 can be replaced in unit units.

As a result, even if an unexpected situation occurs in the first counting button switch 180, it is possible to operate a new first counting button switch 180 to settle the account.

As described above, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows settlement even if an unforeseen situation occurs during the execution of settlement processing.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine shown with its upper side tilted forward; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing a state in which the door frame, the body frame, and the outer frame, which constitute the pachinko machine, are opened by rotating the hinges. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine for every main structure, and was seen from the back. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a door frame removed; FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the game board is separated from the body frame in FIG. 8. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine with a door frame and a game board removed; FIG. FIG. 11 is a rear view of the pachinko machine of FIG. 10; It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine of FIG. 10 from diagonally front. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the main body frame in an exploded state as seen from the front; FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the body frame in an exploded state, as seen from the rear; It is the plane sectional view which cut|disconnected the outer frame in the up-down direction center. It is a perspective view which shows the lower part of an outer frame. Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is the top view which cut|disconnected the pachinko machine of FIG. 10 in the upper-lower center. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19; FIG. 9 is a front view of a main part showing a cross-section of a firing unit, a foul unit, etc. in the front view of FIG. 8; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame base unit of the main body frame, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a main body frame base unit of the main body frame, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; (a) is a front view of a main body frame base in the main body frame base unit, and (b) is a perspective view showing a state in which a plurality of main body frame bases are stacked. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit in the body frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball shooting unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball shooting unit as seen from the rear. (a) is a perspective view of the firing unit cover of the ball firing unit as seen from the rear left, and (b) is an explanatory view of the ball firing unit showing only the firing unit cover in cross section when viewed from the front. FIG. 4 is a front view of the ball firing unit showing the firing subtraction sensor and firing mallet in dashed lines; (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball shooting unit of the second embodiment and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball shooting unit of the second embodiment and viewed from the rear. be. (a) is a perspective view of the firing unit cover of the ball firing unit of the second embodiment as viewed from the rear left, and (b) is a front view of the ball firing unit showing only the firing unit cover in cross section. is an explanatory diagram of . (a) is a front perspective view of the foul unit in the body frame, and (b) is a back perspective view of the foul unit in the body frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the rear. (a) is an explanatory view showing a closed state of the foul shutter in a side cross section of the foul unit, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an open state of the foul shutter in the side cross section of the foul unit. (a) is a perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the rear. (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment, and (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the second embodiment of the foul unit. (a) is an explanatory view showing a closed state of the foul shutter in a side cross section of the foul unit of the second embodiment, and (b) is a side cross section of the foul unit of the second embodiment with the foul shutter open. It is an explanatory diagram showing. (a) is a front perspective view of the circulation ball path unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the circulation ball path unit in the body frame. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the circulating ball path unit disassembled and viewed from the front; FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the circulation ball path unit, viewed from behind; (a) is a plan view showing only the meandering ball member and the ball-removing shutter in the circulation ball path unit, and (b) is a front perspective view showing only the meandering ball member and the ball-removing shutter in the circulation ball path unit. be. (a1) is an explanatory view showing a side sectional view of the ball retracting shutter and the meandering ball member together with the ball receiving tray in the closed position, and (a2) is an explanatory view showing only the part of the ball retracting shutter in (a1) from the bottom. , (b1) is an explanatory view showing a side sectional view of the ball retracting shutter and the meandering member in the open position together with the ball receiving tray, and (b2) is an explanatory view showing only the part of the ball retracting shutter in (b1) from the bottom. be. (a) is an explanatory view showing a front cross section of the circulation ball path unit cut at the out ball sensor site, and (b) is an illustration showing a front cross section of the circulation ball path unit cut at the safe ball sensor site. It is a diagram. (a) is an enlarged perspective view of the lower part of the body frame together with the outer frame with the meandering cover of the circulation ball path unit removed, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the front with the meandering cover of the circulation ball path unit removed. FIG. 10 is a perspective view seen from the back showing an enlarged lower part of the main body frame together with the outer frame in a state where it is folded. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing meandering sphere members, a meandering cover, a ball release shutter, and a gauge portion in the circulation ball path unit; (a) is an enlarged explanatory view showing a main part of a back cross-section cut at a position of an out-ball sensor with the cover member of the ball elimination mechanism closed in the circulating ball path unit attached to the body frame; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the cover member is opened in (a). (a) is an explanatory side cross-sectional view showing a state in which an iron ball is magnetically attached to the ball extraction shutter at the closed position together with the ball meandering member and the ball extraction tray; It is an explanatory view showing a side cross section together with the ball meandering member and the ball extraction tray in a state where the ball is magnetically attached, and (c) is an explanatory view showing the iron ball on the lower surface by sliding the ball extraction shutter from the state of (b) to the closed position. is an explanatory view showing a side cross section together with the meandering sphere member and the sphere extraction tray in a state where the is magnetically attached. (a) is a plan view of a meandering ball member of a second embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of the meandering ball member of a second embodiment as seen from the front. (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the part of the surplus ball discharging mechanism in the meandering ball member of the second embodiment, and (b) is the enlarged part of the surplus ball discharging mechanism in the meandering ball member of the second embodiment. 1 is a plan view shown as a . (a) is a cross-sectional view of a part of a surplus ball discharging mechanism in a meandering sphere member of a second embodiment cut in the middle in the front-rear direction; It is right side sectional drawing cut|disconnected in the site|part of the right side rather than a bridge|stretching part. (a) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame as seen from the front left, (b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the main body frame as seen from the front right, and (c) is a ball in the main frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the lifting unit from the back. Fig. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the ball lifting unit showing a state in which the ball polishing motor base and the cassette pressing piece are opened and the ball polishing cassette is removed; (a) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown without the ball rolling cassette installed, and (b) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit shown together with the ball rolling cassette with the ball rolling motor base and the cassette pressing piece opened. It is a figure and (c) is a top view of the ball lifting unit shown in the state with which the ball-grinding cassette is mounted|worn. (a) is an explanatory view showing how the door frame is closed with the Kuma cassette locked incompletely, and (b) is a projection of the door frame moved from the state of (a) in the direction in which the door frame closes. is an explanatory view showing a state in which the part is in contact with the tip of the Kuma motor base, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a state in which the door frame is closed from the state of (b) and the Kuma cut is locked. It is a front view showing an enlarged main part in a state in which the ball polishing cassette is removed from the ball lifting unit attached to the body frame. (a) is a right side view showing the main parts of the ball polishing mechanism and the ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit, (b) is a rear view showing the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism, and (c) is a ball It is the top view which looked at the principal part of the lifting mechanism from the arrow A of (b). FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the lifting spiral shaft and the polishing cloth in the ball lifting unit. (a) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit as seen from the rear left along with an enlarged view of the lifting inlet sensor and the lifting outlet sensor; (b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit at the lifting inlet sensor FIG. 3 is a plan cross-sectional view cut at a site; FIG. 4 is an explanatory view schematically showing parts before and after a sphere sensor made up of a photosensor in a sphere passage; (a) is a perspective view of the kuma cassette of the ball lifting unit seen from the front left, (b) is a perspective view of the kuma cassette seen from the rear right, and (c) cuts the kuma cassette at the center in the left-right direction. It is a right side cross-sectional view. (a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the body frame. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear. It is a front cross-sectional view of the ball feeding unit cut at the site of the sensor before firing. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame, and the back cover and the frame substrate unit are also opened; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged portion of the frame substrate unit in the outer frame and the main body frame; It is a reference photograph showing the rear side of the body frame with the frame substrate unit opened. It is an explanatory view showing various passages of game balls on the rear surface side of the body frame from the rear surface. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the flow of the game ball in a main body frame. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of the pachinko machine of 2nd embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows firing permission processing. It is a flow chart which shows possession ball subtraction processing. It is a flow chart showing possession ball subtraction processing of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows possession ball addition processing by a foul ball. It is a flow chart which shows firing control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the launch control processing of the pachinko machine of 2nd embodiment. 4 is a time chart showing operations of a firing solenoid and a ball feed solenoid in a firing sequence; It is a time chart showing the operation of the firing solenoid and the false shutter driving solenoid in the forced firing sequence of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. (a) is a flow chart showing a firing control process different from that of FIG. 74, and (b) is a flow chart showing a possession ball subtraction process in the case of the firing control process of (a). It is a flow chart which shows prize ball processing. It is a flow chart which shows lifting motor operation processing. It is a table|surface which shows the relationship between a lift entrance sensor, a lift exit sensor, and operation|movement of a lift motor. It is a graph showing the relationship between the shooting motion of the game ball and the motion of the ball lifting unit. It is a graph which shows operation|movement of the ball lifting mechanism in a ball lifting unit. (a) is a flowchart showing security processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing security processing in an embodiment different from (a). It is a table|surface which shows the relationship between a circulating ball|bowl shortage sensor, a circulating ball|bowl excess sensor, and error alerting|reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the settlement processing of the pachinko machine of 2nd embodiment. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that can detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet, and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor that cannot detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet. Is an explanatory view schematically showing a detection range by the magnetic sensor in the game board in a perspective view, (d) is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body in which the line of magnetic force from the magnet becomes undetectable, (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body that enables detection of magnetic lines of force from the magnet, and (f) is an explanatory diagram showing the magnetic sensor and the holding section separately. It is explanatory drawing which shows the frame decoration member which can be attached or detached with respect to a door frame. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the door frame is opened and the frame decoration member is removed during normal business hours. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame is being opened and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame is being opened in the reuse confirmation state A; 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame is being opened and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame is being opened in the reuse confirmation state B; 4 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is attached and detached while the door frame is open in the reuse confirmation state A. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is attached and detached while the door frame is open in the reuse confirmation state B; It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is attached after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the determination timing. 10 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame is being opened and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame is being opened in the error state and reuse confirmation state A; FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board showing the transparent center accessories and the like as opaque; 97 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 96 as seen from the front right; FIG. 97 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 96 as seen from the front left; FIG. FIG. 97 is a rear perspective view of the game board of FIG. 96; 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. (a) is a front view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory, and (b) is a perspective view of the lottery accessory as seen from the front above. It is a side cross-sectional view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a state in which a game ball cannot loop in a lottery accessory, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which a game ball can loop in a lottery accessory. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a lottery accessory. It is a front view of the game board shown in a normal state. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front lifting decorative body unit of the back front effect unit is dropped from the normal state to the effect position from the standby position. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the rear-back elevating decorative body of the rear-back production unit is moved from the normal state to the appearance position from the retracted position; From the normal state, the back front elevation decorative body unit of the back front production unit is dropped from the standby position to the production position, and the back rear elevation decoration body of the back rear production unit is shown moved from the retracted position to the appearance position. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. 7 is a time chart showing an example of the amount of payout balls calculated with respect to transition of the stop counter. It is a table showing conditions for clearing "amount of balls to be paid out calculated before start of stop state" and "restrictions on games during stop state". 4 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value and the game is restricted. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game restriction is released when the power is turned off and then turned back on. This is a specific example of effect in the case where the amount of output balls reaches a specific value at the timing when the game ball enters the big winning hole during the big winning game. This is a specific production example in the case where the amount of balls to be output reaches a specific value at the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole during the variable display of the special symbols. FIG. 97 is a front view of a game board of a second embodiment different from the game board of FIG. 96 in which the transparent center accessories and the like are made opaque. 119 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 118 as seen from the front right; FIG. 119 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 118 as seen from the front left; FIG. 119 is a rear perspective view of the game board of FIG. 118; FIG. FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 118 disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. 119 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 118 disassembled into main members and viewed from behind; It is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel. (a) is a front perspective view of an assembly having the front structural members, the game panel and the front unit in the game board of FIG. 118, and (b) is the front structural members, the game panel and Fig. 3 is a rear perspective view of the assembly with the front unit; FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the assembly shown in FIG. 125 disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front; FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the assembly shown in FIG. 125 disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind; FIG. 126 is an explanatory view showing the assembly shown in FIG. 125 cut in the middle in the vertical direction in plan view; It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the front structural member and the game panel, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the front structural member and the game panel, and was seen from the back. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged perspective view of the first information display portion of the game board in the front structural member, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the first information display portion of the game board; (c) is an exploded perspective view of the first information display part of the game board and the first information sticker pedestal, and (d) is the first information sticker to which the first information sticker is attached. It is the perspective view which looked at the seal|sticker base from the front. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged perspective view of the second information display portion of the game board in the front structural member, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of the second information display portion of the game board; (c) is an exploded perspective view of the second information display part of the game board and the second information sticker pedestal, and (d) is the second information sticker to which the second information sticker is attached. It is the perspective view which looked at the seal|sticker base from the front. (a) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged perspective view of a portion of a third information display portion of a game board in a front structural member, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the portion of the third information display portion of a game board; (c) is an exploded perspective view of the third information display portion of the game board and the third information sticker pedestal, and (d) is the third information sticker to which the third information sticker is attached. It is the perspective view which looked at the seal|sticker base from the front. 119 is a front view showing the center accessory of the game board of FIG. 118; FIG. 119 is a front perspective view of the center accessory of the game board of FIG. 118; FIG. 119 is a rear perspective view of the center accessory of the game board of FIG. 118; FIG. (a) is an enlarged explanatory view showing the upper left corner portion of the center accessory of FIG. 134 where the big prize opening is provided, and (b) is a perspective view of the portion of (a) seen from the front. (c) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a portion of a large winning opening in the ball passage of the center accessory. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged perspective view of the upper part of the right end of the center accessory in FIG. 135; (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a perspective view of (a) as seen from behind; ) is an explanatory view schematically showing a cross section of a vertically extending portion of the ball passage of the center accessory. (a) is a front view of an attacker unit provided with a passage decoration, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the passage decoration in the attacker unit of (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a passage decoration part in a cross section. 4(a) to 4(c) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of shapes of recesses in passageway decorations. FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of shapes of protrusions in the passage decoration. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing a plurality of protrusions and recesses of different shapes in the passage decoration part. (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a passage decoration portion in which a first convex portion is provided with a second convex portion of the same shape, and (b) is a second convex portion with a different amount of protrusion on the first convex portion. is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a passage decoration portion provided with, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a passage decoration portion in which a first convex portion is provided with a second convex portion having a different shape, (d) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a passage decoration portion in which a second convex portion is also provided on an inclined surface of the first convex portion. (a1) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a passage decoration portion in which a second convex portion having the same shape as the first convex portion is provided; (a2) is an explanatory diagram showing (a1) from the front; b) is an explanatory view showing from the front a passage decoration portion provided with a recess having a shape different from that of (a2). (a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a passage decoration part in the form of being fitted into an opening of a game panel, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a passage decoration part of a form different from (a). be. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the bottom left decoration and the bottom right decoration of the back decoration unit are moved from the retracted position to the appearing position in a normal state. FIG. 148 is a front view of the game board showing the state of FIG. 147 with the lower back left decoration and the lower back right decoration in the expanded position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing the state where the rear-back left decorative body of the rear-back production unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position in the normal state; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-right decorative body of the back-back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position in the normal state; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-back left decoration and the rear-back right decoration of the rear-back production unit are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position in a normal state; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back front decorative body of the back front effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position in the normal state; A front view of a game board showing a state in which the back front decoration body of the back front production unit and the back rear left decoration body and the back rear right decoration body of the back rear production unit are respectively moved from the retreat position to the appearance position in the normal state. is. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control configuration of the game board of the second embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing the center accessory of the first embodiment attached to the game panel, cut in the middle in the vertical direction, and showing it together with the front constituent member. (a) is an explanatory view showing the front decoration of the center accessory in a state where it is disassembled into a front decoration part and a rear decoration part, and (b) is a front view of the decoration consisting of the front decoration part and the rear decoration part. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing from . FIG. 156 is an explanatory view showing the center accessory of FIG. 155 with the rear end facing down and the center frame placed on the table; FIG. 156 is an explanatory diagram showing a partial cross-section of a center accessory having a center frame to which a decoration different from that in FIG. 155 is attached; (a) is an explanatory view of the main part of the center accessory of the second embodiment as seen from inside the frame, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in (a), and (c) is It is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the center frame was put on the stand in the center accessory of (a) with the rear end downward. FIG. 11 is a front view showing a game board provided with a center accessory according to a third embodiment, with the rear side of the game panel omitted. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory and the game panel of FIG. 160 as seen from the front. FIG. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory of FIG. 160, viewed from the front; (a) to (g) are explanatory diagrams showing various joining patterns between the first frame and the second frame in the center accessory of the third embodiment. (a) is a front view showing a main part of a game board provided with a side unit of a second embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. (a) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit exploded from the game panel in the game board of FIG. 164, (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit exploded from (a) from the front, (c) is an exploded perspective view of the side unit as seen from the rear of (b), and (d) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the game panel and the side unit in a longitudinal section. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the side unit of FIG. 165 and the game panel in cross section. FIG. FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing a longitudinal section of a side unit having a form different from that of FIG. 164 together with a game panel. 166(a) is an explanatory view showing a longitudinal cross-section of a side unit with a form different from that of the side unit shown in FIG. 166 together with a game panel, and (b) is an essential part of the LED board and board cover of the side unit in (a). is an explanatory view showing the in perspective view. FIG. 169 is an explanatory view showing a longitudinal section of a side unit having a form different from that of the side unit shown in FIG. 168 together with a game panel. Furthermore, it is explanatory drawing which shows the side unit of a different form with a game panel in the vertical cross section. Furthermore, it is explanatory drawing which shows the side unit of a different form with a game panel in the vertical cross section. (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a side unit of a different form together with a game panel in a cross section, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing (a) in a longitudinal section. (a) is a front view showing a main part of a game board provided with a side unit and the like of a third embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of an out port in (a). , (c) is an explanatory view showing (b) in a longitudinal section. 173(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of an out port portion of a game board provided with a side unit having a finger hook portion of a form different from that of FIG. It is an explanatory view shown in the plane. FIG. 4 is an explanatory view schematically showing a panel plate of a game panel in which an opening to which a side unit is attached and an out port are continuously connected; (a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the LED substrate, and (b) is a different form from (a) in which the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the LED substrate. FIG. 12C is an explanatory diagram showing an example, (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided so as to cover the LED substrate, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided over the entire circumference of the unit cover. and FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of holding.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
A pachinko machine 1 that is an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 7. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine shown with the upper side tilted forward. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state in which the door frame, main body frame, and outer frame that constitute the pachinko machine are each hinged and opened. FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is used by being installed on an island facility of a game hall. In this pachinko machine 1, a large number (for example, 40 to 60) of game balls B are enclosed without being discharged to the outside or supplied from the outside. This game machine is a so-called enclosed game machine or a management game machine in which the ball B is not touched. In this pachinko machine 1, the number of balls held by the player is converted into data and handled as ball data.

The game balls B enclosed in the pachinko machine 1 have the same diameter (hereinafter also referred to as diameter D. Diameter D=11 mm) as game balls used in conventional pachinko machines, but are made of SUS304. It is made of stainless steel that does not magnetize. As a result, even if the game ball B is enclosed in the pachinko machine 1 for a long period of time, it will not rust and is distinguished from the conventional game ball (iron ball SB) that is magnetically attached.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16 and the like. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine with the door frame removed. 9 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the game board is separated from the body frame in FIG. 8. FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine with the door frame and game board removed, FIG. 11 is a rear view of the pachinko machine of FIG. 10, and FIG. 12 is a diagonal front view of the pachinko machine of FIG. It is a perspective view. FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the body frame when viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame and the body frame when viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional plan view of the outer frame cut at the center in the vertical direction. FIG. 16 is a perspective view showing the lower portion of the outer frame.

The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, and the main frame 4 can be opened and closed forward and can be attached detachably. The outer frame 2 comprises an outer frame main body 10 formed in a vertically long frame shape, an outer frame assembly metal fitting 20 to which the outer frame main body 10 is assembled, and an outer frame hinge supporting the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. A mechanism 30, an outer frame lock fitting (not shown) for locking the body frame 4 in a closed state, a panel 45 attached to the lower frame body 14 of the outer frame body 10, and and a sliding plate 46 to which it is attached.

The outer frame body 10 of the outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the left frame body 11 and the right frame body 12, which extend vertically and are spaced apart in the left and right directions. and a lower frame 14 connecting the lower ends of the left frame 11 and the right frame 12 to each other. The left frame 11 and the right frame 12 are each made of extruded metal such as aluminum alloy. The upper frame 13 and the lower frame 14 are made of wood. The left frame 11, the right frame 12, the upper frame 13, and the lower frame 14 have the same dimension in the front-rear direction.

The outer frame assembly metal fittings 20 of the outer frame 2 include an upper left metal fitting connecting the left frame body 11 and the upper frame body 13, an upper right metal fitting connecting the right frame body 12 and the upper frame body 13, and a left A lower left metal fitting connecting the frame 11 and the lower frame 14 and a right lower metal fitting connecting the right frame 12 and the lower frame 14 are provided. The lower left metal fitting also serves as the outer frame lower hinge body 35 .

The outer frame hinge mechanism 30 has an outer frame upper hinge body 31 provided at the upper left end of the outer frame main body 10 and an outer frame lower hinge body 35 provided at the lower left end of the outer frame main body 10. ing.

The outer frame upper hinge body 31 of the outer frame hinge mechanism 30 is attached to the top surface of the left end of the upper frame body 13 , and its front end protrudes forward from the outer frame main body 10 . The outer frame upper hinge body 31 has a bearing groove 31a that penetrates vertically and is open on one side at a portion that protrudes forward from the outer frame main body 10, and a bearing groove 31a that is open at one side. and a lock member 32 which is provided on the lower surface of the portion projecting outward and which can open and close the released portion of the bearing groove 31a.

The bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 pivotally supports the main body frame hinge shaft 511a by inserting the main body frame hinge shaft 511a of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 of the main body frame 4 from the released portion. be able to. In a normal state, the lock member 32 of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 is positioned at the lock position where the released portion of the bearing groove 31a is closed by the biasing force of the elastic piece (not shown). When the lock member 32 is moved to the release position against the urging force of the elastic piece, the bearing groove 31a is opened to the side, and the main body frame hinge shaft 511a is inserted into the bearing groove 31a from the side. , the body frame hinge shaft 511a inserted into the bearing groove 31a can be removed from the bearing groove 31a.

The outer frame lower hinge body 35 of the outer frame hinge mechanism 30 is attached to a portion (upper portion) overlapping the lower frame body 14 on the upper surface of the left end of the panel 45 , and the front end projects forward from the outer frame main body 10 . ing. The outer frame lower hinge body 35 has a hinge shaft 35 a projecting upward at a portion projecting forward from the outer frame main body 10 . By inserting the hinge shaft 35a of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 into the outer frame shaft hole (not shown) of the main body frame lower hinge body 512 in the main body frame 4, the main body frame lower hinge body 512 is rotatably supported. can do.

The outer frame hinge mechanism 30 pivotally supports the main body frame hinge shaft 511a of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 in the main body frame 4 in the bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge body 31, and the hinge shaft 35a of the outer frame lower hinge body 35. is inserted into the outer frame shaft hole of the lower main body frame hinge body 512, the main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be openable and closable.

Two outer frame lock fittings of the outer frame 2 are provided on the inner side surface (left side surface) of the right frame body 12 so as to be spaced apart vertically. The outer frame locking metal fittings can lock the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 in a closed state so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened by engaging the outer frame locking claws 784 of the lock unit 780 in the main body frame 4 . .

A curtain plate 45 of the outer frame 2 is attached to the lower frame 14 and has a front end projecting forward beyond the lower frame 14 . The curtain plate 45 is made of synthetic resin. Two sliding plates 46 are provided on the upper surface of the curtain plate 45 so as to be separated from each other to the left and right. The sliding plate 46 abuts the lower end surface of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . The sliding plate 46 is made of a low-friction material with low frictional resistance, making the body frame 4 slippery and facilitating opening and closing.

More specifically, the curtain plate 45 is formed so as to cover a portion of the upper end surface of the lower frame 14 on the front side of the center in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the lower frame 14. A plate body 45a, a hinge body cover portion 45b provided near the left end of the upper surface of the screen body body 45a, a rear wall portion 45c extending upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the hinge body cover portion 45b, and a guide display portion 45d provided on the upper surface of the curtain plate main body 45a.

The hinge body cover portion 45 b of the curtain plate 45 is provided so as to cover the lower surface and side surfaces of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 . As a result, when a player, a worker for maintenance, transportation, installation, etc., reaches out near the outer frame lower hinge body 35, the hand directly touches the outer frame lower hinge body 35 by means of the hinge body cover portion 45b. The edge of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 can prevent injury.

In addition, since the lower surface and side surfaces of the lower outer frame hinge body 35 are covered by the hinge body cover portion 45b, the lower outer frame hinge body 35 can be hidden from the player side, and the curtain plate 45 (curtain plate The sense of unity with the main body 45a) can be enhanced to improve the appearance.

The rear wall portion 45c of the curtain plate 45 is arranged so that when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the rear surface of the main body frame lower hinge body 512 of the main body frame 4 to be described later abuts against the front surface of the rear wall portion 45c. is provided in As a result, when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame lower hinge body 512 comes into contact with the rear wall portion 45c, thereby restricting the body frame 4 from further hinge-rotating to the rear side. be able to.

As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the guide display portion 45d of the curtain plate 45 is provided so as to protrude rearward from the rear side of the upper surface of the curtain plate main body 45a. , to the rear portion of the sliding plate 46 on the right side. An arrow pointing to the left near the left end and an arrow pointing to the right near the right end are displayed on the guidance display portion 45d, and between the two arrows, "! Fixed in this range" is displayed. Protruding nails and fixtures are prohibited!” is displayed. These arrows and letters are engraved by a mold for injection molding the curtain plate 45 .

The guide display portion 45d is provided so as not to come into contact with the body frame 4 which is provided so as to be openable/closable with respect to the outer frame 2 . This guidance display portion 45d is for calling attention to the worker when installing the pachinko machine 1 on the island facility of the game hall. Specifically, when the lower frame body 14 of the outer frame 2 is fixed to the island facility with a mounting screw (not shown), the head of the mounting screw does not move within the range displayed on the guide display portion 45d. This is for calling attention not to protrude above the display portion 45d. By fixing the outer frame 2 with the mounting screws according to this warning, when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the mounting screws do not come into contact with the body frame 4, and the mounting screws do not touch the body frame 4. do not interfere.

According to the guide display portion 45d, it is possible to prevent the mounting screws that fix the outer frame 2 from interfering with the main body frame 4. Therefore, the main body frame 4 may be damaged due to the interference of the mounting screws. can be avoided. Further, since the guide display portion 45d serves as a mark for the driving amount of the mounting screws for fixing the outer frame 2, it is not necessary to drive the mounting screws while opening and closing the body frame 4 so that the mounting screws do not interfere with each other. , can improve work efficiency.

Furthermore, since the guide display portion 45d is provided, when checking the fixed state of the outer frame 2 to the island facility, the guide display portion 45d can be used as a guide to easily visually check the condition of the mounting screws. can be confirmed.

In addition, since the guide display portion 45d indicating the fixing range of the mounting screws is formed integrally with the panel main body 45a, simply by attaching the panel main body 45a to the lower frame 14 and assembling it to the outer frame 2, the outer frame 2 can be displayed. The guide display portion 45d can be provided in the frame 2, and the cost can be reduced compared to the case where the guide display portion 45d is separately provided.

In the above-described embodiment, the guide display portion 45d projecting rearward from the rear end of the curtain plate main body 45a is shown to extend continuously in the left-right direction from the leftmost arrow to the rightmost arrow. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and only the left and right arrow portions may project rearward from the rear end of the curtain plate main body 45a.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the guide display portion 45d is engraved when the curtain plate 45 is injection-molded, but the present invention is not limited to this. , and the guidance display portion 45d may be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the guidance display portion 45d is provided on the curtain plate 45, but it is not limited to this, and may be provided on the lower frame body 14, the sliding plate 46, or the like. . When the guide display portion 45d is provided on the lower frame 14, for example, a sticker may be attached, an ink stamp may be applied, or a brand mark may be applied. When the guide display portion 45d is provided on the sliding plate 46, for example, the sliding plate 46 may be engraved with a concave shape.

[3. door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 3 and 5 to 7. FIG. The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 is provided to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame 4, and when closed, the door frame body 100 has a game window 101 through which the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the body frame 4 faces forward. , a transparent glass 120 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the door frame body 100 and closes the game window 101; A handle 160 operated by the player to hit the game ball B into the area 5a, a cylindrical handle cover 170 surrounding the outer periphery of the handle 160, and a count button switch 180 operable by the player. I have.

The door frame 3 includes a door frame panel 190 extending from the lower end of the front surface of the door frame main body 100 over the entire width in the horizontal direction at a constant height, and a game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100. A shelf unit 200 protruding forward at a portion between the door frame curtain plate 190 and a performance operation unit 250 provided in the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction and operable by a player are provided. The number of balls displayed 140 and the counting button switch 180 are provided on the upper surface of the shelf unit 200 (the upper surface of the shelf 201).

Further, the door frame 3 includes a door frame top unit 300 provided above the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and a door frame top unit 300 provided on the front surface of the door frame main body 100 on the left side of the game window 101. A door frame left side unit 320 and a door frame right side unit 340 provided on the right side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100 are provided.

The door frame main body 100 has a door frame hinge mechanism 110 for attaching to the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The door frame hinge mechanism 110 includes a door frame upper hinge body 111 (see FIG. 6) provided at the upper left end of the door frame main body 100 and a door frame lower hinge body provided at the lower left end of the door frame main body 100. 112 and . The door frame upper hinge body 111 has a door frame upper hinge shaft 111a protruding upward. In the door frame hinge mechanism 110, the door frame upper hinge shaft 111a of the door frame upper hinge body 111 is inserted from below into the door frame upper shaft hole 511b of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 described later, and the door frame lower hinge body 112 is inserted. By inserting the door frame lower hinge shaft 112a from above into a door frame lower shaft hole 512b of a main body frame lower hinge body 512 described later, the door frame 3 can be supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4. .

Further, as shown in FIGS. 5 and 7, the door frame main body 100 has a projecting portion 102 projecting rearward from near the lower end of the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the lower surface of the projecting part 102 abuts on a supporting stepped part 501q of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, which will be described later. It can be lifted. With this projecting portion 102, the door frame 3 is lifted by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4. Therefore, the load of the door frame 3 is transferred to the projecting portion 102 and the door frame lower hinge body 112. can be dispersed. As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive load from continuing to be applied to the hinges (the door frame lower hinge body 112 and the outer frame lower hinge body 35) that enable the door frame 3 to be opened and closed, and to prevent the hinges from being distorted. In addition, since the door frame 3 can be lifted by the protrusion 102 even if the hinge is distorted, the door frame 3 can be closed with respect to the body frame 4 at a proper position. Although not shown, the lower surface of the protrusion 102 has a plurality of ribs extending in the front-rear direction, and these ribs increase strength and rigidity.

The projecting portion 102 has a guide surface 102a that is inclined so as to move leftward as it goes rearward. Although the details will be described later, the guide surface 102a of the protrusion 102 may be bent when the door frame 3 is about to be closed with respect to the main body frame 4 when the ball lifting unit 650 has the ball motor base 686 in a state other than the locked position. The front end of the motor base 686 comes into contact with the Kuma motor base 686 so that it can be moved (rotated) to the locked position.

The number-of-balls display unit 140 is composed of a 6-digit 7-segment LED. The number-of-balls-in-hand display section 140 is provided on the upper surface of the shelf unit 200 on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction and on the left side of the count button switch 180 .

The handle 160 is provided in the lower right corner on the front surface of the door frame main body 100 , that is, near the right end between the game window 101 and the door frame curtain plate 190 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100 . The handle 160 is attached so that the player can rotate it with the rotation axis facing forward and backward. The steering wheel 160 is shaped like an automobile steering wheel and includes a central hub portion 160a, a plurality (here, three) of spoke portions 160b extending outwardly from the hub portion 160a, and spoke portions 160a and 160b. and an annular ring portion 160c that connects the tips of 160b.

The ring portion 160c of the handle 160 is provided at a front portion slightly separated from the front end of the cylindrical handle cover 170 so that the player cannot grip the ring portion 160c. Therefore, when the player rotates the handle 160, he or she mainly operates the hub portion 160a with his or her fingers passing between the spoke portions 160b. In this state, the player's finger is thrust into the cylinder of the handle cover 170 .

The handle 160 includes a firing stop switch 161 that can be pressed by the player, a handle touch sensor 162 that detects changes in electrostatic capacity of the handle 160, and a handle rotation sensor 163 that detects the rotation angle of the handle 160. (see Figure 68).

When the player presses the firing stop switch 161 , the frame control board 740 stops driving the firing solenoid 553 . Therefore, when the player presses the shooting stop switch 161 while rotating the handle 160, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 160.例文帳に追加After that, when the pressing operation of the firing stop switch 161 is released while the rotating operation of the handle 160 is kept as it is, the game is played again with the hitting strength before pressing the firing stop switch 161 (the hitting strength according to the rotating operation of the handle 160). A ball B can be hit into the game area 5a.

The handle touch sensor 162 detects static electricity acting on the handle 160. When the player touches the handle 160, the handle touch sensor 162 detects static electricity acting from the player and detects contact (touch) of the handle 160 by the player. ). When the handle 160 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 162 is detecting the player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation sensor 163 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160. Driving is controlled, and a game ball B can be hit.

Therefore, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 160 in some way without touching the handle 160, the handle touch sensor 162 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 553 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 160 in a manner different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

The handle rotation sensor 163 is a variable resistor. When the handle 160 is rotated, the detection shaft rotates and the internal resistance changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft. Therefore, when the handle 160 is rotated to change the internal resistance of the handle rotation sensor 163, the driving force of the firing solenoid 553 in the ball shooting unit 550, which will be described later, changes according to the internal resistance. The game ball B can be hit into the game area 5a with the strength corresponding to the .

The handle cover 170 extends rearward from the rear portion of the annular portion of the handle 160 so as to increase in diameter, and is formed in a conical tubular shape. An opening 171 communicating with the inside is provided on the right peripheral surface and the lower peripheral surface of the outer peripheral surface of the handle cover 170 . Through these openings 171, even if dust, liquid, or the like enters the handle cover 170, it can be discharged downward.

The counting button switch 180 is provided on the upper surface of the shelf unit 200 on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction. The count button switch 180, which will be described in detail later, can be pressed when there is a ball in hand to send the ball to the game ball lending device 8 for settlement.

The door frame curtain plate 190 extends laterally with a constant height and the same length as the width of the door frame main body 100 in the lateral direction, and is attached to the lower end of the front surface of the door frame main body 100 . The door frame curtain plate 190 penetrates in the front-rear direction at the center in the left-right direction, and has a duct grill 191 positioned in front of a bass reflex duct 501e of the body frame 4, which will be described later. The duct grille 191 is elongated to the left and right and partitioned by a plurality of vertical lattices. The duct grille 191, which will be described later in detail, is for emitting air vibrations (wind) generated by driving the main body frame speaker 503 from the bass reflex duct 501e of the main body frame 4 forward.

The shelf unit 200 is provided at a portion between the game window 101 and the door frame curtain board 190 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100 . A spherical performance operation unit 250 is provided in the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction. The shelf unit 200 includes a shelf part 201 protruding forward in a shelf shape along the lower end of the game window 101 from the upper end, and a speaker grill provided below the shelf part 201 and on the right side of the production operation unit 250. 203, a setting adjustment button 204 which is provided on the upper surface of the shelf 201 and which is composed of four push buttons arranged in the front, back, left, and right, and a pair of projections 205 which are provided separately in the left and right. there is The setting adjustment button 204 can adjust the volume by operating the front and rear push buttons of the four push buttons arranged in front, back, left and right, and can adjust the light amount by operating the left and right push buttons. I have to.

The shelf 201 has a smooth upper surface. On the upper surface of the shelf 201, on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction, a count button switch 180 is provided near the right end, and a ball number display section 140 is provided on the left side of the count button switch 180. A setting adjustment button 204 is provided on the right side of the direction center, and protrusions 205 are provided on both left and right sides near the rear end of the setting adjustment button 204 .

The pair of protrusions 205 protrude higher than the setting adjustment button 204 and have rounded upper ends. A pair of protrusions 205 are provided substantially parallel to the rear side of the shelf 201 . The pair of protrusions 205 can be used, for example, to prop up the smartphone on the upper surface of the shelf 201, which is convenient.

The speaker grille 203 is positioned in front of the body frame speaker 503 in the body frame 4, which will be described later, and is formed of punching metal having a plurality of through holes. The speaker grille 203 is symmetrical with the handle 160 and has the same size with respect to the center of the door frame 3 in the middle direction, and is formed in a shape that bulges forward like the handle cover 170 .

The effect operation unit 250 is provided in the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction, and has a front end protruding forward from the shelf unit 200 and an upper end protruding upward from the shelf unit 200.例文帳に追加The production operation unit 250 is formed in a spherical shape as a whole. The effect operation unit 250 has a circular first effect button 251 provided near the center on the upper surface, and an annular second effect button 252 provided so as to surround the first effect button 251. are doing. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the first effect button 251 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the second effect button 252 is formed in a cylindrical shape. The first effect button 251 and the second effect button 252 are coaxially provided, and the axis is inclined so as to move forward as it goes upward.

The first effect button 251 and the second effect button 252 are provided so as to move upward (pop up) as a whole according to the player participation type effect. The first effect button 251 can always be pressed, while the second effect button 252 can be pressed only when popped up.

Although illustration is omitted, a vibrator (vibration device) is provided inside the first effect button 251 .

The door frame top unit 300 is a portion above the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and both ends in the left and right direction are between the upper end portion of the door frame left side unit 320 and the upper end portion of the door frame right side unit 340. It is provided so as to be sandwiched between them. The door frame top unit 300 protrudes forward like an eave. The door frame top unit 300 includes a translucent semi-tubular door frame top decoration 301 that extends laterally along the front edge. The door frame top decoration 301 is curved in the front-rear direction so that the center in the left-right direction is located furthest forward in plan view.

Although illustration is omitted, the door frame top unit 300 includes a door frame top decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for decorating the door frame top decoration 301, and sounds such as voice, music, and sound effects. It has a pair of door frame top speakers 303 which output and are separated to the left and right, and a pair of door frame top side speakers 304 which are provided on both left and right outer sides of the pair of door frame top speakers 303. there is A pair of door frame top speakers 303 are full-range speakers (or mid-range speakers), and a pair of door frame top side speakers 304 are tweeters (high-pitched speakers).

The door frame left side unit 320 is a portion on the left side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and is vertically located from near the upper end of the door frame main body 100 to near the speaker grill 203 below the shelf portion 201 of the shelf unit 200. long established. The door-frame left-side unit 320 extends over the entire length in the vertical direction, and includes a semi-tube-shaped door-frame left-side decorative body 321 having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 321 is curved rightward in the vicinity of the lower end.

Although illustration is omitted, the door frame left side unit 320 has a door frame left side decoration substrate on which a plurality of LEDs for decorating the door frame left side decoration 321 are mounted.

The door frame right side unit 340 is a portion on the right side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and extends vertically from near the upper end of the door frame main body 100 to the handle cover 170 below the shelf portion 201 of the shelf unit 200. long established. The door-frame right-side unit 340 protrudes forward longer than the door-frame left-side unit 320, and is formed in a vertically elongated partition shape.

The door frame right side unit 340 extends vertically along the front end and is provided behind the semi-tubular door frame right side decoration 341 having translucency and the door frame right side decoration 341 . A light-transmitting door frame right side left side decorative body (not shown) forming the left side, and a light transmitting body provided behind the door frame right side decorative body 341 and forming the right side a door frame right side right side decorative body (not shown), a door frame right side decorative body 341, a door frame right side left side decorative body, and a door frame right side right side decorative body for luminous decoration. and a door frame right side decorative substrate (not shown) on which LEDs are mounted. The door frame right side decorative body 341 is curved leftward in the vicinity of the lower end.

In addition, the door frame right side unit 340 has an opening 342 that penetrates in the vicinity of the lower end and that the keyhole 782 of the lock unit 780 faces forward.

[3-1. Count button switch]
The counting button switch 180 is provided on the upper surface of the shelf unit 200 on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction. The count button switch 180 can be pressed when there are balls in hand (number of balls > 0) to send the balls to the game ball lending device 8 for settlement. The counting button switch 180, which will be described later in detail, can be used to feed the balls one by one or by a predetermined number (for example, every 250) according to the pressing time. The number of possessed balls sent to the game ball lending device 8 is sent to the management server 9 via the communication network, and the IC card storing the number of possessed balls is ejected from the game ball lending device 8. - 特許庁

Here, the game ball lending device 8 is provided so as to be adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 in the island facility of the game hall (also called sand). Although not shown in detail, the game ball lending device 8 includes an insertion slot for inserting cash, a prepaid card, etc., a card slot for inserting/ejecting an IC card, a ball rental button switch 8a, a return button switch, and an inserted amount. , a display section for displaying the number of counting balls, etc. are provided. In the game ball lending device 8, when the ball lending button switch 8a is pressed with cash or the like thrown into the slot, a predetermined number of game balls B are lent out within the range of the amount of money put in. In this embodiment, the number of rented game balls B is transmitted as digital data to the frame control board, and also transmitted to the management server 9 via the communication network for management.

In more detail about the count button switch 180, when the player "short presses" the count button switch 180 (for example, one pressing time is less than 500 ms) with a ball in hand, one game ball B is released from the ball in hand. Count. When the counting button switch 180 is "long pressed (for example, one pressing time is 500 ms or more)", count notification is given every predetermined time (for example, 300 ms) until the number of held balls becomes less than 250. 250 game balls B are counted at the timing. When the number of held balls becomes 250 or less during long pressing, game balls B are counted one by one. Also, when the counting button switch 180 is "long-pressed (for example, one pressing time is 500 ms or more)", even if the counting button switch 180 is not kept pressed, the total number of held balls is unconditionally counted. You can do it.

When counting is performed by pressing the counting button switch 180, the number of balls displayed in the number-of-balls display unit 140 is subtracted and displayed, and the number of balls is displayed on the display unit (not shown) of the game ball lending device 8. A number is displayed.

[4. Body frame]
The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 8 to 14, 17 to 21, and the like. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 19 is a plan view of the pachinko machine of FIG. 10 cut in the vertical center. FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view taken along line A--A in FIG. 21 is a main part front view showing a section of a firing unit, a foul unit, etc. in the front view of FIG. 8. FIG.

The body frame 4 is formed in the shape of a box frame with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. mounted possible.

The main body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 2, a ball shooting unit 550 for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a ball. A foul unit 570 for recovering the game ball B that was not hit into the game area 5a despite being shot by the shooting unit 550, and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 and the foul unit 570 were recovered. A circulating ball path unit 600 for sending game balls B to the ball launching unit 550 side, a ball lifting unit 650 for moving game balls B upward from the downstream end of the circulating ball path unit 600, and a ball lifting unit 650 A ball sending unit 700 for sending the lifted game balls B one by one to the ball shooting unit 550 is provided.

The body frame 4 also includes a ball receiving tray 720 for receiving the game balls B ejected from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600, and a frame control for controlling the ball launching unit 550, the ball lifting unit 650, and the like. A frame substrate unit 730 having a substrate 740 and a lock unit 780 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
Main body frame base unit 500 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 24 and the like. FIG. 22 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame base unit of the main body frame disassembled into main components and viewed from the front, and FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view as seen; FIG. FIG. 24(a) is a front view of the body frame base in the body frame base unit, and FIG. 24(b) is a perspective view showing a state in which a plurality of body frame bases are stacked.

The main body frame base unit 500 is supported so as to be openable and closable forward with respect to the outer frame 2, and is capable of supporting the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable forward. The body frame base unit 500 includes a ball launching unit 550, a foul unit 570, a circulation ball path unit 600, a ball lifting unit 650, a ball feeding unit 700, a ball receiving tray 720, a frame substrate unit 730, a lock unit 780, and the like. installed.

The main body frame base unit 500 has a game board insertion portion 502 penetrating in the front and rear direction, into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front, and a base wall portion 501b provided below the game board insertion portion 502. A main body frame base 501 formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a side reinforcing plate 509 reinforcing the left side of the main body frame base 501 are provided.

The main body frame base unit 500 includes a main body frame speaker 503 attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a main body frame speaker 501 attached to the base wall portion 501b so as to cover the main body frame speaker 503 from the rear, and the front side is open. and a back cover 505 provided so that the game board insertion portion 502 of the main body frame base 501 can be opened and closed from behind.

Further, the main body frame base unit 500 includes a game board lock member 506 attached to the main body frame base 501, a door open switch 507 and a frame open switch 508 attached to the main body frame base 501, and a main body frame base 501. and an attached body frame hinge mechanism 510 .

The body frame base 501 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front. The body frame base 501 is made of black opaque synthetic resin. The main body frame base 501 includes a frame-shaped frame 501a having no left side, and a game board insert penetrating back and forth within the frame of the frame 501a from near the upper end to below in a range of about 2/3 of the total height. 502, a base wall portion 501b provided on the lower side of the game board insertion portion 502, and a game protruding upward (inside the game board insertion portion 502) near the center in the left-right direction of the upper end surface of the base wall portion 501b. A board restricting portion 501c, a main body frame speaker opening 501d that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the left end of the base wall portion 501b and through which the main body frame speaker 503 faces forward, and a horizontally elongated front-rear direction near the lower end of the center of the left-right direction of the base wall portion 501b. and a bass reflex duct 501e passing through.

In addition, the body frame base 501 is recessed rearward from the front side above the bass reflex duct 501e in the base wall portion 501b. and a ball storage passage insertion opening 501g through which the meandering ball member 613 and the meandering cover 614 of the circulation ball path unit 600 are inserted.

The body frame base 501 also includes a foul unit mounting portion 501h and a ball shooting unit mounting portion 501i, which are arranged side by side above the ball storage passage insertion opening 501g on the front surface of the base wall portion 501b, and the base wall portion 501b. A ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j provided on the right side of the ball shooting unit mounting portion 501i, and a ball feeding unit provided at a portion behind the ball firing unit mounting portion 501i on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b. The mounting portion 501k, the circulation ball path unit mounting portion 501l provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b, and the base wall portion 501b are penetrated in the front-rear direction near the upper right corner, through which the lock cylinder 781 of the lock unit 780 is inserted. and a cylinder insertion opening 501m.

Further, the main body frame base 501 protrudes from the left and right inner walls of the tray insertion recess 501f, respectively. A locking pawl 501n is provided for restricting forward movement of the tray 720 . The body frame base 501 also has a vertically long opening 501o penetrating back and forth at the location of the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j.

The body frame base 501 also includes a top cover 502a extending rearward from the upper end of the game board insertion portion 502, a rear cover 502b extending short and flat downward from the rear edge of the top cover 502a, A left side cover 502c extending rearward from the left end of the game board insertion portion 502 and having an upper end connected to the upper surface cover 502a, and a left side cover 502c extending rearward from the right end of the game board insertion portion 502 and having an upper end connected to the upper surface cover 502a. and a lower cover 502e extending rearward from the lower end of the game board insertion portion 502. As shown in FIG.

The body frame base 501 also includes a plurality of ventilation holes 502f passing through the rear cover 502b, a plurality of upper recesses 502g provided in the upper cover 502a and recessed downward, and a lower cover 502e. It is provided with a plurality of lower surface recesses 502h that are recessed downward, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 502i provided on the lower surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the upper surface of the lower surface cover 502e.

Further, the body frame base 501 is provided on the upper side of the ball shooting unit attachment part 501i, and further includes a canopy part 501p for blocking light from entering the ball shooting unit 550 from above. The eaves portion 501p can block external light from a firing subtraction sensor 554, which is a photosensor of the ball firing unit 550 attached to the ball firing unit attachment portion 501i. False detection can be prevented.

The main body frame base 501 includes a support step portion 501q provided at a portion between the tray insertion recess 501f and the opening 501o and slightly above the bottom surface of the tray insertion recess 501f, and a base wall portion 501b. A pair of support protrusions 501r are provided vertically apart near the right end on the rear surface and protrude rearward. The support step portion 501q has a surface (upper surface) facing upward. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the support step portion 501q abuts so that the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 rides on the support step portion 501q, thereby lifting the door frame 3 to some extent. part of the load of The rear end face of the support projection 501r is provided with a locking hole for locking the ny latch 774 of the frame base unit 730. As shown in FIG.

The game board 5 is detachably inserted from the front into the game board insertion portion 502 of the main body frame base 501 . The game board insertion portion 502 is surrounded by a top cover 502a, a left side cover 502c, a right side cover 502d, and a bottom cover 502e around a portion behind the base wall portion 501b.

The game board 5 is placed on the upper end face of the base wall portion 501b. A door opening switch 507, a ball launching unit 550, a foul unit 570, and a ball receiving tray 720 are attached to the front surface of the base wall portion 501b. A body frame speaker 503, a body frame speaker box 504, a frame open switch 508, a circulating ball path unit 600, a ball lifting unit 650, and a ball feeding unit 700 are attached to the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b.

The game board regulating portion 501c regulates the movement of the game board 5 in the left-right direction and backward when the game board 5 is inserted into the game board insertion portion 502. As shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the main body frame speaker opening 501d is formed in a lattice shape, and is provided so as to be positioned behind the speaker grille 203 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. It is A main body frame speaker 503 is attached to the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b so as to close the main body frame speaker port 501d from the rear.

The bass reflex duct 501e is formed in a rectangular tubular shape elongated in the left and right direction. Although details will be described later, the bass reflex duct 501e communicates with an enclosure 504a of the main body frame speaker 503 composed of the base wall portion 501b and the main body frame speaker box 504, and the sound is output from the main body frame speaker 503 to the rear. It is for inverting the phase and emitting forward. In this embodiment, the cylindrical bass reflex duct 501e makes it possible to resonate and amplify the low range of the range of the sound output from the main body frame speaker 503 to produce a deeper bass sound. The bass reflex duct 501 e is provided so as to be positioned behind the duct grille 191 of the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4 .

The tray insertion recess 501f can detachably support the ball receiving tray 720 from the front. The bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f is inclined so that the front end side is lowered (see FIG. 20). As a result, even if the game ball B spills into the tray insertion recess 501f while the ball receiving tray 720 is not inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f, it can be ejected forward. Further, since the bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f is inclined so that the front end side is lowered, the placed ball receiving tray 720 can be easily slid forward.

The ball storage passage insertion opening 501g is provided so that the front portions of the meandering ball member 613 and the meandering cover 614 of the circulation ball passage unit 600 attached to the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b pass through and project forward. The foul unit mounting portion 501h is provided near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b and on the right side of the main body frame speaker port 501d. The ball shooting unit attachment portion 501i is provided on the right side of the foul unit attachment portion 501h. The ball lifting unit attachment portion 501j is provided at a portion between the vicinity of the upper end and the vicinity of the lower end of the base wall portion 501b.

The ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k is provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b so that the upper surface of the ball feeding unit 700 faces upward (inside the game board insertion portion 502), so that the ball feeding unit 700 can be attached and detached from above. is provided in When the ball-feeding unit 700 is attached to the ball-feeding unit mounting portion 501k, the elastic claw 709b of the ball-feeding unit 700 passes through the locking hole of the base wall portion 501b on the right side of the ball-shooting unit 550 and faces forward. Become. In this state, the elastic claw 709b is pushed backward to be elastically deformed, and the knob 709a provided on the upper surface of the ball feeding unit 700 is picked up and lifted, so that the ball feeding unit 700 can be removed upward.

The circulating ball path unit attachment portion 501l is provided at a portion above a box extension portion 504c of the main body frame speaker box 504, which will be described later, in the central portion in the left-right direction of the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b. The cylinder insertion opening 501m is provided on the right side of the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b.

The top cover 502a extends rearward beyond the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the game board insertion portion 502. - 特許庁As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper surface cover 502a is provided with two upper surface recesses 502g separated from each other in the left and right direction. are omitted. With this configuration, the upper surface cover 502a can be positioned higher by the amount of the reinforcing ribs than when a plurality of reinforcing ribs are arranged in the horizontal direction on the upper surface of the upper surface cover. 502 internal volume is secured. Furthermore, if a plurality of reinforcing ribs are provided on the upper surface of the upper surface cover, they will be left unwiped during cleaning and spoil the aesthetic appearance. It is possible to maintain the aesthetic appearance.

The upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the bottom surfaces of the two upper surface recesses 502g are inclined by about 2 degrees with respect to the horizontal plane so as to become lower toward the rear. Further, the pachinko machine 1 is usually installed so as to tilt backward, and since the angle is generally tilted backward by about 0.75 degrees, the total downward tilt is about 2.75 degrees. In addition, the width of the two upper surface recesses 502g increases toward the rear.

By making such a gentle slope, the game balls B falling from above the pachinko machine 1 flow down the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a or the upper surface recess 502g, and the island equipment provided below the pachinko machine 1 flows down. The game ball B falls on the recovery path of the game ball B and is recovered. In addition, falling objects such as metal powder and non-spherical objects such as screws stay on the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a or on the upper surface concave portion 502g. In order to obtain such an effect, it is desirable that the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a is inclined within 15 degrees from the horizontal plane.

Since the upper surface cover 502a is formed in a flat plate shape, the lower surfaces (rear surfaces) of the two upper surface recesses 502g which are recessed from above in the upper surface cover 502a protrude downward from the lower surface of the upper surface cover 502a (FIG. 24). (b)). In other words, the upper surface recess 502g is in the form of a protrusion projecting downward from the lower surface of the upper surface cover 502a. The end points of the two upper recesses 502g, that is, the front wall, are behind the abutment surface 502j.

In other words, the back side (lower side) of the top cover 502a has the back sides of the two top recesses 502g. The tips (front ends) on the back side of the two upper surface recesses 502g form an abutment surface 502j, which contacts the rear surface of the upper side of the game board 5 to position the game board 5. As shown in FIG.

Four reinforcing ribs 502i out of a plurality of reinforcing ribs 502i are provided on the back side (lower surface side) of the upper surface cover 502a, and together with the upper surface concave portion 502g, the upper surface cover 502a is reinforced. By thus providing the reinforcing ribs 502i not on the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a but on the inner lower surface, it is possible to maintain the appearance of the upper surface (outer surface) of the upper surface cover 502a.

As shown in FIG. 23, a plurality of ribs 502k are provided at the front end of the top surface of the top cover 502a. In addition, since the upper side is covered with the outer frame 2, metal powder or the like does not fall from the upper side, and the appearance is not affected.

Furthermore, although illustration is omitted, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the upper surface concave portion 502g are not provided with a gate for feeding molten resin during injection molding. This is because the unevenness caused by the gate does not prevent the game ball B from flowing down the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the upper surface recessed portion 502g.

Also, care is taken so that the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the upper surface recessed portion 502g are not left with traces of ejector pins for taking out the injection-molded body frame base 501 from the mold. Usually, the traces of the ejector pin are less likely to hinder the flow of the game ball B by properly treating the burrs, but when cleaning the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the upper surface recessed portion 502g where metal powder etc. are deposited, etc. may spoil the aesthetic appearance. Therefore, care is taken not to leave marks of the ejector pin.

The rear cover 502b of the body frame base 501 is connected to the left side cover 502c and the right side cover 502d at both left and right ends. The rear cover 502b is provided with a plurality of vertically elongated slit-shaped ventilation holes 502f arranged in a horizontal direction.

The left side cover 502c of the main body frame base 501 has the same depth in the front-rear direction as the top cover 502a. The left side cover 502c is inclined so as to move rightward as it goes rearward in a plan view. At the rear end of the left side cover 502c, two cover locking portions 502l for locking the back cover 505 are provided vertically separated from each other.

The right side cover 502d of the main body frame base 501 is inclined so as to move leftward as it goes rearward in plan view. A portion of the right side cover 502d below the rear cover 502b is notched forward from the rear end, and the rear end of this portion is located forward of the rear end of the top cover 502a. . That is, the right side cover 502d is formed to have a shorter depth than the rear cover 502b. At the rear end of the right side cover 502d below the rear cover 502b, a plurality of cover shaft supports 502m for supporting the rear cover 505 so as to be able to rotate with a hinge are provided at intervals in the vertical direction. .

The lower surface cover 502e of the main body frame base 501 extends rearward from a portion one step higher than the lower end of the game board insertion portion 502 (upper surface of the base wall portion 501b). The lower surface cover 502e is provided so as to exclude the portion above the circulation ball path unit attachment portion 501l, and the portion on the left side of the circulation ball path unit attachment portion 501l extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the left side cover 502c. A portion on the right side of the circulation ball path unit attachment portion 501l extends rearward to the same position as the rear end of the portion of the right side cover 502d formed to have a short depth. The lower surface cover 502e is inclined so as to become higher toward the rear.

The lower surface recessed portion 502h of the main body frame base 501 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the lower surface cover 502e. The lower surface recessed portion 502h is open toward the front and is formed so that the left and right widths become narrower toward the rear. The bottom surface of the lower surface recessed portion 502h is inclined so as to become higher toward the rear, similarly to the lower surface cover 502e. Since the lower surface cover 502e is formed in a flat plate shape, the lower surface (back surface) of the lower surface recessed portion 502h that is recessed from above in the lower surface cover 502e protrudes downward from the lower surface of the lower surface cover 502e (FIG. 24B). See That is, the lower surface recessed portion 502h is in the form of a convex portion protruding downward on the lower surface of the lower surface cover 502e. Reinforcing ribs 502i are provided inside the lower surface recessed portions 502h.

A plurality of reinforcing ribs 502i are provided on the lower surface of the upper surface cover 502a and the bottom surface of the lower surface recessed portion 502h. The top cover 502a is provided with four reinforcing ribs 502i, two of which extend forward from the two abutment surfaces 502j, and the remaining two extend from the two top recesses 502g. are also provided on both the left and right outer sides. Reinforcing ribs 502i provided on both left and right sides of the top recess 502g have rear ends connected to the rear cover 502b and extend forward shorter than the top recess 502g.

Of the plurality of reinforcing ribs 502i, two on both the left and right sides of the upper surface recess 502g of the upper surface cover 502a and two provided on the two lower surface recesses 502h respectively, a total of four, are designed to function as reinforcing ribs. is provided in More specifically, the body frame base 501 of this embodiment is configured so that it can be placed horizontally without rattling when placed on a workbench or the like with the front end side down. Further, the body frame base 501 is formed so that it can be stacked and stored, as shown in FIG. 24(b). At this time, the four reinforcing ribs 502i as ribs abut on the other side, so that the overlapped body frame bases 501 can be prevented from meshing with each other. As a result, it is possible to reduce the time it takes to remove the parts (body frame base 501) that are engaged with each other, and to improve the efficiency of the assembly work. In addition, since the body frame base 501 can be stacked, it is possible to increase the number of packages and reduce the size of the packaging box.

According to the main body frame base 501 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a of the main body frame base 501, which protects the game board 5 stored in the main body frame 4 from above, has a gently sloping rearward slope. Game balls B, metal powder, screws, etc. falling from above the machine 1 can be properly treated. Specifically, since the game ball B, which is spherical, can be dropped under the pachinko machine 1 by causing the upper surface of the upper cover 502a to flow down, the game ball B can be recovered as it is without causing any trouble. In addition, non-spherical metal powder, screws, etc. can be retained on the upper surface cover 502a without flowing down, so that troubles do not occur.

Further, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a is not provided with the ventilation holes 502f. This prevents metal powder, screws, etc. from entering through the ventilation holes 502f, and does not adversely affect the electrical components of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the top surface of the top cover 502a molded by the injection molding machine is not provided with a gate for injecting molten resin into the mold during molding. As a result, unevenness derived from the gate does not occur on the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a, so that the game ball B does not flow down.

Similarly, care is taken not to leave traces of ejector pins when the injection-molded body frame base 501 is removed from the mold. Usually, the marks of the ejector pins are less likely to hinder the flow of the game ball B by properly treating the burrs, but when cleaning the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a where metal powder etc. are deposited, the ejector pin marks It may leave marks and spoil the aesthetic appearance. Therefore, by not leaving marks of the ejector pin, it is possible to easily restore the aesthetic appearance by cleaning.

Also, the top cover 502a is molded integrally with the main body frame base 501. As shown in FIG. By molding in this way, it is possible to save the number of assembly man-hours and improve the strength of the entire main body frame base unit 500 (game board accommodation frame).

The upper surface cover 502a not only protects the game board 5 housed inside on its upper surface, but also has a positioning portion (abutment surface 502j) for positioning the game board 5 in contact with the game board 5 inside. ing. As a result, the positional relationship between the game board 5 and the top cover 502a is fixed, and the purpose of the game board housing frame (body frame 4) to protect the game board 5 can be achieved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 18 and the like, ribs for reinforcement are not provided on the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a, so that the ribs do not make cleaning difficult and maintenance is easy. Other members (for example, the frame 501a, the outer frame 2, etc.) may be provided to cover the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a, and ribs may be provided in areas where foreign matter does not fall.

The side reinforcing plate 509 is formed in a U-shape that is open to the right in a plan view, and is attached so as to replace the open left side of the frame 501a in the main body frame base 501. ing. The side reinforcing plate 509 is made of extruded metal such as aluminum alloy. The side reinforcing plate 509 is provided with two left position regulating members 509a separated vertically. The left position regulating member 509a is for positioning the left side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG.

The main body frame speaker 503 is attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b so as to close the main body frame speaker port 501d of the main body frame base 501 from behind. The body frame speaker 503 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs low sounds.

The main body frame speaker box 504 is formed in a box shape that is open forward, and is attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b so as to cover the main body frame speaker 503 from the rear. The body-frame speaker box 504 forms an enclosure 504a for the body-frame speaker 503 by being attached to the base wall portion 501b.

The body-frame speaker box 504 includes a box body portion 504b located behind the body-frame speaker 503, a box extension portion 504c connected to the lower end of the box body portion 504b and extending rightward in front view, and a box body portion 504b. and a frame substrate unit shaft support portion 504d provided on the rear surface of the main body portion 504b. The box extended portion 504c of the main body frame speaker box 504 extends rightward to the vicinity of the right end of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover the rear of the bass reflex duct 501e, and a part of it extends further rearward than the box main body portion 504b. procrastinating.

The enclosure 504a is composed of a box body 504b and a box extension 504c, and communicates with the outside through a bass reflex duct 501e. In other words, the bass reflex duct 501e, the main body frame speaker 503, and the main body frame speaker box 504 constitute a phase-reversed bass reflex speaker.

Specifically, the body frame speaker 503 outputs a predetermined sound forward and backward. The sound output forward from the body frame speaker 503 is emitted forward of the pachinko machine 1 through the body frame speaker port 501 d and the speaker grill 203 .

On the other hand, the sound output from the body-frame speaker 503 to the rear vibrates the air inside the body-frame speaker box 504 (enclosure 504a). Since the enclosure 504a is opened forward (outside) by the cylindrical bass reflex duct 501e, it is discharged forward from the bass reflex duct 501e. At this time, since the bass reflex duct 501e is formed in a cylindrical shape with a predetermined length, the low frequency range is amplified by the resonance caused by the air column vibration inside it, and is emitted forward with the phase inverted. be.

As a result, the sound output forward from the main body frame speaker 503 and the sound output backward do not act to cancel each other out and attenuate each other, but act to resonate and amplify each other. Therefore, even if the main body frame speaker 503 has a small diameter, it is possible to output a loud sound with deep bass, and the player can hear a sound with rich bass.

The box extension portion 504c of the main body frame speaker box 504 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is longer than the height in the vertical direction, and the rear end is provided so as to protrude slightly rearward from the rear end of the frame substrate unit 730. (see Figure 20). The box extension part 504c covers the bottom of the frame board unit 730 so that a gap is formed between it and the frame board unit 730 (the unit base 770 and the power supply board box 772) when assembled to the main body frame 4. there is As a result, the box extension portion 504c makes it difficult for various wirings connected to the frame substrate unit 730 to hang down.

As shown in FIG. 20, the box extension part 504c is inclined so that the upper surface becomes lower toward the rear. As a result, garbage, game balls B, etc. falling from above can be guided backward and discharged. In addition, the box extension portion 504c is inclined so that the lower surface becomes higher toward the rear. As a result, when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 , the box expansion portion 504 c does not come into contact with the lower frame body 14 of the body frame 4 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 20, the box extension portion 504c is inclined so that the lower surface thereof becomes higher toward the rear. Thus, when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame 4 can be guided into the outer frame 2 by the lower surface of the box extension portion 504c even if the body frame 4 is tilted.

The main body frame speaker box 504 is supported so as to hang down the rear end side of the tray insertion recess 501f in the main body frame base 501 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4 . As a result, the game balls B discharged from the circulation ball path unit 600 are received by the ball receiving tray 720, and a load (the weight of the plurality of game balls B) is applied to the tray insertion recess 501f via the ball receiving tray 720 from above. ) does not deform the tray insertion recess 501f.

Further, the body-frame speaker box 504 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the body-frame speaker 503 can be confirmed from the outside.

The back cover 505 is provided so as to be openable and closable with respect to the body frame base 501 so as to cover the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame 4 when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The back cover 505 is formed in an L shape in a plan view such that the right side of the flat plate is bent forward. The back cover 505 has two locking claws 505a vertically spaced apart at the left end, and a plurality of shafts 505b vertically aligned at the right end. The locking claw 505a is detachably locked to the cover locking portion 502l of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG. The shaft portion 505b is supported by the cover shaft support portion 502m of the body frame base 501 . As a result, the back cover 505 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed. The rear cover 505 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes, allowing heat from the game board 5 to escape to the outside. The back cover 505 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

After closing the frame substrate unit 730 to be described later with respect to the main body frame base unit 500, the rear cover 505 is closed to the main body frame base unit 500 (main body frame base 501). It is formed so as to prevent it from interfering (abutting) with the unit 730 and being closed. The back cover 505 opens the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state where the back cover 505 is opened with respect to the body frame base 501. Then, it is formed so as to prevent it from interfering (abutting) with the outer frame 2 and being closed.

The game board lock member 506 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base 501 (base wall portion 501b) so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 506 can prevent the lower end of the game board 5 from moving forward by rotating it to the lock position with the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion portion 502 .

The door open switch 507 is for detecting opening and closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 . The door open switch 507 is attached to the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 below the cylinder insertion opening 501m.

A frame open switch 508 is for detecting opening and closing of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 . The frame open switch 508 is attached below the door open switch 507 on the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 .

The body frame hinge mechanism 510 has a body frame upper hinge body 511 attached to the upper left side of the body frame base 501 and a body frame lower hinge body 512 attached to the left side lower end of the body frame base 501 .

The main body frame hinge body 511 is provided adjacent to the main body frame hinge shaft 511a, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape and is inserted into the bearing groove 31a of the outer frame hinge body 31 of the outer frame 2. A door frame upper shaft hole 511b into which the door frame upper hinge shaft 111a of the door frame upper hinge body 111 in the door frame 3 is inserted from below is provided. The main frame upper hinge body 511 has a flat plate-shaped portion extending horizontally and a portion extending downward from the rear end of the horizontally extending portion. A horizontally extending portion of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 is provided with a main body frame hinge shaft 511a and a door frame upper shaft hole 511b. In addition, the body frame upper hinge body 511 is attached to the body frame base 501 at a portion extending downward.

The main body frame lower hinge body 512 includes an outer frame shaft hole (not shown) into which the hinge shaft 35a of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below, and the door frame lower hinge body 112 of the door frame 3. and a door frame lower shaft hole 512b into which the door frame lower hinge shaft 112a is inserted from above. The main body frame lower hinge body 512 has a flat plate-shaped portion extending horizontally and a portion extending upward from the rear end of the horizontally extending portion. A horizontally extending portion of the main body frame lower hinge body 512 is provided with an outer frame shaft hole and a door frame lower shaft hole 512b. In addition, the body frame lower hinge body 512 is attached to the body frame base 501 at a portion extending downward. Further, the portion of the main frame lower hinge body 512 extending downward contacts the rear wall portion 45 c of the curtain plate 45 when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 . As a result, the body frame 4 does not hinge backward any more.

The main body frame hinge mechanism 510 inserts the main body frame hinge shaft 511a of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 into the bearing groove 31a of the outer frame upper hinge body 31 of the outer frame 2, and inserts the body frame hinge shaft 511a of the main body frame lower hinge body 512 into the bearing groove 31a. By inserting the hinge shaft 35a of the outer frame lower hinge body 35 in the outer frame 2 into the hole, the main body frame 4 is supported to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable.

Further, the main body frame hinge mechanism 510 inserts the door frame upper hinge shaft 111a of the door frame upper hinge body 111 of the door frame 3 into the door frame upper shaft hole 511b of the main body frame upper hinge body 511 from below. The door frame 3 can be opened and closed with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge shaft 112a of the door frame lower hinge body 112 of the door frame 3 from above into the door frame lower shaft hole 512b of the lower hinge body 512. supported by

[4-2. Ball launch unit]
The ball shooting unit 550 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 25 to 28 and the like. FIG. 25(a) is a front perspective view of the ball shooting unit in the body frame, and FIG. 25(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball shooting unit in the body frame. FIG. 26(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball shooting unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 26(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball shooting unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 27(a) is a perspective view of the firing unit cover of the ball firing unit as seen from the rear left, and FIG. 27(b) is an explanatory view of the ball firing unit showing a cross section of only the firing unit cover when viewed from the front. Figure 28 is a front view of the ball firing unit showing the firing subtraction sensor and firing mallet in dashed lines;

The ball shooting unit 550 is for shooting the game balls B to the game area 5a of the game board 5, and includes a ball inlet 550a for receiving the game balls B sent from the ball sending unit 700 and a game ball B that has been shot. It has a ball discharge port 550b for discharging the game balls B to the outside and a ball discharge port 550c for discharging the game balls B. The ball shooting unit 550 can hit the game ball B with a force corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 . The ball shooting unit 550 is attached to the ball shooting unit attachment part 501i provided below the opaque eaves part 501p on the upper part of the front surface of the base wall part 501b of the main body frame base 501 on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction. be done.

A ball entrance 550a of the ball launching unit 550 is provided on the rear surface, and has a rectangular opening with a size through which one game ball B can pass. This ball inlet 550a is located in front of the ball delivery port 702 of the ball feeding unit 700 in a state assembled to the body frame 4, and communicates with the ball delivery port 702. As shown in FIG. The ball launch port 550b is opened obliquely at the left end of the upper surface so that the left end side is lower. This ball launching port 550b communicates with the top of the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570 in a state assembled to the body frame 4 . The ball outlet 550c is open on the left side. The ball discharge port 550c communicates with the lower part of the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570 when assembled to the main body frame 4 .

The ball launching unit 550 includes a flat plate-shaped unit base 551, a launching unit cover 552 attached to cover the front side of the unit base 551, and a unit so that a rotating shaft 553a protrudes forward from the unit base 551. A firing solenoid 553 attached to the rear side of the base 551, a firing subtraction sensor 554 capable of detecting the presence or absence of firing of the game ball B, a firing mallet 555 attached to the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553, and firing. A nut 556 that attaches the mallet 555 to the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553, an annular spacer 557 that is inserted into the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553, and two contact rubbers 558 that can contact the firing mallet 555. , is equipped with

A unit base 551 of the ball shooting unit 550 is made of a metal plate such as an iron plate. A ball inlet 550a is provided in the unit base 551, and penetrates squarely from the center to the upper part in a front view.

The firing unit cover 552 is formed by injection molding using transparent synthetic resin. The firing unit cover 552 includes a flat plate-shaped front plate 552a that is spaced forward from the unit base 551, and a portion that is directly below the ball inlet 550a of the unit base 551 on the rear side of the front plate 552a. It has a ball launch pad 552b inclined so that the left end side of the cage is higher, and a detection port 552c vertically penetrating the ball launch pad 552b.

In addition, the launching unit cover 552 forms a gap between the ball launching pad 552b on the rear side of the front plate 552a and the upper right of the ball launching pad 552b in the front view, through which the game ball B cannot pass. 552d, and a sensor lower mounting portion 552e and a sensor upper mounting portion 552f provided so as to sandwich the ball launch pad 552b and the launch pad upper wall portion 552d on the rear side of the front plate 552a.

Furthermore, the shooting unit cover 552 includes a barrier part 552g provided in the shooting direction of the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b, the upper end of which constitutes the lower end of the ball launching port 550b, and the ball on the rear side of the front plate 552a. A discharge guide wall portion 552h extending downward from the left end of the launch pad 552b and then extending downward to the left, and a space between the upper side of the lower sensor mounting portion 552e and the right side of the lower sensor mounting portion 552e. A window portion 552i penetrating back and forth at a site, a wiring groove 552j recessed in the front surface of the front plate 552a and extending from the lower left to the upper right, and the bottom surface of the wiring groove 552j from the front end of the wiring groove 552j. and a plurality of wire locking portions 552k protruding in parallel.

A game ball B supplied through the ball inlet 550a is placed on the ball launch pad 552b. The top surface of the ball launch pad 552b is inclined so that the left end is higher in a front view. The ball launch pad 552b is recessed in a constant cross-sectional shape (trapezoidal shape) so as to narrow downward along the direction in which the upper surface is inclined. The length of the ball launching pad 552b in the direction of inclination (shooting direction) is almost the same as the diameter of the game ball B, and only one game ball B is placed so as to be in contact with the two trapezoidal recessed slopes. is formed to be In this embodiment, ball launch pad 552b is angled at an angle of about 27 degrees with respect to horizontal.

The detection port 552c is provided at the bottom of the trapezoidally recessed portion of the ball launch pad 552b. The launch pad upper wall portion 552d is provided above the inclined lower end side of the ball launch pad 552b. The launch pad upper wall portion 552d is provided so as to form a gap with the ball launch pad 552b through which the game ball B cannot pass and the tip of the launch mallet 555 can pass. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the ball launch pad 552b abuts against the left end of the upper wall portion 552d of the launch pad and is restricted from moving downstream (here, rightward) in the tilt direction of the ball launch pad 552b. It is placed on the ball launch pad 552b in a state of being folded.

When the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the center of the game ball B is located slightly to the right of the center of the ball entrance 550a. Also, the length of the ball launch pad 552b is the length on which only one game ball B can be placed. As a result, while the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the game ball B that has been launched returns, or the game ball B is thrown from the ball feeding unit 700, and another game ball Even if B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b, it is repelled by the game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b, and does not land on the ball launch pad 552b and moves toward the discharge guide wall portion 552h (foul unit 570 side). It is ejected and detected by the foul ball sensor 607 . Therefore, even if the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b and the game ball B is returned or supplied from the ball feeding unit 700, the game ball B is sent to the foul unit 570. Since the game ball B sent is added to the held ball as a foul ball, an error from the actual number of the game ball B shot can be eliminated.

A light-emitting portion 554a and a light-receiving portion 554b, which constitute an emission subtraction sensor 554, are attached to the lower sensor attachment portion 552e and the upper sensor attachment portion 552f, respectively. Since the emission subtraction sensor 554 (here, the light emitting portion 554a) is attached facing upward in the lower sensor mounting portion 552e, there is a risk of false detection if dirt or dust adheres to the upper surface of the light emitting portion 554a. Since the is attached obliquely, it is difficult for dust and the like to accumulate.

The barrier part 552g is provided below the trajectory of the game ball B launched from the ball launch pad 552b at a portion away from the ball launch pad 552b to the left longer than the diameter of the game ball B. The barrier portion 552g is capable of contacting a game ball B with a weak hitting strength, and the game ball B that has hit the barrier portion 552g passes between the barrier portion 552g and the ball launch pad 552b and is discharged downward into the discharge guide wall portion 552h. It will flow upwards and will not return to the ball launch pad 552b. Further, since the barrier portion 552g extends vertically, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from entering from the foul unit 570 side.

The discharge guide wall portion 552h forms a ball discharge port 550c with the barrier portion 552g. The discharge guide wall portion 552h is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and guides the game ball B that has flowed down through the space between the ball launch pad 552b and the barrier portion 552g to the left, and the ball discharge at the left end. It can be discharged from the exit 550c to the foul unit 570 side. As a result, the game ball B, which was hit by the launching mallet 555 on the ball launch pad 552b but was not launched from the ball launch port 550b, is guided by the ejection guide wall portion 552h and fouled from the ball ejection port 550c. It is discharged to unit 570 .

The window portion 552i is provided at a portion between the ball launch pad 552b and the lower sensor mounting portion 552e and at a portion in front of the tip of the launching mallet 555 at the retracted position away from the hitting position. Since the emission subtraction sensor 554 (here, the light emitting portion 554a) is attached to the lower sensor mounting portion 552e facing upward, dirt and dust tend to accumulate on the upper surface of the light emitting portion 554a. Although there is a risk of detection, the upper surface of the light emitting part 554a can be easily cleaned by inserting a cleaning tool such as a cotton swab through the window part 552i between the ball launch pad 552b and the lower sensor mounting part 552e. can be done.

In addition, since the tip of the shooting mallet 555 contacts the game ball B, if dust or the like adheres to the tip of the shooting mallet 555, it may not be possible to shoot the game ball B satisfactorily. As shown in FIG. 28, since a window 552i is provided in front of the tip of the firing mallet 555 at the standby position, the tip of the firing mallet 555 can be easily removed by inserting a cleaning tool such as a cotton swab through the window 552i. can be cleaned to

The firing solenoid 553 is composed of a rotary solenoid having a rotating shaft 553a extending back and forth. Although the details will be described later, the firing solenoid 553 performs a series of hardware operations based on a predetermined firing sequence in association with the ball feed solenoid 706, which will be described later.

The launch subtraction sensor 554 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b. The firing subtraction sensor 554 includes a light emitting portion 554a that emits detection light and a light receiving portion 554b that receives the detection light. and can be mounted on. The detection light emitted from the light-emitting portion 554a passes through a detection port 552c provided at the bottom of the ball launch pad 552b and is received by the light-receiving portion 554b. At this time, if the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the detection light is blocked by the game ball B, and the detection light is not received by the light receiving portion 554b. Thereby, the presence or absence of the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b can be detected.

The launch subtraction sensor 554, which will be described later in detail, detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b, and subtracts one from the number of balls possessed by the player.

In this embodiment, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted based on the OFF determination of the launch subtraction sensor 554. One-to-one reliability is required for launch. By the way, in the normal passing determination for the game ball B, the light from the light emitting part in the light receiving part is detected at predetermined time intervals (for example, the interrupt period is 4 ms), detected, detected (so-called "011"). is switched from OFF to ON (from non-existence of game ball B to presence). There is concern about false detections other than the launch ball due to the tip of the.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, focusing on the fact that the game ball B is stationary on the ball launch pad 552b, it is first determined whether or not there is a game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b. When B runs out, it is determined that the shot has been fired. That is, ON (there is a game ball) is determined, and then OFF (there is no game ball = shooting). Specifically, a threshold for recognizing ON and OFF (for example, an ON threshold of 80 ms and an OFF threshold of 80 ms) is provided, and when the ON threshold is exceeded, it is first determined that "game balls are present", and then OFF. exceeds the threshold value, it is recognized that the game ball B has been shot ("no game ball"), and the number of possessed balls is subtracted. As a result, chattering of the game ball and malfunction due to noise can be prevented. It should be noted that the above threshold is desirably an integer multiple of the interrupt period (eg, 4 ms).

The shooting mallet 555 is for hitting and shooting the game ball B. The firing mallet 555 is attached to the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553 and rotates (pivots) together with the rotating shaft 553a. The tip of the launching mallet 555 passes between the ball launching platform 552b and the launching platform upper wall portion 552d, and is provided so as to be able to abut against the game ball B placed on the ball launching platform 552b.

By the way, in the mass production of the ball shooting unit 550, in order to secure the shooting accuracy of the game ball B, the insertion angle of the tip of the shooting mallet 555, the mounting angle of the ball launching pad 552b (shooting rail), and the ball shooting unit 550 It was necessary to adjust the position of the tip of the launching mallet 555 after assembly, etc. with severe values, and the difficulty of mass production was high. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the method of determining the firing accuracy is based on the hit of the game ball B to the conventional firing rail and the shape of the firing rail, and only the contact between the firing mallet 555 and the game ball B is determined. changed to guarantee In this change, the accuracy of the tip of the firing mallet 555 is more important than the accuracy of the tip of the firing mallet 555 alone. contact area is made larger than before. As a result, it is possible to secure the stability of the shooting accuracy, allow some assembly error, and mass-produce the ball shooting unit 550 .

The nut 556 is screwed onto the rotating shaft 553 a of the firing solenoid 553 . The spacer 557 is into which the rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553 is inserted. The rotating shaft 553a of the firing solenoid 553 is inserted through the spacer 557 and the firing mallet 555 in this order from the rear, and the firing mallet 555 is attached by screwing a nut 556 onto the tip protruding forward from the firing mallet 555 and tightening it. be done.

The rubber 558 is attached to the unit base 551 so as to restrict the range of rotation of the firing mallet 555 .

According to the ball launching unit 550 of this embodiment, only one game ball B is placed on the ball launching platform 552b, and the game ball B is launched from the ball launching platform 552b by the launch subtraction sensor 554. Since it is designed to detect that the game ball B is shot, it is possible to reliably detect the shooting of the game balls B one by one.

Further, according to the ball shooting unit 550, since the shooting unit cover 552 is made of transparent synthetic resin, the inside of the ball shooting unit 550 can be checked from the front by opening the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4. can do. Since the firing unit cover 552 is transparent, there is a risk that light will enter the interior and cause an erroneous detection in the firing subtraction sensor 554 consisting of a photo sensor. In this state, light from the front is blocked by the door frame 3, light from the rear is blocked by the unit base 551 made of a metal plate, and light from above is blocked by the eaves 501p of the body frame base 501, which is black and opaque. Since it is shielded, light does not enter the interior, and erroneous detection due to light in the emission subtraction sensor 554 is prevented.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 (circulating game machine) disclosed in the present embodiment is designed to subtract the number of held balls for the first time after completion of shooting. For this reason, compared to the method of subtracting the ball with the ball feed as a trigger before launching, which was adopted in the conventional circulation type game machine, when the game is settled, the game ball B left on the launching rail without being fired. (Possessed ball subtracted) is automatically blank-hit to be a foul ball to be returned to the player, and there is no need to add the held ball to make sense, and quick settlement processing can be performed.

Furthermore, according to the ball launching unit 550, since the launch subtraction sensor 554 is attached obliquely, it is possible to make it difficult for dirt, dust, etc., to get on the detection surface of the launch subtraction sensor 554. Even if dust adheres, the detection surface can be easily cleaned by inserting a cleaning tool such as a cotton swab from the window 552i of the firing unit cover 552, and erroneous detection (malfunction) due to adhesion of dust or the like can be easily prevented. can be resolved.

In addition, according to the ball shooting unit 550, since the window 552i is also provided at the site where the tip of the firing mallet 555 can be cleaned, by inserting a cleaning tool through the window 552i of that site, the firing mallet 555 The tip of the ball B can be easily cleaned, and unevenness in the shooting of the game ball B due to adhesion of dust or the like can be eliminated.

[4-2a. Ball launching unit of the second embodiment]
A ball launching unit according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 29(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball shooting unit of the second embodiment and viewed from the front, and FIG. 29(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball shooting unit of the second embodiment and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. FIG. 30(a) is a perspective view of the firing unit cover of the ball firing unit of the second embodiment as seen from the rear left, and FIG. 30(b) is a front view of the second embodiment showing only the firing unit cover in cross section. It is explanatory drawing of a discharge unit.

The difference from the ball launching unit of the first embodiment is that the ball launching unit 550A of the second embodiment does not have the launch subtraction sensor 554 that was in the ball launching unit 550 of the first embodiment. Conversely, the length of the ball launch pad 552b (shooting rail) allows only one game ball B to be placed, and the length and inclination of the launch rail make it impossible to place two game balls B. It is the same.

As a substitute for the launch subtraction sensor 554 in the ball launching unit 550 of the first embodiment, a ball delivery port sensor 711 is added as the ball feeding unit of the second embodiment.

[4-3. foul unit]
The foul unit 570 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. FIG. 31(a) is a front perspective view of the foul unit in the body frame, and FIG. 31(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul unit in the body frame. FIG. 32(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 32(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 33(a) is a side sectional view of the foul unit with the foul shutter closed, and FIG. 33(b) is a side sectional view of the foul unit with the foul shutter open.

The foul unit 570 is a game ball B and the ball shooting unit 550 which were shot by the ball shooting unit 550 and struck between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 but were not shot into the game area 5a. This is for recovering game balls B, etc., which have been shot but have not reached the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) due to too weak firing intensity. The foul unit 570 communicates with the foul upper opening 570a that opens on the upper surface, the foul right opening 570b that opens on the right side, and the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b. and a foul ball outlet 570c opening rearwardly.

The foul unit 570 is attached to a foul unit attachment portion 501h provided in the middle portion in the left-right direction of the front upper portion of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 . When the foul unit 570 is assembled to the body frame 4, the upper end of the foul unit 570 is approximately the same height as the upper end of the base wall portion 501b. is closed by That is, in the state assembled to the body frame 4, the foul right opening 570b communicates with the ball launch port 550b and the ball discharge port 550c. The upper foul opening 570a and the right foul opening 570b are formed by a unit base 572 and a front cover 573, which will be described later.

The foul unit 570 includes a foul shutter 571 capable of opening and closing the upper foul opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through, a unit base 572 attached to the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a unit base 572 attached to the front side of the unit base 572. The attached front cover 573, the rear cover 574 attached to the rear side of the unit base 572 so as to cover the rear part of the foul shutter 571, and the spring 575 biasing the foul shutter 571 forward. I have.

The foul shutter 571 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the unit base 572 and the front cover 573 working together. The foul shutter 571 includes a strip-shaped shutter portion 571a that is elongated in the left and right direction, two forward projecting portions 571b projecting forward from both the left and right ends of the shutter portion 571a, and downward extensions from the rear end sides of the shutter portion 571a. and a protruding flat plate-like rear wall portion 571c.

The foul shutter 571 can close the foul upper opening 570a by the shutter part 571a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. The two forward protrusions 571b are provided so that the front ends thereof protrude further forward than the front cover 573, and are provided so that the rear surface of the door frame main body 100 of the door frame 3 can come into contact therewith. The front end of the spring 575 contacts the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571c.

The unit base 572 is formed in an L shape that is long in the left-right direction and has a portion that extends downward near the right end. The unit base 572 has a shutter housing portion 572a extending left and right along the upper side and recessed rearward, and a right end extending downward under the shutter housing portion 572a. A ball guiding portion 572b recessed toward the rear, a tubular portion 572c extending rearward in a square tube shape from the lower end of the ball guiding portion 572b, and a flat plate extending forward from the lower end of the ball guiding portion 572b. and a receiving portion 572d.

A shutter accommodating portion 572a of the unit base 572 accommodates the foul shutter 571 and the spring 575 from the front. The portion of the unit base 572 extending to the left and right of the ball guiding portion 572b is inclined downward to the right. A cylindrical portion 572c of the unit base 572 is inclined to be lowered rearward, and an opening at the rear end is a foul ball outlet 570c.

The receiving portion 572d of the unit base 572 is inclined so that the rear end side is lowered. The right edge of the receiving portion 572d constitutes the lower edge of the foul right opening 570b. The right edge of the receiving portion 572d constitutes the lower edge of the foul right opening 570b, and the lower portion including the lower end of the foul right opening 570b communicates with the ball outlet 550c of the ball launching unit 550. The game ball B, which falls from the ball launch pad 552b and is discharged from the ball discharge port 550c and passed through the foul right opening 570b, flows down onto the receiving portion 572d and is guided backward by the receiving portion 572d. , through the cylindrical portion 572c and discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c. In addition, when the foul shutter 571 is closed, the game ball B that is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 and hits the rear surface (lower surface) of the foul shutter 571 through the foul right opening 570b is pushed to the lower wall of the front cover 573. The ball is sent to the rear ball guiding portion 572b by the portion 573c, passes behind the receiving portion 572d, and is discharged from the foul ball outlet 570c via the cylindrical portion 572c.

In addition, the unit base 572 has a notch portion 572e recessed from the front near the right end of the bottom wall of the portion of the ball guiding portion 572b extending left and right. The notch portion 572e is formed in a size that does not hinder the circulation of the game ball B, and can downwardly discharge dust or the like that has entered the ball guide portion 572b from the upper foul opening portion 570a.

The front cover 573 has an L-shaped flat plate front plate 573a that is long in the left-right direction and has a portion that extends downward near the right end, and a left wall portion 573b that extends rearward from the left edge of the front plate 573a. , a lower wall portion 573c extending rearward from the lower end of the left wall portion 573b along the lower edge of the front plate 573a, and a lower wall portion 573c extending rearward from the right end of the lower wall portion 573c downwardly of the front plate 573a. A hanging wall portion 573d extending downward along the left edge of the extending portion and extending rearward, and a right wall portion 573f extending rearward from the upper right end of the front plate 573a. I have.

The upper edge and the right edge of the front plate 573a form the front edges of the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b. The right edge of the upper end of the left wall portion 573b constitutes the left edge of the upper opening 570a, and the left edge of the upper end of the right wall portion 573f constitutes the right edge of the upper opening 570a. The lower edge of the right wall portion 573f constitutes the upper edge of the foul right opening 570b.

The front cover 573 has a lower wall portion 573c positioned below the foul upper opening 570a. A lower wall portion 573c of the front cover 573 is gently slanted to the left and slanted to the rear. As a result, the impact of the game ball B dropped from above as a foul ball is not directly received, and the impact is released while the game ball B is delivered to the ball guide portion 572b of the unit base 572 provided behind. be able to. Then, the game ball B delivered to the ball guiding portion 572b passes through the cylindrical portion 572c from the lower end of the right end of the ball guiding portion 572b and is discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c.

Two springs 575 are provided with a space in the left and right, and are arranged inside a box-shaped shutter accommodating portion 572 a in the unit base 572 . The spring 575 has a front end in contact with the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571c of the foul shutter 571 and a rear end in contact with the front surface of the rear wall of the shutter accommodating portion 572a. A spring 575 biases the foul shutter 571 forward.

The foul unit 570 is attached to a foul unit attachment portion 501h provided near the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the base wall portion 501b of the body frame 4 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this state, the ball launching unit 550 is mounted adjacent to the right side of the foul unit 570 .

As shown in FIG. 21, the foul upper opening 570a of the foul unit 570 is located near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b and is located on the axis of the ball shooting unit 550 in the shooting direction of the game ball B. are doing. In other words, the upper foul opening 570a is provided at a portion between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and the ball launching port 550b of the ball launching unit 550. .

On the other hand, the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570 communicates with the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550 at its upper portion and with the ball discharge port 550c of the ball launch unit 550 at its lower portion. Therefore, a foul top opening 570a and a foul right opening are provided between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and the ball launching port 550b of the ball launching unit 550. 570b are provided. As a result, the game ball B launched from the ball launching port 550b of the ball launching unit 550 enters the foul unit 570 through the foul right opening 570b, passes through the foul upper opening 570a, and exits the game board 5. It will enter between the rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 .

In the foul unit 570 of this embodiment, when the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the body frame 4, as shown in FIG. A shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 protrudes between the front surface of the unit base 572 and the front plate 573a of the front cover 573 to close the upper foul opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. That is, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position. In this state, the stepped portion of the foul shutter 571 provided at the rear end of the forward projecting portion 571b is in contact with the front cover 573 and does not slide forward any further.

When the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 while the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position, the shot game ball B enters the foul unit 570 through the foul right opening 570b and then hits the foul shutter. 571, and flows down inside the foul unit 570 without being shot upward through the foul upper opening 570a. The game ball B flowing down inside the foul unit 570 is guided by the lower wall portion 573c, the ball guiding portion 572b, the cylindrical portion 572c, etc., and supplied to the circulation ball path unit 600 from the foul ball outlet 570c on the rear side. As a result, even if the game ball B is shot while the door frame 3 is open, the game ball B will not leak outside from the foul unit 570.例文帳に追加

When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the door open switch 507 is turned off. Therefore, when the door open switch 507 is turned off, the shooting of the game ball B from the ball shooting unit 550 may be stopped. . Alternatively, when the door frame 3 is opened, the game may be temporarily stopped by the main control board 1310 instead of stopping the shooting of the game ball B, and when the door frame 3 is closed, the game may be resumed.

Further, when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 (the frame opening switch 508 is OFF), the door frame 3 is closed and the game ball B does not leak outside. It is also possible not to stop the shooting of the game ball B. Alternatively, when the body frame 4 is opened, the same process as when the door frame 3 is opened may be performed.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 abuts against the front ends of the two forward projecting portions 571b of the foul shutter 571, and the foul shutter 571 is closed against the biasing force of the spring 575. slides backward (see FIG. 36(b)). In this state, the shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 is located behind the front surface of the unit base 572, and the upper foul opening portion 570a is opened so that the game ball B can pass therethrough. That is, the false shutter 571 is in the open position.

When the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 while the foul shutter 571 is in the open position, the shot game ball B enters the foul unit 570 through the foul right opening 570b, and then hits the foul. Through the opening 570a, it is launched upward toward the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Then, when the launched game ball B crosses over the backflow prevention member 1007 provided at the upper end of the inner rail 1002, the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that the game ball B that was shot from the ball shooting unit 550 but did not go over the backflow prevention member 1007 at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B that was not hit into the game area) is separated from the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 , enters through the upper foul opening 570 a as a foul ball, and is collected by the foul unit 570 . The game ball B collected through the upper foul opening 570a is guided by the lower wall portion 573c, the ball guide portion 572b, the cylindrical portion 572c, etc., and is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 from the foul ball outlet 570c on the rear side. Discharged (supplied).

Also, in the foul unit 570, the game ball B ejected from the ball ejection port 550c of the ball ejection unit 550 is received at the lower part of the foul right opening 570b. A game ball B that has entered the foul unit 570 from the bottom of the foul right opening 570b flows down onto the receiving portion 572d, is guided backward by the inclination of the receiving portion 572d, and travels from the foul ball exit 570c to the circulation ball path unit 600. Ejected.

In this way, according to the foul unit 570, the game balls B that have not been hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 despite being shot from the ball shooting unit 550 are collected without leaking to the outside, and the circulating balls are collected. It can be fed to routing unit 600 . In the circulating ball path unit 600, the game ball B supplied from the foul ball outlet 570c is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, details of which will be described later. When the game ball B is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, the number of balls possessed by the player is increased by one.

Further, in the foul unit 570, the unit base 572, the front cover 573, and the like are made of a transparent synthetic resin, so that the inside can be seen from the outside, making it easy to find ball clogging inside.

[4-3a. Foul unit of the second embodiment]
Next, the foul unit 570A of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 36. FIG. FIG. 34(a) is a front perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment, and FIG. 34(b) is a rear perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment. FIG. 35(a) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the front, and FIG. 35(b) is an exploded perspective view of the foul unit of the second embodiment as seen from the rear. be. FIG. 36(a) is an explanatory view showing a closed state of the foul shutter in the side cross section of the foul unit of the second embodiment, and FIG. 36(b) is a side cross section of the foul unit of the second embodiment with the foul shutter open. It is an explanatory view showing a state.

The foul unit 570A is a game ball B and the ball shooting unit 550 which were shot by the ball shooting unit 550 and struck between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 but were not shot into the game area 5a. This is for recovering game balls B, etc., which have been shot but have not reached the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) due to too weak firing strength. The foul unit 570A communicates with the foul upper opening 570a that opens on the upper surface, the foul right opening 570b that opens on the right side, and the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b. and a foul ball outlet 570c opening rearwardly.

The foul unit 570A is attached to a foul unit attachment portion 501h provided in the middle portion in the left-right direction of the front upper portion of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. As shown in FIG. When the foul unit 570A is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end of the foul unit 570A is approximately the same height as the upper end of the base wall portion 501b. is closed by That is, in the state assembled to the body frame 4, the foul right opening 570b communicates with the ball launch port 550b and the ball discharge port 550c. The upper foul opening 570a and the right foul opening 570b are formed by a unit base 572 and a front cover 573, which will be described later.

The foul unit 570A includes a foul shutter 571 capable of opening and closing the upper foul opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through, a unit base 572 attached to the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501, and A front cover 573 attached, a rear cover 574 attached to the rear side of the unit base 572 so as to cover the rear portion of the foul shutter 571, a spring 575 biasing the foul shutter 571 forward, and the unit and a foul ball ground sheet metal 576 provided between the base 572 and the front cover 573 .

The foul shutter 571 is slidably supported in the front-rear direction by the unit base 572 and the front cover 573 working together. The foul shutter 571 includes a strip-shaped shutter portion 571a that is elongated in the left and right direction, two forward projecting portions 571b projecting forward from both the left and right ends of the shutter portion 571a, and downward extensions from the rear end sides of the shutter portion 571a. and a protruding flat plate-like rear wall portion 571c.

The foul shutter 571 can close the foul upper opening 570a by the shutter part 571a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. The two forward protrusions 571b are provided so that the front ends thereof protrude further forward than the front cover 573, and are provided so that the rear surface of the door frame main body 100 of the door frame 3 can come into contact therewith. The front end of the spring 575 contacts the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571c.

The unit base 572 includes a flat T-shaped main body portion 572f that is long in the left and right direction and has a portion that extends downward near the right end, and a main body portion 572f that penetrates in the front-rear direction near the upper end of the main body portion 572f and extends in the left and right directions. and a plurality of rear support openings 572h provided along the lower edge on the left side of the downwardly extending portion of the body portion 572f and penetrating in the front-rear direction. ing.

The unit base 572 is provided with a foul ball outlet 570c penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending rearward in the shape of a rectangular tube near the lower end of the downwardly extending portion of the main body portion 572f. The tubular foul ball outlet 570c is slanted downwards to the rear.

The body portion 572f is inclined such that the lower edge of the portion on the left side of the portion extending downward is lower rightward. The shutter insertion opening 572g is provided in such a size that the shutter portion 571a and the front projecting portion 571b of the foul shutter 571 can be inserted. The plurality of rear support openings 572h are provided long in the left and right so as to be lower rightward, and are arranged in rows along the inclined lower edge of the main body portion 572f. The rear support opening 572h is provided so that the support piece 576a of the foul ball ground sheet metal 576 is inserted with a gap therebetween.

The front cover 573 has a flat plate-like front plate 573a that is long in the left-right direction and has a part that extends downward near the right end, and a left wall portion 573b that extends rearward from the left edge of the front plate 573a. , a lower wall portion 573c extending rearward from the lower end of the left wall portion 573b along the lower edge of the front plate 573a, and a lower wall portion 573c extending rearward from the right end of the lower wall portion 573c. A hanging wall portion 573d that extends downward along the left edge of the portion that extends to the front and extends rearward, and a portion of the front plate 573a that extends downward from the lower end of the hanging wall portion 573d. It has a bottom wall portion 573e extending to the right along the lower edge and extending to the rear, and a right wall portion 573f extending to the rear from the upper right end of the front plate 573a.

The upper edge and the right edge of the front plate 573a form the front edges of the foul upper opening 570a and the foul right opening 570b. The right edge of the upper end of the left wall portion 573b constitutes the left edge of the upper opening 570a, and the left edge of the upper end of the right wall portion 573f constitutes the right edge of the upper opening 570a. The lower edge of the right wall portion 573f forms the upper edge of the foul right opening 570b, and the right edge of the bottom wall portion 573e forms the lower edge of the foul right opening 570b.

The front cover 573 has a lower wall portion 573c positioned below the upper foul opening 570a, and guides the game ball B that has flowed down through the upper foul opening 570a to the right. It can flow down onto the bottom wall portion 573e. The bottom wall portion 573e is slanted so that the portion in front of the foul ball outlet 570c is lowered rearward, and the portion on the right side of this portion is slanted so that it is raised rightward. Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed down to the bottom wall portion 573e is guided rearward and discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c. In addition, since the right edge of the bottom wall portion 573e constitutes the lower edge of the foul right opening portion 570b, the game ball B entering from the foul right opening portion 570b flows down onto the bottom wall portion 573e. , is guided by the bottom wall portion 573e and discharged rearward from the foul ball outlet 570c.

In addition, the front cover 573 has a plurality of front support openings 573g that are arranged in rows on the left and right sides of the front plate 573a along the lower wall portion 573c and penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. The plurality of front support openings 573g are provided so as to face the rear support openings 572h of the unit base 572. As shown in FIG. Further, the front support opening 573g is provided so that the support piece 576a of the foul ball ground sheet metal 576 is inserted with a gap therebetween.

The rear cover 574 is formed in a box shape with an open front. Inside the rear cover 574, the rear part of the foul shutter 571 is inserted and a spring 575 is arranged. The rear end of the spring 575 contacts the front surface of the rear wall of the rear cover 574 .

Two springs 575 are provided in a left-right direction and are arranged inside the box-shaped rear cover 574 . The spring 575 has a front end in contact with the rear surface of the rear wall portion 571 c of the foul shutter 571 and a rear end in contact with the front surface of the rear wall of the rear cover 574 . A spring 575 biases the foul shutter 571 forward.

The foul ball ground metal plate 576 is formed of a metal plate such as an iron plate, and is finally connected to the ground of the game hall via a ground wire (not shown). The foul ball ground sheet metal 576 is formed in a strip shape elongated in the left and right direction, and a plurality of support pieces 576a extend outward from the front and rear long sides. The foul ball ground sheet metal 576 is placed on the upper surface of the lower wall portion 573c of the front cover 573, and the plurality of support pieces 576a are connected to the rear support opening 572h of the unit base 572 and the front support opening 573g of the front cover 573. , with play.

As a result, the game ball B, which has flowed down toward the lower wall portion 573c through the upper foul opening 570a, is guided to the right in a state where the static electricity charged in contact with the foul ball ground sheet metal 576 is removed. . At this time, since the support piece 576a is loosely fitted in the rear support port 572h and the front support port 573g, the contact of the game ball B vibrates the foul ball grounding plate 576, and the vibration causes the foul ball grounding plate 576 to vibrate. Dust and debris on 576 are discharged to the outside through gaps between the loosely fitted rear support opening 572h and front support opening 573g. In addition, this foul ball earth sheet metal 576 also serves as a reinforcement against the falling game ball B.

The foul unit 570A is attached to a foul unit attachment portion 501h provided near the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame 4 in the assembled state of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In this state, the ball launching unit 550 is mounted adjacent to the right side of the foul unit 570A.

As with the foul unit 570 of the first embodiment, the foul upper opening 570a of the foul unit 570A is located near the upper end of the base wall portion 501b, and the ball shooting unit 550 shoots the game ball B in the shooting direction. located on the axis of In other words, the upper foul opening 570a is provided at a portion between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and the ball launching port 550b of the ball launching unit 550. .

On the other hand, the foul right opening 570b of the foul unit 570A communicates with the ball launch port 550b of the ball launch unit 550 at its upper portion and with the ball discharge port 550c of the ball launch unit 550 at its lower portion. Therefore, a foul top opening 570a and a foul right opening are provided between the lower end opening between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 and the ball launching port 550b of the ball launching unit 550. 570b are provided. As a result, the game ball B launched from the ball launching port 550b of the ball launching unit 550 enters the foul unit 570A through the foul right opening 570b, passes through the foul upper opening 570a, and exits the game board 5. It will enter between the rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 .

In the foul unit 570A of this embodiment, when the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the body frame 4, as shown in FIG. A shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 protrudes between the front surface of the unit base 572 and the front plate 573a of the front cover 573 to close the upper foul opening 570a so that the game ball B cannot pass through. That is, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position. In this state, the rear wall portion 571c of the foul shutter 571 is in contact with the rear surface of the main body portion 572f of the unit base 572 and will not slide forward any more.

When the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 while the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position, the shot game ball B enters the foul unit 570A through the foul right opening 570b and then hits the foul shutter. The ball 571 comes into contact with the lower surface of the shutter portion 571a of the ball 571, and flows down through the foul unit 570A without being shot upward through the foul upper opening 570a. The game ball B flowing down inside the foul unit 570A is guided by the lower wall portion 573c (foul ball ground sheet metal 576), the hanging wall portion 573d, the bottom wall portion 573e, etc., and is circulated from the foul ball outlet 570c on the rear side. It is supplied to routing unit 600 . As a result, even if the game ball B is shot while the door frame 3 is open, the game ball B will not leak outside from the foul unit 570A.

When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the door open switch 507 is turned off. Therefore, when the door open switch 507 is turned off, the shooting of the game ball B from the ball shooting unit 550 may be stopped. . Alternatively, when the door frame 3 is opened, the game may be temporarily stopped by the main control board 1310 instead of stopping the shooting of the game ball B, and when the door frame 3 is closed, the game may be resumed.

Further, when the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 (the frame opening switch 508 is OFF), the door frame 3 is closed and the game ball B does not leak outside. It is also possible not to stop the shooting of the game ball B. Alternatively, when the body frame 4 is opened, the same process as when the door frame 3 is opened may be performed.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, the rear surface of the door frame 3 abuts against the front ends of the two forward projecting portions 571b of the foul shutter 571, and the foul shutter 571 is closed against the biasing force of the spring 575. slides backward (see FIG. 36(b)). In this state, the shutter portion 571a of the foul shutter 571 is located behind the front surface of the unit base 572, and the upper foul opening portion 570a is opened so that the game ball B can pass therethrough. That is, the false shutter 571 is in the open position.

When the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 while the foul shutter 571 is in the open position, the shot game ball B enters the foul unit 570A through the foul right opening 570b, and then hits the foul. Through the opening 570a, it is launched upward toward the game board 5 (between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). Then, when the launched game ball B crosses over the backflow prevention member 1007 provided at the upper end of the inner rail 1002, the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a.

It should be noted that the game ball B that was shot from the ball shooting unit 550 but did not go over the backflow prevention member 1007 at the upper end of the inner rail 1002 (the game ball B that was not hit into the game area) is separated from the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, enters the foul upper opening 570a as a foul ball, and is collected by the foul unit 570A. The game ball B collected through the upper foul opening 570a flows down onto the foul ball ground metal plate 576 placed on the upper surface of the lower wall portion 573c, and the foul ball ground metal plate 576 removes static electricity. At this time, since the foul ball ground sheet metal 576 is loosely fitted, it vibrates when the game ball B comes into contact with it. It is discharged out of the foul unit 570A through the mouth 573g.

The game ball B that has flowed down onto the foul ball ground sheet metal 576 (lower wall portion 573c) is guided to the right by its inclination, flows down along the hanging wall portion 573d onto the bottom wall portion 573e, and reaches the bottom wall portion 573e. The ball is guided backward by the inclination and discharged from the foul ball outlet 570c to the circulating ball path unit 600. As shown in FIG.

In addition, in the foul unit 570A, the game ball B ejected from the ball ejection port 550c of the ball ejection unit 550 is received at the lower part of the foul right opening 570b. A game ball B that has entered the foul unit 570A from the lower part of the foul right opening 570b flows down onto the bottom wall 573e, is guided backward by the inclination of the bottom wall 573e, and passes through the foul ball exit 570c to the circulating ball path unit. 600 is discharged.

In this way, according to the foul unit 570A, the game balls B that have not been hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 in spite of being shot from the ball shooting unit 550 are collected without leaking to the outside, and the circulating balls are collected. It can be fed to routing unit 600 . In the circulating ball path unit 600, the game ball B supplied from the foul ball outlet 570c is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, details of which will be described later. When the game ball B is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, the number of balls possessed by the player is increased by one.

In the foul unit 570A, since the unit base 572, the front cover 573, the rear cover 574, etc. are made of transparent synthetic resin, the inside can be visually recognized from the outside, and clogged balls can be found inside. easy.

[4-3b. Foul unit of the third embodiment]
Next, the foul unit 570 of the third embodiment will be described. A foul unit 570 of the third embodiment differs only in the opening/closing mechanism of a foul shutter 571, and the rest of the configuration is the same as that of the foul unit 570 described above. Although not shown, the foul unit 570 of the third embodiment is provided with an electric actuator such as a motor or a solenoid for opening and closing the foul shutter 571 . In this case, it is desirable to employ a solenoid for the electric actuator from the viewpoint of short operation time, high-speed response, and cost.

In this embodiment, when the door open switch 507 is turned off by opening the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, the foul shutter 571 is slid to the closed position by the electric actuator. As a result, even if the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 while the door frame 3 is opened, the game ball B will not jump out from the upper foul opening 570a.

When the door frame 3 is closed and the door open switch 507 is turned on, the foul shutter 571 is slid to the open position by the electric actuator, and the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 is released through the upper foul opening 570a. It becomes possible to pass through and drive to the game board 5 side.

Even when the frame open switch 508 is turned off by opening the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, the false shutter 571 may be slid to the closed position by the electric actuator. In this case, if the open/close process of the false shutter 571 by the frame open switch 508 is the same as the open/close process by the door open switch 507, the software configuration can be simplified.

Further, an open switch (not shown) that can detect both the opening of the door frame 3 and the opening of the body frame 4 may be provided, and the false shutter 571 may be opened and closed by an electric actuator. You can make it simple.

Furthermore, the foul unit 570 of the third embodiment also operates during settlement. Details will be described with reference to the flow chart of FIG. 75 and the timing chart of FIG. 77, but the outline will be described here.

The player presses the counting button switch 180 when the game is finished and the ball in hand is to be settled. When this button is pressed, the frame control board 740 starts settlement processing. The main process of the settlement process is to transfer the data of the player's balls to the game ball lending device 8, and the ball sending unit of the second embodiment and the ball launching unit 550A of the second embodiment are used. In this case, when the game ball B is sent to the launch rail (ball launch pad 552b) by the ball feed unit, the ball is subtracted regardless of whether or not it is launched. It is necessary to process the game ball B of .

Specifically, when the counting button switch 180 is pressed, the frame control firing permission flag is turned OFF and the frame control forced firing flag is turned ON by the settlement processing of the frame control board 740 . When the frame control firing permission flag is turned ON, the ball feed solenoid 706 and the firing solenoid 553 are driven in order to shoot the game ball, but when the frame control forced firing flag is turned ON, the ball feed solenoid 706 is driven. Instead, the foul shutter drive solenoid 571d (see FIG. 69) is driven to close the foul shutter 571, and the firing solenoid 553 is driven with a reduced excitation voltage to fire weakly. This forced firing operation is executed only once when the frame control forced firing flag is turned ON.

As described above, when the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position and the ball is launched weakly, only one game ball B can be placed on the launch rail (ball launch pad 552b). The game ball B which hits becomes a foul ball and is detected by the foul ball sensor 607 . When the game ball B is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, it is added to the held ball as shown in FIG. As a matter of course, even if the settlement process is performed after the game ball B is normally launched and the forced launch is carried out, since the game ball B is not placed on the launch rail (ball launch pad 552b) in the first place, the foul ball does not occur. It will not be added to the ball you have.

In addition, although it is the strength when it is launched weakly, the lower limit of the launch strength is the strength to the extent that the game ball B drops from the ball launch pad 552b (launch rail). Furthermore, ideally, it is desired that the game ball B dropped from the launch pad 552b (launch rail) rolls as it is and is detected by the foul ball sensor 607 quickly. In addition, the upper limit of the firing strength of the forced firing when the foul shutter 571 is not provided is set to the outer rail 1001 which is a part of the game board 5 so that the game ball B of the forced firing is not visible to the player and causes misunderstanding. It is necessary to have a firing intensity that does not reach.

[4-4. Circulation ball path unit]
The circulating ball path unit 600 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 to 44 and the like. FIG. 37(a) is a front perspective view of the circulation ball path unit in the body frame, and FIG. 37(b) is a rear perspective view of the circulation ball path unit in the body frame. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view of the circulation ball path unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view of the circulation ball path unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 40(a) is a plan view showing only the meandering ball member and the ball-removing shutter in the circulation ball path unit, and (b) is a perspective view from the front showing only the meandering ball member and the ball-removing shutter in the circulation ball path unit. It is a diagram. FIG. 41(a1) is an explanatory view showing a side sectional view of the ball retracting shutter and the meandering member in the closed position together with the ball receiving tray, and (a2) is an explanatory view showing only the part of the ball retracting shutter in (a1) from the bottom. (b1) is an explanatory view showing a side cross section of the ball retracting shutter in the open position and the meandering ball member together with the ball receiving tray, and (b2) is an explanation showing only the portion of the ball retracting shutter in (b1) from the bottom. It is a diagram.

Also, FIG. 42(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a front cross section of the circulation ball path unit cut at the out ball sensor site, and (b) is a front view of the circulation ball path unit cut at the safe ball sensor site. It is explanatory drawing shown in a cross section. FIG. 43(a) is a front perspective view showing an enlarged lower part of the body frame together with the outer frame with the meandering cover of the circulation ball path unit removed, and (b) is a meandering cover of the circulation ball path unit. FIG. 10 is a rear perspective view showing an enlarged lower portion of the main body frame together with the outer frame with the cover removed; FIG. 44 is a plan view showing meandering sphere members, meandering covers, ball removal shutters, and gauges in the circulation ball path unit.

The circulating ball path unit 600 stores a plurality of game balls B discharged from the game board 5 and game balls B recovered by the foul unit 570 , and moves the stored game balls B through the ball lifting unit 650 . It is for sending to the ball launching unit 550 side via. The circulation ball path unit 600 is attached to a circulation ball path unit attachment portion 501l provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

The circulation ball path unit 600 has an out ball socket 600a that is long in the left and right direction and opens upward, and a safe ball socket that is provided in the rear of the out ball socket 600a and is long in the left and right direction and opens upward. 600b, a foul ball receiving port 600c that is open on the front, and a ball discharge port 600d that is open toward the right near the lower end. The out ball receiving opening 600a and the safe ball receiving opening 600b are formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly wider than the diameter of the game ball B, and a plurality of game balls B can pass through in the left-right direction. The foul ball receptacle 600c and the ball discharge port 600d are formed to have sizes through which the game balls B can pass one by one.

A game ball B (out ball) received in the out port of the game board 5 is received in the out ball receiving port 600a. A game ball B (safe ball) received in a winning opening such as a general winning opening, a starting opening, a big winning opening, or the like of the game board 5 is received in the safe ball receiving opening 600b. A game ball B (foul ball) ejected from the foul ball outlet 570c of the foul unit 570 is received in the foul ball receptacle 600c. The ball discharge port 600d discharges the game balls B received and stored inside the out ball receiving port 600a, the safe ball receiving port 600b, and the foul ball receiving port 600c, and delivers them to the ball lifting unit 650. be.

In addition, the circulation ball path unit 600 includes an out ball passage 601 through which the game balls B received by the out ball receiving port 600a circulate, and a safe ball passage 602 through which the game balls B received by the safe ball receiving port 600b circulate. , the foul ball passage 603 through which the game ball B received by the foul ball socket 600c flows, the out ball passage 601, the safe ball passage 602, and the foul ball passage 603, respectively. is a ball discharge port 600d and has a meandering ball passage 604 in which a large number of game balls B can be stored.

Furthermore, the circulating ball path unit 600 includes an out ball sensor 605 for detecting game balls B (out balls) circulating in the out ball path 601 one by one, and game balls B (out balls) circulating in the safe ball path 602 ( Safe ball sensors 606 for detecting safe balls one by one, and foul ball sensors 607 for detecting game balls B (foul balls) circulating in the foul ball passage 603 one by one. The safe ball sensor 606 has the meaning of an all winning hole sensor in a conventional pachinko machine, and can be used to determine fraudulent winning by comparing with the total number of winnings of all winning holes.

The circulating ball path unit 600 includes a flat ball receiving front plate 610, a ball receiving front member 611 attached to the rear side of the ball receiving front plate 610, and attached to the rear side of the ball receiving front member 611. A ball receiving rear member 612 is provided. A meandering ball passage 604 is provided below the ball receiving front plate 610 , the ball receiving front member 611 and the ball receiving rear member 612 .

The circulating ball path unit 600 also includes meandering ball members 613 which are provided below the front ball receiving plate 610, the front ball receiving member 611, and the rear ball receiving member 612 and open upward, and the meandering ball members 613 A meandering cover 614 covering the upper part of the ball receiving member 613, a ball removing shutter 615 for discharging the game ball B from the meandering ball member 613, a magnet 616 attached to the ball removing shutter 615, and the ball receiving front member 611. A circulating ball path relay board 617 attached to the side and a gauge portion 620 provided on the meandering cover 614 are provided.

The ball receiving front plate 610 extends left and right, and is provided with a foul ball receiving opening 600c penetrating back and forth near the lower portion of the center in the left-right direction.

The ball receiving front member 611 cooperates with the ball receiving front plate 610 on the upper surface to form an out ball socket 600a. An out-ball passage 601 and a foul-ball passage 603 are formed in the front ball receiving member 611 so as to open forward, and the front side thereof is closed by attaching the front plate 610 to the ball receiving portion. The out ball passage 601 has its downstream end opened downward at the lower left end of the front ball receiving member 611 . The downstream end opening of the out ball passage 601 is located in front of the downstream end opening of the safe ball passage 602 . The downstream end of the foul ball passage 603 opens downward at a lower right portion than the downstream end of the out ball passage 601 in the front ball receiving member 611 .

The ball receiving front member 611 is formed by an out ball receiving plate upper portion 611a that slopes down rightward from the middle of the vertical wall forming the left edge of the out ball receiving opening 600a to near the center in the left-right direction. , the vertical wall forming the right edge of the out-ball socket 600a is lowered leftward from the part below the out-ball receiving plate upper part 611a to near the bottom of the left edge of the out-ball socket 600a. and a crank portion 611c extending in a crank shape from the left end of the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b toward the lower left with a width that allows the game balls B to circulate in a row, have.

The height between the right end of the upper out ball receiving plate portion 611a and the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b is about twice the diameter of the game ball B, thereby increasing the height of the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b on the left side. is formed so as to become lower toward the left. As a result, the game balls B received by the out ball socket 600a can be aligned in one row.

An out ball sensor 605 is attached to a vertically extending portion of the crank portion 611c directly below the downstream end of the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b.

In the ball receiving front member 611, an out ball passage 601 is formed by an upper out ball receiving plate portion 611a, a lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b, a crank portion 611c, and the like. Therefore, the out-ball passage 601 is formed wide enough to receive many game balls B on the upstream side, and the received game balls B are aligned in a line to the downstream ball meandering passage 604 (ball meandering member 613). I am trying to pass it on.

In addition, in the ball receiving front member 611, the foul ball passage 603 is located below the out ball receiving plate portion upper portion 611a and the out ball receiving plate portion lower portion 611b. After inclining leftward to a portion on the right side of the left end of the lower ball receiving plate portion 611b, it extends short downward. In the front ball receiving member 611, a foul ball sensor 607 is attached to a portion of the foul ball passage 603 extending leftward. The foul ball passage 603 is formed so that the game balls b circulate in a line. It is delivered to a site downstream of the site to which it is delivered.

The front ball receiving member 611 is attached to the front edge of the upper out ball receiving plate portion 611a, the front edge of the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611b, and the front edge of the bottom wall forming the foul ball passage 603 and extending to the left and right. A concave portion 611d having a size that does not hinder the circulation of game balls B is provided. This concave portion 611d enables dust, dirt, and the like in the out-ball passage 601 and the foul-ball passage 603 to be discharged to the outside.

A circulating ball path relay board 617 is attached to a rear surface of the ball receiving front member 611 behind the foul ball passage 603 .

The rear ball receiving member 612 cooperates with the front ball receiving member 611 on the upper surface to form a safe ball receiving opening 600b. The safe ball passage 602 is formed in the rear ball receiving member 612 so as to open forward, and the front side of the safe ball passage 602 is closed by attaching the front ball receiving member 611 . The safe ball passage 602 opens downward at its downstream end at the lower left end of the rear ball receiving member 612 . The downstream end opening of the safe ball passage 602 is located behind the downstream end opening of the out ball passage 601 . That is, the opening at the downstream end of the out-ball passage 601 and the opening at the downstream end of the safe-ball passage 602 are aligned in the front-rear direction.

The rear ball receiving member 612 has a safe ball receiving plate upper portion 612a which is inclined downward from the middle of the vertical wall forming the left edge of the safe ball receiving port 600b to near the center in the left-right direction. , the vertical wall forming the right edge of the safe ball receiving port 600b is lowered leftward from the part below the safe ball receiving plate upper part 612a to near the bottom of the left edge of the safe ball receiving port 600b. a lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b inclined in this way, a crank portion 612c extending in a crank shape from the left end of the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b toward the lower left with a width that allows the game balls B to flow in a row; have.

The height between the right end of the upper safe ball receiving plate portion 612a and the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b is about twice the diameter of the game ball B, thereby increasing the height of the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b on the left side. is formed so as to become lower toward the left. As a result, the game balls B received by the safe ball receiving opening 600b can be aligned in one row.

A safe ball sensor 606 is attached to a vertically extending portion of the crank portion 612c directly below the downstream end of the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b.

In the ball receiving rear member 612, a safe ball passage 602 is formed by an upper safe ball receiving plate portion 612a, a lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b, a crank portion 612c, and the like. Therefore, the safe ball passage 602 is formed wide enough to receive a large number of game balls B on the upstream side. I'm trying to hand it over to the most upstream part.

The rear ball receiving member 612 is provided with a concave portion 612d having a size that does not hinder the circulation of the game ball B at the front edge of the upper safe ball receiving plate portion 612a and the front edge of the lower safe ball receiving plate portion 612b. . This recessed portion 612d enables dust, dirt, and the like in the safe ball passage 602 to be discharged to the outside.

The ball meandering member 613 extends in the left-right direction so that the right end side is lower while meandering back and forth, forming a meandering ball passage 604 capable of storing a large number of game balls B. As shown in FIG. 40 and the like, the spherical meandering member 613 includes a first straight portion 613a that slopes down toward the front with the rear portion serving as an upstream end, and a downstream end (front end) of the first straight portion 613a. ), the first folded portion 613b is bent so as to be further lowered rearward after being bent to the right, and the first straight portion is lowered rearward from the downstream end (rear end) of the first folded portion 613b. A second straight portion 613c that extends to a position near the rear end of 613a, and a second straight portion 613c that is bent rightward from the downstream end (rear end) of the second straight portion 613c and then further bent forward to be lower. A second folded portion 613d, a third straight portion 613e extending downward from the downstream end (front end) of the second folded portion 613d to the same position as the front end of the second straight portion 613c, and a third straight portion. A third folded portion 613f that is bent to the right from the downstream end (front end) of the third folded portion 613e and then bent to be further lowered rearward, and a third folded portion 613f that is lowered rearward from the downstream end (rear end) of the third folded portion 613f and a fourth straight portion 613g extending to the same position as the rear end of the third straight portion 613e, and the fourth straight portion 613g bent rightward from the downstream end (rear end) and further lowered forward. A bent fourth folded portion 613h, and a fifth straight portion 613i extending downward from the downstream end (front end) of the fourth folded portion 613h to the same position as the front end of the fourth straight portion 613g. , a first bent portion 613j that bends downward to the right from the downstream end (front end) of the fifth straight portion 613i, and a first bent portion 613j that bends downward to the right from the downstream end (right end) of the first bent portion 613j. A first transverse portion 613k extending, a second bent portion 613l bent so as to be lower rearward from the downstream end (right end) of the first transverse portion 613k, and a downstream end (rear end) of the second bent portion 613l. A sixth straight portion 613m extending from the end) to a position near the downstream end of the fifth straight portion 613i so as to be lowered rearward, and a sixth straight portion 613m that is lowered rightward from the downstream end (rear end) of the sixth straight portion 613m. and a second transverse portion 613o extending downward to the right from the downstream end (right end) of the third bent portion 613n. An opening at the downstream end of the second transverse portion 613o forms a ball discharge port 600d that opens rightward.

In the serpentine sphere member 613 (serpentine sphere passage 604), the opening of the downstream end of the safe sphere passage 602 is positioned above the rear end of the first straight portion 613a, and the opening of the downstream end of the out sphere passage 601 is located in front of it. Aperture is located. Further, the opening of the downstream end of the foul ball passage 603 is positioned above the rear end of the second straight portion 613c.

Further, the meandering ball member 613 has a ball outlet 613p penetrating vertically in the first transverse portion 613k, and extends forward and backward along the left and right edges of the ball outlet 613p on the lower surface of the first transverse portion 613k. a pair of rail portions 613q protruding downward along with a support piece 613r protruding from the lower ends of the pair of rail portions 613q so as to approach each other; and side surfaces of the pair of rail portions 613q facing each other. and a plurality of slits 613t provided through the rolling surface (bottom surface) on which the game ball B rolls.

A ball extraction port 613p of the meandering ball member 613 is closed by a ball extraction shutter 615, which will be described in detail later. The pair of rail portions 613q extends rearward from the ball outlet 613p. The pair of rail portions 613q supports the ball removal shutter 615 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The two support pieces 613r prevent the ball shutter 615 from falling. Also, the two support pieces 613r protrude from the respective rail portions 613q at the ball outlet 613p. Thereby, even if the load of the game ball B acts on the ball pull-out shutter 615 through the ball pull-out port 613p, the ball pull-out shutter 615 can be sufficiently supported, and the ball pull-out shutter 615 is prevented from falling off. The lock portion 613s can hold the ball pull-out shutter 615 at the open position by locking the lock protrusion 615f of the ball pull-out shutter 615. As shown in FIG.

The slit 613t of the meandering ball member 613 penetrates downward to a size that does not hinder the circulation of the game ball B, and can discharge garbage, dust, etc. in the meandering ball passage 604. The slits 613t provided at the folded portion and the bent portion are provided at the outer portion of the curve.

The ball meandering member 613 is provided with a circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and a circulating ball excess sensor 622 capable of detecting the game balls B in circulation, the details of which will be described later.

According to this meandering ball member 613, a meandering ball passage 604 can be formed that meanders back and forth and extends in the left-right direction so as to lower rightward. Further, the spherical meandering member 613 includes a plurality of folded portions (first folded portion 613b, second folded portion 613d, third folded portion 613f, fourth folded portion 613h) and multiple bent portions (first bent portion 613j, fourth folded portion 613h). Since the second bent portion 613l and the third bent portion 613n) are provided, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be suppressed at those portions, and the impact applied to the entrance side of the ball lifting unit 650 can be alleviated. can be done.

A serpentine cover 614 is attached to the spherical serpentine member 613 so as to cover the open upper end of the spherical serpentine member 613 . By attaching the meandering cover 614 to the meandering ball member 613, the game ball B leaks to the outside from the meandering ball member 613 (the meandering ball passage 604), or the game ball B that is not compatible with the pachinko machine 1 from the outside or is illegal. It is possible to prevent a game ball B from being inserted or played.

The meandering cover 614 is formed such that the length of the portion extending forward and backward at the left end is shorter rearward than the first straight portion 613 a of the meandering spherical member 613 . As a result, when the meandering cover 614 is attached to the meandering ball member 613, the rear portion of the first straight portion 613a of the meandering ball member 613 is opened upward, and the out ball passage 601 and the safe ball pass through this portion. It becomes possible to communicate with the passage 602 .

Moreover, the meandering cover 614 has an opening 614a penetrating vertically at a portion above the rear end of the second straight portion 613c of the meandering spherical member 613 . The foul ball passage 603 can communicate with the meandering ball passage 604 through this opening 614a.

The ball removal shutter 615 is for removing (discharging) the game balls B (circulation game balls) from the circulation ball path unit 600 or the like, and is attached to the lower surface of the ball meandering member 613 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. . The ball removal shutter 615 includes a flat plate-like door portion 615a capable of closing the ball removal port 613p, a knob portion 615b extending vertically and horizontally from the front edge of the door portion 615a, and the rear ends of the left and right ends of the door portion 615a. a pair of poles 615c extending rearward from the door 615a, a connecting part 615e forming an opening 615d penetrating vertically by connecting the pair of poles 615c behind the door 615a, A locking projection 615f protruding from the outer surface between the connecting portion 615e and the rear end of the pair of poles 615c, and a hook extending outward from the rear ends of the pair of poles 615c. 615g, and a magnet support portion 615h cylindrically protruding from the lower surface of the door portion 615a.

The magnet support portion 615h of the ball extraction shutter 615 can support the magnet 616 by inserting the cylindrical magnet 616 into the cylinder. The magnet support portion 615h is provided upstream of the opening 615d. The magnet support portion 615h has a portion protruding into the cylinder at its lower end and is open rearward. However, the magnet 616 does not drop from the magnet support portion 615h.

When the ball retracting shutter 615 is attached to the meandering ball member 613, the pair of rail portions 613q of the meandering ball member 613 are positioned on the left and right outer sides of the door portion 615a and the pair of rod portions 615c, and the door portion 615a The lower surface of the first lateral portion 613k and the upper surface of the pair of support pieces 613r are positioned on both upper and lower sides of the pair of rod portions 615c. As a result, the ball extraction shutter 615 is slidable in the front-rear direction between a closed position and an open position, which will be described later.

41(a1) and (a2), the ball extraction shutter 615 is in a closed position in which the game ball B cannot pass through the ball extraction opening 613p by the door portion 615a. . In this state, the rear surface of the knob portion 615b is in contact with the front surface of the first transverse portion 613k, and the pair of locking projections 615f are in contact with the rear end surfaces of the pair of rail portions 613q. As a result, the ball extraction shutter 615 is restricted from moving forward and backward and is held at the closed position. Therefore, when the ball removal shutter 615 is in the closed position, the game ball B is not discharged from the ball removal opening 613p to the ball receiving tray 720 below (see FIG. 20).

Further, when the ball removal shutter 615 is in the closed position, the magnet support portion 615h (magnet 616) is located below the vicinity of the upstream end of the ball removal port 613p. Although the details will be described later, when an iron ball SB (see FIG. 46) flows through the meandering ball passage 604, the magnetic force of the magnet 616 magnetically attaches the iron ball SB to the door portion 615a, causing ball clogging. As a result, it is possible to detect the presence of iron balls SB.

When the knob portion 615b is pinched and pulled forward with the ball extraction shutter 615 in the closed position, the locking projection 615f provided on the rod portion 615c strongly contacts the rear end surface of the rail portion 613q. At this time, the rod portion 615c is elastically deformed inward by the force applied to the locking projection 615f, the locking projection 615f moves toward the inner side surface of the rail portion 613q, and the ball extraction shutter 615 slides forward from the closed position. It will happen. When the locking projection 615f reaches the locking portion 613s, the locking projection 615f is locked to the locking portion 613s by the elastic force of the rod portion 615c, and is provided at the rear end of the rod portion 615c. The hook portion 615g is in a state of approaching the rear end surface of the rail portion 613q. As a result, further forward sliding of the ball removal shutter 615 is restricted.

In this state, as shown in FIGS. 41(b1) and (b2), the opening 615d of the ball removal shutter 615 is aligned with the ball removal opening 613p, and the game ball B can pass through the ball removal opening 613p. It has become. That is, the ball extraction shutter 615 is in the open position. When the ball extraction shutter 615 is in the open position, the game ball B on the upstream side of the ball extraction opening 613p in the ball meandering passage 604 is discharged to the ball receiving tray 720 below through the ball extraction opening 613p and the opening 615d. be. As a result, it is possible to pull out the circulating game ball B to the outside.

When the game balls B accumulate in the ball receiving tray 720 and become heavy, the ball receiving tray 720 is placed on the bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f which is inclined so that the front end side is lowered. Although it tries to slide forward, the forward sliding is blocked by the locking of the locking claw 501n. In this state, when the locking claw 501n is released, the ball receiving tray 720 automatically slides forward due to the weight of the stored game balls B, and the ball receiving tray 720 can be easily removed from the tray insertion recess 501f. can be taken out.

In addition, when the ball extraction shutter 615 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the rear surface of the door frame 3 is close to the front surface of the knob portion 615b. The portion 615b abuts against the door frame 3 to prevent the door from sliding to the open position. As a result, the circulating game balls B are not lost without permission, and the illegal game balls B passing through the ball extraction port 613p are not mixed.

The magnet 616 is formed in a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the magnet support portion 615 h of the ball removal shutter 615 . This magnet 616 is for attracting the iron ball SB. The magnet 616 uses a strong magnetic force such as a neodymium magnet.

By the way, in a game hall or the like, when the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment and a conventional pachinko machine in which the player can touch the game ball (iron ball SB) are mixed, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment When the game ball B is replenished or replaced due to maintenance or the like in 1, there is a risk that the iron ball SB will be mixed.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1, when the iron ball SB is mixed in, the ball extraction shutter 615 is provided with the magnet 616, so that when the iron ball SB flows through the meandering ball passage 604, the ball extraction shutter at the closed position is closed. On the upper surface of the door portion 615a at 615, the iron ball SB is magnetized by the magnetic force of the magnet 616 and stops. At this time, since the magnet 616 with a strong magnetic force is used, even if a large number of game balls B accumulate on the upstream side of the magnetically attached iron ball SB and a force for pressing the door portion is applied to the downstream side. The iron ball SB never moves from the upper surface of 615a.

When the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door portion 615a (magnet 616) of the ball shutter 615 in the meandering ball passage 604, when the ball shooting unit 550 continues to shoot the game ball B, The game balls B on the downstream side of the magnetized iron ball SB are sequentially consumed, and the consumed (shot) game balls B are sequentially supplied to the upstream side of the iron ball SB. Therefore, in the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the lifting inlet sensor 653 etc. provided downstream from the ball removing shutter 615, the detection of the game ball B is turned off, and the circulation provided upstream from the ball removing shutter 615 The game ball B detection is turned ON in the ball excess sensor 622, the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, the foul ball sensor 607, and the like. As a result, it is possible to detect and notify the occurrence of ball clogging between the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the like and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 and the like. That is, it can be detected that the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door portion 615a.

With the iron ball SB magnetically attached to the upper surface of the door portion 615a of the ball removal shutter 615 by the magnetic force of the magnet 616, when the ball removal shutter 615 is slid forward from the closed position to the open position, the upper surface of the door portion 615a The front end of the iron ball SB that is magnetically attached to the contact surface abuts the front wall of the first transverse portion 613k, and only the iron ball SB is prevented from moving forward. Then, when the magnet 616 moves forward of the front wall of the first transverse portion 613k, the magnetic force acting on the iron ball SB weakens and the iron ball SB starts rolling downstream. At this time, the opening 615d of the ball removal shutter 615 is aligned with the ball removal opening 613p, and the game ball B can pass through the ball removal opening 613p. can be discharged into the ball receiving tray 720 below and removed from the ball serpentine passage 604 .

The circulation ball path relay board 617 is attached to a portion behind the foul ball passage 603 on the rear surface of the front ball receiving member 611 and below the lower out ball receiving plate portion 611 b of the rear ball receiving member 612 . The circulating ball path relay board 617 relays connection between the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, the foul ball sensor 607, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball excess sensor 622, and the frame control board 740, which will be described later. belongs to.

The gauge portion 620 indicates an appropriate amount area having a predetermined length in the flow direction of the serpentine spherical passage 604 in the serpentine spherical member 613 . Here, a state in which the rear end of the row of game balls B stored in a row is caught on the gauge portion 620 is defined as an appropriate amount. The gauge part 620 is for visually confirming an appropriate amount of the game balls B (circulating balls), and is formed of a partially colored transparent seal. This gauge portion 620 is attached to the upper surface of the meandering cover 614 . More specifically, on the upper surface of the meandering cover 614, it is attached to a portion upstream of the first transverse portion 613k of the spherical meandering member 613. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 44, characters and symbols (arrows) indicating the appropriate range (appropriate amount area) of the amount of game balls B stored are described on the gauge portion 620 .

The gauge portion 620 includes an upper gauge seal 620a attached to a portion above the third straight portion 613e and the third folded portion 613f of the spherical meandering member 613, and a middle gauge attached to a portion above the fourth straight portion 613g. It is composed of three seals, a seal 620b and a lower gauge seal 620c attached to a portion above the fifth straight portion 613i and the first curved portion 613j.

The upper gauge seal 620a has a line extending left and right near the center in the front-rear direction of the third straight portion 613e, and a line downstream (front) of the line extending along the passage with the tip of the arrow toward the line. An arrow with a rod portion extending to the downstream end of the third folded portion 613f, and the characters "up to here" are written (displayed) on the downstream right side of the arrow portion of the arrow.

The middle gauge seal 620b has a rod-shaped portion extending rearward (downstream) so as to follow the rod portion indicated by the arrow in the upper gauge seal 620a, and near the upstream end of the rod-shaped portion, " "Appropriate range" is written.

The lower gauge seal 620c includes a line extending back and forth at the downstream end of the first bent portion 613j, and a fifth direct portion 613i along the passage with the tip of the arrow portion on the upstream side of the line directed toward the line. An arrow with a bar portion extending to the upstream end of the arrow, and the characters "from here" are described (displayed) on the upstream right side of the arrow portion of the arrow.

When the gauge portion 620 is viewed during maintenance or the like, the game ball B is placed in the portion of the gauge portion 620 (appropriate amount area), that is, the portion in the range from the line of the upper gauge seal 620a to the line of the lower gauge seal 620c. If it cannot be seen, it can be understood that the number of game balls B is less than the appropriate amount. When replenishing the game balls B, the game balls B are thrown in from the out port 1008 of the game board 5, or from the out ball receiving port 600a or the safe ball receiving port 600b until the appropriate amount is reached.

On the other hand, when looking at the gauge portion 620, if the game ball B can be seen in all parts of the gauge portion 620, that is, if the rear end of the row of the game ball B is "up to here" (the line of the upper gauge seal 620a) ), it can be seen that there is an excess of game balls B, which is more than the appropriate amount. When there are too many game balls B, the ball removal shutter 615 is pulled forward and slid to the open position to discharge the game balls B in the meandering ball passage 604 from the ball removal port 613p to make the appropriate amount.

As described above, according to the gauge part 620 of the present embodiment, it is possible to determine at a glance whether or not the stored game balls B are appropriate (appropriate amount), and at the same time, the number of stored game balls B You can easily adjust the amount.

In the above embodiment, as the gauge portion 620 , a seal is attached to the meandering cover 614 . The parts may be formed in different colors, or the gauge part 620 may be formed by drawing colored lines at the downstream end and the upstream end of the appropriate amount region.

Further, in the above embodiment, the gauge portion 620 is provided upstream of the ball release shutter 615, but the present invention is not limited to this. The downstream end of the gauge portion 620 may be provided downstream of the ball removal shutter 615 and near the upstream of the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 .

In the circulating ball path unit 600 of this embodiment, the ball receiving front plate 610, the ball receiving front member 611, the ball receiving rear member 612, the meandering ball member 613, and the meandering cover 614 are formed of transparent synthetic resin. . Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize the internal state from the outside.

Circulation ball path unit 600 is attached with out ball sensor 605 and foul ball sensor 607 sandwiched between ball receiving front plate 610 and ball receiving front member 611, and safe ball sensor 606 It is mounted in a state of being sandwiched between the front ball receiving member 611 and the rear ball receiving member 612 . The out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606 are arranged side by side.

The out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, the foul ball sensor 607, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 detect the game ball B without contact, for example, by detecting changes in the induced current. is.

The circulation ball path unit 600 is attached to the base wall portion 501b of the body frame base 501 from the rear side. When the circulating ball path unit 600 is assembled to the body frame 4, the out ball socket 600a and the safe ball socket 600b are at the same height as the top surface of the base wall portion 501b, and the rear end of the top surface of the base wall portion 501b. It is mounted so that it touches the edge.

Also, the circulating ball path unit 600 is attached to the body frame 4 so that the ball feeding unit 700 is positioned between it and the base wall portion 501b in an assembled state.

Further, in the circulating ball path unit 600 assembled to the main body frame 4, the portion on the front side of the center of the meandering ball member 613 and the meandering cover 614 in the front-rear direction is provided in the base wall portion 501b. It protrudes forward through the mouth 501g from the rear. Thus, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B in the meandering ball member 613 (the meandering ball passage 604) can be visually recognized from the front (outside).

When the circulating ball path unit 600 is assembled to the main body frame 4 and the frame substrate unit 730 is opened rearward, the out ball path 601, the safe ball path 602, the foul ball path 603, and the serpentine ball path are formed. The inside of each portion of the base wall portion 501b on the rear side of the base wall portion 501b in 604 can be visually recognized from the rear. As a result, by opening the frame substrate unit 730, the inside of the out ball passage 601 and the like can be checked when a ball jam occurs, making it easy to identify the location of the ball jam.

In addition, in the state where the circulation ball path unit 600 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the second transverse portion 613o of the meandering ball member 613 is positioned behind the base wall portion 501b and below the ball shooting unit 550. located in That is, in the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball discharge port 600d opens rightward behind the base wall portion 501b and at a position lower than the ball launching unit 550. As shown in FIG. This ball discharge port 600d communicates with a ball lifting inlet passage 651 of a ball lifting unit 650 which will be described later.

The circulating ball path unit 600 of this embodiment includes a circulating ball shortage sensor 621 for detecting that the number of stored game balls B (circulating balls) is insufficient, and a stored game ball B (circulating balls). and a circulating sphere excess sensor 622 for detecting that there is an excess of circulating spheres (see FIG. 67).

The circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is provided downstream of the gauge portion 620 in the meandering ball passage 604 . It should be noted that the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 may be provided near the upstream of the ball removal shutter 615 . Circulating ball excess sensor 622 is provided near the upstream end of gauge portion 620 in meandering ball passage 604 . The circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 are connected to the frame control board 740 via the circulating ball path relay board 617 .

Although the details will be described later, when the number of game balls B is appropriate, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 detects the game balls B for a predetermined time (eg, 80 ms) or more, and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 detects the game balls B for a predetermined time ( For example, 80 ms) or more will not be detected. When the number of game balls B is insufficient, neither the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 nor the circulating ball excess sensor 622 detects the game balls B for a predetermined time (for example, 80 ms) or longer. On the other hand, when the number of game balls B is excessive, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 both detect the game balls B for a predetermined time (for example, 80 ms) or longer. In addition, when the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 does not detect the game ball B for a predetermined time (eg, 80 ms) or more, and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 detects the game ball B for a predetermined time (eg, 80 ms) or longer, the circulating balls Ball clogging including iron balls SB mixed in between the insufficient number of balls sensor 621 and the excess number of circulating balls sensor 622 has occurred.

Here, the reason for the predetermined time k80 ms as a threshold value for detecting the presence or absence of game ball B will be described. For example, on the circulation route R, the positions where sensors such as the circulation ball excess sensor 622, the circulation ball shortage sensor 621, the lifting entrance sensor 653, the lifting exit sensor 654, the firing front sensor 704, etc. are placed It is placed at the stopping position of the game ball B when the upper unit 650, the ball feeding unit 700, etc. are stopped. This position is the position where the next game ball B is positioned every time one game ball B is sent. Therefore, the game ball B is detected here by a detection method of whether or not it has been detected for 80 ms or longer. Since it takes about 50 ms for the game ball B to be detected as it rolls on a slope with an inclination of about 5 degrees, a margin of 80 ms is added to detect that the game ball B is present at that position. is detected. In other words, this value of 80 ms is a practical value obtained by experiment.

Thus, by combining the detection states of the game balls B by the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the frame control board 740 automatically judges the amount of the game balls B, the ball clogging, etc., and notifies them. Is possible.

In the above-described embodiment, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 are provided. may be substituted with the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, and the foul ball sensor 607.

[4-4a. ball clogging mechanism]
Next, in the circulation ball path unit 600, as shown in FIG. 45, a ball clogging elimination mechanism 630 may be provided to facilitate the elimination of ball clogging at the out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606. FIG. FIG. 45(a) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged main part of a cross section of the rear surface of the circulation ball path unit attached to the body frame, cut at the position of the out-ball sensor with the cover member of the ball elimination mechanism closed. (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the cover member is opened in (a).

The ball clogging elimination mechanism 630 has a cover member 631 that can be opened and closed on the wall above the out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606 in the ball receiving front member 611 and the ball receiving rear member 612 in the circulation ball path unit 600. It is. The lid member 631 is closed in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 45(a). The lid member 631 is held in a closed state by locking with locking claws (not shown).

This ball clogging elimination mechanism 630 is such that when ball clogging occurs in the out ball passage 601 or the safe ball passage 602, or when an illegal ball B' having a larger diameter than the game ball B is thrown as a fraudulent act, the out ball sensor 605 or the like is activated. It is used to clear them when they become blocked or when they do.

For example, when an illegal ball B' having a larger diameter than the game ball B is thrown from the out port 1008 of the game board 5 and the out ball sensor 605 is blocked, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When the frame substrate unit 730 is opened above, the rear part of the circulation ball path unit 600 is revealed. In this embodiment, a gap into which a finger can be inserted is formed between the portion of the circulation ball path unit 600 where the clogged ball elimination mechanism 630 is provided and the box main body portion 504b of the main body frame speaker box 504. Therefore, the lid member 631 can be opened by releasing the locking claw of the lid member 631 through the gap and rotating the lid member 631 so that the lower end of the lid member 631 moves upward (FIG. 45(b)). ).

By opening the cover member 631, a finger can be inserted into the upper portion of the out-ball sensor 605 in the out-ball passage 601, blocking the out-ball sensor 605. An illegal ball B' can be easily taken out. In this manner, the irregular ball B' can be easily taken out without using a screwdriver to remove the circulating ball path unit 600 which is screwed.

It should be noted that even if the safe ball sensor 606 is blocked by the illegal ball B', the illegal ball B' can be taken out by the same procedure as described above.

In the above description, the clogging mechanism 630 is provided with an openable and closable cover member 631. For example, elastic claws are provided on the ball receiving rear member 612 and the ball receiving front member 611, and the elastic claws are locked. , the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611 may be detachable rearward. In this case, in a normal state, the frame base plate unit 730 is positioned behind the circulation ball path unit 600, and even if the locking of the elastic claws is loosened, the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611 will come off rearward. never. Then, when the out ball sensor 605 is blocked by the illegal ball B', the rear part of the circulation ball path unit 600 appears when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 and then the frame substrate unit 730 is opened. Therefore, the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611 can be easily removed by releasing the locking of the elastic claws attaching the rear ball receiving member 612 and the front ball receiving member 611, and the out ball sensor The illegal ball B' blocking 605 can be easily taken out.

Alternatively, in the ball receiving front member 611 sandwiched between the ball receiving front plate 610 and the ball receiving rear member 612, the portion above the out ball sensor 605 is slid upward and removed as the ball clogging elimination mechanism 630. It is good to be able to do so. In this case, in a normal state, the game board 5 is positioned above the circulating ball path unit 600, and the slidable portion of the ball receiving front member 611 does not move upward due to the action of gravity. When the out-ball sensor 605 is blocked by the illegal ball B', the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4. appears, the slidable portion of the front ball receiving member 611 is slid upward to remove it, thereby making it possible to easily take out the illegal ball B' blocking the out-ball sensor 605.

[4-4b. Ball extraction shutter of the second embodiment]
Next, in the circulating ball path unit 600, as shown in FIG. 46, in the ball removal shutter 615, the magnet 616 may be attached to a portion in front of the opening 615d. FIG. 46(a) is an explanatory side cross-sectional view showing a state in which an iron ball is magnetically attached to the ball shutter at the closed position together with the ball meandering member and the ball tray, and (b) is an explanatory view showing the ball shutter at the open position. (c) is an explanatory view showing a side cross-section together with the ball meandering member and the ball extraction tray in a state where the iron ball is magnetically attached to the bottom surface; It is an explanatory view showing a side cross section together with the ball meandering member and the ball extraction tray in a state where the iron ball is magnetically attached. The ball removal shutter 615 is such that the rear end side of the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 supported by the magnet support portion 615h is aligned with the front inner peripheral surface of the opening 615d.

According to the ball extraction shutter 615 of the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. When the ball release shutter 615 is slid forward from the closed position to the open position, the front end of the iron ball SB magnetically attached to the upper surface of the door portion 615a comes into contact with the front wall of the first transverse portion 613k, and the iron ball SB Only forward movement is blocked. When the ball removal shutter 615 slides further forward, the door portion 615a supporting the lower end of the iron ball SB disappears, and gravity causes the iron ball SB to move downward into the opening 615d. At this time, since the rear end side of the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 coincides with the front inner surface of the opening 615d, the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 (FIG. 46(b)). ).

The iron ball SB tries to move from the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 to the pole side where the magnetic force is strong (here, the lower end surface side), but when the ball removal shutter 615 is in the open position, the ball holder SB moves below the magnet 616. The upper end surface of tray 720 is positioned, and iron ball SB does not move below magnet 616 . Therefore, when the ball extraction shutter 615 is slid to the open position, the iron ball B is positioned at a portion overlapping the opening 615d, and the game ball B on the upstream side of the iron ball SB is located in the opening 615d, that is, the ball extraction opening 613p. There is no downward discharge through the

After the ball removal shutter 615 is slid to the open position, when the ball removal shutter 615 is slid rearward to the closed position, the game ball B on the upstream side of the iron ball SB is prevented from passing through the ball removal opening 613p by the door portion 615a. While blocking, the iron ball SB magnetized on the outer peripheral surface of the magnet 616 moves to the lower surface side of the magnet 616, and the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the lower surface of the magnet 616 (FIG. 46(c)). ). After that, the ball receiving tray 720 is pulled out and removed from the tray insertion recess 501f, and the iron ball SB magnetically attached to the lower surface of the magnet 616 is removed.

In this way, when the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the door portion 615a of the ball removal shutter 615 by the magnet 616, when the ball removal shutter 615 is slid forward and backward, only the magnetically attached iron ball SB is meandering. It can be taken out from the passage 604 .

[4-4c. Spherical Meandering Member of Second Embodiment]
Next, in the circulation ball path unit 600, the meandering ball member 613A of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 49. FIG. FIG. 47(a) is a plan view of the meandering spherical member of the second embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of the meandering spherical member of the second embodiment seen from the front. FIG. 48(a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the part of the surplus ball discharging mechanism in the meandering ball member of the second embodiment, and (b) is the part of the surplus ball discharging mechanism in the meandering ball member of the second embodiment. It is a top view which expands and shows this. FIG. 49(a) is a cross-sectional view of the portion of the surplus ball discharging mechanism in the meandering sphere member of the second embodiment cut in the middle in the front-rear direction, and (b) is a surplus ball discharge in the meandering sphere member of the second embodiment. It is a right side cross-sectional view cut at a portion on the right side of the installation portion of the mechanism.

A meandering sphere member 613A of the second embodiment has the same structure as the meandering sphere member 613 of the first embodiment, except that it is provided with a surplus ball discharge mechanism 640. Parts having the same configuration will be described with the same reference numerals. As with the meandering ball member 613 of the first embodiment, the meandering ball member 613A includes a ball release shutter 615 for removing the game ball B from the meandering ball passage 604, and a meandering cover 614 covering the meandering ball member 613A from above. and are attached. A gauge portion 620 including an upper gauge seal 620a, a middle gauge seal 620b, and a lower gauge seal 620c is provided on the upper surface of the meandering cover 614 (see FIG. 44).

The meandering ball member 613A extends in the left-right direction so that the right end side is lowered while meandering back and forth, forming a meandering ball passage 604 in which a large number of game balls B can be stored. As shown in FIG. 47 and the like, the spherical meandering member 613A includes a first straight portion 613a that slopes down toward the front with the rear portion serving as an upstream end, and a downstream end (front end) of the first straight portion 613a. ), the first folded portion 613b is bent so as to be further lowered rearward after being bent to the right, and the first straight portion is lowered rearward from the downstream end (rear end) of the first folded portion 613b. A second straight portion 613c that extends to a position near the rear end of 613a, and a second straight portion 613c that is bent rightward from the downstream end (rear end) of the second straight portion 613c and then further bent forward to be lower. It has a second folded portion 613d and a third straight portion 613e extending forward from the downstream end (front end) of the second folded portion 613d to the same position as the front end of the second straight portion 613c. .

Further, the spherical meandering member 613A has a third folded portion 613f that is bent to the right from the downstream end (front end) of the third straight portion 613e and then further bent to be lower rearward, and a third folded portion 613f. A fourth straight portion 613g extending from the downstream end (rear end) to the same position as the rear end of the third straight portion 613e so as to be lower rearward, and a right side from the downstream end (rear end) of the fourth straight portion 613g. The fourth folded portion 613h, which is bent forward and then bent further forward, and the downstream end (front end) of the fourth folded portion 613h, the same as the front end of the fourth straight portion 613g so as to be lowered forward. and a fifth orthogonal portion 613i extending to a position.

Further, the sphere meandering member 613A has a first bent portion 613j that bends downward to the right from the downstream end (front end) of the fifth straight portion 613i, and A first transverse portion 613k extending downward to the right, a second bent portion 613l bending downward from the downstream end (right end) of the first transverse portion 613k, and a second bend A sixth straight portion 613m extending from the downstream end (rear end) of the portion 613l to a position near the downstream end of the fifth straight portion 613i so as to be lowered rearward, and the downstream end (rear end) of the sixth straight portion 613m. ), a second transverse portion 613o extending from the downstream end (right end) of the third bent portion 613n to the right, It has An opening at the downstream end of the second transverse portion 613o forms a ball discharge port 600d that opens rightward.

In the meandering ball member 613A, the opening of the downstream end of the safe ball passage 602 is positioned above the rear end of the first straight portion 613a, and the opening of the downstream end of the out ball passage 601 is positioned in front of it. Further, the opening of the downstream end of the foul ball passage 603 is positioned above the rear end of the second straight portion 613c. That is, the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, and the foul ball sensor 607 are provided upstream of the meandering ball member 613A.

In addition, the ball meandering member 613A includes a ball outlet 613p that penetrates vertically in the first transverse portion 613k, and a plurality of slits that are provided through the rolling surface (bottom surface) on which the game ball B rolls. 613t and. Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the meandering ball member 613A extends forward and backward along the left and right edges of the ball outlet 613p on the lower surface of the first transverse portion 613k and projects downward. Rail portions 613q, support pieces 613r protruding from lower ends of the pair of rail portions 613q so as to approach each other, and locking portions 613s provided on side surfaces of the pair of rail portions 613q facing each other. , (see FIG. 41).

A ball extraction port 613p of the meandering ball member 613A is closed by a ball removal shutter 615 so as to be openable and closable, similarly to the meandering ball member 613 of the first embodiment. The pair of rail portions 613q extends rearward from the ball outlet 613p. The pair of rail portions 613q supports the ball removal shutter 615 so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction. The two support pieces 613r prevent the ball shutter 615 from falling. Also, the two support pieces 613r protrude from the respective rail portions 613q at the ball outlet 613p. Thereby, even if the load of the game ball B acts on the ball pull-out shutter 615 through the ball pull-out port 613p, the ball pull-out shutter 615 can be sufficiently supported, and the ball pull-out shutter 615 is prevented from falling off. The lock portion 613s can hold the ball pull-out shutter 615 at the open position by locking the lock protrusion 615f of the ball pull-out shutter 615. As shown in FIG.

The slit 613t of the meandering ball member 613A penetrates downward to a size that does not hinder the circulation of the game ball B, and can discharge garbage, dust, etc. in the meandering ball passage 604. The slits 613t provided at the folded portion and the bent portion are provided at the outer portion of the curve.

As shown in FIG. 47 and the like, the ball meandering member 613A is provided with a surplus ball discharging mechanism 640 from the middle of the second folded portion 613d to the third straight portion 613e. The surplus ball discharge mechanism 640 automatically removes excess game balls B to the lower ball receiving tray when game balls B are supplied (replenished) in excess of an appropriate amount to the circulation ball path unit 600. 720 to make the amount of game balls B (the number of balls) appropriate.

More specifically, the surplus ball discharge mechanism 640 includes a passage dividing portion 641 that divides the meandering ball passage 604 into a downstream first passage portion 604a and an upstream second passage portion 604b, and a passage dividing portion 641. A bridging portion 642 connecting the first passage portion 604a and the second passage portion 604b so as to straddle, a widened portion 643 provided near the bridging portion 642 in the first passage portion 604a, and the second passage portion 604b and an alignment portion 644 provided at a site near the bridging portion 642 .

The passage dividing portion 641 is provided in the portion of the third straight portion 613e in the meandering ball passage 604, and is a distance longer than the diameter D of the game ball B with respect to the circulation direction of the game ball B (for example, the diameter D of the game ball B The spherical serpentine path 604 is divided by a distance of 1 to 2 times the diameter D). The passage dividing portion 641 is open downward, and the side walls on both sides are composed of the side wall of the second straight portion 613c and the side wall of the fourth straight portion 613g. In other words, the passage dividing portion 641 is configured to penetrate downward through the bottom wall of the serpentine spherical passage 604 . In addition, the portion of the passage dividing portion 641 is covered with a meandering cover 614 from above. Therefore, in the passage dividing portion 641, the game ball B can be discharged only downward.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, above the downstream end of the passage dividing portion 641 (the upstream end of the first passage portion 604a), it extends to the left and right of the upper gauge seal 620a on the upstream side of the characters "up to here". The part of the line is located. That is, the upstream end of the first passage portion 604a is the upper limit of the appropriate amount of game balls B to be stored.

The bridging portion 642 connects the first passage portion 604a and the second passage portion 604b in a bridge shape so as to straddle the passage dividing portion 641, and the top surface thereof is provided so that the game ball B can roll thereon. The bridging portion 642 extends with a width smaller than the diameter D of the game ball B (for example, a width of 1/4 to 1/2 of the diameter D). The upper surface (rolling surface) of the bridging portion 642 is provided with a guide groove 642a extending so as to connect the first passage portion 604a and the second passage portion 604b. The guide groove 642a is formed in a V shape with a slightly recessed center. As a result, the game balls B can be gathered at the widthwise center of the bridging portion 642 , and the game balls B are less likely to spill from the bridge-shaped bridging portion 642 .

As shown in FIG. 48 and the like, the guide groove 642a extends from the bridging portion 642 toward the inside of the second passage portion 604b. More specifically, the guide groove 642a extends upstream from the bridging portion 642 to near the boundary between the third straight portion 613e and the second folded portion 613d, and partially overlaps an alignment portion 644 described later. This guide groove 642a is provided at a position higher than the bottom surface of the third direct portion 613e (second passage portion 604b), and the third direct portion 613e is arranged so that the game ball B does not bounce on the step at the upstream end. It is inclined more than the bottom surface and connected smoothly so as to gradually rise from the bottom surface.

The widened portion 643 of the first passage portion 604a is formed wider than the width of the downstream side of the first passage portion 604a (for example, 1.1 to 1.2 times the width of the downstream side). In addition, the width of the widened portion 643 is set to 2 times or less the diameter D of the game ball B, preferably 1.5 times or less. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of spheroids at the portion of the widened portion 643 . Moreover, the length of the widened portion 643 in the distribution direction of the game ball B is the length of about one game ball B. As shown in FIG. The widened portion 643 makes it easier to receive the game ball B rolling on the bridge portion 642 to the first passage portion 604a.

The portion of the downstream end of the widened portion 643 in the first passage portion 604a (the portion of the boundary between the widened portion 643 and the downstream side) is connected by a smooth curve so as not to form sharp corners. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the first passage portion 604a through the installation portion 642 can be prevented from bouncing back to the installation portion 642 side, and the game ball B that bounces back is divided into passages. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the amount (the number of balls) of the game balls B that have fallen from the portion 641 and are circulating (stored).

The alignment portion 644 of the second passage portion 604b is provided in a length range from the vicinity of the center of the second folded portion 613d to the middle of the third direct portion 613e, and the game balls B can be aligned in a row. is. The aligning portion 644 is formed in a V-shaped cross section (inverted trapezoidal shape narrowing downward) so that a portion below the center of the game ball B contacts the game ball B at two points. As a result, in the aligning portion 644, the game balls B are restricted from moving in the width direction of the second passage portion 604b, and can be aligned in a line and flowed down (circulated).

In the alignment portion 644, the linear portion of the third straight portion 613e up to the passage dividing portion 641 overlaps the portion of the guide groove 642a extending upstream from the top surface of the bridging portion 642. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 48 and the like, the upstream end side of the alignment portion 644 rises smoothly from the bottom surface of the first passage portion 604a so that there is no step (edge) at the boundary portion. In addition, on the downstream end side of the aligning portion 644, the game ball B, which is in contact with the inclined surface having a V-shaped cross section from the part overlapping the guide groove 642a to the downstream end, gradually moves into the guide groove 642a. It is bent toward the bottom surface side (downward) of the third straight portion 613e so as to approach. As a result, the game ball B can be delivered from the aligning portion 644 where it bounces to the guide groove 642a, and the flow-down speed (circulation speed) of the game ball B in the aligning portion 644 and the guide groove 642a does not decrease.

Here, although the details will be described later, the ball receiving tray 720 provided below the meandering ball member 613A will be briefly described. The ball receiving tray 720 is provided below the circulation ball path unit 600 and is for receiving the game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600. It is also possible to receive the game ball B that falls from the bridge portion 642 and is ejected from the passage dividing portion 641 .

As shown in FIG. 48, the bottom wall of the ball receiving tray 720 provided below the meandering ball member 613A is inclined so that the left front end side is the lowest. The passage dividing portion 641 of the surplus ball discharging mechanism 640 is provided at a portion on the left side of the center of the ball receiving tray 720 in the left-right direction and on the rear side of the center in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the game ball B ejected from the passage dividing portion 641 and dropped onto the bottom wall of the ball receiving tray 720 rolls toward the left front end side due to the inclination of the bottom wall and moves from directly below the passage dividing portion 641. .

The bottom wall of the ball receiving tray 720 is formed in an upper bottom shape and does not come into contact with the bottom surface of the tray insertion recess 501f. As a result, when the game ball B drops and abuts against the bottom wall of the ball receiving tray 720, the bottom wall acts like a drum and makes a sound, making it possible to notify that the game ball B has fallen.

Next, the action of the surplus ball discharge mechanism 640 will be described. This surplus ball discharging mechanism 640 automatically discharges and stores the game balls B replenished in excess of the appropriate amount to the ball receiving tray 720 below when the game balls B are replenished during maintenance or the like. This is to prevent the number of game balls B from becoming excessive.

First, the flow of game balls B circulating in the pachinko machine 1 at the surplus ball discharge mechanism 640 in the circulation ball path unit 600 will be described. The game balls B stored in the ball meandering passage 604 (first passage portion 604a) of the circulation ball path unit 600 pass through the ball lifting entrance passage 651 of the ball lifting unit 650, and then are moved by the ball lifting mechanism 660. It is lifted and sent to the ball feeding unit 700 from the ball lifting outlet passage 652 . Then, the game ball B is sent from the ball feeding unit 700 to the ball shooting unit 550, and is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 toward the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 160 of the player.

A game ball B that is shot from the ball shooting unit 550, reaches the game area 5a, and wins a winning slot provided in the game area 5a is ejected from the game board 5 as a safe ball. The safe ball is received by the safe ball socket 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600, detected by the safe ball sensor 606 in the safe ball passage 602, and sent to the meandering ball passage 604. On the other hand, the game ball B that has reached the game area 5a but has not been accepted by the winning opening is ejected from the game board 5 as an out ball. Then, the out ball is received by the out ball socket 600 a of the circulation ball path unit 600 , detected by the out ball sensor 605 in the out ball passage 601 , and sent to the meandering ball passage 604 . Furthermore, the game ball B that has been shot from the ball shooting unit 550 but has not reached the game area 5a is ejected from the foul unit 570 as a foul ball. Then, the foul ball is received by the foul ball receiving port 600 c of the circulation ball path unit 600 , detected by the foul ball sensor 607 in the foul ball passage 603 , and sent to the meandering ball passage 604 .

The game ball B sent to the meandering ball passage 604 constituted by the meandering ball member 613A first flows through the second passage portion 604b. Then, the game ball B flowing down the second passage portion 604b is moved in the width direction of the second passage portion 604b by the alignment portion 644 of the surplus ball discharge mechanism 640 provided near the downstream end of the second passage portion 604b. Its movement (swing) is restricted, and it flows down along the central axis of the second passage portion 604b.

When the game ball B enters the alignment part 644 of the surplus ball discharge mechanism 640, the alignment part 644 consisting of a V-shaped groove is raised so that a step does not occur from the bottom surface of the second folded part 613d. The game ball B does not bounce at the boundary with the aligning part 644, and the game ball B can enter the aligning part 644 smoothly without lowering the circulation speed.

By entering the alignment portion 644, the game ball B flows down while being in contact with a pair of inclined slopes of the V-shaped groove. , the traveling direction of the game ball B is straightened toward the bridge portion 642. - 特許庁Then, the game ball B is delivered from the aligning portion 644 to the guide groove 642a, and due to its straightness, it flows straight down along the central axis of the erecting portion 642 without falling from the erecting portion 642, and is transferred to the second passage. It is transferred from the portion 604b to the first passage portion 604a across the passage dividing portion 641. As shown in FIG. Thereby, the game balls B can be circulated without reducing the number of the game balls B stored (enclosed) in the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

Next, the operation of the surplus ball discharging mechanism 640 when replenishing the game balls B to the pachinko machine 1 (circulating ball path unit 600) for maintenance or the like will be described. When replenishing game balls B, for example, the door frame 3 is opened, the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, and the ball lifting mechanism 660 of the ball lifting unit 650 is stopped. A game ball B to be replenished is thrown into an out ball receiving port 600a or a safe ball receiving port 600b opened upward on the bottom surface. In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, when the game ball B to be replenished is thrown into the out port 1008 of the game board 5, the game ball B is received by the out ball socket 600a. Also, when a game ball B to be replenished is thrown into a winning opening such as the general winning opening 2001 or the first starting opening 2003, the game ball B is received by the safe ball receiving opening 600b.

When replenishing the game balls B as described above, the power supply (power switch 751) is turned off, and the game balls B are replenished by inserting the game balls B from the outlet 1008 of the game board 5, the prize winning opening, or the like. As a result, since the power is turned off, even if the replenished game ball B passes through the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, etc., the game ball B will not be detected, and the base monitor 1311 will not be detected. It does not affect calculations. A ball replenishing port for supplying game balls B to the second passage portion 604a of the meandering ball passage 604 may be provided. As a result, even if the game ball B is replenished from the ball replenishment port in a state where the power is not turned off, it will not be detected by the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, and the like.

A game ball B thrown into the out ball receiving port 600a or the safe ball receiving port 600b passes through the out ball passage 601 and the safe ball passage 602, and passes through the second passage portion of the meandering ball passage 604 constituted by the meandering ball member 613A. Enter 604b. The game ball B that has entered the second passage portion 604b crosses the passage dividing portion 641 by the bridging portion 642 and flows down to the first passage portion 604a, as described above. Since the ball lifting mechanism 660 is stopped, the game balls B are accumulated in the first passage portion 604a.

Since the width of this first passage portion 604a (ball meandering passage 604) is slightly wider than the diameter D of the game ball B, the stored game balls B are pushed to the downstream side. A plurality of game balls B are arranged in a staggered manner so as to alternately contact the side walls, and the plurality of game balls B are not arranged in a straight line. As a result, the ball pressure caused by the plurality of game balls B that are stored can be distributed to the side wall, and the ball pressure caused by the plurality of game balls B can be reduced on the downstream side.

Then, when the first passage portion 604a is filled with a plurality of game balls B, that is, the upper limit of the "appropriate range" indicated by the line on the upstream side of the characters "up to here" on the upper gauge seal 620a When it reaches, the last game ball B stored in the first passage portion 604a is in contact with the side wall of the widened portion 643 as shown in FIG. away from the central axis of 642. In this state, when the game balls B aligned in a line by the alignment portion 644 of the upstream second passage portion 604b flow down across the installation portion 642, the game balls B are right behind the last game ball B. It comes into contact with a part away from the Since the tangent line of the part away from directly behind the game ball B is not perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B but is inclined, the inclination causes the distribution direction (progression direction) is slanted and falls from the bridge 642 . In this way, since the widened portion 643 is provided in the first passage portion 604a, the game ball B exceeding the upper limit of the proper range of the amount of storage is discharged from the installation portion 643 as compared with the case where the widened portion 643 is not provided. It can make it easier to fall.

Even if the game ball B does not fall from the installation portion 642, the game ball B rolling from the upstream side is aligned in a straight line by the guide groove 642a and the aligning portion 644, so that the game ball B on the installation portion 642 The ball pressure that presses downstream becomes stronger. At this time, since the first passage portion 604a is filled with the game ball B, the game ball B on the installation portion 642 cannot move to the downstream side. , and the game ball B falls from the installation portion 642 . The game ball B that has fallen (dropped) from the installation portion 642 is discharged downward through the passage dividing portion 641 and collected in the ball receiving tray 720 below.

In addition, since the ball receiving tray 720 has a bottom wall as an upper base, when the game balls B discharged from the surplus ball discharging mechanism 640 come into contact with each other, a drum-like sound is produced, and the first passage portion 604a is closed. It is possible to inform the operator that the bowl is full (the upper limit of the "appropriate range"), and to stop throwing in more game balls B.例文帳に追加

From the above, according to the surplus ball discharge mechanism 640 of the present embodiment, since it is possible to automatically discharge excess game balls B with respect to the amount of storage in the first passage portion 604a, the game balls B is not stored more than the upper limit of the "appropriate range", and the game balls B are not in an excessive state. Therefore, when the excess game balls B are discharged, the number of circulating game balls B (circulating balls) can be maintained at a proper number without requiring any power for detecting and discharging the game balls B.

In addition, when the upper limit of the "appropriate range" is reached, the extra game balls B can be automatically discharged, so that the circulating ball excess sensor 622, which will be described later, can be omitted, which reduces the cost of the pachinko machine 1. increase can be suppressed. In addition, you may make it use together with the circulating ball excess sensor 622. FIG.

By the way, during a game in which the game balls B are circulating, docking the pachinko machine 1 causes the game balls B to fall from the installation portion 642 to the passage dividing portion 641, thereby reducing the accumulated game balls B. Fraud is assumed, but in this embodiment, countermeasures against thumping are taken. More specifically, since the aligning portion 644 is formed into a V-shaped groove so as to contact the game ball B obliquely, when the meandering ball member 613A (the side wall of the meandering ball passage 604) shakes due to the pounding, the side wall The external force from the ball B can be released obliquely upward with respect to the traveling direction of the game ball B, and the pounding effect can be reduced by making it difficult for the game ball B to come off the center of the V-shaped groove.

Also, in the guide grooves 642a of the aligning portion 644 and the bridge portion 642, the ends thereof are smoothly connected from the bottom surface or the like, and by preventing the edges from protruding, the speed of the game ball B is prevented from decreasing. Therefore, the passage dividing portion 641 can be quickly crossed (the bridging portion 642 can be passed through), and the timing at which the thump can occur can be shortened as much as possible. Furthermore, since the widened portion 643 is provided at the upstream end of the first passage portion 604a (the portion of the boundary with the bridge portion 642), even if the game ball B deviates from the center axis of the bridge portion 642 due to a thump, the game ball B can be received and the pounding effect can be reduced.

In addition, since the passage dividing portion 641 is provided on the downstream side of the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, and the foul ball sensor 607, if the game ball B falls from the installation portion 642 due to a knock, the passage dividing portion 641 is ejected, since the game ball B has been detected by the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, the foul ball sensor 607, etc., it does not affect the number of balls held by the player.

Furthermore, since the upper ball receiving tray 720 is provided below the meandering ball member 613A, if the game ball B falls from the installation portion 642 due to a thump or the like and is discharged to the ball receiving tray 720, the game ball B Since a drum-like sound is produced by the contact, it is possible to notify the staff of the game hall or the like that the fraudulent act is being carried out.

In the above-described embodiment, the passage dividing portion 641 has a form that penetrates downward through the bottom wall of the meandering ball passage 604, but is not limited to this. The passage dividing portion 641 may be formed so as to cut through one of the side walls.

In the above-described embodiment, the bridge portion 642 has a width smaller than the diameter D of the game ball B. However, it is not limited to this. The bridging portion 642 may be used.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the guide groove 642a of the bridging portion 642 has a V-shaped cross section, but is not limited to this. Alternatively, it may be a recessed groove with a width smaller than the diameter of the game ball.

In the above-described embodiment, the aligning portion 644 has a trapezoidal shape with a cross section narrowing downward so that two points below the center of the game ball are in contact with each other. ``V-shaped cross-section so that it touches at two points below the center of the game ball'', ``The cross-section so that it touches at two points below the center of the game ball Concave form", "a form consisting of a pair of ridges separated in the width direction so as to contact at two points below the center of the game ball", and the like.

[4-5. Ball lifting unit]
The ball lifting unit 650 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 50 to 59 and the like. FIG. 50(a) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the body frame as seen from the front left, (b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in the body frame as seen from the front right, and (c) is the body frame. 1 is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit in FIG. FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view of the ball lifting unit showing a state in which the ball polishing motor base and the cassette pressing piece are opened and the ball polishing cassette is removed. FIG. 52(a) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit without the ball rolling cassette installed, and (b) is a ball lifting unit shown with the ball rolling cassette with the ball rolling motor base and the cassette pressing piece opened. and (c) is a plan view of the ball lifting unit with the ball polishing cassette attached.

FIG. 53(a) is an explanatory diagram showing how the door frame is closed with the kuma cassette locked incompletely, and (b) shows the movement of the door frame in the closing direction from the state of (a). FIG. 4C is an explanatory view showing a state in which the protrusion of the door frame is in contact with the tip of the Kuma motor base, and (c) shows a state in which the door frame is closed from the state of (b) and the Kuma cut is locked. It is a diagram. FIG. 54 is a front view showing an enlarged main part with the ball polishing cassette removed from the ball lifting unit attached to the body frame. FIG. 55(a) is a right side view showing the main parts of the ball polishing mechanism and the ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit, (b) is a rear view showing the main parts of the ball lifting mechanism, and (c). 4] is a plan view of the main part of the ball lifting mechanism as viewed from the arrow A in (b). [Fig.

Furthermore, FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the lifting spiral shaft and the polishing cloth in the ball lifting unit. FIG. 57(a) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit as seen from the rear left along with an enlarged view of the lifting inlet sensor and the lifting outlet sensor. (b) is a perspective view of the ball lifting unit. FIG. 4 is a plan cross-sectional view cut at a sensor site; FIG. 58 is an explanatory view schematically showing parts before and after a sphere sensor made up of a photosensor in the sphere passage. FIG. 59(a) is a perspective view of the kuma cassette of the ball lifting unit as seen from the front left, (b) is a perspective view of the kuma cassette as seen from the rear right, and (c) is the center of the kuma cassette in the left-right direction. It is a right side cross-sectional view cut at .

The ball lifting unit 650 is for sending the game balls B discharged from the game board 5 and the foul unit 570 and circulated through the circulating ball path unit 600 to the ball shooting unit 550 via the ball sending unit 700 . The ball lifting unit 650 is attached to a ball lifting unit attachment portion 501j provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

The ball lifting unit 650 includes a ball lifting mechanism 660 for lifting the game ball B, and a ball lifting inlet passage 651 for supplying the game ball B sent from the circulation ball path unit 600 to the ball lifting mechanism 660. , a ball lifting exit passage 652 that supplies the game ball B lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660 to the ball feeding unit 700, and a ball lifting entrance passage 651 provided in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 to remove the game ball B circulating. A lifting inlet sensor 653 for detection and a lifting outlet sensor 654 for detecting the game ball B which is provided in the ball lifting outlet passage 652 and is circulating are provided.

In addition, the ball lifting unit 650 includes a ball lifting entrance ground sheet metal 655 provided so as to be able to contact the game ball B in the ball lifting entrance passage 651, and a ball lifting exit passage 652 so as to be able to contact the game ball B. A sphere lifting outlet ground metal plate 656 provided, a sphere lifting relay board 657 relaying connection with the frame control board 740, and a sphere lifting unit 650 are lifted by a ball lifting mechanism 660. and a ball polishing mechanism 680 for polishing the game ball B that is present.

First, the ball lifting mechanism 660 of the ball lifting unit 650 includes a lifting spiral shaft 661 extending vertically and having a spiral lifting groove 661a on the outer peripheral surface, and a lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661. a motor gear 663 that is engaged with the shaft gear 662 and is rotatable around an axis perpendicular to the axis of the lifting spiral shaft 661; and a lifting motor index 665 having a detection portion 665a provided so as to be cut out in a part of the circumferential direction extending like a flange from the lower end of the shaft gear 662. , and a lifting motor index sensor 666 capable of detecting a detection portion 665 a of the lifting motor index 665 .

The sphere lifting mechanism 660 includes a motor base sheet metal 667 to which a lifting motor 664 is attached and which rotatably supports a motor gear 663, and a motor base sheet metal 667 to which a lifting spiral shaft is attached. 661 rotatably and mounted on the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a lifting mechanism cover 669.

The lifting spiral shaft 661 is provided with a spiral lifting groove 661a having a depth capable of accommodating the game balls B in a line on the outer peripheral surface. The lifting spiral shaft 661, when viewed from above in its axial direction (see FIG. 55(c)), rotates clockwise so that the game ball B can be lifted. An upper groove 661a is formed. The pitch of the spiral of the lifting groove 661a is formed longer near the upper and lower ends than between them. The lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotatably supported by a lifting mechanism base 668 and a lifting mechanism cover 669 . The uplift spiral shaft 661 has a rotation axis inclined with respect to the vertical so that the upper end is positioned to the right of the lower end when viewed from the front. As a result, the upper end side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 can be moved away from the ball feeding unit to the right, and the length of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 is relatively lengthened to increase the amount of game balls B stored. becomes possible. In this embodiment, the rotation axis of the lifting spiral shaft 661 is inclined at an angle of 12 degrees with respect to the vertical.

Furthermore, the lifting spiral shaft 661 will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 56, the lifting spiral shaft 661 includes a small diameter portion 661b having a bottom diameter D1 equal to the bottom diameter (bottom diameter) of the lifting groove 661a, and a large diameter portion having a bottom diameter D2 larger than the small diameter portion 661b. 661 c , and the large-diameter portion 661 c is provided in an axially intermediate portion overlapping the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing cassette 681 . In addition, between the small-diameter portion 661b and the large-diameter portion 661c of the lifting spiral shaft 661, the diameter is configured to change gradually.

In addition, the lifting spiral shaft 661 has a spiral pitch P2 at the large diameter portion 661c smaller than a spiral pitch P1 at the small diameter portion 661b. As the pitch of the spiral becomes smaller, the lifting speed of the game ball B becomes slower.

The lifting spiral shaft 661 is arranged so that a gap S1 smaller than the diameter D of the game ball B is formed between the large diameter portion 661c and the surface of the polishing cloth 682 in the ball polishing cassette 681.

By the way, in the lifting spiral shaft 661, if the bottom diameter of the lifting groove 661a is the bottom diameter D1 of the small diameter portion 661b over the entire length, the bottom diameter D1 is smaller than the bottom diameter D2 of the large diameter portion 661c. , the gap between the bottom of the lifting groove 661a and the polishing cloth 682 increases. Therefore, even if the game ball B lifted by the lifting groove 661a is to be polished by the polishing cloth 682 by rotating the lifting spiral shaft 661, the gap between the polishing cloth 682 and the game ball B is increased so that the game ball B cannot be lifted by the lifting groove. The ball escapes to the bottom side of 661a, and the area of contact between the game ball B and the polishing cloth 682 is reduced, resulting in a decrease in polishing efficiency.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the bottom diameter D2 of the lifting groove 661a is set to the bottom diameter D1 of the small diameter portion 661b at the portion overlapping the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing cassette 681 in the axially intermediate portion of the lifting spiral shaft 661. Since the large diameter portion 661c has a larger diameter than the small diameter portion 661b, the gap from the bottom of the lifting groove 661a to the surface of the polishing cloth 682 in the large diameter portion 661c can be made smaller than the gap at the portion of the small diameter portion 661b. Further, in this embodiment, the gap S1 from the large diameter portion 661c to the polishing cloth 682 is made smaller than the diameter D of the game ball B. As shown in FIG. For these reasons, the game ball B cannot escape to the bottom side of the lifting groove 661a at the portion of the large diameter portion 661c, and the game ball B can be pressed against the polishing cloth 682 by the bottom of the lifting groove 661a. The polishing cloth 682 can be recessed together with the ball polishing sponge 683 provided on the back side of the cloth 682 . Thereby, the contact area of the polishing cloth 682 with respect to the game ball B can be increased, and the polishing efficiency of the game ball B can be improved.

In the lifting spiral shaft 661 of the present embodiment, the spiral pitch P2 in the large diameter portion 661c overlapping the polishing cloth 682 is smaller than the spiral pitch P1 in the small diameter portion 661b. The lifting speed of the game ball B at 661c can be slowed down. As a result, the contact time of the game ball B with the polishing cloth 682 can be lengthened, so that the game ball B can be polished more carefully.

Furthermore, the lifting spiral shaft 661 of this embodiment has a diameter that gradually changes between the small-diameter portion 661b and the large-diameter portion 661c. can be avoided, and the load in the lifting operation can be reduced.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 55(b), the lifting spiral shaft 661 of this embodiment is inclined at an angle of 12 degrees with respect to the vertical, so that it obliquely intersects the polishing cloth 682. Therefore, the entire width of the polishing cloth 682 can be used to polish the game ball B, and the polishing cloth 682 can be efficiently used for polishing.

Although the lifting spiral shaft 661 has the large-diameter portion 661c in the middle in the axial direction, it is not limited to this. The large-diameter portion 661c may be provided up to .

The shaft gear 662 is a spur gear (worm wheel gear). Motor gear 663 is a worm gear. As a result, even if the spiral shaft 661 tries to rotate due to the load acting when a large number of game balls B are accommodated in the lifting groove 661a of the lifting spiral shaft 661, the shaft gear 662 is engaged. Rotation can be prevented by a motor gear 663 that is a worm gear. In addition, since the motor gear 663 is a worm gear, even if the lifting spiral shaft 661 tries to rotate due to the inertia when the driving of the lifting motor 664 is stopped, the rotation can be stopped immediately, and the game ball B can be overturned. Shoot can be prevented.

In this embodiment, the shaft gear 662 is made of POM (polyacetal resin), and the motor gear 663 is made of fiber reinforced plastic containing polyamide carbon fiber. This makes it difficult for the motor gear 663, which is a worm gear, to chip. Note that the motor gear 663 may be made of metal.

Lift motor 664 is a DC motor. The lifting motor index 665 is formed integrally with the shaft gear 662 in a flange shape. The detection portion 665a of the lifting motor index 665 is provided so as to cut out an angle range of 45 degrees with respect to the entire circumference. The lift motor index sensor 666 is a photosensor. The lifting motor index sensor 666 is in a state of receiving light at the detecting portion 665a in the lifting motor index 665, and is in a state of not receiving light at portions other than the detecting portion 665a. This makes it possible to detect the rotational position of the lifting spiral shaft 661 via the lifting motor index 665 .

Although details will be described later, the lifting spiral shaft 661 rotates once when the rotating shaft of the lifting motor 664 rotates 32 times due to the shaft gear 662 and the motor gear 663 . In the lifting motor index sensor 666, when the lifting motor 664 rotates 28 times after being positioned at a portion other than the detecting portion 665a and entering the non-light-receiving state, it reaches the detecting portion 665a and enters the light-receiving state. When the lifting motor 664 rotates four more times after this, it leaves the detecting portion 665a and enters a non-light-receiving state. In this embodiment, the origin is the position where the lifting motor 664 rotates two times after reaching the detector 665a and entering the light receiving state. In other words, the center of the detection portion 665a is the origin of rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661. As shown in FIG.

The motor base metal plate 667 has the lifting motor 664 attached to the left end side in front view, and rotatably supports the right end of the motor gear 663 on the right end side. The motor base sheet metal 667 is attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 at its upper end and attached to the lifting mechanism cover 669 at its lower end.

The lifting mechanism base 668 accommodates the lifting spiral shaft 661 in cooperation with the lifting mechanism cover 669 and rotatably supports the lifting spiral shaft 661 . The lifting mechanism base 668 has a kuma mouth 668a that penetrates forward and backward so that the lifting spiral shaft 661 faces forward and has a size that does not allow the game ball B to pass through, and is recessed from the front to the rear and has a kuma on the bottom. It has a cassette mounting recess 668b in which the mouth 668a is open and the rear end side of the ball polishing cassette 681 can be accommodated. The kuma mouth 668a extends vertically with a width narrower than the diameter of the game ball B. This kuma mouth 668a is provided so that a part of the game ball B lifted by the lifting spiral shaft 661 protrudes forward, and the portion of the game ball B that projects forward from the kuma mouth 668a However, the game ball B is polished by contacting the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing cassette 681 in the ball polishing mechanism 680 attached (mounted) to the cassette mounting recess 668b.

The lifting mechanism base 668 is provided with a downstream portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 at a portion to the right of the lifting spiral shaft 661 in the vicinity of the lower end in a front view. A portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 provided in the lifting mechanism base 668 is inclined such that the upstream end opens toward the rear and becomes lower toward the lower end of the left lifting spiral shaft 661 . there is A lifting inlet sensor 653 is attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 at a portion to the right of the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 in front view.

Also, the lifting mechanism base 668 is provided with an upstream portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 near its upper end. The portion of the sphere lifting outlet passage 652 provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 is inclined from the front of the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 to the left in front view and then to the rear. Then, the downstream end opens toward the rear. The sphere-lifting outlet passage 652 slopes leftward from the portion of the lifting mechanism base 668 that opens toward the rear, and then slopes downward toward the front. It is open towards the front. A lifting mechanism base 668 and a lifting mechanism cover 669 cooperate to form this part of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 .

Also, a ball-grinding motor base 686 to which a ball-polishing motor 688 of the ball-polishing mechanism 680 is attached is attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 so as to be rotatable about a vertically extending shaft.

The lifting mechanism cover 669 accommodates the lifting spiral shaft 661 in cooperation with the lifting mechanism base 668 and rotatably supports the lifting spiral shaft 661 . It is attached from behind to the ball lifting unit attachment portion 501j of the portion 501b. A sphere lifting relay board 657 is attached to the rear surface of the lifting mechanism cover 669 .

The lifting mechanism cover 669 is provided with a portion upstream of the portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 . The portion of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 has a downstream end that opens forward at a portion near the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 on the right side in front view, and opens rearward. After extending, it bends leftward and passes behind the lifting spiral shaft 661, then extends obliquely forward and the upstream end opens leftward. In this lifting mechanism cover 669, behind the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661, there is a ball lifting inlet ground sheet metal 655 provided so as to be able to contact the game ball B flowing through the ball lifting inlet passage 651. installed.

Further, the lifting mechanism cover 669 is provided with a portion downstream of the portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 provided on the lifting mechanism base 668 . The portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 provided in the lifting mechanism cover 669 is open rearward at its upstream end, bends leftward when viewed from the front, extends leftward to the left end, and then bends forward. , the downstream end of the front end of the lifting mechanism cover 669 is open forward.

A lifting outlet sensor 654 is attached to the lifting mechanism cover 669 near the left end of the portion of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 that extends leftward in front view. Furthermore, in the lifting mechanism cover 669, a game that flows through the ball lifting outlet passage 652 is located upstream of the ball lifting outlet sensor 654 in the portion extending leftward in the ball lifting outlet passage 652. A sphere lifting exit ground sheet metal 656 is attached so as to be able to contact the sphere B.

Further, the lifting mechanism cover 669 has a supporting protrusion 669a projecting forward from the lifting mechanism base 668 from a portion near the lower center in the vertical direction at the right end, and a front surface of the supporting protrusion 669a penetrating therethrough. and a locking hole 669b in which the 694 is locked. When the sphere lifting unit 650 is attached to the sphere lifting unit mounting portion 501j of the main body frame 4 from the rear, the support protrusion 669a extends to the front side of the base wall portion 501b through the opening 501o passing through the base wall portion 501b. protrude.

The opening (entrance) at the upstream end of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 of the ball lifting unit 650 opens leftward near the lower part of the left side surface of the ball lifting unit 650 . This opening is provided so as to face the ball discharge port 600d of the circulation ball path unit 600 when assembled to the body frame 4 . The ball-lifting inlet passage 651 is inclined downward from the left-end inlet toward the right, and extends to the right of the lifting spiral shaft 661 so as to bypass the rear of the lifting spiral shaft 661 . After that, it folds forward and extends to the vicinity of the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 to the left. In the vicinity of the lifting spiral shaft 661, it is bent in a crank shape so as to turn around to the front side of the lifting spiral shaft 661, and communicates with the lifting groove 661a of the lifting spiral shaft 661 on the front side near the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661. ing.

The ball lifting inlet passage 651 is provided so that the opening at the upstream end faces the ball discharge port 600d forming the opening at the downstream end of the meandering ball passage 604 in the circulating ball passage unit 600. A game ball B that has circulated through the meandering passage 604 is delivered and circulated.

The ball lifting inlet passage 651 is provided with a lifting inlet sensor 653 on the right side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 and a ball lifting inlet ground sheet metal 655 on the rear side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 . is installed.

The sphere lifting outlet passage 652 communicates with the lifting groove 661a on the front side near the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 at its upstream end in the vicinity of the upper end of the ball lifting unit 650. It extends to the rear, extends to the same position as the rear end of the lifting spiral shaft 661, and then bends to the left. From there, it extends leftward near the left end of the ball lifting unit 650 and bends forward, and the downstream end opens forward on the front surface of the ball lifting unit 650 (lifting mechanism cover 669). ing.

The ball lifting exit passage 652 is provided so that the opening at the downstream end thereof faces a ball supply port of a ball feeding unit, which will be described later, so that game balls B can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 700 .

The ball lifting outlet passage 652 is provided with a lifting outlet sensor 654 near the left end of a portion extending leftward near the rear end of the ball lifting unit 650, and on the upstream side (right side) thereof. A sphere lift outlet ground sheet metal 656 is attached to the . The bottom wall of the portion of the ball-lifting exit passage 652 where the ball-lifting exit earth sheet metal 656 is provided is provided with an opening that is large enough not to hinder the circulation of the game ball B. , dust and dirt can be discharged to the outside through the opening.

The lifting entrance sensor 653 detects the presence or absence of the game ball B to be lifted when the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by driving the lifting motor 664 to lift the game ball B. Although the details will be described later, the lift motor 664 is not driven when the game ball B is not detected by the lift entrance sensor 653 .

The lifting exit sensor 654 detects the presence or absence of game balls B supplied to the ball feeding unit. Although the details will be described later, in a state where the game ball B is detected by the lift entrance sensor 653, the game ball B is not detected by the lift exit sensor 654, and a predetermined condition is satisfied (here, the launch By subtraction of a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B by the subtraction sensor 554, the lift motor 664 is driven to rotate the lift spiral shaft 661 and a predetermined number of game balls B are lifted.

The lift entrance sensor 653 and the lift exit sensor 654 are photosensors having a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion. It detects.

Here, the relationship between the ball lifting inlet passage 651, the ball lifting outlet passage 652, and the lifting inlet sensor 653 and the lifting outlet sensor 654 will be described. Here, the relationship between the ball lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting inlet sensor 653 will be described, and the relation between the ball lifting outlet passage 652 and the ball lifting outlet sensor 654 will be omitted because they are the same. As shown in FIGS. 57 and 58, the portion of the sphere lifting inlet passage 651 where the lifting inlet sensor 653 is provided is a V-shaped passage portion 651a having a V-shaped cross section (inverted trapezoidal shape narrowing downward). It is said that In addition, the portion other than the V-shaped passage portion 651a in the upper entrance passage 651 is a U-shaped passage portion 651b having a U-shaped cross section that opens upward.

The sphere lifting outlet passage 652 is the same. is a U-shaped passage portion 652b having a U-shaped cross section that opens upward.

In other words, the V-shaped passage portion 651a and the V-shaped passage portion 652a each have a pair of slanted surfaces with which the game ball B is in contact and which is slanted so that the distance increases upward. In addition, the U-shaped passage portion 651b and the U-shaped passage portion 652b have a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball B, and a pair of sides erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface. a wall surface; The ball feeding passage 703 of the ball feeding unit 700 located downstream of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 is also formed in the same shape as the U-shaped passage portion 651b and the U-shaped passage portion 652b.

By the way, if the cross section of the passage at the position of the lift entrance sensor 653, which is a photo sensor, is made to have a U-shaped cross section that is open upward, the game ball B that circulates will contact the side wall. Scratches, stains, and the like that occur on the side walls of the passage due to exposure may interfere with the light receiving and emitting of the photosensor, resulting in erroneous detection. In addition, in the path having a U-shaped cross section, the position of the game ball B in the width direction of the path is not constant and is not stable, so the detection position by the sensor becomes different, and there is a risk of erroneous detection.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the part of the lifting inlet sensor 653 (lifting outlet sensor 654) is a V-shaped passage 651a (V-shaped passage 652a) having a V-shaped cross section. By holding the game ball B at two points on both oblique sides, the movement in the width direction of the passage can be regulated, and the position of the game ball B in the width direction of the passage is kept constant and stable. be able to. As a result, since the game ball B does not come into contact with the side wall of the passage at the lift entrance sensor 653 (lift exit sensor 654), it is possible to prevent the occurrence of scratches and stains due to the contact of the game ball B. It is possible to eliminate erroneous detection and reliably detect a game ball.

In the above description, the V-shaped passage portion 651a (V-shaped passage portion 652a) having a V-shaped cross section (inverted trapezoidal shape) is shown as the shape of the passage for stabilizing the position of the game ball B with respect to the sensor. A pair of protrusions provided at an interval narrower than the diameter of the game ball B and extending in the distribution direction of the game ball B may be used.

A lifting spiral shaft 661 is provided at the downstream end of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 . Therefore, in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 upstream of the lifting spiral shaft 661, the game balls B are picked up one by one by the lifting groove 661a of the lifting spiral shaft 661, so that the ball is lifted intermittently. A game ball B stays in the entrance passage 651 . On the other hand, the ball lifting outlet passage 652 is provided with a ball feeding unit 700, which will be described later, at the downstream end. Therefore, in the ball lifting exit passage 652 on the upstream side of the ball feeding unit 700, the game balls B advance intermittently one by one due to the ball feeding operation of the ball feeding unit 700. B stops.

As shown in FIG. 58, in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 (ball lifting exit passage 652), only the portion of the lifting entrance sensor 653 (lifting exit sensor 654) is a V-shaped passage having a V-shaped cross section. A portion 651a (V-shaped passage portion 652a), and the other portion is a U-shaped passage portion 651b (U-shaped passage portion 652b) having a U-shaped cross section. Even if the ball pressure is applied to the downstream side by the plurality of game balls B, it is possible to reduce the ball pressure.

More specifically, as shown by a chain double-dashed line in FIG. 58, a plurality of game balls B are arranged in a straight line (in a row on the axis of the passage) in the V-shaped passage portion 651a (V-shaped passage portion 652a). In the passage portion 651b (U-shaped passage portion 652b), a plurality of game balls B are pushed downstream so that they are arranged in a zigzag pattern so as to alternately contact the side walls on both sides, distributing the ball pressure to the side walls. It is possible to reduce the ball pressure due to the plurality of game balls B on the downstream side. Therefore, the portions (for example, the lifting spiral shaft 661, the ball feeding movable member 705 of the ball feeding unit 700, etc.) provided on the downstream side of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 (ball lifting outlet passage 652) are stopped. The cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced without being damaged by the ball pressure of a plurality of (stored) game balls B and without the need to excessively reinforce the relevant portion against the ball pressure. .

By the way, the detection of the game ball B at the winning opening or the like is performed by confirming the output from the ball sensor at predetermined interrupt intervals (for example, 4 ms). ”), it is determined that the game ball B is detected (ON). That is, when the output from the ball sensor is "011", it is determined to be ON, and when it is other than "011", it is determined to be OFF. However, like the ball-lifting entrance passage 651 and the ball-lifting exit passage 652, a ball sensor provided in a ball passage where a plurality of game balls B stay In the exit sensor 654), if the presence or absence of the game ball B is determined by the determination method as described above, the ball sensor generates only OFF when there is no game ball B in the ball passage, and the game ball is in the ball passage. When the balls B are supplied, many ONs occur at short intervals, and the game balls B stored in the ball passage are moving one by one (the game balls B are moving at intervals of shooting). , many short-interval OFFs occur. Therefore, with the determination method as described above, it was not possible to accurately determine that there is no game ball B in the ball passage.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a threshold value (for example, an ON threshold value of 200 ms and an OFF threshold value of 200 ms) is provided for ON determination and OFF determination, respectively. ON or OFF is determined only when. In other words, for example, when the output from the ball sensor is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. As a result, it is possible to reliably detect (determine) the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball passage where the game balls B stay.

The threshold for determining ON or OFF may be different depending on the type of ball passage, the number of stationary game balls B, etc. Alternatively, the threshold for ON and the threshold for OFF may be made different. Also good. In this embodiment, the ball lifting entrance sensor 653 of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 has an ON threshold of 80 ms and an OFF threshold of 200 ms, for example. Further, in the lifting exit sensor 654 of the ball lifting exit passage 652, for example, the ON threshold is set to 80 ms, and the OFF threshold is set to 200 ms. Further, in the before-fire sensor 704 of the ball feeding unit 700, which will be described later, for example, the ON threshold is set to 12 ms, and the OFF threshold is set to 12 ms. Further, as described above, the firing subtraction sensor 554 of the ball firing unit 550 has an ON threshold of 80 ms and an OFF threshold of 80 ms, for example.

If these thresholds are too small, a slight vibration or the like will result in erroneous detection and control noise. Also, if the threshold is too large, the state of the game ball B will be missed. Therefore, although the appropriate threshold varies depending on the location where the sphere sensor is provided, it is desirable that the minimum is 10 ms or more and the maximum is 300 ms or less. Also, if the threshold value is determined to be a multiple (eg, 3 to 60 times) of the interrupt period (eg, 4 ms), the load on the software can be reduced because only the number of interrupts is counted for software control. Basically, the threshold value is short in the sensor 704 before launch where the game ball B stays at a fixed position, but the game ball B stays at a fixed position, but there is a certain width in the staying position (for example, the lifting exit In the sensor 654), the threshold is lengthened to provide a margin. The game ball B stays (stays) at a fixed position in the portion of the launch subtraction sensor 554, but the threshold value is lengthened so as not to make an erroneous detection due to artificial vibration.

The ball lifting inlet ground sheet metal 655 removes static electricity from the game balls B supplied from the circulation ball path unit 600 to the ball lifting inlet passage 651 . The sphere lifting inlet ground sheet metal 655 is provided upstream of the lifting inlet sensor 653 . As a result, the static electricity of the game ball B passing through the lift entrance sensor 653 can be removed in advance, and the static electricity from the game ball B may cause an erroneous detection in the lift entrance sensor 653 or the frame control board 740 to malfunction. can be avoided.

The ball lifting exit ground sheet metal 656 removes static electricity from the game ball B which has been lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660 and polished by the ball polishing mechanism 680 . The sphere lift outlet ground sheet metal 656 is provided upstream of the lift outlet sensor 654 . As a result, the static electricity of the game ball B passing through the lifting exit sensor 654 can be removed in advance, and the static electricity from the game ball B may cause an erroneous detection in the lifting exit sensor 654 or the frame control board 740 to malfunction. can be avoided.

The sphere lifting relay board 657 relays connection between the lifting entrance sensor 653, the lifting outlet sensor 654, the lifting motor 664, the lifting motor index sensor 666, the ball motor 688, etc. and the frame control board 740. It is. The sphere lifting relay board 657 is attached to the rear side of the lifting mechanism cover 669 .

The ball polishing mechanism 680 is attached to the front side of the ball lifting mechanism 660 . The kneading mechanism 680 includes a box-shaped kneading cassette 681 having a vertically elongated rectangular parallelepiped outer shape, an endless belt-like polishing cloth 682 partially exposed to the outside at the rear surface of the kneading cassette 681, and the polishing cloth 682 exposed to the outside. A sheet-like ball polishing sponge 683 provided between the portion where the ball is formed and the rear surface of the ball polishing cassette 681, and a ball polishing feed gear 684 supported rotatably around a horizontal axis in the lower part of the ball polishing cassette 681. and a ball driven driven gear 685 which meshes with the ball driven gear 684 with a polishing cloth 682 therebetween and is rotatably supported around an axis in the horizontal direction.

The Kuma mechanism 680 has a flat Kuma motor base 686 which extends upward and downward with a constant front-to-rear depth on the left side of the Kuma cassette 681 and whose rear end side is rotatably attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 . , a gear cover 687 attached to the left surface of a Kuma motor base 686, a Kuma motor 688 attached to the left surface of the gear cover 687 and having a rotating shaft projecting between the gear cover 687 and the Kuma motor base 686, A spur gear-shaped motor gear 689 attached to the rotating shaft of a kumamoto motor 688, a spur gear-shaped large-diameter gear portion 690a that meshes with the motor gear 689, and a small-diameter spur gear that rotates integrally with the large-diameter gear portion 690a. , and is rotatably supported between a Kuma motor base 686 and a gear cover 687; A spur gear-shaped transmission gear 691 rotatably supported between 686 and the gear cover 687, and a rotation connecting portion 692 that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 691 and protrudes rightward through the Kuma motor base 686. and have.

Furthermore, the Kuma mechanism 680 is in contact with the front surface of the Kuma cassette 681, and its left end is engaged with the front end of the Kuma motor base 686, while its right end is attached to the front surface of the base wall 501b of the body frame base 501. A plate-like cassette pressing piece 693, a ny latch 694 detachably attaching the right end side of the cassette pressing piece 693 to the front surface (locking hole 669b) of the support protrusion 669a in the lifting mechanism cover 669, and a ball polishing motor. and a spring 695 that biases the cassette pressing piece 693 rearward (to the ball polishing cassette 681 side) with respect to the base 686 .

As shown in FIG. 59, the kneading cassette 681 of the kneading mechanism 680 is formed in the shape of a hollow box, and slits 681a through which the polishing cloth 682 can pass are provided on the upper and lower edges of the rear surface. The ball polishing cassette 681 is detachably attached from the front to the ball lifting mechanism base 668 of the ball lifting mechanism 660 so as to close the ball polishing port 668a.

The ball polishing cassette 681 also has a connecting hole 681b provided at the lower left side surface and a positioning hole 681c provided in front of the connecting hole. A rotary connecting portion 692 protruding to the right from the ball-shaped motor base 686 is inserted into the connecting hole 681b. be done. A positioning pin 686b, which will be described later, of the Kuma motor base 686 is inserted into the positioning hole 681c. At the same time, the ball polishing cassette 681 is restricted (locked) from moving forward with respect to the ball lifting mechanism 660 .

Further, the Kuma polishing cassette 681 includes a plurality of rollers 681d around which the polishing cloth 682 is wound, and a flat tension spring 681e that presses the polishing cloth 682 against the roller 681d provided near the upper slit 681a. and have The tension spring 681e presses the polishing cloth 682 against the roller 681d to apply tension to the portion of the polishing cloth 682 exposed outside from the ball polishing cassette 681, so that the polishing cloth 682 is stretched outside the rear surface. I try not to bend.

The polishing cloth 682 is formed in the shape of an endless ring belt having a constant width on both sides. As shown in FIGS. 55(a) and 59(c), the polishing cloth 682 is housed in the kneading cassette 681 while meandering back and forth. is exposed rearward from the rear surface of the Kuma cassette 681 .

The kneading sponge 683 is provided between the rear surface of the kneading cassette 681 and the portion of the polishing cloth 682 exposed to the rear, and attached to the rear surface of the kneading cassette 681 . The rear surface of the ball polishing sponge 683 is in contact with the inner surface of the polishing cloth 682 . The ball polishing sponge 683, assembled in the ball lifting unit 650, elastically presses the polishing cloth 682 against the game ball B exposed forward from the ball polishing opening 668a of the ball lifting mechanism 660. The polishing cloth 682 is brought into contact with the spherical surface of the game ball B in a wider range. The kneading sponge 683 is replaceably attached to the kneading cassette 681 .

The ball-fed feed gear 684 is provided so that its axial center coincides with the axial center of the transmission gear 691 (rotary coupling portion 692) in a state where the ball-fed cassette 681 is attached, and the left end of the rotary shaft is connected to the rotary coupling portion 692. , and integrally rotates with the transmission gear 691 .

The ball driven gear 685 is meshed with the ball feed gear 684 so as to have a gap for receiving the polishing cloth 682. When the ball feed gear 684 rotates, it rotates in the opposite direction, It is possible to feed a polishing cloth 682 sandwiched between.

The Kuma motor base 686 extends vertically along the left side surface of the Kuma cassette 681, and its rear end side is attached to the lifting mechanism base 668 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the vertical direction. . As a result, the kuma motor base 686 can be rotated between a lock position parallel to the left side of the kuma cassette 681 and a release position in which the front end side is away from the kuma cassette 681 to the left. The Kuma motor base 686 has a locking hole 686a penetrating from side to side at a portion above the center in the vertical direction of the front edge. A locking hook 693a provided at the left end of the cassette pressing piece 693 is inserted and locked into the locking hole 686a.

As shown in FIG. 51 , the Kuma motor base 686 has a rotary connecting portion 692 protruding rightward from a portion near the lower end of the right side surface, which is closer to the rear in the front-rear direction. In addition, the Kuma motor base 686 has a positioning pin 686b that protrudes rightward in a cylindrical shape from a front-rear center portion near the lower end of the right side surface. The tip (right end) of the positioning pin 686b is formed in a conical shape. The positioning pin 686b is inserted into the positioning hole 681c of the ball polishing cassette 681, thereby positioning the ball polishing cassette 681 and restricting its forward movement.

More specifically, the Kuma motor base 686 is rotated to the release position with the front end moved leftward in the front-rear direction, and the Kuma cassette 681 is attached to the cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668. In this state, when the Kuma motor base 686 is rotated so that its tip moves to the right and is moved to the locked position, the positioning pin 686b engages the positioning hole of the Kuma cassette 681 from a direction intersecting the front-rear direction. 681c to position the balling cassette 681 and prevent the balling cassette 681 from moving forward from the cassette mounting recess 668b.

This Kuma motor base 686 is provided so that the tip end thereof abuts on the protrusion 102 (guide surface 102a) of the door frame 3 . As a result, although the details will be described later, when the door frame 3 is to be closed with respect to the main body frame 4 while the Kuma motor base 686 is in a state other than the locked position, the guide surface 102a of the protrusion 102 is pushed to the front end of the Kuma motor base 686. , the Kuma motor base 686 rotates to the locked position, preventing forgetting to lock, and preventing the cassette pressing piece 693 and the like from being caught between the door frame 3 and being damaged. can be prevented.

Kuma motor 688 is controlled independently of the operation of lifting motor 664, and is controlled so that polishing cloth 682 moves 0.17 mm every time 1000 game balls B are shot.

The cassette pressing piece 693 extends to the left and right, and is provided with a hook-shaped locking hook portion 693a that is inserted into and locked to the locking hole 686a of the ball-shaped motor base 686 at the left end. The cassette pressing piece 693 is biased by a spring 695 so as to rotate counterclockwise in plan view. In other words, it is biased so as to push backward the balling cassette 681 mounted in the cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668 . The right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 extends further to the right than the Kuma cassette 681 , and the rear surface of the cassette pressing piece 693 is configured to contact the front surface of the support protrusion 669 a of the lifting mechanism cover 669 . A ny latch 694 is provided near the right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 .

With the right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 in contact with the supporting projection 669a of the lifting mechanism cover 669, when the operation part 694a is pushed, the tip of the ny latch 694 expands in diameter to fit into the locking hole of the supporting projection 669a. 669b, the cassette pressing piece 693 can be locked immovably, and the lock can be released by pulling the operating portion 694a forward. More specifically, the nylatch 694 includes an operating portion 694a composed of a disc-shaped disk portion and a rod-shaped portion projecting from the center of the disk portion, and a cylindrical portion into which the rod-shaped portion of the operating portion 694a is slidably inserted. A flange portion extending outward from a proximal end portion of the cylindrical portion near the disk portion and a distal end portion of the cylindrical portion opposite to the flange portion are notched toward the flange portion, and a plurality of notches are provided in the circumferential direction. and a tubular member (grommet) having a slit provided therein. With the cylindrical member inserted into the locking hole 669b of the support protrusion 669a, when the operating portion 694a is pushed toward the support protrusion 669a, the rod-shaped portion slides toward the distal end side in the cylindrical portion. Then, the diameter of the tubular portion divided by the plurality of slits is expanded so that the tip thereof is opened. As a result, the tubular member cannot be pulled out of the locking hole 669b and can be locked.

The sphere lifting unit 650 of the present embodiment is attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b of the body frame base 501 in a state assembled to the body frame 4 . When the ball lifting unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the ball lifting unit 650 is assembled with the ball lifting mechanism 660 removed from the ball polishing cassette 681 of the ball polishing mechanism 680 (see FIG. 52(a)). , to the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b. At this time, the Kuma motor base 686 and the support protrusion 669a protruding forward from the lifting mechanism base 668 pass through an opening 501o that penetrates the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j in the front-rear direction, and the front end side of the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j passes through the base wall portion 501b. to protrude forward.

In this state, the spherical opening 668a of the ball lifting mechanism base 668 of the ball lifting mechanism 660 is located in the opening 501o penetrating the ball lifting unit attachment portion 501j on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b, and the opening 501o. And the game ball B lifted by the lifting spiral shaft 661 can be visually recognized from the front of the base wall portion 501b (body frame 4) through the kuma mouth 668a (see FIG. 54). Since the width of the kuma mouth 668a is narrower than the diameter of the game ball B, even if the kuma cassette 681 is removed, the game ball B will not spill out. As a result, the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4 and the kuma cassette 681 is removed, so that the lifting spiral shaft 661 and the game ball B lifted by the lifting spiral shaft 661 can be confirmed from the front. can be done.

After attaching the ball lifting mechanism 660 side of the ball lifting unit 650 to the ball lifting unit mounting portion 501j of the base wall portion 501b, pull the operating portion 694a of the ny latch 694 projecting forward from the base wall portion 501b to lock. Released, the cassette pressing piece 693 is rotated to open forward and left against the urging force of the spring 695, and the Kuma motor base 686 is rotated to the release position so that the tip side thereof moves away from the Kuma cassette 681. so that the cassette pressing piece 693 and balled motor base 686 do not overlap the front of the cassette mounting recess 668 b of the lifting mechanism base 668 . Then, from the front of the base wall portion 501b, the kneading cassette 681 is placed with the exposed surface of the polishing cloth 682 facing rearward, and the cassette mounting recess in the lifting mechanism base 668 is closed so as to close the kneading opening 668a from the front. 668b (see FIGS. 51 and 52(b)).

In this state, the ball polishing cassette 681 is moved rearward and its rear end is inserted into the cassette mounting recess 668b. After that, the Kuma motor base 686 is rotated to the locked position so as to be parallel to the left side surface of the Kuma cassette 681, and the rotation connecting part 692 and the positioning pin 686b protruding from the right side surface of the Kuma motor base 686 are connected to the Kuma cassette. They are inserted into the connecting hole 681b and the positioning hole 681c of 681, respectively. As a result, since the rotation connecting portion 692 and the positioning pin 686b are inserted into the ball polishing cassette 681 in a direction that intersects the front-rear direction, forward movement of the ball polishing cassette 681 can be restricted.

When the Kuma motor base 686 is moved to the lock position, the cassette pressing piece 693 attached to the front end of the Kuma motor base 686 presses the Kuma cassette 681 rearward by the biasing force of the spring 695, and the right end of the cassette pressing piece 693 is pushed. contacts the support projection 669 a of the lifting mechanism cover 669 . In this state, when the operation portion 694a of the ny latch 694 is pushed to engage with the engagement hole 669b of the support projection 669a, the cassette pressing piece 693 is locked so as not to rotate, and the attachment of the ball polishing cassette 681 is completed.

When removing the kneading cassette 681, pull the operation portion 694a of the ny latch 694 forward to unlock it, and then reverse the above procedure to remove the kneading cassette 681.

By the way, when the Kuma cassette 681 is installed, if it is in an incomplete state such as forgetting to lock the Kuma motor base 686 or the cassette pressing piece 693, the Kuma cassette 681 will come off during the game, and the game will be interrupted. As a result, there is a risk that the interest of the player may be reduced.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the user forgets to lock the Kuma motor base 686 or the cassette pressing piece 693, the Kuma cassette 681 will not come off. More specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 53(a), when the Kuma motor base 686 is not positioned at the lock position and the cassette pressing piece 693 does not press the Kuma cassette 681 backward, the door frame is opened. 3 to the body frame 4, the inclined guide surface 102a of the protrusion 102 of the door frame body 100 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end of the Kuma motor base 686 (FIG. 53(b)). ).

At this time, the cassette pressing piece 693 attached to the front end of the Kuma motor base 686 does not remain projected forward as shown in FIG. Since the cassette pressing piece 693 does not come into contact with the door frame 3 and rotate in the opposite direction to the kneading cassette 681, the cassette pressing piece 693 and the door do not rotate. The frame 3 will not be damaged.

Then, when the door frame 3 moves further in the closing direction, the leading end of the Kuma motor base 686 is pushed by the guide surface 102a and rotates rightward toward the locked position. As a result, the rotation connecting portion 692 protruding from the right side surface of the Kuma motor base 686 is inserted into the connection hole 681b of the Kuma cassette 681, and the positioning pin 686b of the Kuma motor base 686 is inserted into the positioning hole of the Kuma cassette 681. 681c to restrict (lock) the forward movement of the ball polishing cassette 681. Also, the cassette pressing piece 693 presses the ball polishing cassette 681 rearward by the biasing force of the spring 695 (see FIG. 53(c)). As a result, the kneading cassette 681 is locked and will not come off forward.

Although not shown, a protrusion may be provided on the rear surface of the door frame 3 so that the operating portion 694a of the ny latch 694 can be pushed backward. As a result, even if the cassette pressing piece 693 is forgotten to be locked by the ny latch 694, it can be locked, and the dropout (disengagement) of the balled cassette 681 can be reliably prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the protruding portion 102 of the door frame 3 moves the Kuma motor base 686 to the lock position to lock the Kuma cassette 681 in an unremovable manner. For example, the ball shooting unit 550 and the foul unit 570 are detachably provided, and locking means for locking the ball shooting unit 550 and the like in a non-detachable manner is provided. When closed with respect to the body frame 4, the projecting portion 102 may come into contact with the locking means so that the ball shooting unit 550 and the like can be locked in a non-detachable manner.

In the ball lifting unit 650 of the present embodiment, when it is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 faces the ball discharge port 600d of the circulation ball path unit 600. A game ball B that has circulated through a shaped ball meandering passage 604 is supplied. The game ball B supplied to the ball-lifting entrance passage 651 touches the ball-lifting entrance ground sheet metal 655 to remove static electricity, and is detected by the lifting entrance sensor 653, and the lifting spiral shaft 661 supplied to the lower end. At this time, the front end of the game ball B is inserted into the ball polishing mouth 668a that penetrates forward, and the front end of the game ball B contacts the polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing mechanism 680, and the vertically long ball polishing mouth 668a pushes left and right. Movement in any direction is restricted.

In this state, when the lifting spiral shaft 661 rotates in the direction in which the game ball B is lifted by the lifting motor 664, the game ball B is pushed from below by the lifting groove 661a and moves upward along the kuma mouth 668a. It will happen. At this time, the game ball B moves upward while rotating while being in contact with the vertically extending portion of the inner peripheral edge of the kuma mouth 668a and the lifting groove 661a. As a result, the portion of the game ball B in contact with the polishing cloth 682 on the front end side changes as the game ball B rises (rotates), and the entire surface of the game ball B can be evenly polished.

Then, when the game ball B reaches the upper end side of the lifting spiral shaft 661, it enters the ball lifting outlet passage 652, touches the ball lifting outlet ground sheet metal 656, and is detected by the lifting outlet sensor 654. From the downstream end of the ball lifting exit passage 652, the ball is sent to the ball feeding unit. At this time, even if the game ball B is polished by the polishing cloth 682 and charged with static electricity by being lifted by the ball lifting mechanism 660, the ball lifting outlet ground sheet metal 656 upstream of the lifting outlet sensor 654 The static electricity is removed by the contact with the roller, so that the trouble due to the static electricity of Kuma does not occur in the lifting exit sensor 654, the frame control board 740, and the like.

On the other hand, in the kneading mechanism 680, with the kneading cassette 681 attached, when the kneading motor 688 rotates the kneading feed gear 684 clockwise in the right side view, the rear surface of the kneading cassette 681 on the polishing cloth 682 is rotated to the outside. The exposed portion is accommodated in the ball polishing cassette 681 through the slit on the lower side of the ball polishing cassette 681 . At this time, since the portion of the polishing cloth 682 exposed to the outside is pulled downward, the portion of the polishing cloth 682 housed in the ball polishing cassette 681 is pulled downward from the outside through the slit on the upper side of the ball polishing cassette 681. It will be sent out.

The polishing cloth 682 of the ball polishing mechanism 680 is intermittently moving at a slow speed. In this embodiment, every time 1000 game balls B are shot, the polishing cloth 682 moves by 0.17 mm.

Thus, according to the ball lifting unit 650 of this embodiment, the game balls B discharged from the circulation ball path unit 600 can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 700 while polishing the game balls B.

[4-6. Ball forwarding unit]
The ball feeding unit 700 in the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60(a) is a front perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the body frame, and FIG. 60(b) is a rear perspective view of the ball feeding unit in the body frame. FIG. 61(a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 61(b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 62 is a front cross-sectional view of the ball feed unit cut at the position of the sensor before firing.

The ball feeding unit 700 is for supplying the game balls B lifted by the ball lifting unit 650 to the ball shooting unit 550 one by one. The ball feeding unit 700 is attached to the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k provided on the rear side of the base wall portion 501b of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG. The ball feeding unit 700 faces upward from the upper surface of the base wall portion 501b so as to be sandwiched between the base wall portion 501b and the circulating ball path unit 600, and is detachably mounted upward.

The ball feeding unit 700 has a ball supply port 701 which is open at the rear and into which game balls B supplied from the ball lifting unit 650 can enter, and a ball launching pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550 which is open at the front. A ball delivery port 702 for delivering a game ball B, a ball delivery passage 703 connecting the ball supply port 701 and the ball delivery port 702 and through which the game ball B can flow, and a game ball circulating in the ball delivery passage 703. A sensor 704 before firing capable of detecting B, a movable member 705 for sending game balls B detected by the sensor 704 before firing from a ball delivery port 702 one by one, and a movable member 705 for moving the ball. A ball feed solenoid 706 for throwing the game ball B to the ball shooting unit 550, and a ball feed relay board 707 relaying the connection between the ball feed solenoid 706 and the ball-feeding sensor 704 and the frame control board 740. I have it.

In addition, the ball feeding unit 700 includes a transmission member 708 that transmits forward and backward movement of the plunger in the ball feeding solenoid 706 to move the ball feeding movable member 705, and a box-like opening that is rearward and that contains a sensor 704 before firing and a ball. A unit base 709 on which a feed solenoid 706 and the like are provided, and a flat unit cover 710 attached so as to close an opening at the rear end of the unit base 709 are provided.

A ball supply port 701 of the ball feeding unit 700 is provided through a unit cover 710 forming a rear surface of the ball feeding unit 700, and is provided in a portion on the upper right side from the center in front view. The ball supply port 701 is formed in a size through which the game balls B can pass one by one.

The ball delivery port 702 is provided so as to pass through a unit base 709 forming the front side of the ball delivery unit 700 in the front-rear direction, and is provided at a portion below the center in front view. The ball delivery port 702 is formed to have a size through which the game balls B can pass one by one.

The ball feed passage 703 connects the ball feed port 701 and the ball feed port 702, and extends from the ball feed port 701 to the upper portion of the ball feed port 702 so as to be lowered leftward. It extends downward to the site of the delivery port 702 . A sensor 704 before firing is provided in the vicinity of the left end of the portion extending leftward in the ball feeding passage 703 . A ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 is positioned at a portion of the ball feeding passage 703 extending vertically behind the ball feeding port 702. As shown in FIG.

The before-fire sensor 704 is provided in the vicinity of the left end of the ball feed passage 703 extending downward to the left. In other words, the shooting front sensor 704 is provided in the ball feeding movable member 705 immediately before the ball receiving portion 705a on the upstream side. This shooting front sensor 704 detects the game ball B in a non-contact manner, for example, by detecting a change in induced current.

In the ball feeding passage 703 provided with the shooting front sensor 704, the flow of the game ball B is stopped in the same manner as the ball lifting entrance passage 651 and the ball lifting exit passage 652.例文帳に追加Therefore, similarly to the lifting entrance sensor 653 and the lifting exit sensor 654, the pre-launch sensor 704 is provided with a threshold value for ON determination and OFF determination. Only, ON or OFF is determined, and the presence or absence of the game ball B can be reliably determined (detected). It should be noted that the sensor 704 before firing according to the present embodiment has an ON threshold of 12 ms and an OFF threshold of 12 ms, for example.

The ball-feeding movable member 705 is driven by the ball-feeding solenoid 706 to release the game balls B in the ball-feeding passage 703 one by one from the ball-feeding port 702 and supply them to the ball-throwing unit 550. is. The ball feeding movable member 705 has a U-shaped opening to the right and front and rear, a ball receiving portion 705a having a bottom wall inclined forward and capable of accommodating only one game ball B, and a ball receiving portion 705a. a rod portion 705b extending leftward from the left end of the rod portion 705b; a bearing portion 705c that penetrates the left end of the rod portion 705b in the front-rear direction and into which the first shaft pin 710a of the unit cover 710 is inserted so as to be relatively rotatable; It has a movable gear portion 705d that is fan-shaped to the right and coaxial with the portion 705c, and a ball stop portion 705e that forms an upper portion of the U-shaped ball receiving portion 705a.

The ball feed solenoid 706 is for moving the ball feed movable member 705 to supply the game balls B in the ball feed passage 703 one by one from the ball feed port 702 to the ball shooting unit 550 . The ball feed solenoid 706 is provided at the upper left corner in a front view between the unit base 709 and the unit cover 710 with the magnetic pole portion that generates a magnetic force when energized directed downward. Although the details will be described later, the ball forwarding solenoid 706 performs a series of hard operations based on a predetermined firing sequence in association with the firing solenoid 553 .

The ball feeder relay board 707 is for relaying the connection between the pre-launch sensor 704 and the ball feeder solenoid 706 and the frame control board 740 . The ball feed relay board 707 is provided between the unit base 709 and the unit cover 710 and to the right of the firing front sensor 704 .
In this ball feed relay board 707

The transmission member 708 transmits forward and backward movements of the plunger of the ball feed solenoid 706 so that the ball feed movable member 705 can move. The transmission member 708 includes a sheet metal holding portion 708b to which a sheet metal 708a that can be magnetically attached to the magnetic pole portion of the ball feed solenoid 706 is attached, a rod portion 708c extending rightward from the sheet metal holding portion 708b, and a rod portion 708c. and a bearing portion 708d through which the second shaft pin 710b of the unit cover 710 is inserted so that the second shaft pin 710b of the unit cover 710 is relatively rotatable. and a driving gear portion 708e that meshes with the movable gear portion 705d of the member 705 .

The unit base 709 is formed in the shape of a box that is open rearward, and a ball delivery port 702 is provided in the front surface near the bottom of the center so as to penetrate therethrough in the front-rear direction. The unit base 709 cooperates with the unit cover 710 to form a ball feed passage 703, and also includes a pre-firing sensor 704, a ball feed movable member 705, a ball feed solenoid 706, a ball feed relay board 707, and a transmission member 708. , holds

The unit base 709 has a knob portion 709a which is horizontally spaced on the upper surface and recessed downward, and an elastic claw 709b which is provided at the lower right corner of the front surface. The knob portion 709a is formed to be grasped by an operator from above, and is used when removing the ball feeding unit 700 from the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 upward. The side surfaces of the knob portion 709a that are close to each other are formed in a dovetail groove shape, and are inclined so as to approach downward. On the side surface of the knob portion 709a, a plurality of ridges extending back and forth are arranged vertically. When the ball feeding unit 700 is attached to the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501, the elastic claw 709b is engaged with the locking hole of the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k so that it cannot be removed upward. It is for

When the ball feeding unit 700 is to be removed from the main body frame base 501, the elastic claw 709b, which penetrates the locking hole of the base wall portion 501b and faces forward, is pushed backward to be elastically deformed. It can be removed upward from the ball feed unit mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 by grasping and pulling up the knob portion 709a.

The unit cover 710 is provided with a ball supply port 701 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right portion from the center in the front view. The unit cover 710 cooperates with the unit base 709 to form a ball feed passage 703, and also includes a pre-firing sensor 704, a ball feed movable member 705, a ball feed solenoid 706, a ball feed relay board 707, and a transmission member 708. , holds The unit cover 710 has a first shaft pin 710a and a second shaft pin 710b projecting forward in a cylindrical shape near the lower left corner when viewed from the front. By inserting the first shaft pin 710a into the bearing portion 705c of the movable ball feed member 705, the movable ball feed member 705 can be rotatably supported. By inserting the second shaft pin 710b into the bearing portion 708d of the transmission member 708, the transmission member 708 can be rotatably supported.

In the ball feed unit 700 of this embodiment, in the assembled state, the first shaft pin 710a is inserted into the bearing portion 705c of the movable ball feed member 705, and the second shaft pin 710b is inserted into the bearing portion 708d of the transmission member 708. is inserted, and the movable gear portion 705d of the ball feeding movable member 705 and the drive gear portion 708e of the transmission member 708 are meshed with each other. In this state, the ball receiving portion 705a at the right end of the ball-feeding movable member 705 is positioned in the portion extending vertically behind the ball-feeding port 702 in the ball-feeding passage 703. When the feed movable member 705 rotates, the ball receiving portion 705a moves up and down in the vertically extending portion of the ball feed passage 703. As shown in FIG.

In the normal state of the ball feeding unit 700, the ball feeding solenoid 706 is de-energized (OFF). Therefore, the sheet metal 708a of the transmission member 708 is separated downward from the magnetic pole portion of the ball feed solenoid 706 by gravity. In this state, the lower surface of the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 is in contact with the bottom wall of the downstream end of the ball feeding passage 703, and the front end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a is aligned with the ball delivery port 702. , the right end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a does not match the ball feeding passage 703. Therefore, the game ball B flowing from the upstream toward the ball receiving portion 705a is not received by the ball receiving portion 705a by coming into contact with the U-shaped upper ball stop portion 705e of the ball receiving portion 705a. On the other hand, the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a rolls forward due to the inclination of the bottom wall of the ball receiving portion 705a and is discharged forward from the ball outlet 702. FIG.

The ball stopping portion 705e of the movable ball feeding member 705 is in contact with the center of rotation of the movable ball feeding member 705 as shown in FIG. It is located on the axis connecting the center of sphere B. As a result, since the ball pressure from the game ball B acting on the ball stop portion 705e can be received by the first shaft pin 710a, the ball pressure of the plurality of game balls B stored in the ball feeding unit 700 , the ball feed movable member 705 can be prevented from rotating and dropping to the ball shooting unit 550 side.

In addition, in a normal state, the ball stopper portion 705e is positioned on the axis connecting the center of the first shaft pin 710a and the center of the game ball B that is ball stoppered, so that vibrations from the surroundings may occur. By acting, even if the game ball B in contact with the ball stop portion 705e vibrates up and down, the ball feed movable member 705 is moved so that the ball stop portion 705e follows the vibration of the game ball B. It can be rotated around the first shaft pin 710a, and it is possible to prevent the ball stopper from being released by the ball stopper portion 705e. This prevents the game ball B released from the ball stop by the ball stop portion 705e due to a thud or the like from being discharged to the foul unit 570 via the ball launching unit 550 and added to the number of held balls as a foul ball. can do.

In this normal state, when the ball feed solenoid 706 is energized (ON), the sheet metal 708a of the transmission member 708 is attracted to the upper magnetic pole portion by the magnetic force generated in the magnetic pole portion of the ball feed solenoid 706, and the transmission member 708 is moved. It rotates clockwise around the bearing portion 708d. When the transmission member 708 rotates in the clockwise direction, the movable gear portion 705d of the movable ball feed member 705 meshing with the driving gear portion 708e of the transmission member 708 causes the movable ball feed member 705 to move around the bearing portion 705c. As a result, the ball receiving portion 705a is moved upward.

When the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 moves upward, the front end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a does not coincide with the ball delivery port 702, and the right end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a moves toward the ball feeding passage 703. , and the game ball B is received from the ball feeding passage 703 by the ball receiving portion 705a. In this state, since the right end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a does not match the ball delivery port 702, the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a rolls forward and is discharged from the ball delivery port 702. no. In addition, since the ball receiving portion 705a has a size capable of accommodating only one game ball B, when one game ball B is received by the ball receiving portion 705a, the game ball B on the upstream side of the ball receiving portion 705a 705a is not accepted.

After that, when the energization of the ball feed solenoid 706 is stopped (OFF), the attraction of the transmission member 708 from the magnetic pole portion of the ball feed solenoid 706 to the sheet metal 708a is released. At this time, since the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 receives the game ball B, the weight of the game ball B causes the ball receiving portion 705a to move downward. The transmission member 708 rotates clockwise around the bearing portion 705c, and the transmission member 708 moves around the bearing portion 708d via the drive gear portion 708e that meshes with the movable gear portion 705d of the ball feed movable member 705. and rotate counterclockwise to return to the normal state.

When the ball feeding unit 700 returns to its normal state, the front end opening of the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 coincides with the ball delivery port 702, so that the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a It rolls forward and is discharged from the ball delivery port 702 to the ball launching unit 550 .

Thus, according to the ball sending unit 700 of the present embodiment, the game balls B can be sent one by one to the ball shooting unit 550 by turning the ball sending solenoid 706 ON/OFF.

[4-6a. Ball Feeding Unit of Second Embodiment]
Although illustration of the ball feeding unit of the second embodiment is omitted, a ball delivery port sensor 711 is added to the outlet (ball delivery port 702) of the game ball B of the ball feeding unit 700 of the first embodiment. The ball delivery port sensor 711 is a pass-through proximity sensor, and detects the game ball B by a game ball B detection method used in a prize winning port or the like.

In other words, the output from the ball outlet sensor 711 is checked at predetermined interrupt intervals (for example, 4 ms), and when the output becomes non-detection, detection, detection (in other words, "011"), the game is started. It is determined that the ball B has been detected (ON).

The ball outlet sensor 711 is connected to the frame control board 740 as shown in the block diagram of FIG.

[4-7. Ball receiving tray]
The ball receiving tray 720 in the body frame 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 6, 7, 20, and the like. The ball receiving tray 720 is provided below the circulating ball path unit 600 and is for receiving game balls B discharged from the ball outlet 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 . The ball receiving tray 720 is formed in the shape of a container that is open upward, and the bottom wall is slanted downward toward the front.

The ball receiving tray 720 is attached by being inserted from the front into the tray insertion recess 501f of the main body frame base 501 . The ball receiving tray 720 has elastic claws 721 on both left and right side walls, and when attached to the main body frame base 501, the elastic claws 721 are locked by the locking claws 501n of the main body frame base 501 and move forward. It never leaves. When the ball receiving tray 720 is removed, the elastic claw 721 is elastically deformed toward the inside of the ball receiving tray 720 to release the lock and allow the ball receiving tray 720 to be pulled forward.

When attaching the ball receiving tray 720 to the tray insertion recess 501f of the main body frame base 501, the ball receiving tray 720 is moved rearward from the front of the tray insertion recess 501f and inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f. At this time, since the front end of the engaging claw 501n is inclined like an arrowhead, when the elastic claw 721 of the ball receiving tray 720 comes into contact with the engaging claw 501n from the front, the elastic claw 721 is pushed inward by the arrowhead-shaped inclination. and the ball receiving tray 720 can be inserted into the tray insertion recess 501f. Then, when the elastic claw 721 of the ball receiving tray 720 passes through the portion of the locking claw 501n and is no longer in contact with the locking claw 501n, the elastically deformed elastic claw 721 returns to its original state, and the locking claw returns to its original state. 501n to prevent the ball receiving tray 720 from sliding forward.

Since the ball receiving tray 720 is placed on the bottom wall of the tray insertion recess 501f which is inclined so that the front end side is lowered, the game balls B ejected from the ball outlet 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 are stored. When it becomes heavy, it tries to slide forward due to the inclination of the bottom wall. Then, when the locking of the locking claw 501n by the elastic claw 721 is released, the ball receiving tray 720 automatically slides forward due to the weight of the stored game balls B, and the ball receiving tray 720 moves into the tray insertion recess 501f. can be easily removed from the

Although illustration is omitted, the ball feeder unit 700 of this embodiment is attached to the body frame 4 so as to pass through the base wall portion 501b of the body frame base 501 from the front and to the ball feeder relay board 707. Since the wiring connector is connected, even if an attempt is made to remove upward from the ball feeding unit mounting portion 501k with the wiring connector connected, the wiring connector interferes and cannot be removed.

Further, when the ball feeding unit 700 is attached to the main body frame 4 and assembled into the pachinko machine 1, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is positioned above the ball feeding unit 700, and the ball feeding unit 700 is pulled out upward. never. In addition, when the game board 5 is inserted from the front into the game board insertion part 502 in a state in which the ball feeding unit 700 is not completely inserted into the ball feeding unit mounting part 501k of the main body frame 4, the upper part of the ball feeding unit 700 is pushed downward by the game board 5 (game panel 1100) and can be completely inserted.

[4-8. Frame substrate unit]
The frame substrate unit 730 in the body frame 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, FIGS. FIG. 63 is a perspective view showing a state in which the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame, and the back cover and the frame substrate unit are also opened. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the frame substrate unit in the outer frame and main body frame. FIG. 65 is a reference photograph showing the rear side of the body frame with the frame substrate unit opened. Although the details will be described later, the frame control board 740 displays the number of balls held in the number display unit 140, performs settlement processing by operating the counting button switch 180, ball launching unit 550, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit. 700, etc., and management (monitoring) of the game balls B in the circulating ball path unit 600, and the like.

The frame substrate unit 730 is attached to a portion behind the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable. The frame board unit 730 includes a frame control board 740 , a power supply board 750 , an interface board 760 , and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 765 .

The frame board unit 730 includes a unit base 770 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 so as to be openable and closable, and a frame control board box 771 attached to the rear side of the unit base 770 and housing the frame control board 740 . , a power supply board box 772 mounted between the frame control board box 771 and the unit base 770 and containing the power supply board 750, and an interface board mounted on the unit base 770 on the left side of the frame control board box 771 in front view. 760 and a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 765, and an interface board box 773, and a ny latch 774 for fixing the unit base 770 to the main body frame base unit 500 so that it cannot be opened and closed. The nylatch 774 has the same configuration as the nylatch 694 described above, and a detailed description of the configuration thereof will be omitted.

Although not shown, the frame control board 740 includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, a CPU that executes processing programs and commands, and the like. .

The frame control board 740 has a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing the information stored in the RAM, and an enclosed game ball B from the ball outlet 613p of the circulating ball path unit 600 to the outside. Clears the number of balls held by the player stored in the RAM or the like and the number of balls held by the player stored in the ball receiving switch 742 used when the ball is pulled out to (the ball receiving tray 720), and also clears the display on the number of balls held display section 140 of the door frame 3. A ball number storage/display clear switch 743 (also referred to as a ball number clear switch 743) for clearing the number of balls (see FIGS. 4, 68, etc.).

When the ball removal switch 742 is pressed, the ball lifting mechanism 660 and the like operate almost unconditionally for a certain period of time. At this time, the operator opens the ball removal shutter 615 in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, and discharges the game ball B to the ball receiving tray 720.例文帳に追加Further, by opening the door frame 3, the foul shutter 571 is brought to the closed position, and the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 collides with the foul shutter 571, becomes a foul ball, and is discharged after being recovered. . The number-of-balls clear switch 743 is for clearing the number of balls left in the frame control board 740 for some reason, such as when the game ball lending device 8 is removed. Although not shown, partition walls are provided between the switches so that only one switch can be pressed at a time with one finger. These RAM clear switch 741, ball removal switch 742, and ball number storage/display clear switch 743 (ball number clear switch 743) may be prioritized to be effective when they are pressed at the same time. If a different function is to be given when the switch is pressed, it is not necessary to provide a partition between the switches.

The frame control board 740 is connected to a main control board 1310, which is provided on the game board 5 and will be described later, by two-way communication, and is also connected to a game ball lending device connection terminal board 765 by two-way communication. . The frame control board 740 is connected to the game ball lending device 8 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 765 .

The frame control board 740 is connected to the number display unit 140 of the door frame 3, the firing stop switch 161, the handle touch sensor 162, the handle rotation sensor 163, and the counting button switch 180.

The frame control board 740 also includes a door open switch 507 for the main body frame 4, a frame open switch 508, a firing solenoid 553, a firing subtraction sensor 554, an out ball sensor 605, a safe ball sensor 606, a foul ball sensor 607, and an insufficient number of circulating balls. A sensor 621, an excess ball circulation sensor 622, a lift inlet sensor 653, a lift outlet sensor 654, a lift motor 664, a lift motor index sensor 666, a ball motor 688, a sensor 704 before firing, and a ball feed solenoid 706 are connected. ing.

The power board 750 is for supplying power of a predetermined voltage to the frame control board 740, the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. A power switch 751 is provided near the right end of the rear surface of the power board 750 . The power switch 751 is exposed rearward from the power board box 772 so that it can be operated.

The interface board 760 is for relaying connections between the frame control board 740 and various relay boards provided on the door frame 3 side and the game board 5 side.

The game ball lending device connection terminal plate 765 is for relaying the connection between the frame control board 740 and the game ball lending device 8 .

The unit base 770 is elongated in the left and right direction, and has a hinge shaft 770a at its left end which is supported by the frame substrate unit shaft support portion 504d provided on the rear surface of the main body frame speaker box 504 of the main body frame base unit 500. Two nylatches 774 are attached to the right end with the operating portion 774a facing rearward.

The unit base 770 includes a rear surface portion 770b extending rightward from the left end in a plan view by a quarter of the total length in the left-right direction, and a joint portion extending short forward from the right end of the rear surface portion 770b. It has a portion 770c and a front portion 770d extending from the front end to the right end of the connecting portion 770c. Accordingly, the unit base 770 has a step in the front-rear direction between the rear surface portion 770b and the front surface portion 770d.

An interface board box 773 is detachably attached to the rear side of the rear surface portion 770 b of the unit base 770 . On the other hand, a power board box 772 is detachably attached to the rear side of the front face portion 770d of the unit base 770, and a frame control board box 771 is detachably attached to the rear side of the power board box 772.

In addition, the unit base 770 is provided with a power supply harness accommodating portion 770e that extends left and right and is recessed from the rear to the front above the portion where the frame control board box 771 and the power supply board box 772 are attached. there is The power harness accommodating portion 770e has a wide portion near the left end near the hinge shaft 770a. The power harness accommodating portion 770e is provided with guide ribs and can accommodate the bundled power harness PH (see FIG. 65). As a result, the power harness PH (power cord) does not interfere with assembly until the frame substrate unit 730 is attached to the main body frame base unit 500, and the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64, since the rear portion of the power harness accommodating portion 770e overlaps a portion of the lower end of the back cover 505, the power harness can be removed while the body frame 4 and the like are being conveyed. Even if the PH is in a free state, it is possible to prevent the power harness PH from popping out by contacting the back cover 505, thereby preventing the power harness PH from popping out and being damaged by accidental catching or the like.

The frame substrate unit 730 of this embodiment is configured such that the hinge shaft 770a provided at the left end of the unit base 770 is pivotally supported by the frame substrate unit shaft support portion 504d of the main body frame base unit 500 in a normal state (used state). A ny latch 774 attached to the right end of the unit base 770 is attached to a support projection 501r provided on the rear surface of the base wall portion 501b of the main body frame base 501. As shown in FIG. In this state, the frame substrate unit 730 covers the rear of the circulating ball path unit 600 and the ball lifting unit 650 attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b, making it impossible to approach them.

In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 20, the front part 770d of the unit base 770, the power supply board box 772, and the frame control board box 771 of the frame board unit 730 are connected to the box expansion part 504c of the main body frame speaker box 504. located above. At this time, since the front face portion 770d and the power supply board box 772 are formed shorter than the frame control board box 771 in the vertical direction, wiring and the like can be accommodated between the power supply board box 772 and the box extension part 504c. A space is formed.

Furthermore, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 64, the front end of the rear cover 505 is positioned behind the upper ny latch 774 so that the operating portion 774a of the ny latch 774 cannot be pulled. Also, in a normal state, the lower portion of the rear cover 505 overlaps the rear of the frame substrate unit 730 . As a result, unless the rear cover 505 is opened from the main body frame base 501, the rear cover 505 interferes (contacts) and the frame substrate unit 730 cannot be opened rearward (opening is prevented). is configured to

Therefore, in a normal state, even if for some reason the ny latch 774 is unlocked and the frame substrate unit 730 attempts to hinge backward, the bottom of the back cover 505 is positioned behind it so as to overlap. It is possible to prevent the frame substrate unit 730 from opening from the main body frame base 501 due to hinge rotation. As a result, by opening the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 while the frame substrate unit 730 is opened from the main body frame base 501, the frame substrate unit 730 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 and the frame substrate unit 730 is damaged. You can avoid being lost.

When checking the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, etc. on the rear side of the main body frame 4 from this normal state, first, the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2. . After the rear cover 505 is opened rearward from the main body frame base 501, the operation portion 774a of the ny latch 774 is pulled rearward to release the lock. , and the hinge shaft 770a at the left end, the frame substrate unit 730 can be opened rearward. By opening the frame substrate unit 730 rearward, the circulating ball path unit 600 and the ball lifting unit 650 attached to the rear side of the base wall portion 501b are exposed, making it possible to approach them (FIG. 63). and FIG. 65).

When the frame substrate unit 730 is opened rearward, as shown in FIG. 65, the main body frame base 501 is black and opaque, while the main body frame speaker box 504, the circulating sphere path unit 600, and the sphere lifting unit are shown. 650, etc. are made of a transparent member, and the inside thereof can be visually recognized (confirmed) from the outside.

In order to return the frame substrate unit 730 to the normal state from the state in which it is opened rearward, the normal state can be restored by performing the procedure opposite to that described above.

By the way, after opening the frame board unit 730 from the main body frame base 501, when returning to the normal state, if the rear cover 505 is first closed to the main body frame base 501, even if the frame board unit 730 is to be closed, The frame substrate unit 730 interferes (contacts) with the back cover 505 and cannot be closed. In addition, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the frame substrate unit 730 is open (the back cover 505 is open), the frame substrate unit 730 and the back cover 505 are is prevented from closing by interfering (abutting) with. Thereby, it is possible to notify that the frame substrate unit 730 has not been closed.

In addition, even if you forget to push (forget to lock) the operation portion 774a of the ny latch 774 after closing the frame substrate unit 730 with respect to the main body frame base 501, closing the rear cover 505 with respect to the main body frame base 501 will The lower right front end of the cover 505 contacts the operation portion 774a of the ny latch 774 from behind, and can press and lock the operation portion 774a.

[4-9. lock unit]
The lock unit 780 in the body frame 4 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. The lock unit 780 is attached from behind along the right edge of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The lock unit 780 is for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 .

The lock unit 780 includes a cylindrical lock cylinder 781 that passes through the cylinder insertion opening 501m of the main body frame base 501 from the rear and the front end of which protrudes forward, a keyhole 782 that is provided on the front end surface of the lock cylinder 781, and a keyhole. When the key corresponding to 782 is inserted and rotated in a predetermined direction, the door frame lock claw 783 that unlocks the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is inserted, and the key corresponding to the key hole 782 is inserted. It has an outer frame lock claw 784 that unlocks the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 when rotated in the determination direction.

[4-10. Second counting button switch]
By the way, [3. Door frame], the door frame 3 is provided with the count button switch 180, but the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with another count button switch. Here, the counting button switch mentioned above is called the first counting button switch 180, and the other counting button switch is called the second counting button switch 180B. Description will be made with reference to FIGS. 2, 4, 18, 68, and the like.

In a so-called circulation type (enclosed type) game machine (this pachinko machine 1), the game progresses without paying out game balls B by increasing or decreasing the number of held balls by means of electronic storage means. This has the advantage that the player does not need to touch the game ball B. However, on the other hand, since the game proceeds without the substance of the game ball B, careful consideration is required for the handling of the player's own ball. In particular, if the settlement cannot be made at the end of the game, the trust of the hall may be lost.

For example, as a conventional pachinko machine, in an in-machine circulation pachinko machine in which the settlement process is executed when the return button 75 is operated, such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-215033 (see paragraphs 0038 to 0040), the return button 75 If a problem occurs in the system, the settlement process will not be executed.

The second counting button switch 180B of this embodiment is connected to the frame control board 740, and is connected in parallel with the above-described first counting button switch 180 on the frame control board 740 by printed wiring. The settlement process is similarly executed by operating the count button switch 180B (see FIGS. 18 and 68, etc.).

The first counting button switch 180 is a counting button switch operated by the player to execute settlement processing, and as shown in FIG. 3, the second counting button switch 180B is provided in the amusement facility instead of the player when an unforeseen situation occurs in which the settlement process is not executed even if the first counting button switch 180 is operated. It is a count button switch operated by an administrator to execute the settlement process, and is located on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 so that it can be operated from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 as shown in FIG. It is provided so as to be positioned on the open side.

The second counting button switch 180B employs a press-operated button switch, which is mounted on a printed circuit board having through holes for screwing at the four corners and having a pattern insulated with a green resist. there is A part of the body frame base unit 500 that constitutes the body frame 4, an area that is not covered by the back cover 505 that can be opened and closed by a hinge, for example, a space on the left side of the frame control board box 771 A boss for screwing is formed, and the printed circuit board is fixed to the boss with screws so that the operating surface of the second counting button switch 180B mounted on the printed circuit board faces the rear side.

The first count button switch 180 also employs the same press-operated button switch as the second count button switch 180B. The printed circuit board also has the same dimensions and shape, and is mounted on a printed circuit board insulated with a green resist pattern having through-holes for screwing at the four corners. A boss for screwing is formed on the back surface of the shelf portion 201 constituting the shelf unit 200, and the operation surface of the first counting button switch 180 mounted on the printed circuit board faces from the opening opened in the shelf portion 201. The printed circuit board is fixed to the boss with screws. That is, the members related to the first count button switch 180 and the members related to the second count button switch 180 are shared.

The entire surface of the operating portion of the second counting button switch 180B is plated, and the operating portion is electrically grounded through the frame (body frame 4) constituting the pachinko machine 1 and conductive portions such as wiring. It has become. The frame serving as the path member is made of a conductive resin, and is adjusted so that current does not flow out suddenly by, for example, providing a resistance element in the middle of the wiring serving as the path.

In addition to the second counting button switch 180B, the printed circuit board on which the second counting button switch 180B is mounted has wiring connectors (female on both ends) for transmitting signals from the second counting button switch to the frame control board 740. A white connector (male type) to which the frame control board 740 is connected is mounted, and is directly connected to the white connector (male type) mounted on the frame control board 740 to transmit a signal. . An input circuit on the frame control board 740 to which the signal from the second counting button switch 180B is input includes an element (for example, ferrite beads) and a circuit (for example, a comparator) for noise removal.

Similarly, the operating portion of the first counting button switch 180 is also electrically grounded, and the signal from the first counting button switch 180B is once transferred to the white connector mounted on the relay board. Another white connector (male type) mounted on the relay board and a white connector (male type) mounted on the frame control board 740 are connected to the (male type) by wiring (female type at both ends). are connected by wiring (female on both ends) to transmit signals. The input circuit on the frame control board 740 to which the first count button switch 180 is connected also includes elements (for example, ferrite beads) and circuits (for example, comparators) for noise removal. The wires connecting the substrates are of the same type, for example, 24 AWG twisted wire, although the wire lengths are different, and the wires of the same color are used for the coating. Further, since it is wiring for transmitting signals to the frame control board 740, the name of the manufacturer and the product number are repeatedly printed on the coating.

When the first counting button switch 180 is broken, the game facility manager who receives the information from the player opens the body frame 4 and operates the second counting button switch 180B. While the frame control board 740 executes the settlement process, it notifies the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 that the second counting button switch 180B has been operated. The peripheral control board 1510 emits an announcement indicating that the settlement process has been executed from various speakers (the door frame top speaker 303, the door frame top side speaker 304, and the body frame speaker 503) connected to the peripheral control board 1510. (A "beep" sound is emitted while operating the second count button switch 180B). When the first counting button switch 180 is operated without any trouble, various speakers are similarly used to announce that the settlement process has been executed.

By the way, in order to detect the opening of the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 from the viewpoint of illegality, the body frame base 501 is provided with a door open switch 507 and a frame open switch 508, which are connected to the frame control board 740 respectively. ing. (See FIGS. 18 and 68, etc.) When one of them is opened, the fact that it is opened is transmitted from the frame control board 740 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 . The peripheral control board 1510 emits a notification sound (announcement of "the door frame is open") from various speakers (door frame top speaker 303, door frame top side speaker 304, body frame speaker 503) connected to the peripheral control board 1510. is emitted, and is provided behind the decoration that decorates the door frame 3 (door frame top decoration 301, etc.), and the decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted changes from the normal mode to the notification mode (red) Lights up and blinks. When all are closed, the fact that they are closed is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the notification sound is stopped, and only the decorative board continues lighting and blinking, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, the state shifts to the normal mode. It's becoming

Therefore, for security reasons, when the second counting button switch 180B is operated, a notification sound is emitted when one of the doors is opened. It is designed to be emitted by

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, when the first counting button switch 180 operated by the player is broken, the second counting button switch 180B operated by the amusement facility manager is operated. to execute the settlement process. As a result, even if an unexpected situation occurs in the first counting button switch 180, the second counting button switch 180B can be operated to settle the balance.

In addition, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second counting button switch 180B is not for normal use, but for dealing with unexpected situations such as when the first counting button switch 108 is broken. , provided on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 known only to the manager of the game facility. This can prevent the player from being misled. When operated in front of the player, it is provided at a position in front of the open side so that it can be operated without fully opening the body frame 4.例文帳に追加This makes it possible to quickly respond to requests from players.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the printed circuit board and the like on which the counting button switches and the counting button switches are mounted are shared in the first counting button switch 180 and the second counting button switch 180B. This can reduce costs. Further, the operating portions of the counting button switches (the first counting button switch 180 and the second counting button switch 180B) touched by the players and the game facility manager are electrically grounded. As a result, it is possible to avoid the risk of the control boards (the frame control board 740, the main control board 1310, etc.) malfunctioning due to the static electricity accumulated by the player or the game facility manager.

Although the preferred embodiment of the second count button switch 180B has been described above, it is not limited to this embodiment, and various improvements and design changes are possible as described below.

For example, instead of providing the second counting button switch 180B on the rear surface side of the main body frame 4, the rear surface side of the door frame 3 or the surface side of the main body frame 4 may be provided. In such a case as well, it is preferable to provide it so as to be positioned on the open side.

Alternatively, it may be provided on the side surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁For example, a boss for screwing is formed on the left side of the unit base 770 (see FIG. 18) of the frame board unit 730 when viewed from the rear so that the operation surface faces the side so that it can be operated from the side of the pachinko machine 1. Secure the four corners of the printed circuit board to the boss using screws. Furthermore, when it is provided on the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, it is preferable that the printed circuit board on which the second counting button switch 180B is mounted is housed in a dedicated circuit board box and the circuit board box is attached together. According to the above-mentioned contents, when operating in front of the player, the body frame 4 can be operated quickly with less opening without the need to fully open, and the request of the player can be quickly responded. Further, on the open side, the hinge of the outer frame 2 that supports the main body frame 4 may, unfortunately, rattle and hit the outer frame 2 when opening and closing. Therefore, if the board is housed in a dedicated board box, damage can be minimized compared to the case where the board is not housed.

In addition, if it is possible to operate it as necessary, it is possible to normally store the board box separately for exclusive use, and connect it to the pachinko machine 1 when necessary to perform settlement processing. In such a form, since it is not necessary to always be connected to the pachinko machine 1, restrictions on the size of the board box can be eliminated. As for the connector to be connected, it is preferable to separately provide a connector cap from the viewpoint of preventing contact failure due to dust and dirt.

In addition to being able to attach a printed circuit board on which counting button switches (the first counting button switch 180 and the second counting button switch 180B) are mounted and a dedicated circuit board box containing the printed circuit board, these can be used in other ways. A game device and a design section may be unitized and configured to be replaceable in unit units. For example, each shelf unit 200 may be replaceable, or only the shelf portion 201 of the shelf unit 200 may be replaceable together with the design portion. The first counting button switch section (180) and the number of balls display section (140) may be configured separately, and may be individually configured to be replaceable together with the design section. According to the contents described above, for example, in the case where the first counting button switch 180 and the design part are broken (the case in which the second counting button switch is used), the shelf unit 200 is unintentionally turned on because the game is too hot. It is conceivable that the designed part of the shelf unit 200 may be damaged by hitting it, but even in such a situation, the whole shelf unit 200 can be replaced, and depending on the degree of damage, the shelf part can be replaced. 201 and the design part can be replaced together, or the first counting button switch part (180) and the design part can be replaced together.

In addition, instead of mounting the second counting button switch 180B on a printed circuit board to a boss formed on the main body frame base unit 500 or the base unit 770, or mounting the printed circuit board by housing it in a dedicated circuit board box. , may be provided on various control boards. In such a case as well, it is preferable to select the control board positioned closest to the open side and provide it on the control board so as to be positioned on the open side. However, if it is provided in the frame control board 740 housed in the frame control board box 771, for example, foreign matter may enter through the gap between the second counting button switch 180B and the opening facing the operation surface opened on the case side of the frame control board box 771. may access various electronic components mounted on the frame control board 740. Therefore, it is preferable to form a partition wall extending from the inside of the case of the frame control board box 771 and contacting the surface of the frame control board 740 to surround the outer periphery of the second counting button switch 180B. In addition, it is preferable to provide a cover for covering the operation surface on the outer surface of the case to prevent tampering. According to the contents described above, it is possible to prevent damage due to insertion of a foreign object through the opened opening. Moreover, providing the cover not only serves as a countermeasure against fraud, but also serves as a reminder to the game facility manager who operates the second counting button switch 180B that they should not operate it carelessly.

In addition, when it is installed on various control boards, the second counting button switch 180B does not have to be the same as the first counting button switch 180, and a button switch small enough to be reliably operated by the manager of the amusement facility can be used. Good to adopt. In addition, it is preferable that the control board is provided near the fixing portion where the control board is fixed to the board box so that the control board does not bend even when the button switch is pressed. According to the above description, the smaller the size of the opening facing the operation surface of the operation unit, the more difficult it becomes to insert a foreign object through the gap. Also, the mounting space can be further reduced. In addition, mechanical stress applied to other electronic components can be avoided.

As described above, the frame control board 740 is mounted with a RAM for storing the number of balls held by the player. A pitch number storage/display clear switch 743 is mounted. This number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 is unavoidably stored in the RAM so that the next player can quickly play in the event of an unforeseen situation in which the previous player leaves without executing the settlement process. This is for forcibly erasing the stored number of balls held by the previous player. When the power switch 751 is turned on while pressing the number of balls storage/display clear switch 743, the number of held balls display section 140 is displayed. , a code indicating that the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 has been operated is displayed, and the stored number of balls held by the previous player is erased from the number-of-balls storage area of the RAM. When , the code display disappears and the normal game state is restored. According to the contents described above, the number of balls storage/display clear switch 743 is mistakenly operated while intending to operate the second counting button switch 180B, or the number of balls storage/display is cleared at the same time as the second counting button switch 180B. Even if the switch 743 is also operated, the number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 must be operated together with the power switch 751, so that no trouble occurs in either case. When the number of pitches storage/display clear switch 743 is operated, an announcement indicating that the number of pitches has been cleared from the number of pitches storage area is made using various speakers ("The number of pitches has been cleared."). ”) is supposed to be done.

The second counting button switch 180B is connected to the frame control board 740, and is connected in parallel with the above-described first counting button switch 180 on the frame control board 740 by printed wiring. In other words, the second count button switch 180B behaves exactly the same as when the first count button switch 180 is operated. Alternatively, the count button switch may be configured to be individually connected to the frame control board 740 . For example, when the CPU mounted on the frame control board 740 detects that the door open switch 507 or the frame open switch 508 is open, it checks the state of the second count button switch 180B. When the CPU detects that the second counting button switch 180B has been operated, the CPU executes settlement processing and notifies the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310 that the second counting button switch 180B has been operated. to communicate. By receiving this, the CPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can stop the notification sound emitted from various speakers in response to the fact that it was in the open state earlier. After stopping the notification sound, various speakers are used to announce that the settlement process has been executed. From the viewpoint of crime prevention, the decorative board continues lighting and blinking in the notification mode, and after a predetermined period of time has passed, it shifts to the normal mode. According to the above-described content, it is possible to quickly stop the notification sound and reduce the player's discomfort even a little.

When the count button switch is configured to be individually connected to the frame control board 740 as described above, the second count button switch 180B is operated on the premise that the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are in the open state. Since it is one time, it is possible not to perform the checkout process when it is in the closed state.

Here, although the same content will be described later, the technical features of the second count button switch 180B will be described. As described above, in a so-called circulation type (enclosed type) game machine (pachinko machine), by increasing or decreasing the number of balls held by an electronic memory means, the game can be played without paying out the game balls. proceed. This has the advantage that the player does not need to touch the game ball. However, on the other hand, since the game progresses without the substance of the game ball, careful consideration is required for the handling of the player's own ball. In particular, if the settlement cannot be made at the end of the game, the trust of the hall may be lost.

For example, as a conventional game machine, in an in-machine circulation type pachinko machine in which settlement processing is executed when the return button 75 is operated, such as Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-215033 (see paragraphs 0038 to 0040), the return button 75 If a problem occurs in the system, the settlement process will not be executed.

Therefore, in view of the above situation, the following solving means aims to provide a game machine capable of performing settlement processing even in an unforeseen situation of the operating unit.

As a solution to solve the above problems,
Means 1:
"A game board that is removably supported from the front by a main body frame and has a game area in which a game is played with game balls, and a ball launcher that is provided below the game board and capable of supplying game balls to the game area. means, foul ball recovery means for recovering game balls that have been shot by the ball shooting means but have not been supplied to the game area, and ball shooting means for recovering the game balls shot by the ball shooting means. and ball circulation means for supplying to
A gaming machine in which a game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
a first settlement switch for the player to execute settlement processing of the ball data;
A second settlement switch is provided for the amusement facility manager to execute the settlement processing of the possession ball data.”
It is a thing. (In [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], see the description in the chapter [4-10. Second counting button switch] and Figures 2, 4, 18, 68, etc.)

According to the above means 1, when the first settlement switch operated by the player is broken, the second settlement switch operated by the game facility manager is operated to execute settlement processing. Thereby, even if an unforeseen situation arises in the first settlement switch, the settlement can be made by operating the second settlement switch.

Means 2: In the game machine of Means 1,
"While the first checkout switch is provided on the door frame of the game machine so that it can be operated from the front side of the game machine, the second checkout switch can be operated from the back side of the machine with the main frame open. It is operably provided on the rear side of the game machine.” (See the description regarding the first count button switch 180 and the second count button switch 180B in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

According to the above means 2, the second payment switch is not for normal use, but for dealing with unforeseen circumstances such as when the first payment switch is broken. is located behind the This can prevent the player from being misled.

Means 3: In the gaming machine of Means 2,
"The second settlement switch is provided so as to be located on the open side of the main body frame from the center of the gaming machine." reference)

According to the above-mentioned means 3, it is provided at a position in front of the open side so that it can be operated without fully opening the body frame when it is operated in front of the player. This makes it possible to quickly respond to requests from players.

Means 4: In the game machine of Means 1 to 3,
"The printed circuit board on which the first adjustment switch and the second adjustment switch are mounted, and the printed circuit board on which the first adjustment switch is mounted and the printed circuit board on which the second adjustment switch is mounted are common." , see the description regarding the first counting button switch 180 and the second counting button switch 180B)

According to the above means 4, the printed circuit board and the like on which the first settlement switch and the second settlement switch are mounted are shared. This can reduce costs.

Means 5: The game machine of Means 1 to 4,
"The surface of the operation part of the second adjustment switch is electrically grounded."

According to the above means 5, the operating portion of the second payment switch, which is touched by the player or the manager of the gaming facility, is electrically grounded. As a result, it is possible to avoid the risk of the control board malfunctioning due to static electricity accumulated by the player or the game facility manager.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows settlement even if an unforeseen situation occurs during the execution of settlement processing.

Regarding the relationship between the above solving means and this embodiment, the first counting button switch 180 of this embodiment corresponds to the first settlement switch of the above solving means, and the second counting button switch 180B of this embodiment corresponds to the above solving means. It corresponds to the second settlement switch of the means.

Then, as a characteristic effect of the embodiment according to the above solution means, first, according to the above means 1, when the first counting button switch 180 operated by the player is broken, the game facility management The second count button switch 180B operated by the operator is operated to execute the settlement process. As a result, even if an unexpected situation occurs in the first counting button switch 180, the second counting button switch 180B can be operated to settle the balance.

In addition, according to the above means 2, the second counting button switch 180B is not for normal use but for dealing with unforeseen circumstances such as when the first counting button switch 108 is broken. It is provided behind the gaming machine known only to the manager. This can prevent the player from being misled.

Further, according to the above-mentioned means 3, when operating in front of the player, it is provided at a position in front of the open side so that it can be operated without fully opening the body frame 4. - 特許庁This makes it possible to quickly respond to requests from players.

Furthermore, according to the above means 4, the printed circuit board and the like on which the first count button switch 180 and the second count button switch 180B are mounted are shared. This can reduce costs.

Further, according to the above means 5, the operating portion of the second counting button switch 180B, which is touched by the player or the manager of the gaming facility, is electrically grounded. As a result, it is possible to avoid the risk of the control board malfunctioning due to static electricity accumulated by the player or the game facility manager.

[5. A brief description of the game board]
The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has the same board configuration as the game board 5 shown in FIG. The game board 5 includes a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, and a special winning opening 2001, which is provided with a privilege by receiving the game ball B, in a game area 5a into which the game ball B is driven. etc. are provided, and the player operates the handle 160 to enjoy hitting the game ball B so that the game ball B can be received in the winning hole. The game board 5 is detachably attached to the game board insertion portion 502 of the main body frame 4 from the front side. The game board 5 is visible from the player side through the game window 101 of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1, and is a game area where game balls B are hit by the player operating a handle 160. 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 and a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement so as to be able to come into contact with the game balls B in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 are provided. ing.

The front constituent member 1000 of the game board 5 is entirely transparent. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front structural member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends obliquely to the upper right. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front to the diagonally upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front is a game area. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of 5a and inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is discharged downward from the game board 5 behind the game panel 1100 (out ball receiving port 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600) without being returned to the game area 5a.

The game board 5 is provided behind the game panel 1100 and is controlled by a main control board 1310 that controls the contents of the game performed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, and a control signal from the main control board 1310. and a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on the function display unit 1400 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a peripheral control board 1510 provided behind the game panel 1100, and is arranged behind the game panel 1100 in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and can display a predetermined effect image. A performance display device 1600, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are provided.

The game board 5 (front unit 2000) has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 which are always open and capable of receiving game balls B hit into the game area 5a, and provided at predetermined positions in the game area 5a. A gate 2015 through which the game ball B can pass, and a first start opening that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and where the lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed by accepting the game ball B. 2003 and the second starting port 2004, and a large winning prize that allows the reception of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 and the second starting port 2004. a mouth 2005;

The first starting port 2003 is provided directly above the out port 1008 below the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 provided in the center of the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is provided in the attacker unit 2400, and opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2015.例文帳に追加

The big winning opening 2005 is provided in the attacker unit 2400 attached to the lower right corner in the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a general prize winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general prize winning hole 2001, a gate sensor 2016 for detecting the game ball B passing through the gate 2015, and a first start sensor. A first starting hole sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the hole 2003, a second starting hole sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2004, and a big winning hole 2005. and a large winning opening sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B (see FIG. 68).

The game ball B received in the general prize winning port 2001 is detected by the general prize winning port sensor 3001 behind the game panel 1100, and discharged from the game board 5 to the safe ball receiving port 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below. be done. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2101 behind the game panel 1100, and then reaches the safe ball receiving port 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below the game board 5. discharged to The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2401 behind the game panel 1100, and then reaches the safe ball receiving port 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below the game board 5. discharged to The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402 behind the game panel 1100, and discharged from the game board 5 to the safe ball receiving hole 600b in the circulating ball path unit 600 below. be done.

The main control board 1310 controls the game using the game ball B in the game area 5a in the pachinko machine 1. FIG. The main control board 1310 is connected to the frame control board 740 provided in the main body frame 4 for two-way communication, and is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 in one direction only for output signals.

The main control board 1310 receives detection signals of the game ball B from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2016, the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2402, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 outputs a drive signal to a starting opening solenoid 2412 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004, an attacker solenoid 2414 for opening and closing the big winning opening 2005, and the like.

The main control board 1310 outputs a command of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning balls when the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 . Since this is the same as the conventional pachinko machine, the software of the main control board 1310 does not have to be changed. When this winning ball command is received, the frame control board 740 interprets it as a winning ball addition signal. Also, when the game ball B received in the first starting hole 2003 is detected by the first starting hole sensor 2101, a predetermined number (for example, one) prize ball command is output. Also, when the game ball B received in the second starting hole 2004 is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2401, a predetermined number (for example, one) prize ball command is output. Furthermore, when the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2402, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) winning ball commands are output.

In addition, the main control board 1310 outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 signals such as the lottery results of the normal symbols and the lottery results of the special symbols.

The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the lottery result of normal symbols, the lottery result of special symbols, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2015. A normal pattern display device consisting of two LEDs and a normal reservation display device consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserved normal patterns drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate 2015 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, and a first starting A first special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the opening 2003, and a second special design drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004. A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery result, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 and has.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the lottery result of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is "win" or the like. A round indicator consisting of two LEDs.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 . The peripheral control board 1510 causes the effect display device 1600 to display an effect image or execute a light emitting effect, a movable effect, etc. based on a signal sent from the main control board 1310 .

[6. Game ball flow]
Next, the flow of game balls B in the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 and the like. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing various passages for game balls on the rear surface side of the body frame from the rear surface. FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the flow of game balls in the body frame.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player does not operate the handle 160, as shown in FIG. It is stored in a portion below the disk 5 . The circulation path R of the game balls B in the main body frame 4 is provided with a foul unit 570, a circulation ball path unit 600, a ball lifting unit 650, a ball feeding unit 700, and a ball shooting unit 550 in order from the upstream side. The circulation path R is composed of an out ball passage 601, a safe ball passage 602, a foul ball passage 603, a meandering ball passage 604, a ball lifting inlet passage 651, a ball lifting outlet passage 652, and the like.

A plurality of sensors for detecting game balls B circulating in the circulation path R are, from the upstream side, a safe ball sensor 606, an out ball sensor 605, a foul ball sensor 607, a circulating ball excess sensor 622, and a circulating ball shortage sensor. 621, a lift entrance sensor 653, a lift exit sensor 654, a firing near sensor 704, and a firing subtraction sensor 554 are provided in this order. Based on signals from these various sensors, the frame control board 740 executes various control processes, which will be described later.

When the player does not operate the handle 160, the safe ball sensor 606, the out ball sensor 605, the foul ball sensor 607, and the excessive ball circulation sensor 622 are OFF (non-detected), and the ball circulation is insufficient. The sensor 621, the lift entrance sensor 653, the lift exit sensor 654, the pre-launch sensor 704, and the launch subtraction sensor 554 are ON (detection).

In the circulation path R in the main body frame 4, a large number of game balls B are stored in a row. A large number of game balls B lined up in a row are positioned on the ball launch pad 552b of the launch unit cover 552 in the ball launch unit 550 at the top, and are located on the ball serpentine passage 604 of the circulation ball path unit 600 at the rear. It is located upstream of the ball extraction shutter 615 within the range of the portion 620 .

In the circulation path R, the portion between the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 and the lifting outlet sensor 654 in the ball lifting unit 650 is the length of a predetermined number (for example, 5) of game balls B lined up. A specific number (for example, four) of game balls B less than a predetermined number are lined up. This is to secure a space for receiving the lifted game ball B even if one game ball B is lifted when returning the lifting spiral shaft 661 to the origin.

Also, in the circulation route R, a predetermined number (for example, 10) are arranged between the pre-launch sensor 704 and the lifting exit sensor 654 . As a result, even after the detection of the game ball B in the lifting exit sensor 654 is turned OFF (non-detection), when the game ball B continues to be shot in the ball shooting unit 550, the rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661 It is possible to avoid running out of the game balls B to be shot until the game balls B are lifted up and replenished.

Then, when the player operates the handle 160 to drive the shooting solenoid 553 of the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B placed on the ball shooting platform 552b of the shooting unit cover 552 is shot, and the shooting subtraction sensor At 554, detection of game ball B becomes non-detection (OFF). As a result, the number of balls possessed by the player is subtracted by one (ball possession subtraction processing to be described later). After that, the ball-feeding solenoid 706 of the ball-feeding unit 700 is energized for a predetermined time, the ball receiving part 705a of the ball-feeding movable member 705 moves up and down, and one game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b. , the firing subtraction sensor 554 is in a detection (ON) state.

When game balls B are shot one by one by the operation of the player's handle 160, a plurality of game balls stored between the shooting front sensor 704 and the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 (ball lifting exit passage 652). The number of balls B decreases one by one, and eventually the detection of the game ball B in the lifting exit sensor 654 becomes non-detection (OFF). Then, when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls B are shot after the lifting exit sensor 654 becomes non-detected, the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by the lifting motor 664 of the ball lifting unit 650. , and after rotating three times and supplying three game balls B to the ball lifting exit passage 652, it is stopped (lifting motor operation processing described later).

When the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by the lifting motor 664, the game ball B located at the downstream end of the ball lifting inlet passage 651 moves to the lower end side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 and is moved upward. . As a result, a large number of game balls B lined up in the ball-lifting inlet passage 651 and the meandering ball passage 604 flow downstream, and the number of game balls B stored in the meandering ball passage 604 is reduced.

The game ball B fired from the ball shooting unit 550 and hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 is an out port 1008 or a winning port (general winning port 2001, first start port 2003, second start port 2004, It is accepted in any of the big winning openings 2005). The game ball B received in the out port 1008 of the game board 5 is ejected downward from the game board 5 and delivered to the out ball receiving port 600 a of the circulation ball path unit 600 . The game ball B delivered to the out-ball receiving port 600 a is detected by the out-ball sensor 605 by passing through the out-ball passage 601 and is sent to the ball meandering passage 604 .

On the other hand, the game ball B received in the winning opening of the game board 5 is ejected downward from the game board 5 and delivered to the safe ball receiving opening 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600. FIG. The game ball B delivered to the safe ball receiving port 600b passes through the safe ball passage 602, is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, and is sent to the meandering ball passage 604. - 特許庁

When the game ball B is detected by the out ball sensor 605, the number of out balls is counted, and when the game ball B is detected by the safe ball sensor 606, the number of safe balls is counted. As a result, it is possible to calculate the correct ball output rate of the game ball B. The calculated ball payout rate is displayed on a display section (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310 . Since this ball payout rate changes according to the game state, the ball payout rate within a predetermined period (for example, per unit time, per predetermined time, per day, etc.) - number of safe balls within a predetermined period) / number of out balls within a predetermined period = ball output rate within a predetermined period.

By the way, the game ball B that was not hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 even though it was shot from the ball launching unit 550 (ball launching table 552b) is recovered as a foul ball by the foul unit 570, and then circulated. It is delivered to the foul ball receptacle 600 c of the ball path unit 600 . The game ball B delivered to the foul ball receiving port 600 c flows through the foul ball passage 603 and is detected by the foul ball sensor 607 and sent to the meandering ball passage 604 . When the game ball B is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, the number of balls possessed by the player is added by one (ball possession addition process described later).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game balls B are enclosed without being discharged to the outside or supplied from the outside. never touch.

[7. Various control processing]
Next, various control processes in the frame control board 740 in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 68 to 86 and the like. FIG. 68 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 69 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 70 is a flow chart showing firing permission processing. FIG. 71 is a flow chart showing the possession ball subtraction process, and FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the possession ball subtraction process of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing possession ball addition processing for a foul ball. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing the launch control process, and FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing the launch control process of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. FIG. 76 is a time chart showing the operation of the firing solenoid and the ball feed solenoid in the firing sequence, and FIG. 77 shows the operation of the firing solenoid and the foul shutter driving solenoid in the forced firing sequence of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. It is a time chart. FIG. 78(a) is a flow chart showing a firing control process different from that of FIG. 74, and (b) is a flow chart showing a possession ball subtraction process in the case of the firing control process of (a).

Also, FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the prize ball processing. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the lifting motor operation processing, FIG. 81 is a table showing the relationship between the lifting entrance sensor, the lifting exit sensor, and the operation of the lifting motor, and FIG. It is a graph which shows the relationship with the operation|movement of a ball lifting unit. FIG. 83 is a graph showing the operation of the ball lifting mechanism in the ball lifting unit. FIG. 84(a) is a flowchart showing security processing, and (b) is a flowchart showing security processing in an embodiment different from (a). FIG. 85 is a table showing the relationship between the circulating ball shortage sensor, the circulating ball excess sensor, and the error notification. FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the settlement processing of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment. 68 and 69, some of the electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, LEDs, etc. connected to the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are omitted.

The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is, as shown in FIGS. 1510 and . The frame control board 740 mainly performs control processing such as shooting and circulation of game balls B, the number of balls held, and the like. The main control board 1310 mainly performs game control processing. The peripheral control board 1510 mainly performs control processing of effects.

The frame control board 740 includes a firing stop switch 161, a handle touch sensor 162, a handle rotation sensor 163, a counting button switch 180, a door opening switch 507, a frame opening switch 508, a firing subtraction sensor 554, an out ball sensor 605, and a safe ball sensor. 606, foul ball sensor 607, circulating ball shortage sensor 621, circulating ball excess sensor 622, lifting inlet sensor 653, lifting outlet sensor 654, lifting motor index sensor 666, firing front sensor 704, RAM clear switch 741, ball removal Signals are input from the switch 742, the pitch number storage/display clear switch 743, and the like.

In addition, the frame control board 740 outputs signals to the number display unit 140, the firing solenoid 553, the lift motor 664, the ball motor 688, the ball feed solenoid 706, and the like.

Further, the frame control board 740 receives and outputs signals from the game ball lending device 8 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 765 . Also, the frame control board 740 receives and outputs signals from the main control board 1310 .

Signals from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2016, the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the special winning opening sensor 2402, and the like are input to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 also outputs signals to the starter solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like.

The game ball lending device 8 is provided outside the pachinko machine 1 and outputs a signal to the management server 9 via the communication network. Signals from the ball lending button switch 8a, the return button switch, the frame control board 740, and the like are input to the game ball lending device 8. FIG. In addition, the game ball lending device 8 outputs signals to the display section, the frame control board 740, and the like.

[7-1. Launch permission processing]
The firing permission process will be described with reference to FIG. The launch permission process is a process of determining whether or not the game ball B should be launched. When the firing permission process is started, first, in step S101, it is checked whether or not the player is touching the handle 160, and if the player touches the handle 160 and the handle touch sensor 162 is ON (YES), , the process proceeds to the next step S102. If the handle touch sensor 162 is OFF in step S101 (NO), the process proceeds to step S107, the frame control firing permission flag is turned OFF, and the process ends.

In step S102, it is checked whether or not the firing stop switch 161 is OFF, and if the firing stop switch 161 is OFF, the determination is YES and the process proceeds to the next step S103. On the other hand, if the firing stop switch 161 is OFF in step S102, NO is determined and the process proceeds to step S107 to turn OFF the frame control firing permission flag and terminate the process.

In step S103, it is confirmed whether or not the frame control board 740 is connected to the game ball rental device 8 via the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 765, and if it is connected to the game ball rental device 8 , the process proceeds to the next step S104 as YES. On the other hand, if the connection with the game ball lending device 8 is not confirmed in step S103, the process proceeds to step S107 as NO, the frame control firing permission flag is turned OFF, and the process ends.

In step S104, the presence or absence (ON/OFF) of the main control firing permission from the main control board 1310 is confirmed. On the other hand, if there is no main control firing permission in step S104, the process proceeds to step S107 as NO, the frame control firing permission flag is turned OFF, and the process ends.

Here, the conditions for turning on the main control firing permission are: "no fatal error such as a RAM error in the main control board 1310"; "not detected", "not in a game stop state", and the like.

In addition to the above conditions of steps S101 to S105, the conditions for turning on the frame control firing permission flag include "no fatal error such as a RAM error in the frame control board 740" and "magnetism error". Sensors, radio wave sensors, vibration sensors, etc., have not detected fraudulent activity", "There is no abnormality in circulation route R", "Circulation ball shortage sensor 621, circulation ball excess sensor 622, and firing front sensor 704 are ON. "not detected", "communication with the game ball rental device 8 is normal", and the like. Conditions other than these steps S101 to S105 are normally processed.

At step S105, it is checked whether or not the number of balls held by the player is greater than 0, and if the number of balls held is greater than 0, YES is entered and the process proceeds to the next step S106 to turn on the frame control firing permission flag. to end the process. On the other hand, in step S105, if the number of balls in possession is less than 0 (the number of balls in possession is 0), the process proceeds to step S107 as NO, the frame control firing permission flag is turned OFF, and the process ends.

In this way, the game ball B is permitted to be shot by the shooting permission process, and when the player rotates the handle 160 in this state, the shooting solenoid 553 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle. A game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 . When the firing solenoid 553 is driven, firing control processing, which will be described later, is executed.

[7-2. possession ball subtraction processing]
Possessed ball subtraction processing will be described with reference to FIG. The possession ball subtraction process is a process of subtracting the number of possession balls of the player by shooting the game ball B. FIG. In the possession ball subtraction process, first, in step S111, it is determined whether or not the firing subtraction sensor 554 of the ball firing unit 550 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state. When the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launch unit 550, the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects the game ball B and is in the ON state. From this state, when the shooting mallet 555 hits the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b by driving the shooting solenoid 553 and the game ball B is shot, the shooting subtraction sensor 554 becomes non-detection and turns off.

Then, in step S111, when the game ball B is shot and the shooting subtraction sensor 554 turns from ON to OFF, YES is entered to proceed to the next step S112, the number of balls in possession is subtracted by one, and the process ends.

On the other hand, in step S111, if the firing subtraction sensor 554 does not turn from ON to OFF and remains ON, NO is determined and the process ends without subtracting the number of balls held.

In this way, when the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550, the number of balls held by the player is subtracted by one.

In addition, for example, although it is an irregular situation, if the number of shots is greater than 1, or if the number of shots < number of subtractions (number of shots), it is possible to consider a specification that does not subtract as an irregular event. be done. However, if the emission subtraction sensor 554 is intermittently irradiated with strong radio waves, and the signal is divided to inflate the number of emission, the subtraction will not be performed, so as long as the radio waves continue to be emitted. You can shoot indefinitely. Therefore, in this embodiment, subtraction is always performed, and as a result, when the information on the number of balls in possession becomes a negative value, "0" is set as the number of balls in possession. As a result, NO is determined in step S105 of FIG. 70, and the frame control launch permission signal is turned OFF in step S107, so the next game ball B is not launched. With this configuration, by intermittently irradiating the firing subtraction sensor 554 with strong radio waves and dividing the signal, it is possible to invalidate fraudulent acts that inflate the number of firings.

[7-2a. Possession ball subtraction processing of pachinko machine of second embodiment]
Possession ball subtraction processing of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Possession ball subtraction processing of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment includes [4-2a. Sphere launching unit of second embodiment] and sphere launching unit 550A of the second embodiment described in [4-6a. The processing is unique to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment having the combination of the ball-throwing units of the second embodiment described in [Ball-throwing unit of the second embodiment].

In the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, the ball launching unit 550A does not have the launch subtraction sensor 554, but instead performs subtraction based on the detection signal of the ball outlet sensor 711 provided in the ball feeding unit.

Possessed ball subtraction processing will be described with reference to FIG. Possessed ball subtraction processing is processing for subtracting the number of balls possessed by the player, assuming that the game ball B has been shot when sent to the ball launch pad 552b (shooting rail). In the possessed ball subtraction process, first, in step S110, it is determined whether or not the game ball B has passed through the ball outlet sensor 711 . When judging, the game ball B is detected by a game ball B detection method used in a winning opening or the like.

In other words, the output from the ball outlet sensor 711 is checked at predetermined interrupt intervals (for example, 4 ms), and when the output becomes non-detection, detection, detection (in other words, "011"), the game is started. It is determined that passage of ball B has been detected (ON).

When it is determined that the game ball B has passed the ball delivery port sensor 711, the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launch unit 550A, so it is assumed that the game ball B has been launched. As YES, the process proceeds to the next step S112, the number of balls in possession is decremented by one, and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is not determined in step S110 that the game ball B has passed through the ball outlet sensor 711, the process is terminated without subtracting the number of balls in possession as NO.

[7-3. Possession ball addition processing]
With reference to FIG. 73, the ball possession addition processing due to a foul will be described. When the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550, the number of balls possessed by the player is subtracted by the possession ball subtraction process, but the shot game ball B is not hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5.例文帳に追加In this case, since the game with the game ball B is not played, the interest of the player will be lowered if the number of balls in possession remains decremented. Therefore, in the possession ball addition process, game balls B (foul balls) that have not been hit into the game area 5a are added to the number of possession balls of the player. A value corresponding to the number of foul balls detected is added.

In the possession ball addition process, in step S121, it is determined whether or not the foul ball sensor 607 of the circulation ball path unit 600 has detected the passage of game ball B (foul ball). , YES, the process proceeds to the next step S122, the number of balls in possession is incremented by one, and the process ends. The foul ball sensor 607 also detects the game ball B by a method of detecting the game ball B used in a winning opening or the like when determining that the passage of the game ball B has been detected.

In other words, the output from the foul ball sensor 607 is checked at predetermined interrupt intervals (for example, 4 ms). It is determined that passage of B has been detected (ON).

On the other hand, in step S121, if the foul ball sensor 607 is not turned ON and remains OFF, the process ends without adding the number of balls held.

In this way, by the possession ball addition processing, when the game ball B is not hit into the game area 5a of the game board 5 even though it was shot from the ball shooting unit 550, the foul ball is added to the number of possession balls. By doing so, the player can avoid being disadvantaged.

[7-4. Launch control processing]
The firing control process will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 76 and the like. In the shooting control process, it is determined whether or not the game ball B is actually shot by driving the shooting solenoid 553 after the player rotates the handle 160 after the frame control shooting permission flag is turned ON in the shooting permission process. It is something to do. In the firing control process, first, in step S131, it is determined whether the frame control firing permission flag is ON/OFF. to end the process. On the other hand, if the frame control firing permission flag is OFF in step S131, the process proceeds to step S133, the firing permission signal is turned OFF, and the process ends.

Then, when the shooting permission signal is turned ON, when shooting the game ball B by the shooting solenoid 553, as shown in FIG. , moves the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 upward to receive the game ball B detected by the sensor 704 before firing. This first time t1 is set to a time sufficient for receiving the game ball B in the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705. As shown in FIG.

When the second time t2 (for example, 90 ms) shorter than the first time t1 has elapsed since the ball feed solenoid 706 was turned ON, the firing solenoid 553 is turned ON for the third time t3 (for example, 23 ms), A game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b is launched. Then, after the third time t3 has passed, the firing solenoid 553 is turned off. Note that the first time t1 is longer than the sum of the second time t2 and the third time t3.

Then, when the first time t1 has passed, the ball feed solenoid 706 is turned off, and the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b. This completes the firing sequence.

In addition, when the game ball B is continuously shot, after the first time t1 has passed, and after the fourth time t4 (for example, 450.5 ms) has passed, the ball feed solenoid 706 is turned on again for the first time t1. and the same operation as above is repeated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B is not placed on the ball launch pad 552b the first time the pachinko machine 1 is installed. sensor ON?" becomes NO, and the ball feed solenoid 706 is turned ON in subsequent step S136, and the game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b. After that, since the game ball B is always placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the game ball B can be launched at any time.

On the other hand, when the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b due to a thud or vibration, the launch subtraction sensor 554 is turned off, so it is considered to have been launched and the number of balls possessed is subtracted by one by the possessed ball subtraction process. However, since the dropped game ball B is recovered by the foul unit 570 and detected by the foul ball sensor 607, the number of possessed balls is added by one by the possessed ball addition processing, and the number of possessed balls is returned to the number before the drop. , the player is not at a disadvantage.

Also, when the game ball B launched from the ball launch pad 552b returns to the ball launch pad 552b, as described above, the next game ball B is supplied by the ball feed solenoid 706 of the ball feed unit 700 after the launch. At the same time, since only one game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, either the previous game ball B that has returned or the next game ball B supplied from the ball feeding unit 700 is It falls and is collected by the foul unit 570 . Therefore, in the same manner as described above, even if the number of balls in possession is subtracted by shooting, either the returning game ball B or the next game ball B becomes a foul ball and is added to the number of balls in possession. It is possible to return to the number of balls held before shooting, and the player is not at a disadvantage.

If the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b while the number of balls in possession is "0", the number of balls in possession cannot be subtracted in the ball subtraction process, so the dropped game ball B is fouled. As a ball, the number of balls in possession becomes "1" by the process of adding balls in possession. In such a case, an alarm may be issued and the staff of the game hall may resolve the contradiction in the number of balls possessed.

In this embodiment, the ball launch pad 552b is short, so the game ball B always falls in a swing that causes the launch subtraction sensor 554 to be turned off due to a thump or the like. Therefore, even though the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, an erroneous detection such that the launch subtraction sensor 554 is turned off and the game ball B is considered to have been launched does not occur.

By the way, it is conceivable that a power failure occurs (the frame control board 740 or the main control board 1310 receives a power failure signal) during the firing sequence as described above. For example, if a power failure occurs before the firing solenoid 553 is turned on (before excitation), the firing mallet 555 does not move, but depending on the operation timing of the ball feed solenoid 706, the next game ball B can be received by the ball receiving portion 705a. The game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552 b and is bounced by the game ball B placed earlier and collected by the foul unit 570 . However, when the power failure signal is received, the frame control board 740 and the like do not go to see each sensor, so the signal of the foul ball sensor 607 is ignored. As a result, it is not added to the number of balls held as a foul ball, so the accuracy of the number of balls held before the power failure is maintained.

In addition, when the firing solenoid 553 is energized or when the power fails when the firing solenoid 553 has been energized, the firing mallet 555 moves and the game ball B from the ball launch pad 552b is fired, but before the firing subtraction sensor 554 determines that it is OFF ( Before the OFF threshold of 80 ms has passed), the frame control board 740 no longer looks at the fire subtract sensor 554 and therefore is not considered fired. At the time when the shooting solenoid 553 is energized, the game ball B is received by the ball receiving portion 705a by the ball feed solenoid 706. Therefore, after the game ball B is shot, the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a is It is fed to ball launch pad 552b and ready for launch. On the other hand, even if the launched game ball B enters the winning hole of the game board 5, the main control board 1310 does not go to see the winning sensor, so the winning becomes invalid and the number of balls in possession is added. never. Therefore, even in this case, the accuracy of the number of balls held before the power failure is maintained.

[7-4a. Launch control process and possession ball subtraction process of the second embodiment]
In the above embodiment, the consistency of the number of balls held when the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b is maintained by a hard shooting sequence. Consistency may be maintained by software. In this firing control process, first, in step S131, it is determined whether the frame control firing permission flag is ON/OFF, and if the frame control firing permission flag is ON, YES is determined and the process proceeds to the next step S134. On the other hand, if the frame control firing permission flag is OFF in step S131, the process ends without driving the firing solenoid 553 as NO.

In step S134, it is determined whether or not the launch subtraction sensor 554 is ON, and if the launch subtraction sensor 554 is ON (the game ball B is present on the ball launch pad 552b), YES is given and the process proceeds to the next step S135 for subtraction. It is determined whether or not the completion flag is ON. As shown in FIG. 78(b), this subtraction completion flag is turned ON by step S113 when the number of balls in possession is subtracted by the possession ball subtraction process of the second embodiment, and the subtraction is not performed. If so, the subtraction completion flag is turned off in step S114.

Therefore, in the normal state before launch, the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b, and the subtraction completion flag is OFF. The solenoid 553 is turned on, and the game ball B is hit with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160, and the processing ends.

On the other hand, when the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b due to a thud or the like, the number of held balls is subtracted by the held ball subtraction process shown in FIG. 78(b), and the subtraction completion flag is turned ON. Therefore, YES is determined in step S135 of the firing control process, and the process proceeds to step S137.

In step S137, it is determined whether or not the sensor 704 before firing is ON, and if the sensor 704 before firing is not ON (when the game ball B is not detected), it proceeds to the next step S138 as NO. The error display indicating "out of shot ball" is turned on, the process returns to step S137, and the process is repeated until the sensor 704 before shot is turned on. The error display is displayed, for example, on the display screen of the effect display device.

The error display may be performed by providing an information lamp and turning it on, or by displaying an image on the performance display device. Alternatively, an error signal may be output to the hall computer (holcon) of the game hall via the game ball lending device 8 to turn on the notification lamp provided on the game hall side.

In this step S137, when the sensor 704 before shooting detects the game ball B and is ON, YES is determined and the process proceeds to the next step S139, the ball feed solenoid 706 is turned ON (energized), and the ball feed movable member 705 is moved. Let As a result, the game ball B detected by the sensor 704 before launch is delivered to the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705, and when the ball feeding solenoid 706 is turned off after a predetermined short time, the ball receiving portion 705a The delivered game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b. At this time, if there is a game ball B on the upstream side (ball lifting exit passage 652) of the game ball B sent to the ball launch pad 552b by the ball sending movable member 705, the game ball B moves to the downstream side. Then, the pre-fire sensor 704 is turned ON.

In step S139, when the ball forwarding solenoid 706 is turned ON, the process proceeds to the next step S140 to determine again whether or not the firing subtraction sensor 554 is ON. , and the above flow is repeated until the firing subtraction sensor 554 is turned ON.

Then, in step S140, if the firing subtraction sensor 554 is ON, it proceeds to the next step S141 as YES, and after turning OFF the error display of "shooting ball out", it proceeds to step S136 and turns ON the firing solenoid 553. Then, the game ball B is hit with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 160, and the process ends.

Thus, the game ball B can be launched after confirming that the game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550 by the launch control process.

By the way, when the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b, the number of balls in possession is subtracted by the ball in possession subtraction process of FIG. When detected by 607, possession ball addition processing is executed. As a result, since the number of balls in possession is added, the number of balls in possession before falling is restored, and the player is not disadvantaged.

In this way, the consistency of the number of possessed balls can be maintained when the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b by the launch control process and the possessed ball subtraction process of the second embodiment.

[7-4b. Launch control process of pachinko machine of second embodiment]
The launch control processing of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75, 76, 77 and the like. Possession ball subtraction processing of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment includes [4-2a. Sphere launching unit of second embodiment] and sphere launching unit 550A of the second embodiment described in [4-6a. Ball-feeding unit of second embodiment] and the ball-feeding unit of the second embodiment described in [4-3b. Foul unit of third embodiment], which is unique to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment having the combination of the foul unit 570 of the third embodiment.

In the shooting control process, the game ball B is actually shot by driving the shooting solenoid 553 after the player rotates the handle 160 after the frame control shooting permission flag is turned ON in the shooting permission process (FIG. 70). or not. In the firing control process (FIG. 75), first, in step S131, it is determined whether the frame control firing permission flag is ON/OFF. The signal is turned ON to end the processing. On the other hand, if the frame control firing permission flag is OFF in step S131, the process advances to step S133 to turn OFF the firing permission signal.

Then, when the shooting permission signal is turned ON, when shooting the game ball B by the shooting solenoid 553, as shown in FIG. , moves the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705 upward to receive the game ball B detected by the sensor 704 before firing. This first time t1 is set to a time sufficient for receiving the game ball B in the ball receiving portion 705a of the ball feeding movable member 705. As shown in FIG.

When the second time t2 (for example, 90 ms) shorter than the first time t1 has elapsed since the ball feed solenoid 706 was turned ON, the firing solenoid 553 is turned ON for the third time t3 (for example, 23 ms), A game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b is launched. Then, after the third time t3 has passed, the firing solenoid 553 is turned off. Note that the first time t1 is longer than the sum of the second time t2 and the third time t3.

Then, when the first time t1 has passed, the ball feed solenoid 706 is turned off, and the game ball B received by the ball receiving portion 705a is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b. At this time, the game ball B is detected because it passes through the ball outlet sensor 711, and the possession ball subtraction process is performed in FIG. This completes the firing sequence.

In addition, when the game ball B is continuously shot, after the first time t1 has passed, and after the fourth time t4 (for example, 450.5 ms) has passed, the ball feed solenoid 706 is turned on again for the first time t1. and the same operation as above is repeated. Also, the series of firing operations in FIG. 76 are controlled by hardware.

Returning to the launch control process (FIG. 75). The above description is for normal shooting control processing. There is a forced launch control process in which the game ball B does not reach. In this forced shooting control process, the game ball B is forcibly shot without operating the ball sending unit (ball sending device), and the game ball B is not left on the shooting rail (ball launch pad 552b).

At step S142 in FIG. 75, it is determined whether the frame control forced firing flag is ON/OFF. If the frame control forced firing flag is ON, YES is entered to proceed to the next step S143, the forced firing signal is turned ON, and the processing ends. do. On the other hand, if the frame control forced firing flag is OFF in step S142, the process proceeds to step S144 to turn OFF the forced firing signal. It should be noted that the frame control forced firing flag is turned ON in step S152 when the count button switch is pressed in the settlement process of FIG.

Then, when the forced firing signal is turned ON, when the game ball B is forcibly fired by the firing solenoid 553, as shown in FIG. The shutter 571 is closed. Incidentally, 600 ms corresponds to the shooting interval when the pachinko machine 1 shoots the game balls B continuously.

As a result, the game ball B is blocked by the closed foul shutter 571 and becomes a foul ball without entering the game board 5 regardless of the shooting intensity. The game ball B that has become a foul ball is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, and is added as a possessed ball by the possessed ball addition processing of FIG.

After a second time t2 (eg, 90 ms) shorter than the first time t1 has elapsed since the fall shutter drive solenoid 571d was turned ON, the firing solenoid 553 is weakly energized for a third time t3 (eg, 23 ms). The voltage is turned on, and the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b is weakly shot. Then, after the third time t3 has passed, the firing solenoid 553 is turned off. Note that the first time of 600 ms is longer than the sum of the second time t2 and the third time t3.

Then, when the first time of 600 ms elapses, the foul shutter drive solenoid 571d is turned off, and the foul shutter 571 is opened.

By turning on the shooting solenoid 553 with a weak excitation voltage and weakly shooting the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b, even if it is not blocked by the foul shutter 571, it does not enter the game board 5. This is to make it a foul ball. By closing the foul shutter 571, the game ball B becomes a foul ball without reciprocating a long distance along the outer rail 1001, so the time until the foul ball is detected is shortened.

The series of operations of forced shooting of the game ball B by the forced shooting signal in FIG. 77 is only one-shot operation by hardware, and is not executed continuously a plurality of times. Also, the game ball B is forcibly shot even if the player does not touch the handle 160.例文帳に追加

[7-4c. Settlement processing of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment]
The settlement processing of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. The settlement process of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment includes [4-2a. Sphere launching unit of second embodiment] and sphere launching unit 550A of the second embodiment described in [4-6a. Ball-feeding unit of second embodiment] and the ball-feeding unit of the second embodiment described in [4-3b. Foul unit of third embodiment] is a process specific to the pachinko machine of the second embodiment having the combination of the foul unit 570 of the third embodiment.

In the settlement processing shown in FIG. 86, first, at step 150, it is confirmed whether the count button switch 180 is pressed. If the button has not been pressed, the processing is terminated as NO. If pressed, the count button switch 180 is turned on, so YES is determined and control proceeds to the next step S151.

In step S151, the frame control firing permission flag is turned OFF, and control proceeds to the next step S152. In step S152, the frame control forced firing flag is turned ON. By these steps S151 and S152, the normal shooting by the player's operation is stopped, and the forced shooting without the player's operation is performed. In response to the OFF/ON of this flag, [7-4b. A series of operations shown in FIGS. 75, 76, and 77 described in "Launch control processing of pachinko machine of second embodiment" are performed.

In step S153, it is determined whether or not the counting button switch 180 has been pressed for a long time. If the button is not long pressed, the player wants to return only one of the ball data stored in the game machine to the game ball lending device 8, so the process proceeds to step S154. Note that returning one ball is used when the player wants to use it for coffee service, etc. In that case, the player briefly presses the counting button switch 180 multiple times.

In step S154, wait processing for one second is performed. One second means that the game ball B, which was forcibly fired as a result of the frame control forced firing flag being turned ON in step S152, was blocked by the closed foul shutter 571 and rolled, and the foul ball sensor 607 detected the ball. long enough to be detected. When the game ball B is detected by the foul ball sensor 607, it is added to the possession ball according to the flow chart of FIG.

In the next step S155, the number of balls in possession is checked, and if the number of balls in possession is 0, YES is given and the process ends without doing anything. The fact that the number of possessed balls is 0 means that the settlement process was performed immediately after the launch and there was no game ball B on the launch rail (ball launch pad 552b).

If there is a ball in hand at step S155, the control is shifted to step S156. At step S156, one ball is subtracted from the number of balls in hand, the one is transferred to the game ball lending device 8, and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S153 that the counting button switch 180 has been pressed for a long time, YES is determined and control is transferred to step S157. In step S157, wait processing is performed for 0.5 seconds. The reason why the wait time in step S154 is shorter than 1 second is that 0.5 seconds have already been spent for the long press (0.5 seconds) determination in step S153.

When the wait process in step S157 ends, the control shifts to the subroutine of step S158, and all the balls in the player's possession are transferred to the game ball lending device 8. Here, the processing contents of the all-ball transfer processing are omitted.

Note that FIG. 86 illustrates the settlement processing of the pachinko machine of the second embodiment, but other patterns (for example, [4-2. ball launching unit] and [4-6. A pachinko machine combining [4-3. Foul unit] or [4-3a. Since the subtraction processing of the ball in hand is performed according to the actual situation, the consistency of the ball in hand can be obtained without performing the processing such as forced firing. becomes unnecessary.

[7-5. Prize ball processing]
The prize ball processing will be described with reference to FIG. 79 and the like. The prize ball processing is performed by receiving the game ball B in the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. A predetermined number of prize balls corresponding to the winning openings are provided, and the prize balls are added to the number of balls possessed by the player.

In the prize ball processing, when the signal (prize ball signal) output from the main control board 1310 is input to the frame control board 740 by receiving the game ball B in the winning hole on the game board 5, it is input in step S141. Analyze the winning ball signal. The winning ball signal output from the main control board 1310 may be the number of winning balls, or the type of winning hole in which the game ball B is received.

Then, when the winning ball signal is analyzed in step S141, the number of winning balls corresponding to the analyzed winning ball signal is added to the number of balls owned by the player in subsequent step S142, and the process ends.

In this way, by the prize ball processing, the number of game balls B (the number of prize balls) corresponding to the winning openings in which the game ball B has won on the game board 5 can be added to the number of waiting balls of the player.

[7-6. Lifting motor operation processing]
The lift motor operation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83 and the like. In the lifting motor operation process, when the game ball B in the ball lifting exit passage 652 decreases due to the game ball B being shot by the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 is lifted. It is lifted by the rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661 of the upper unit 650 and supplied to the ball lifting outlet passage 652 .

In the lifting motor operation process, first, in step S201, the retry counter 1 is cleared, and the process proceeds to the next step S202. In step S202, it is determined whether or not the lifting motor index sensor 666 for detecting the lifting motor index 665 attached to the lower end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 in the ball lifting mechanism 660 of the ball lifting unit 650 is ON. to decide.

The lifting motor index 665 has a disc-shaped (flange-shaped) detection part 665 a that is partially cut out in the circumferential direction. When the detection portion 665a of the motor index 665 is located at the position of the lifting motor index sensor 666, the lifting motor index sensor 666 is turned ON, and the lifting motor index sensors 666 are turned OFF at portions other than the detection portion 665a.

In step S202, if the lifting motor index sensor 666 is ON, the process advances to step S203 as YES, and it is determined whether or not the lifting outlet sensor 654 has been ON for 80 ms or longer. In this step S203, if it is determined that the lifting outlet sensor 654 has not been ON for 80 ms or more (the lifting outlet sensor 654 is OFF), NO is determined and the process proceeds to the next step S204.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S203 that the lifting outlet sensor 654 is ON for 80 ms or longer, the process returns to step S203 as YES until the lifting outlet sensor 654 is not ON for 80 ms or longer (the lifting outlet sensor 654 is turned OFF). until) is repeated. In other words, the rearmost part of the row of a plurality of game balls B in the ball lifting exit passage 652 is repeatedly reduced by the shooting of the game balls B and becomes downstream of the lifting exit sensor 654, and the lifting exit sensor 654 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S204.

In step S204, it is determined whether or not the lift entrance sensor 653 is ON for 80 ms or more, and if it is determined that the lift entrance sensor 653 is not ON for 80 ms or more (the lift entrance sensor 653 is OFF), step NO is entered. Proceeding to S205, the error display indicating "lifting inlet ball out" is turned ON, and the process returns to step S204. As a result, it is possible to notify the player that the ball has run out in the ball-lifting inlet passage 651, and to encourage the player to eliminate the ball-running problem.

In step S204, when it is determined that the lifting inlet sensor 653 is ON for 80 ms or more, the process proceeds to the next step S206 as YES, and after turning OFF the error display indicating "lifting inlet ball burnout", the following step In S207, the lifting motor 664 is started to rotate after 1800 ms has passed, and the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated. As a result, lifting of the game ball B in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 is started. The lifting spiral shaft 661 discharges one game ball B when it rotates once.

Here, in other words, when the lifting motor 664 starts operating, as shown in FIG. In the state of ON (continuous ON) and the sensor 704 before firing is ON (continuous ON) for 80 ms or longer, the game balls B are continuously shot at intervals of a predetermined time (here, 600 ms) by operating the handle 160 . When the lifting outlet sensor 654 is turned off, the lifting motor 664 starts operating after a time ts (here, 1800 ms) has elapsed, and the ball lifting outlet passage 652 side of the lifting spiral shaft 661 from the upper end of the lifting spiral shaft 661 Discharge of the game ball B to (lifting device ball discharge) starts.

In this embodiment, when three game balls B are shot after the lift exit sensor 654 is turned off, the lift motor 664 operates and the lift spiral shaft 661 starts rotating. In addition, the time interval for discharging the game ball B by the rotation of the lifting spiral shaft 661 is set shorter than the time interval for continuously discharging the game ball B. As a result, the supply of the game balls B to the ball shooting unit 550 does not catch up with the shooting of the game balls B.例文帳に追加

As shown in FIG. 82, the kuma motor 688 provided in the ball lifting unit 650 is controlled independently of the operation of the lifting motor 664. Every time 1000 game balls B are shot, The polishing cloth 682 is actuated to move 0.17 mm.

As shown in FIG. 81, the lifting motor 664 does not operate and is stopped except when the lifting inlet sensor 653 is ON and the lifting outlet sensor 654 is OFF.

Returning to the description of the lifting motor operation process, when the lifting motor 664 starts operating in step S207, the retry counter 2 is cleared in the following step S208, and the lifting motor index 665 (lifting motor It is determined whether the index sensor 666) has turned ON again within 600 ms after turning OFF.

In step S209, if it is determined that the lifting motor index 665 has been turned ON again within 600 ms after being turned OFF (the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotating), YES is determined and the process proceeds to the next step S210, and the lifting exit It is determined whether or not the sensor 654 is ON for 80 ms or longer.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S210 that the lifting outlet sensor 654 has been ON for 80 ms or longer, YES is determined and the process proceeds to the next step S211. The lift motor 664 is stopped, the process returns to step S201, and the lift motor operation process is repeated.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, after the lift outlet sensor 654 is turned ON (continuously ON), the light is blocked by the rotation of the lift motor index 665 (the lift motor index sensor 666 is turned on by the detector 665a). ON) the third time, the lift motor 664 stops. At this time, the lifting spiral shaft 661 that rotates integrally with the lifting motor index 665 discharges one game ball B per rotation to the ball lifting exit passage 652 side (lifting device ball discharge). , three game balls B are discharged from when the lifting outlet sensor 654 is turned ON to when the lifting motor 664 is stopped. In other words, when the lifting exit sensor 654 is turned ON, the three game balls B are discharged to the ball lifting exit passage 652 side and the lifting motor 664 stops. As a result, a sufficient number of game balls B are stored in the ball lifting exit passage 652 . It should be noted that, in order to smoothly execute a lifting motor origin return process, which will be described later, the inside of the ball lifting exit passage 652 is not filled with the game balls B, and a predetermined number of vacancies are created.

In this lifting motor operation process, if it is determined in step S202 that the lifting motor index 665 is not ON (the lifting motor index sensor 666 is OFF), the process proceeds to step S212 as NO, and the retry counter 1 It is determined whether or not it is less than 3.

If the retry counter 1 is less than 3 in step S212, YES is determined and the lifting motor origin return process is executed in step S213. back to

In the lifting motor origin return processing of step S213, when the lifting motor index sensor 666 is OFF, the lifting motor 664 is actuated to rotate the lifting motor index 665 together with the lifting spiral shaft 661. When the index sensor 666 is in the OFF state, it is turned ON by reaching the detection unit 665a. After that, the lifting motor 664 rotates twice and stops, and the lifting motor 664 (lifting motor index 665) reaches the origin. return to

Specifically, the lifting motor index 665 (lifting spiral shaft 661) is configured to rotate once when the lifting motor 664 rotates 32 times due to the gear ratio between the shaft gear 662 and the motor gear 663. Since the circumferential length of the detection portion 665a of the lifting motor index 665 is set to the length that the lifting motor 664 rotates four times, the lifting motor index sensor 666 is turned ON. The position where the motor 664 stops after two rotations is located in the center of the detection section 665a. That is, the center of the detection portion 665a in the lifting motor index 665 is the origin of the lifting motor 664 (lifting spiral shaft 661, lifting motor index 665) (see FIG. 83).

When the lifting motor origin return process is executed, the lifting spiral shaft 661 rotates about one time, so one game ball B is discharged to the ball lifting exit passage 652, but in the ball lifting exit passage 652 Since a predetermined number of vacancies are provided for housing the game balls B, the discharge of the game balls B from the lifting spiral shaft 661 is not hindered, and the lifting motor 664 can be returned to the origin.

If it is determined in step S212 that the retry counter 1 is not less than 3, the process proceeds to step S215 as NO, turns on the error display indicating "lifting ball jam error", and stops the operation in step S216. . This condition for canceling the operation stop can be canceled by turning on and off the power switch 751 provided on the power board 750 of the main body frame 4 .

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S209 that the lifting motor index 665 has not turned ON again within 600 ms after turning OFF (the lifting spiral shaft 661 is not rotating), it is turned ON and the process proceeds to step S217. It is determined whether or not the retry counter 2 is less than 3. If it is determined that the retry counter 2 is not less than 3, the process advances to step S215 as NO to turn on the error display indicating "lifting ball stick error". Then, the operation is stopped in the following step S216.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the retry counter 2 is less than 3 in step S217, the determination is YES, and the ball sticking cancellation process is executed in the next step S218. Then, the process returns to step S209.

In step S218, the ball jam removal process is performed by stopping the lifting motor 664 without monitoring the ON/OFF state of the lifting outlet sensor 654, then rotating the lifting motor 664 in the reverse direction for a predetermined period of time (for example, 100 ms). After the elapse of time, the lift motor 664 is stopped, and the lift motor 664 is operated (rotated forward) again.

In this way, when the game ball B in the ball lifting exit passage 652 decreases due to the game ball B being shot by the lifting motor operation processing, the lifting spiral shaft 661 is rotated by the operation of the lifting motor 664. As a result, the game ball B in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 can be lifted from the lower end and discharged from the upper end to be supplied to the ball lifting outlet passage 652 .

It should be noted that the operating time of the lifting motor 664 and the number of game balls B to be ejected, etc., described above are examples, and the time and number may be set appropriately.

[7-7. Security processing]
Security processing will be described with reference to FIG. 84 and the like. Security processing is for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud. In the security process, as shown in FIG. 84(a), the contradiction counter is cleared in step S301, and the number of collected balls in the circulation ball path unit 600 within a predetermined time is calculated in the subsequent step S302. The number of recovered balls is calculated as the sum of the number of out balls, the number of safe balls, and the number of foul balls.

After calculating the number of collected balls in step S302, the process proceeds to the next step S303, where it is determined whether or not the number of discharged balls and the number of collected balls by the discharge subtraction sensor 554 are the same. It returns to step S302 as YES. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of shot balls and the number of collected balls are not the same, the process proceeds to the next step S304 as NO, adds "1" to the contradiction counter, and proceeds to the following step S305.

In step S305, it is determined whether or not the contradiction counter is larger than n (eg, 50), and if it is determined to be smaller than n, NO is returned to step S302. On the other hand, if it is determined that the inconsistency counter is larger than n, the process proceeds to the next step S306 as YES, and after turning on the error display indicating that the fraudulent act is being performed, the game stop processing is performed in the following step S307. Execute and terminate the process.

The error display in step S306 can be canceled by turning on and off the power switch 751 provided on the power board 750 of the body frame 4 .

In addition, as the game stop processing in step S307, the ball launching unit 550 stops shooting the game ball B, the ball lifting unit 650 stops lifting the game ball B (circulation stop), the game on the main control board 1310 side stop, etc.

The security processing may be processing as shown in FIG. 84(b). In this security process, first, in step S311, the contradiction counter is cleared, and in subsequent step S312, it is determined whether or not the number of shot balls detected by the shot subtraction sensor 554 is greater than or equal to the number of foul balls detected by the foul ball sensor 607.

If it is determined in step S312 that the number of shot balls is greater than or equal to the number of foul balls, the determination is YES and the process returns to step S312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of shot balls is not equal to or greater than the number of foul balls, the process proceeds to the next step S313 as NO, adds "1" to the contradiction counter, and proceeds to the following step S314.

In step S314, it is determined whether or not the contradiction counter is greater than n (eg, 50), and if it is determined to be less than n, NO is returned to step S312. On the other hand, if it is determined that the inconsistency counter is larger than n, the process proceeds to the next step S315 as YES, and after turning on the error display indicating that the fraudulent act is being performed, the game stop processing is performed in the subsequent step S316. Execute and terminate the process.

The error display in step S315 can be canceled by turning on and off the power switch 751 provided on the power board 750 of the main body frame 4 .

In addition, as the game stop processing in step S316, the ball launching unit 550 stops shooting the game ball B, the ball lifting unit 650 stops lifting the game ball B (circulation stop), and the game on the main control board 1310 side stop, etc.

In this manner, the presence or absence of fraud can be determined based on the number of shot balls, the number of game balls B ejected from the game board 5 (the number of recovered balls), the number of foul balls, and the like.

[7-8. Enclosed ball amount detection process]
Enclosed ball amount detection processing will be described with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. The enclosed ball quantity detection process detects whether or not the quantity (number of balls) of game balls B enclosed is appropriate. In the enclosed ball amount detection process, it is determined whether or not the amount of game balls B is appropriate by combining ON/OFF of the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and ON/OFF of the circulating ball excess sensor 622 . The circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 are turned ON when the detection of game balls B continues for a predetermined time (for example, 80 ms) or more.

Specifically, in the ball meandering passage 604 of the circulation ball path unit 600, which is upstream of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 in the ball lifting unit 650, the last part of the game balls B lined up in a row is under-circulated. When positioned between the sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the circulation ball shortage sensor 621 is ON and the circulation ball excess sensor 622 is OFF. In such a combination, it is determined that the amount of game balls B is appropriate, and related errors are not reported.

On the other hand, when the last part of the game balls B lined up in the meandering ball passage 604 is located downstream of the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is OFF and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is OFF. OFF. In such a combination, it is determined that the amount of game balls B is insufficient, and an error is notified to the effect of "too few game balls".

Further, when the rearmost part of the game balls B lined up in a row in the meandering ball passage 604 exceeds the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 and is located upstream of the circulating ball excess sensor 622, The circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is ON and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is ON. In the case of such a combination, it is determined that the amount of game balls B is excessive, and an error is notified to the effect of "excessive game balls".

By the way, depending on the environment (game hall) in which the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is installed, it may be installed together with a pachinko machine that uses conventional iron balls SB as game balls. When the game ball B is replenished or replaced due to maintenance or the like, the iron ball SB may be mixed. When the iron ball SB is mixed in the pachinko machine 1, since a powerful magnet 616 is provided in the ball removal shutter 615 of the ball meandering passage 604 in the circulation route R, the mixed iron ball B is removed by the magnet 616. It is magnetized and stopped on the ball extraction shutter 615 .

When the ball shooting unit 550 continues to shoot the game ball B while the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the ball shutter 615, the game ball B on the downstream side of the ball shutter 615 in the meandering path 604 is lifted. It is lifted by the upper unit 650 and decreases, and eventually the circulating balls shortage sensor 621 is turned off. On the other hand, the game balls B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 are recovered by the out ball receiving port 600a and the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600, the foul unit 570, etc., and supplied to the upstream side of the meandering ball passage 604. As a result, the ball-exhausting shutter 615 (iron ball SB) accumulates on the upstream side, and the circulating-ball excess sensor 622 is turned on before long. Thus, in the case of a combination in which the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 is OFF and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 is ON, it is determined that the iron ball SB is magnetically attached to the ball removal shutter 615, and the "iron ball mixed ” is notified.

If ball clogging due to ball jam occurs between the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the same combination as above occurs, so an error indicating "iron balls mixed in" will appear. be notified.

In addition, the notification of the error may be made by providing a notification lamp and turning it on, or by displaying an image on the performance display device. Alternatively, an error signal may be output to the hall computer (holcon) of the game hall via the game ball lending device 8 to turn on the notification lamp provided on the game hall side.

Thus, by the enclosed ball amount detection processing, it is possible to appropriately manage the amount of enclosed game balls B and to detect the inclusion of iron balls SB.

[7-9. Ball removal process]
The ball removal process will be explained. The ball removal process is executed when the ball removal shutter 615 opens the ball removal opening 613p and removes the game ball B to the ball receiving tray 720 in the circulation ball path unit 600 . In the ball removal process, the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the door open switch 507 is turned off, the ball removal shutter 615 is pulled forward to open the ball removal port 613p, and the ball removal port 613p is opened. This is executed by turning on the power while the ball extraction switch 742 is turned on (by turning on the ball extraction switch 742 when the power is turned on).

In the ball ejection process, ON/OFF of the lifting entrance sensor 653 is disabled, the firing solenoid 553 in the ball firing unit 550 repeats ON/OFF at predetermined time intervals, and the lifting motor 664 remains in operation. Become.

At this time, even if the shooting solenoid 553 is turned ON and the game ball B is shot, the foul shutter 571 is in the closed position because the door frame 3 is open, and the foul shutter 571 is released from the foul unit 570 to the outside. It is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 as a foul ball without being hit. It should be noted that during the ball removal process, although the game ball B is not stopped being shot, the game is stopped and, for example, even if there is a start winning prize, no game ball is paid out, and there is no lottery or fluctuation related to special symbols. It is in a state where normal games cannot be played, such as when there is no display. Also, during the ball extraction process, special notification is performed using the performance display device 1600, lamps, speakers, and the like. In addition, when the ball extraction switch 742 is turned on when the power is turned on, the RAM clear which initializes the RAM built in the main control board 1310 is not executed. to maintain

In this way, the enclosed game ball B can be removed by the ball removal process. In addition, when inserting the game ball B, it is inserted from the out port 1008 of the game board 5, or from the out ball receiving port 600a or the safe ball receiving port 600b that is opened upward by removing the game board 5 from the main body frame 4. It is possible to put in (replenish).

[7-10. others]
In the above embodiment, the description has been given on the premise that the stainless steel balls B used in the pachinko machine 1 are stainless steel balls. As the game ball B, an iron ball SB may be used. When iron balls are used as the game balls B, the magnets 616 in the circulating ball path unit 600 are abolished to allow the game balls B (iron balls SB) to flow through the meandering ball passage 604. Passing sensors (ball sensors) for the game ball B dedicated to the stainless steel ball provided on both sides of the game board 5 are replaced with those capable of detecting the iron ball SB. With these changes, the pachinko machine 1 becomes operable. Note that the optical sphere sensor can be used as it is without replacement.

By the way, when the iron ball SB is used as the game ball B, cheating by the magnet M (so-called magnet goto) becomes possible. Fraud detection by In addition, since there is a possibility that fraudulent acts are carried out on the circulation path of the game ball B on the side of the main body frame 4, there is a sensor (fire Subtraction sensor 554, foul ball sensor 607, launching sensor 704, etc.) requires a magnet sensor (magnetic sensor 1030) that covers the periphery.

Description will be made below with reference to FIG. 87 and the like. FIG. 87(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor capable of detecting magnetic lines of force from a magnet, (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the orientation of a magnetic sensor unable to detect magnetic lines of force from a magnet, and (c ) is an explanatory view schematically showing the detection range of the magnetic sensor on the game board in a perspective view, and (d) is an explanatory view showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body where the lines of magnetic force from the magnet cannot be detected. (e) is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the magnetic sensor and the magnetic body that can detect the magnetic lines of force from the magnet, and (f) is an explanatory diagram showing the magnetic sensor and the holding section separately. .

When the game ball B, which is the iron ball SB, is used, countermeasures against fraud with respect to the game board 5 may be the same as before. Machine 1 (gaming machine) requires anti-fraud measures against this circulation route R.

Generally, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 are provided in the pachinko machine 1, and are for detecting illegal magnetism (lines of magnetic force). As shown in FIG. 87(f), the magnetic sensor 1030 includes a sensor main body 1031 for detecting magnetism, a sensor substrate 1032 having a white surface on which the sensor main body 1031 is mounted, the sensor substrate 1032 and the sensor main body 1031. and a transparent sensor case 1033 covering the . In addition to the sensor main body 1031, ICs, transistors, resistors, diodes, connectors for connection, and the like are mounted on the sensor substrate 1032, although illustration is omitted. In this embodiment, the sensor main body 1031 uses a magnetic sensor using a GMR element.

The magnetic sensor 1030 is rectangular in plan view and is formed in a cuboid shape with a height lower than the length of the short side of the rectangle, and one of the sides in the height direction is chamfered. In this magnetic sensor 1030 , the sensor main body 1031 and the sensor substrate 1032 inside can be visually recognized from the outside through a transparent sensor case 1033 .

The magnetic sensor 1030 is capable of detecting passage of magnetic lines of force parallel to the longest side of the rectangular parallelepiped. Therefore, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1030 and the positional relationship between the magnet M and the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1030 are as shown in FIG. can be detected.

On the other hand, when the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1030 and the positional relationship between the magnet M and the orientation of the magnetic sensor 1030 are as shown in FIG. vertical direction), the magnetism of the magnet M (magnetic lines of force) cannot be detected.

For this reason, the magnetic sensor 1030 has magnetic detection areas of the magnet M on one side and the other side in the long side direction centering on the magnetic sensor 1030, as shown by shading in FIG. 87(c). have a DA. In other words, the magnetic sensor 1030 has a gourd-shaped detection area DA formed by combining two spheres with a diameter of about 10 cm. FIG. 87(c) is a diagram assuming that the magnetic sensor 1030 is placed near the first starting port 2003 of the game board 5 as an anti-fraud measure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87(d), when the magnetic body M1 is arranged in parallel with the magnetic sensor 1030 capable of detecting the lines of magnetic force from the magnet M, the lines of magnetic force are attracted to the magnetic body M1. The lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1030 may decrease, and the magnetic sensor 1030 may become unable to detect the lines of magnetic force (magnetism) from the magnet M.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 87(e), when the magnetic body M2 is arranged in series with the magnetic sensor 1030 capable of detecting the lines of magnetic force from the magnet M, the lines of magnetic force are attracted by the magnetic body M2, thereby The magnetic field lines passing through the sensor 1030 can be increased. As a result, the magnetism of a distant magnet M or a magnet M with a weak magnetic force can be detected.

By the way, in a conventional pachinko machine, the magnetic sensor is attached to the game board using a screw made of a magnetic material. However, there is a problem that the approach of the magnet M cannot be detected because the magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor are reduced by being attracted to the screw with high magnetic permeability. In contrast, in this embodiment, the magnetic sensor 1030 is attached without using screws.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 87(f), the magnetic sensor 1030 is connected to the game machine (body frame 4 or game board 5) via a holding portion 1035 made of a non-magnetic material (here, synthetic resin). ) frame. The holding portion 1035 is molded integrally with a member (not shown). The holding portion 1035 has an accommodating portion 1036 capable of accommodating the magnetic sensor 1030 from one side and an elastic claw 1037 engaged with the magnetic sensor 1030 accommodated in the accommodating portion 1036 . Further, the holding portion 1035 has projections 1038 protruding from the legs of the elastic claws 1037 into the accommodating portion. The holding portion 1035 is made of transparent synthetic resin.

Holding portion 1035 holding magnetic sensor 1030 has elastic claws 1037 elastically deformed in a direction away from accommodating portion 1036 when magnetic sensor 1030 is inserted into the accommodating portion from the outside, and magnetic sensor 1030 is accommodated in accommodating portion 1036. Then, the elastic claw 1037 returns and is engaged with the end of the magnetic sensor 1030 . At this time, the protrusion 1038 provided on the leg portion of the elastic claw 1037 is in contact with the magnetic sensor 1030, and the magnetic sensor 1030 is pressed against the portion of the inner surface of the accommodating portion 1036 opposite to the elastic claw 1037. there is

By locking the elastic claws 1037, it is possible to prevent the magnetic sensor 1030 from moving in the direction in which the magnetic sensor 1030 is pulled out of the accommodating portion 1036, thereby preventing the magnetic sensor 1030 from falling off. Moreover, since the magnetic sensor 1030 is pressed into the accommodation portion 1036 by the contact of the projection 1038, the magnetic sensor 1030 can be prevented from rattling in the accommodation portion 1036. FIG.

In this way, since the holding portion 1035 is made of a non-magnetic material, it is possible to prevent the holding portion 1035 from attracting magnetic lines of force from the magnet M when the magnet M is brought closer to the play area 5a. Reduction of the magnetic lines of force passing through the magnetic sensor 1030 can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a, and it is possible to detect fraudulent activity using the magnet M at an early stage. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can dissuade a player from committing an act and has a high deterrence against fraudulent acts.

In addition, since the holding portion 1035 made of a non-magnetic material can avoid attracting the lines of magnetic force from the magnet M and can prevent the reduction of the lines of magnetic force passing through the magnetic sensor 1030, the number of It becomes possible to effectively detect the magnetism acting on the game area 5a by the magnetic sensor 1030, the number of the magnetic sensors 1030 can be reduced more than before, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. can.

In addition, by elastically deforming the elastic claws 1037 of the holding portion 1035, the magnetic sensor 1030 can be easily attached and detached from the holding portion 1035. Therefore, like a conventional pachinko machine, the magnetic sensor 1030 can be made of metal made of a magnetic material. The magnetic sensor 1030 can be attached by the elastic claw 1037 without using screws, and the time and effort required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. can be suppressed.

Further, since the magnetic sensor 1030 is urged (pressed) toward the housing portion 1036 by the projection 1038 of the holding portion 1035, fine vibration of the magnetic sensor 1030 due to the urging by the projection 1038 can be suppressed. It is possible to reduce the possibility that the connector connected to the magnetic sensor 1030 is disconnected or the contact failure occurs due to the vibration, and the magnetic sensor 1030 can be reliably operated.

By the way, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 having the circulation path R in the main body frame 4 (game machine frame), it is the vicinity of the launch subtraction sensor 554 of the ball launching unit 550 that is particularly susceptible to fraud. is the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b (launch rail) and the path from the foul unit 570 to the foul ball sensor 607;

For example, if the game ball B dropped (supplied) from the ball feeding unit 700 is attracted by the magnet M before it is detected by the launch subtraction sensor 554 and is poured into the foul ball sensor 607, the possession ball will not be subtracted. is added to Their consistency is confirmed by software, but the specifications are such that if the number of error spheres is less than 50, for example, the alarm is not issued, so detection is not possible with only one error sphere.

On the other hand, the magnetic sensor 1030 can detect fraud by the magnet M and issue a report immediately, which acts as a deterrent to fraud.

In addition, the magnetic sensor 1030 having the gourd-shaped detection area DA as described above has the size and shape of the detection area DA that is convenient for detecting fraud using the magnet M against the above two locations. is. Specifically, if the magnetic sensor 1030 is provided at an intermediate position between the ball launch pad 552b and the foul ball receiving port 600c, for example, slightly above the middle of the left side of the unit base 551 of the ball launch unit 550, the gourd type The gourd of the detection area DA covers from the ball delivery port 702 of the ball feeding unit 700 to the ball launch pad 552b (launch rail), and another gourd-shaped detection area DA covers the path of the foul ball passage 603, etc. . In this case, the unit base 551 of the ball shooting unit 550 is preferably made of non-ferrous metal such as aluminum plate or duralumin.

The magnetic sensor 1030 is connected to the frame control board 740. When the magnetic sensor 1030 detects magnetism, the frame control board 740 stops the circulation route R and stops the addition/subtraction of the number of balls held. Also, the frame control board 740 notifies the main control board 1310 of this by communication. The main control board 1310 transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify it. As means for notification, a warning sound is output at the maximum volume to notify, or the entire lamp provided on the door frame 3 is made to emit/blink in red so as to be particularly conspicuous. Furthermore, the frame control board 740 may output an error signal to the hall computer of the game hall via the game ball lending device 8 to turn on the notification lamp provided on the game hall side.

[7-11. Relationship between frame decoration member and body frame]
In this embodiment, the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the game area 5a can be viewed from the front. A door frame top unit 300 provided above the game window 101, a door frame right side unit 340 provided on the right side of the game window 101 on the front surface of the door frame main body 100, and the center of the shelf unit 200 in the left-right direction A performance operation unit 250 (operating device) that is provided in and is operable by the player is attached. FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing a frame decoration member that can be attached to and detached from the door frame.

As shown in FIG. 88, the game board 5, the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250 can be attached and detached while the pachinko machine 1 is attached to the island facilities of the game hall. It is possible to install a predetermined game board 5, a door frame top unit 300, a door frame right side unit 340, and an effect operation unit 250 as one group for each model series. It is possible. That is, when changing to a new model series, the game board 5 corresponding to the model series before the change, the door frame top unit 300, After removing the door frame right side unit 340 and the performance operation unit 250, the game board 5 corresponding to the new model series, the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340 and the performance operation unit 250 are installed. . By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the cost of changing the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 when it is desired to renovate not only the game performance but also the appearance of the game machine at the time of model change, thereby efficiently improving the game performance and the game machine. You can refresh your appearance.

The door frame right side unit 340 of this example is formed integrally with the door frame top unit 300, and the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are integrally formed with respect to the door frame 3. I'm trying to put on and take off. In this regard, the door frame right side unit 340 may be separate from the door frame top unit 300 and may be separately attachable to and detachable from the door frame 3 . With regard to such a door frame right side unit 340, in addition to renovating the appearance of the game machine, the protrusion of the side portion becomes a blocking wall from the players who are away from the seat, and it is disliked by the players who care about the eyes of the surroundings. The sense of feeling can be reduced, and a space specific to the player can be created by the projection of the upper portion and the side portion.

A peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to a door frame top relay board (not shown) attached to the door frame top unit 300 . The door-frame top relay board includes a door-frame top decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for decorating the door-frame top decoration 301 of the door-frame top unit 300, and a door-frame right-side board of the door-frame right-side unit 340. For relaying the connection with the door frame right side decoration board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for luminous decoration of the side decoration 341, the door frame right side left side decoration, and the door frame right side right side decoration. It is. As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control light emission of various LEDs mounted on, for example, the door frame top decoration board and the door frame right side decoration board via the door frame top relay board. can.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5 is electrically connected to the operation section relay board (not shown) attached to the effect operation unit 250 . The operation part relay board relays the connection with the operation part decoration board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for decorating the first effect button 251 and the second effect button 252 of the effect operation unit 250. It is for As a result, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can control light emission of various LEDs mounted on, for example, the operation part decoration board via the operation part relay board.

[7-11a. About the ID code of the frame decoration member]
The door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 and the operation part relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250 are provided with a unique code (only one in the world) for identifying the model series. (non-existent code) is stored in advance as special information. This ID code is unique to each model series and cannot be rewritten using an external device. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 can extract and refer to the ID code from the door frame top relay board and the operation part relay board. The RAM built in the peripheral control unit 1511 stores a table for referring to the ID code attached to the door frame top relay board and the operation part relay board. The ID code stored in this table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 whose model series matches that of the game board 5. The ID code of the operation part relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250 and the ID code of the operation part relay board are matched with each other.

When the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300. Within a predetermined determination period, it is determined whether or not they match and whether or not the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation section relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250. is judged to Here, when the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 that match the model series (have a regular relationship) are attached to the game board 5, they are stored in the reference table. The ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300. On the other hand, the model series does not match the game board 5. ) When the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are attached, their ID codes do not match. Similarly, when an effect operation unit 250 matching the model series (in a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5, the ID code stored in the reference table and the effect operation unit The ID code of the operation part relay board attached to 250 matches the ID code of the operation part relay board, and on the other hand, the production operation unit 250 whose model series does not match (not in a regular relationship) is attached to the game board 5. In that case, the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation section relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250 do not match.

Here, in this example, the following power-on patterns A to C are provided as modes of power-on operation. Power-on pattern A is a case in which the power switch 751 is operated without turning on the RAM clear switch 741, and the RAM built in the main control board 1310 is not initialized, and the game information is initialized. It does not become Power-on pattern B is a case in which the power switch 751 is operated while the RAM clear switch 741 is being turned ON, and RAM clear is executed to initialize the game-related information. In power-on pattern C, the RAM clear switch 741 is not turned ON, but the power switch 751 is operated while the ball removal switch 742 is ON, and the above-described ball removal processing is executed. In such a power-on pattern C, the RAM clear is not executed and the game-related information is not initialized, but the progress of the game during the ball removal process is stopped. The above determination of whether or not the ID codes match is executed when the power is turned on with the power-on patterns A and B, but is not executed when the power is turned on with the power-on pattern C. ing. That is, when the power is turned on in the power-on pattern C, the progress of the game during the ball extraction process is stopped, and there is no need to execute the light emission effect using the frame decoration member, so the ID code does not match. It is set so as not to confirm whether or not it is a member.

Further, when only the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 does not match the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to display the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side of which model series do not match. An error informing pattern 1 (for example, display of "Please check the type of the door frame top unit") for notifying that the unit 340 is installed is executed. Further, when only the ID code of the effect operation unit 250 does not match the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to indicate that the effect operation unit 250 whose model series does not match is attached. In-error notification pattern 2 to be notified (for example, display of "Please check the type of the effect operation unit") is executed. In addition, when the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 and the ID code of the effect operation unit 250 for the game board 5 do not match, the effect display device 1600 is used to display the model series. In-error notification pattern 3 (for example, "Door frame top unit and door Please check the type of the frame right side unit and the production operation unit").

On the other hand, when the door frame top unit 300 and the effect operation unit 250 are not attached to the door frame 3, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the door frame top relay board and the operation part relay board. The ID code cannot be retrieved from the board and referenced. In such a case, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 reads the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300. and whether the ID code stored in the reference table and the ID code of the operation part relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250 match. At this time, the ID code is not input to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the ID code cannot be confirmed. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 detects the unconnected status if the ID code is not input from the door frame top relay board or the operation part relay board even after a predetermined determination period has passed. state.

Also, when only the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 cannot be confirmed (cannot be obtained) with respect to the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to attach the effect operation unit 250 and the door frame right side unit 340. In-error notification pattern 4 (for example, display of "Please check the connection of the door frame top unit and the door frame right side unit") is executed. In addition, when only the ID code of the effect operation unit 250 cannot be confirmed (cannot be obtained) with respect to the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to notify that the effect operation unit 250 is not attached. Information pattern 5 (for example, display of "Please check the connection of the production operation unit") is executed. Further, when neither the ID code of the door frame top unit 300 nor the ID code of the effect operation unit 250 can be confirmed (acquired) with respect to the game board 5, the effect display device 1600 is used to display the door frame. In-error notification pattern 6 that notifies that the top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 and the effect operation unit 250 are not attached (for example, "connection of the door frame top unit and the door frame right side unit and the effect operation unit Please confirm" is displayed).

Here, regarding the game board 5, whether the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300 and the ID code of the operation section relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250 match. Regardless of whether or not, various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light during execution of normal effects (effects during variation and effects during non-variation). Similarly, regarding the game board 5, even if there is a part for which the ID code cannot be confirmed among the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250, the normal effect (changing Various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting board of the game board 5 can be controlled to emit light when the performance or non-fluctuation performance is executed.

Also, for the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340, the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the door frame top relay board attached to the door frame top unit 300. In this case, during execution of the normal effects (effects during fluctuation and effects during non-variation), for example, the door frame top decoration board of the door frame top unit 300, Various LEDs mounted on the door frame right side decorative board of the door frame right side unit 340 can be controlled to emit light. 3) The various LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrates of the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs are turned off. Moreover, when the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 are not attached and the ID code of the door frame top relay board cannot be confirmed, the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 340 There is no need to control the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate.

Similarly, for the effect operation unit 250, when the ID code stored in the reference table matches the ID code of the operation section relay board attached to the effect operation unit 250, normal effect At the time of execution of (effect during fluctuation and effect during non-variation), it is possible to control light emission of various LEDs mounted on, for example, the front decoration board and the rear decoration board through the operation part relay board. On the other hand, if they do not match, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the production operation unit 250 that does not match the series of the model (not in the regular relationship) are not controlled to emit light, and the various LEDs It turns off. Further, when the effect operation unit 250 is not attached and the ID code of the operation part relay board cannot be confirmed, the various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 250 are not controlled to emit light. .

Further, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, when controlling the light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5, the door frame top unit 300 and the door frame right side unit 300 as members positioned around the game board 5 Light emission control of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate of the side unit 340 and various LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate of the effect operation unit 250 is performed in cooperation. As a result, not only the game board 5 but also the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250 can be used to perform an integrated lighting effect. However, among the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250, for parts whose ID codes do not match the game board 5, various Since there is no light emission control of the LED, it is not possible to participate in the light emission effect. Similarly, among the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250, for the parts that are not attached to the door frame 3 and whose ID code has not been confirmed, the parts that have not been confirmed Since there is no light emission control of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board, it is not possible to participate in the light emitting performance.

As described above, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the door frame top unit is used as a member positioned around the game board 5 when controlling light emission of various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the game board 5. 300 and the door frame right side unit 340, and various LEDs mounted on the light emitting board of the effect operation unit 250. Various LEDs mounted on the light-emitting substrate of the frame 3 can also be cooperatively controlled to emit light. As a result, not only the game board 5, the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the effect operation unit 250, but also the door frame 3 can be used to perform an integrated lighting effect.

[Regarding operation check of frame decoration parts (reusable products)]
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, as the performance of game machines has improved, there is a risk that the cost of manufacturing a game machine will increase if new parts are always procured to manufacture the game machine. In order to suppress such an increase in cost, it is conceivable to reuse some or all of the specific decorative parts (including drive-related, light-emitting-related parts, etc.) that are part of the game machine. For example, the game board 5 can be easily attached/detached to/from the door frame 3, and the above-described frame decoration member can be easily attached/detached to/from the door frame 3. It can be used as a reusable part. By the way, for such reusable parts, it is necessary to ascertain whether or not they operate normally at the time of inspection at the shipping site. must be confirmed. However, when removing reusable parts, it may be necessary to temporarily remove the game board 5 from the door frame 3 because the reusable parts are attached to the game board 5 or the like. , After removing and installing reusable parts, if it is possible to check the operating state of reusable parts only in the situation where the power is turned off and then turned on again, remove and install reusable parts. Since it is necessary to remove the game board 5 or turn off the power every time, it takes time and effort to confirm the operation state of reusable parts. In this regard, in this example, the trouble of removing the game board 5 and turning off the power is eliminated, and the efficiency of checking the operation state of reusable parts is improved, thereby making the pachinko machine highly convenient. 1 is to be provided.

The frame decoration member described above is a specific decorative part which is a part of the pachinko machine 1, but is not a part mounted on the game board 5 but a part mounted on the door frame 3. Therefore, the frame decoration member can be attached to and detached from the door frame 3 while the game board 5 is attached to the door frame 3 without removing the game board 5 from the door frame 3. ing. As the frame decoration members, the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the production operation unit 250 can be attached and detached by the tool-less locking portions in terms of easing the installation work of the hall manager. A mounting structure will be adopted. Examples of the locking portion without a tool include a hand screw having a hand-cranked knob on the head, a well-known snap lock (not shown) that can be attached and detached by one-touch operation to move the lever up or down, and a lever rotation. A well-known crescent lock that can be attached and detached by , etc. can be exemplified. In this manner, the frame decoration member can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame 3, and it is possible to check the operation state of the frame decoration member without trouble.

Further, the frame decoration member can be attached and detached before and after the power is turned on. However, if the operation state of the detached frame decoration member is confirmed by removing the frame decoration member after turning off the power supply in the power-on state and then turning on the power again, the operation state of the frame decoration member cannot be confirmed. It will take a lot of time and effort. For this reason, in this example, in the power-on state, if a specific operation is performed before detaching the frame decoration member, the operation of turning off the power and then turning on the power again is not performed. After the member is attached and detached, the state is shifted to a special state (reuse check state) in which it is possible to check the operating state of the detached frame decoration member. In addition, in the power-on state, whether or not the reuse permission switch is operated as a specific operation is monitored. It is determined whether or not the reuse permission switch has been turned on before. Specifically, the operation information of the reuse permission switch is referred to at the judgment timing when a predetermined period has passed after the power is turned on. When the reuse permission switch is turned on at the same time, etc.), the reuse confirmation state is started, and the frame decoration member is detached in the reuse confirmation state, and the operation state of the detached frame decoration member is confirmed. making it possible. On the other hand, if the operation information of the reuse permission switch is referred to at the determination timing after a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on, and the operation information is "no operation" (for example, the reuse permission switch is turned on after the determination timing). If the reuse confirmation state is not started and the normal state is maintained, even if the frame decoration member is removed in the normal state, the operating state of the removed frame decoration member cannot be confirmed. I have to. In addition, in order to notify the operator that the ON operation of the reuse permission switch can be accepted until a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on, the fact may be notified to the outside.

Here, in this example, the following power-on patterns A to C are provided as modes of power-on operation. Power-on pattern A is a case in which the power switch 751 is operated without turning on the RAM clear switch 741, and the RAM built in the main control board 1310 is not initialized, and the game information is initialized. It does not become Power-on pattern B is a case in which the power switch 751 is operated while the RAM clear switch 741 is being turned ON, and RAM clear is executed to initialize the game-related information. In power-on pattern C, the RAM clear switch 741 is not turned ON, but the power switch 751 is operated while the ball removal switch 742 is ON, and the above-described ball removal processing is executed. In such a power-on pattern C, the RAM clear is not executed and the game-related information is not initialized, but the progress of the game during the ball removal process is stopped. In the determination timing described above, whether or not the reuse permission switch was turned ON before the determination timing is determined when the power is turned on in the power-on patterns A and B, but the power-on pattern C is executed. It is set not to run when the power is turned on with That is, when the power is turned on according to the power-on pattern C, only the ball extraction process is executed, but the reuse confirmation state is not started, and the operation state of the frame decoration member cannot be confirmed.

To explain the above-mentioned specific operation in detail, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are operation units for work that the player cannot touch (buttons for switching between the ON state and the OFF state, key insertion A reuse permission switch is provided on the main control board 1310 as a key switch or the like that enables switching between an ON state and an OFF state. In addition, before the judgment timing when a predetermined period has passed after the power is turned on, each time the reuse permission switch is turned on, it is input to the main control board 1310 as operation information of the reuse permission switch, and the main control board 1310 operates the reuse permission switch. It stores the number of times information is entered. At the determination timing after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the power is turned on, the main control board 1310 refers to the memory of the number of times of input of the operation information of the reuse permission switch, and the memory of the number of times of input of the referenced operation information is "1". (For example, when the reuse permission switch is turned on once before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the reuse confirmation state A is started, and the number of times of input of the operation information is stored as "2 times or more." (for example, when the reuse permission switch is turned on twice before the determination timing or at the same time as the determination timing), the reuse confirmation state B is started. These reuse confirmation states may be terminated when a certain period of time has passed, but the operator's termination operation (for example, an operation unit operated at the start of the reuse confirmation state) operation of the same operation unit as ). As a result, the period during which the reuse confirmation state is generated can be arbitrarily set, and convenience can be improved when the operator detaches the frame decoration member and confirms the operation state of the detached frame decoration member. In this example, which of the reuse confirmation state A and the reuse confirmation state B is to be started is determined by the number of times of inputting the operation information of the reuse permission switch. good too.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, the door frame right side unit 340, and other frame decoration members are electrically connected. In this example, each of the frame decoration members is connected to the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 using drawer connectors. When the electrical connection by the drawer connector is interrupted, the frame decoration member is detached from the pachinko machine 1 or is out of position. is determined to be That is, for example, when the operator removes the frame decoration member while the power is on, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is disconnected, and when the frame decoration member is attached again. , the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is connected. In addition, unlike this example, a detection switch is provided to detect whether or not each of the frame decoration members is positioned at a proper position. 2, the frame decoration member is detached from the pachinko machine 1 or is out of position, and the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that the frame decoration member is not connected.

In the following, first, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with a focus on the operating state of the frame decoration member when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is removed during normal business hours. During normal operation, when the power is turned on, the reuse permission switch is not operated before the judgment timing when a predetermined period has passed after the power is turned on, and the frame decoration member is attached and detached in the normal state, not in the reuse confirmation state. I am planning to Subsequently, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with a focus on the operation state of the frame decoration member when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state. The reuse confirmation state is a state in which the reuse permission switch is operated before the judgment timing when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on in the power-on state, and the frame decoration member is attached and detached after shifting to the reuse confirmation state. I'm doing it.

(Detachment of frame decoration members during normal business hours)
FIG. 89 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is removed during normal business hours. First, the case where the reuse permission switch is not operated before the predetermined determination timing, the normal state is not changed to the reuse confirmation state, and the frame decoration member is attached/detached in the normal state will be described. In addition, regarding the attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member during normal business hours, if a problem (abnormality, failure, etc.) occurs in the frame decoration member, such as the LED of the frame decoration member not emitting light, the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration It is assumed that after removing the member, the door frame 3 is temporarily closed while the frame decoration member remains unconnected, and the door frame 3 is opened again to attach the same frame decoration member or another frame decoration member. there is

As shown in FIG. 89, first, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the game state on the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state. , during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. That is, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when the start winning is made, the variable display of the special symbols can be started. It is possible to perform a normal game in which a big win game can be started when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols. In the normal state, the period during which the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side continues regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is removed at timing t2 or the like, which will be described later. . In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to frame decoration members such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the production operation unit 250. After the power is turned on, it is determined that the frame decoration member has not been removed and the frame decoration member has been connected until timing tx, which will be described later, arrives.

In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 includes an internal frame decoration LED (lamp A) mounted on various decoration boards of the frame decoration member, and a frame decoration outside LED (lamp B) mounted on various decoration boards other than the frame decoration member. ), the performance display device 1600 and the speaker are controlled, and the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are made to perform normal operations after the power is turned on at the timing ts. ing. In addition, as the lamp B, as members other than the frame decoration member, the frame decoration outside LED 1 mounted on the various decoration substrates of some members and the frame decoration outside mounted on the various decoration substrates of the other members As for the LED 1 outside the frame decoration, the normal operation is executed regardless of whether the door frame 3 is opened or whether the frame decoration member is attached. Here, in the normal operation, when the variable display of the special symbols is not executed, the operation corresponding to the standby effect (for example, demonstration effect) in the state of waiting for the start of the variable display of the special symbols is performed. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command, the operation corresponding to the variation performance (performance based on the variation pattern) is performed. I have to. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display including the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, the reach effect) and the like, and the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) and the like. In lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1) and lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2), the LEDs are lit up or blinked in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600, and the effect display device is output from the speaker. Sound is output in conjunction with the effect display executed in 1600 .

In addition, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 perform normal operations after the power is turned on at the timing ts. By doing so, the volume and the amount of light are assumed to change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the operation is received and the sound volume and light intensity are internally adjusted so that it is reflected in the sound volume and light intensity during execution. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the light intensity of the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration) is fixed, and even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the light intensity do not change. I'm trying

In addition, the external terminal board can output predetermined signals to the hall computer, and by receiving these signals at the hall computer, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 can also be grasped on the hall side. ing. Here, since the door frame 3 is in a closed state, a door frame open signal, which will be described later, is not output, and since the normal state is not a reuse confirmation state, which will be described later, a reuse confirmation signal, which will be described later, is output. do not have.

At timing tz1 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on at timing ts, a determination timing is provided to determine whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated prior to timing tz1. That is, at the determination timing, it is determined whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated between timing ts and timing tz1. Here, since the reuse permission switch is not operated before timing tz1, there is no transition to the reuse confirmation state at timing tz1, and the normal state continues thereafter. It is also assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tz1. For example, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is performing normal operation even after the timing tz1.

After determining that the reuse permission switch has not been operated at timing tz1, even if the reuse permission switch is operated at timing tz2, the normal state does not shift to the reuse confirmation state, and the normal state is followed thereafter. is continuing. In other words, the operation of the reuse permission switch at timing tz2 is treated as invalid. It is also assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tz2. For example, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is performing normal operation even after the timing tz2.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, a signal of the open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, and the door frame is opened. A door frame open command for conveying the opening of No. 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510 . At this time, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are operating normally. The opening operation is executed based on the reception of the opening command.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame open command, the lamp A (inside the frame decoration LED) and the lamp B (outside the frame decoration LED 2) emit light in a single color with high brightness when the door is opened. , the effect display device 1600 displays the message "The door frame is open" as a display when opening, and the speaker outputs "Door frame is open" as an opening sound. is open." is output. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration) continues its normal operation without executing the opening operation.

Further, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, except for the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration), are operated when opened. However, in the operation at the time of opening, the light intensity of the LED or the like is kept constant, and the volume from the speaker is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the amount of light of the members that are performing the opening operation do not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is not reflected in the sound volume and light intensity during execution. ing. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when returning to normal operation. It will happen. Note that the effect display device 1600 may change the amount of light when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

At timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, the external terminal board outputs a door frame open signal to the hall computer, and the door frame 3 is opened on the hall side. It is made possible to grasp that there was. Output of such a door frame open signal to the hall computer ends when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. Thus, even if the opening and closing time of the door frame 3 is short, the opening of the door frame 3 can be easily noticed on the hall side.

Next, when the frame decoration member is removed in the normal state at timing tx after the door frame 3 is opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is disconnected. At this time, after the door frame 3 is opened at timing t1, the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 is executing the opening operation, but at timing tx, the frame decoration member is opened. After removal, it is possible to execute the operation when the frame decoration is not connected to the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, but the operation when the frame decoration is not connected is prioritized. is performing the action of The operation when the frame decoration is not connected is executed after the door frame 3 is closed and the opening operation is completed. As described above, if the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are preferentially executed when the frame decoration is not connected, the opening of the door frame 3 is not notified to the outside and the hall manager is not aware of it. In addition, although there is a possibility that a fraudulent act is performed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the occurrence of such a situation can be prevented by preferentially executing the operation at the time of opening. In the normal state, regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is removed at timing t2, the period during which the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side continues.

However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600 performs the operation when the frame decoration is not connected in addition to the operation when the opening is performed. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 not only displays the message "The door frame is open" as the display when the door is opened, but also displays the message "The frame decoration member is not connected" as the display when the frame decoration is not connected. is displayed. In other words, in the normal state, removal of the frame decoration member is not permitted without executing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. Further, regarding the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), since the frame decoration member has been removed, the LED will not light up or flash after that.

Next, after the frame decoration member is removed, at timing t2, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is sent to the main control board 1310. A door frame closing command is input to the control MPU and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying the closing of the door frame 3 . At this time, after the frame decoration member is removed at the timing tx, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is prioritized over the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, and the operation at the time of opening is executed. However, at timing t2, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, ends the opening operation, and executes the operation when the frame decoration is not connected.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, the lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) emits light in a single color (a different color from the light emission color when the frame is opened) when the frame decoration is not connected. ), the LED lights up or blinks with strong brightness, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message "The frame decoration member is not connected" as a display when the frame decoration is not connected. is designed to output the sound "The frame decoration member is not connected" as the frame decoration disconnection notification sound. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) continues normal operation without executing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. In addition, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) emits light at the time of closing for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after receiving the door frame closing command. After the predetermined period has passed, the light emission when the frame decoration is not connected is executed. Thus, even if the opening/closing time of the door frame 3 is short, the opening of the door frame 3 can be easily noticed on the hall side by executing light emission at the time of closing.

At timing t2, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are not connected to the frame decoration except for the lamp B (outside the frame decoration LED 1). In the operation when the frame decoration is not connected, the amount of light from the LED and the like is kept constant, and the volume from the speaker is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the amount of light of the member executing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected do not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is not reflected in the sound volume and light intensity during execution. ing. Regarding such internally adjusted volume and light intensity, when returning to normal operation, it will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity. It will happen. Note that the effect display device 1600 may change the amount of light when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Next, at timing t3, when the door frame 3 is opened again in order to attach the frame decoration member in the normal state, at timing t1, the behavior is substantially the same as when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state. showing. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again while the frame decoration member is removed, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is opened with priority over the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. When running. However, since the frame decoration member has been removed from the lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), the opening operation is not executed. Further, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the performance display device 1600 performs the operation when the frame decoration is not connected in addition to the operation when opening.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again in the normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. At this time, after the door frame 3 is opened at the timing t2, the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are executing the opening operation. Even after being attached, the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 continue to operate at the time of opening. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the effect display device 1600, even after attaching the frame decoration member at timing ty, is added to the operation at the time of opening and when the frame decoration is not connected. continues to operate. After the frame decoration member is attached, at timing t4, which will be described later, after the door frame 3 is closed, the opening operation is terminated, but the normal operation is not resumed, and the frame decoration is not connected. When the operation continues. As a result, when the frame decoration member is removed in the normal state, even if the frame decoration member is attached again, a trace of the unconnected frame decoration member can be left. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out.

At timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state, the supply of electricity to lamp A (frame decoration LED) is started by attaching the frame decoration member. It is in the off state without lighting or blinking. As a result, when the frame decoration member is removed in a normal state, even if the frame decoration member is attached again, a trace of the unconnected frame decoration member can be left. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being carried out. In this example, the reuse permission switch is not operated before the determination timing of the timing tz1, and the reuse confirmation state is not shifted to the normal state after the timing tz1. Even if the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in (1), the operating state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member cannot be confirmed. In other words, in the normal state, attachment of the frame decoration member does not allow movement of the frame decoration member.

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, at timing t4, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is sent to the main control board 1310. A door frame closing command is input to the control MPU and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying the closing of the door frame 3 . At this time, after the frame decoration member is attached at the timing ty, the members instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 to operate are being opened. receives the door frame closing command, it terminates the opening operation and performs the normal operation. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) emits light at the time of closing for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after receiving the door frame closing command. After the predetermined period has passed, normal light emission is performed. Thus, even if the opening/closing time of the door frame 3 is short, the opening of the door frame 3 can be easily noticed on the hall side by executing light emission at the time of closing.

As described above in detail, after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t4 after the frame decoration member is attached, the opening operation is terminated, but the normal operation is not resumed. Continues the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. At timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is turned off, but at timing t4, the door frame 3 is closed. Even after the light is turned off, the light-off state is continued. In such a case, unless the power is turned on again after that, the lighted state will not be canceled and the lighted state will not be turned on. ing.

(Detachment and attachment of the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A 1)
FIG. 90 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is being opened in the reuse confirmation state A and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame 3 is being opened. . First, a case will be described in which the frame decoration member is attached and detached after the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A by operating the reuse permission switch before the predetermined determination timing. Regarding the attachment and detachment of the frame decoration members in the reuse confirmation state A, when confirming the operation state of a plurality of frame decoration members used as reusable parts, the door frame 3 was opened and the frame decoration members were removed. Later, the door frame 3 is temporarily closed while the frame decoration member remains unconnected, and the door frame 3 is opened again to attach another frame decoration member, or the same frame decoration member is attached again for reconfirmation. It is assumed that

As shown in FIG. 90, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the behavior is the same as when the power is turned on at the timing ts shown in FIG. For example, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the game state on the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state, and the main control board 1310 side It is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed. That is, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when the start winning is made, the variable display of the special symbols can be started. It is possible to perform a normal game in which a big win game can be started when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to frame decoration members such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the production operation unit 250. After the power is turned on, it is determined that the frame decoration member has not been removed and the frame decoration member has been connected until timing tx, which will be described later, arrives. Further, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 perform normal operations after the power is turned on at the timing ts.

Then, at timing tz1 when a predetermined period has elapsed after the power is turned on at timing ts, a judgment timing is provided to judge whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated before timing tz1. That is, at the determination timing, it is determined whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated between timing ts and timing tz1. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch at timing tx3 prior to timing tz1, the normal state shifts to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1. After the main control board 1310 shifts to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state A, even if the player operates the handle 160, the game ball cannot be shot to the game area 5a, and even if there is a starting prize, the variable display of the special symbols can be started. It is in a state where normal games cannot be played. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment/detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by normal game play. In the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, to end the reuse confirmation state A. It is intended to continue for a period of

Further, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, some of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are used to perform the operation at the time of reuse confirmation. Specifically, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "You can confirm the operation of the frame decoration member" as a display at the time of reuse confirmation. Then, from the speaker, as a reuse confirmation sound, a voice saying "You can check the operation of the frame decoration member" is output. On the other hand, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, lamp A (inside frame decoration LED), lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1), and lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2) are operated during reuse confirmation. Continues normal operation without In this way, after the transition to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, only some of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are executing the operation at the time of reuse confirmation. The transition to confirmation state A is caused by the operator operating the reuse permission switch, and there is no need to notify the outside that it is easy to recognize. The lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1) and the lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 2) are assumed not to perform the operation at the time of reuse confirmation. Further, such an operation at the time of confirmation of reuse is assumed to continue until the reuse confirmation state A is terminated by operating the reuse permission switch again at timing tz4, which will be described later.

Further, after the transition to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, some of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are executing the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation. As for the members, the amount of light emitted from the LED is constant, and the sound volume from the speaker is constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the amount of light of the member executing the reuse confirmation operation do not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is not reflected in the sound volume and light intensity during execution. ing. When the reuse confirmation state A is changed to the normal state and returned to normal operation by operating the reuse permission switch again at timing tz4, which will be described later, the internally adjusted volume and light amount are changed. In addition, based on the internally adjusted sound volume and light intensity, the sound volume and light intensity during execution will be reflected. On the other hand, even after the transition to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) and the lamp B (the LED outside the frame decoration 2), which are the members that are executing the normal operation, can be set by pressing the setting adjustment buttons. 204, the amount of light is changed by operating the button 204. However, the amount of light of the lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration) is fixed so that the amount of light does not change even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated. I have to. As described above, in this example, since the member with the constant LED light amount is provided, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the light amount changes with respect to the member with the LED light amount not constant. can. Note that the effect display device 1600 may change the amount of light when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

In addition, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, the external terminal board outputs a reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer to indicate that the hall side has shifted to the reuse confirmation state A. making it comprehensible. Output of such a reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer ends when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, and the reuse confirmation state A ends. The output of the reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the reuse confirmation state A is completed. As a result, even if the transition period to the reuse confirmation state A is short, it is possible to make it easier for the hall side to notice that the transition to the reuse confirmation state A has occurred.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, an open switch signal for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, A door frame open command for notifying the opening of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510 . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t1. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t1, and when the reuse is confirmed, As for the members that are performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing t1. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame open command, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the opening operation. It is not executed and does not change before and after timing t1. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by execution of the opening operation.

At timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, the external terminal board outputs a door frame open signal to the hall computer, and the door frame 3 is opened on the hall side. It is possible to grasp that there was a release of Output of such a door frame open signal to the hall computer ends when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. Thus, even if the opening and closing time of the door frame 3 is short, the opening of the door frame 3 can be easily noticed on the hall side.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, at timing tx, when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing tx. The member that is performing the operation continues the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after the timing tx. Also, when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 despite the removal of the frame decoration member is executed when the frame decoration is not connected. and does not change before and after the timing tx. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, the removal of the frame decoration member is allowed without executing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment/detachment of the decorative frame member and confirmation of the operating state of the decorative frame member can be prevented from being hindered by the execution of the operation when the decorative frame is not connected. .

Although the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up or flashes after the frame decoration member has been removed. It has become something that has never happened.

Next, after the frame decoration member is removed, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is output to the main control board 1310. is input to the main control MPU of , and a door frame closing command for transmitting closing of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510 . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t2. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t2, and when the reuse is confirmed, The member that is performing the operation continues the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after the timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not operate at the time of closing. It is not executed and does not change before and after timing t2. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by execution of the closing operation.

Next, at timing t3, when the door frame 3 is opened again in order to attach the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A. Approximately the same behavior is shown. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again while the frame decoration member is being removed, the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation at the time of opening, and timing t3 is executed. It is assumed that there is no change before and after . For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t3, and when the reuse is confirmed, The member that is performing the operation continues the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after the timing t3.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, when the frame decoration member is attached again in the reuse confirmation state A at timing ty, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing ty. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing ty, and when the reuse is confirmed, As for the member that is performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing ty.

Also, at the timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the reuse confirmation state A, the supply of electricity to the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) is started by attaching the frame decoration member. and is operating normally. As described above in detail, in normal operation, when the variable display of special symbols is not executed, it corresponds to a standby effect (for example, demonstration effect) in a state of waiting for the start of variable display of special symbols. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command, the operation corresponding to the variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern) is performed. I am trying to execute. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up or blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. . However, when the frame decoration member is attached, there are problems such as a situation where the wiring to lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is disconnected and electricity is not supplied, or a situation where lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) itself breaks down. occurs, the normal operation is not executed, and the LED does not light up or blink.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is not operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, the normal state is maintained and the reuse confirmation state is not entered, and the frame decoration member is removed and then attached again. However, if the reuse permission switch is operated once before the judgment timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A, After the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the normal operation is performed by attaching the frame decoration member again at timing ty. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, the operation of the frame decoration member is permitted by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated once before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A. In reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is attached (detached ), the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member can be checked.

In this example, during the period from timing tx to timing ty, that is, during the period in which the frame decoration member is removed for attachment and detachment in the reuse confirmation state A, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is , the LED does not light up or blink. However, during such a period, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is reflected in the light intensity of the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration). It is in a state where it will not be done. With respect to such internally adjusted volume and light intensity, the internally adjusted light intensity can be obtained by attaching the frame decoration member again at timing ty, which will be described later, when the LED can be lit or blinked. is reflected in the amount of light for the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration). As described above, in this example, when the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, which will be described later, the internally adjusted light amount is not reset to the initial state, and the internally adjusted light amount is not returned to the initial state. Since the amount of light applied is reflected as it is, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the amount of light for the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) of the mounted (removed) frame decoration member changes normally. . Regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is removed, the light amount of the lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1) is kept constant, and even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the light amount changes. I'm trying not to. For this reason, when the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, does the light amount of the frame decoration member for the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) change normally compared to the lamp B (the LED outside the frame decoration LED 1)? It is possible to easily determine whether or not

The above-described lamp A (frame decoration LED) is a frame decoration LED mounted on various decoration substrates of the frame decoration member, and is provided in the frame decoration member. In addition to the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), the LED 2 (the lamp A') inside the frame decoration mounted on various decoration substrates of the frame decoration member may be provided. As for the lamp A' (the LED 2 inside the frame decoration), the light intensity of the LED is kept constant so that even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the light intensity do not change. As a result, since the lamp A' (the LED 2 inside the frame decoration) is provided on the frame decoration member like the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), when the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, the frame The amount of light for the lamp A of the frame decoration member (LED 2 inside the frame decoration) is internally adjusted while the frame decoration member is removed, compared with the lamp A′ (the LED 2 inside the frame decoration). It is possible to easily determine whether or not is changing normally.

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing t4, the case where the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing t2. Approximately the same behavior is shown. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed after the frame decoration member is attached, the closing operation of the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is not performed. assumed to be unchanged. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t4, and when the reuse is confirmed, As for the members that are performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing t4.

Next, when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 after the door frame 3 is closed, the reuse confirmation state A is terminated and the state shifts to the normal state. Here, the normal state is the same as the normal state after the power is turned on at timing ts. That is, after the main control board 1310 shifts to the normal state at the timing tz4, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. In addition, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 performs normal operation after transitioning to the normal state at timing tz4. As described above, in this example, the reuse confirmation state A can be returned to the normal state after the operation state of the frame decoration member is confirmed while the frame decoration member as a reusable part is attached and detached. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game (main game) proceeds normally after confirming the operation state of the frame decoration member.

In this example, after the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, so that the lamp A (frame decoration LED) performs normal operation. However, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the normal operation is not executed, and by operating the operation permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, the lamp A (frame decoration LED ) may perform normal operation. As for the operation permission switch, it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and is an operation unit for work that cannot be touched by the player (a button that enables switching between the ON state and the OFF state, and a button that enables switching between the ON state and the ON state by inserting a key). It is provided on the main control board 1310 as a key switch or the like that enables switching between the OFF state and the OFF state. Also, at timing ty, after the frame decoration member is attached again and before the operation permission switch is operated, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up as a standby operation, for example. state or turned off. As a result, confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be arbitrarily started by the hall manager by operating the operation permission switch, and convenience can be improved.

The operation permission switch described above is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also function as the operation permission switch. In other words, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the normal operation is not executed, and by operating the reuse permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is turned on. Ordinary operations may be executed. In addition, the reuse permission switch may be configured so that one option can be selected from a plurality of options. and an option to perform a time action.

Further, in this example, after the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, at timing ty, the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open, so that the lamp A (frame decoration LED) is turned on. The normal operation is executed, but at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open, the normal operation is not executed, and at timing t2, the opening is executed. By closing the door frame 3, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) may perform normal operation. At this time, at timing ty, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is on standby from when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open to when the door frame 3 is closed. As the operation of the time, for example, the LED is turned on or turned off. As a result, the hall manager can arbitrarily start checking the operation state of the frame decoration member by closing the door frame 3, thereby improving convenience.

Also, in this example, at timing tz4, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed before the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state. , and at timing tz4, when the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. Even before the reuse confirmation state is ended by operating the reuse permission switch again, by operating the game permission switch, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. You may make it shift to a possible period. As for the game permission switch, it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and is an operation unit for work that cannot be touched by the player (a button that enables switching between the ON state and the OFF state, and a button that enables switching between the ON state and the ON state by inserting a key). It is provided on the main control board 1310 as a key switch or the like that enables switching between the OFF state and the OFF state. As a result, during the period in which the game (main game) can be progressed on the side of the main control board 1310, when the handle 160 is operated, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when there is a starting prize. In addition, it is possible to start the variable display of the special symbols by drawing lots, and when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols, the big win game can be started, so that the game (main game ) can be started at will by the hall manager by operating the game permission switch, thereby improving convenience.

The above-described game permission switch is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also function as the game permission switch. In other words, by operating the reuse permission switch at a timing before ending the reuse confirmation state by operating the reuse permission switch again, it is possible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. You may make it shift to a certain period. In addition, the reuse permission switch may be configured so that one option can be selected from a plurality of options. and an option for transitioning to a period in which the game can be progressed.

In the above, when the number of input times of the operation information of the reuse permission switch is stored as "1 time" at a predetermined judgment timing after the power is turned on is turned on, etc.), the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached and detached in the reuse confirmation state A, but the number of inputs of the reuse permission switch operation information is stored as " 2 times or more" (for example, when the reuse permission switch is turned on twice before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state B, and the reuse confirmation state is changed. At B, it is possible to attach and detach the frame decoration member. Here, in the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed, but in the reuse confirmation state B, the game on the main control board 1310 side (main game ) can be progressed. In addition, the reuse confirmation state B shows the same behavior as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the reuse confirmation state A except for this point. For example, at the determination timing of timing tz1, even if the reuse confirmation state is changed to the reuse confirmation state B on the condition that the number of times of input of the operation information of the reuse permission switch is "two or more". When the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in B, it is possible to confirm the operating state of the attached (detached) frame decoration member.

FIG. 91 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is being opened in the reuse confirmation state B and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame 3 is being opened. . Here, the points different from the reuse confirmation state A are mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 91, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the game state on the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state. This is a period during which a game (main game) can be progressed on the control board 1310 side. At timing tz1 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on at timing ts, there is provided a judgment timing for judging whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated before timing tz1. The timing also determines the number of times the reuse permission switch is operated from the timing ts to the timing tz1. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch twice before timing tz1, the normal state shifts to reuse confirmation state B at timing tz1. In the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when the start winning is made, the variable display of the special symbols can be started, A normal game can be performed in which a big winning game can be started when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with winning symbols. In the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) can be progressed on the main control board 1310 side until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 to end the reuse confirmation state A. shall be continued.

Further, when the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B, and after removing the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state B, at timing ty. By attaching the frame decoration member again, normal operation is performed. That is, in the reuse confirmation state B, the operation of the frame decoration member is allowed by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on condition that the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B. In reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is attached (detached) ), the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member can be checked.

In this example, when the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to the reuse confirmation state B. Regarding the reuse confirmation state B, the main control board 1310 side It is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed. Therefore, in the reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game (main game) progresses normally. In other words, in the reusable confirmation state B, it is possible to check the operating state of the decorative frame member as a reusable component while detaching the decorative frame member. Confirmation of whether or not it is good can be performed at the same time without waiting for the normal state to be restored from the reuse confirmation state B, and the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 including confirmation of the operation state of a plurality of frame decoration members can be performed. Efficiency can be improved.

(Detachment and attachment of the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A 2)
92 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is detached while the door frame 3 is open in the reuse confirmation state A. FIG. First, a case will be described in which the frame decoration member is attached and detached after the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A by operating the reuse permission switch before the predetermined determination timing. Regarding the detachment of the frame decoration member, when checking the operation state of a plurality of frame decoration members used as reusable parts, after the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is removed, the door frame 3 It is envisioned that another framing member will be installed without closing the door, or that the same framing member will be re-installed for reconfirmation.

As shown in FIG. 92, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tx through a predetermined work. After the power is turned on at the timing ts shown in 90, the behavior is the same as the period until the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tx. That is, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the reuse permission switch is operated at the timing tz3, the normal state shifts to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, and the reuse confirmation state is reached at the timing t1. In A, the door frame 3 is opened, and at the timing tx, the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A. The same work as that shown in FIG. 90 is performed, and the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is as follows. shows the same behavior.

In this example, after the door frame 3 is opened, the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tx. During the opening of the frame 3, the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty. In this way, when the frame decoration member is attached again in the reuse confirmation state A at timing ty while the door frame 3 is being opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. there is

Then, when the frame decoration member is attached in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing ty while the door frame 3 is open, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is electrically connected by attaching the frame decoration member. supply has started and normal operations are being performed. As described above in detail, in normal operation, when the variable display of special symbols is not executed, it corresponds to a standby effect (for example, demonstration effect) in a state of waiting for the start of variable display of special symbols. When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command, the operation corresponding to the variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern) is performed. I am trying to run it. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up or blinks in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. . However, when the frame decoration member is attached, there are problems such as a situation where the wiring to lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is disconnected and electricity is not supplied, or a situation where lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) itself breaks down. occurs, the normal operation is not executed, and the LED does not light up or blink.

It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing ty. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing ty, so that when the reuse is confirmed, As for the member that is performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing ty.

In this example, if the reuse permission switch is not operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, the normal state is maintained and the reuse confirmation state is not entered. Although it was in the off state without blinking, if the reuse permission switch is operated once before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached again. I'm trying to get it to work normally. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, the operation of the frame decoration member is permitted by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on the condition that the reuse permission switch is operated once before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A. In reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is attached (detached ), the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member can be checked. In this example, the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing tx while the door frame 3 is open, and the frame decoration member is removed again at timing ty while the door frame 3 is open. is attached, it is possible to check the operating state of the attached (removed) frame decoration member. In other words, after removing the decorative frame member in the reuse confirmation state A at timing tx, the door frame 3 is necessarily closed and then opened again until the decorative frame member is attached again at timing ty. no need to do any work. In this way, even when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A during one opening of the door frame 3, it is possible to confirm the operating state of the removed frame decoration member. It is possible to improve the efficiency of confirming the operation states of the plurality of frame decoration members.

Further, in this example, during the period from timing tx to timing ty, that is, during the period in which the frame decoration member is removed for attachment and detachment in the reuse confirmation state A, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is , the LED does not light up or blink. However, during such a period, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, although it is possible to internally adjust the volume and light intensity by accepting the operation, the light intensity of the lamp A (frame decoration LED) is reflected in the light intensity. It is in a state where it will not be done. With respect to such internally adjusted volume and light intensity, the internally adjusted light intensity can be obtained by attaching the frame decoration member again at timing ty, which will be described later, when the LED can be lit or blinked. is reflected in the amount of light for the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration). In this way, in this example, when the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, which will be described later, the internally adjusted light amount is not reset to the initial state, and the internally adjusted light amount is not returned to the initial state. Since the amount of light applied is reflected as it is, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the amount of light for the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) of the attached (removed) frame decoration member changes normally. . Regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is removed, the light amount of the lamp B (outside frame decoration LED 1) is kept constant, and even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the light amount changes. I'm trying not to. Therefore, when the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, does the amount of light of the frame decoration member for the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) change normally compared to the lamp B (the LED outside the frame decoration LED 1)? It is possible to easily determine whether or not

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is output to the main control board 1310. is input to the main control MPU of , and a door frame closing command for transmitting closing of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510 . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t2. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t2, and when the reuse is confirmed, The member that is performing the operation continues the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after the timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not operate at the time of closing. It is not executed and does not change before and after timing t2. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by execution of the closing operation.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened again, when the door frame 3 is opened and the frame decoration member is attached or detached, the period from timing t1 to timing t2 is repeated. That is, the door frame 3 is opened at timing t1′, the frame decoration member is removed at timing tx′, another frame decoration member is attached at timing ty′, and another frame decoration member is attached at timing t2′. , in that the door frame 3 is closed, the same work as the period from timing t1 to timing t2 described above is performed, and the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 shows the same behavior.

Next, when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 after the door frame 3 is closed, the reuse confirmation state A is terminated and the state shifts to the normal state. Here, the normal state is the same as the normal state after the power is turned on at timing ts. That is, after the main control board 1310 shifts to the normal state at the timing tz4, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. In addition, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 performs normal operation after transitioning to the normal state at timing tz4. As described above, in this example, the reuse confirmation state A can be returned to the normal state after the operation state of the frame decoration member is confirmed while the frame decoration member as a reusable part is detached. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game (main game) proceeds normally after confirming the operating state of the frame decoration member.

In the above, when the number of input times of the operation information of the reuse permission switch is stored as "1 time" at a predetermined judgment timing after the power is turned on is turned ON, etc.), the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A, and the frame decoration member is attached and detached in the reuse confirmation state A, but the number of times of input of the reuse permission switch operation information is stored 2 times or more" (for example, when the reuse permission switch is turned ON twice before the judgment timing or at the same time as the judgment timing), the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state B, and the reuse confirmation state is changed. At B, it is possible to attach and detach the frame decoration member. Here, in the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed, but in the reuse confirmation state B, the game on the main control board 1310 side (main game ) can be progressed. In addition, the reuse confirmation state B shows the same behavior as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in the reuse confirmation state A except for this point. For example, if the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, even if the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in reuse confirmation state B. ), it is possible to check the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member.

93 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is open in the reuse confirmation state B. FIG. Here, the points different from the reuse confirmation state A are mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 93, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, the game state on the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state, and the main control board 1310 is turned on. This is a period during which a game (main game) can be progressed on the control board 1310 side. At timing tz1 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the power was turned on at timing ts, there is provided a judgment timing for judging whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated before timing tz1. The timing also determines the number of times the reuse permission switch is operated from the timing ts to the timing tz1. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch twice before timing tz1, the normal state shifts to reuse confirmation state B at timing tz1. In the reuse confirmation state B, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. That is, in the reuse confirmation state B, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when the start winning is made, the variable display of the special symbols can be started, A normal game can be performed in which a big winning game can be started when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with winning symbols. In the reuse confirmation state B, a period during which the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can proceed until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 and the reuse confirmation state B ends. shall be continued.

Further, when the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B, and after removing the frame decoration member in reuse confirmation state B, at timing ty By attaching the frame decoration member again, normal operation is performed. That is, in the reuse confirmation state B, the operation of the frame decoration member is allowed by attaching the frame decoration member. Then, on condition that the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state B. In reuse confirmation state B, the frame decoration member is attached (detached) ), it is possible to confirm the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member.

In this example, when the reuse permission switch is operated twice before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to the reuse confirmation state B. Regarding the reuse confirmation state B, the main control board 1310 side It is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed. Therefore, in the reuse confirmation state B, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game (main game) progresses normally. In other words, in the reusable confirmation state B, it is possible to check the operating state of the decorative frame member as a reusable component while detaching the decorative frame member. Confirmation of whether or not it is good can be performed at the same time without waiting for the normal state to be restored from the reuse confirmation state B, and the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 including confirmation of the operation state of a plurality of frame decoration members can be performed. Efficiency can be improved.

(Regarding the attachment of the frame decoration member when the frame decoration member is not connected at the judgment timing)
FIG. 94 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is attached after it is determined at the determination timing that the frame decoration member is not connected. In the above, when it is determined that the reuse permission switch is operated before the predetermined determination timing and the frame decoration member is connected at the predetermined determination timing, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A. , when the frame decoration member is mounted (demounted) in the reuse confirmation state A, it is possible to confirm the operation state of the mounted (demounted) frame decoration member. On the other hand, even if the reuse permission switch is operated before the predetermined determination timing, if it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the predetermined determination timing, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A. never Even when the frame decoration member is attached after that, the LED does not turn on or blink, so that the operation state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member cannot be confirmed. A specific example of such is described below.

As shown in FIG. 94, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the behavior is substantially the same as when the power is turned on at the timing ts shown in FIG. For example, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the game state on the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state, and the main control board 1310 side It is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed. That is, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when the start winning is made, the variable display of the special symbols can be started. It is possible to perform a normal game in which a big win game can be started when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to the effect operation unit 250 and the frame decoration members such as the effect operation unit 250. Until the timing tx arrives, it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected. That is, since the frame decoration member is not connected to the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), the LED does not light up or blink. Further, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 perform normal operations after the power is turned on at the timing ts.

At timing tz1 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the power is turned on at timing ts, a timing for determining whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated is provided prior to timing tz1. At the timing, it is also determined whether or not the frame decoration member is unconnected. When it is determined that the frame decoration member is connected at the determination timing in a situation where the reuse permission switch is operated before the timing tz1, the normal state is shifted to the reuse confirmation state A. , when it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the determination timing, the normal state is not changed to the reuse confirmation state A, and the normal state is continued thereafter. In the normal state, regardless of whether or not the frame decoration member is disconnected at timing tz1 or the like, the period during which the game (main game) can proceed on the main control board 1310 side continues. there is

Further, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, some of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are used to execute the operation when the reuse check is not activated. ing. Specifically, after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, the production display device 1600 displays "Unable to check the operation of the frame decoration member" as a display when the reuse confirmation is not activated. A message is displayed, and a sound "Cannot confirm the operation of the frame decoration member" is output from the speaker as the reuse confirmation non-operation sound. On the other hand, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, lamp A (LED inside the frame decoration), lamp B (LED 1 outside the frame decoration), and lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) operate when the reuse confirmation is not activated. continue normal operation without executing In this way, after it is determined at the timing tz1 that the frame decoration members are not connected, only some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 execute the operation when the reuse check is not activated. However, the fact that the frame decoration member was determined to be unconnected at timing tz1 was caused by the operator operating the reuse permission switch, and it is necessary to notify the outside in an easily recognizable way. Therefore, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration), the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration), and the lamp B (the LED 2 outside the frame decoration) do not perform the operation when the reuse confirmation is not confirmed. Further, regarding the operation when such reuse confirmation is not activated, it is determined whether or not the frame decoration member is attached after it is determined at timing tz1 that the frame decoration member is not connected, and whether the door frame 3 is opened or closed. Regardless, it will continue.

Further, after it is determined at timing tz1 that the frame decoration member is not connected, some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are subjected to the operation when the reuse check is not yet performed. However, for such members, the amount of light emitted from the LED is kept constant, and the volume from the speaker is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the amount of light of the member that is executing the operation when the reuse confirmation is not performed does not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is not reflected in the sound volume and light intensity during execution. ing. On the other hand, even after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at the timing tz1, the setting adjustment button 204 can be operated for the lamp B (frame decoration LED 2) as a member that is executing the normal operation. However, the light intensity of the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration) is kept constant so that even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the light intensity does not change. As described above, in this example, since the member with the constant LED light amount is provided, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the light amount changes with respect to the member with the LED light amount not constant. can. Note that the effect display device 1600 may change the amount of light when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

Further, after determining that the frame decoration member is not connected at the timing tz1, the external terminal board does not output the reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, a signal of the open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, and the door frame is opened. A door frame open command for conveying the opening of No. 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510 . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t1. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t1, and the reuse confirmation is not performed. As for the member executing the time operation, even after the timing t1, the operation when the reuse confirmation is not performed continues. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame open command, but the peripheral control board 1510 does not issue an operation instruction. It is assumed that the members that are closed do not perform the opening operation and do not change before and after the timing t1. As a result, in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is disconnected, confirmation of whether or not the game (main game) proceeds normally is hindered by the execution of the opening action. can be prevented.

At timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state, the external terminal board outputs a door frame open signal to the hall computer, and the door frame 3 is opened on the hall side. It is made possible to grasp that there was. Such a door frame open signal ends outputting to the hall computer when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. Thus, even if the opening and closing time of the door frame 3 is short, the opening of the door frame 3 can be easily noticed on the hall side.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing ty. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing ty, and the reuse confirmation is not performed. As for the member executing the time operation, even after the timing ty, the operation when the reuse confirmation is not performed is continued.

At timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the normal state, the supply of electricity to lamp A (frame decoration LED) is started by attaching the frame decoration member. It is in the off state without lighting or blinking. As a result, even if the frame decoration member is attached in a normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is unconnected, it is possible to leave a trace that the frame decoration member was not connected, so that the attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member can be performed. It is possible to prevent fraudulent use of the system. In addition, when the frame decoration member is attached, if the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up or blinks, the operator who wants to check whether the game (main game) progresses normally. For us, that confirmation may be hindered. In this regard, in this example, if the reuse permission switch is operated before the determination timing of timing tz1 and the frame decoration member is disconnected at that determination timing, even if the frame decoration member is attached after that, , the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) does not turn on or blink, and it is possible to prevent such confirmation from being hindered. On the other hand, if the reuse permission switch is operated before the judgment timing of timing tz1 and the frame decoration member is connected at that judgment timing, when the frame decoration member is attached after that, the lamp A (frame As for the decoration LED), the LED lights up or blinks. For this reason, depending on whether the operator wants to check the operation state of the frame decoration member as a reusable part, or whether he wants to check only whether the game (main game) progresses normally, etc., at the judgment timing It is selectable.

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, at timing t2, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is sent to the main control board 1310. A door frame closing command is input to the control MPU and is output to the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying the closing of the door frame 3 . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t2. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t2, and the reuse confirmation is not performed. As for the member executing the time operation, even after the timing t2, the operation when the reuse confirmation is not performed continues. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected, the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, but the peripheral control board 1510 instructs the operation. It is assumed that the members that are closed are not changed before and after the timing t2 without executing the closing operation. As a result, in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is disconnected, confirmation of whether or not the game (main game) proceeds normally is hindered by the execution of the closing action. can be prevented.

Next, at timing t3, when the door frame 3 is opened again in order to remove the frame decoration member in the normal state, at timing t1, the behavior is substantially the same as when the door frame 3 is opened in the normal state. showing. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again while the frame decoration member is attached, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the opening operation, and the timing t3 is reached. It is assumed that there is no change before and after . For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t3, and the reuse confirmation is not performed. As for the members performing the time operation, even after the timing t3, the operation during the reuse confirmation non-operation is continued.

Next, when the frame decoration member is removed again in the normal state at timing tx after the door frame 3 is opened, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is disconnected. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx. In other words, when the frame decoration member is removed again after the door frame 3 is opened, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not execute the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. It is assumed that it does not change before and after tx. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing tx, and the reuse confirmation non-operation is performed. As for the member executing the time operation, even after the timing tx, the operation during the reuse confirmation non-operation is continued.

Although the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up or flashes after the frame decoration member has been removed. It has become something that will never happen.

Next, when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t4 after the frame decoration member is removed, the behavior is substantially the same as when the door frame 3 is closed in the normal state at timing t2. showing. That is, when the door frame 3 is closed after the frame decoration member is removed, the closing operation of the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is not performed. assumed to be unchanged. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are performing the normal operation are set to continue the normal operation even after the timing t4, and the reuse confirmation non-operation is performed. As for the member that is executing the time operation, the operation during the reuse confirmation non-operation is continued even after the timing t4.

In this example, after it is determined that the frame decoration member is not connected at timing tz1, some of the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 are used to perform the operation when the reuse check is not activated. However, such operation when the reuse confirmation is not activated is continued regardless of whether the frame decoration member is attached or whether the door frame 3 is opened or closed after that. As a result, even if the frame decoration member is attached after it is determined that the frame decoration member is unconnected at timing tz1, it is possible to leave traces of the fact that the frame decoration member was unconnected. It is possible to prevent all illegal acts from being carried out. Further, as described above, when it is determined that the reuse permission switch is not operated at the timing tz1 in the situation where the frame decoration member is connected, when the frame decoration member is removed after that, the peripheral control For the member instructed to operate by the substrate 1510, the operation when the frame decoration is not connected is executed. When it is determined that the frame decoration is being operated, even if the frame decoration member is removed after that, the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. As a result, in the normal state after it is determined that the frame decoration member is disconnected, it is confirmed whether or not the game (main game) proceeds normally, and the operation when the frame decoration is not connected is executed. can be prevented from being hindered by Also, in this example, the purpose of the operation when the reuse confirmation is not activated is to inform that the operation confirmation of the frame decoration member cannot be performed, and is different from the operation when the frame decoration is not connected as described above. However, these operations may be made common.

(Confirmation of error light emission when the frame decoration member is removed in reuse confirmation state A)
FIG. 95 shows the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the frame decoration member is removed while the door frame 3 is being opened and the frame decoration member is attached while the next door frame 3 is being opened in the error state and reuse confirmation state A. is a chart. In the above, when the reuse permission switch is operated before the predetermined determination timing, the normal state shifts to the reuse confirmation state A, and when the frame decoration member is attached (removed) in the reuse confirmation state A, It is possible to check the operating state of the attached (detachable) frame decoration member. On the other hand, when an abnormality is detected, such as detection of magnetism, vibration, or radio waves for the pachinko machine 1, the state shifts to an error state. In such an error state, the LED of the frame decoration member erroneously emits light. To confirm the operating state of the frame decoration member, it is also possible to check whether the LED of the frame decoration member normally emits error light. Confirmation is required. In this regard, in this example, when the reuse confirmation state A and the error state are generated at the same time, when the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in that state, it is attached (detached). It is possible to confirm that the LED of the frame decoration member emits light in error. A specific example of such is described below.

In this example, as an error detection unit, a magnetic sensor that detects the magnetism applied to the pachinko machine 1 by bringing a magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 is used to detect magnetism. A configuration for detecting vibration by a vibration sensor that detects vibration applied to the pachinko machine 1, and a radio wave sensor that detects the radio wave applied to the pachinko machine 1 by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with illegal radio waves. It has a configuration to detect After the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 monitors whether magnetism, vibration, and radio waves for the pachinko machine 1 are detected.

As shown in FIG. 95, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the behavior is the same as when the power is turned on at the timing ts shown in FIG. For example, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are powered on, and the game state on the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state, and the main control board 1310 side It is a period during which the game (main game) can be progressed. That is, in the normal state after the power is turned on, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when the start winning is made, the variable display of the special symbols can be started. It is possible to perform a normal game in which a big win game can be started when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 monitors whether or not it is electrically connected to frame decoration members such as the door frame top unit 300, the door frame right side unit 340, and the production operation unit 250. After the power is turned on, it is determined that the frame decoration member has not been removed and the frame decoration member has been connected until timing tx, which will be described later, arrives. Further, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 perform normal operations after the power is turned on at the timing ts.

After the power is turned on at timing ts, at timing t0, signals from the magnetic sensor for detecting magnetism, the vibration sensor for detecting vibration, and the radio wave sensor for detecting radio waves are output to the main control board 1310. When input to the main control MPU, the main control board 1310 detects anomalies in magnetism, vibration, and radio waves, and sends an anomaly notification command to the peripheral control board for notifying execution of anomaly notification based on the occurrence of an anomaly. Output towards 1510. At this time, after the power is turned on at the timing ts, the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are operating normally. An error condition occurs based on receiving the command. In an error state, the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform normal operation, but performs error operation. It should be noted that the main control board 1310 controls the game state to the normal state in the same manner as the state in which no abnormality has occurred even after transmitting the abnormality notification command to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t0, and the main control board 1310 side It is a period during which a game (main game) can be progressed.

Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives an anomaly notification command, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) and the lamp B (LED 2 outside the frame decoration) light up in a single color with high brightness as an error light emission. Lighting and blinking are performed, and the effect display device 1600 displays messages such as "a magnetic error has occurred", "a vibration error has occurred", and "a radio wave error has occurred" as error displays. Then, from the speaker, as an error sound, sounds such as "a magnetic error has occurred", "a vibration error has occurred", and "a radio wave error has occurred" are output. In addition, in this example, by changing the operation corresponding to the abnormality notification, for example, by changing the message display, the LED emission color, and the notification sound, depending on when magnetism, vibration, and radio waves are detected, It is possible to grasp whether vibration or radio wave was detected. However, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration) continues normal operation without executing the error operation.

Further, when an abnormality is detected at timing t0, the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 except for the lamp B (the LED 1 outside the frame decoration) are executed at the time of the error. However, in the operation at the time of error, the amount of light from the LED is kept constant, and the volume from the speaker is kept constant. Therefore, even if the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, the sound volume and the amount of light of the members that are executing the operation at the time of error do not change. Specifically, when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated, it is possible to accept the operation and internally adjust the volume and light intensity, but it is not reflected in the sound volume and light intensity during execution. ing. Such internally adjusted volume and light intensity will be reflected in the running volume and light intensity based on the internally adjusted volume and light intensity when returning to normal operation. It will happen. Note that the effect display device 1600 may change the amount of light when the setting adjustment button 204 is operated.

When an abnormality is detected at timing t0, an error signal is output from the external terminal board to the hall computer so that the hall side can recognize that an abnormality has been detected. .

Next, at timing tz1 when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the power is turned on at timing ts, a determination timing is provided to determine whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated prior to timing tz1. That is, at the determination timing, it is determined whether or not the reuse permission switch has been operated between timing ts and timing tz1. Here, by operating the reuse permission switch at timing tx3 prior to timing tz1, the normal state shifts to reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1. After the main control board 1310 shifts to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state A, even if the player operates the handle 160, the game ball cannot be shot to the game area 5a, and even if there is a starting prize, the variable display of the special symbols can be started. It is in a state where normal games cannot be played. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment/detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by normal game play. In the reuse confirmation state A, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed until the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, to end the reuse confirmation state A. period.

Further, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, some of the members instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 are used to perform the operation at the time of reuse confirmation. Specifically, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at timing tz1, the effect display device 1600 displays an error message "You can confirm the operation of the frame decoration member" as a display at the time of reuse confirmation. is added to and displayed. From the speaker, a voice saying "You can check the operation of the frame decoration member" is output as a reuse confirmation sound. On the other hand, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame), the lamp B (the LED 2 outside the frame), and the speaker continue to operate in the event of an error. Further, such an operation at the time of confirming reuse is assumed to continue until the reuse confirmation state A is terminated by operating the reuse permission switch again at timing tz4, which will be described later.

In addition, after shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at the timing tz1, the external terminal board outputs a reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer to indicate that the hall side has shifted to the reuse confirmation state A. making it comprehensible. Output of such a reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer is finished when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4, which will be described later, and the reuse confirmation state A ends. The output of the reuse confirmation signal to the hall computer may be terminated when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the reuse confirmation state A ends. As a result, even if the transition period to the reuse confirmation state A is short, it is possible to make it easier for the hall side to notice that the transition to the reuse confirmation state A has occurred.

Next, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, an open switch signal for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 is input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, A door frame open command for notifying the opening of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510 . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t1. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are executing the operation at the time of the error are made to continue the operation at the time of the error even after the timing t1. As for the members that are performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing t1. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame open command, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the opening operation. It is not executed and does not change before and after timing t1. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by execution of the opening operation.

At timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A, the external terminal board outputs a door frame open signal to the hall computer, and the door frame 3 is opened on the hall side. It is possible to grasp that there was a release of Such a door frame open signal ends outputting to the hall computer when a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the door frame 3 is closed at timing t2, which will be described later. Thus, even if the opening and closing time of the door frame 3 is short, the opening of the door frame 3 can be easily noticed on the hall side.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, at timing tx, when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member is not connected. . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are executing the operation at the time of the error are made to continue the operation at the time of the error even after the timing tx. The member that is performing the operation continues the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after the timing tx. Also, when the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 despite the removal of the frame decoration member is executed when the frame decoration is not connected. It is assumed that there is no change before and after the timing t1. That is, in the reuse confirmation state A, the removal of the frame decoration member is allowed without executing the operation when the frame decoration is not connected. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment/detachment of the decorative frame member and confirmation of the operating state of the decorative frame member can be prevented from being hindered by the execution of the operation when the decorative frame is not connected. .

Although the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing tx, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up or flashes after the frame decoration member has been removed. It has become something that will never happen.

Next, after the frame decoration member is removed, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at timing t2, the signal of the closing switch for detecting the closing of the door frame 3 is output to the main control board 1310. is input to the main control MPU of , and a door frame closing command for transmitting closing of the door frame 3 is output to the peripheral control board 1510 . It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing t2. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are executing the operation at the time of the error are made to continue the operation at the time of the error even after the timing t2. As for the members that are performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing t2. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A, although the peripheral control board 1510 receives the door frame closing command, the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the closing operation. It is not executed and does not change before and after timing t2. As a result, in the reuse confirmation state A, attachment and detachment of the frame decoration member and confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be prevented from being hindered by execution of the closing operation.

Next, at timing t3, when the door frame 3 is opened again in order to attach the frame decoration member in the reuse confirmation state A, at timing t1, when the door frame 3 is opened in the reuse confirmation state A. Approximately the same behavior is shown. In other words, when the door frame 3 is opened again while the frame decoration member is being removed, the member instructed to operate by the peripheral control board 1510 does not perform the operation at the time of opening, and timing t3 is executed. It is assumed that there is no change before and after . For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are executing the operation at the time of the error are made to continue the operation at the time of the error even after the timing t3. The member that is performing the operation continues the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after the timing t3.

Next, after the door frame 3 is opened, when the frame decoration member is attached again in the reuse confirmation state A at timing ty, the peripheral control board 1510 determines that the frame decoration member has been connected. It is assumed that the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 does not change before and after the timing ty. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the members that are executing the operation at the time of the error are made to continue the operation at the time of the error even after the timing ty, so that the operation at the time of the error is continued even after the timing ty. As for the member that is performing the operation, the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation is continued even after the timing ty.

Also, at the timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached in the reuse confirmation state A, the supply of electricity to the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration) is started by attaching the frame decoration member. However, as for the operation, the operation at the time of error is executed instead of the normal operation. As described above in detail, in the error operation of the lamp A (the LED in the frame decoration), the LED lights or blinks in a single color with high luminance as error light emission. However, when the frame decoration member is attached, there are problems such as a situation where the wiring to lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is disconnected and electricity is not supplied, or a situation where lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) itself breaks down. is generated, the operation at the time of the error is not executed, and the LED does not light up or blink.

In this example, when the reuse permission switch is operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A. After the frame decoration member is removed, the frame decoration member is attached again at timing ty, thereby restarting the operation at the time of error. In other words, in the reuse confirmation state A, by attaching the frame decoration member, it is allowed to resume the operation at the time of error with the frame decoration member as the target. Then, on condition that the reuse permission switch is operated before the determination timing of timing tz1, the state shifts to reuse confirmation state A. When the frame decoration member is attached (detached) in reuse confirmation state A, , it is possible to check whether the attached (detachable) frame decoration member normally emits error light.

Next, after the frame decoration member is attached, when the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing t4, the case where the door frame 3 is closed in the reuse confirmation state A at the timing t2. Approximately the same behavior is shown. In other words, when the door frame 3 is closed after the frame decoration member is attached, the closing operation of the member instructed by the peripheral control board 1510 is not executed, and the closing operation is not executed before or after the timing t4. assumed to be unchanged. For example, among the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, the member that is executing the error operation is configured to continue the error operation even after timing t4. The member that is performing the operation continues the operation at the time of the reuse confirmation even after the timing t4.

Next, when the reuse permission switch is operated again at timing tz4 after the door frame 3 is closed, the reuse confirmation state A is terminated and the state shifts to the normal state. Here, the normal state is the same as the normal state before shifting to the reuse confirmation state A at timing t1. That is, after the main control board 1310 shifts to the normal state at the timing tz4, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. In addition, for the member whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, after the transition to the normal state at the timing tz4, the error operation based on the error state is executed. As described above, in this example, the reuse confirmation state A can be returned to the normal state after the operation state of the frame decoration member is confirmed while the frame decoration member as a reusable part is attached and detached. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the game (main game) proceeds normally after confirming the operation state of the frame decoration member.

In this example, after the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, the frame decoration member is attached again at the timing ty, so that the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) executes the error operation. However, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the error operation is not executed, and by operating the operation permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, the lamp A (frame decoration LED ) may perform the action on error. As for the operation permission switch, it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and is an operation unit for work that cannot be touched by the player (a button that enables switching between the ON state and the OFF state, and a button that enables switching between the ON state and the ON state by inserting a key). It is provided on the main control board 1310 as a key switch or the like that enables switching between the OFF state and the OFF state. Also, at timing ty, after the frame decoration member is attached again and before the operation permission switch is operated, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) lights up as a standby operation, for example. state or turned off. As a result, confirmation of the operation state of the frame decoration member can be arbitrarily started by the hall manager by operating the operation permission switch, and convenience can be improved.

The operation permission switch described above is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also function as the operation permission switch. In other words, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again, the error operation is not executed, and by operating the reuse permission switch after attaching the frame decoration member, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is turned on. You may make it perform the operation|movement at the time of an error. In addition, the reuse permission switch may be configured so that one option can be selected from a plurality of options. and options for performing time actions.

Further, in this example, after the frame decoration member is removed in the reuse confirmation state A, at timing ty, the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open, so that the lamp A (frame decoration LED) is turned on. Although the error operation is executed, at timing ty, when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open, the error operation is not executed, and at timing t2, the door frame 3 is opened. By closing the door frame 3, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) may perform the error operation. At this time, at timing ty, the lamp A (the LED inside the frame decoration) is on standby from when the frame decoration member is attached again while the door frame 3 is open to when the door frame 3 is closed. As the operation of the time, for example, the LED is turned on or turned off. As a result, the hall manager can arbitrarily start checking the operation state of the frame decoration member by closing the door frame 3, thereby improving convenience.

Also, in this example, at timing tz4, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot proceed before the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state. At timing tz4, when the reuse permission switch is operated again to end the reuse confirmation state, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. Even before the reuse confirmation state is ended by operating the reuse permission switch again, by operating the game permission switch, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side can be progressed. You may make it shift to a possible period. As for the game permission switch, it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and is an operation unit for work that cannot be touched by the player (a button that allows switching between the ON state and the OFF state, and a button that switches between the ON state and the ON state by inserting a key). It is provided on the main control board 1310 as a key switch or the like that enables switching between the OFF state and the OFF state. As a result, during the period in which the game (main game) can be progressed on the side of the main control board 1310, when the handle 160 is operated, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a, and when there is a starting prize. In addition, it is possible to start the variable display of the special symbols by performing a lottery, and when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols, the big win game can be started, so that the game (main game ) can be started at will by the hall manager by operating the game permission switch, thereby improving convenience.

The above-described game permission switch is provided separately from the reuse permission switch, but the reuse permission switch may also function as the game permission switch. In other words, by operating the reuse permission switch at a timing before ending the reuse confirmation state by operating the reuse permission switch again, it is possible to progress the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side. You may make it shift to a certain period. In addition, the reuse permission switch may be configured so that one option can be selected from a plurality of options. and an option for transitioning to a period in which the game can be progressed.

[8. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 to 102. FIG. FIG. 96 is a front view of a game board showing a transparent center accessory and the like in an opaque manner. 97 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 96 as seen from the front right, FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 96 as seen from the front left, and FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 96 as seen from the rear. It is a diagram. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 102 is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player's operation of the handle 160. As shown in FIG. In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning port 2001, a normal prize winning port 2002, and a first starting prize winning port 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, addition of a predetermined number of balls) to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B. An opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a prize winning opening 2006, and a second V winning opening 2008 are provided. In this game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening 2002, a first starting opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, a prize winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. Secondly, it is intended to allow the user to enjoy the hitting operation of the handle 160 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 which defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 111) for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a, and vibrations for detecting vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1). and a sensor 1040 (see FIG. 111 and the like). A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, which is performed by hitting game balls B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 111, etc.) for controlling contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 to be mounted.

A production display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the production display device 1600. - 特許庁

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open and are capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. A normal prize winning opening 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B, and a second opening which is provided in the center in the horizontal direction below the center accessory 2500 and is always open to accept the game ball B. A first starting port 2003, a second starting port 2004 which enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning prize port 2002, and the first starting port. The game ball B can be accepted according to the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B to 2003 and the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second start port 2004. and a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 that can receive the game ball B received in the winning opening 2006. . The game board 5 also includes a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 111) for detecting magnetism acting illegally within the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided at the most downstream in the game area 5a, is always open to receive the game ball B, and discharges the received game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning it. An out port 2020 is provided upstream of the out port 2020 in the game area 5a, and is always open to receive the game ball B, and the received game ball B is not returned to the outside of the game area 5a. and two sub-out ports 2021 for discharging. Two out ports 2020 are provided on the left and right with the first starting port 2003 therebetween. In addition, the two sub-out ports 2021 are provided in a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a and a portion to the right of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a, respectively.

Furthermore, the table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. A side unit 2200 provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 when viewed from the front and having three general prize-winning ports 2001 and one sub-out port 2021, and the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. A side upper left unit 2300 provided slightly above, and an attacker unit provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 and having a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and one sub-out opening 2021 2400, and a frame-shaped center role having a role winning opening 2006, a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008, which are provided slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. 2500, and a normal winning opening unit 2600 provided above the right end of the attacker unit 2400 and having a normal winning opening 2002. - 特許庁

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped main unit 2510 having a role winning opening 2006 and a first V winning opening 2007, and a second V winning opening 2008 provided in the lower part of the frame of the main unit 2510. and a lottery accessory 2550 having

The back unit 3000 includes a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a, a vibration sensor 1040 for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), and a panel in the game panel 1100. A back box 3010 attached to the rear surface of a holder 1120 and having a box shape with an open front and having a square opening 3010a on the back wall, and a performance display device 1600 are detachably attached to the back wall of the back box 3010. and a back board unit 3040 arranged behind the effect display device 1600 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. - 特許庁

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guidance unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, and the back ball in the back box 3010. A back decoration unit 3200 provided behind the induction unit 3100, a back front effect unit 3300 provided to the left and above the back ball induction unit 3100 near the front end in the back box 3010, and and a rear back effect unit 3400 provided behind the back front effect unit 3300. - 特許庁

[8-1. Front component]
The front constituent member 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101 and the like. The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in the front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely to the upper right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. This out port 1008 is closed from the front by the starting port unit 2100 .

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention concave portion 1009 protrudes to the rear of the crime prevention cover (not shown) on the door frame 3. A state in which the projecting piece (illustration is omitted) is inserted is reached. As a result, the gap between the crime prevention cover and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a state of being intricately bent by the rear projecting piece of the security cover and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through the gap between the crime prevention cover and the front component 1000 from the lower front, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece or the crime prevention recess 1009, and the game area 5a will be blocked. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 matches the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100 . This notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 and passes through the lower normal payout passage and the lower part of the lower full-ball path unit when attached to the body frame of a pachinko machine that pays out game balls to a player. The front end opening of the full tank payout passage faces forward to supply game balls to the upper tray and the lower tray of the door frame.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 formed in the lower right corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[8-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. A plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 .

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The board thickness of this panel board 1110 is thinner than the board thickness of the wooden game panel, which is about 20 mm, and it is sufficiently held even if obstacle nails are planted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. The minimum possible thickness is about 10 mm. In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 is the lowest position in the game area 5a, and the position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 is recessed upward from the lower end. In other words, in the present embodiment, the out port 1008 of the panel plate 1110 is formed in the shape of a notch that opens downward in the panel plate 1110 rather than in the shape of a hole. Note that the out port 1008 may be formed in the shape of a hole. In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon. In the present embodiment, the opening 1112 is formed in the shape of a hole, but it may be formed in the shape of a notch that opens outward from the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are separated in the horizontal direction. and a plurality of engaging stepped portions formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting projecting pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging stepped portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . be.

The panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset above the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) is the left side and the left side except for the upper side from the center. The right side and the lower side have a wide width in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, and the upper side has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be arranged.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (in this embodiment, it is about 38 mm, which is the same thickness as the wooden game panel). formed. This is because regardless of whether the wooden game panel 1100 or the transparent synthetic resin game panel 1100 is used, the same pachinko machine 1 (game machine) can be attached to the body frame 4 to play a game.

The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has a size approximately equal to that of the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed so as to match the notch portion 1010 of the front structural member 1000 . This notch 1122 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 and penetrates the lower normal payout passage and the lower part of the lower full ball path unit when attached to the body frame of a pachinko machine that pays out game balls to the player. The front end opening of the full tank payout passage faces forward to supply game balls to the upper tray and the lower tray of the door frame.

Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with an out recess 1123 extending upward from the lower end to a position corresponding to the out port 1008 and recessed forward from the rear surface. Out recessed portion 1123 communicates with out port 1008 at its upper portion.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and arranged outside the holding stepped portion. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion. and a pair of engaging pieces respectively engaged with the two engaging stepped portions on the lower side of the . The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper side and the lower left side. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion by elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is held with the engaging claw. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

Since this game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front structural member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the boundary of the game area 5a from being clearly visible. It is possible to give a sense of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front structural member 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear to emit light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

[8-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 from the lower side and the rear side, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejection portion 1201 is located directly above the out ball receiving port 600 a and the safe ball receiving port 600 b in the circulation ball path unit 600 of the main body frame 4 . As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 2020 or the sub-out port 2021 is discharged to the out ball receiving port 600a in the circulating ball path unit 600 and received by the out ball receiving port 600a. As a result, the ball passes through the out-ball passage 601 and is detected (counted) one by one by the out-ball sensor 605 . On the other hand, the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are received in winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. The game ball B discharged downward from the circulating ball path unit 600 is discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b, and received by the safe ball receiving port 600b, so that it flows through the safe ball passage 602 and is detected by the safe ball sensor 606. detected (counted) one by one.

[8-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 111) for controlling game content and awarding of benefits to the player, and a main control board mounted on the board holder 1200. box 1320;

The main control board box 1320 includes a board base 1330 attached to the board holder 1200 and having the main control board 1310 attached to its rear surface, and a board cover 1340 attached to the board base 1330 so as to cover the main control board 1310 from behind. , consists of Substrate base 1330 and substrate cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate. A main control board 1310 is accommodated in the internal space formed by the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340 . Since the substrate base 1330 and the substrate cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be checked. ) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 .

In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1350 corresponding to the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism 1350, Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism 1350, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 760, the out ball sensor 605, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002, a first starting opening sensor 2101, a second starting opening sensor 2401, a large winning opening sensor 2402, and a prize winning opening sensor. 2501, first V winning opening sensor 2502, second V winning opening sensor 2503, losing opening sensor 2504, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, accessory winning opening solenoid 2516, first distribution solenoid 2534, second distribution It is connected to a solenoid 2544, a lottery loop solenoid 2558, a striking piece drive motor 2561, a gutter swing drive motor 2564, a swing piece solenoid 2565, a magnetic sensor 1030, a vibration sensor 1040, and the like.

The main control board 1310 also has a base monitor 1311 consisting of four 7-segment LEDs (see FIG. 111). The base monitor can be viewed from behind through the transparent substrate cover 1340 . This base monitor 1311 is ejected downward from the game board 5 after the game ball B shot by the ball shooting unit 550 is hit into the game area 5a, and is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 of the main body frame 4. It displays the number of game balls B counted by being detected by the provided out-ball sensor 605 . The base monitor 1311 of this embodiment displays the number of balls counted by the out-ball sensor 605 after 100 shots (the number of balls returned to the game hall side) as a percentage.

[8-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 96 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the game window 101 of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the lottery result of normal symbols, the lottery result of special symbols, and the like. .

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and a lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002. A normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs to be displayed and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to acceptance of the game balls B to the normal winning opening 2002 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, and a first starting A first special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the opening 2003, and a second special design drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004. A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery result, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 and have.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "win". A round indicator consisting of an LED.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[8-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 99 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the performance display device 1600 provided behind the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . More specifically, the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 which attaches the performance display device 1600 to the rear surface of the back box 3010 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 111) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 250, various decoration boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 111). The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600, although the details will be described later.

[8-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. Effect display device 1600 is attached to the front surface of liquid crystal spacer 1610 attached to the rear wall of back box 3010 . Since the liquid crystal spacer 1610 is detachable from the back box 3010 , the effect display device 1600 can be detached from the back box 3010 via the liquid crystal spacer 1610 . The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 .

The effect display device 1600 is a 15-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and is mounted on the front surface of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 in a horizontally long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 is offset (decentered) so that the center of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 is positioned lower right than the center of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 so that spaces are formed above and to the left of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 . installed.

The liquid crystal spacer 1610 has the same size as the 19-inch liquid crystal display device and is formed in the shape of a transparent flat plate. The liquid crystal spacer 1610 has two upper fixing pieces 1611 protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixing piece 1612 protruding downward from the lower end surface. This liquid crystal spacer 1610 is placed in two fixed grooves 3010c that are open to the upper inner peripheral surface of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen of the effect display device 1600 facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1611 obliquely from the rear, the lower fixed piece 1612 side is moved forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1612 into the opening of the lock slider 3020, and the lock slider 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the left.

[8-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear end partially projects into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. there is

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. A normal winning opening 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B, and a first start opening 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open to accept the game ball B. , A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning port 2002, and the game ball to the first start port 2003. A large winning opening 2005 and a role that can accept the game ball B according to the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B or the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004 A product winning opening 2006, and a first V winning opening 2007 and a second V winning opening 2008 for receiving the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 are provided.

In addition, the front unit 2000 further includes an out port 2020 and a sub-out port 2021 for discharging the game ball B hit into the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 are always open so that the game ball B can be received. In addition, the out port 2020 is provided at the downstream end of the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a first start opening sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2003, and a second start opening sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. 2401, a big winning hole sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005, a first V winning hole sensor 2502 that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning hole 2007, A second V winning opening sensor 2503 for detecting the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 and a loss opening sensor 2504 for detecting the game ball B received in the losing opening 2009 act within the game area 5a. and a magnetic sensor 1030 for detecting illegal magnetism.

A plurality of (here, three) general winning holes 2001 are arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part of the game area 5a. The normal winning opening 2002 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the right end in the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2003 is arranged between the two out ports 2020 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged below the normal winning opening 2002 near the right end in the game area 5a. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged on the right side of the first starting opening 2003 in the game area 5a. The accessory winning opening 2006 is arranged above the normal winning opening 2002 in the vicinity of the right end in the game area 5a.

The out port 2020 is arranged below the left and right sides of the first start port 2003 at the downstream end of the game area 5a. One of the sub-out openings 2021 is arranged to the left of the three general winning openings 2001 and the remaining one is arranged below the second starting opening 2004 .

The table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2003 and an out opening 2020. A start opening unit 2100 and a start opening unit 2100 A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view and has three general prize-winning ports 2001 and one sub-out port 2021, and a slightly upper side unit 2200 on the left side of the front view. and a side upper left unit 2300 provided in the .

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided on the right side of the starting opening unit 2100 and has a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and an attacker unit 2400 having one sub-out opening 2021. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided slightly above the center of the front view, and has an accessory winning opening 2006, a first V winning opening 2007, a second V winning opening 2008, and a losing opening 2009. and a normal winning opening unit 2600 provided above the attacker unit 2400 and having a normal winning opening 2002. - 特許庁

[8-8a. starting unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 includes a first starting port 2003 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received, and a game ball that is always open to receive the game ball B. It has two out ports 2020 that discharge outside the game area 5a without returning B. In addition, the starting opening unit 2100 has a first starting opening sensor 2101 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2003 (see FIG. 111).

Out port 2020 is provided at a position lower than first start port 2003 . The two out ports 2020 of the starting port unit 2100 are provided at symmetrical positions with the first starting port 2003 therebetween. The first starting port 2003 is open upward with a width through which one game ball B can pass. The out port 2020 is opened upward with a width of two game balls B, and is provided at the lowest position in the game area 5a.

The starting port unit 2100 is provided such that the height difference between the first starting port 2003 and the out port 2020 is smaller (lower) than the height difference between the first starting port and the out port (out port 1008) in the conventional pachinko machine. ing. As a result, the player can be given the illusion that the first starting port 2003 is provided below the conventional first starting port, and the inside of the game area 5a can be made to appear relatively wide. .

The starting port unit 2100 is provided below the first starting port 2003 and has a starting port display section 2110 capable of displaying a predetermined pattern. The starting opening display section 2110 is composed of one 7-segment LED. This starting point display section 2110 can display a predetermined pattern (including numbers) according to the progress of the game. When the starter unit 2100 is assembled on the game board 5, the starter display part 2110 closes the outlet 1008 from the front, making the outlet 1008 invisible to the player. This allows the player to recognize that the out port 2020 is the lowest end of the game area 5a.

In the starting port unit 2100 assembled on the game board 5, the first starting port 2003 is located directly below the central release portion 2513a on the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500, and the game released from the central release portion 2513a. Ball B can be accepted with high probability. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is detected by the first starting port sensor 2101, guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. and discharged to the safe ball receptacle 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

The game ball B received in the out port 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the circulating ball path unit below the back ball guiding unit 3100. 600 is discharged to the out ball socket 600a.

[8-8b. side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98, 102 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 which are always open to receive the game balls B, and one sub-out opening 2021 which is always open to receive the game balls B.

The three general winning holes 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002, and are provided at higher positions toward the left. Each general prize winning opening 2001 is opened with a size (width) corresponding to one game ball B. One sub-out port 2021 is provided to the left of the leftmost general winning port 2001 . The sub-out port 2021 is opened with a size (width) of one game ball B.

Also, the side unit 2200 has a shelf 2201 on the right side of the rightmost general prize winning opening 2001, which slopes down toward the right. The shelf 2201 extends rightward to the vicinity of the right end of the left outlet 2020 in the starting outlet unit 2100 . That is, when the game ball B rolls on the shelf 2201, it is received by the out port 2020 on the left side.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, three general prize winning openings 2001 and one sub-out opening 2021 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and discharged downward.

Also, the side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is discharged to the out ball socket 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

[8-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes downward to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[8-8d. Attacker unit]
Next, the attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98, 102 and the like. The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starter unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in the front view, and is attached to the front of the game panel 1100 from the front. This attacker unit 2400 has a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and one sub-out opening 2021 (see FIG. 102, etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening 2004 provided in the upper right side of the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and a big winning opening 2005 is provided in a position lower than the second start opening 2004 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. One sub-out port 2021 is provided below the second starting port 2004 and at a position lower than the big prize winning port 2005 .

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a second start opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a big winning opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005. , and a magnetic sensor 1030 for detecting illicit magnetism (see FIG. 111). Two big winning opening sensors 2402 are provided side by side on the left and right.

Also, the attacker unit 2400 has a dummy sensor 2403 at a position visible from the front behind the sub-out port 2021 . Although this dummy sensor 2403 cannot detect the game ball B, it is formed in the same manner as a through sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball B like the big winning hole sensor 2402 . According to this configuration, the dummy sensor 2403 can be replaced with a sensor that can actually detect the game ball B. Therefore, the main body frame 4 can be changed to count out-balls or not. is. Although the dummy sensor 2403 is of the same type as the through sensor, it may be a spacer that eliminates a step that causes clogging of the ball at that portion.

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starting opening door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starting opening 2004, and the second starting opening door 2411 according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2002. A starting opening solenoid 2412, a large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and a large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004. and an attacker solenoid 2414 opened and closed according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

The second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 opens upward with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B in the horizontal direction. The large winning opening 2005 has a width of 4 to 6 times the diameter of the game ball B and opens upward. A second starting opening door 2411 that can open and close the second starting opening 2004 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, and is inclined so that the left end side is lowered. A large prize winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005 is provided so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by rotating around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and is inclined so that the left end side is lower. are doing.

The second starting door 2411 is provided so as to move in the front-rear direction. When the start solenoid 2412 is not energized, the second start door 2411 moves forward due to the spring biasing force of the plunger of the start solenoid 2412, closing the second start door 2004. there is In addition, when the starting solenoid 2412 is energized, the second starting door 2411 moves backward by retracting the plunger of the starting solenoid 2412 against the biasing force of the spring. The mouth 2004 is opened.

The big prize gate door 2413 has a flat plate shape that is elongated in the left and right direction, and is provided so as to move forward and backward by rotating around an axis extending in the left and right direction provided below the big prize gate sensor 2402 . ing. The large winning opening door 2413 can open and close the large winning opening 2005 by moving the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 back and forth. When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the large winning opening door 2413 is moved forward by the spring biasing force of the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 to close the large winning opening 2005 . In addition, when the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the large winning opening door 2413 moves rearward by retracting the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 against the urging force of the spring, thereby opening the large winning opening 2005. do.

The attacker unit 2400 forms a space in which the game ball B can flow between the second starting port 2004 and the big winning port 2005 at its upper end, and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the left. It has an upper shelf portion 2421 provided to cover the top thereof. The upper shelf portion 2421 extends in the left-right direction from the upper right end of the second starting opening 2004 to the upper left end of the big winning opening 2005 .

The attacker unit 2400 is located above the second start opening 2004 and is located leftward from the right end (right rail 1005) of the attacker unit 2400 with a gap that allows one game ball B to pass therethrough. 2004, a second shelf 2423 that slopes downward from the left end of the second starting port 2004, and a second shelf 2423 that slopes downward to the left. The third shelf part that is inclined so as to be lower toward the left large winning opening 2005 from the part where the game ball B can pass between the second shelf part 2423 on the left and lower side of the 2424, and a fourth shelf portion 2425 which is inclined downward from the left end of the big prize opening 2005 toward the left.

In this attacker unit 2400, when the game ball B enters the clearance to the right of the first shelf 2422 and the clearance between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424, it is received by the sub-out port 2021. , the game ball B is discharged outside the game area 5a.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the attacker unit 2400 has a front wall and a rear wall that form a space in which the game ball B can circulate leftward between the upper shelf portion 2421 and the big winning opening 2005. A plurality of triangular contact portions in a plan view protrude into the space so as to alternate in the left-right direction from the wall. These a plurality of abutting portions can circulate the game ball B rolling on the large winning opening door 2413 in a large zigzag shape in the front-rear direction when the large winning opening 2005 is closed. The circulation time of the game ball B which circulates on the entrance door 2413 is lengthened.

In the normal state of the attacker unit 2400, the starter solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 are in a de-energized (OFF) state. In this normal state, the plunger of the starter solenoid 2412 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the second starter door 2411 protrudes forward. In this state, the second starting opening door 2411 is positioned above the second starting opening 2004, and the second starting opening door 2411 makes it impossible to accept the game ball B to the second starting opening 2004. ing. That is, the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411 .

Also, in a normal state, the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 protrudes forward due to the biasing force of a spring (not shown), and the big winning opening door 2413 protrudes forward. In this state, the large winning opening door 2413 is located above the large winning opening 2005, and the receiving of the game ball B into the large winning opening 2005 is disabled. In other words, the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the big winning opening door 2413 .

In this normal state, when the game ball B flows down on the first shelf 2422, the game ball B rolls leftward due to the inclination of the first shelf 2422, the upper surface of the second start door 2411, and the second After rolling on the second shelf portion 2423 , it is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf portion 2423 . The game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 falls on the third shelf 2424 or the big winning entrance door 2413 according to its momentum, and rolls leftward due to their inclination. In addition, when the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 contacts the lower surface of the upper shelf 2421 and rebounds to the right, the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424 may enter the

Then, the game ball B rolling on the big winning gate door 2413 closing the big winning gate 2005 hits a plurality of contact points provided in the space between the upper shelf 2421 and the big winning gate 2005. It alternately abuts against the parts, and rolls to the left while zigzag in the front-rear direction. The game ball B that rolls leftward on the big winning opening door 2413 rolls on the fourth shelf 2425, and is released to the outside of the attacker unit 2400 from the left end thereof. Since the left end of the fourth shelf 2425 is positioned lower than the first starting port 2003 , the game ball B released leftward from the fourth shelf 2425 is received by the out port 2020 .

The attacker unit 2400 is guided to the left by the inclination when the game ball B falls on the upper shelf part 2421, and the attacker unit 2400 is not given an opportunity to be accepted by the second start hole 2004 or the big winning hole 2005. Released to the left. Since the left end of the upper shelf 2421 is provided at a position higher than the first starting port 2003, the game ball B released leftward from the upper shelf 2421 may be received by the first starting port 2003. .

In this attacker unit 2400 , when the game ball B flows down to the right of the first shelf 2422 , it enters the sub-out port 2021 . Also, when the game ball B enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2423 and the third shelf portion 2424 , it enters the sub-out port 2021 . The game ball B that has entered the sub-out port 2021 passes through the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below without being returned to the game area 5a, and is discharged onto the substrate holder 1200 below. It is delivered to the receptacle 600a. In this attacker unit 2400, the game ball B that circulated on the right side of the first shelf 2422 and the game ball B that passed through the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424 are both substantially two sub-out ports 2021 are provided.

In this normal state, when the starting opening solenoid 2412 is energized (ON) according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the ordinary winning opening 2002, it resists the biasing force of the spring. The plunger retreats and the second starter door 2411 moves rearward. Then, by moving the second starting port door 2411 backward, the upper part of the second starting port 2004 is opened, and the receiving of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 becomes possible. That is, the second starting port 2004 is opened.

When the second start opening 2004 is in the open state, when the game ball B is received in the second start opening 2004, it is detected by the second start opening sensor 2401 and then released backward from the attacker unit 2400. - 特許庁The game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 and released backward from the attacker unit 2400 is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is delivered to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. discharged to

On the other hand, in a normal state, according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result or second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004, When the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized (ON), the plunger moves backward against the biasing force of the spring, and the big winning opening door 2413 moves backward. By moving the large winning opening door 2413 backward, the large winning opening 2005 is opened upward, and the game ball B can be received into the large winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加In other words, the big winning opening 2005 is in an open state.

When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005 when the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state, it is detected by one of the two large winning opening sensors 2402 provided below, and then the attacker unit. 2400 is emitted backwards. The game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 and discharged backward from the attacker unit 2400 is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and is sent to the safe ball receiving opening 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. Ejected.

As described above, according to the attacker unit 2400 of the present embodiment, the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 is detected by either of the two large winning opening sensors 2402 and then released backward. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the game ball B from being stuck between the big winning hole 2005 and the big winning hole sensor 2402, and to accept many game balls B in a short time.

[8-8e. Center role]
Next, the center role item 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 103(a) is a front view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory, and FIG. 103(b) is a perspective view of the lottery accessory viewed from above. FIG. 104 is a side cross-sectional view of the lottery accessory in the center accessory cut at the center in the left-right direction. FIG. 105(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a state in which a game ball cannot loop in a lottery accessory, and (b) is a cross section showing a state in which a game ball can loop in a lottery accessory. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the lottery accessories.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame.

Although the details will be described later, the center accessory 2500 is the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2003 and the first special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the second start port 2004. A role prize winning port 2006 that opens and closes to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of two special symbols, and a second V prize winning port 2008 that can accept only the game ball B accepted in the role prize winning port 2006. , and a loss opening 2009 for receiving the game ball B which was not received in the second V winning opening 2008 after being received in the accessory winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加

The center accessory 2500 includes an accessory winning opening sensor 2501 that detects the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006, and a first V winning opening that detects the game ball B received in the first V winning opening 2007. A sensor 2502, a second V winning opening sensor 2503 for detecting the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, and a loss opening sensor 2504 for detecting the game ball B received in the losing opening 2009. ing.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped body unit 2510 and a lottery accessory 2550 provided in the lower part of the frame of the body unit 2510 . The main unit 2510 has a prize winning port 2006 and a first V prize winning port 2007 . The lottery accessory 2550 has a second V winning opening 2008 and a losing opening 2009 .

[8-8e-1. main unit]
The main unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail. The main unit 2510 has a prize winning opening 2006 . The main unit 2510 includes a transparent frame-shaped center frame 2511 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), a warp passage 2512 capable of guiding game balls B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame, and A stage 2513 is provided on the lower side of the frame of the center frame 2511 and releases the game ball B that has flowed through the warp passage 2512 into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction.

The center frame 2511 is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 to extend in the front-rear direction. A flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and flows down the game area 5a. An inflow restricting portion 2511c that restricts the game ball B from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511d projecting from the inner circumference of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a. have.

The insertion portion 2511a is provided so that the rear end of the insertion portion 2511a is aligned with the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5 . The front end of the inflow restricting portion 2511c except for the frame-like (annular) lower side portion projects forward beyond the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5 . As a result, in a state assembled on the game board 5, the entry (inflow) of the game ball B from the outside of the center accessory 2500 (center frame 2511) to the inside of the frame is prevented (regulated) by the inflow regulation part 2511c. can be done.

The thickness of the flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511d is formed thinner than the thickness of the panel plate 1110 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the panel plate 1110). The flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511d protrude from the insertion portion 2511a at the same position in the front-rear direction.

A plurality of support portions 2511d are partially provided on the inner periphery of the insertion portion 2511a. The support portion 2511d is also provided at a portion of the insertion portion 2511a where the flange portion 2511b does not protrude, and reinforces the insertion portion 2511a (center frame 2511). In addition, the support portion 2511d has an edge protruding from the insertion portion 2511a formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the insertion portion 2511a or in a straight line so that the support portion 2511d is not conspicuous. The support portion 2511d protrudes from the insertion portion 2511a within a range (1 mm to 10 mm) from the thickness of the support portion 2511d to the thickness of the panel plate 1110, so that the player can It is made to be inconspicuous from.

The warp passage 2512 is open at the left side of the inflow restricting portion 2511c in front view so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. The warp passage 2512 can guide the entering game ball B to the stage 2513 . A part of the warp passage 2512 is formed by the center frame 2511 .

The stage 2513 is attached to the insertion portion 2511 a of the center frame 2511 . The stage 2513 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and is positioned directly above the first start-up port 2003 of the start-up unit 2100, that is, the state in which the center accessory 2500 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. , is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the stage 2513 is assembled on the game board 5 , the raised portion (central release portion 2513 a ) at the center in the left-right direction is located directly above the first starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2003 with a very high probability.

Further, the main unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is provided at the upper right corner of the center frame 2511, and has a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages through which the game balls B can flow. The guide path group 2520 guides the game ball B above the normal winning opening 2002 and the attacker unit 2400 .

As shown in FIG. 102, the group of guide passages 2520 is provided outside the frame of the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511, and includes a first guide passage 2521 whose upper entrance is provided at the blocking portion 1006. , and a second guide passage 2522 whose upper entrance is provided adjacent to the left side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 . The guide path group 2520 (the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522) are both made of a colorless and transparent member, and the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 vertically extends downward from the abutting portion 1006 of the front component 1000 and then bends rightward at right angles. Extends to the left, bends to the left near the height of 3/4 from the bottom of the height of the game area 5a, extends to the left so as to be lower at a loose angle, and the game ball than the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 After bending downward at the position on the left side by one B and extending to the height of the center of the game area 5a, it bends to the right and extends to the vicinity of the right rail 1005, and then bends downward to open the exit downward. It is formed in an open shape.

The first guide passage 2521 is not bent in the front-rear direction, and guides the game ball B downward on substantially the same plane as the front surface of the game panel 1100 . A prize winning opening 2006 is provided at an upper left portion of the first guide passage 2521 . Further, below the exit of the first guide passage 2521, a normal prize winning opening 2002 opens upward.

On the other hand, the second guide passage 2522 is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first guide passage 2521, and the entrance opens upward. The second guide passage 2522 extends substantially straight downward from the entrance at the upper end, and bends backward at a position lower than the height of the portion where the first guide passage 2521 first bends to the right. The leftmost portion of the first guide passage 2521 extending downward in the state of being aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction by bending downward behind the front surface of the panel 1100 and the left-right direction. extends downward so as to generally match, bends downward in a crank shape at the height of the center of the game area 5a, and then bends downward, and to the right of the lower side in the first guide passage 2521 After bending forward at a portion below the extending portion, the portion extending to the lower right side of the first guide passage 2521 in a state in which the front-rear direction is flush with the first guide passage 2521. It bends rightward so as to extend along the lower side, then bends downward so as to be adjacent to the left side of the outlet of the first guide passage 2521, and the outlet is formed into a shape that opens downward. .

In addition, the main unit 2510 is provided in the middle of one passage (here, the first guide passage 2521) of the guide passage group 2520, and the game ball B is provided at the first start port 2003 and the second start port 2004. A role winning opening 2006 in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance, and the game ball B accepted in the role winning opening 2006 A first distribution device 2530 that distributes to the chance opening 2531, a second distribution device 2540 that distributes the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 by the first distribution device 2530 to the first V winning opening 2007, A lottery guide passage 2545 for guiding the game ball B not allocated to the first V winning opening 2007 by the two distribution device 2540 (the game ball B distributed to the second prize opening 2541) to the lottery accessory 2550. ing.

The accessory prize winning opening 2006 in the main unit 2510 (center accessory 2500) is provided in a portion extending leftward on the upper side of the first guide passage 2521. It extends upward and opens upward. The accessory prize-winning door 2515 is formed in a plate-like shape extending to the left and right so that the left end is lowered while extending forward and backward. can be opened and closed. The accessory winning opening door 2515 can close the accessory winning opening 2006 by moving forward. can be formed to guide the game ball B flowing from the upstream side to the exit side of the first guide passage 2521.

The accessory winning opening door 2515 is retracted by the driving of the accessory winning opening solenoid 2516 to open the accessory winning opening 2006, and the game ball B that has flowed through the first guide passage 2521 is pushed through the accessory winning opening 2006. can be accepted by This prize winning port door 2515 closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning solenoid 2516 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the prize winning port 2006 when the prize winning solenoid 2516 is ON (when energized). The prize winning opening 2006 is opened.

The first sorting device 2530 is a chance opening 2531 and a first scarf opening 2532 into which the game ball B received by the role winning opening 2006 and detected by the role winning opening sensor 2501 can enter, and the game ball B A dividing rotator 2533 that has an accommodating portion 2533a that can accommodate only one piece on the outer peripheral surface and is rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and a state in which the accommodating portion 2533a of the distributing rotator 2533 faces rightward. and a first distribution solenoid 2534 (see FIG. 111) for rotating the distribution rotor 2533 between the upward facing state and the state. The distribution rotator 2533 is formed in a truncated cone shape with an outer peripheral surface tapering toward the rear.

The chance opening 2531 of the first sorting device 2530 is provided downstream of the sorting rotor 2533 with respect to the flow of the game balls B, and the game ball accommodated in the accommodation portion 2533a of the sorting rotor 2533. B can enter, and is provided on the right side of the distribution rotor 2533 . The chance opening 2531 is connected to the second sorting device 2540 . The first slot 2532 is provided on the upstream side of the distribution rotor 2533 with respect to the flow of the game ball B, and the game ball B that has not been accommodated in the housing portion 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533 enters. , is provided above the distribution rotor 2533 . The first opening 2532 is open forward and guides the entered game ball B to the rear of the game panel 1100 .

In the first sorting device 2530, when the first sorting solenoid 2534 is OFF (non-energized), the accommodating portion 2533a of the sorting rotor 2533 faces rightward. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2501 and then flows down to the distribution rotor 2533 from above, it hits the outer peripheral surface of the distribution rotor 2533. touch. Since the outer peripheral surface of this distribution rotating body 2533 is formed in a truncated cone shape that narrows backward, the game ball B is guided backward by the inclination of the outer peripheral surface, and enters the first opening 2532. Become.

On the other hand, when the first sorting solenoid 2534 is ON (energized), the sorting rotator 2533 rotates counterclockwise by 90 degrees, and the accommodating portion 2533a faces upward. In this state, when the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the accessory winning opening sensor 2501 and then flows downward to the distribution rotator 2533, only one is received in the receiving portion 2533a. . In a state where the game ball B is housed in the housing part 2533a of the distribution rotor 2533, when the game ball B further flows down from above to the distribution rotor 2533 from the accessory winning opening 2006 side, the game ball B is received. After coming into contact with the game ball B housed in the portion 2533a, it enters the first opening 2532 in the rear. A game ball B that has entered the first opening 2532 is detected by a sensor, passed to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and passed from the back ball guidance unit 3100 to the safe ball of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. It is discharged to the receptacle 600b.

When the game ball B is housed in the housing portion 2533a, the first distribution solenoid 2534 rotates the distribution rotating body 2533 clockwise by 90 degrees, and the housing portion 2533a turns to the right. The game ball B housed in the housing portion 2533 a rolls rightward from the housing portion 2533 a and is received by the chance opening 2531 . The game ball B received in the chance opening 2531 is sent to the next second sorting device 2540 .

Thus, in the first distribution device 2530, the game ball B received in the prize winning port 2006 is placed on either the chance port 2531 side (second distribution device 2540 side) or the first prize port 2532 side. can be divided into

The second distribution device 2540 distributes the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 to either the second scoring opening 2541 or the first V winning opening 2007 . The second sorting device 2540 is provided at a height between the first sorting device 2530 and the exit of the guide passage group 2520 in a front view. The second sorting device 2540 is provided behind the sorting rotor 2533 of the first sorting device 2530 .

The second sorting device 2540 has a second slot which is provided so that the game balls B housed in the storage part 2533a of the sorting rotor 2533 in the first sorting device 2530 and sorted to the chance slots 2531 can enter. 2541 and the first V winning opening 2007, a distribution piece 2543 that can open and close the second opening 2541 by moving forward and backward, and a second distribution solenoid 2544 (Fig. 111) and

The second opening 2541 is open upward at a position on the right side of the distribution rotor 2533, and the game balls B distributed to the chance opening 2531 are supplied from above. The first V winning opening 2007 is provided adjacent to the right side of the second winning opening 2541 and opens upward. The distribution piece 2543 has a flat plate shape that is inclined downward to the right, and protrudes forward to close the upper end opening of the second opening 2541, thereby distributing the game ball B to the second opening 2541. Acceptance can be disabled, and the game ball B in contact with the upper surface can be guided to the right and accepted into the first V winning opening 2007 .

In the second sorting device 2540 , the sorting piece 2543 moves forward to close the second opening 2541 when the second sorting solenoid 2544 is OFF (non-energized). In this state, when the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 flows down, it contacts the upper surface of the distribution piece 2543 and is guided to the right by the inclination of the distribution piece 2543. It is accepted (divided) into the first V winning port 2007. The game ball B distributed to the first V winning hole 2007 is detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2502, and then delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and is sent downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. is discharged to the safe ball receptacle 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600.

On the other hand, when the second distribution solenoid 2544 is ON (energized), the distribution piece 2543 retreats, the second opening 2541 is opened upward, and the game ball B to the second opening 2541 can be accepted. In this state, when the game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 in the first distribution device 2530 flows down, the game ball B passes in front of the retreating distribution piece 2543 and passes through the second opening. 2541 will be accepted (distributed). The game ball B distributed to the second slot 2541 is guided to the left lottery accessory 2550 by the lottery guide passage 2545 .

Thus, in the second sorting device 2540, the game balls B housed in the housing portion 2533a of the sorting rotor 2533 in the first sorting device 2530, that is, the game balls B sorted into the chance openings 2531 are It can be distributed to either the second ska mouth 2541 (lottery accessory 2550) side or the first V winning mouth 2007 side.

A lottery entrance ball sensor 2546 for detecting the circulation of game balls B is provided in the lottery guide passage 2545 . When the game ball B is detected by the lottery accessory ball sensor 2546, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the effect display device 1600, the main body frame speaker 503, the top center speaker, the top side speaker, and the game board 5. , LEDs provided on the door frame 3, etc. are controlled, and an effect is executed to excite the lottery (distribution) of the game balls B in the lottery accessory 2550.例文帳に追加As a result, the game ball B is distributed to the second slot 2541 in the second distribution device 2540, thereby eliminating the player's disappointment and heightening expectations for the lottery accessory 2550.例文帳に追加

[8-8e-2. Lottery accessories]
The lottery prize 2550 in the center prize 2500 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 103 to 106 and the like. The lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is provided in the lower part of the frame of the main unit 2510 formed in a frame shape, and has a second V winning opening 2008 and a losing opening 2009 . This lottery accessory 2550 is supplied with the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 . Specifically, the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 and distributed to the chance opening 2531 by the first distribution device 2530 and further distributed to the second scoring opening 2541 by the second distribution device 2540 is supplied. In addition, the lottery accessory 2550 includes a second V winning opening sensor 2503 that detects the game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008, and a losing opening sensor 2504 that detects the game ball B received in the losing opening 2009. and has.

The lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 is supplied with the game ball B distributed to the second slot 2541 by the second sorting device 2540 and circulated through the lottery guide passage 2545 so that it becomes lower toward the left. An inclined guideway 2551, a distribution unit 2552 that distributes the game ball B that has circulated through the guideway 2551 to either the loop side or the non-loop side (loss port 2009 side), and the distribution unit 2552 to the loop side A hitting unit 2553 capable of hitting the game balls B distributed to the rear, and the game balls B hit backward by the hitting unit 2553 are supplied, and are inclined to be lower forward and upward and downward. A swing gutter 2554 that can reciprocate so as to swing about the axis of the game ball B guided by the swing gutter 2554 rolls and is lowered toward the front guideway 2551 Between the table 2555, which is wide in the front, rear, left, and right directions and is provided with the second V-winning opening 2008 near the downstream end, and the second V-winning opening 2008 and the rocking gutter 2554 on the table 2555 , and has a pair of swinging pieces 2556 that can swing around the axis in the vertical direction.

This lottery accessory 2550 will be described in detail later, but as long as the game ball B is distributed to the loop side by the distribution unit 2552, the game ball B released from the table 2555 provided with the second V winning port 2008 is The game ball B is supplied to the hitting part 2553 and can loop between the hitting part 2553 and the table 2555 .

The guide path 2551 of the lottery accessory 2550 extends from near the rear end to the front end along the right side of the lottery accessory 2550 so that the front is lower, and then along the front side of the lottery accessory 2550 to the vicinity of the left end. It extends so that the left side becomes lower, and is formed in an L shape in a plan view. This guide path 2551 extends with a width slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball B. A game ball B is supplied from a lottery guide passage 2545 to a portion extending in the front-rear direction along the right end side of the guide passage 2551 .

The distribution part 2552 of the lottery accessory 2550 is provided at a part near the downstream end (left end) of the part of the guideway 2551 extending in the horizontal direction. Distributing portion 2552 is provided rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction near the left end of loss opening 2009 that passes through guide path 2551 and opens upward. It is provided with a swing bridge-like distribution bridge 2557 that can open and close the cage loss port 2009 and a lottery loop solenoid 2558 (see FIG. 111) for rotating the distribution bridge 2557 . The guideway 2551 is divided into an upstream side and a downstream side with the failure opening 2009 as a boundary.

The distribution bridge 2557 is formed in a flat plate shape elongated in the left and right direction in a plan view, the left side is supported so as to be rotatable about an axis in the front-rear direction, and the right side is a free end. The distribution bridge 2557 has a loop position (see FIG. 105(a)) in which the right side approaches the right side of the loss opening 2009 and extends in the horizontal direction and falls down (see FIG. 105(a)), and a vertical position with the right side positioned above the left side. and a non-looped position (see FIG. 105(b)) in an upright position.

The distribution bridge 2557 is in a state of a loop position, so that it is in a state of bridging the taxiway 2551 divided into two upstream and downstream sides by the loss port 2009, and passes over the distribution bridge 2557. The game ball B can roll from the upstream side to the downstream side. That is, the distribution bridge 2557 can close the loss opening 2009 and make it impossible to receive the game ball B by being in the state of the loop position. On the other hand, the distributing bridge 2557 is in a non-looping position, so that the loss opening 2009 is opened upward, and the game ball B rolling from the upstream is not passed to the downstream side. can be accepted into Thus, in the distribution section 2552, the distribution bridge 2557 can distribute the game ball B to either the loop side or the non-loop side.

This distribution bridge 2557 is provided with a distribution display portion 2557a formed in a flag shape with an X mark on the side opposite to the rolling surface of the game ball B. As shown in FIG. The distribution display portion 2557a becomes visible from the player side when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the non-loop position in which the loss opening 2009 is opened. This allows the player to recognize that the game ball B cannot go to the hitting portion 2553 on the downstream side (cannot loop).

In addition, the distribution bridge 2557 is provided so that the left end side rotatably supported is to the left of the left end of the downstream end (front end side) of the table 2555 . Therefore, since the game ball B released from the table 2555 to the guideway 2551 side is released to the right side of the distribution bridge 2557 in the non-loop position, the game ball B is released from the table 2555 in the non-loop position. , and does not go to the downstream side of the guideway 2551 that is divided into two (downstream side of the distribution bridge 2557), and is accepted in the open loss port 2009.

The hitting part 2553 of the lottery accessory 2550 is inclined such that the front end is lower than the downstream end of the guide path 2551 and higher toward the rear, and the game balls B distributed to the loop side by the distribution part 2552 are supplied. and a fan-shaped hitting piece 2560 that is provided at the downstream end of the climbing portion 2559 and can hit the game ball B, and the hitting piece 2560 is rotated around the axis perpendicular to the climbing portion 2559. and a single drive motor 2561 (see FIG. 111).

The fan-shaped striking piece 2560 is rotated at a relatively high speed by a striking piece drive motor 2561 . Therefore, the strength with which the game ball B is hit varies depending on the timing when the game ball B reaches the site where the hitting piece 2560 is provided and the timing of the rotational position of the hitting piece 2560 . Therefore, when the game ball B is hit to some extent strongly, it can get over the climbing part 2559 and go to the swing gutter 2554 side behind, and when the hitting is weak, it can not get over the climbing part 2559 and moves forward. will come back. Thereby, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B is strongly hit and goes to the rocking gutter 2554 (table 2555) side, and the player can be entertained. In addition, since the game ball B returns when the hitting by the hitting piece 2560 is weak, it is possible to lengthen the time until the game with the game ball B is confirmed, and to make the player feel that he/she has won. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

In this lottery accessory 2550, the game ball B that has climbed over the climbing part 2559 is supplied between the striking part 2553 and the swing gutter 2554, and the swing path is curved so that the left and right ends are high and the center is low. 2562 and a discharge port 2563 provided in the center of the swing passage 2562 for discharging the game ball B to the swing gutter 2554 . A plurality of unevennesses are provided in the vicinity of both left and right ends of the swing path 2562, and the rolling speed of the game ball B can be damped. The swing path 2562 is provided along the rear edge of the lottery accessory 2550 and behind the table 2555 . The game ball B supplied from the hitting part 2553 to the swing passage 2562 rolls in the left-right direction, and is then discharged from the center discharge port 2563 to the swing gutter 2554 in the same manner as the stage 2513 .

The swinging gutter 2554 of the lottery accessory 2550 is formed in a disc shape and has a gutter-like recessed gutter portion 2554a extending from the center toward the outer periphery. The disk-shaped rocking gutter 2554 has its rotation axis inclined so that the rear side is higher. The lottery accessory 2550 has a gutter rocking driving motor 2564 (see FIG. 111) for reciprocatingly rotating the rocking gutter 2554 within a predetermined angle range. This swinging gutter 2554 is driven by a gutter swinging driving motor 2564 so that the tip of the gutter part 2554a is directed to the second V prize opening 2008 in front, and the tip of the gutter part 2554a is moved in the horizontal direction within a predetermined angle range. Rotate back and forth to face.

The rocking gutter 2554 is provided at the rear end (upper end) of the center in the left-right direction of the table 2555, and the game ball B released from the ejection port 2563 is delivered to the gutter portion 2554a. Since the swinging gutter 2554 reciprocates, the game ball B delivered to the gutter part 2554a is played within a fan-shaped range corresponding to the rotation direction in which the tip of the gutter part 2554a on the table 2555 is facing. Sphere B can be released. At this time, since the swinging gutter 2554 is rotating until the received game ball B rolls on the gutter part 2554a and is released from the tip, the game ball B is given an inertial force by the rotation. will work. Therefore, the game ball B released from the tip of the gutter portion 2554a does not roll straight on the table 2555 in the direction in which the gutter portion 2554a faces, making it difficult to predict the rolling direction.

The table 2555 of the lottery accessory 2550 is inclined so that the front end side is lower, and the length of the front end side, which is the downstream end, in the horizontal direction is shorter than the length of the rear end in the horizontal direction. In addition, the table 2555 is provided with a rocking gutter 2554 at the upper end of the center in the left-right direction, and a second V winning opening 2008 near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction. The table 2555 has a central groove 2555a extending from the rocking gutter 2554 to the second V prize opening 2008 at the center in the left-right direction, and has a recess 2555b that is recessed from the surroundings near the lower end of the center in the left-right direction. are doing. The recessed portion 2555b is recessed in the shape of a pentagonal home base, and the second V winning opening 2008 is provided at the bottom thereof.

Since this table 2555 has a central groove 2555a leading to the second V winning opening 2008 and a concave portion 2555b provided with the second V winning opening 2008 at the bottom, the player can When B enters, it can be made to appear to be accepted in the second V winning opening 2008, and the movement of the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 can be entertained.

The front end side, which is the downstream end of the table 2555, is provided at a position higher than the guideway 2551 in front. Therefore, the game ball B flowing through the guide path 2551 is not supplied onto the table 2555 without going through the striking part 2553 and the rocking gutter 2554 .

The swing pieces 2556 of the lottery accessory 2550 are arranged in a pair symmetrically with respect to the center of the table 2555 in the left-right direction between the swing gutter 2554 and the second V prize opening 2008 on the table 2555. is provided. The rocking piece 2556 is formed in the shape of a drop, and has a circular base end facing forward and a sharp tip facing backward, and is rotatable about the circular base end side. It is

The lottery accessory 2550 has a swinging piece solenoid 2565 for swinging by reciprocally rotating a pair of swinging pieces 2556 about a vertical axis within a predetermined angle range. A pair of swinging pieces 2556 are provided so as to rotate in opposite directions by one swinging piece solenoid 2565 .

Since the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are rotated by the swinging piece solenoid 2565, the rotation speed is faster than when they are rotated by the drive motor. Therefore, when the game ball B comes into contact with the swing piece 2556 while the swing piece 2556 is swinging and moving, the game ball B can be strongly bounced. Therefore, depending on the rotating direction of the swinging piece 2556, the game ball B in contact with the table 2555 can be sent to the center side in the left-right direction or sent to both sides in the left-right direction, thereby changing the flow of the game ball B. can be granted.

When the sharp tips of the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are close to each other, the distance between the swinging pieces 2556 becomes narrower, and the rearward-facing surface portions of the swinging pieces 2556 move forward. , and the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are narrowed rearward. As a result, when the game ball B flowing down from the back of the rocking gutter 2554 or the table 2555 passes between the pair of rocking pieces 2556, the possibility of being accepted into the second V winning opening 2008 increases, and the pair of When the rocking piece 2556 comes into contact with the rear facing surface, the inclination of the rocking piece 2556 guides the ball away from the center in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, in a state in which the pointed tips of the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are receding from each other (the state indicated by the dashed lines in FIG. 106), the rearward-facing surface portions of the swinging pieces 2556 move left and right toward the front. It is inclined so as to approach the center of the direction, and the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are spread rearward. As a result, when the game ball B flowing down from the back of the rocking gutter 2554 or the table 2555 comes into contact with the surface portion of the pair of rocking pieces 2556 facing backward, it is guided to the center in the left-right direction by the inclination of the pair of rocking pieces 2556. There is a possibility of being accepted in the 2V winning slot 2008.

Therefore, in a state in which the pair of swinging pieces 2556 are widened rearward, the game ball B in contact with the swinging pieces 2556 is guided to the center in the left-right direction, so that the pair of swinging pieces 2556 move backward. Compared to the narrowed state, the possibility that the game ball B flowing down from the rear will be accepted by the second V winning opening 2008 is high. In other words, depending on the state of the pair of swinging pieces 2556, the acceptance probability of the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008 can be changed.

The lottery accessory 2550 of this embodiment has a transparent cover 2566 that covers the whole from above (see FIGS. 96 to 98, etc.). With this cover 2566, the game ball B supplied through the lottery guide passage 2545 can be prevented from jumping out of the lottery accessory 2550, and the game ball B from outside other than the lottery guide passage 2545 can be prevented. can be prevented from being supplied (intruded).

Next, the flow of the game ball B in the lottery accessory 2550 will be explained. In the lottery accessory 2550, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result (for example, "per role") drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004. Accordingly, one of the game balls B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 that opens and closes in a predetermined pattern is supplied near the upstream of the guide path 2551 through the lottery guide passage 2545 . The game ball B supplied near the upstream of the guideway 2551 rolls toward the distribution part 2552 on the left side according to the inclination of the guideway 2551 .

In the distribution section 2552, the distribution bridge 2557 collapses for a predetermined time and is in a state of a loop position, and the game ball B rolling from the upstream side passes through the distribution bridge 2557 to the downstream side. It rolls to the striking part 2553 . Then, the game ball B supplied to the hitting portion 2553 is hit backward by the rotating hitting piece 2560, and rolls so as to climb the climbing portion 2559 extending backward.

At this time, since the striking piece 2560 is fan-shaped and rotates at a relatively high speed, depending on the timing at which the game ball B abuts against the rotational position of the striking piece 2560, the game ball B may be hit strongly. The game ball B comes into contact with the game ball B in a graze-like manner, and the force of the game ball B hit backward varies. Therefore, if the hitting by the hitting piece 2560 is weak, it cannot climb the uphill part 2559 which is higher in the rear, and it returns up the uphill part 2559, and the game ball B goes back and forth on the uphill part 2559. Sometimes.

When the game ball B hit by the hitting piece 2560 climbs over the climbing part 2559, it enters the swing passage 2562 provided in the rear, and moves in the left-right direction through the swing passage 2562 whose center in the left-right direction is low. It will roll. At this time, since a plurality of irregularities are provided near the left and right ends of the swing path 2562, the game ball B passing through the irregularities causes the impact of the irregularities to attenuate the rolling speed. As a result, the momentum of the game ball B that has been hit by the hitting piece 2560 and climbs over the climbing portion 2559 can be reduced.

The game ball B that rolls in the swing path 2562 so as to swing in the horizontal direction is finally discharged onto the table 2555 through the swing gutter 2554 from the outlet 2563 provided in the center. At this time, the swing gutter 2554 is swung and rotated by the gutter swing drive motor 2564 so as to reciprocate within a predetermined angle range, so that the game ball B is released from the outlet 2563 to the swing gutter 2554. The game ball B is released in various directions from the swing gutter 2554 depending on the timing of the movement and the timing of the rotation position of the swing gutter 2554 .

The game ball B released from the rocking gutter 2554 to the table 2555 rolls forward according to the inclination of the table 2555 and is released to the guideway 2551 from the front edge. At this time, since a pair of rocking pieces 2556 are rocked in the vicinity of the center of the table 2555 in the front-rear direction, the game ball B in contact with the rocking pieces 2556 is moved. It can be flipped to change the rolling direction. In addition, since the second V winning opening 2008 is provided near the front end of the table 2555 at the center in the left-right direction, the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 can be received in the second V winning opening 2008. be.

The game ball B received in the second V winning opening 2008 is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2503, and after being delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the ball is sent to the lower circulating ball path. It is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the unit 600. When the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008, a "jackpot game" is executed as an advantageous game state in which the big winning opening 2005 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the game ball B is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B is accepted into the second V winning port 2008, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

The game ball B released from the front edge of the table 2555 to the guideway 2551 is within the predetermined time, and the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 is in the state of the loop position. to the striking portion 2553. Therefore, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, the game ball B can loop between the striking part 2553 and the table 2555 any number of times unless the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008. can. In other words, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, the opportunity to receive the game ball B into the second V winning opening 2008 will come again and again. Thereby, even if the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 is not accepted in the second V winning opening 2008, it can be received in the second V winning opening 2008 by passing through the distribution bridge 2557 at the loop position. Since the opportunity to become will come again, the player can continue to be entertained.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 changes from the loop position to the raised non-loop position, and the failure opening 2009 closed by the distribution bridge 2557 is opened upward. be. In this state, the game ball B released from the front end side of the table 2555 or the game ball B rolling on the guide path 2551 is accepted in the loss opening 2009, and the game ball B does not loop and the lottery is performed. The lottery at object 2550 ends. At this time, an upright distribution bridge 2557 raises a distribution display section 2557a imitating a flag with an X mark to make it visible. It can be made to recognize that it does not loop.

The game ball B received in the loss opening 2009 is detected by the loss opening sensor 2504, and after being delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the safe ball receiver of the circulation ball path unit 600 below. It is discharged to port 600b.

As described above, according to the lottery accessory 2550 of the present embodiment, the game ball B supplied from the accessory winning opening 2006 is received in the second V winning opening 2008, making the player nervous and excited. can be used to entertain players. Also, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the second V winning port 2008, when the distribution bridge 2557 of the distribution section 2552 is in the loop position, the game ball B is again sent through the hitting section 2553 to the second V Since it is sent to the swing gutter 2554 located upstream of the prize winning opening 2008 and looped, it is given an opportunity to be accepted into the second V prize winning opening 2008 again, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation again. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

[8-8f. Ordinary winning entrance unit]
Next, the normal winning slot unit 2600 in the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The normal winning opening unit 2600 has a normal winning opening 2002, and is provided near the left end in the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. This normal prize winning port unit 2600 is provided between the attacker unit 2400 and the guide passage group 2520 in the center accessory 2500, and is provided so that the normal prize winning port 2002 is positioned directly below the exit of the first guide passage 2521. It is

The normal winning opening 2002 of the normal winning opening unit 2600 is always open upward to receive the game ball B. The game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and then transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the normal winning hole sensor 3002, and downward. is discharged to the safe ball receptacle 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600.

[8-9. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 102 and the like. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. Although not shown, in the game area 5a, in the left and right outer parts and lower parts of the center role 2500, and in the part between the attacker unit 2400 and the guide passage group 2520 in the center role 2500, A plurality of obstruction nails are installed in a predetermined gauge array. In addition, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

On the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails are installed between the inner rail 1002 and the inner rail 1002 in a predetermined gauge arrangement. On the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, the entrance of the warp passage 2512 opens slightly upward from the left at a portion below the vertical center of the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511. there is A windmill is provided between the warp passage 2512 and the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 .

A game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp passage 2512 with a certain probability. The game ball B that has entered the warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2513 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls on the stage 2513 in the left-right direction, and is ejected from the central release portion 2513a or the side release portion 2513b. It is discharged so as to flow back into the game area 5a from either. Since the center release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2003 in the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the center release portion 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first It is received in the starting port 2003 . The game ball B released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a is received in the first starting port 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the first starting port sensor 2101 of the starting port unit 2100, and is guided to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is delivered and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100 . When the game ball B is detected by the first start sensor 2101, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are added to the number of balls held, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the first In a state where the reserved number of special symbols is less than 4), a lottery for the first special symbol is executed which enables the occurrence of an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, the lottery 1st special design is also called a 1st special lottery result.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2003 is received in the out port 2020 and discharged out of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 2020 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and after being transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the circulating ball path unit below the back ball guiding unit 3100. 600 is discharged to the out ball socket 600a.

A game ball B that is hit to the left outside of the center role 2500 and does not enter the warp passage 2512 has a high probability of moving along the lower side of the center role 2500 when it circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill. It flows down to the right so as to follow a plurality of obstacle nails arranged diagonally. A game ball B that circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill may be received by the first starting opening 2003 or the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 . Also, the game ball B that has circulated on the right side of the center of the windmill may be received by the sub-out port 2021 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B that has not been received by the first starting port 2003, the general prize winning port 2001, and the sub-out port 2021 is received by the out port 2020 and discharged out of the game area 5a.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and downward. is discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of adding a predetermined number to the number of balls in possession is given.

On the other hand, when the water flows leftward from the center of the windmill, it flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down the shelf 2301 to the right. A game ball B that circulates on the left side of the center of the windmill may be received by the general prize winning opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then transferred to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guide unit 3100. - 特許庁The game ball B that has not been received by the general winning opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 is received by the out opening 2020 and discharged out of the game area 5a.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a guide passage group 2520, a role winning opening 2006, a normal winning opening 2002, a second start opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a sub-out opening 2021 are provided in this order from the top. It is A plurality of obstacle nails are implanted between the guide passage group 2520 and the second starting port 2004, respectively.

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the strength with which the game ball B enters above the portion that is lowered toward the right from the vicinity of the center in the horizontal direction on the upper side of the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511 in the center accessory 2500 When the game ball B is hit with , the game ball B circulates through either the first guide passage 2521 or the second guide passage 2522 of the guide passage group 2520 .

More specifically, the game ball B is struck with a strength that makes contact with the impinging portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B in contact with the impingement portion 1006 enters the first guide passage 2521 . The game ball B that has entered the first guide path 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the prize winning opening door 2515 that closes the prize winning opening 2006 in the middle of the first guiding path 2521, and then the guide path group. 2520 is discharged from the right exit of the lower end to the lower normal winning a prize unit 2600 side.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center accessory 2500 enters the entrance of the second guide passage 2522 and circulates, it is twisted backward and aligned with the first guide passage 2521 in the front-rear direction, and then forward. It is twisted and released from the exit on the left side of the exit of the first guide passage 2521 to the normal winning opening unit 2600 side below.

Since the normal winning opening 2002 of the normal winning opening unit 2600 is provided directly under the exit of the first guide passage 2521, the game ball B that has circulated through the first guidance passage 2521 circulates through the second guidance passage 2522. There is a higher possibility of being accepted into the normal winning opening 2002 than the game ball B that has been played.

The game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the normal winning hole sensor 3002, and downwardly. is discharged to the safe ball receptacle 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600. When the game ball B is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 3002, a privilege to add a predetermined number of balls to the number of possession is given, and a state in which predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the number of reserved symbols in the normal pattern is less than 4) state), a normal symbol lottery that enables acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is executed. In addition, the normally drawn pattern is also called a normal lottery result.

A game ball B that is hit right into the game area 5a and circulated through the guide passage group 2520 and then not accepted in the normal winning opening 2002 flows down onto the attacker unit 2400 while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails. Then, when the game ball B flows down to the upper shelf portion 2421 of the attacker unit 2400, it is guided leftward and downward according to the inclination of the upper shelf portion 2421, and there is no opportunity to be accepted by the second start opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005, and the attacker unit 2400 is discharged to the left. In addition, since the downstream end (left end) of the upper shelf portion 2421 of the attacker unit 2400 is positioned above the first starting port 2003, the game ball B that has flowed through the upper shelf portion 2421 is received by the first starting port 2003. there is a possibility.

On the other hand, when the game ball B flows down to the first shelf portion 2422 of the attacker unit 2400, it rolls leftward due to its inclination, and rolls on the upper surface of the second starting door 2411 and the second shelf portion 2423. , and is discharged leftward from the left end of the second shelf portion 2423 . Then, the game ball B released to the left from the second shelf 2423 falls on the third shelf 2424 or the big winning entrance door 2413 according to its momentum, and rolls leftward due to their inclination. Then, after rolling on the fourth shelf portion 2425 from the big winning opening door 2413 , it is discharged to the left outside the attacker unit 2400 from the fourth shelf portion 2425 . A game ball B released from the fourth shelf 2425 is received in the out port 2020 .

Furthermore, if the game ball B does not flow down to either the upper shelf 2421 or the first shelf 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 and falls to the right of the first shelf 2422 , it is received in the sub-out port 2021 . Also, even when the game ball B falls onto the first shelf 2422, it is received by the sub-out port 2021 when it enters the gap between the second shelf 2423 and the third shelf 2424.例文帳に追加The game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 without being returned to the game area 5a, and is sent to the out ball receiving port 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. Ejected.

When the game ball B flows down to the first shelf portion 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 , the game ball B rolls on the second starting door 2411 . Therefore, by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002, "ordinary winning" is drawn as a normal pattern (normal lottery result), and the second starting opening door 2411 is retreated by the starting opening solenoid 2412 and the second starting opening. When the game ball B flows (rolls) from the side of the first shelf 2422 at the timing when 2004 is open, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 .

After being detected by the second starting port sensor 2401, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. is discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2401, a privilege to add a predetermined number of balls is given, and a state in which predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the number of pending special symbols is less than 4), a lottery for the second special symbol that enables the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is executed. In addition, the drawn second special pattern is also referred to as a second special drawing result.

In addition, the game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 and rolled on the second starting door 2411 and the second shelf 2423 rolls on the big winning door 2413 . Therefore, the first special symbol (first special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2003, the second special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 (Second special lottery result), depending on (for example, when the lottery special symbol (special lottery result) is "big hit", "middle hit", "small hit", etc.), the attacker solenoid 2414 When the game ball B circulates (rolls) from the second shelf part 2423 side at the timing when the winning opening door 2413 is retreated and the big winning opening 2005 is open, the game ball B moves to the big winning opening 2005. accepted by

The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by one of the two big winning hole sensors 2402 provided below, and is then guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 to be the back ball of the back unit 3000. After being delivered to the guide unit 3100, it is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600 below. When the game ball B is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2402, a privilege of adding a predetermined number to the number of possessed balls is given.

By the way, when the game ball B is accepted in the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 and "per character" is drawn as the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the middle of the first guide passage 2521 The provided accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and the distribution rotator 2533 of the first distribution device 2530 and the distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540 operate in a predetermined pattern. Therefore, when the "accessory win" is drawn, the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes. "Right shot" can be performed so that the game ball B flows through the first guide passage 2521 provided with the winning opening 2006.例文帳に追加

In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the lottery is higher than that of the "jackpot". Three patterns of winning a prize are set, and in each of the patterns, the prize winning opening 2006 is roughly divided and opens and closes twice.

First, the opening and closing of the prize winning opening 2006 for each "winning prize" will be described in detail. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has passed from the start of execution of the "first prize winning", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short period of time (80 ms) and then closed for a short period of time (1252 ms). After that, it is opened again for a short period of time (80 ms) and then closed to complete the operation. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has passed from the start of the execution of the "second prize winning", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short time (80 ms), and then closed. After a longer time (5420 ms) has passed, the switch is opened for a long time (9414 ms) and then closed to complete the operation. After a certain period of time (3000 ms) has elapsed from the start of execution of the "third prize winning", the prize winning port 2006 is opened for a short period of time (80 ms), and then closed. After a longer time (19366 ms) has passed, the switch is opened for a long time (9404 ms) and then closed to complete the operation.

The second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "first winning prize" is started after the time when the "first winning prize" is completed from the start of execution. In addition, the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "third prize winning" is started after the time when the "second prize winning" is completed from the start of execution.

It should be noted that, in the second long-time open state in the "second winning prize" and the "third winning prize", eight open states (80 ms) are repeated at regular intervals (1252 ms). In other words, the prize winning port 2006 opens and closes (opens) twice for the "first winning prize" and nine times for the "second winning prize" and the "third winning prize".

Next, the operation of the sorting rotator 2533 of the first sorting device 2530 in the "handle hit" is rotated counterclockwise at the same time as the start of execution, and the accommodating part 2533a is turned upward for a predetermined time (3020 ms). After entering the first storable state, and then turning clockwise to turn the storable part 2533a to the right and becoming the non-storable state, after a predetermined time (4560 ms) has passed, a time longer than the first time (13446 ms) 2 . After entering the unaccommodable state for a short period of time (500 ms), it enters the unaccommodable state for the third time (13446 ms) for the same time as the second time, and then enters the unaccommodable state.

The distribution rotator 2533 is in a non-accommodable state when the first storable state ends in the middle of the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the ``winning prize''. Also, the distribution rotator 2533 will be in the second accommodable state after the time from the start of the execution to the completion of the "first award winning". Therefore, at the time of the "first award", the control of the distribution rotator 2533 ends before the second accommodative state is reached, and the second and third accommodative states are not executed. This distribution rotating body 2533 starts the second accommodating state before the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "second prize win", and the second open state is closed. After entering the state, it becomes uncontainable.

Also, the distribution rotator 2533 will be in the third accommodable state after the time from the start of the execution to the completion of the "second award winning". Therefore, at the time of the "second award winning", the control of the distribution rotator 2533 ends before the third accommodable state is reached, and the third accommodable state is not executed. In other words, the distribution rotator 2533 is put into a state of being able to be accommodated once in the case of "winning the first prize", twice in the case of winning the "second prize", and three times in the case of "winning the third prize". Become. This distribution rotor 2533 starts the third accommodating state before the second open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "third prize win", and the second open state ends. After being in a closed state, it will be in an unaccommodable state.

Next, the action of the sorting piece 2543 of the second sorting device 2540 in the "handle hit" is the first closed state in which the second slot 2541 is closed for a predetermined time (3020 ms) by protruding forward at the same time as the start of execution. (a state that can be distributed to the first V winning opening 2007), and then retreats and the second ska mouth 2541 is in an open state (a state that can be distributed to the lottery accessory 2550) for a predetermined time ( 23006 ms), the second closed state is set for a longer time (13446 ms) than the first open state, and then the open state is established.

The first closed state of the sorting piece 2543 ends in the middle of the first open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "winning prize" and becomes an open state. Further, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closed state of the sorting piece 2543 is started in the middle of the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "third prize winning". After the second open state of the port 2006 becomes the closed state, the distribution piece 2543 changes from the closed state to the open state. Therefore, in the second sorting device 2540, the second closed state of the sorting piece 2543 is executed only when "winning the third prize" and "winning the first prize" or "winning the second prize". , the second closing state of the distributing piece 2543 is not executed.

For this reason, in the "first winning prize", the opening and closing of the prize winning port 2006 is executed twice in a short period of time. The possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 is low. In addition, since the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "second winning prize" and the "third winning prize" is also for a short time, the game ball B is accepted by the prize winning opening 2006. Unlikely. In addition, the time when the first accommodating state of the distribution rotating body 2533 in the first distribution device 2530 overlaps with the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "winning prize" is the prize winning. Since it is shorter than the opening time of the opening 2006 for the first time, the game ball B received in the prize winning opening 2006 is stored in the distribution rotator 2533 when the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time. It is even less likely to be accommodated in portion 2533a. Since the time at which the first storable state of the sorting rotor 2533 and the first closed state of the sorting piece 2543 in the second sorting device 2540 are completed is the same, the sorting rotator 2533 The game ball B housed in the housing portion 2533a is not sorted to the first V winning opening 2007 side at the time of the first housing possible state.

On the other hand, the second open state of the prize winning port 2006 in the "second prize win" and the "third prize win" takes a long time. There is a high possibility that it will be accepted in the prize winning slot 2006 . At this time, after the distribution rotating body 2533 of the first distribution device 2530 is in a state that can be accommodated before the prize winning port 2006 is opened, the prize winning port 2006 is changed from the open state to the closed state. Since it will be in an unacceptable state after it becomes, there is a high possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 in the second open state will be accommodated in the accommodation portion 2533a of the distribution rotator 2533. .

Thus, in this example, the possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the prize winning opening 2006 in the first open state of the prize winning opening 2006 in the "second winning prize" and the "third winning prize" is In addition to being low, when the accessory winning opening 2006 is opened for the first time, the possibility that the game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is accommodated in the accommodating portion 2533a of the distribution rotator 2533 is low. In spite of the fact that it is lower, at the same time as the performance of the per-accessory game state is started, the distribution rotating body 2533 is rotated counterclockwise to make the accommodating portion 2533a upwardly storable, and is accommodated for a predetermined period (3020 ms). After the portion 2533a is directed upward, it is rotated clockwise to turn the accommodating portion 2533a rightward, thereby making it impossible to accommodate. That is, immediately after the start of the per-accessory game state, the distribution rotor 2533 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side, but the distribution rotor 2533 distributes the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side. The sorting operation is executed to show the sorting operation by the sorting rotator 2533 in advance.

Similarly, although it is unlikely that the distribution rotator 2533 distributes the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side immediately after the start of the per-accessory game state, the second distribution is performed simultaneously with the start of execution of the per-accessory game state. By protruding forward the sorting piece 2543 of the device 2540 to close the second opening 2541, it is possible to distribute to the first V winning opening 2007, and after a predetermined time (3020 ms) has passed, it retreats to the second opening. By opening 2541, it is set to a state in which it is distributed to the lottery accessory 2550.例文帳に追加That is, immediately after the start of the per-accessory game state, the distribution piece 2543 is unlikely to distribute the game ball B to the first V winning port 2007 side, but the distribution piece 2543 causes the game ball B to win the first V prize. The sorting operation by the sorting piece 2543 is shown in advance by executing the sorting operation to the port 2007 side.

In this example, the distribution rotator 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 are operated at the same time as the execution of the role-winning game state is started, that is, the performance at the start of the role-winning game state (the opening performance of the role-winning game state, for example, " Aim for the prize winning opening 2006”, etc.), and after the action of the distribution rotator 2533 and the distribution piece 2543, the prize is won. The mouth 2006 is opened for the first time. This reduces the possibility of allocating the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side by the allocation rotator 2533 and allocating the game ball B to the second chance opening 2541 side by the allocation piece 2543. . In addition, there is no or unlimited possibility of allocating the game ball B to the chance opening 2531 side by the allocation rotator 2533 and allocating the game ball B to the second chance opening 2541 side by the allocation piece 2543. If it is low, the prize winning port 2006 may be opened for the first time at the same time when the distribution rotator 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 are operated.

Alternatively, only one of the distribution rotor 2533 and the distribution piece 2543 may be operated in advance, and the other may not be operated in advance. That is, some of the movable parts (distribution rotator 2533, distribution piece 2543) for distributing the game ball B that has won the prize winning opening 2006 are operated in advance to show the distribution operation. , other movable parts may be disabled in advance. For example, the sorting piece 2543 that is highly likely to cause the game ball B to enter the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007) by operating (high V winning expectation) is not operated in advance. Only about the distribution rotator 2533 which is less likely to enter the game ball B into the V winning opening (in this example, the second V winning opening 2008) than the distribution piece 2543 (V winning expectation is low) You can make it work. As a result, although some of the distribution destinations of the game balls B that have won the prize winning opening 2006 can be known in advance, the other distribution destinations can be kept unknown, and the other distribution destinations are clear. When the ball becomes , the number of destinations to be distributed increases, thereby surprising the player and increasing the expectation, and making the player pay attention to the game ball B to be distributed to enjoy its movement, thereby preventing the decline in the interest in the game.例文帳に追加can be suppressed.

In addition, the existence of the movable part (sorting piece 2543), which is highly expected to win the V prize, is hidden by not operating in advance. When the "third winning prize" is executed, the movable part (distribution piece 2543) having a high degree of expectation of V winning is operated to enter the game ball B into the V winning opening (in this example, the first V winning opening 2007). The game ball B enters an unexpected allocation destination, thereby improving the game amusement. In addition, the distribution to the first V winning prize opening 2007 side is hidden as a distribution destination, and it is possible to make the player think that there are only two, the first prize opening 2532 side and the lottery prize winning prize 2550 side, and the "third prize winning prize". A player is not discouraged even if a ``second prize win'' with a lower V winning expectation is executed and a game ball B is distributed to the side of the lottery prize 2550.例文帳に追加

In addition, in this example, the distribution rotator 2533 is arranged in a manner that the player can easily see it, while the distribution piece 2543 is formed in a flat plate shape that moves forward and backward on the game board 5, and the area on the front side is is narrow, it is difficult to notice the movement even if it is moving. As a result, it is difficult for the player to notice the passage on the side of the first V prize winning opening 2007 that can be entered by the sorting piece 2543 protruding forward. Therefore, when the game ball B enters the first V prize opening 2007 by operating the sorting piece 2543 when the "third prize hit" occurs, it becomes difficult to notice the behavior of the game ball B. It is possible to give the player a feeling as if a V prize had suddenly occurred and a 15R jackpot had been executed without making him aware that B had entered the first V prize opening 2007.例文帳に追加

In addition, by operating the distribution rotor 2533 in advance during the opening performance of the game state with the prize, the contents of the instruction in the opening performance, for example, "Aim for the prize winning opening 2006" can be added to the distribution rotor. The action of 2533 also makes it possible for the player to easily recognize the target to be hit, that is, the position to be aimed at during the state of the winning game.

As described above, when the "accessory prize winning" is drawn, the game ball B flowing down the first guide passage 2521 is accepted by the accessory winning opening 2006 when the accessory winning opening 2006 is in an open state. When it is detected, it is sent to the first sorting device 2530 after being detected by the prize winning slot sensor 2501 . When the game ball B is detected by the accessory winning hole sensor 2501, a privilege such as adding a predetermined number to the number of balls in possession is given.

In the "second winning prize" among the "winning winning prizes", when the prize winning opening 2006 is opened for the second time, the sorting piece 2543 of the second sorting device 2540 is open. When the minute rotating body 2533 rotates from the storable state to the unstorable state, the game ball B stored in the storage portion 2533a flows down to the second sorting device 2540 side through the chance opening 2531, and the second skating. After passing through the lottery guide passage 2545 from the mouth 2541 and being detected by the lottery accessory ball entry sensor 2546 , it is sent to the lottery accessory 2550 .

In the lottery accessory 2550, the distribution bridge 2557 in the non-loop position is in the loop position. For example, the distribution bridge 2557 is placed in the loop position in response to the opening of the second opening 2541 due to the retraction of the distribution piece 2543 in the second distribution device 2540 . Then, the game ball B sent from the second distribution device 2540 to the lottery accessory 2550 rolls leftward on the guide path 2551 and is sent to the hitting part 2553 through the distribution bridge 2557 at the loop position. Then, the game ball B sent to the hitting part 2553 is hit by the hitting piece 2560 rotating at high speed, and is supplied to the swing gutter 2554 provided at the rear end of the center of the table 2555. It will be released onto the table 2555 .

The game ball B released onto the table 2555 rolls forward due to its inclination, and is received in the second V winning opening 2008 provided at the center front end of the table 2555, or from the front end side of the table 2555. Either it is released forward (guideway 2551) or it moves. When the game ball B is released forward from the front end side of the table 2555, if the distribution bridge 2557 is still in the loop position, the game ball B is supplied to the hitting part 2553 through the distribution bridge 2557. It will happen. Therefore, when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the loop position, until the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008, the game ball B is placed on the hitting part 2553, the swing gutter 2554, the table 2555, and the guide path 2551. loop so as to circulate in the order of

Then, the acceptance of the game ball B to the second V winning opening 2008, or the acceptance of the game ball B to the loss opening 2009 which is opened when the distribution bridge 2557 is in the non-loop position after the lapse of a predetermined time. , the lottery for the V prize in the lottery accessory 2550 ends.

The game ball B received in the second V winning hole 2008 is detected by the second V winning hole sensor 2503, and then passes through the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to the safe of the circulation ball path unit 600 below. It is discharged to the ball socket 600b. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the losing hole 2009 is detected by the losing hole sensor 2504, passes through the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and passes through the safe ball receiving hole 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the second V winning opening sensor 2503, the privilege of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

By the way, in the "third prize win", when the prize winning port 2006 is opened for the second time, the distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540 is closed, so the distribution rotor 2533 is accommodated. When it rotates from the possible state to the unacceptable state, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2533a passes through the chance opening 2531 and contacts the upper surface of the closed distribution piece 2543 of the second distribution device 2540. It is guided to the right and enters (accepted) the first V winning opening 2007 . After being detected by the first V winning hole sensor 2502, the game ball B that has entered the first V winning hole 2007 passes through the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to the safe ball receiver of the circulating ball path unit 600 below. It is discharged to port 600b. When the game ball B is detected by the first V winning opening sensor 2502, a privilege of opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 in a predetermined pattern is given.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in which the advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous is generated by opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006, the first start While the opening 2003 is always open to accept the game ball B, the second starting opening 2004 is selected by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002, and the ordinary lottery is "ordinary winning". Only the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined pattern. As a result, the first starting port 2003 is more likely to accept the game ball B than the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加

For this reason, in a normal state, the game ball B flows down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the first start port 2003. The driving operation of B can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 by the game ball B can be enjoyed, and the first start-up can be performed. It is possible to heighten expectations for receiving the game ball B into the mouth 2003 .

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2003, the lottery result of the first special symbol is "hit" (for example, "small hit", "middle hit", "big hit", "special hit"). , etc.) is drawn, the large winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern. It is possible to enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B aimed at the right side of the object 2500 (so-called "right hitting"), and the expectation for the acceptance of the game ball B into the big winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006. can be raised.

A guide passage group 2520 consisting of a first guide passage 2521 and a second guide passage 2522 is provided on the right side of the center role 2500 when hitting the game ball B to the right side of the center role 2500. Therefore, it is possible to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B circulates in a desired flow path. You can enjoy the operation.

In addition, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a normal winning opening 2002 is provided, and when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004 can receive the normal lottery lottery. Therefore, the player can be entertained by whether or not the game ball B hit on the right side passes through the normal winning opening 2002, and when the second starting opening 2004 becomes acceptable, the second starting opening The player can also be entertained by whether or not game ball B is accepted at 2004 . At this time, since the normal prize winning port 2002 is provided directly below the exit of the first guide path 2521 in the guide path group 2520, the user can enjoy the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the first guide path 2521.例文帳に追加can be done.

Furthermore, in the accessory winning opening 2006, one game ball B accepted and sorted by the first distribution device 2530 is sent to either the first V winning opening 2007 or the second scoring opening 2541 in the second distribution device 2540 Since the game ball B is distributed to the first V winning port 2007 or not, the player can feel nervous and excited. And even if the game ball B is distributed to the second slot 2541 in the second distribution device 2540, the game ball B is a lottery accessory provided conspicuously in the lower center of the center accessory 2500. 2550 , the lottery accessory 2550 can make the player expect to receive the game ball B into the second V winning hole 2008 . After that, depending on whether or not the game ball B rolling on the table 2555 of the lottery accessory 2550 is accepted by the second V winning port 2008, the player can be excited again, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline of interest.

Then, when the game ball B is accepted in the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, or when the game ball B is received in the first starting opening 2003 and the second starting opening 2004, the first special When a "big win" is drawn as a pattern and a second special pattern, the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, and an opportunity to add a large number of game balls B to the number of possessed balls comes. Therefore, it is possible to drive the game ball B aiming at the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received in the open/closed big winning hole 2005, and amuse the player. can be suppressed.

[8-10. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101 and the like. The back unit 3000 includes a vibration sensor 1040 (see FIG. 111) for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), and a game ball received in the general prize winning opening 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. A normal winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting B and a normal winning hole sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received by the normal winning hole 2002 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 are provided. The general winning hole sensor 3001 and the normal winning hole sensor 3002 are provided in the back ball induction unit 3100 .

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is open at the front. It has a lock slider 3020 which is slidable in the left-right direction for attaching and detaching the performance display device 1600, and a back substrate unit 3040 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 so as to be hinge-rotatable.

The back board unit 3040 includes a box-shaped board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and is thin in the front and back, and a panel relay board and effect drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have. The board box 3041 has two shafts 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer sides of the vertically extending L-shaped portion. Further, the circuit board box 3041 has locking claws 3041b that are locked to the locking portions 3010g of the back box 3010 at the ends of the L-shaped portions extending to the left and right.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 flows, and the back ball in the back box 3010. A back decoration unit 3200 provided behind the induction unit 3100, a back front effect unit 3300 provided to the left and above the back ball induction unit 3100 near the front end in the back box 3010, and and a rear back effect unit 3400 provided behind the back front effect unit 3300. - 特許庁

The back ball guide unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the back decoration unit 3200 . The back decoration unit 3200 is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 via an attachment supporter (not shown). The back front effect unit 3300 has its left end attached near the front end of the back box 3010 and its right end attached to the right front surface of the back rear effect unit 3400 . The rear rear effect unit 3400 has its upper portion attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the rear box 3010 via an attachment supporter (not shown), and its lower portion attached to the rear decoration unit 3200 .

The back decoration unit 3200, the back front effect unit 3300, and the back back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 can show predetermined movable effects and light emitting effects to the player according to the progress of the game.

[8-10a. back box]
Next, the back case 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), and the effect unit is attached to the inside of the box shape, and the effect display device 1600 and the back board unit 3040 are attached to the rear surface. is. The back box 3010 is formed transparent. As a result, the inside can be visually recognized from the outside even when assembled on the game board 5.例文帳に追加

The back box 3010 has a box-like shape with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, and a mounting surface 3010b provided at the lower side of the opening 3010a on which the effect display device 1600 is mounted. , two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and a lock slider 3020 provided below the center of the mounting surface 3010b in the left-right direction. and a lock mechanism portion 3010d slidably attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size in the left-right direction as the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. In addition, the opening 3010a is provided at a position that is vertically offset (eccentric) with respect to the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as the liquid crystal spacer 1610 (19-inch liquid crystal display device).

Upper fixing pieces 1611 of a liquid crystal spacer 1610 to which the effect display device 1600 is attached are inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. In addition, the lower fixing piece 1612 of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 to which the effect display device 1600 is attached can be inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010 from behind while the lock slider 3020 is slid leftward in a rear view. can be done. With the lower fixing piece 1612 of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 inserted into the locking mechanism portion 3010d, when the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in rear view, the lock slider 3020 prevents the lower fixing piece 1612 from moving rearward. The liquid crystal spacer 1610 (effect display device 1600) can be attached by

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG.

Further, the back box 3010 has a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 rotatably around the axis extending in the vertical direction on the rear surface, and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f. is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and has an engaging portion 3010g to which the engaging claw 3041b of the rear substrate unit 3040 is engaged.

The back box 3010 can mount the back substrate unit 3040 on the rear side across the opening 3010a (liquid crystal spacer 1610 and effect display device 1600) by means of a pair of shaft support portions 3010f and locking portions 3010g. When assembled to the game board 5, the vertically extending L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 is positioned to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. In addition, the L-shaped portion of the rear substrate unit 3040 extending to the left and right is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 .

In the state where the back box 3010 is assembled to the game board 5, the locking claws 3041b of the back board unit 3040 locked to the locking portion 3010g are released, and the locking claws 3041b are moved backward around the shaft portion 3041a. By rotating so as to move to the rear side, the rear of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 attached to the back box 3010 can be opened, and the liquid crystal spacer 1610, that is, the effect display can be opened without removing the back substrate unit 3040 from the back box 3010. Device 1600 can be removable.

In addition, the back box 3010 is provided on the surface facing the front-rear direction except for the fixing piece portion 3010e, and has a plurality of functional holes in which two through-holes are arranged vertically or horizontally. and a functional surface facing in the front-rear direction that can be used when assembling the machine 1 (game board 5). The two through holes of the functional hole have the same diameter. The functional hole is for attaching the performance unit to the back box 3010 directly or via an attachment supporter.

[8-10b. back ball induction unit]
Next, the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 100 and the like. The back ball guide unit 3100 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010 and attached to the back box 3010 via the back decoration unit 3200 . The back ball induction unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2002, and a game and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 capable of detecting illicit magnetism acting within the region 5a.

The back ball induction unit 3100 includes the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first V winning opening 2007, and the second V winning opening in the front unit 2000. 2008, the lost opening 2009, and the first empty opening 2532, receive the game ball B behind the game panel 1100, guide it to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and then release the safe ball in the circulating ball path unit 600 below. It can be discharged to the receptacle 600b. In addition, the back ball guide unit 3100 receives the game ball B received in the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 of the front unit 2000 at the rear of the game panel 1100, guides it to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and then moves it downward. can be discharged to the out-ball socket 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600.

[8-10c. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back decorative unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101 and the like. The back decoration unit 3200 is provided after the back ball guide unit 3100 in the back box 3010, and is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 via an attachment supporter. A vibration sensor 1040 is attached to the back decoration unit 3200 . A back ball guidance unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the back decoration unit 3200 .

The back decoration unit 3200 includes a bottom left decoration 3210 and a bottom right decoration 3220 for decorating the left and right outer rear portions of the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled to the game board 5, and a bottom bottom right decoration. It is provided with a lower back left decoration substrate and a lower back right decoration substrate (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted for lighting the left decoration body 3210 and the back lower right decoration body 3220, respectively.

The lower back left decoration body 3210 and the lower back right decoration body 3220 have translucency, and a plurality of unevennesses resembling a miniature town are formed on the upper surface of each. The lower back left decoration board and the lower back right decoration board are provided below the lower back left decoration body 3210 and the lower back right decoration body 3220, respectively, and a plurality of LEDs (full-color LEDs) are mounted on the upper surface. . By appropriately lighting the LEDs mounted on the lower back left decorative substrate and the lower back right decorative substrate, the lower back left decoration 3210 and the lower back right decoration 3220 can be decorated with light.

[8-10d. Back front production unit]
Next, the back front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98, 100, and the like. The back front effect unit 3300 is provided on the left side and above the back ball induction unit 3100 near the front end in the back box 3010. It is attached to the right end side of production unit 3400 .

The back front effect unit 3300 includes a flat plate-shaped back front left decorative body 3301 provided on the left end side and elongated in the vertical direction, and a back front elevating decorative body provided on the right side of the back front left decorative body 3301 so as to be vertically movable. A unit 3310 and a back front elevating mechanism 3350 for elevating the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 are provided.

A back-front left decorative body 3301 of the back-front effect unit 3300 is provided with a magnetic sensor 1030 provided at a position lower than the center in the vertical direction. The back front left decorative body 3301 extends vertically with substantially the same length as the total height inside the back box 3010 and has translucency. Behind the back front left decorative body 3301, a back front left decorative substrate (not shown) having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface is provided. By appropriately lighting the LED of the back front left decorative substrate, the back front left decoration can be decorated with light.

The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is elongated in the left-right direction. The back front elevating decoration unit 3310 includes a back front elevating base 3311 in the form of a transparent plate elongated in the left and right direction, and a back front central decoration 3320 attached to the front center of the back front elevating base 3311 and having an effect count display section 3005. , the back front center left decoration 3330 attached to the left of the back front center decoration 3320 on the front surface of the back front lifting base 3311, and the back front center decoration 3330 attached to the front of the back front lifting base 3311 to the right of the back front center decoration 3320 and a back front center right decorative body 3340 attached.

The back front center decoration body 3320 includes a back front center decoration part 3321 formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape, and a back front center decoration provided behind the back front center decoration part 3321 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon. It has a substrate (not shown) and a back front central base 3323 that supports the back front central decorative substrate and the back front central decorative portion 3321 from the rear and is attached to the back front elevating base 3311 . The back front central decorative portion 3321 has a portion that stereoscopically imitates a pine pattern, and is provided with an effect count display portion 3005 consisting of four 7-segment displays. The effect count display section 3005 uses some of the plurality of LEDs mounted on the back front central decoration board.

The back-front center-left decorative body 3330 is formed of a back-front-center-left decorative portion 3331 and a back-front-center-left decorative portion 3331 which are formed in a relief shape imitating the head of a predetermined character and have translucency. The back front center left decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is supported from the rear and the back front center left decorative board and the back front center left decorative part 3331 are supported from the rear and can be lifted up and down in the back front. and a back front center left base 3333 attached to the base 3311 . The back front center left decorative body 3330 can cause the back front center left decoration part 3331 to emit light by appropriately lighting the LED of the back front center left decoration substrate.

The back-front-middle-right decorative body 3340 includes a back-front-middle-right decorative portion 3341 and a back-front-center-right decorative portion 3341 which are formed in a relief shape imitating the head of a predetermined character and have translucency. The back front center right decorative board (not shown) on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and which is provided behind, the back front center right decorative board and the back front center right decorative part 3341 are supported from the rear, and the back front can be raised and lowered. and a back front center right base 3343 attached to the base 3311 . The back-front-middle-right decorative body 3340 can light-embellish the back-front-middle-right decoration part 3341 by appropriately emitting light from the LEDs of the back-front-middle-right decorative substrate.

The back front elevating mechanism 3350 includes a back front left elevating rail (not shown) that is provided behind the back front left decoration 3301 and supports the left end side of the back front elevating decoration unit 3310 so that it can be lifted and lowered. A back front right elevating rail 3352 supporting the right end side of the front elevating decoration unit 3310 so as to be able to ascend and descend, and a back side provided behind the back front left decoration 3301 for elevating the back front elevating decoration unit 3310. and a front elevation drive unit (not shown). In addition, although illustration is omitted, the back front elevating mechanism 3350 includes a drop solenoid for dropping the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 from the state of the raised standby position, and the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 downward. and a back-front elevation driving motor for raising from the dropped performance position to the upper standby position.

A back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 of the back front effect unit 3300 is provided so as to be visible from the front through the frame of the center accessory 2500 in a state assembled on the game board 5.例文帳に追加In the normal state, the back front effect unit 3300 is positioned at the standby position where the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is the upper moving end, and is prevented from falling downward by engagement of the lock claw. In a normal state, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is positioned near the upper end of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 as shown in FIG. 96 and the like.

In addition, in the state of the standby position, which is the normal state, the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 of the back front effect unit 3300 is behind the back elevating decorative body unit at the retracted position of the back rear effect unit 3400. , and the back rear elevation decorative body 3410 is in a state that cannot be visually recognized from the front.

The back front effect unit 3300 moves the lifting slider to the lower end side by the back front lifting drive motor from the normal state, so that the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 can fall from the standby position to the lower effect position. Become. Then, from this state, when the locking by the lock claw is released by the drop solenoid, the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 freely falls toward the standby position. In the state where the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 has fallen to the performance position, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is above the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 and slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. located near.

When the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 drops and enters the state of the performance position, the back rear elevating decorative body 3410 at the retracted position of the back rear performance unit 3400 provided at the rear becomes visible from the front. As a result, it is possible to surprise the player and make the player think that something good will happen (the arrival of a chance).

A damper for absorbing or mitigating the impact of the falling front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is provided at the lower part of the front lifting mechanism 3350 .

The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 that has fallen to the performance position is raised to the upper standby position by the upward movement of the elevating slider by the back front elevating drive motor, and the lock claw is automatically locked to the standby position. state.

Since this back front effect unit 3300 has a effect count display section 3005 consisting of four 7-segment displays in the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 (back front central decorative body 3320), the effect count display section 3005 By executing the countdown display in which the displayed numbers decrease, it is possible to show the player the countdown effect in which the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 falls. In the countdown effect, the rear elevating decorative body 3410 may be moved to the lower appearance position without dropping the front elevating decorative body unit 3310. You may make it move the rear raising/lowering decoration body 3410 to the appearance position of the downward direction.

[8-10e. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101 and the like. The back rear effect unit 3400 is provided after the back front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010, and the upper part is attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 via the mounting supporter, and the lower part is the back decoration unit 3200. installed in the The back-side effect unit 3400 includes a back-side elevating decorative body 3410 that is long in the left-right direction, and a back-side elevating mechanism 3450 for elevating the back-side elevating decorative body 3410. - 特許庁

The rear elevation decoration body 3410 in the rear production unit 3400 is provided behind the rear elevation elevation decoration part 3411 which is long in the left and right and has translucency, and behind the rear elevation elevation decoration part 3411, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted. a rear lift decorative substrate (not shown); a rear lift base (not shown) that supports the rear lift decorative substrate and the rear lift decorative portion from the rear and is lifted and lowered by a rear lift mechanism 3450; It has The back rear elevating decorative part 3411 includes a logo part 3411a formed of a predetermined logo that is applied over the entire length in the left-right direction, and a back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 that is provided in relief above the logo part 3411a. has a character portion 3411b in which a plurality of different characters are arranged in rows on the left and right. The back elevation decoration part 3411 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately lighting the LED of the back elevation decoration substrate.

The rear lifting mechanism 3450 in the rear rear effect unit 3400 includes a U-shaped rear rear base 3451 that opens downward, and a translucent flat plate-shaped rear that is provided in front of the upper side of the rear rear base 3451. A rear fixed decoration part 3452 and a rear fixed decoration substrate 3453 provided between the rear fixed decoration part 3452 and the rear base 3451 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon are provided. The rear fixed decorative portion 3452 is formed to have substantially the same length in the horizontal direction as the rear lifting decorative body 3410, and has a predetermined pattern on the front surface. The rear fixed decorative portion 3452 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the LED of the rear fixed decorative substrate 3453 to emit light.

In addition, although not shown, the rear lifting mechanism 3450 is provided on the left side of the rear rear base 3451 and supports the left end side of the rear lifting decorative body 3410 so that it can be lifted and lowered. A rear rear right rail provided on the right side of the rear base 3451 and supporting the right end side of the rear lifting decorative body 3410 so as to be liftable, and a rear lifting decorative body 3410 provided on the left side of the rear rear base. and a rear elevation drive unit for raising and lowering the rear side.

The rear elevation drive unit has a rear elevation drive motor. By driving the rear elevation drive motor, the rear elevation decorative body 3410 is moved to the retracted position, which is the upper movement end, and the appearance position, which is the lower movement end. , and can be stopped at any position between the retracted position and the appearing position.

In a normal state, the back-side effect unit 3400 is in a retracted position where the back-side elevating decorative body 3410 is at the upper movement end. In this state, the rear lifting decorative body 3410 is positioned in front of the rear fixed decorative portion 3452 of the rear lifting mechanism 3450 . Therefore, the rear fixed decorative portion 3452 is hidden from the front by the rear lifting decorative body 3410 at the retracted position.

Since the rear back effect unit 3400 is provided behind the back front effect unit 3300 in the state assembled on the game board 5, the back front effect unit 3300 is placed in front of the rear rear elevation decorative body 3410 in a normal state. The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is located at the standby position, and is hidden by the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

In the back-side effect unit 3400, when the back-side elevating decoration body 3410 is moved from the normal state to the appearance position, which is the lower movement end, by driving the back-side elevating drive motor of the back-side elevating mechanism 3450, the back side elevation decoration body 3410 is moved from the normal state to the back side of the standby position. It is located below the front lifting decorative body unit 3310 and slightly above the center of the game area 5a in the vertical direction. As a result, the back rear elevation decorative body 3410 becomes visible from the player side.

Even when the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved downward from the retracted position, the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 is positioned in front of the fixed decorative portion 3452 when the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 is in the standby position. is positioned, the back fixed decorative portion 3452 cannot be visually recognized from the front. Therefore, when the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved downward (appearing position) from the retracted position and the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 is dropped from the standby position to the performance position below, the fixed decorative part 3452 in the back is the first time. becomes visible from the front. Thereby, it is possible to give a premium feeling to the fact that the rear fixed decorative portion 3452 can be seen.

When the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 is dropped to the production position while the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved to the lower appearing position, the rear elevating decorative body 3410 in the back elevating decorative part 3411 of the back elevating decorative body 3410 The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is positioned in front of the logo part 3411a, and the logo part 3411a is hidden, and the character part 3411b in which a plurality of characters are arranged is positioned in front of the back front elevating decorative body unit. It will be in a state facing forward from above 3310 (see FIG. 110).

In a state in which the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved to the appearing position, the back elevating driving motor of the back elevating mechanism 3450 is reversed to raise the back elevating decorative body 3410 and return it to the retracted position. can.

[8-11. Production with a game board]
Next, the effects of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 107 to 110. FIG. FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board shown in a normal state. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front elevation decorative body unit of the back front effect unit is dropped from the standby position to the effect position from the normal state. FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-back elevating decorative body of the back-back effect unit is moved from the normal state to the appearing position from the retracted position. FIG. 110 shows that, from the normal state, the back front lifting decorative body unit of the back front effect unit is dropped from the waiting position to the effect position, and the back rear lifting decorative body of the back rear effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a folded state.

As shown in FIG. 107 and the like, the game board 5 of the present embodiment is such that the back unit 3000 provided behind and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized mainly through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It's becoming This game board 5 passes through the frame of the center accessory 2500, and in the vicinity of the lower side thereof, the lottery accessory 2550 and the lower back left decoration 3210 and the lower right decoration 3220 of the back decoration unit 3200 provided on the left and right of it. A back front left decorative body 3301 of the back front effect unit 3300 is provided in the vicinity of the left side in the frame of the center accessory 2500 so as to be always visible.

In the normal state of the game board 5, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 of the back front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 is moved to the standby position which is the upper movement end, and the back of the back back effect unit 3400 is moved. The rear elevating decorative body 3410 has moved to the retracted position, which is the upper movement end. The back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 moving to the standby position is visibly facing forward in the vicinity of the upper side in the frame of the center accessory 2500 . The back elevating decorative body 3410 that has moved to the retracted position is located behind the front elevating decorative body unit 3310 and at the same height as the back elevating decorative body unit 3310 at the standby position. It is hidden by the unit 3310 and cannot be seen from the front.

In addition, in a normal state, the back rear elevating decorative body 3410 at the retracted position is positioned in front of the back rear fixed decorative portion 3452 of the back rear effect unit 3400, and the back front elevating decorative body 3410 at the standby position is further in front of it. The decoration unit 3310 is located, and is hidden by them and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

In this normal state, since the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is moved to the upper standby position, the production count display section 3005 provided in the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 (back front center decorative body 3320) is turned off. , is positioned above the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and looks conspicuous from the player's side without obstructing the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

The game board 5 of the present embodiment can execute effects as shown in FIG. 108 using the back front effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 . In this effect, in the normal state in which the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is moved to the upper standby position, in the back front lifting mechanism 3350, after the lifting slider is moved to the lower end side by the back front lifting drive motor, The drop solenoid releases the engagement by the lock claw, and the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is allowed to freely fall to the production position. In the state where the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 has fallen to the performance position, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 is above the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 and slightly below the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. It is positioned closer to the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction is hidden. Also, when the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 falls to the production position, the back rear elevating decorative body 3410 at the retracted position of the back rear production unit 3400 becomes visible in the vicinity of the upper side in the frame of the center accessory 2500 . As a result, the back front lifting decorative body unit 3310 freely falls, so that it is possible to surprise the player and to think that something good will happen to the player (the arrival of a chance). can let

Next, the game board 5 can execute an effect as shown in FIG. 109 using the back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 . In this effect, the rear lifting decorative body 3410 is moved to the lower moving end by the rear lifting driving motor of the rear lifting mechanism 3450 in a normal state in which the rear lifting decorative body 3410 is moved to the upper retracted position. to the appearance position. As a result, the rear rear elevation decoration body 3410, which has been invisible due to the back front elevation decoration body unit 3310, becomes visible, so that the player can be surprised, and the player is made to think that a chance has arrived, and expects the game. It can make you feel better. In addition, when the rear lifting decorative body 3410 moves to the appearance position, it is positioned substantially at the center of the display screen of the effect display device 1600 in the vertical direction. , the player can see an effect in which the effect image is physically divided into upper and lower parts.

In addition, as an effect using the back side effect unit 3400, the back side lifting decorative body 3410 can be moved to an arbitrary height between the retracted position and the appearing position by the back side lifting drive motor. As an effect, the rear lifting decorative body 3410 may be moved slightly downward from the retracted position or vibrated up and down.

Subsequently, the game board 5 can use both the back front effect unit 3300 and the back back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 to execute the effect shown in FIG. In this performance, the back front elevation decoration body unit 3310 is dropped from the standby position to be in the performance position, and the back rear elevation decoration body 3410 is moved downward from the retracted position to be in the appearance position. As a result, the display screen of the production display device 1600 is covered with the front front lifting decorative body unit 3310 and the rear lifting decorative body unit 3410, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. Since the rear fixed decorative part 3452 provided above the display screen, which has not been visually recognized until now, can be visually recognized, it is possible to impart a feeling of premium to the player, and an advantageous game in which the player is advantageous. It is possible to heighten expectations for the occurrence of a state (for example, a jackpot game).

In this effect, the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 and the back elevating decorative body 3410 may be moved downward at the same time, or the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 is first dropped and then the back elevating decorative body 3410 is moved downward. may be moved downward, or the back front elevating decorative body unit 3310 may be dropped after the back elevating decorative body 3410 is first moved downward.

In addition, since the game board 5 has the production count display section 3005 which is always visible from the front on the back unit 3000, the production using the production count display section 3005 can be executed. For example, the countdown display that decreases the number displayed in the effect count display section 3005 every moment counts down the timing of the falling of the back front elevation decoration body unit 3310 or the movement of the back rear elevation decoration body 3410 downward. You can let them do it. Alternatively, for example, the detection of the game ball B by the lottery accessory ball sensor 2546 may count down until the game ball B becomes unable to loop in the lottery accessory 2550 .

Further, in the effect count display section 3005, the degree of expectation for the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 may be displayed (suggested) as a number. Alternatively, since the effect count display unit 3005 has four 7-segment displays, the effect pattern is configured by combining the light emission of each segment, and after the effect pattern is variably displayed, the stop display is performed. The degree of expectation may be suggested by the stop-displayed production pattern.

[9. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 and 111 and the like. FIG. 111 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. Note that FIG. 111 omits some of the electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, and LEDs connected to the frame control board 740 .

The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a frame control board 740 attached to the body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the .

[9-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control board that is a microprocessor that contains a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. An MPU, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit, a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU, a setting display for displaying set values and errors, and partitioning on the game board 5 and a base monitor 1311 for displaying the number of game balls B collected by the out port 2020 and the sub-out port 2021 provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU has a built-in non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU to identify the individual (there is only one code in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU can take out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power failure processing described later, and the main control side power ON processing described later is performed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). Even if the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset signal will not be output from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU to the frame control board 740. MPU) is restarted, and the frame control board 740 is maintained in the started state.

In addition, the main control MPU is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in hardware Random number circuit”) is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU selects the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are respectively input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 includes a first start opening sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first start opening 2003, and a second start opening that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004. An opening sensor 2401, a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002 that detects a game ball B received in a normal winning opening 2002, and a large winning opening 2005. A large prize winning slot sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received, a prize winning slot sensor 2501 for detecting the game ball B received in the role prize winning slot 2006, and a game ball B received in the first V winning slot 2007. First V winning opening sensor 2502 to detect, Second V winning opening sensor 2503 to detect game ball B received in second V winning opening 2008, Loss opening sensor to detect game ball B received in losing opening 2009 2504, out ball sensor 605 for detecting game ball B ejected from game board 5, safe ball sensor 606, magnetic sensor 1030 for detecting illegal magnetism in game area 5a, and vibration acting on game board 5 A detection signal from the vibration sensor 1040 or the like is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via the main control input circuit.

When the detection signal from the door opening switch 507 and the detection signal from the frame opening switch 508 are respectively input to the main control board 1310 via the frame control board 740, they are sent to the main control board 1310 via the main control input circuit. They are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the control MPU.

The detection signals from the out ball sensor 605, the first starting sensor 2101, and the second starting sensor 2401 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without going through other boards, and It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU via a control input circuit. On the other hand, general winning opening sensor 3001, normal winning opening sensor 3002, big winning opening sensor 2402, accessory winning opening sensor 2501, first V winning opening sensor 2502, second V winning opening sensor 2503, loss opening sensor 2504 , the magnetic sensor 1030, and the vibration sensor 1040 are input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, and are supplied to the main control MPU via the main control input circuit. Input to the input terminal of the input port.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the main control solenoid drive circuit to detect the starting solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414. , Accessory prize winning solenoid 2516, first distribution solenoid 2534, second distribution solenoid 2544, lottery loop solenoid 2558, hitting piece drive motor 2561, gutter swing drive motor 2564, swing piece solenoid 2565, each drive Signals are output via the panel relay board, that is, indirectly, and are output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the status indicator, normal pattern display, normal hold display, and first special display of the function display unit 1400. Each drive signal to the symbol display, the first special reserved number display, the second special symbol display, the second special reserved number display, and the round display, without going through another board, that is, directly, output or do Further, the main control MPU outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp of the setting change board by outputting the drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU outputs various information (game information) about the game to the frame control board 740 by outputting various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permit signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the frame control board 740 . The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to the launch permission logic when launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is the reverse of the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. is set to As for the logic of the launch permission signal, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power is restored), the launch permission signal setting process in the main control side timer interrupt process described later is started. Until then, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is set by inverting the firing permission logic.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 2101, the second start sensor 2401, the normal winning sensor 3002, the big winning sensor 2402, the accessory winning sensor 2501, the first V winning sensor 2502, the second Non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches are used for the V winning hole sensor 2503, the losing hole sensor 2504, the out ball sensor 605, the safe ball sensor 606, and the foul ball sensor 607. 3001 uses a contact type ON/OFF mechanical switch. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2003, the second starting hole 2004, and the normal winning hole 2002, so the first starting hole sensor 2101, the second starting hole sensor 2401, and the normal winning hole Detection of game ball B by mouth sensor 3002 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, and the normal winning opening sensor 3002. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous game state (such as a "jackpot" game) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006 are opened and the game ball B enters frequently, resulting in a big winning. The detection of the game ball B by the mouth sensor 2402 and the prize winning mouth sensor 2501 also frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and a long life is used for the big winning slot sensor 2402 and the accessory winning slot sensor 2501 as well. In addition, the game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected in large quantities by the out-port 2020 and the sub-out-port 2021 provided in the game area 5a that are partitioned and formed on the game board 5. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the out-ball sensor 605 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, a mechanical switch whose life is shorter than that of the proximity switch is used for the general winning hole sensor 3001 . A proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently.

In addition, the main control MPU transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to awarding of benefits to the frame control board 740, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the frame control board 740. receive. Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control section 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. The main control MPU, which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the frame control board 740, and then formats these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 750 of the frame board unit 730, although detailed description will be given later. The power board 750, which supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310, is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as a "capacitor") as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined period of time even when power is cut off. described.). This capacitor allows the main control MPU to store various information in the RAM during power-off processing even when the power is off. The stored various information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM when the RAM clear switch on the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on. This RAM clear switch operation signal (detection signal) is also output to the frame control board 740 .

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 750, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when the voltages of these voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the frame control board 740 and the like.

[9-2. Frame control board]
A frame control board 740 for controlling the number of game balls B possessed by the player, etc. includes a RAM clear switch 741 for erasing information stored in the RAM, and a circulating ball path unit for enclosing game balls B. A ball extraction switch 742 used when the ball is extracted from the ball extraction port 613p of 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720), and the number of balls held by the player stored in the RAM or the like are cleared, and the number of balls held by the door frame 3 is cleared. A number-of-balls storage/display clear switch 743 for clearing the display on the display unit 140 is provided.

[9-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of

[9-3a. Peripheral control section]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs effect control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I/O interfaces on one semiconductor chip. Integrated peripheral control ICs, peripheral control ROMs for storing various processing programs and various commands, sound source ICs for high-quality performances, and sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source ICs. and a stored sound ROM.

The peripheral control IC has a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip. The CPU of the control IC receives game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 through the serial I/O for the lamp drive board. Game board side drive data for transmitting from the port to each decoration board of the game board 5 and for outputting a drive signal to the drive motor for actuating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is provided for the game board decoration drive board. Door-side drive data for transmitting from the serial I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5, or for outputting a drive signal to the vibrator or the like provided on the door frame 3, and each decoration of the door frame 3 Door-side drive light-emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on the board, and door-side drive light-emission data composed of serial I/O for the frame decoration drive board. In addition to transmitting from the port to the door frame 3 side, transmitting control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512 Second, it outputs a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC.

Detection signals from the first effect button 251 and the second effect button 252 of the effect operation unit 250 provided on the door frame 3 are input to the peripheral control IC.

Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC receives a signal (operation signal) from the performance display control unit 1512 to inform that the performance display control unit 1512 is operating normally, and based on this operation signal, the performance display control unit 1512 activity is monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC, and outputs the sound information to the top center speaker, top side speaker, etc. , the main body frame speaker 503 of the main body frame 4 or the like is controlled so that sounds such as music and sound effects are played in accordance with various presentations. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume control switch protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, By transmitting a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a sound effect (sound performance) with a more realistic feeling than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to a built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the CPU of the peripheral control IC. The built-in WDT and the external WDT are used together to diagnose whether or not the own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by a serial input/output port. Kilo (k) bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body driving command, etc., which are output from the CPU of the peripheral control IC to the game board 5 side, are multiple serial input/output signals different from the display commands. It is performed by the port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

[9-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the effect display device 1600 . Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, and a VDP that controls the display of the effect display device 1600. (abbreviation of Video Display Processor), an image ROM for storing various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM to which the various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to render the effect display device 1600 . are controlling. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, the control data (display commands) and A plurality of corresponding nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. The non-resident area transfer data defines in advance the order of transferring various data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM for the screen data to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. Thus, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs the extracted data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600, and extracts the sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to that effect to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer method. The "line buffer method" is to hold the drawing data for one line drawn in the horizontal direction of the effect display device 1600 in a line buffer, and transfer the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer to the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored and affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600 . Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

A “sprite” is an image displayed as a unit on the effect display device 1600 . For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 after setting the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites are superimposed (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order").

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally 2 times vertically 3 times. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The effect display device 1600 sequentially repeats the main scanning for setting the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front and the main scanning in the direction crossing the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input, the effect display device 1600 sequentially scans one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600 as main scanning. are output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line immediately below as sub-scanning, and similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600, respectively, to pixels for one line.

[9-4. Setting value setting change and confirmation display]
In the following example, a setting function is added to the pachinko machine 1 of the embodiment described above. The pachinko machine 1 of this example has a set value related to the probability of winning or losing, and by performing a predetermined operation when the power is turned on, etc., the setting value is changed or the setting value is displayed for confirmation. making it possible.

First, the main control board 1310 is connected to the frame control board 740 provided in the body frame 4 for two-way communication, and is also connected to the peripheral control board 1510 for output signals only in one direction. there is In addition, the main control board 1310 receives detection signals of the game ball B from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the gate sensor 2016, the first starting opening sensor 2101, the second starting opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2402, and the like. be. In addition, the main control board 1310 outputs a drive signal to a starting opening solenoid 2412 for opening and closing the second starting opening 2004, an attacker solenoid 2414 for opening and closing the big winning opening 2005, and the like.

In addition, the main control board 1310 has a setting key switch 1312 (see FIG. 111) having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and a setting key that can emit light in a single color (for example, red). A change permission lamp and a setting indicator composed of a single 7-segment LED indicator (one 7-segment LED) with a decimal point (so-called dot) are arranged. In addition, it is possible to display the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 on the setting display.

The setting key switch 1312 is positioned at a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1312 (for example, the longitudinal direction of the insertion opening having a rectangular shape is the vertical direction). ), the setting key switch 1312 is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key made of metal can be inserted into the insertion port and can be pulled out from the insertion port. In this embodiment, the back cover 505 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 is detached from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the member of the other pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) arranged opposite to the island facility of the game hall and the setting key do not interfere with each other. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1312 is adopted so as not to damage it.

The setting key switch 1312 can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on. It is input to the main control MPU of the board 1310 . Also, the setting key cylinder is moved so as to return the setting key switch 1312 from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (i.e., the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1312 is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1312 can be turned off by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This OFF signal is input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 .

Next, the setting key switches 1312 of the main control board 1310 and the setting display will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing the settings of the set values will be described, and the case of displaying the current set values for confirmation will be described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

First, when changing the settings of the set values, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (momentary power failure that occurs momentarily), the outer frame 2 The main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1312 of the main control board 1310, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned ON. Thus, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1312 is turned ON and the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 of the frame control board 740 is operated. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then check the outer frame 2. After the main body frame 4 is opened, a metal setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1312 and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. The setting key of the key switch 1312 is turned ON, and the power switch 751 is operated while operating the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 .

A person who changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. After performing the opening operation, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1312, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. The key switch 1312 is set to the setting key ON. Subsequently, while operating the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741, the power switch 751 is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. As a result, ON signals of the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key are input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU selects the current setting value stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1312 is turned ON). value) is displayed on the setting display, and the setting change permission lamp is switched from off to on.

A person who changes setting values presses the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 741 of the frame control board 740, and the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 741 is transmitted from the frame control board 740 to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310. is input to Each time the person who changes the setting of the set value presses the push operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741, the main control MPU increases the current set value by one based on the detection signal from the RAM clear switch 741. When it reaches the set value 6, which is the maximum value, it returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, and is again incremented by 1, and the set value is displayed on the setting display.

When determining a set value, a person who changes the set value must move the setting key switch 1312 from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1312 is turned on). It is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder to be turned off, and is turned off. This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU stores the set value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU, and changes the setting display from a state of displaying the setting value to a non-display state. , and switch the setting change permission lamp from lighting to turning off.

A person who changes the setting values removes the metal setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1312, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and sets the setting values. Complete work on the change.

Next, when confirming and displaying the setting values currently set, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure), The body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1312, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on. Therefore, it is necessary to satisfy the "predetermined setting value display permission condition" that the setting key switch 1312 is turned on and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 is not operated. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the setting values that are currently set must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off), and then After performing the work of opening the body frame 4 with respect to the frame 2, a metal setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1312 and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON. By operating the setting key switch 1312 , the setting key switch 1312 is turned on, and then the power switch 751 is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 .

The person who confirms and displays the setting values currently set must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Next, a metal setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1312, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON. By operating the setting key switch 1312, the setting key is turned ON. Subsequently, the power switch 751 is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the depressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 . As a result, a setting key ON signal is input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU selects the current setting value stored in a specific area of its built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1312 is turned ON). current value) is displayed on the setting display. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp is extinguished is maintained, and even if the person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value presses the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741, the pressing operation is supported. setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display.

After confirming the currently set value, the person who confirms and displays the set value currently set must move the setting key switch 1312 from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position. The setting key switch 1312 is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position for turning off the setting key switch 1312) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input to the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU switches from the state of displaying the setting value to the state of not displaying the setting value on the setting display.

A person who confirms and displays the set values currently set removes the metal setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1312 and closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. , to complete the task of displaying the confirmation of the set value currently set.

In addition, as described above, the "predetermined setting value change permission condition" is, as described above, when the power is restored when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). The body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1312, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on. Therefore, it is necessary that the setting key is turned ON and the pressing operation portion of the RAM clear switch 741 is operated. , when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key switch 1312 The setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on, whereby the setting key is turned on and the RAM clear switch 741 is pressed. It is necessary that the part is not manipulated. In this way, the "predetermined set value change permission condition" and the "predetermined set value display permission condition" are set when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or after a power failure (an instantaneous power failure). When power is restored at the time of power recovery, the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1312, and the setting key cylinder faces clockwise. There is a common requirement that the setting key is turned ON by turning it 60 degrees and turning it ON. or power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 741 is being operated at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery”, whereas “predetermined The setting value display permission condition” includes “when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (momentary power failure that occurs momentarily), the pressing operation part of the RAM clear switch 741 is operated. It is different in that it requires "not to be done".

Here, if the set value is briefly explained, the "set value" in this example can change the probability that the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol will be a big hit. , and the probability (degree of advantage) that is advantageous to the player (that is, the number of game balls that the player can obtain can be increased) is set in advance. In this embodiment, the set values are set value 1 (jackpot probability is 1/319), set value 2 (jackpot probability is 1/310), set value 3 (jackpot probability is 1/300), set value 4 (jackpot probability probability is 1/290), set value 5 (big hit probability is 1/280), and set value 6 (jackpot probability is 1/270) are prepared in advance. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to is set in advance. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 selects various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won). Or select various tables used for various distribution ratios associated with set values (for example, distribution tables that define distribution times, blocks that manage the driving of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids, etc.) do. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Various tables used for various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and various tables used for various sorting rates are set so that at least some values differ from each other. The value may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. can be anything. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

In this example, set values 1 to 6 are prepared in advance as set values, and each set has a different jackpot probability. are the same (the jackpot probabilities are the same). For example, six setting values can be set, but all setting values can be set in one step so that the setting value is one. In this way, when all the setting values are set value 1, even if a state in which the setting values can be changed occurs in the setting change state and the setting values are switched, the setting values are changed from setting value 1 to setting value 1. It is only switched to 1, and the set value remains unchanged. Also, in the setting confirmation state, even if the setting value is confirmed, the setting value 1 is always confirmed. Here, as the pachinko machine 1, there are a pachinko machine 1 that requires a change in setting value (change in the probability of a big win) and a pachinko machine 1 that does not require a change in the setting value (change in the probability of a big win). By enabling all set values to be the same, the control program can be used in common regardless of whether the set values need to be changed. In addition, for the pachinko machine 1 that does not require changing the set value (change of the jackpot probability), the configuration of the setting key switch 1312 and the like remains, and only one set value is set instead of allowing six set values to be set. It may be possible to achieve setup in one step.

In addition, during the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value, the main control board 1310 is in a state where the game cannot be played, for example, when the game ball B enters various ball entrances such as the first start opening 2003 Even if it does, it controls to the state where the variable display of the pattern is not started. In addition, the frame control board 740 is in a state in which the game balls cannot be circulated, for example, a state in which the game balls B are not shot from the ball shooting unit 550 even if the handle 160 is operated, and a settlement by operating the counting button switch 180. Processing, ball launching unit 550, ball lifting unit 650, ball feeding unit 700, etc. are stopped, and control is performed so that game balls B in circulation ball path unit 600 are not managed (monitored). . As a result, if the game or ball circulation progresses while the setting value is being changed or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation, there is a possibility that the work related to the setting value will be hindered, but by stopping the game or ball circulation It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring. After that, when the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value are completed and the setting value is not displayed on the setting display, the state where the game and the ball circulation can be performed, for example, the handle 160 is operated. As a result, a state where the game ball B is launched from the ball launching unit 550, a state where the game ball B enters various ball entrances such as the first start port 2003, and a state where the symbol variation display is started, and a count button Settlement processing by operating the switch 180, various controls such as the ball launching unit 550, the ball lifting unit 650, the ball transporting unit 700, etc. are started, and the game balls B in the circulation ball path unit 600 are managed (monitored). will be controlled to

However, during the setting change of the setting value and the confirmation display of the setting value, the state in which the ball circulation can be performed, for example, the state in which the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 by operating the handle 160, and the counting Settlement processing by operating the button switch 180, various controls such as the ball launching unit 550, the ball lifting unit 650, the ball transporting unit 700, etc. are started, and the game balls B in the circulation ball path unit 600 are managed (monitored). state can be controlled. As a result, the game can be quickly started after the setting change of the set value and the confirmation display of the set value are completed.

In addition to displaying the set values as described above, the setting indicator also checks the contents of the RAM built into itself when the main control MPU recovers power to determine whether there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control-side power-off processing has not ended normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the RAM built in itself (or is not possible), an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display as an error indication.

In addition to the setting display, the main control board 1310 is provided with a base monitor 1311 having six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row. Here, on the setting display, it is possible to display the setting value of the pachinko machine 1, while on the base monitor 1311, the number of payouts relative to the number of entering balls (to be described in detail later) However, only the base monitor 1311 is provided to display the setting value of the pachinko machine 1 and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered. The function of displaying the calculation result may also be used. In such a case, the base monitor 1311 displays the pachinko machine 1 in a state in which the setting value can be changed (change permission state) or in a state in which the setting value is displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state). is displayed, the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is displayed in a state excluding the change permission state and the confirmation display state. As a result, the number of parts can be reduced, and the cost can be reduced.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the RAM clear switch 741 is provided on the frame control board 740, and the operation-related parts (the setting key switch 1312, the setting display, and the RAM clear switch 741) related to the setting values are placed on the frame control board 740 , and the main control board 1310 . By doing so, it is necessary to operate multiple operation units provided at different positions in order to change the setting value. This is effective in terms of countermeasures against fraud because it can make it difficult to change settings illegally. It should be noted that the RAM clear switch 741 may be provided not on the frame control board 740 but on the main control board 1310 on which the setting key switches 1312 and the setting display are provided. Although the anti-fraud measures are less effective than in the case of the case, the arrangement makes it easier to recognize various operation parts and confirmation parts at a glance, and it is possible to improve the operation efficiency when setting and checking setting values.

[9-5. Base monitor management]
Next, the base monitor 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described. In the other embodiment described above, the base monitor 1311 (four 7-segment However, the base monitor 1311 of this embodiment counts the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts (the number of prize balls) that increase as the game progresses, and calculates the base value (number of payouts for the number of percentage). The basic configuration of the base monitor 1311, such as having four 7-segment LEDs, is common to other embodiments.

A game area 5a defined on the game board 5 is provided with a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls B can enter. Among the plurality of ball entrances, the prize winning opening to which prize balls are paid out (the number of prize balls is given) is always open so as to be able to receive the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. A plurality of (here, three) general winning openings 2001, a normal winning opening 2002 provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and always open to accept the game ball B, and the game area 5a A first starting port 2003 which is provided at a predetermined position and is always open to receive the game ball B, and a lottery result of a normal pattern drawn when the game ball B is received in the normal prize winning port 2002. Accordingly, the game ball B to the second start port 2004 that can accept the game ball B and the first special symbol or the second start port 2004 that is drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2003 It is provided with a big prize winning port 2005 and a prize winning port 2006 which enable the acceptance of the game ball B according to the second special symbol drawn by acceptance. In addition, the game ball B entering the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, It is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 3002 , the first starting opening sensor 2101 , the second starting opening sensor 2401 , the big winning opening sensor 2402 and the accessory winning opening sensor 2501 .

In addition, among the plurality of ball entrances, as an out port for collecting the game balls B that did not enter the prize winning port, it is provided at the most downstream in the game area 5a, and is always capable of receiving the game balls B. An out port 2020, which is open and discharges the received game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning it, is provided upstream of the out port 2020 in the game area 5a, and can receive the game ball B. It is provided with two sub-out ports 2021 which are always open to and discharge the received game balls B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning them.

Then, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out-port 2020 and the sub-out-port 2021 among the plurality of ball entrances is discharged to the out ball receiving port 600a in the circulation ball path unit 600, By being received by the out-ball socket 600a, it flows through the out-ball passage 601 and is detected (counted) by the out-ball sensor 605 one by one. On the other hand, the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are accepted by the winning openings such as the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the accessory winning opening 2006. The game ball B discharged downward from the circulating ball path unit 600 is discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b, and received by the safe ball receiving port 600b. detected (counted) one by one.

The main control MPU controls the number of game balls B entered (the number of balls entered) (the number of balls entered) provided in the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5, that is, the number of balls in the game area 5a. The number of game balls B discharged from is counted. Specifically, the number of game balls B detected by the safe ball sensor 606 and the number of game balls B entered into the winning hole are calculated as the number of game balls B entering the winning hole from which prize balls are paid out. The number of game balls B that entered the out hole for collecting the game balls B that did not hit the ball, and the number of game balls B detected by the out ball sensor 605 are counted as the number of entering balls. there is

Further, the main control MPU counts the number of game balls B (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) paid out (given) as prize balls by entering the winning hole. Specifically, a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, 3 for entering the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004) corresponding to the winning hole to which the prize ball is paid out by entering the ball , etc.), and when detected by a detection sensor corresponding to a winning opening from which winning balls are to be paid out, the predetermined number of game balls B is counted. , is counted as the number of payouts. For example, when the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, ten game balls B are put out, and when the game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2002, one game ball B is put out, and the first game ball B is put out. When the game ball B enters the starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, three game balls B are put out, and when the game ball B enters the big winning port 2005 or the accessory winning port 2006, ten balls. game balls B are put out, and the number of game balls B put out as prize balls is counted as the number of payouts. Since the pachinko machine 1 of this example does not involve the payout of real balls, the number of game balls B paid out (given) as prize balls is added to the number of balls possessed by the player. and

Then, the main control MPU calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, stores the calculation result as a base value in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1311. . A formula for calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is "base value=(number of payouts/number of incoming balls)×100". For example, if the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is too large, there is a possibility that only the winning openings from which winning balls are paid out are being entered. By monitoring the information displayed on the base monitor 1311, it is possible to ascertain whether or not the ball is entered into the winning hole due to fraud.

In addition, in this example, among the plurality of game states, only when the low probability non-time saving state, the number of balls B (entered ball number) that entered the ball entrance (winning mouth, out mouth), The number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of payouts) is counted and reflected in the display on the base monitor 1311 . Here, in the low-probability time-saving state (time-saving state) and high-probability time-saving state (probability variable state), since the second start port 2004 is frequently entered, the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls also increases. , the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls tends to increase. In other words, whether or not the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls increases depends on the period of time when it is in a low probability time saving state (time saving state) or a high probability time saving state (variable state), but such By excluding the period, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls can be kept within a certain range if there is no fraudulent activity.

Also, the base monitor 1311 displays the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls. The number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of payouts) may be displayed.

As for the base monitor 1311, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is calculated by the main control MPU. I have to. Also, the information stored in the specific area of the RAM (the ratio of the number of balls paid out to the number of balls put in) is not cleared even if the RAM clear switch 741 is operated when the power is turned on. However, regarding the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, each time the number of game balls B entered into the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) reaches 60000 balls, a new entry will be made. The ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls is calculated, and the calculation result of the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entered balls that has become old is stored as a history up to a predetermined number of calculation results. In such a specification of the base monitor 1311, for example, from the point of newly calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, the number of game balls B entering at least the entry hole (winning hole, out hole) ( Until the number of incoming balls reaches 1000, execution of the display of the ratio of the number of payouts to the new number of incoming balls may be restricted. This is because immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls, the number of entering balls continues to enter the winning hole, which is the target for paying out winning balls, and the number of entering balls is lower than the standard value. The ratio of the number of payouts is high, or the number of payouts is lower than the standard value due to a situation in which the balls do not enter the winning opening to which the prize balls are paid out. Bias is more likely to occur. For this reason, immediately after calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered, it is determined that the information obtained from the base monitor information command is unreliable, and the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entered is displayed. should not be executed.

Further, in this example, the game balls B collected in the out port 2020 or the sub-out port 2021 are detected (counted) by the out ball sensor 605 provided on the main body frame 4 side, and the general winning port 2001 and the normal winning port are detected (counted). 2002, the first start opening 2003, the second start opening 2004, the big prize opening 2005, and the prize winning opening 2006, the safe ball sensor provided on the main body frame 4 side. Although detected (counted) by 606, these sensors may be provided on the game board 5 side. In addition, a passage is formed so that the game balls B collected in the out port 2020 or the sub-out port 2021 and the game balls B entering various prize-winning ports merge, and one sensor is provided on the passage. , and the number of game balls B entering the entrance (winning entrance, out exit) may be counted by detection of the one sensor.

Also, in this example, the base monitor 1311 is arranged on the main control board 1310 , but it may be arranged on the frame control board 740 . In such a case, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, and the calculation result is displayed on the base monitor 1311 via the frame control board 740, but there is another method. may be used. For example, at a predetermined timing, the main control board 1310 transmits commands relating to the number of incoming balls and the number of payouts to the frame control board 740, and the frame control board 740 calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls. , the calculation result may be displayed on the base monitor 1311 . In this way, by taking part of the control related to the base monitor 1311 on the frame control board 740 side, the control load on the main control board 1310 side can be reduced.

In addition, in this example, the number of game balls B entering the entrance (winning entrance, out entrance) is calculated using the out ball sensor 605 and the safe ball sensor 606. Another configuration may be used to calculate the number of game balls B that have entered a ball entry hole (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered). For example, when calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of entering balls on the side of the frame control board 740, the number of game balls shot into the game area 5a is calculated based on the detection result of the shooting subtraction sensor 554 in the ball shooting unit 550. Calculate and replace this numerical value (the number of game balls shot into the game area 5a) with "the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered)" can be It should be noted that the "number of game balls shot into the game area" referred to here preferably excludes the number of balls treated as foul balls as described above. In this case, the calculation of the base value on the side of the frame control board 740 can be exemplified by "base value=(number of payouts/number of game balls shot into the game area)×100)". In this way, the control load on the main control board 1310 can be reduced by having the frame control board 740 take part of the control related to the base monitor 1311 .

[10. Game content]
The game contents of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B enclosed in the circulation path R is moved to the game board 5 by rotating the handle 160 arranged at the front lower right corner of the door frame 3 by the player. A game with the game ball B is started by passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 and being driven into the upper part of the game area 5a. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 160. The more the handle 160 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions. The flowing speed is suppressed, and various motions are given to the game ball B so that the motions can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B comes into contact is provided above the side upper left unit 2300 and to the left of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG.

The game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest part in front view, the left side of the center role 2500, that is, the inner side. It flows between the rail 1002 and the center accessory 2500 while coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails. On the left side of the center accessory 2500, the entrance of the warp passage 2512 is always open so that the game ball B can be received.

The game ball B that has entered the warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2513 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls on the stage 2513 in the left-right direction, and is ejected from the central release portion 2513a or the side release portion 2513b. It is released so as to flow back into the game area 5a from either. Since the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2003 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the central release portion 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first It is received in the starting port 2003 . The game ball B released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a may be received in the first starting port 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2003, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game ball B is added to the number of balls held in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310, and the main In the control board 1310, the first special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "character hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change) hit" , “Time reduction (time reduction) hit”, “Probability change time reduction hit”, “Probability change time reduction hit”, “Second jackpot”, etc.) will be drawn. If the lottery result of the lottered first special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the first special symbol that has been drawn is suggested to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time).

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2003 until the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn is suggested (special fluctuation time), the first start When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2003, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the first special symbol. The start of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of retained lottery results of the first special symbols to be retained is up to four for each of the first starting ports 2003, and for more than that, the game balls B are accepted by the first starting ports 2003. However, the lottery result of the first special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp passage 2512, it will be pushed toward the center in the left-right direction by the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 and the obstacle nail, There is a possibility that it will be accepted in the general prize winning opening 2001, the sub-out opening 2021, or the first starting opening 2003 of the starting opening unit 2100, or the like. Then, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game ball B is added to the number of possessed balls in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310.

On the other hand, when the game ball B hit above the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the center role 2500 to the right of the highest portion of the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511, the center It passes through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520 of the accessory 2500 . The game ball B that has entered the first guide passage 2521 rolls on the upper surface of the accessory winning opening door 2515 that closes the accessory winning opening 2006 on the way, and then moves above (immediately above) the normal winning opening unit 2600. released to On the other hand, the game ball B that has entered the second guide path 2522 is released upward to the left of the normal winning opening 2002 . Therefore, when the game ball B enters the first guide passage 2521, there is a possibility that it will be received in the accessory winning opening 2006.

The prize winning opening 2006 is opened when the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting opening 2003 or the second starting opening 2004 is a "small hit" or "win a prize". , and opens and closes in a predetermined pattern so that the game ball B can be received. When the game ball B is received in the prize winning slot 2006, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game ball B is added to the number of possessed balls in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310. be done.

The game ball B received in the accessory winning opening 2006 is sent to the first distribution device 2530 and distributed to either the chance opening 2531 or the first prize opening 2532 by the distribution rotating body 2533 . The game ball B distributed to the first slot 2532 is discharged. The game ball B distributed to the chance opening 2531 is sent to the second distribution device 2540 . The game ball B sent to the second sorting device 2540 is sorted to either the first V winning opening 2007 or the second scoring opening 2541 . When the game ball B is received in the first V winning opening 2007 by the distribution of the second distribution device 2540, a "jackpot" game is executed in which the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern.

When the game ball B is distributed to the second slot 2541 in the second distribution device 2540 , it is sent to the lottery accessory 2550 . The game ball B sent to the lottery accessory 2550 moves between the table 2555 provided with the second V winning port 2008 and the It loops with the hitting part 2553 that supplies the ball B to the table 2555 . Then, when the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008, a "jackpot" game is executed in which the big winning opening 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern.

On the other hand, when a predetermined time passes and the distribution bridge 2557 moves from the loop position to the non-loop position and the loss opening 2009 is opened, the game ball that was not received in the second V winning opening 2008 of the table 2555 B is accepted in the loss opening 2009 . The game ball B received in the loss opening 2009 is discharged.

Since the normal winning opening 2002 provided downstream of the guide path group 2520 is provided directly below the exit of the first guide path 2521, the game ball B that has circulated through the first guide path 2521 is the second There is a higher possibility that the game ball B that has circulated through the guide passage 2522 will be accepted into the normal winning opening 2002 . A game ball B that has not been received by the normal winning hole 2002 flows down to the attacker unit 2400. - 特許庁

When the game ball B is received in the normal prize winning opening 2002 and detected by the normal winning prize opening sensor 3002, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and the lottery result of the drawn normal symbol is "normal hit". , The second starting port 2004 closed by the second starting port door 2411 is in an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is It becomes possible.

In this embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning opening 2002, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the indication of the lottery result of the normal symbol ( For example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also commonly referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the lottery result of this normal symbol is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2002 during the period from when the game ball B is received in the normal winning opening 2002 until the normal symbol drawing result is suggested, the normal symbol drawing result is suggested. Since it cannot be started, the start of the suggestion of the lottery result of the normal symbol is suspended until the suggestion of the lottery result of the previous normal symbol ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of reserved lottery results of normal symbols is up to four, and even if the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning opening 2002, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

The game ball B that has flowed down without being received in the normal winning opening 2002 flows down to either the upper shelf 2421, the first shelf 2422, or the right side of the first shelf 2422 in the attacker unit 2400. - 特許庁The game ball B that has flowed down to the upper shelf 2421 is guided to the left and released to the left of the big winning opening 2005 . Therefore, the game ball B that has flowed down onto the upper shelf portion 2421 is not received by the second starting opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

The game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 rolls leftward due to its inclination, and the second starting door 2411 closing the second starting port 2004, the second shelf portion 2423, After rolling on the big winning gate door 2413 closing the big winning gate 2005 and the fourth shelf 2425, it is released to the left. The game ball B released from the fourth shelf portion 2425 is received by the out port 2020 and ejected. Therefore, when the game ball B flows down to the first shelf portion 2422, there is a possibility that it will be received by the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

The game ball B that has flowed down to the right from the first shelf 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 is received by the sub-out port 2021 and discharged. Although rare, when the game ball B that has flowed down to the first shelf portion 2422 enters the gap between the second shelf portion 2423 and the third shelf portion 2424, it is received by the sub-out port 2021 and discharged. .

When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400, a predetermined number (for example, one) of the game ball B is added to the number of possessed balls in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310. In addition, in the main control board 1310, the second special symbol (for example, "loss", "small hit", "character hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability variation (probability Change) hit”, “Time reduction (time reduction) hit”, “Probable variable time short hit”, “Probable variable time short hit”, “Second big hit”, etc.) lottery will be held. If the lottery result of the lottered second special symbol is other than "losing", an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous occurs. Then, the lottery result of the drawn second special symbol takes a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special variation time) longer than the special variation time of the lottery result of the first special symbol. suggested.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 until the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn is suggested (special fluctuation time), the second start When the game ball B is accepted in the mouth 2004, it is not possible to start suggesting the lottery result of the second special symbol. The start of suggesting the lottery result of the symbol is suspended. The number of retained lottery results of the second special symbols to be retained is up to four, respectively, for the second start port 2004, and for more than that, the game ball B is accepted by the second start port 2004. However, the lottery result of the second special symbol is discarded without being reserved. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

The special fluctuation time of the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the second start port 2004 is the time of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2003. It is set longer than the special fluctuation time of the lottery result. As a result, the second special symbol lottery result takes more time to consume the number of reservations, so the number of accepted game balls B per unit time for the first start port 2003 and the second start port 2004 is the same. Also, the number of lottery results of the second special symbol to be executed in the second starting port 2004 is smaller. Therefore, in the normal state, even if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500, there is a possibility that only the second starting port 2004 is accepted, and the frequency of executing the lottery result of the second special symbol is low. , the player can be made to positively perform a hitting operation such that the game ball B circulates on the left side of the center accessory 2500.

As described above, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B in the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004, the big winning port 2005 or The accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and enters a state in which the game ball B can be received.

Then, in the attacker unit 2400, according to the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol, or acceptance of the game ball B to the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, etc. When the game ball B flows down at the timing when the big winning hole 2005 can be received, the game ball B is received in the big winning hole 2005.例文帳に追加When the game ball B is received in the big winning hole 2005, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of the game ball B is added to the number of possessed balls in the frame control board 740 via the main control board 1310. be.

After the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state capable of receiving the game ball B, a predetermined time (eg, 20 seconds to 40 seconds) has elapsed, or a predetermined number (eg, 10) of the large winning opening 2005 When any of the conditions of acceptance of the game ball B is satisfied, the opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is called one round) to make the closed state incapable of accepting the game ball B is repeated for a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). . For example, 2 rounds for "2R big win", 5 rounds for "5R big win", and 15 rounds for "15R big win" are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", after the end of the big hit game, the probability that the first special symbol such as "big hit" and the second special symbol will be drawn is changed ("probability hit"), or the lottery result of the first special symbol And there is a "hit" that changes the display time of the effect image that suggests the lottery result of the second special pattern ("time saving hit").

When the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol (for example, the lottery result of the second special symbol) is the "second big hit", the big winning opening 2005 or the accessory winning opening 2006 is a predetermined pattern After making it possible to accept the game ball B, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST maintains the state of probability variation and time saving during a predetermined specific number of variations.

In this way, when the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006 can accept the game ball B, by allowing the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006 to accept the game ball B, many game balls B can be received. Since the number of balls can be added to the number of balls held, the player can be entertained and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 suggest the lottery result of the first special symbol and the lottery result of the second special symbol. The function display unit 1400 is directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to indicate the special symbol lottery results (the first special symbol lottery result and the second special symbol lottery result). Suggestion of the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs, blinking for a predetermined time, and thereafter suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern by the combination of the lit LEDs. .

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the result of the lottery for the special symbol is suggested as the effect image. The performance image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern in the performance display device 1600 is displayed by changing each pattern row in a state in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and displayed. The pattern rows are successively stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are combined corresponding to the lottery result of the special pattern. When the lottery result of the special pattern is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a finalized image suggesting the lottery result of the special pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁, an advantageous game state (for example, a "small hit" game, a "big hit" game, etc.) occurs according to the lottery result of the drawn special symbols.

It should be noted that the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (special fluctuation time)) and the time to suggest the lottery result of the special pattern in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the time until the finalized image is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol by the effect display device 1600, according to the lottery result of the special symbol drawn, the effect operation unit in the door frame 3 A player-participation type effect can be performed by operating the first effect button 251 and the second effect button 252 in 250 . In the player participation type production, the first production button 251 and the second production button 252 can be popped up to make them stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the first production button 251 and the second production button 252. be able to.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, an effect display device 1600, a start opening display section 2110, an effect count display section 3005, By appropriately using the back decoration unit 3200, the back front effect unit 3300, the back rear effect unit 3400, etc., it is possible to perform lighting effect, display effect, movable effect, etc., and the player can be entertained by various effects. It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, the peripheral control board 1510 performs the correct operation when the player makes a mistake in the operation to be operated or does not perform it in the player participation type production that operates the first production button 251 and the second production button 252. Notify the player to do so.

According to this embodiment, the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a by the player, and as the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, the lottery is drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004. The special pattern lottery result opens and closes the role winning opening 2006 in a predetermined pattern, and the game ball B received in the role winning opening 2006 passes through the first sorting device 2530 and the second sorting device 2540. is supplied to the guide path 2551 of the lottery accessory 2550 in the center accessory 2500, and the game ball B circulates toward the distribution section 2552 downstream. In this distribution section 2552, in a state in which the loss port 2009 opened in the guideway 2551 is closed by the distribution bridge 2557, the game ball B is distributed to the hitting section 2553 as the first side, and the distribution bridge 2557 is rotated by the lottery loop solenoid 2558 to open the loss port 2009, the game ball B is distributed to the loss port 2009 (second side), and the distribution state of the game ball B is the distribution bridge. 2557 is indicated by a distribution display portion 2557a. Then, in the distribution section 2552 , when the game ball B is distributed to the first side, it is supplied to the hitting section 2553 . On the other hand, when the game ball B is distributed to the second side (losing port 2009 ) in the distribution section 2552 , it is discharged from the lottery accessory 2550 without being supplied to the hitting section 2553 .

The game ball B supplied from the distribution part 2552 to the hitting part 2553 is hit backward by the rotating hitting piece 2560 of the hitting part 2553, and climbs the climbing part 2559 which is higher toward the rear. It will be circulated (rolled) to. Depending on the timing at which the game ball B is supplied and the timing at which the striking piece 2560 hits the game ball B, the hitting portion 2553 hits the game ball B strongly or hardly hits it, causing the game ball B to hit backward. Since the momentum of the game ball B to be hit varies, if the momentum of the game ball B that is hit is weak, the game ball B cannot climb up the climbing part 2559 and returns to the hitting part 2553, and the game ball B returns to the hitting part 2553. The uphill section 2559 is traversed back and forth. Then, when the game ball B is strongly hit by the hitting part 2553 and climbs over the climbing part 2559, it is supplied to the swing gutter 2554 provided in the center in the left-right direction at the rear end of the table 2555, and from the swing gutter 2554 to the table. Released at 2555. At this time, since the rocking gutter 2554 is reciprocally rotated so as to rock around the axis in the vertical direction, the timing of supplying the game ball B and the timing of the rotation position of the rocking gutter 2554 As a result, the game ball B is released to the table 2555 in various directions from the gutter portion 2554a of the swing gutter 2554.

The game ball B released from the rocking gutter 2554 to the table 2555 rolls forward according to its inclination and is released from the front end of the table 2555 to the guide path 2551 . At this time, there is a possibility that the game ball B is received in the second V winning hole 2008 provided on the central axis in the front-back direction passing through the center of the swing gutter 2554 near the front end of the table 2555, and the swing By contacting the game ball B with the swing piece 2556 provided symmetrically with respect to the central axis between the gutter 2554 and the second V winning opening 2008, the distribution direction of the game ball B changes to the second direction. It moves toward the V winning opening 2008 or moves away from the second V winning opening 2008. - 特許庁When the game ball B is received in the second V winning hole 2008 of the table 2555, an advantageous game state (for example, a jackpot game) occurs. On the other hand, after the game ball B is released from the front end of the table 2555 to the guide path 2551 without being accepted by the second V winning port 2008, when the game ball B is distributed to one side by the distribution unit 2552, the game ball B is hit by the hitting unit. 2553 to swing trough 2554 . Therefore, as long as the game ball B is distributed to one side (striking portion 2553) by the distributing portion 2552, the guide path 2551, the distributing portion 2552, the hitting portion 2553, rocking gutter 2554, and table 2555 are looped in this order.

For this reason, when the accessory winning opening 2006 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern and the game ball B can be supplied to the lottery accessory 2550, by looking at the distribution display section 2557a of the distribution section 2552, The player can confirm whether or not the game ball B is distributed to the first side (striking portion 2553) in the dividing portion 2552.例文帳に追加As a result, when the distribution unit 2552 is in a state of distributing to the first side (hitting unit 2553 and, by extension, the second V winning opening 2008) by looking at the distribution display unit 2557a, it is received in the prize winning opening 2006. (Here, the game ball B accommodated in the accommodation portion 2533a of the sorting rotating body 2533 in the first sorting device 2530) is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550 (guide path 2551) can excite the player. After that, when the game ball B received in the role winning opening 2006 is supplied to the lottery role 2550 (guideway 2551), whether or not it is distributed to the first side (hitting part 2553 side) in the distribution section 2552 It is possible to make the player nervous and excited. Then, when the game ball B is distributed to the first side and supplied to the hitting portion 2553, the game ball B moves back and forth in the climbing portion 2559 depending on the timing at which the game ball B is hit. The player can be entertained by whether or not B is hit with enough strength to overcome the climbing section 2559 . In addition, since the game ball B that has climbed over the climbing part 2559 is supplied to the swing gutter 2554 that reciprocates, the timing at which the swing gutter 2554 can release the game ball B toward the second V winning opening 2008 As the game ball B is supplied to the rocking gutter 2554, whether the game ball B is hit with enough strength to overcome the climbing section 2559 can also make the player feel nervous and excited. can.

When the game ball B hit by the hitting part 2553 climbs over the climbing part 2559 and is supplied to the swinging gutter 2554, the game ball B moves toward the second V winning opening 2008 from the swinging gutter 2554 which is reciprocally rotating. It is possible to excite and throb the player depending on whether or not they are released. Even if the game ball B is released from this swinging gutter 2554 in the direction away from the central axis (second V winning port 2008), the pair of swinging pieces 2556 provided symmetrically with respect to the central axis is swinging. Depending on the motion situation, the game ball B in contact with the swinging piece 2556 may be drawn toward the central axis side and head toward the second V winning opening 2008. Therefore, the player will not be disappointed. can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed. Then, depending on whether or not the game ball B is received in the second V winning opening 2008 provided near the downstream end of the table 2555, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the second V winning opening 2008 accepts it. Then, an advantageous game state (a big win game in which the big winning port 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern) occurs, so that the player can be greatly entertained.

On the other hand, even if the game ball B is not accepted in the second V winning hole 2008, it is discharged from the downstream end of the table 2555 to the guideway 2551, so Depending on whether or not the game ball B is distributed to the first side (hitting section 2553) again, the player's expectation can be heightened. Since the ball is supplied to the rocking gutter 2554 upstream of the table 2555 via the climbing section 2559, the player will not be disappointed when the chance of being accepted into the second V prize opening 2008 arrives again. At this time, when the distribution display portion 2557a of the distribution bridge 2557 is seen and the distribution portion 2552 is in a state of being distributed to the first side (hitting portion 2553), the game ball B is guided from the front end of the table 2555. It is also possible to excite the player by whether or not they are released onto the path 2551 . Therefore, since the player can be thrilled and nervous in various scenes of the lottery accessory 2550, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. , a pachinko machine equipped with a lottery accessory 2550 that entertains the players can be provided.

In addition, since the lottery accessory 2550 of the center accessory 2500 has a planar table 2555 that is wide in the front, rear, left, and right directions, and is provided with a guideway 2551 in front of the front end of the table 2555, the lottery Since the accessory 2550 is large, the lottery accessory 2550 can make the pachinko machine 1 stand out and strongly attract the player's interest, and the game using the lottery accessory 2550. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player by making the player more likely to expect the pachinko machine 1 and making it easier for the player to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

Furthermore, since the second V winning opening 2008 is provided on the central axis in the left-right direction of the table 2555 which is inclined so that the rear end becomes higher, the second V winning opening 2008 can be conspicuous, and the player can This can make it easier to direct the line of sight of the player to the second V winning hole 2008, and to make it easier to have a sense of expectation for the reception of the game ball B to the second V winning hole 2008, as a pachinko machine to play. The pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected.

A rocking gutter 2554 is provided in the vicinity of the rear end on the central axis of the table 2555 whose rear end is raised, and a pair of rocking pieces 2556 are provided symmetrically with respect to the central axis. The swinging piece 2556 does not hinder the visibility of the rear swinging gutter 2554, and the player can see the second V winning port 2008 provided on the table 2555, the pair of swinging pieces 2556, and the swinging gutter. 2554 can be visually recognized well. Therefore, since it becomes easy to recognize the rotation state and the swing state of the pair of swing pieces 2556 and the swing gutter 2554, it becomes easy to predict the rolling path of the game ball B due to those movements, and the game can be played as predicted. The movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed depending on whether the ball B rolls or not.

In addition, in the distribution part 2552, since the guideway 2551 is provided with the loss port 2009 communicating with the second side, the distribution bridge 2557 is rotated by the lottery loop solenoid 2558 from the closed state by the distribution bridge 2557. 2009 is opened, the loss port 2009 is opened upward in the guideway 2551, so that the loss port 2009 can be conspicuous from the player, and the guideway 2551 is circulated. A state in which the playing game ball B is distributed to the second side (losing port 2009), that is, a state in which it is not distributed to the first side (hitting part 2553, and by extension, the second V winning port 2008) is recognized. can be made easier. Therefore, when the conspicuous failure opening 2009 is closed by the distribution bridge 2557, it is possible to easily recognize that it is in a state of being distributed to the first side (striking portion 2553), and just by looking at the guideway 2551, it is possible to recognize Therefore, it is possible to easily determine whether or not it is in a state of being distributed to

Furthermore, depending on the timing of hitting the game ball B by the hitting part 2553, etc., the game ball B moves up and down the climbing part 2559, so that the staying time of the game ball B in the lottery accessory 2550 can be earned (extended). It is possible to avoid the disappointment of the player due to the completion of the game in the lottery accessory 2550 in a short time, and the time earned by the climbing part 2559 is used to produce an effect image or the like on the effect display device 1600. can be sufficiently shown to the player, and the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player more can be provided.

In addition, since the climbing part 2559 is provided between the hitting part 2553 and the swinging gutter 2554 (swinging passage 2562), even if the game ball B is strongly hit in the hitting part 2553, the climbing part 2559 cannot be climbed. In addition, the momentum can be further reduced by swinging in the horizontal direction in the swing passage 2562, so that the game ball B is vigorously supplied to the swing gutter 2554. As a result, although the swing gutter 2554 reciprocates to change the direction of release, the momentum of the game ball B causes the swing gutter 2554 to move in a direction different from the direction in which the swing gutter 2554 is released. If the game ball B is released, the player may feel uncomfortable, or if the game ball B is vigorously released from the swing gutter 2554 to the table 2555, the staying time of the game ball B on the table 2555 (rolling time) can be shortened or avoided. Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the release of the game ball B from the rocking gutter 2554 without making the player feel uncomfortable, and to easily enjoy the movement of the game ball B rolling on the table 2555.例文帳に追加be able to.

Further, in the case where the player can select the timing at which the game ball B is supplied to the lottery accessory 2550 by driving the game ball B, the game ball B is distributed to the first side in the distribution display section 2557a. At the timing of displaying that the state is displayed, it is possible to perform the driving operation so that the game ball B is supplied. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 which can entertain the player's driving operation and can suppress the decline of the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, when the loss opening 2009 is opened, the distribution bridge 2557 is placed upright from the guideway 2551 with its tip positioned above the base end. Even if the ball circulates and tries to jump over the loss opening 2009, it can be prevented from jumping over and entering the first side (striking part 2553) by the upright distribution bridge 2557, and the game ball B can be reliably thrown. It can be sorted to the loss opening 2009 (second side).

In addition, when the loss port 2009 is opened, the distribution bridge 2557 is placed in a state in which the tip thereof is positioned above the base end and stands upright from the taxiway 2551, so that the distribution bridge 2557 stands out from the player. In addition to being visible, the distribution display portion 2557a provided on the distribution bridge 2557 is visible, so the game ball B is also distributed to the second side by the distribution bridge 2557 (distribution display portion 2557a). state can be determined.

[10-1. Game Management in a New Mode]
In recent years, even if a large number of balls are awarded to a fraudulent player due to a new fraudulent act, etc., it cannot be distinguished from a case where a large number of balls are awarded to a player due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing. There are cases where it is difficult for the game hall side to prompt the illegal actor to stop playing, and there arises a problem that it is difficult to manage the game machine. In addition, there are cases where a large number of balls are awarded to legitimate players due to biased odds of winning and losing, and problems such as so-called "addiction" have also arisen. Therefore, as an embodiment to solve these problems, the purpose is to optimize the management of gaming machines that provide a large number of paid balls. A new game control that newly extracts "the amount of output balls" and reflects it in the progress of the game will be described below. For convenience of explanation, the pachinko machine 1 of the fourth embodiment will be explained below.

[10-1a. Extraction of amount of balls paid out for a predetermined period]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the main control board 1310 can calculate and derive the following two types of payout ball amount A and payout ball amount B as the payout ball amount (difference ball amount) for a predetermined period.

First, the main control MPU counts the number of game balls B shot into the game area 5a by operating the handle 160 (the number of shots). Specifically, when the game ball B is launched into the game area 5a by operating the handle 160, the launch subtraction sensor 554 detects that the game ball B has been launched from the ball launch pad 552b. The number of game balls B (excluding the number of balls treated as foul balls) is counted as the "number of shots" for calculating the amounts A and B of the balls. The number of shots may be counted by another method. For example, a sensor other than the shot subtraction sensor 554 may be installed to detect and count game balls that have entered the game area 5a.

Further, the main control MPU counts the number of game balls B paid out (given) as prize balls (number of payouts) by entering the winning hole. Specifically, a predetermined number of game balls B (for example, entering the first start hole 2003 or the second start hole 2004 corresponding to the winning hole to which the prize ball is paid out (given) by entering the ball 3, etc.) is predetermined to be paid out (given), and when the detection sensor corresponding to the winning hole to which the winning ball is paid out is detected by the entering ball, the predetermined number The number of game balls B is counted as the "number of payouts (number of awards)" for calculation of the amount of balls A and B. For example, when the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001, 15 game balls B are put out, and when the game ball B enters the normal winning hole 2002, one game ball B is put out, and the first game ball B is put out. When the game ball B enters the starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, 3 game balls B are put out, and when the game ball B enters the big winning port 2005 or the accessory winning port 2006, 15 balls. are put out, and the number of game balls B put out as prize balls is counted as the number of payouts for calculation of the amounts A and B of put-out balls. In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since real balls are not paid out, the number of game balls B given as the number of prize balls is counted as the number of payouts for calculating the amounts A and B of the balls put out. .

Then, the main control MPU sets a predetermined clear condition (to be described later) separately from the normal number of owned balls (the number of owned balls displayed on the number of owned balls display section 140) that can be settled by the player by operating the counting button switch 180. The difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts is calculated within the period until is established, and the calculation result can be stored in the "stop counter" as a value for calculating the amount of balls A and B. . The value of the stopping counter is stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. As a formula for calculating the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts, "the value of the stop counter=the number of payouts−the number of shots" can be used. For example, when the value of the stop counter is too large, it can be grasped that a large number of balls are provided from the pachinko machine 1 regardless of whether or not the players are replaced. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of balls normally possessed by the player A is subtracted by shooting the game balls B, and the number of balls usually possessed by the player A is added by paying out the prize balls. It manages the increase or decrease in the normal number of balls held by Person A (the number of balls held displayed in the number of held balls display section 140), but as described above, the value of the stop counter is different from the normal number of held balls. It is separately stored (stored) in a specific area of the RAM and managed by the main control MPU. The value of this stopping counter is also decremented when the game ball B is fired and incremented when the prize ball is paid out. ing. However, the value of the stop counter cannot be settled by the player by operating the counting button switch 180, and in this respect it is greatly different from the number of balls held normally. In the following, the payout ball amounts A and B calculated using the value of the stop counter will be described.

The amount of balls A is the value at the time when the stopping counter reaches the maximum within the period until a predetermined clear condition described later is satisfied, and the value for stopping within the period until the predetermined clear condition described later is satisfied. It is the difference from the value when the counter is the lowest. In other words, the main control MPU memorizes the transition of such a stop counter, calculates the difference between the maximum value and the minimum value of the stop counter, updates the calculated result as the ball output amount A at any time, and incorporates stored in a specific area of the RAM. The ball-out amount A is cleared when a predetermined clearing condition, which will be described later, is satisfied, and is reset to 0, which is the initial value. It should be noted that the clearing conditions described later do not include "settlement of balls in possession (operation of count button switch 180)", and even if player B starts the game after player A's settlement of accounts, the clearing condition is not satisfied, the amount A of balls put out by both the player A and the player B in the process of progressing the game is stored (maintained) in a cumulative manner. As a result, not only when one gaming machine gives an unexpectedly large number of balls to one player, but also when one gaming machine gives an unexpectedly large number of balls to a plurality of players It is also possible to grasp the case where

The ball output B is the difference between a predetermined initial value of 0 and the value at the point when the stopping counter reaches the maximum during a period until a predetermined clear condition (to be described later) is satisfied. That is, the main control MPU memorizes the transition of such a stopping counter, and starts from the initial value of 0, and the difference in value when the stopping counter reaches the maximum (i.e., a difference of 0 or more) ) is calculated, and the result of the calculation is updated as needed as the amount of paid balls B, and stored in a specific area of the built-in RAM. Then, the ball-out amount B is cleared when a predetermined clearing condition, which will be described later, is satisfied, and is reset to 0, which is the initial value. It should be noted that the clearing conditions described later do not include "settlement of balls in possession (operation of count button switch 180)", and even if player B starts the game after player A's settlement of accounts, the clearing conditions is not established, the amount B of balls put out by both the player A and the player B in the process of progressing the game is accumulated and stored (maintained). As a result, not only when one gaming machine gives an unexpectedly large number of balls to one player, but also when one gaming machine gives an unexpectedly large number of balls to a plurality of players It is also possible to grasp the case where

FIG. 112 is a time chart showing an example of the amount of payout calculated with respect to transition of the stop counter. Here, a specific example will be described in which the stopping counter starts from the initial value of 0, and the stopping counter repeatedly increases and decreases as the game is played.

As shown in FIG. 112, the stopping counter starts from the initial value of 0, decreases from the initial value of 0 to -2000, increases to 3000, decreases to -4000, and reaches 2000. It continues to increase, decrease to -500, increase to 4000, and decrease to 2500. In such a case, 8000 is calculated and stored as the difference between 4000 when the stop counter reaches its maximum and -4000 when the stop counter reaches its minimum. retained. On the other hand, the ball amount B is calculated from 0, which is the initial value of the stop counter, as 4000 when the stop counter reaches the maximum, and is stored as 4000. FIG. Note that the maximum difference between the payout ball amounts A and B is stored and held, and the stored and held payout ball amounts A and B are updated by newly calculating the maximum difference value.

In this example, the main control board 1310 calculates two types of payout ball amounts A and B as the payout amount. It is configured so that it can be freely selected. Specifically, an operation switch A that can be operated by the hall manager is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310). It is assumed that either A or the amount of balls to be put out B is selected. On the other hand, with respect to the ball output amount, considering the control load of the main control board 1310, only one of the ball output amount A and the ball output amount B may be adopted and mounted. Further, regarding the operation of the operation switch A in the case of selecting either the amount of played balls A or the amount of played balls B, it may be determined only when the power is turned on, and which one is selected may be reflected. It may also be possible to determine at any time afterward and reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time).

Further, while the calculation of the base value described above calculates the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, the calculation of the amount of balls put out calculates the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. , these calculation programs are executed by separate programs in the main control MPU. As a result, even if the calculation of the base value is not performed normally, it does not affect the calculation of the amount of played balls, and the base value and the amount of played balls are initialized, including the predetermined clear conditions described later. , etc., can be easily controlled separately. In addition, it becomes easy to rewrite the calculation program for the amount of balls put out for each model. Become.

In addition, although the above-described base value is displayed on the base monitor 1311, unlike the base value, it is desirable that the amount of paid balls is not always displayed from the viewpoint of fraud prevention. However, when the hall manager performs a predetermined operation (for example, when a dedicated switch is operated to turn on the power, etc.), the amount of balls output is displayed on a predetermined display (for example, the effect display device 1600, or may be displayed on a dedicated display device provided in the

Also, in this example, the amount of balls to be played is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, but another method may be used. For example, a stop counter is provided on the side of the frame control board 740, and at a predetermined timing, commands related to the number of shots and the number of payouts are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740. The frame control board 740: A stop counter may be managed, and the number of balls to be paid out may be calculated from the increase or decrease of the stop counter. Further, a stop counter is provided on the main control board 1310 side, and a command related to the stop counter is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the frame control board 740 at a predetermined timing, and the frame control board 740 receives the command. The number of balls to be played may be calculated from the increase/decrease of the stop counter. In addition, from the viewpoint of reducing the control load, while the ball output amount is calculated on the main control board 1310 side, the base value described above may be calculated on the frame control board 740 side. . In addition, from the viewpoint of reducing the control load, the normal number of balls held and the management of the stop counter may be calculated separately on the main control board 1310 side and the frame control board 740 side.

In addition, the amount of balls put out is calculated using a stopping counter, which is the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. Alternatively, the "difference between the number of balls entered and the number of balls paid out" may be stored in a stop counter to calculate the number of balls to be played. In other words, the "number of shots" for calculating the amount of balls A and B is replaced with "the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole)" (number of balls entering). can be In this case, the value of the stop counter can be exemplified by "the value of the stop counter=the number of payouts−the number of balls entered". In this way, by using the number of incoming balls used in the base value described above as the value to be stored in the stopping counter, and by sharing part of the control related to the base monitor 1311 on the main control board 1310 side, The control load on the main control board 1310 side can be reduced. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, a game ball shot into the game area 5a by operating the handle 160 enters a ball entry hole (a winning hole, an out hole) and is discharged to the outside. As a result, regardless of whether the number of shots or the number of hits is used, the amount of balls output will show substantially the same value.

[10-1b. Game restrictions]
The pachinko machine 1 of this example executes one of the following three types of restriction patterns when the above-described ball output amounts (ball output amounts A and B) reach a specific value, and the main control board 1310 stops. In this state, it is possible to restrict the game. In addition, when the ball output reaches a specific value, the subsequent game restrictions are executed, but the game state (high probability state, time saving state, information on the number of reservations stored, information on changing symbols ) are retained without being cleared. As will be described later in detail, the game-related information is configured so that it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the information when the power is turned off and then turned on again.

First, as for the specific value, it is configured so that any one of 50,000 shots, 80,000 shots, and 100,000 shots, which are predetermined, can be selected. Specifically, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), an operation switch B that can be operated by the hall manager is provided. Either 80,000 shots or 100,000 shots is selected. Here, the lower the value selected as the specific value, the higher the possibility of executing the game restriction, and the higher the value selected as the specific value, the lower the possibility of executing the game restriction. As for the specific value, only one of them may be adopted from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM storing various processing programs. Further, the specific value to be selected may be used in common for the amounts A and B of put out balls, or may be separately selectable for the amounts A and B put out. The operation of the operation switch B for selecting one of a plurality of specific values may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or may be determined at any time after the power is turned on. It may reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time).

In addition, as for the restriction pattern, any one of restriction patterns 1 to 3 having different game restriction contents can be selected. Specifically, an operation switch C that can be operated by the hall manager is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), and by operating the operation switch C, the restriction pattern 1 1 to 3 are to be selected. As for the restriction pattern, only one of the restriction patterns 1 to 3 may be adopted from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM storing various processing programs. Further, the operation of the operation switch C for selecting one of a plurality of restriction patterns may be determined only when the power is turned on to reflect which one is selected, or may be determined at any time after the power is turned on. It may reflect which one is selected at any time (in real time).

Restriction pattern 1 is a pattern in which, when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value, a stopping state accompanied by "game stop" is performed. When the game is "stopped", when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a. The variable display cannot be started, and a normal game cannot be played. In other words, although the shooting of game balls is permitted, the game (main game) being executed on the side of the main control board 1310 is forcibly stopped, and the game (main game) on the side of the main control board 1310 proceeds. It will be in a state where it cannot be done.

Restriction pattern 2 is a pattern in which a stop state accompanied by "shooting stop" is performed when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. In the case of "shooting stop", when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball cannot be shot to the game area 5a. However, if there is a starting prize, game balls will be paid out, a variable display of special symbols can be started, and a normal game can be played. In other words, since the launching of game balls is not permitted, there is no start-up winning in the first place, and although it is allowed to proceed with the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side during execution, after that, the main game The game (main game) on the control board 1310 side cannot proceed. A specific situation of "shooting stop" is a state in which the frame control board 740 cannot circulate game balls. Stop various controls such as the ball launching unit 550, the ball lifting unit 650, the ball feeding unit 700, etc., and control to a state where the game balls B in the circulation ball path unit 600 are not managed (monitored). can be exemplified.

Restriction pattern 3 is a pattern in which, when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value, a stop state accompanied by both "game stop" and "fire stop" is performed. In the case of "game stop" and "shooting stop", when the player operates the handle 160, not only can the game ball not be shot to the game area 5a, but even if there is a starting prize, the game ball is not paid out, variable display of special symbols cannot be started, and a normal game cannot be played. In other words, the shooting of game balls is not permitted, and the game (main game) being executed on the main control board 1310 side is also forcibly stopped, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side proceeds. It will be in a state where it cannot be done.

In this example, in any of the restriction patterns 1 to 3, the settlement processing by operating the counting button switch 180 is enabled (permitted) without being disabled. As a result, even if the player cannot continue playing the game due to any of the restriction patterns 1 to 3, the counting button switch 180 can be operated to execute the settlement process, which confuses the player. can be deterred. However, in consideration of the fact that a large number of balls are awarded to the fraudster due to fraud etc., in any of the restriction patterns 1 to 3, the settlement process by operating the counting button switch 180 is also impossible. You can leave it as In such a case, after it is confirmed that there is no fraudulent act, the operation of the count button switch 180 is enabled by a predetermined operation (for example, operation of a preliminary count button switch provided on the frame control board 740) by the hall manager. It is conceivable to make it possible (make the settlement process executable).

Further, while any one of the above-described restriction patterns 1 to 3 is being applied, the "stopped state" is forcibly continued until a clear condition, which will be described later, is satisfied. Clear conditions, which will be described later, exclude conditions that are met by some operation on the part of the player, and cannot be canceled by the player. As described above, even if it is permitted for the player to operate the count button switch 180 to execute the settlement process in the stop state, the count button switch 180 is operated to cancel the settlement process. Even after execution, the stop state continues. In addition, if the stoppage state continues after the settlement process is executed, the normal number of balls possessed by the new player is added and the number of game balls is increased so that the new player cannot start the game. It is preferable that the data transfer from the rental device 8 is disabled. Furthermore, in such a case, the display mode of the number-of-balls display unit 140 is controlled in a non-acceptable mode corresponding to the stopping state, such as "EEEE", so that a new player is notified that the game cannot be started. It is possible to let them know.

In this example, when the amount of balls put out reaches a specific value, a stop state is generated in which the game is restricted based on one of the restriction patterns 1 to 3, so that a large number of balls are put out due to cheating or the like. Fraud can be prevented without being given to a fraudulent person. Also, a large number of balls will not be awarded to a regular player due to a biased probability of winning or losing, and problems such as so-called "addiction" can be prevented from occurring. As a result, it is possible to optimize the management of a gaming machine that provides a large number of paid balls.

In addition, in this example, as the contents of game restrictions to be restricted in the stop state, "game stop", "shooting stop", and patterns of both "game stop" and "shooting stop" are given. Any restriction content that makes it difficult to increase the number of paid balls after the amount reaches a specific value is not limited to these methods. For example, as another restriction content, the time (fluctuation time) required for the variable display of all the special symbols to be started after the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value is set to be long, and even if there is a start winning, the special symbols It may take time until the result of the variable display is displayed, and the progress of the game may be restricted. In addition, in a gaming machine that controls either a low-probability state or a high-probability state in which the probability of winning is higher than the low-probability state as the game state, regardless of whether or not the winning state should be set to the high-probability state, After the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the game progress may be restricted by forcibly controlling only the low-probability state. In these cases, it will take longer to win than before the game is restricted, so it will be difficult to increase the number of balls that can be obtained after that, and the motivation to continue playing the game will be reduced. can. In addition, after the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 or the like does not perform "game stop" or "stop firing", but gives special notification corresponding to the amount of paid balls reaching a specific value. You may make it perform using the production|presentation apparatus. In such a case, the progress of the effect is hindered by the special notification, and the desire to continue the game can be reduced. Also, when performing special notification, it is preferable to display a special image on the entire screen of the effect display device 1600 so that the conventional effect display cannot be seen at all. is greatly hindered, and the desire to continue playing can be more effectively reduced.

Further, in this example, even if the above-described amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the information on the amount of paid balls is not erased and held in memory until a clear condition, which will be described later, is satisfied. Note that after the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, updating of the amounts of paid balls A and B (updating the stop counter) may be forcibly stopped, or calculation may be continued without stopping. You can do it. Also, for example, if the update of the ball output amounts A and B (update of the counter for stopping) is continued without stopping, the game ball may be dropped due to some trouble or fraud when the above-mentioned "shooting stop" is not performed. It is conceivable that the firing counter acted in a downward trend. In such a case, there is a possibility that the stopping counter will fall below a specific value, but in consideration of that, once the amount of balls issued reaches the specific value, the stopping counter will decrease after that. It is preferable to continue the stop state without terminating it even if a problem occurs.

[10-1c. Clearing restrictions on the amount of balls and games]
The pachinko machine 1 of this example is designed to generate a stop state when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. With regard to "restriction of games in the middle", it is possible to select whether to maintain or clear the game hall side when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off.

First, the following five types of power-on patterns are provided as modes of power-on operation. Power-on pattern 1 is a case in which the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch 1312 are not turned on when the power is turned on (when the power switch 751 is operated), and the power is turned on without changing the settings or displaying confirmation. The game state (game information) at the time of interruption is maintained without being initialized.

Power-on pattern 2 is a case where the RAM clear switch 741 is turned ON and the setting key switch 1312 is not turned ON when the power is turned on. A RAM clear is executed to initialize the RAM built in the 1310, and the game state at the time of power shutdown is initialized. However, information about setting values is not initialized by RAM clear.

Power-on pattern 3 is a case where the RAM clear switch 741 is turned on and the setting key switch 1312 is turned on when the power is turned on. RAM clear is executed to initialize the existing RAM, and the game state at the time of power shutdown is initialized. However, information about setting values is not initialized by RAM clear.

Power-on pattern 4 is a case where the setting key switch 1312 is turned on without turning on the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on. It is maintained without being initialized.

Power-on pattern 5 is the same as power-on pattern 1 in that the RAM clear switch 741 and setting key switch 1312 are not turned on when the power is turned on. is turned ON, and the game state (game information) at the time of power-off is maintained without changing the set value or performing confirmation display. Here, when the ball extraction switch 742 is turned ON, the enclosed game ball B is discharged from the ball extraction opening 613p of the circulation ball path unit 600 to the outside (ball receiving tray 720). can be pulled out. When the power is turned on, if the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch 1312 are turned ON and the ball removal switch 742 is also turned ON, the setting value change, confirmation display, and RAM clear are performed. The above-described ball removal process is preferentially executed without being interrupted.

As described above, in the power-on patterns 2 and 3 among the power-on patterns 1 to 5, the game state at the time of power-off is initialized by turning ON the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on. , power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, by not turning on the RAM clear switch 741 when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained. In addition, the game state at the time of power shutdown includes, in addition to game states such as a high probability state, a time saving state, and a winning game state, presence or absence of variable display of special symbols being executed, presence or absence of suspension, and the like. When the power is turned on with power-on patterns 2 and 3, the game state at the time of power-off is not restored, but when the power is turned on with power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, the game state at the time of power-off is restored. will return.

FIG. 113 is a table showing conditions for clearing "amount of balls to be paid out calculated before start of stop state" and "restrictions on games during stop state". In this example, one of the restriction clear pattern tables 1 to 3 with different clear conditions can be selected. Specifically, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310), a restriction clear pattern selection switch that can be operated by the hall manager is provided, and by operating the restriction clear pattern selection switch , one of the limit clear pattern tables 1 to 3 is selected. As for the limit clear pattern table, only one of the limit clear pattern tables 1 to 3 may be used from the viewpoint of reducing the capacity of the ROM for storing various processing programs. Further, the operation of the restriction clear pattern selection switch when selecting one of the restriction clear pattern tables 1 to 3 may be determined only when the power is turned on, and the selected one may be reflected, or may be performed at any time after the power is turned on. It may be determined and reflected at any time (in real time) which one is selected. In addition, the "ball-out amount" in FIG. 113 also includes the "stop-counter value". In this example, when the ball-out amount is maintained, the stop-ball counter value is also maintained. , the value of the stop counter is also cleared when the number of balls put out is cleared.

FIG. 113A shows the limit clear pattern table 1 selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "1". In the power-on pattern 1, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "amount of balls output before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state" We also maintain the "restrictions on playing in the middle". When such a stop state is maintained, a state in which the game (main game) cannot be progressed on the main control board 1310 side is maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light for a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. The sound "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stopping is maintained" is output, and the message image "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stopping is maintained" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 as well. there is

In the power-on pattern 2, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized). And "restrictions on games during stoppage state" are also cleared (initialized). Specifically, when the game is restricted by the above-described restriction pattern 1, the game is "stopped". If the game is restricted by the pattern 3, the game is "stopped", but when the stop state is cleared, the "shooting stop" is released. , "Stop game" and "Stop firing", but by clearing the stop state, "Stop playing" and "Stop firing" are released, and in either case, the main control board 1310 side It is possible to restart the game (main game). In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state have been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state has been cleared."

In the power-on pattern 3, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized). And "restrictions on games during stoppage state" are also cleared (initialized). In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit red light for a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state have been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state has been cleared."

In the power-on pattern 4, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "the amount of balls released before the start of the stop state and after the start of the stop state" We also maintain the "restrictions on playing in the middle". In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light for a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state have been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state has been cleared."

In the power-on pattern 5, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "the amount of balls released before the start of the stop state and after the start of the stop state" We also maintain the "restrictions on playing in the middle". In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light for a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state have been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state has been cleared."

As described above, in the restriction clear pattern table 1, only when the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) like the power-on patterns 2 and 3 when the power is turned on, "before the stop state starts or , the number of balls released after the start of the stop state” and “restrictions on games during the stop state” are cleared (initialized). On the other hand, when the power is turned on, if the game state at the time of power-off is maintained as in power-on patterns 1, 4, and 5, it is possible to say, The amount of balls” and “restrictions on games during the stop state” are maintained. According to this, not only the game state at the time of power shutdown, but also the amount of balls paid out and the state of stoppage are cleared collectively. can be made less likely to occur.

FIG. 113B shows the limit clear pattern table 2 selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "2". Of the power-on patterns 1-5, the power-on patterns 2-5 are the same as in the restriction clear pattern table 1, so the description thereof is omitted.

In the power-on pattern 1, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, but "amount of balls output before the start of the stop state or after the start of the stop state" The "restrictions on games inside" have been cleared (initialized). In addition, as a notification mode to notify the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit yellow light for a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. A voice saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state have been cleared" is output, and the effect display device 1600 displays a message image saying "The amount of balls put out and the stopping state has been cleared."

In this way, the power-on pattern 1 is the same as the power-on pattern 4 in that the game state at the time of power-off is maintained when the power is turned on. This pattern is different from the power-on pattern 4 in that the "number of balls to be put out after the start" and the "restrictions on the game during the stop state" are cleared (initialized). In other words, in the limit clear pattern table 2, when the power is turned on, if the game state at the time of the power shutdown is maintained, as in the power-on pattern 1, "before the stop state starts or after the stop state starts Clear (initialize) the amount of balls released” and “Restrictions on games during the stop state”, or, as in power-on pattern 4, “Before the stop state starts or after the start state The hall manager can select whether to maintain the "ball amount" and "restrictions on games during stoppage state". In addition, in the power-on pattern 1, since it is not necessary to turn on the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch 1312 when the power is turned on, "before the stop state starts and after the stop state starts. The clearing (initialization) of "the amount of balls to be put out" and "restrictions on games during the stop state" can be performed by a hall manager with a simple operation.

FIG. 113(C) shows the limit clear pattern table 3 selected when the limit clear pattern selection switch is set to "3". Of the power-on patterns 1 to 5, the power-on patterns 1 and 3 to 5 are the same as in the restriction clear pattern table 1, so the description thereof is omitted.

In the power-on pattern 2, when the power is turned on, the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized). And the "restrictions on games during the stop state" are maintained. In addition, as a notification mode to be notified to the outside, LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates of the game board 5 and the door frame 3 are made to emit blue light for a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on. The sound "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stopping is maintained" is output, and the message image "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stopping is maintained" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. there is

As described above, the power-on pattern 2 is the same as the power-on pattern 3 in that the game state at the time of power-off is cleared (initialized) when the power is turned on. , and the power-on pattern 3 in that the amount of balls put out after the start of the stop state and the "restrictions on the game during the stop state" are maintained. In other words, in the limit clear pattern table 3, when the power is turned on, when the game state at the time of power shutdown is cleared (initialized), like the power-on pattern 2, "before the stop state starts, or when the stop state is Either maintain the amount of balls put out after the start” and “restrictions on games during the stop state”, or, as in power-on pattern 3, “before the stop state starts or after the start state” The hall manager can select whether to clear (initialize) the "number of balls" and "restrictions on games during stoppage state". In addition, only when the power is turned on with power-on pattern 3, "the amount of balls to be played before the start of the stop state and after the start of the stop state" and "restrictions on games during the stop state" are cleared (initialized ), and for power-on pattern 3, it is necessary to turn on both the RAM clear switch 741 and the setting key switch 1312 when the power is turned on. The clearing (initialization) of , the number of balls to be played after the start of the stop state and the "restrictions on games during the stop state" can be performed under the strict control of the hall manager.

In this example, the ball output amount can be cleared (initialized) by turning on the power according to a predetermined power-on pattern. It may be possible to clear (initialize) each time. According to this, if the amount of paid balls is not cleared (initialized) every unit time (for example, 3 hours), the amount of paid balls can be determined by the previous player's game performance in terms of whether or not the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. However, by clearing (initializing) the amount of balls released every unit time (for example, 3 hours), the amount of balls played by the previous player will be affected. It is possible to make it difficult for the amount of balls to be put out to affect the next player.

[10-1d. Details of game restrictions]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value, the main control board 1310 starts a stop state in which the game is restricted, the details of which will be described below.

FIG. 114 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value and the game is restricted. Here, at timing t1, when it is determined that the amount of paid balls has reached a specific value due to the payout of prize balls entered into the winning hole, it is determined that the stop flag has been turned ON, and the game shifts to the stop state. It describes the case. In addition, when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, a restriction pattern 3 is selected in which both "game stop" and "shooting stop" are performed as restrictions on the game in the stop state. In addition, after shifting to the stop state, when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, as a power-on pattern, the game state at the time of the power cut-off is maintained, and the number of balls output and the stop state are maintained as a power-on pattern. have selected.

As shown in FIG. 114, before the timing t1, the game state on the main control board 1310 side is controlled to the normal state (not the stop state), and the game on the main control board 1310 side (main game) It is a period during which progress can be made. In other words, in a normal state that is not a stopping state, when there is a start winning, the variable display of the special symbols can be started, and when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped and displayed with the winning symbols, the jackpot game is started. You can play normal games that you can.

Also, effect display device 1600, lamp A (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of frame decoration members), lamp B (LED mounted on various decorative substrates of game board 5), lamp C (function display unit 1400 The LEDs mounted on the light emitting substrate of (1), the speaker, and the movable body perform their normal operations before timing t1. The lamp C is controlled by the main control board 1310, while the other members are controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. Here, regarding the lamp C, a plurality of LEDs in the function display unit 1400 are lit up or blinked as the game progresses. On the other hand, for the members whose operation is instructed by the peripheral control board 1510, when the variable display of special symbols is not executed, a standby effect (for example, a demonstration When the variable display of the special symbol is executed, based on the peripheral control board 1510 receiving the variation pattern command, the variation performance (performance based on the variation pattern) is performed. I am trying to perform the corresponding action. For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern command, the effect display device 1600 executes the effect display including the variable display of the decorative pattern (for example, ready-to-win effect), and the lamps A and B execute the effect display device. The LED lights up and blinks in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600, and the speaker outputs sound in conjunction with the performance display executed by the performance display device 1600. A predetermined action is performed in conjunction with the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

In addition, the external terminal board can output predetermined signals to the hall computer, and by receiving these signals at the hall computer, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 can also be grasped on the hall side. ing. For example, when there is a start winning, when the variable display of the special symbols is stopped with the winning symbols and the jackpot game is being executed, when an abnormality is detected, etc., the corresponding signals are output. .

Also, before the timing t1, when the player operates the handle 160, the game ball can be shot to the game area 5a.

In addition, on the base monitor 1311, the number of game balls B that have entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of balls entered) and the number of game balls B paid out as prize balls (number of payouts) are displayed. is counted, the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls is calculated, and the calculation result is displayed as the base value. .

Further, before the timing t1, it is possible to put out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls when it is detected that the ball has entered the winning hole. Only the number of balls possessed by the player is added, and the stopping counter can be updated.

Next, at timing tx before timing t1, when the main control board 1310 detects that the ball has entered the winning hole, the peripheral control board 1510 uses some members such as the effect display device 1600, Pre-announced actions are being performed. Here, the ball entering the winning hole at the timing tx is the ball entering the winning hole at the timing t1 before the ball entering the winning hole at the timing t1. Even if the number of prize balls is paid out (the number of prize balls is given), the amount of paid out balls does not reach a specific value, but when the prize balls are paid out based on the balls entering the prize opening at timing t1 (the number of prize balls is given), the amount of output balls reaches a specific value.

The performance display device 1600 and the lamp B are used to execute the operation at the time of prior notification. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "remaining until the game limit + XX shots" as the advance notice display, and the lamp B flashes the LED as the advance notice light emission. ing. This allows the player to know that the game will be restricted in the near future. In addition, since only some members such as the effect display device 1600 are used for the operation at the time of advance notification, the variable effect based on the winning can be executed, and the interest in the variable effect is lost. never

In this example, the operation at the time of advance notification is executed at the time when the ball enters the winning hole at the timing t1 one ball before the ball enters the winning hole. The operation at the time of prior notification may be executed at any timing, such as execution from five pitches before, as long as it is timing before reaching a specific value. In addition, before the ball enters the winning hole at timing t1, the operation at the time of prior notification may be executed every time the ball enters a predetermined number of times or the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, as another example of the operation at the time of advance notice, for a certain period of time after turning on the power, or at all times after turning on the power, based on the amount of balls released at that time, "Remaining game limit + XX shots" is displayed. , the player may be made to recognize a guideline until the stop state is reached.

Next, at timing t1, it is determined that the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value due to the payout of the winning balls based on the winning balls entering the winning opening, but the main control board 1310 detects the entering of the winning opening. Occasionally, the stop flag is turned ON, and the game shifts to a "stop state" in which restriction pattern 3 is applied to perform both "game stop" and "fire stop". In the stopped state, the game ball cannot be shot, and the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be advanced. That is, in the stopping state, no variable display of special symbols or a big hit game is executed, and even if there is a starting prize, variable display of special symbols is not newly started.

The performance display device 1600, the lamps A to C, the speaker, and the movable body perform the operation when progress is impossible after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the timing t1. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "game is restricted" as a progress impossibility display, and the lamps A and B light up or blink in a single color as light emission for progress impossibility. , and the speaker outputs a voice saying "The game is restricted because the daily ball limit has been reached" as a sound for not progressing.

In addition, in the lamp C, as the function display unit 1400, the status indicator, the normal symbol indicator, the normal reservation indicator, the first special symbol indicator, the first special number indicator, the second special symbol indicator, the second A special hold number indicator, a round indicator, etc. are provided, but all of their LEDs are lit. However, as another example, the function display unit 1400 may be provided with an LED dedicated to notification of stopping, and in the stopped state, the LED dedicated to notification of stopping may be lit and the other LEDs may be turned off.

Further, the movable body is put into an inoperable state in which it does not move after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t1. For example, if the movable body is in motion before a predetermined time elapses from timing t1, the movable body is forcibly stopped in the middle of its motion when the predetermined time elapses from timing t1. However, as another example, the movable body may be stopped after returning the movable body that is not in the initial position to the initial position after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t1. As a result, even if the movable body is positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the predetermined time has passed since the timing t1, the movable body will return to the initial position after the predetermined time has passed since the timing t1. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to overlook the progress impossibility display being executed by the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁

In this example, at timing t1, the transition is made to the stopping state. When running. This is because when a ball enters the winning hole at the timing t1, the winning ball based on the ball entering the winning hole will be paid out after that, but a predetermined time has passed since the timing t1. By executing the action when progress is impossible later, the action when progress is impossible can be executed after waiting for the payout of the prize ball based on the ball entering the winning hole, thereby preventing the occurrence of a sense of incongruity. be able to. However, the effect display device 1600, the lamps A to C, the speaker, and the movable body may perform the operation when progress is impossible from the timing t1.

Further, the external terminal board outputs a security signal while shifting to the stop state at the timing t1. This security signal is output when an abnormality is detected, when the setting value is changed, or when the setting value is being displayed for confirmation. . In other words, in the stop state, the security signal is forcibly output even though an abnormality is not being detected, the setting value is not being changed, or the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation. As a result, a security signal is output to the hall computer in the halted state, and the hall side can recognize that the state has shifted to the halted state.

Also, in this example, at timing t1, the state is shifted to the stop state and the security signal is output. terminates the security signal that is being output and does not output a new security signal, and continues to output the security signal that is being output. This prevents the hall side from erroneously recognizing that the abnormality detection has ended.

In this example, the external terminal board outputs various signals to the hall computer, in addition to the security signal, to inform the gaming state, the ball entering the winning hole, the payout of the winning ball, and the like. At timing t1, when such various signals are being output, the security signal is output after the various signals being output are terminated. As a result, the hole side can surely grasp that the game has shifted to the stopping state.

Also, at timing t1, after the game has shifted to the stop state, when the player operates the handle 160, it is disabled to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a. However, in this example, the limit pattern 3, in which both "game stop" and "shooting stop" are performed when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, is selected. When the limit pattern 1 is selected in which only "game stop" is performed and "shooting stop" is not performed when reaching , making it possible to shoot a game ball to the game area 5a.

In addition, at timing t1, after the transition to the stop state, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) (number of entering balls) and game balls paid out as prize balls The number of balls of B (the number of payouts) is not counted. In other words, it is disabled to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, and is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor 1311 . However, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (winning hole, out hole) is counted, and by calculating the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of balls entering, It may be reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor 1311 .

Further, at timing t1, after shifting to the stop state, it is possible to pay out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls for those that have detected balls entering the prize winning opening before timing t1. , the number of game balls paid out as prize balls can be added to the number of balls possessed by the player. As a result, the player can obtain prize balls for the number of game balls until the amount of balls to be put out reaches a specific value. On the other hand, at the timing t1, after the transition to the stop state, if a ball entering the winning hole is detected, the predetermined number of game balls will not be paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls held by the player will be reduced. cannot be added. However, at timing t1, after the transition to the stop state, it may be configured not to detect the ball entering the winning hole. Even if a ball enters the box, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls and are not added to the number of balls possessed by the player.

In this example, when the ball entering the winning hole is detected at timing t1, the winning ball based on the entering ball into the winning hole is not paid out, but the ball entering the winning hole is not paid out. It is determined that the number of balls to be paid out reaches a specific value due to the payout of the prize balls based on the above, and the state is shifted to the stop state, but another method may be adopted. For example, at timing t1, when a ball entering a winning hole is detected, the payout of prize balls based on the entering ball into the winning hole is completed without transitioning to the stop state, and the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. When it reaches it, you may make it transfer to a stopping state. As a result, it is possible to wait until the payout of the prize balls based on the balls entering the prize winning opening is completed and the amount of payout balls reaches a specific value, and then it is possible to shift to the stop state, thereby preventing the occurrence of a sense of discomfort. can.

Further, in this example, at the timing t1, after shifting to the stopping state, no abnormality determination is made as to whether or not an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration has been detected. In other words, even if an abnormality is detected after shifting to the stop state, the abnormality is not notified to the outside because the abnormality determination is not performed. In this way, after shifting to the stop state, by executing the action when progress is impossible corresponding to the stop state with priority over the abnormality notification, the player and the hall manager are notified of the transition to the stop state. You can make sure that you know what you are doing. However, at timing t1, after transitioning to the stopping state, it may be configured not to detect an abnormality such as magnetism or vibration. There is no anomaly notification to inform the outside that the anomaly has occurred.

Next, after shifting to the stopping state, the power is turned off at timing t2, and the power is turned on again at timing t3. In this example, after shifting to the stop state, when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, as a power-on pattern, the game state at the time of power-off is maintained, and the number of balls output and the stop state are maintained. You are choosing a pattern. For this reason, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the normal state (non-stopped state) is not restored, and the stopped state is maintained similarly to timings t1 and t2.

In addition, the mode of the stop state is maintained in the same mode as the stop state at timings t1 to t2. That is, at the timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the stop state is maintained, so, for example, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed, and the effect is displayed. The device 1600, the lamps A to C, the speaker, and the movable body are performing actions when the vehicle is unable to advance. As a result, when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off, the player and the hall manager can be made to recognize that the game has returned to the stop state. In this example, although illustration is omitted, before executing the action when progress is impossible, the speaker outputs a sound saying "The amount of balls put out and the state of stopping is maintained." is temporarily displayed with a message image that says, "The amount of balls put out and the stoppage state are maintained." Further, the LEDs of the lamps A to C emit light in an emission color corresponding to the power-on pattern selected when the power is turned on again. In addition, the period during which the speaker outputs the sound "The amount of balls put out and the state of stopping is maintained." may be omitted.

At time t3, after the power is turned on again, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "game is restricted" as a progress impossibility display. , the message content may be changed. Simultaneously with or prior to the display of "Playing restricted", the display of "The amount of balls paid out and the state of stoppage is maintained" is displayed. In this case, it is possible to make the hall manager recognize that it is a continuation from the previous day, and it is possible to suppress confusion of the hall manager in the situation where the game is suddenly stopped.

In addition, when the power is turned on normally, instead of turning on again after turning off the power in the stop state, a normal power-on sound is output from the speaker. However, in this example, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the voice output from the speaker is "The amount of balls played and the state of stopping is maintained." is not output. In this way, when the game returns to the stop state when the power is turned on again, the sound "The number of balls played and the stop state is maintained" is output from the speaker, prior to the normal power-on sound. As a result, the player and the hall manager can be made to surely recognize that the game has returned to the stop state.

In addition, when the power is normally turned on, not when the power is turned off after the power is turned off in the stop state, an initial operation is performed to check whether the movable body operates normally and to align the movable body with the initial position. ing. However, in this example, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the movable body has stopped its operation and has not performed its initial operation. In this way, when the movable body returns to the stopped state when the power is turned on again, the movable body does not perform the initial operation, thereby making it possible to recognize that the movable body has not been returned to the normal state (the non-stopped state). However, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the initial operation may be performed for the movable body.

FIG. 115 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the game restriction is lifted when the power is turned on again after the power has been turned off. In the above explanation, after the number of balls put out reaches a specific value and the state shifts to the stop state, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the game state at the time of power shutdown is maintained, and the number of balls put out and the state of the stop state are maintained. However, in this example, when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off, the game state at the time of power cut-off is cleared (initialized), and the number of balls output and the stop state are also cleared (initialized). Specifically, after moving to the stop state, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the power-on pattern is to clear (initialize) the gaming state at the time of power shutdown, and clear (initialize) the game state at the time of power shutdown, as well as the number of balls and the stop state. (initialization) is selected. Here, the description is the same as the above until the power is turned off at timing t2, so the power is turned on again at timing t3.

As shown in FIG. 115, after the power is turned off in the stop state, the power is turned on again at the timing t3. is cleared (initialized), and a power-on pattern is selected that clears (initializes) the amount of balls paid out and the stop state. Therefore, at timing t3, after the power is turned on again, the stop flag is turned OFF and the stop state is not maintained. It is controlled to a return wait state that waits for return to (state that is not stopped). In the return waiting state, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side cannot be progressed. That is, in the stopping state, no variable display of special symbols or a big hit game is executed, and even if there is a starting prize, variable display of special symbols is not newly started.

Also, the effect display device 1600, the lamps A to C, the speaker, and the movable body are performing the return operation at the timing t3. Specifically, the effect display device 1600 displays a message "The amount of balls put out and the stoppage state has been cleared" as the return display, and the lamps A to C display the power again as the return light emission. The LED will emit light in the color corresponding to the selected power-on pattern, and the speaker will output the sound "The amount of balls played and the stop state have been cleared" as the return sound. there is

At time t3, the movable body is in an inoperable state in which it does not move.

Also, the security signal is output from the external terminal board at timing t3, as in the case of shifting to the stop state. In other words, in the recovery waiting state, a forced output state is set in which a security signal is forcibly output even though an abnormality is not being detected, the setting value is not being changed, or the setting value is not being displayed for confirmation. As a result, a security signal is output to the hole computer in the return waiting state, and the hole side can grasp the possibility that the stop state will be canceled.

Further, at timing t3, after shifting to the return waiting state, when the player operates the handle 160, it is disabled to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a. In addition, as described above in detail, when the amount of output balls reaches a specific value, only "game stop" is performed, and if the restriction pattern 1 in which "shooting stop" is not performed is selected, the game will be stopped. After the shift, when the player operates the handle 160, it is possible to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a. After the shift, when the player operates the handle 160, it is disabled to shoot the game ball to the game area 5a.

Also, at timing t3, after shifting to the return waiting state, the number of game balls B that entered the ball entrance (award winning mouth, out mouth) (number of entering balls) and the game paid out as prize balls The number of balls B (number of payouts) is not counted. In other words, it is disabled to calculate the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of incoming balls, and is not reflected in the base value displayed on the base monitor 1311 .

At timing t3, after the transition to the return waiting state, even if a ball entering the winning hole is detected, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls, and the number of balls possessed by the player is determined. cannot be added to However, at timing t3, after transitioning to the return waiting state, it may be configured not to detect the ball entering the winning hole. Even if a ball enters the mouth, a predetermined number of game balls are not paid out as prize balls and are not added to the number of balls possessed by the player.

Next, at timing t4 after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has passed from timing t3, the return waiting state is ended, and the game state on the main control board 1310 side shifts to the normal state (not the stop state). ing. Here, the mode of the normal state (non-stopped state) is the same mode as the normal state (non-stopped state) before timing t1, and the restrictions on the game in the stopped state are released. The timing for ending the return waiting state is not limited to the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the timing t3, and may be triggered by the hall manager performing a predetermined restart operation. As the restart operation, for example, if the power-on operation at timing t3 is power-on pattern 3, the setting key switch 1312 is returned to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1312). An OFF operation can be exemplified by turning counterclockwise by 60 degrees.

Note that at timing t4, after returning to the normal state (not the stop state), the lamps A to C perform initial light emission when the power is turned on. Note that the lamps A to C perform initial light emission when the power is turned on, not when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off in the stop state, but when the power is turned on normally.

Also, at timing t4, after returning to the normal state (state not in stop state), the normal power-on sound is output from the speaker. It should be noted that the normal power-on sound is also output from the speaker when the power is normally turned on, instead of when the power is turned on again after the power is turned off in the stopped state.

Also, at timing t4, after returning to the normal state (not the stopping state), the movable body performs an initial operation to check whether the movable body operates normally and to adjust to the initial position. ing. It should be noted that the initial operation of the movable body is similarly performed when the power is normally turned on, not when the power is turned off after the power is turned off in the stop state. However, for the movable body, the initial action may be performed at timing t3 before returning to the normal state (state not in the stop state). As a result, the initial action of the movable body can be completed before returning to the normal state (state not in the stop state), and immediately after the return, the action corresponding to the variation effect (effect based on the variation pattern) can be performed. It can be carried out.

In addition, the external terminal board outputs a security signal at timing t3 in the return waiting state. Although it has recovered, it continues to output the security signal. As a result, even if the return waiting state ends in a short period of time, the output of the security signal to the hall computer is continued, so that the hall side can grasp the possibility that the stop state will be canceled.

In this example, the power is turned on again at timing t3 after the power is turned off in the stopped state. state). However, as another example, when the power is turned on again after the power is shut off, the normal state (not the halted state) may be restored without the return waiting state. As a result, the game can be started immediately after the power is turned off and turned on again.

[10-1e. Effect example when the amount of output balls reaches a specific value during a jackpot game or during a variable display of special symbols]
In this example, the game is restricted when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value. Out of the ball-out amount, the ball-out amount A is the difference between the value when the stop counter reaches its maximum value and the value when the stop-counter reaches its minimum value. , is the difference between the predetermined initial value of 0 and the value at the time when the counter for stopping is the maximum. ing. Then, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 during a big hit game, or when a special symbol is displayed in a variable display or a non-variable display, a winning hole other than the big winning hole 2005 (general winning hole 2001, normal winning hole 2002) , first start port 2003, second start port 2004), the number of payouts increases due to the payout of prize balls and the counter for stopping increases, so at the timing of those balls entering, It is determined that the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value, and the game is restricted. Here, first, a specific effect example in the case where the amount of output balls reaches a specific value at the timing when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 during the big winning game will be explained, and then, during the variable display of the special symbol. Next, a specific effect example in the case where the amount of output balls reaches a specific value at the timing when a game ball enters the general winning hole 2001 will be described.

FIG. 116 is a specific example of effect when the amount of output balls reaches a specific value at the timing when the game ball enters the big winning hole during the big winning game. In this example, 80000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and restriction pattern 1 or restriction pattern 3 is selected as the "restriction pattern" described above. That is, if the limit pattern 1 is set, when the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value (80000 shots), it will be in a stop state with "game stop", and if the limit pattern 3 is set, the number of balls to be paid reaches a specific value (80,000 shots), it becomes a stop state accompanied by "game stop" and "fire stop". In addition, in this example, when the lottery result of the special pattern results in a big win, a 10-round big win game of opening and closing the big win port 2005 and the prize winning port 2006 is given, and after the big win game ends, the high probability state is reached. shall be given.

As shown in FIG. 116(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, and in the central area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are varied. displaying. Here, according to the lottery result of the special pattern, or by receiving the game ball B into the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, etc., during the "Renso mode" in which the high probability state continues , "777" is displayed as a decorative design stop design in the central region of the effect display device 1600 by winning the lottery result of the special design. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative design is performed, but since the lottery result of the special design is a win, "O" is displayed as the stop design of the second decorative design. are doing. In addition, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, although the game ball enters the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, the reserved display is displayed for the amount of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, in the lower right area of the effect display device 1600, a message of "continuous mode" indicating that the "continuous mode" is being displayed, and a game area 5a on the right side of the effect display device 1600 during the jackpot game. A "right-handed" arrow is displayed to instruct the user to aim for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2005 provided in the .

As shown in FIG. 116(B), at the start of the jackpot game, the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" Along with starting to open and close the object winning opening 2006, it is informed that the game ball should aim to enter the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 116(C), during execution of the jackpot game, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device 1600, and the central area of the effect display device 1600 displays "Renso mode". Inside, the total number of prize balls paid out by the game balls entering the big prize opening 2005 is displayed. Here, "3R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "18,000 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

In this example, the main control board 1310 side determines the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value before the game is restricted when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value on the main control board 1310 side. A pre-flag is set to ON when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 where the number of remaining balls is "+1500 shots", and ON information of the pre-flag is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. I'm trying to send it to the side. Then, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the ON information of the advance flag is received, and the operation at the time of advance notification is continuously executed until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. It should be noted that the amount of balls to be paid out is calculated on the side of the main control board 1310 based on the stopping counter, which is the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. In other words, regarding the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid out balls reaches a specific value, the number of remaining balls increases as the number of shots increases, and the number of remaining balls decreases as the number of payouts increases. In addition, regarding the operation at the time of advance notice, a predetermined number before the amount of played balls reaches a specific value (in this example, the number of balls remaining until the amount of played balls reaches the specific value is After the amount of paid balls reaches 78500), the game is continuously executed until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, so that the player does not miss the information on the restriction of the game.

Further, in this example, once the advance notice is given, even if the number of balls remaining until the ball output reaches the specific value after that falls below a predetermined value (remaining 1500 shots), the advance notice is given. The announcement is continued without ending until the amount of balls issued reaches a specific value. Specifically, after the ON information of the advance flag is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 side, only the number of shots increases, and the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls output reaches a specific value is a predetermined number ( 1500 shots remaining), the main control board 1310 side keeps the pre-flag ON without turning it OFF. As a result, when the number of remaining balls reaches a state of 1500 until the number of balls output reaches a specific value, the number of remaining balls falls below 1500, and then the number of remaining balls reaches a state of 1500 again Even in such a case, the main control board 1310 side does not switch the pre-flag frequently, suppresses the transmission of the pre-flag ON information to the peripheral control board 1510 side many times, and reduces the control burden and control complexity. can be avoided.

As shown in FIG. 116(D), when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 during a jackpot game, and the number of balls remaining until the amount of output balls reaches a specific value becomes "+1500". , in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as an operation at the time of advance notice, an advance notice display of "remaining +1500 shots until game limit" is displayed to convey the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value. there is Here, the final "10R" is displayed as the number of current rounds, and "18800 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. In the effect display device 1600, the current round number is displayed in the upper left area, and the game ball entered the big winning opening 2005 during the "Renso mode" is displayed in the upper area continuously from before the advance notification display is displayed. The total number of prize balls paid out by hitting the ball, the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern in the upper right area, and the arrow of "right hit" in the lower right area are displayed, but "remaining +1500 shots until game limit". Although the advance notice display is displayed so as to overlap the background image, it is displayed so as not to overlap the important information display regarding the jackpot game being executed. Specifically, in this example, the ``current round number'', ``total number of prize balls'', and ``right-handed arrow'' are important information displays that should be recognized by the player. The advance notification display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display. In addition, regarding these information displays, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized without the player not being able to see the information due to overlapping, at least a part of the information display should be overlapped with the advance notice display. may Thus, it is possible to smoothly play the game during the big win game without missing the information display regarding the big win game being executed. As for the movable body, it is possible to move toward the front of the effect display device 1600 during the jackpot game. You may make it operate|move a movable body toward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 116(E), at the end of the jackpot game, the central area of the effect display device 1600 displays the message "Continue Mode! It conveys that the state will continue (that the "Renso mode" will continue). Here, at the end of the big win game, the advance notification display of "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed as in the case of the big win game. Since the display of the message "Continue in Renso mode! (10th time)" is also an important information display that should be recognized by the player, an advance notification display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with such information display. It's like In addition, regarding these information displays, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized without the player not being able to see the information due to overlapping, at least a part of the information display should be overlapped with the advance notice display. may

As shown in FIG. 116(F), during the "Renso mode", when the variable effect (the effect based on the variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is executed again, in the center area of the effect display device 1600, Variation display of decorative patterns is performed. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative pattern is performed. In addition, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four pending displays are displayed, and it is possible to change the mode of the pending display with a high probability of winning. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the setting adjustment button 204, but during the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light, the adjustment An image corresponding to medium volume and light intensity is displayed. The image corresponding to the volume and light intensity being adjusted is started to be displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of display.

In addition, during the variable display of the decorative symbols in the "Renso mode", a pre-announcement display of "+1500 shots left until the game limit" is displayed as in the jackpot game. In the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in the central area, the variable display of the second decorative pattern is displayed in the upper right area, the message "Renso mode" and the arrow "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right area, and the lower left area is displayed. , and an image corresponding to the volume and light intensity is displayed in the left area. It is displayed so as not to overlap with the important information display related to the variable game. Specifically, in this example, "variable display of decorative patterns", "variable display of second decorative patterns", "message of ``Rental mode'', ``arrow of ``right stroke'', ``hold display'', Since the "image corresponding to volume and amount of light" is an important information display that should be recognized by the player, the advance notice display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with these information displays. In addition, regarding these information displays, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized without the player not being able to see the information due to overlapping, at least a part of the information display should be overlapped with the advance notice display. may As a result, it is possible to smoothly play the game during the variable game without missing the information display regarding the variable game being executed. As for the movable body, it is possible to move toward the front of the effect display device 1600 during the variable game. You may make it operate|move a movable body toward. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing during the variable game.

As shown in FIG. 116(G), during the "Renso mode", when the result of the lottery for the special symbol is a hit again, "777" is displayed as the stop symbol of the decorative symbol in the center area of the effect display device 1600. it's shown. Here, too, the advance notification display of "+1500 shots left until game limit" is displayed so as to overlap the background image, but the display of "777", which is a decorative pattern stop pattern (a kind of important information display) are displayed so as not to overlap each other, and the player can visually recognize the display of "777", which is the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

As shown in FIG. 116(H), when the big win game is started again, the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" , and the opening and closing of the accessory winning opening 2006 is started, and it is informed that the game ball should aim to enter the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the jackpot game. At this point in time, the pre-announcement display of "+1500 shots remaining until game limit" is displayed as in the previous jackpot game. Here, too, the advance notification display of “+1500 shots remaining until game limit” is displayed so as to overlap the background image, but the message “Special bonus! Aim for V!” (a type of important information display) They are displayed so as not to overlap each other, and the player can visually recognize the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!".

As shown in FIG. 116(I), during execution of the jackpot game, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device 1600, and the central area of the effect display device 1600 displays "Renso Mode". Inside, the total number of prize balls paid out by the game balls entering the big prize opening 2005 is displayed. Here, "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19900 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. At this point, the number of balls remaining until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value is reduced due to the payout of prize balls during the jackpot game, and an advance notice display of "remaining +10 shots until game limit" is displayed.

In this example, the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid balls reaches the specific value is monitored before the game is restricted when the amount of paid balls reaches the specific value. When the number of remaining balls becomes "+0" due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the opening 2005, the stop flag is turned ON when the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value, and a predetermined number of balls is played. Until the clear condition is met, the game moves to a stop state and performs actions when progress is impossible. Then, at the point of transition to the stop state, the big winning hole 2005 is forcibly closed by stopping (interrupting) the big winning game being executed, and more game balls enter the big winning hole 2005.例文帳に追加Without a doubt, they have started restricting their playing.

As shown in FIG. 116(J), due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the big prize opening 2005 during the big win game, the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value is "+0". At the point of time (at the time of transition to the stop state), in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as an operation at the time of advance notification, the number of remaining balls until the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value is communicated. A pre-notification display of "+0 shots left until the end of the day" is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example). Here, "10R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "19915 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. When a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example) elapses after the advance notification display of "remaining +0 shots until game limit" is displayed, an image corresponding to the stopping state shown in FIG. 116(K) is displayed.

In this example, the total number of prize balls displayed on the performance display device 1600 and the contents of the advance notice display are reflected by the amount of the prize balls paid out when the game balls enter the big winning hole 2005. However, regarding the total number of prize balls and the details of the advance notice display, the total number of prize balls is not the time when the game balls enter the big prize opening 2005 when the amount of balls to be output reaches a specific value. The display is continued until a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has passed since the number of prize balls and the details of the advance notice display have been reflected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the information on whether or not the number of paid balls has reached the specific value, and to allow the player to surely recognize the reason for starting the stop state after that. Also, just before the number of remaining balls until the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value becomes "+0 shots", an advance notification display of "+10 shots remaining until game limit" is displayed. Regarding the prize balls (15 in this example) paid out by the game balls entering, even if the number of prize balls exceeds the number of balls remaining until the number of prize balls reaches a specific value, the excess prize balls ( In this example, 5 pieces) are paid out. As a result, even though the game balls enter the big winning hole 2005, the number of prize balls exceeding a specific value is not paid out, and the player is less likely to be dissatisfied. can be done. However, if it is important to monitor the number of balls to be played from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the number of prize balls exceeding a specific value may not be paid out.

In the above, regarding the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display, the number of prize balls will be reflected in the total number of prize balls and the content of the advance notice display, not when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value. Although the display is continued until the game is played, it may be terminated when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value, and an image corresponding to the stop state may be displayed. In other words, the image shown in FIG. 116(J) may not be displayed, and the process may proceed to the image shown in FIG. 116(K), which will be described later. As a result, when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value, the game shifts to the stopped state, and at the same time, by displaying an image corresponding to the stopped state, it is possible to immediately grasp that the state has shifted to the stopped state. can.

In addition, when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value, the state shifts to the stop state and the game is restricted, so that the player does not accidentally shoot the game ball, an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed. It is preferable that the player cannot see the "right hit" arrow that promotes the shooting of the game ball after being hit, and is erased in this example. Also, under other circumstances, the number of balls released reaches a specific value while displaying a display that encourages the shooting of game balls (e.g. right-handed display, left-handed display, Aim for the V! display, etc.) In this case, at that time, the display prompting the shooting of the game ball is made invisible to the player (erased).

As shown in FIG. 116(K), when the number of balls put out reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopping state. As an image corresponding to the stop state, a message "Game limit" is displayed, accompanied by "The game is restricted because the limit of 80000 balls per day has been reached.", "Please call a staff member." The checkout button is active." is displayed. The settlement button here means the count button switch 180 for executing settlement processing. In addition, before the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays the current round number, the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern, the total number of prize balls, and advance notice display. , Regarding such game information, when the message "Game limit" is displayed after the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value, it is not displayed (made invisible), and the message is displayed on the darkened screen. I am trying to display it. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the amount of balls put out has reached a specific value and that the game is restricted, and it is possible to grasp that the game restriction cannot be released without the operation of the hall manager. . Also, it can be understood that the number of balls held by the player can be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180 .

In the above, before the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays the current number of rounds, the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern, the total number of prize balls, and advance notification display. However, when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the information about such a game is executed so that it cannot be recognized at all. However, when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value, part of the game-related information may be made unrecognizable, and other information may be made recognizable. For example, since the total number of prize balls and advance notification display are information on whether or not to execute game restrictions, they are made unrecognizable, and the current number of rounds and the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern are made unrecognizable. may be recognizable. This makes it possible to grasp under what circumstances the amount of paid balls reached the specific value even after the amount of paid balls has reached the specific value.

In this example, in order to satisfy a predetermined clear condition for terminating the stop state, it is necessary to turn on the power again according to a predetermined power-on pattern after the power has been turned off. Here, as the power-on pattern at the time of power-on, when a power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and maintains the number of balls output and the stop state is selected (in this example, in the limit clear pattern table 1 If power-on patterns 1, 4, 5, power-on patterns 4, 5 in the limit clear pattern table 2, and power-on patterns 1, 4, 5 in the limit clear pattern table 3 are selected), the game state at the time of power shutdown is cleared. When a power-on pattern is selected to (initialize) and to clear (initialize) the ball payout amount and the stop state (in this example, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in limit clear pattern table 1, limit clear pattern table 2 If power-on patterns 2 and 3 in , or power-on pattern 3 in the restriction clear pattern table 3 is selected), the power is turned on to maintain the gaming state at the time of power off and to clear (initialize) the amount of balls and the stop state. A case where a pattern is selected (in this example, a case where power-on pattern 1 in the restricted clear pattern table 2 and power-on pattern 2 in the restricted clear pattern table 3 are selected) will be described.

First, after shifting to the stop state, when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off, if a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of the power cut-off, as well as the number of balls output and the stop state, the stop state is selected. 116(K) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again. In this example, although illustration is omitted, before displaying the image shown in FIG. The display device 1600 is adapted to temporarily display a message image saying "the amount of balls paid out and the state of stoppage are maintained". Here, the dedicated period for displaying the message image "The amount of balls put out and the state of stopping is maintained" on the effect display device 1600 may be omitted. While omitting the dedicated period in order to make the manager aware of the message, the image shown in FIG. may also be displayed.

In addition, after moving to the stop state, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the power-on pattern clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power shutdown, and also clears (initializes) the amount of balls and the stop state. When selected, the number of balls to be put out and the stopped state are cleared (initialized), thereby releasing the restriction on the game as the stopped state. Here, when clearing (initializing) the amount of paid balls and the stop state, all information related to calculation of the amount of paid balls, such as the counter for stopping, the number of payouts, and the number of shots, is cleared (initialized). In addition, regarding the information on the remaining jackpot game when it was interrupted at the time of transition to the stop state, and the information on the "Continuous Mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game, after shifting to the stop state or power off However, when the power is turned off and then turned back on, the information on the remaining jackpot game at the time of such interruption and the information on the "Renso mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game are lost. By doing so, it is assumed to start in a low-probability state. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 116(L), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which the decorative symbols are stopped at the initial symbols.

On the other hand, if you select a power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and clears (initializes) the amount of balls and the stop state when the power is turned off and then turned back on after moving to the stop state. , the amount of balls to be put out and the stopped state are cleared (initialized), so that the restriction on the game as the stopped state is lifted. In addition, regarding the information on the remaining jackpot game when it was interrupted at the time of shifting to the stop state and the information on the "Continuous Mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game, after shifting to the stop state or turning off the power However, even when the power is turned off and then turned back on, the information on the remaining jackpot game at the time of interruption and the information on the "Renso mode" (high probability state) after the jackpot game are maintained. , the game is restarted in the state in which it was interrupted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 116(L′), the effect display device 1600 returns to display an image relating to the “Renso mode” (high probability state), which is the ending period when the final round of the jackpot game ends. I am trying to In addition, if you select a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the amount of balls and the stop state, before returning to the game after turning it back on after turning off the power, a special A return notification (an image and sound to the effect that the game will return to the state before the game restriction) may be performed. This special return notification corresponds to the return display, return light emission, and return sound in the return waiting state from timing t3 to timing t4 in FIG. Cleared.", or displaying a message image saying "The number of balls paid out and the stoppage state are cleared."

FIG. 117 is a specific example of effect in the case where the amount of output balls reaches a specific value at the timing when the game ball enters the general winning hole during the variable display of the special symbols. In this example, 80000 is set as the "specific value" described above, and restriction pattern 1 or restriction pattern 3 is selected as the "restriction pattern" described above. That is, if the limit pattern 1 is set, when the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value (80000 shots), it will be in a stop state with "game stop", and if the limit pattern 3 is set, the number of balls to be paid reaches a specific value (80,000 shots), it becomes a stop state accompanied by "game stop" and "fire stop".

As shown in FIG. 117(A), the effect display device 1600 executes a variable effect (effect based on a variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbols, and in the central area of the effect display device 1600, the decorative symbols are varied. displaying. Here, depending on the lottery result of the special pattern, or by accepting the game ball B into the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008, etc., during the "Renso mode" in which the high probability state continues , "777" is displayed as a decorative design stop design in the central region of the effect display device 1600 by winning the lottery result of the special design. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative design is performed, but since the lottery result of the special design is a win, "O" is displayed as the stop design of the second decorative design. are doing. In addition, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, although the game ball enters the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004, the reserved display is displayed for the amount of waiting for the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, in the lower right area of the effect display device 1600, a message of "continuous mode" indicating that the "continuous mode" is being displayed, and a game area 5a on the right side of the effect display device 1600 during the jackpot game. A "right-handed" arrow is displayed to instruct the user to aim for the game ball to enter the big winning hole 2005 provided in the .

As shown in FIG. 117(B), at the start of the jackpot game, the message "Special bonus! Aim for V!" Along with starting to open and close the object winning opening 2006, it is informed that the game ball should aim to enter the first V winning opening 2007 or the second V winning opening 2008 during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 117(C), during execution of the jackpot game, the current number of rounds is displayed in the upper left area of the effect display device 1600, and the central area of the effect display device 1600 displays "Renso mode". Inside, the total number of prize balls paid out by the game balls entering the big prize opening 2005 is displayed. Here, "3R" is displayed as the current number of rounds, and "17,500 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls.

In this example, the main control board 1310 side determines the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value before the game is restricted when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value. A pre-flag is set to ON when the game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 where the number of remaining balls is "+1500 shots", and ON information of the pre-flag is sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. I'm trying to send it to the side. Then, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the operation at the time of advance notice is continuously executed until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value after receiving the ON information of the advance flag. It should be noted that the amount of balls to be paid out is calculated on the side of the main control board 1310 based on the stopping counter, which is the difference between the number of shots and the number of payouts. In other words, regarding the number of remaining balls until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, the number of remaining balls increases as the number of shots increases, and the number of remaining balls decreases as the number of payouts increases. In addition, regarding the operation at the time of advance notice, a predetermined number before the amount of played balls reaches a specific value (in this example, the number of balls remaining until the amount of played balls reaches the specific value is After the amount of paid balls reaches 78500), the game is continuously executed until the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value, so that the player does not miss the information on the restriction of the game.

Further, in this example, once the advance notice is given, even if the number of balls remaining until the ball output reaches the specific value after that falls below a predetermined value (remaining 1500 shots), the advance notice is given. The notification is continued without ending until the amount of balls issued reaches a specific value. Specifically, after the ON information of the advance flag is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 side, only the number of shots increases, and the number of remaining balls until the amount of balls output reaches a specific value is a predetermined number ( 1500 shots remaining), the main control board 1310 side keeps the pre-flag ON without turning it OFF. As a result, when the number of remaining balls reaches the state of 1500 shots until the number of balls output reaches a specific value, the number of remaining balls falls below 1500 shots, and then the number of remaining balls reaches the state of 1500 shots again. Even in such a case, the main control board 1310 side does not switch the pre-flag frequently, suppresses the transmission of the pre-flag ON information to the peripheral control board 1510 side many times, and reduces the control burden and control complexity. can be avoided.

As shown in FIG. 117(D), when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 during a jackpot game, and the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls output reaches a specific value becomes "+1500". , in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as an operation at the time of advance notice, an advance notice display of "remaining +1500 shots until game limit" is displayed to convey the number of balls remaining until the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value. there is Here, the final "10R" is displayed as the number of current rounds, and "18800 shots GET" is displayed as the total number of prize balls. In the effect display device 1600, the current round number is displayed in the upper left area, and the game ball entered the big winning opening 2005 during the "Renso mode" is displayed in the upper area continuously from before the advance notification display is displayed. The total number of prize balls paid out by hitting the ball, the stop pattern of the second decorative pattern in the upper right area, and the arrow of "right hit" in the lower right area are displayed, but "remaining +1500 shots until game limit". Although the advance notice display is displayed so as to overlap the background image, it is displayed so as not to overlap the important information display regarding the jackpot game being executed. Specifically, in this example, the ``current round number'', ``total number of prize balls'', and ``right-handed arrow'' are important information displays that should be recognized by the player. The advance notification display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the information display. In addition, regarding these information displays, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized without the player not being able to see the information due to overlapping, at least a part of the information display should be overlapped with the advance notice display. may Thus, it is possible to smoothly play the game during the big win game without missing the information display regarding the big win game being executed. As for the movable body, it is possible to move toward the front of the effect display device 1600 during the jackpot game. You may make it operate|move a movable body toward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating during the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 117(E), at the end of the jackpot game, in the center area of the effect display device 1600, the message "Continue the continuous villa mode! (10th time)" is displayed. It conveys that the state will continue (that the "Renso mode" will continue). Here, even at the end of the jackpot game, the advance notice display of "+1500 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed as during the jackpot game. Since the display of the message "Continue in Renso mode! (10th time)" is also an important information display that should be recognized by the player, an advance notification display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with such information display. It's like In addition, regarding these information displays, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized without the player not being able to see the information due to overlapping, at least a part of the information display should be overlapped with the advance notice display. may

As shown in FIG. 117(F), during the "Renso mode", when the variable effect (the effect based on the variable pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is executed again, in the center area of the effect display device 1600, Variation display of decorative patterns is performed. In addition, in the upper right area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the second decorative pattern is performed. In addition, in the lower left area of the effect display device 1600, four pending displays are displayed, and it is possible to change the mode of the pending display with a high probability of winning. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, it is possible to adjust the volume and the amount of light by operating the setting adjustment button 204, but during the adjustment of the volume and the amount of light, the adjustment An image corresponding to medium volume and light intensity is displayed. The image corresponding to the sound volume and the amount of light being adjusted is started to be displayed by operating the setting adjustment button 204, and is erased after a certain period of time has elapsed since the start of display.

In addition, during the variable display of the decorative symbols in the "Renso mode", an advance notification display of "+10 shots remaining until the game limit" is displayed, as in the big win game. In the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the decorative pattern is displayed in the center area, the variable display of the second decorative pattern is displayed in the upper right area, the message "Renso mode" and the arrow "Right hit" are displayed in the lower right area, and the lower left area is displayed. , and an image corresponding to the volume and light intensity is displayed in the left area. It is displayed so as not to overlap with the important information display related to the variable game. Specifically, in this example, "variable display of decorative patterns", "variable display of second decorative patterns", "message of ``Continuous Mode'', ``arrow of ``right stroke'', ``hold display'', Since the "image corresponding to volume and amount of light" is an important information display that should be recognized by the player, the advance notice display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with these information displays. In addition, regarding these information displays, as long as the content of the information display can be recognized without the player not being able to see the information due to overlapping, at least a part of the information display should be overlapped with the advance notice display. may As a result, it is possible to smoothly play the game during the variable game without missing the information display regarding the variable game being executed. As for the movable body, it is possible to move toward the front of the effect display device 1600 during the variable game. You may make it operate|move a movable body toward. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered during the variable game.

In this example, the number of balls remaining until the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value is monitored before the game is restricted when the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value. When the number of remaining balls becomes "+0 shots" due to the payout of prize balls based on the entry of game balls into the general prize winning opening 2001, the stop flag is turned ON when the amount of payout balls reaches a specific value, Until a predetermined clear condition is satisfied, the game moves to a stop state and performs an action when progress is impossible. Then, at the point of transition to the stop state, the timing of the variable time is stopped (interrupted) so that the variable display of the special symbols being executed does not progress, the game is forced to stop, and the game restriction is started. are doing. Here, the function display unit 1400 in the case of stopping (interrupting) the clocking of the variable time so as not to progress the variable display of the special symbols being executed will be described. In the function display unit 1400, the LED in the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator continues blinking (control mode during variable display) (variation time is not counted, so it blinks until the clear condition is satisfied) continue). However, in the function display unit 1400, the LEDs in the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device may be all lit or all extinguished instead of blinking. In this case, not limited to the LED of the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator, other LEDs in the function display unit 1400 (status indicator, normal symbol indicator, normal pending indicator, first special pending number LEDs such as indicators, second special pending number indicators, and round indicators) are also all lit, all lit, or all extinguished. Further, when the function display unit 1400 is provided with an LED dedicated to informing that the game has been stopped, the LED dedicated to informing that the game has been stopped may be turned on, and the other LEDs may be turned off. Note that the remaining variable time after stopping (interrupting) the measurement of the variable time is stored in the RAM built in the main control board 1310 .

As shown in FIG. 117(G), the number of remaining balls until the number of balls to be paid out reaches a specific value by paying out prize balls based on the game balls entering the general prize winning opening 2001 during the variable display of the special symbols. becomes "+0 shots", in the upper area of the effect display device 1600, as an operation at the time of prior notification, the number of balls remaining until the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value is communicated "remaining +0 shots until the game limit". is displayed for a predetermined time (5 seconds in this example). Here, just before the number of remaining balls until the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value becomes "+0 shots", the variable display of the decorative pattern and the variable display of the second decorative pattern are performed. When the number of balls remaining until reaching a specific value reaches "+0", the variable display of the decorative pattern is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stop pattern ("767" in this example), and the second The variable display of decorative symbols is forcibly stopped at a predetermined stop symbol ("x" in this example). Then, when a predetermined time (in this example, 5 seconds) has passed after the display of the advance notice display of "remaining +0 shots until game limit" is displayed, an image corresponding to the stopping state shown in FIG. 117(H) is displayed.

In this example, the contents of the advance notice display displayed on the effect display device 1600 are reflected in the content of the advance notice display by the amount of the prize balls paid out by the game balls entering the general prize winning opening 2001. Regarding the content, it is not the time when the game ball enters the general winning hole 2001 when the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value, but a predetermined time (this In the example, it is displayed continuously until 5 seconds) elapses. As a result, information about whether or not the amount of balls put out has reached a specific value is not overlooked, and the player can surely recognize the reason for starting the stop state after that. Also, just before the number of remaining balls until the number of balls to be played reaches a specific value becomes "+0 shots", an advance notice display of "+10 shots remaining until game limit" is displayed. Regarding the prize balls (15 in this example) paid out by the game balls entering, even if the number of prize balls exceeds the number of balls remaining until the number of prize balls reaches a specific value, the excess prize balls ( In this example, 5 pieces) are paid out. As a result, even though the game balls enter the general winning hole 2001, the number of prize balls exceeding a specific value is not paid out, and the player is less likely to be dissatisfied. can be done. However, if it is important to monitor the number of balls to be played from the viewpoint of fraud prevention, the number of prize balls exceeding a specific value may not be paid out.

In the above, the contents of the advance notice display are displayed continuously until the amount of prize balls is reflected in the contents of the advance notice display, not when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value. However, the game may be terminated and an image corresponding to the stop state may be displayed when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value. In other words, the image shown in FIG. 117(G) may not be displayed, and the process may proceed to the image shown in FIG. 117(H), which will be described later. As a result, when the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value, the game shifts to the stopped state, and at the same time, by displaying an image corresponding to the stopped state, it is possible to immediately grasp that the state has shifted to the stopped state. can.

In addition, when the amount of balls released reaches a specific value, the state shifts to the stop state and the game is restricted, so that the player does not accidentally shoot the game ball, an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed. It is preferable that the player cannot see the "right hit" arrow that promotes the shooting of the game ball after being hit, and is erased in this example. Also, under other circumstances, the number of balls released reaches a specific value while displaying a display that encourages the shooting of game balls (e.g. right-handed display, left-handed display, Aim for the V! display, etc.) In this case, at that time, the display prompting the shooting of the game ball is made invisible to the player (erased).

As shown in FIG. 117(H), when the number of balls put out reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, the effect display device 1600 displays an image corresponding to the stopping state. As an image corresponding to the stop state, a message "Game limit" is displayed, accompanied by "The game is restricted because the limit of 80000 balls per day has been reached.", "Please call a staff member." The checkout button is active." is displayed. The settlement button here means the count button switch 180 for executing settlement processing. In addition, when the amount of balls to be played reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays a stop pattern of the decorative pattern, a stop pattern of the second decorative pattern, a pending display, or a pre-announcement display. Regarding the information, when the message "Play limit" is displayed after the amount of balls released reaches a specific value, it will not be displayed (make it invisible), and the message will be displayed on the darkened screen. there is As a result, it is possible to grasp that the number of balls put out has reached a specific value and that the game is restricted, and it is possible to grasp that the game restriction cannot be released without the operation of the hall manager. . Also, it can be understood that the number of balls held by the player can be calculated by operating the counting button switch 180 .

In the above description, before the number of balls to be put out reaches a specific value, the effect display device 1600 displays the stop design of the decorative design, the stop design of the second decorative design, the pending display, and the advance notification display. Such game-related information is executed in such a way that it becomes unrecognizable when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value. However, when the number of paid balls reaches a specific value, part of the game-related information may be made unrecognizable, and other information may be made recognizable. For example, since the advance notice display is information on whether or not to execute the game restriction, it is made unrecognizable, and the decorative pattern stop pattern, the second decorative pattern stop pattern, and the pending display are: You may make it recognizable. This makes it possible to grasp under what circumstances the amount of paid balls reached the specific value even after the amount of paid balls has reached the specific value.

Here, when the game ball enters the general prize winning port 2001 during the variable display of the special symbols and the amount of the game balls reaches a specific value, the game ball enters the big prize winning port 2005 during the big win game. By doing so, as in the case where the number of balls paid out reaches a specific value, the action when progress is impossible is executed, and an image corresponding to the stop state is displayed. In this way, when the amount of balls paid out reaches a specific value and the game is restricted, regardless of the trigger, a common notification is made to the effect that the game has shifted to the stop state. can be grasped with certainty.

In this example, in order to satisfy a predetermined clear condition for terminating the stop state, it is necessary to turn on the power again according to a predetermined power-on pattern after the power has been turned off. Here, as the power-on pattern at the time of power-on, when a power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and maintains the number of balls output and the stop state is selected (in this example, in the limit clear pattern table 1 If power-on patterns 1, 4, 5, power-on patterns 4, 5 in the limit clear pattern table 2, and power-on patterns 1, 4, 5 in the limit clear pattern table 3 are selected), the game state at the time of power shutdown is cleared. When a power-on pattern is selected to (initialize) and to clear (initialize) the ball payout amount and the stop state (in this example, power-on patterns 2 and 3 in limit clear pattern table 1, limit clear pattern table 2 If power-on patterns 2 and 3 in , or power-on pattern 3 in the restriction clear pattern table 3 is selected), the power is turned on to maintain the gaming state at the time of power off and to clear (initialize) the amount of balls and the stop state. A case where a pattern is selected (in this example, a case where power-on pattern 1 in the restricted clear pattern table 2 and power-on pattern 2 in the restricted clear pattern table 3 are selected) will be described.

First, after shifting to the stop state, when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off, if a power-on pattern is selected that maintains the game state at the time of the power cut-off, as well as the number of balls output and the stop state, the stop state is selected. 117(H) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 again.

In addition, after moving to the stop state, when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the power-on pattern clears (initializes) the game state at the time of power cut-off, as well as clears (initializes) the amount of balls and the stop state. When it is selected, the number of balls to be put out and the stopped state are cleared (initialized), and the restriction on the game as the stopped state is released. Here, when clearing (initializing) the amount of paid balls and the stop state, all information related to calculation of the amount of paid balls, such as the counter for stopping, the number of payouts, and the number of shots, is cleared (initialized). In addition, information on the remaining variable time when interrupted at the time of transition to the stop state, information on "Renso Mode" (high probability state), information on hold, after moving to the stop state or power off However, when the power is turned off and then turned back on, information about the remaining variable time when such an interruption occurs, information about "Renso Mode" (high probability state), and information about suspension will be lost. By doing so, it is assumed to start in a low-probability state with no hold. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 117(I), the effect display device 1600 displays an initial image in which there is no pending display and the decorative symbols are stopped at the initial symbols.

On the other hand, if you select a power-on pattern that maintains the game state at the time of power-off and clears (initializes) the amount of balls and the stop state when the power is turned off and then turned back on after moving to the stop state. , the amount of balls to be put out and the stopped state are cleared (initialized), so that the restriction on the game as the stopped state is lifted. In addition, information on the remaining variable time when interrupted at the time of transition to the stop state, information on "Renso Mode" (high probability state), information on hold, after moving to the stop state or power off However, even when the power is turned off and then turned back on, information about the remaining variable time at the time of such interruption, information about "Renso mode" (high probability state), and information about suspension are maintained. By doing so, it is assumed that there is a high probability state, that there is a hold, and that the state is restarted in the middle of the previous fluctuation. In other words, at the point of transition to the stop state, the remaining variable time when the timing of the variable time is stopped (interrupted) is stored in the RAM built in the main control board 1310, but the power is turned on again. After that, the variable display of the decorative design and the variable display of the second decorative design are executed for the remaining variable time. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 117(I′), the effect display device 1600 restores and displays the image relating to the “Renso mode” (high-probability state), and the variable display of the decorative pattern based on the information relating to the suspension. And the variable display of the second decorative pattern is restarted. If you select a power-on pattern that clears (initializes) the amount of balls and the stop state, it is recommended that you return to the previous game before returning the various effects displays after turning the power off and then turning it back on. A special return notification (image and sound to the effect that the game will return to the state before the game restriction) may be performed.

Also, in the above, when the amount of paid balls reaches a specific value during the jackpot game, the stopping state is immediately generated. Alternatively, the start timing of the stopping state may be delayed until the end of the big win game. That is, in the middle of a plurality of rounds in the jackpot game, when the amount of output balls reaches a specific value, the jackpot game may be continued until the end of the final round. In such a case, even after the amount of payout balls reaches a specific value, the payout amount of prize balls increases the amount of payout balls, but such an increase in the amount of payout balls is allowed. In addition, after waiting for the end of the jackpot game, the game enters a stopping state accompanied by "game stop" and "fire stop". As a result, the game is not restricted in the middle of the jackpot game, and there is no disadvantage in obtaining prize balls, so that the player is less likely to be dissatisfied.

In addition, in the above-described fourth embodiment, a game machine (a so-called enclosed game machine, a management game machine) that circulates and uses game balls without paying out prize balls as real balls outside the game machine will be described. However, the above-mentioned "technique for generating a stop state based on the amount of played balls (amounts of played balls A, B)" is not limited to such types of gaming machines, but can be applied to conventional type gaming machines A type of game machine that pays out prize balls). In addition, when applying to a conventional type game machine, it is preferable to set the occurrence timing of the stop state and the game control during the stop state as follows.

That is, the conventional type game machine has a payout control board instead of the frame control board 740, and the payout control board uses the game balls stored in the ball tank on the back side of the game machine as prize balls. It is common to be able to control the dispensing device that dispenses out. Then, the prize balls put out to the ball receiving tray on the front side of the game machine are given to the player as actual balls. A larger time lag occurs than in a game machine of a type in which game balls are circulated until the game balls are paid out. In particular, it is conceivable that a plurality of game balls enter the big winning hole 2005 during the jackpot game and many of the winning balls are stored as unpaid. Even after the start of , there is a possibility that many prize balls will remain unpaid and stored. In such a case, as in the above-described fourth embodiment, the game (main game) on the main control board 1310 side is stopped with the start of the stop state, and at the same time the payout process on the payout control board is performed. If the game is also stopped, there is a risk that the player will not be able to obtain the profit that the player should originally obtain (the prize balls that are stored as unpaid). Therefore, in the case of applying the "technique for generating a stop state based on the amount of paid balls (amounts of paid balls A and B)" to a conventional type gaming machine, the following two patterns of control methods are conceivable.

First, as the first pattern, the "number of payouts" to be calculated by the stop counter is set to the number of actually paid out. Specifically, a ball sensor for detecting the number of game balls sent out by the payout device toward the ball receiving tray is provided, and the detection result of the ball sensor is reflected in the "number of payouts." As a result, the number of unpaid prize balls can be reduced as compared with calculating the stopping counter based on the prize ball information in the main control board 1310 .

Further, as a second pattern, even if the game is stopped in the stop state, only "payout of unpaid prize balls" continues. The game is completely stopped when there are no more unpaid prize balls. Note that the second pattern may be used together with the first pattern.

[11. Game board of the second embodiment]
Next, the game board 5 of the second embodiment, which is different from the game board 5 shown in FIG. 96 and the like, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 124 and the like. Here, the same components as those of the game board 5 shown in FIG. FIG. 118 is a front view of a game board of the second embodiment, which is different from the game board of FIG. 96 in which the transparent center accessories and the like are made opaque. 119 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 118 as seen from the front right, FIG. 120 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 118 as seen from the front left, and FIG. 121 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 118 as seen from the rear. It is a diagram. 122 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 118 disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 123 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 118 disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear. It is a diagram. FIG. 124 is a front view of the game board showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls circulate by cutting the front unit parallel to the surface of the game panel.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by the player operating a handle 160. - 特許庁In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning port 2001, a normal prize winning port 2002, and a first starting prize winning port 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, addition of a predetermined number of balls) to the player by receiving or passing the game ball B. An opening 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a big winning opening 2005, and a V winning opening 2010 are provided. This game board 5 is designed so that the game ball B can be received in the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. This is for performing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 160 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a are enjoyed.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100, a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIG. 154) for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a, and vibrations for detecting vibrations acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1). and a sensor 1040 (see FIG. 154). A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a.

In addition, the game board 5 includes a film-like decoration cell 1130 which is provided behind the transparent game panel 1100 and which decorates the inside of the game area 5a, and a cell fixing which supports the decoration cell 1130 on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A piece 1131, a back box 3010 of a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game performed by hitting a game ball B attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 154, etc.) for controlling the contents.

In addition, unlike the game board 5 of the first embodiment, the game board 5 of the second embodiment is not provided with the board holder 1200, and the lower wall portion of the back box 3010 and the lower part of the rear wall portion has a function that replaces the substrate holder 1200 .

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A panel relay board (not shown) that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. and a back unit 3000 to be mounted.

A production display device 1600 is provided on the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is provided on the rear surface of the production display device 1600. - 特許庁

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open and are capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. A normal prize winning opening 2002 which is always open to accept the game ball B, and a third opening which is provided in the center in the horizontal direction below the center accessory 2500 and is always open to accept the game ball B. A first starting port 2003, a second starting port 2004 which enables the reception of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning prize port 2002, and a first starting port. It is possible to accept the game ball B according to the lottery result of the first special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B to 2003 and the second special pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B to the second start port 2004. and a loss opening 2009 or a V winning opening 2010 in which the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 can be received. The game board 5 also includes a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 (see FIGS. 87 and 154) for detecting magnetism acting illegally within the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided at the most downstream in the game area 5a, is always open to receive the game ball B, and discharges the received game ball B to the outside of the game area 5a without returning it. The out port 1008 is provided upstream of the out port 2020 in the game area 5a, and is always open to receive the game ball B, and the received game ball B is not returned to the outside of the game area 5a. and a sub-out port 2021 for discharging. Out port 1008 is provided directly below first start port 2003 . In addition, the sub-out port 2021 is provided at a portion to the left of the center in the left-right direction in the lower portion of the game area 5a.

Furthermore, the front unit 2000 includes a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2003 attached directly above the lower end of the playing area 5a in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and a front surface of the starting opening unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is provided along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the view and has three general prize-winning ports 2001 and a sub-out port 2021, and a side unit 2200 that is provided slightly above the left side of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. a side upper left unit 2300, and a frame having a normal winning opening 2002, a big winning opening 2005, a losing opening 2009, and a V winning opening 2010, which are provided slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a. and a center accessory 2500 having a shape.

The back unit 3000 includes a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 for detecting magnetism acting illegally in the game area 5a, a vibration sensor 1040 for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), and a rear surface of the game panel 1100. A back box 3010 having a box-like shape with an open front and having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall, and a lock slider 3020 detachably attaching a performance display device 1600 to the rear wall of the back box 3010. and a back substrate unit 3040 arranged behind the performance display device 1600 and attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. - 特許庁

In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guide unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 circulates, and the back ball in the back box 3010. A back decoration unit 3200 provided behind the guiding unit 3100, a back front effect unit 3300 provided above the back ball guiding unit 3100 near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back front effect in the back box 3010. and a rear back effect unit 3400 provided behind the unit 3300. - 特許庁

[11-1. Front component]
The front constituent member 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 to 130 and the like. 125(a) is a front perspective view of an assembly having the front component, the game panel and the front unit in the game board of FIG. 118, and FIG. Fig. 2 is a rear perspective view of the assembly with panel and table unit; 126 is an exploded perspective view of the assembly shown in FIG. 125 disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 127 is an exploded perspective view of the assembly shown in FIG. It is an exploded perspective view. 128 is an explanatory diagram showing a plan view of the assembly shown in FIG. 125 cut in the middle in the vertical direction. FIG. 129 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member and the game panel exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 130 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member and the game panel exploded and viewed from the back.

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. In addition, as shown in FIG. 128, etc., the front component member 1000 is recessed forward from the rear end face forward to a depth at which the game panel 1100 can be accommodated. Mounted on. When the game panel 1100 is attached, the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the rear end surface of the front component member 1000 are flush with each other.

The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc from a lower end on the left side of the center in the front view in a front view along the circumferential direction in a clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc from the lower center in the left and right direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out-guiding portion 1003 in front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact part 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame.

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the crime prevention concave portion 1009 protrudes to the rear of the crime prevention cover (not shown) on the door frame 3. A state in which the projecting piece (illustration is omitted) is inserted is reached. As a result, the gap between the crime prevention cover and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a state of being intricately bent by the rear projecting piece of the security cover and the crime prevention recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through the gap between the crime prevention cover and the front component 1000 from the lower front, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece or the crime prevention recess 1009, and the game area 5a will be blocked. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 matches the notch 1122 of the game panel 1100 . This notch 1010 penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch 1122 and passes through the lower normal payout passage and the lower part of the lower full-ball path unit when attached to the body frame of a pachinko machine that pays out game balls to a player. The front end opening of the full tank payout passage faces forward to supply game balls to the upper tray and the lower tray of the door frame.

Further, the front structural member 1000 is formed in the upper left corner in a front view, and has a function display unit attachment portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, a certificate stamp attachment portion 1012 formed in the lower right corner, and a A game board first information display section 1015 provided, a game board second information display section 1020 provided in the upper left corner, and a game board third information display section 1025 provided in the lower left corner. ing.

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent, so that the game panel 1100, the back unit 3000, and the like arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[11-1a. Game board first information display section]
Next, the game board first information display portion 1015 in the front component 1000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 131 and the like. FIG. 131(a) is an enlarged perspective view of the first game board information display portion of the front component, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first information display portion of the game board. (c) is an exploded perspective view of the first information display portion of the game board and the first information sticker pedestal; (d) is the first information sticker attached to the first information sticker; 1 is a front perspective view of one information seal pedestal; FIG.

A first information seal pedestal 1016 is attached to the first information display portion 1015 of the game board 5 to which a first information seal 1017 describing information relating to the game board 5 is attached. The first information sticker 1017 describes, for example, the model name and specifications of the game board 5 .

The first game board information display section 1015 is provided at the upper right corner on the front surface of the front component 1000 . The first game board information display portion 1015 extends in an arc along the outer circumference of the game area 5a so as to continue rightward and downward from the right end side of the blocking portion 1006 . The game board first information display portion 1015 includes a housing recess 1015a shallowly recessed from the front surface of the front component 1000, two rectangular insertion holes 1015b penetrating the bottom surface of the housing recess 1015a in the front and rear direction, and the housing recess 1015a. Two round positioning holes 1015c are provided on the bottom surface.

In addition, the game board first information display portion 1015 is provided with two locking ribs 1015d extending rearward from the outside of one side in each of the rectangular insertion holes 1015b. The locking rib 1015d extends rearward to about half the depth of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 131(b), the two locking ribs 1015d extend rearward from the outer sides of the two insertion holes 1015b on the far side. In other words, the insertion hole 1015b is provided between (inside) the two locking ribs 1015d.

The first information sticker pedestal 1016 has a flat base plate 1016a to which the first information sticker 1017 is attached on the front surface and which is accommodated from the front in the accommodation recess 1015a of the first information display portion 1015 of the game board. In addition, the first information seal pedestal 1016 has two locking claws 1016b extending rearward from the rear surface of the base plate 1016a and passing through the insertion holes 1015b, the rear ends of which are locked to the locking ribs 1015d. . As shown in FIG. 131(b), the locking claw 1016b extends rearward to near the rear end of the front component 1000 while being locked to the locking rib 1015d.

The first information seal pedestal 1016 also includes positioning projections 1016c that protrude from the rear surface of the base plate 1016a and are inserted into positioning holes 1015c, and stripping holes 1016d that penetrate front and back near the upper and lower ends of the base plate 1016a. and have. With the first information sticker 1017 attached to the front surface of the base plate 1016a, the peeling hole 1016d is opened by inserting a stick from the rear side and pushing the first information sticker 1017 forward. It is possible to peel off a part of it, making it easy to reuse.

The first information seal pedestal 1016 is provided in a color different from that of the front component 1000 (for example, black, blue, red, etc.). As a result, in manufacturing the game board 5, it is easy to notice that the first information sticker pedestal 1016 (the first information sticker 1017) is not attached.

Since the first information sticker pedestal 1016 can be attached to and detached from the front of the game board first information display unit 1015, when the front constituent member 1000 is reused, the first information sticker 1017 attached to the first information sticker 1017 can be displayed. The seal pedestal 1016 should be replaced. When removing the first information seal pedestal 1016, since the two locking claws 1016b are positioned between the two locking ribs 1015d, the rear ends of the two locking claws 1016b can be removed from the rear side of the front component member 1000. can be easily released from the engagement with the engagement rib 1015d by pinching them with fingers and bringing them closer to each other. Although illustration is omitted, the back of the first information display part 1015 of the game board is closed by the game panel 1100, and when removing the first information seal pedestal 1016, it is necessary to remove the game panel 1100 from the front structural member 1000. be.

In addition, since the first information sticker pedestal 1016 is provided with a peeling hole 1016d, when the first information sticker pedestal 1016 is reused or separated for disposal, a stick can be inserted into the peeling hole 1016d from behind to remove the first information. By pushing the seal 1017 forward, the first information seal 1017 can be easily peeled off.

Furthermore, since the base plate 1016a of the first information seal pedestal 1016 is housed in the housing recess 1015a, fingers, tools, etc. are less likely to get caught on the first information seal pedestal 1016 from the front. This makes it difficult to replace the first information sticker pedestal 1016 with the first information sticker 1017 on which fraudulent information that is different from the official one is affixed. can be enhanced.

[11-1b. Game board second information display section]
Next, the game board second information display portion 1020 in the front component member 1000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 132 and the like. FIG. 132(a) is an enlarged perspective view of the second information display portion of the game board in the front component, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second information display portion of the game board. (c) is an exploded perspective view of the second information display part of the game board and the second information sticker pedestal; (d) is the second information sticker attached to the second information sticker; FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the two-information seal base;

The game board second information display portion 1020 is provided with a second information seal pedestal 1021 to which a second information seal 1022 describing information about the game board 5 is attached. The second information seal 1022 describes the copyright of the game board 5, for example.

The game board second information display section 1020 is provided above the function display unit 1400 at the upper left corner of the front surface of the front component 1000 . The game board second information display portion 1020 is formed in a vertically elongated diamond shape along the outer periphery of the game area 5a. This game board second information display portion 1020 includes a housing recess 1020a that is shallowly recessed from the front surface of the front component 1000, and two rectangular insertion holes that penetrate front and back along the upper and lower sides of the bottom surface of the housing recess 1020a. 1020b and are provided.

Further, the game board second information display portion 1020 is provided with a locking rib 1020c extending rearward in a flat plate shape from the outer portion of the upper side of the housing recess 1020a in the upper insertion hole 1020b. The locking rib 1020c extends rearward to about half the depth of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. Further, the game board second information display portion 1020 includes a guide recess 1020d that is recessed upward from the lower surface side of the locking rib 1020c and that is open forward. As shown in FIG. 132(b), the guide recess 1020d is inclined downward toward the rear.

The second information seal pedestal 1021 has a flat base plate 1021a to which the second information seal 1022 is attached on the front surface and which is housed in the housing recess 1020a of the game board second information display portion 1020 from the front. In addition, the second information seal pedestal 1021 includes a locking claw 1021b extending rearward from the upper end of the rear surface of the base plate 1021a and having a rear end locked to the locking rib 1020c through the upper insertion hole 1020b, It has an L-shaped locking portion 1021c which extends short rearward from the lower end of the rear surface of the base plate 1021a and then extends downward and which is inserted into the lower insertion hole 1020b. As shown in FIG. 132(b), the locking claw 1021b extends rearward to near the rear end of the front component 1000 while being locked to the locking rib 1020c. In addition, the locking portion 1021c is locked to the rear side of the plate-like portion forming the front surface of the front component 1000 at its L-shaped tip.

Further, the second information seal pedestal 1021 has peeling holes 1021d penetrating back and forth near the upper and lower ends of the base plate 1021a. With the second information sticker 1022 attached to the front surface of the base plate 1021a, the peeling hole 1021d is opened by inserting a stick from the rear side and pushing the second information sticker 1022 forward. It is possible to peel off the end of the tape, making it easy to reuse.

The second information seal pedestal 1021 is provided in a color different from that of the front component 1000 (for example, black, blue, red, etc.). As a result, in manufacturing the game board 5, it is easy for the player to notice that the second information sticker pedestal 1021 (the second information sticker 1022) is not attached.

Since the second information sticker pedestal 1021 can be attached to and detached from the front of the game board second information display unit 1020, when the front component 1000 is reused, the second information sticker 1022 attached to the second information sticker 1022 can be displayed. The seal pedestal 1021 should be replaced. When removing the second information seal pedestal 1021, the tip of a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver is inserted into the guide recess 1020d from the front. By pressing, the locking between the locking rib 1020c and the locking claw 1021b can be released, and the second information seal pedestal 1021 can be removed forward. Note that when the second information seal pedestal 1021 is removed from the front using a tool, traces are likely to remain in the guide recess 1020d.

As for other removal of the second information seal pedestal 1021, by operating the locking claw 1021b from the rear side of the front component 1000, the locking with the locking rib 1020c is released and removed. In this case, although illustration is omitted, the back of the second information display portion 1020 of the game board is closed by the game panel 1100. Therefore, when removing the second information seal pedestal 1021, the game panel 1100 must be removed from the front component member 1000. must be removed.

In addition, since the second information sticker pedestal 1021 is provided with a peeling hole 1021d, when the second information sticker pedestal 1021 is reused or separated and discarded, a stick can be inserted into the peeling hole 1021d from behind to remove the second information. By pushing the seal 1022 forward, the second information seal 1022 can be easily peeled off.

Furthermore, since the base plate 1021a of the second information seal pedestal 1021 is housed in the housing recess 1020a, fingers, tools, etc. are less likely to get caught on the second information seal pedestal 1021 from the front. This makes it difficult to replace the second information sticker pedestal 1021 with the second information sticker 1022 on which fraudulent information different from the official one is affixed, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud. can be enhanced.

[11-1c. Game board third information display section]
Next, the game board third information display portion 1025 in the front component member 1000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 133 and the like. FIG. 133(a) is an enlarged perspective view of the portion of the third information display portion of the game board in the front structural member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the portion of the third information display portion of the game board. (c) is an exploded perspective view of the third information display portion of the game board and the third information sticker pedestal; It is the perspective view which looked at the three-information seal base from the front.

The game board third information display portion 1025 is provided with a third information seal pedestal 1026 to which a third information seal 1027 describing information about the game board 5 is stuck. The third information seal 1027 describes, for example, the manufacturer of the game board 5 and the like.

The game board third information display portion 1025 is provided above the notch portion 1010 at the lower left corner of the front surface of the front component member 1000 . The game board third information display portion 1025 is formed in a substantially square shape. The game board third information display portion 1025 is provided with a housing recess 1025a that is shallowly recessed from the front surface of the front component 1000, and three rectangular insertion holes 1025b that penetrate the bottom surface of the housing recess 1025a in the front-rear direction. ing. One of the three insertion holes 1025b is provided in the center along the upper side of the accommodation recess 1025a, and the remaining two are provided along the lower side of the accommodation recess 1025a so as to be spaced apart from each other.

Further, the game board third information display portion 1025 is provided with a locking rib 1025c extending rearward in a flat plate shape from the outer portion of the upper side of the housing recess 1025a in the upper insertion hole 1025b. The locking rib 1025c extends rearward to about half the depth of the front structural member 1000. As shown in FIG. Further, the game board third information display portion 1025 includes a guide recess 1025d that is recessed upward from the lower surface side of the locking rib 1025c and that is open forward. As shown in FIG. 133(b), the guide recess 1025d is inclined downward toward the rear.

The third information sticker pedestal 1026 has a flat base plate 1026a to which the third information sticker 1027 is attached on the front surface and which is accommodated from the front in the accommodation recess 1025a of the third information display portion 1025 of the game board. In addition, the third information seal pedestal 1026 has a locking claw 1026b extending rearward from the upper end of the rear surface of the base plate 1026a. I have. As shown in FIG. 133(b), the locking claw 1026b has its rear end extending rearward to near the rear end of the front component 1000 while being locked to the locking rib 1025c.

In addition, the third information seal pedestal 1026 is separated in the left-right direction along the lower end of the rear surface of the base plate 1021a, and has two L-shaped latches that extend short rearward and then downward. A portion 1026c is provided. The locking portion 1026c is inserted into the lower insertion hole 1020b and then locked to the rear side of the plate-like portion forming the front surface of the front component 1000 at its L-shaped tip.

The third information seal pedestal 1026 is provided in a color different from that of the front component member 1000 (for example, black, blue, red, etc.). As a result, in manufacturing the game board 5, it is easy for the player to notice that the third information sticker pedestal 1026 (the third information sticker 1027) is not attached.

Since the third information sticker pedestal 1026 can be attached to and detached from the front of the game board third information display unit 1025, when the front component member 1000 is reused, the third information sticker 1027 attached to the third information sticker 1027 can be displayed. The seal pedestal 1026 should be replaced. When removing the third information seal pedestal 1026, the tip of a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver is inserted into the guide recess 1025d from the front. By pressing, the locking between the locking rib 1025c and the locking claw 1026b can be released, and the third information seal pedestal 1026 can be removed forward. Note that when the third information seal pedestal 1026 is removed from the front using a tool, traces are likely to remain in the guide recess 1025d.

As another method for removing the third information seal pedestal 1026, by operating the locking claw 1026b from the rear side of the front component 1000, the locking rib 1025c is released and removed. In this case, although illustration is omitted, the back of the third information display portion 1025 of the game board is closed by the game panel 1100. Therefore, when removing the third information seal pedestal 1026, the game panel 1100 must be removed from the front component member 1000. must be removed.

In addition, since the base plate 1026a of the third information seal pedestal 1026 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 1025a, fingers, tools, etc. are less likely to be caught on the third information seal pedestal 1026 from the front. This makes it difficult to replace the third information sticker pedestal 1026 with the third information sticker 1027 on which fraudulent information different from the official one is affixed, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraud. can be enhanced.

[11-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly smaller than the outer periphery of the front component 1000, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin in a flat plate shape. This game panel 1100 is attached by being fitted into a recessed portion on the rear side of the front structural member 1000 from behind. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 .

The game panel 1100 is made of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The board thickness of this game panel 1100 is thinner than the board thickness of a wooden game panel, which is about 20 mm. The minimum possible thickness is about 10 mm. In addition, in this embodiment, it is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The game panel 1100 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating back and forth. Each opening 1112 is provided at a site corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000, the starting port unit 2100 in the front unit 2000, the side unit 2200, and the center accessory 2500. At the opening 1112 corresponding to the out port 1008, the portion of the game panel 1100 below the opening 1112 is recessed forward from the rear surface. In other words, the thickness of the portion below the opening 1112 is reduced.

This game panel 1100 is provided with a large opening 1112 for mounting the center accessory 2500 offset above the center in a front view, and is formed into a frame shape by the presence of the opening 1112. However, as shown in the figure, since the frame is not interrupted, it has sufficient strength and rigidity.

Since this game panel 1100 is transparently formed together with the front structural member 1000 attached to the front side, when assembled on the game board 5, it is possible to reduce the boundary of the game area 5a from being clearly visible. It is possible to give a sense of openness to the player, and to make the game area 5a appear larger (wider) to the player, although the actual size of the game area 5a does not change.

In addition, since the game panel 1100 is made transparent together with the front structural member 1000, the light from the effect display device 1600, the front unit 2000, the back unit 3000, etc. is reflected or refracted forward (toward the player). By doing so, it can be made to appear to emit light, and the overall decorativeness of the game board 5 can be further enhanced.

Although detailed description is omitted, the game panel 1100 includes a front component member 1000, a cell fixing piece 1131 for supporting the decoration cell 1130, a front unit 2000 such as a starting unit 2100 and a center accessory 2500. , the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, etc. are provided with a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting and positioning.

[11-3. Decoration cell]
The decorative cells 1130 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 to 128 and the like. The decoration cell 1130 is provided so as to be visible from the front through the transparent game panel 1100, and is for decorating the inside of the game area 5a.

The game board 5 of this embodiment is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100 in the game panel 1100, and includes a film-like decoration cell 1130 having a predetermined pattern and a panel plate 1110 which includes the decoration cell 1130 and the decoration cell 1130. and a cell fixing piece 1131 supported (attached) so as to be movably movable within a predetermined range.

The decoration cell 1130 is provided behind the area in which the game balls B circulate in the game area 5a (within the frame of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 when viewed from the front). The decoration cell 1130 covers substantially the entire circumference of the annular area between the periphery of the game area 5a and the inside of the frame of the center role 2500, except for the part where the second starting port 2004 of the center role 2500 is provided. is provided in In this embodiment, the decoration cell 1130 is divided into four. Specifically, the decoration cell 1130 is a part of the region from the vicinity of the backflow prevention member 1007 to between the starting port unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 between the inner rail 1002 and the center accessory 2500, and the lower right rail 1004. The area between the center accessory 2500 and the starting port unit 2100 to the right end, the area between the outer rail 1001 and the center accessory 2500 from the vicinity of the backflow prevention member 1007 to the blocking part 1006 and a portion between the right rail 1005 and the center accessory 2500 and the region between the blocking portion 1006 and the vicinity of the center in the vertical direction.

The decorative cell 1130 has an outer peripheral edge that extends further outward than the inner peripheral edge of the front component 1000 . In addition, the inner edge of the decoration cell 1130 extends into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 to the frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500, and overlaps the insertion portion 2511a in a front view. there is That is, the decoration cell 1130 closes the rear of the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the outer peripheral surface of the insertion portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500 . This makes it difficult to see the rear member through the gap.

126, the decoration cell 1130 has a support hole 1130a shaped like a long hole having semi-arcuate ends in the longitudinal direction and a round hole having a diameter larger than the width of the long hole. are provided multiple times. The decoration cell 1130 is supported by the game panel 1100 by attaching the cell fixing piece 1131 to the game panel 1100 through the support hole 1130a from behind. Also, the decoration cell 1130 is provided with an opening 1130b at a predetermined position through which a sensor, a game ball B, etc. can pass.

The support hole 1130a of the decoration cell 1130 is provided at a position that is difficult to see from the front when the game board 5 is assembled. Specifically, it is provided at a portion overlapping the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 in a front view. As a result, even if the game panel 1100 and the center accessory 2500 are transparent, the presence of the front structural member 1000 makes it difficult to see the rear, so that the support hole 1130a and the cell fixing piece 1131 can be made difficult to see. The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

The decorative cell 1130 also has a positioning hole 1130c into which a positioning pin 2510a protruding rearward from the rear end surface of the center accessory 2500 is inserted (see FIG. 128, etc.). Two positioning holes 1130c are provided for one decorative cell 1130, one of which is a round hole and the other is an elongated hole. The positioning pin 2510a of the center accessory 2500 mainly protrudes rearward from an insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511, which will be described later. Protruding.

By inserting the positioning hole 1130c into the positioning pin 2510a of the center accessory 2500, the decorative cell 1130 maintains the positional relationship with the center accessory even if the decorative cell 1130 is supported by the game panel 1100 by the cell fixing piece 1131. It is possible to correct to the 2500 side, and the deviation from the decoration of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced. In addition, since one of the two positioning holes 1130c is an elongated hole, even if the decoration cell 1130 expands or contracts due to environmental changes such as temperature and humidity, the decoration cell 1130 does not wrinkle or crack. no.

As shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 126, the cell fixing piece 1131 consists of a rectangular flat body piece 1131a, a projection 1131b projecting short in a cylindrical shape from the center of the body piece 1131a, the projection 1131b and the body piece. It has a mounting hole 1131c passing through 1131a, and a pair of positioning pins 1131d projecting in a cylindrical shape from both sides of the body piece 1131a with the projection 1131b therebetween. The cell fixing piece 1131 is transparent so as not to stand out when assembled on the game board 5 .

The body piece 1131a of the cell fixing piece 1131 is formed in a size that substantially covers the support hole 1130a of the decorative cell 1130. As shown in FIG. The protrusion 1131b has a half diameter of the central round hole in the support hole 1130a of the decorative cell 1130 and protrudes slightly longer than the thickness of the decorative cell 1130 .

The mounting hole 1131c of the cell fixing piece 1131 is provided coaxially with the projecting portion 1131b, and a counterbore is provided on the side opposite to the projecting portion 1131b. This attachment hole 1131c is for attaching the cell fixing piece 1131 to the game panel 1100, and a countersunk head attachment screw is inserted through the attachment hole 1131c. The positioning pin 1131d protrudes from the body piece 1131a in the same direction as the projection 1131b longer than the projection 1131b. The positioning pin 1131d is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel 1100 to position the cell fixing piece 1131 at a predetermined position.

The decoration cell 1130 is arranged at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and a pair of positioning pins 1131d of the cell fixing piece 1131 is inserted through the support hole 1130a from behind to position the game panel 1100 correspondingly. inserted into the hole. As a result, the cell fixing piece 1131 is positioned at a predetermined position on the game panel, and the mounting hole 1131c of the cell fixing piece 1131 and the mounting hole of the game panel 1100 are positioned coaxially. In this state, the cell fixing piece 1131 can be attached to the game panel 1100 by screwing a mounting screw (not shown) into the mounting hole of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 1131c from behind the cell fixing piece 1131 and tightening it.

The decoration cell 1130 is a synthetic resin film having a thickness of 0.2 mm to 0.4 mm, and is printed with a predetermined pattern. The materials of the decoration cell 1130 include "polyethylene terephthalate resin", "polycarbonate resin", "ABS resin", "AES resin", "PMMA (polymethyl methacrylate) resin", "polypropylene resin", and "polyethylene resin." ", "polystyrene resin", "impact-resistant polystyrene resin", "polyvinyl chloride", and the like.

When the cell fixing piece 1131 is attached to the game panel 1100, a gap larger than the thickness of the decoration cell 1130 is formed between the main piece and the game panel 1100 by the protrusion. A gap is also formed between the inner periphery of the support hole 1130a of the decorative cell 1130 and the protrusion and the pair of positioning pins. Therefore, the decoration cell 1130 is supported behind the game panel 1100 so as to be movable within a predetermined range. That is, the decoration cell 1130 is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 with a predetermined amount of rattling. As a result, as compared with the case where the decoration cells 1130 are attached to the entire surface of the game panel 1100, it is possible to make it easier to install the decoration cells 1130 and to reduce the amount of the decoration cells 1130 used. Therefore, an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Also, since the decoration cells 1130 are provided on a part of the game panel 1100, the number of the decoration cells 1130 that can be removed from the resin sheet can be increased compared to the conventional cells attached to the game panel 1100. , the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

In addition, since the decoration cell 1130 is attached to the game panel 1100 with rattling through the cell fixing piece 1131, even if the decoration cell 1130 expands and contracts due to changes in temperature, humidity, etc., the game panel 1100 does not move. The difference in expansion and contraction can be absorbed by rattling. As a result, even if the decoration cell 1130 shrinks with respect to the game panel 1100, the decoration cell 1130 can be prevented from being wrinkled or cracked, and the decoration effect by the pattern of the decoration cell 1130 can be maintained. be able to.

In addition, the inner edge of the decorative cell 1130 is extended to the insertion portion 2511a of the center accessory 2500, the extended portion is provided with a positioning hole 1130c, and a positioning pin 2510a protruding from the insertion portion 2511a. Therefore, the misalignment between the decoration of the decoration cell 1130 and the decoration of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced as much as possible, and the decoration effect of the decoration cell 1130 can be enhanced.

Furthermore, since the decoration cell 1130 is attached to the game panel 1100 by the mounting screw through the cell fixing piece 1131, the decoration cell 1130 can be easily attached and detached from the game panel 1100. By replacing the pachinko machine 1, it is possible to easily respond to changes in specifications, models, designs, reuse, etc. of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1, and furthermore. By replacing the decoration cells 1130 with the decoration cells 1130 having a pattern with a high decoration effect, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high appeal to the players.

In addition, since the decoration cell 1130 is provided on the rear side of the transparent game panel 1100, the distance from the player to the decoration cell 1130 is longer than when it is provided on the front side of the game panel 1100. , it is possible to reduce the feeling of pressure on the player.

In addition, it is desirable that the decoration cell 1130 has translucency, and the design of the decoration cell 1130 can be illuminated by the light from the LEDs provided behind the game panel 1100 (the decoration cell 1130). Thus, the appearance of the game area 5a can be improved, and the luminous decoration of the decoration cells 1130 can strongly attract the player's interest, and the appeal of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

[11-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 . The main control unit 1300 contains a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 154) for controlling game content and awarding of benefits to the player, and a main control board 1310 which is attached to the back box 3010. box 1320;

The main control board box 1320 includes a board base 1330 attached to the back box 3010 and having the main control board 1310 attached to the rear surface thereof, and a board cover 1340 attached to the board base 1330 so as to cover the main control board 1310 from the rear. , consists of Substrate base 1330 and substrate cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate. A main control board 1310 is accommodated in the internal space formed by the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340 . Since the substrate base 1330 and the substrate cover 1340 are made of transparent polycarbonate, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be checked. ) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320 .

In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms 1350 corresponding to the board base 1330 and the board cover 1340. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism 1350, Next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism 1350, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 760, the out ball sensor 605, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002, a first starting opening sensor 3003, a second starting opening sensor 2505, a large winning opening sensor 2506, and a V winning opening sensor 2507. , loss opening sensor 2504, starting opening solenoid 2412, attacker solenoid 2414, distribution solenoid 2537, magnetic sensor 1030, vibration sensor 1040, and the like.

The main control board 1310 also has a base monitor 1311 consisting of four 7-segment LEDs (see FIG. 154). Base monitor 1311 is visible from the rear through transparent substrate cover 1340 . This base monitor 1311 is ejected downward from the game board 5 after the game ball B shot by the ball shooting unit 550 is hit into the game area 5a, and is sent to the circulating ball path unit 600 of the main body frame 4. It displays the number of game balls B counted by being detected by the provided out-ball sensor 605 . The base monitor 1311 of this embodiment displays the number of balls counted by the out-ball sensor 605 after 100 shots (the number of balls returned to the game hall side) as a percentage.

[11-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 118 and the like. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player's side) through the game window 101 of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1 . This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the lottery result of normal symbols, the lottery result of special symbols, and the like. .

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 displays a state indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game state, and a lottery result of a normal symbol drawn by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002. A normal symbol display consisting of two LEDs to be displayed and a normal reservation display consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to acceptance of the game balls B to the normal winning opening 2002 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the lottery result of the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2003, and a first starting A first special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the opening 2003, and a second special design drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004. A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs that displays the lottery result, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004 and have.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the lottery result of the second special symbol is "win". A round indicator consisting of an LED.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

[11-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 121 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is provided behind the performance display device 1600 provided behind the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . More specifically, the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 which attaches the performance display device 1600 to the rear surface of the back box 3010 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 154) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. box 1520; The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, etc., and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 250, various decoration boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, etc. (see FIG. 111). The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the performance display device 1600, although the details will be described later.

[11-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010. - 特許庁The performance display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the transparent game panel 1100 and the frame-like center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 .

The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED as a backlight, and is mounted on the front surface of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 in a horizontally long state. The effect display device 1600 is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixed pieces 1611 protruding upward from the upper end surface and one lower fixed piece 1612 protruding downward from the lower end surface. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in two fixed grooves 3010c opening in the upper inner peripheral surface of the opening 3010a of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two upper fixing pieces 1611, the lower fixing piece 1612 side is moved forward, the lower fixing piece 1612 is inserted into the opening of the lock slider 3020, and the lock slider 3020 is slid leftward in rear view. By doing so, it is attached to the back box 3010 .

[11-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 125 to 127 and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front, and the front end projects forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear end partially projects into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. there is

The table unit 2000 is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a, and a plurality of (three in this case) general winning openings 2001 which are always open to accept the game ball B hit into the game area 5a. A normal winning opening 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B, and a first start opening 2003 that is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and is always open to accept the game ball B. , A second start port 2004 that enables the acceptance of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal pattern drawn by receiving the game ball B in the normal winning port 2002, and the game ball to the first start port 2003. A large prize winning opening 2005 that can accept the game ball B according to the first special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B or the second special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start opening 2004; A V winning opening 2010 is provided in which the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 can be received.

In addition, the front unit 2000 further includes an out port 1008 and a sub-out port 2021 for discharging the game ball B hit into the game area 5a to the outside of the game area 5a. The out port 1008 and the sub-out port 2021 are always open so that the game ball B can be received. In addition, the out port 1008 is provided at the downstream end of the game area 5a.

In addition, the front unit 2000 includes a second start opening sensor 2505 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, and a large winning opening sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005. , a V winning opening sensor 2507 that detects the game ball B received in the V winning opening 2010; and a magnetic sensor 1030 that detects magnetism.

A plurality of (here, three) general winning holes 2001 are arranged on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction in the lower part of the game area 5a. The normal winning opening 2002 is arranged at the lower right corner in the front view within the game area 5a. The first starting port 2003 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged near the right end in the game area 5a and near the center in the vertical direction. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged below the blocking portion 1006 at the upper right corner in the game area 5a.

The out port 1008 is arranged directly below the first starting port 2003 at the downstream end of the game area 5a. The sub-out port 2021 is arranged to the left of the three general prize winning ports 2001. - 特許庁

The front unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and has a first start opening 2003, and a front view left of the start opening unit 2100 On the other hand, a side unit 2200 is provided along the inner rail 1002 and has three general prize-winning ports 2001 and a sub-out port 2021, and a side unit 2200 is provided on the left and slightly above the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. An upper left unit 2300 is provided.

In addition, the front unit 2000 is provided slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a, and includes a normal winning opening 2002, a second start opening 2004, a large winning opening 2005, a V winning opening 2010, and a losing opening 2009. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a is further provided.

[11-8a. starting unit]
Next, the starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2003 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received.

In the starting port unit 2100 assembled on the game board 5, the first starting port 2003 is located directly below the central release portion 2513a on the stage 2513 of the center accessory 2500, and the game released from the central release portion 2513a. Ball B can be accepted with high probability. The game ball B received in the first starting hole 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then detected by the first starting hole sensor 3003. After that, it is discharged to the safe ball receptacle 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

[11-8b. side unit]
Next, the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 to 120, 124 and the like. The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 which are always open to receive the game balls B, and a sub-out opening 2021 which is always open to receive the game balls B.

The three general winning holes 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002, and are provided at higher positions toward the left. Each general prize winning opening 2001 is opened with a size (width) corresponding to one game ball B. A sub-out port 2021 is provided to the left of the leftmost general winning port 2001 . The sub-out port 2021 is opened with a size (width) of one game ball B.

Also, the side unit 2200 has a shelf 2201 on the right side of the rightmost general prize winning opening 2001, which slopes down toward the right. The shelf 2201 is provided at a position lower than the first starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100 , and when the game ball B rolls on the shelf 2201 , it is received by the out port 1008 .

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the three general prize winning openings 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加This side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 and discharged to the safe ball receiving opening 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

Also, the side unit 2200 can guide the game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 to the rear of the game panel 1100 and deliver it to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . The game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is discharged to the out ball socket 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

[11-8c. Side upper left unit]
Next, the upper left side unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The side upper left unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front so as to contact the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the side unit 2200 in the game area 5a. The upper left side unit 2300 has a shelf 2301 that slopes down to the right.

When the side upper left unit 2300 is assembled on the game board 5, the shelf 2301 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁The side upper left unit 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down the left side of the center role 2500 to the right side below the center role 2500 by the shelf part 2301 .

[11-8d. Center role]
Next, the center accessory 2500 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 134 to 138 and the like. 134 is a front view showing the center accessory of the game board of FIG. 118. FIG. 135 is a front perspective view of the center accessory of the game board of FIG. 118, and FIG. 136 is a rear perspective view of the center accessory of the game board of FIG. FIG. 137(a) is an enlarged explanatory view showing the upper left corner portion of the center accessory of FIG. 134 where the grand prize opening is provided, and (b) is a perspective view of the portion of (a) seen from the front. It is an explanatory view shown in the figure, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a section of a portion of a large winning opening in the ball passage of the center accessory. 138(a) is an enlarged perspective view of the upper part of the right end of the center accessory in FIG. 135, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from behind, (c) is an explanatory view schematically showing a cross section of a vertically extending portion of the ball passage of the center accessory.

The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in the shape of a transparent frame.

Although the details will be described later, the center accessory 2500 is always open to receive the game ball B, and a normal prize winning opening 2002 in which a lottery of normal symbols is performed by receiving the game ball B, and a game to the normal winning opening 2002. A second starting port 2004 that enables the reception of the game ball B according to the lottery result of the normal symbol drawn by the acceptance of the ball B, and a first start port 2003 that is drawn by receiving the game ball B. A large prize winning port 2005 for opening and closing the game ball B according to the lottery result of the second special pattern drawn by accepting the game ball B into the special pattern or the second starting port 2004, and accepting the game ball B into the big prize winning port 2005. A V prize opening 2010 for accepting only the game ball B received and a loss opening 2009 for accepting the game ball B not accepted by the V prize opening 2010 after being accepted by the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加.

The center accessory 2500 includes a second start opening sensor 2505 that detects the game ball B received in the second start opening 2004, a big winning opening sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005, A V winning opening sensor 2507 for detecting a game ball received in a V winning opening 2010 and a loss opening sensor 2504 for detecting a game ball B received in a losing opening 2009 are provided.

The center accessory 2500 includes a frame-shaped body unit 2510, a second starting door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starting door 2004, and a game ball B in the normal winning opening 2002. A starting solenoid 2412 that opens and closes according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by the acceptance of, a large winning opening door 2413 that can open and close the large winning opening 2005, and a large winning opening door 2413 The first starting opening 2003 or second starting An attacker solenoid 2414 opened and closed according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the mouth 2004 is provided.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 includes a sorting blade 2536 for allocating the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 to either the losing hole 2009 or the V winning hole 2010, and a sorting blade 2536 for moving the sorting blade 2536. A solenoid 2537 and a symbol display 2518 for displaying a special symbol, a fourth symbol, etc. drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 are provided.

[11-8d-1. main unit]
The main unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 will be described in detail. The main unit 2510 has a prize winning opening 2006 . The main unit 2510 includes a transparent frame-shaped center frame 2511 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, a warp passage 2512 capable of guiding game balls B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame, and a frame of the center frame 2511. A stage 2513 is provided on the lower side of the inside and releases the game ball B, which has circulated in the warp passage 2512, into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction.

The body unit 2510 also has a positioning pin 2510a projecting rearward from the rear end in a columnar shape and inserted into the positioning hole 1130c of the decoration cell 1130, and a ball provided along the right peripheral edge of the center frame 2511. It has a passage 2517, a group of guide passages 2520 provided on the upper left peripheral edge of the center frame 2511, and a decorative body 2570 attached to the center frame 2511 and having a predetermined decoration. The decorative body 2570 is provided at a portion along the upper side of the frame-shaped center accessory, a portion along the right side, and a portion of the guide passage group 2520 on the left side. Although illustration is omitted, an LED board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is provided behind the decorative body 2570 .

The center frame 2511 is inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112. The center frame 2511 has a frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a extending in the front-rear direction. A plate-shaped flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end and abuts on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a game ball B that extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and flows down the game area 5a of the game panel 1100. It has an inflow restricting portion 2511c that restricts the flow into the opening 1112, and a flat support portion 2511d protruding from the inner periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a.

The insertion portion 2511a is provided so that its rear end is aligned with the rear surface of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5 . The front end of the inflow restricting portion 2511c, excluding the frame-like (annular) lower side portion, protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when assembled on the game board 5. As shown in FIG. As a result, in a state assembled on the game board 5, the entry (inflow) of the game ball B from the outside of the center accessory 2500 (center frame 2511) to the inside of the frame is prevented (regulated) by the inflow regulation part 2511c. can be done.

The thickness of the flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511d is formed thinner than the thickness of the game panel 1100 (1/4 to 1/5 of the thickness of the game panel 1100). The flange portion 2511b and the support portion 2511d protrude from the insertion portion 2511a at the same position in the front-rear direction.

A plurality of support portions 2511d are partially provided on the inner periphery of the insertion portion 2511a. The support portion 2511d is also provided at a portion of the insertion portion 2511a where the flange portion 2511b does not protrude, and reinforces the insertion portion 2511a (center frame 2511). In addition, the support portion 2511d has an edge protruding from the insertion portion 2511a formed in a shape that follows the front shape of the insertion portion 2511a or in a straight line so that the support portion 2511d is not conspicuous. The support portion 2511d protrudes from the insertion portion 2511a within a range (1 mm to 10 mm) from the thickness of the support portion 2511d to the thickness of the game panel 1100. It is made to be inconspicuous from.

The warp passage 2512 is open at the left side of the inflow restricting portion 2511c in front view so that the game ball B in the game area 5a can enter. The warp passage 2512 can guide the entering game ball B to the stage 2513 . A part of the warp passage 2512 is formed by the center frame 2511 .

The stage 2513 is attached to the insertion portion 2511 a of the center frame 2511 . The stage 2513 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and is positioned directly above the first start port 2003 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the state where the center accessory 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100 of the game panel 1100. , is formed in a wavy shape (W-shape) such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2513 has a portion (central release portion 2513a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portions 2513b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the stage 2513 is assembled on the game board 5 , the raised portion (central release portion 2513 a ) at the center in the left-right direction is located directly above the first starting port 2003 of the starting port unit 2100 . As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2513a in the center of the stage 2513, it is received in the first start port 2003 with a very high probability.

A plurality of positioning pins 2510a of the main unit 2510 are provided, and by inserting them into the positioning holes 1130c of the decoration cell 1130 provided behind the game panel 1100, the decoration cell 1130 is positioned with respect to the center accessory 2500. can do. Most of the plurality of positioning pins 2510a protrude rearward from the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511, but some are attached to the center frame 2511 (for example, provided behind the decorative LED board). board cover).

[11-8d-2. Ball passage for center role]
The ball passage 2517 in the main body unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is vertically elongated along the right edge of the center accessory 2500 . In other words, the ball passageway 2517 has an entrance opening near the lower end of the abutment 1006 and extends from there along the right rail 1005 to its lower end before moving leftward along the lower right rail 1004 . It extends, and the exit opens below the first starting opening 2003 near the out opening 1008 (see FIG. 124, etc.).

The ball passage 2517 has a rear wall formed by the flange portion 2511 b of the center frame 2511 or the game panel 1100 , and a front wall formed by the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570 . The ball passage 2517 is provided with a large winning opening 2005, a second starting opening 2004, and a normal winning opening 2002 from above.

The ball passage 2517 can be broadly divided into an attacker passage 2517a that continues from the entrance and is provided with the big prize opening 2005, and an arc-shaped extension along the right edge (right rail 1005) of the center accessory 2500. a first nailed passage portion 2517c provided between the right edge passage portion 2517b and the second starting port 2004 and in which an obstacle nail is implanted; and a second starting port 2004. A left passage portion 2517d extending downward through the left side, a right passage portion 2517e extending downward through the right side of the second starting port 2004, a left passage portion 2517d and a right passage portion 2517e, and a normal winning prize. A second nailed passage portion 2517f provided between the opening 2002 and implanted with an obstacle nail, and an exit passage extending to the exit through which game balls B not accepted in the normal winning opening 2002 flow. and a portion 2517g.

The attacker passage portion 2517a of the ball passage 2517, as shown in FIG. After extending to the left so as to be three times lower, it is folded back to the right and extends to the right rail 1005 (the outer peripheral edge of the flange portion 2511b) so as to be lower to the right. The bottom wall of the rightwardly extending portion of the attacker passage portion 2517a is formed by the big winning opening door 2413. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in the state where the big winning prize opening door 2413 advances and closes the big winning prize opening 2005, the game ball B flowing down is guided to the downstream right edge passage portion 2517b by the big winning prize opening door 2413, and the big winning prize opening In a state where the door 2413 is retracted to open the big winning opening 2005, the game ball B flowing down is received in the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

The big prize winning opening door 2413 in the attacker passage portion 2517a has a flat plate shape elongated to the left and right, and is inclined downward to the right. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the large winning opening door 2413 can advance and retreat in the front and rear direction by advancing and retreating the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 to open and close the large winning opening 2005 . When the attacker solenoid 2414 is not energized, the large winning opening door 2413 is moved forward by the spring biasing force of the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 to close the large winning opening 2005 . In addition, when the attacker solenoid 2414 is energized, the large winning opening door 2413 moves rearward by retracting the plunger of the attacker solenoid 2414 against the urging force of the spring, thereby opening the large winning opening 2005. do.

When the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005, after being guided to the right under the large winning opening 2005 (large winning opening door 2413), it circulates downward along the left side of the right edge passage portion 2517b. , is detected by the big winning opening sensor 2506 . The game ball B detected by the special winning opening sensor 2506 is distributed to either the losing opening 2009 or the V winning opening 2010 by the distribution vane 2536 .

The attacker passage portion 2517a is provided with a passage decoration portion 2590 capable of decorating the ball passage 2517 and slowing down the circulation speed of the game balls B, details of which will be described later.

The right edge passage portion 2517b extends downward in an arc from the downstream end of the attacker passage portion 2517a so that the left side wall serves as the rolling surface of the game ball B, and the lower end is bent leftward in a crank shape. curved downwards. The right edge passage portion 2517b is also provided with a passage decoration portion 2590 that can decorate the ball passage 2517 and reduce the circulation speed of the game balls B. On the left side of the right edge passage portion 2517b, there are a large winning hole sensor 2506 for detecting the game ball B received in the large winning hole 2005, and a large winning hole sensor 2506 which detects the game ball B received in the large winning hole 2005. A distribution vane 2536 for distributing game balls B, a loss opening 2009, and a V winning opening 2010 are provided.

The right edge passage portion 2517b is provided with a plurality of (here, two) decorative protrusions 2511f at positions slightly higher than the upper ends of the sorting blades 2536 on the left side wall. The decorative convex portion 2511f is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape extending back and forth, and can shine by reflecting and refracting light from a decorative LED provided on the game board 5 . When the decorative convex portion 2511f shines, the player's line of sight can be directed to the sorting blade 2536, and the player can enjoy whether or not the game ball B is sorted to the V winning hole 2010.例文帳に追加In addition, since the plurality of decorative convex portions 2511f constitute part of the rolling surface on which the game ball B rolls in the right edge passage portion 2517b, the plurality of decorative convex portions 2511f increase the circulation speed of the game ball B. It is possible to slow down.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the sorting blade 2536 rotates between an upright state and an inclined state with its upper end moved rightward by driving (energizing) the sorting solenoid 2537 . When the sorting blade 2536 stands upright, the game ball B is sorted to the loss port 2009, and when the sorting blade 2536 is tilted, the game ball B is sorted to the V winning port 2010.例文帳に追加This sorting blade 2536 is movable at a constant cycle. Therefore, at the timing when the game ball B is distributed to the V winning opening 2010, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the game ball B is received in the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

The first nailed passage portion 2517c is formed in a vertically long quadrangular shape with the downstream end (outlet) of the right edge passage portion 2517b at the center in the left-right direction. The front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed at the portion where the flange portion 2511b is not provided. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the portion where the game panel 1100 is exposed. In the first nailed passage portion 2517c, a front plate 2571 provided in front is provided with a nail head receiving hole 2571a for receiving the head of an obstructing nail.

The lower end of the first nailed passage portion 2517c is provided at a position slightly lower than the entrance of the warp passage 2512 provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500. As shown in FIG. A second starting port passage entrance 2415 that can communicate with the second starting port 2004 opens at a portion directly below the exit of the right edge passage portion 2517b at the lower end of the first nailed passage portion 2517c. In this embodiment, there is a possibility that only the game ball B that has passed through this second starting port passage entrance 2415 is accepted by the second starting port 2004 .

The second starting port 2004 of the present embodiment opens rightward at a portion below and to the left of the second starting port passage entrance 2415, and advances and retreats forward and backward to the right of the second starting port. A door 2411 is provided. Further, below the second starting port passage entrance 2415, a guide piece 2411a is provided which is inclined so as to be lowered from the portion immediately below toward the second starting port 2004 and which can advance and retreat back and forth.

In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the second starter door 2411 advances and retreats in the front-rear direction by driving (energizing) the starter solenoid 2412, and the guide piece 2411a is different from the second starter door 2411. The forward and backward direction advances and retreats in the opposite direction. When the starting port solenoid 2412 is not energized, the biasing force of a spring (not shown) advances the second starting port door 2411 to make it impossible to receive the second starting port 2004, and the guide piece 2411a retreats to play the game. The ball B cannot be guided to the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁On the other hand, in the state in which the starting port solenoid 2412 is energized due to the normal winning pattern, the second starting port door 2411 retreats so that the second starting port 2004 can be received, and the guide piece 2411a advances to advance the game ball. B can be guided to the second starting port 2004 .

The left passage portion 2517d is a second nailed passage on the downstream side at a position slightly higher than the stage 2513, in which the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the second starting port passage entrance 2415 in the first nailed passage portion 2517c flows. It communicates with the upper end of the portion 2517f. The right passage portion 2517e, in the first nailed passage portion 2517c, enters the second starting port passage entrance 2415 but is not accepted in the second starting port 2004 from the game ball B and the second starting port passage entrance 2415 The game ball B, which has also flowed down to the right side, circulates and is adjacent to the right side of the left passage portion 2517d and communicates with the upper end of the second nailed passage portion 2517f.

The second nailed passage portion 2517f is formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the left and right direction, and the flange portion 2511b is not provided as a whole, and the front surface of the game panel 1100 is exposed. Although illustration is omitted, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the portion where the game panel 1100 is exposed. In the second nail passage portion 2517f, a front plate 2571 provided in front is provided with a nail head accommodation hole 2571a for accommodating the head of an obstructing nail. A normal winning opening 2002 is provided in the center in the left-right direction of the second nailed passage portion 2517f.

The exit passage portion 2517g extends downward from the left and right outer sides of the normal winning opening 2002, joins below the normal winning opening 2002, and then extends leftward along the lower right rail 1004 so as to be lower. out. The exit at the downstream end of the exit passage portion 2517g is provided at a position lower than the first starting port 2003, and the game ball B that has circulated through the exit passage portion 2517g is not received by the first starting port 2003 and is out. It is discharged from mouth 1008 . A passage decoration portion 2590 is also provided in the exit passage portion 2517g.

[11-8d-3. Guidance passage group]
Also, the main unit 2510 of the center accessory 2500 is provided below the upper left corner of the center frame 2511 and has a guide passage group 2520 consisting of two passages through which the game balls B can flow. The guide path group 2520 guides the game ball B above the area where the entrance of the warp path 2512 is open. The guide passage group 2520 has a rear wall formed by the center frame 2511 and a front wall formed by the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570 . The guide passage group 2520 is also provided with a passage decoration portion 2590 .

As shown in FIG. 124, the guide passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511, and the upper entrance is provided at a portion adjacent to the right side of the upper end of the inner rail 1002. and a second guide passage 2522 whose upper entrance is adjacent to the right side of the entrance of the first guide passage 2521 . The guide path group 2520 (the first guide path 2521 and the second guide path 2522) are both made of a colorless and transparent member, and the game balls B flowing inside can be visually recognized from the front.

The first guide passage 2521 extends downward in an arcuate shape along the right side surface of the inner rail 1002 and bends downward after a short rightward bend in the vicinity of the lower end. The second guide passage 2522 extends downward along the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511, and bends rightward and then downward near the lower end. The first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are separated by a partition wall portion 2511e. The width of each passage in the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 is a width that allows the game balls B to circulate in a row.

The exits of the first guide passage 2521 and the second guide passage 2522 are provided above the center in the vertical direction of the game area 5a. Since the second guide path 2522 is provided in contact with the inflow restricting portion 2511c, the game ball B guided to the second guide path 2522 is more There is a high probability of entering the warp passage 2512.

[11-8d-4. Pattern display]
In this embodiment, the pattern display 2518 is provided at the upper right corner within the frame of the inflow restricting portion 2511c in the center frame 2511. As shown in FIG. This symbol display 2518 is composed of 10 LEDs, and the reception of the game ball B to the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004 is determined by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, emission color, etc. of each LED. It displays the special design, the fourth design, etc. drawn by.

[11-8e. passageway decoration]
The passage decoration part 2590 provided on the center accessory 2500 and the like will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 137 to 143 and the like. FIG. 139(a) is a front view of an attacker unit provided with a passage decoration, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of the passage decoration in the attacker unit of (a). FIG. 140 is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of an example of the passage decoration. 141(a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the shape of recesses in the passage decoration, and FIGS. 142(a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the shape of protrusions in the passage decoration. 143(a) to 143(c) are explanatory diagrams showing a plurality of protrusions and recesses of different shapes in the passage decoration.

The passage decoration part 2590 is a ball passage 2591 through which the game ball B circulates, such as the ball passage 2517, and a convex portion provided on the rear plate portion 2592 and the front plate portion 2593 that constitute the inner wall of the ball passage 2591. 2594 and recesses 2595 on the back side of the projections 2594 are used for decoration. Further, the passage decoration part 2590 can decelerate (attenuate) the circulation speed of the game ball B by means of the convex part 2594 protruding into the ball passage 2591 .

For example, as shown in FIG. 137, the passage decoration portion 2590 may be provided in the attacker passage portion 2517a of the ball passage 2517 (ball passage 2591). First, the attacker passage portion 2517a is provided so as to face the flange portion 2511b (rear plate portion 2592) and the flange portion 2511b in front of the flange portion 2511b with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow between the flange portion 2511b. and a front plate 2571 (front plate portion 2593). The passage decoration portion 2590 includes a rear plate convex portion 2594a projecting forward from the flange portion 2511b, a rear plate concave portion 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a, a front plate 2571 (a front plate portion 2593 ) and a front plate recess 2595b provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b.

A plurality of rear plate convex portions 2594a of the attacker passage portion 2517a are provided at intervals along the flow direction of the attacker passage portion 2517a. The rear plate convex portion 2594a has a rectangular shape elongated in the distribution direction when viewed from the front, and the longitudinal center of the rectangular shape is formed in a triangular (triangular roof shape) projecting forward. The rear plate convex portion 2594a of the attacker passage portion 2517a is provided at a height that includes half the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11/2 mm) from the passage bottom surface. The rear plate concave portion 2595a of the attacker passage portion 2517a is provided in each rear plate convex portion 2594a, and is recessed forward in a triangular shape substantially similar to the shape of the rear plate convex portion 2594a.

A plurality of front plate protrusions 2594b of the attacker passage portion 2517a are provided at intervals along the flow direction of the attacker passage portion 2517a such that the front-rear plate protrusions 2594a are alternately arranged with the rear plate protrusions 2594a. The front plate protrusion 2594b is elongated in the direction of flow and shorter than the rear plate protrusion 2594a when viewed from the front. ). The height from the passage bottom surface of the front plate convex portion 2594b of the attacker passage portion 2517a includes half the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11/2 mm). The front plate concave portion 2595b of the attacker passage portion 2517a is provided in each front plate convex portion 2594b, and is recessed rearward in a triangular shape substantially similar to the shape of the front plate convex portion 2594b.

As shown in FIG. 137(c), the passage decoration portion 2590 of the attacker passage portion 2517a is provided with a specific member 2519 such as an LED substrate with a gap of a size that does not allow a finger to enter behind the flange portion 2511b. there is The specific member 2519 covers the rear side of the rear plate recess 2595a so that the rear plate recess 2595a cannot be touched with a finger. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rear plate recessed portion 2595a from being soiled by the operator's finger touching the rear plate recessed portion 2595a during the manufacture of the game board 5, and the decorative light is reliably reflected in the rear plate recessed portion 2595a. can be tilted or refracted. In addition, since the specific member 2519 is provided, it is possible to prevent dust from entering the rear plate recessed portion 2595a, thereby avoiding deterioration of the appearance due to dirt such as dust.

The passage decoration portion 2590 of the attacker passage portion 2517a includes a flange portion 2511b provided with a rear plate protrusion 2594a and a rear plate recess 2595a, and a front plate 2571 provided with a front plate protrusion 2594b and a front plate recess 2595b. , are made of a transparent member, they can reflect or refract the light (decorative light) from the LEDs of the LED substrate provided on the game board 5, respectively. Thereby, the projections 2594 such as the rear plate projections 2594a and the front plate projections 2594b and the recesses 2595 such as the rear plate recesses 2595a and the front plate recesses 2595b can be illuminated to be decorated with light. Therefore, by decorating the passage decoration portion 2590 of the attacker passage portion 2517a with light emission, the player's line of sight can be directed to the attacker passage portion 2517a. It is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation for winning, and to suppress the decline in the player's interest.

In addition, in the passage decoration portion 2590 of the attacker passage portion 2517a, the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b provided on the front plate 2571 are elongated. , the visibility of the game ball B flowing behind it is not hindered.

Further, the passage decoration portion 2590 of the attacker passage portion 2517a includes a plurality of rear plate protrusions 2594a projecting forward from the flange portion 2511b and a plurality of front plate protrusions 2594b projecting rearward from the front plate 2571, Since the game balls B are staggered (alternately) with respect to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B meander back and forth while flowing, and the distribution speed of the game balls B can be reduced. As a result, many game balls B can be retained for a long time on the big winning opening door 2413 forming part of the bottom surface of the attacker passage portion 2517a. In other words, the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b of the attacker passage portion 2517a are intended to retain many game balls B on the big winning opening door 2413 by decelerating the rolling speed of the game ball B. and

The rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b of the attacker passage portion 2517a have a triangular convex shape, and the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the rear plate convex portion 2594a provided in the door upper passage portion 2416 of the attacker unit 2400 to be described later. It protrudes smaller than the front plate protrusion 2594b. As a result, in the attacker passage portion 2517a (on the big winning opening door 2413), the passage lightly (smallly) meanders in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B enters the attacker passage portion 2517a at a high speed by vigorously contacting the impinging portion 1006 by "right hitting", the plurality of rear plate convex portions 2594a and front plate convex portions 2594b Due to its presence, the game ball B can be sufficiently decelerated until it reaches the big winning opening 2005 (big winning opening door 2413), the game ball B can be easily seen, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed. . In addition, since the speed of the game ball B rolling on the big winning gate door 2413 can be slowed down, the big winning gate door 2413 can be set at the timing when the game ball B rolls on the big winning gate door 2413. It is possible to excite and throb the player depending on whether or not the door is opened, thereby increasing the expectation for winning the prize at the big prize opening 2005 and suppressing the decrease in interest.

Further, as the passage decoration portion 2590, for example, as shown in FIG. First, the right edge passage portion 2517b is provided so as to face the flange portion 2511b (rear plate portion 2592) and the flange portion 2511b in front of the flange portion 2511b with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow between the flange portion 2511b. and a front plate 2571 (front plate portion 2593). The passage decoration portion 2590 includes a rear plate convex portion 2594a projecting forward from the flange portion 2511b, a rear plate concave portion 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a, a front plate 2571 (a front plate portion 2593 ) and a front plate recess 2595b provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b.

A plurality of rear plate protrusions 2594a of the right edge passage portion 2517b are provided at intervals along the arcuate distribution direction of the right edge passage portion 2517b. The rear plate convex portion 2594a has a rectangular shape elongated in the radial direction of the arc when viewed from the front, and is formed in a triangular shape (triangular roof shape) in which the center in the direction in which the short side of the rectangle extends is protruded forward. . A plurality of rear plate convex portions 2594a in the right edge passage portion 2517b are provided at approximately equal intervals in the distribution direction. The rear plate concave portion 2595a of the right edge passage portion 2517b is provided in each rear plate convex portion 2594a, and is recessed forward in a triangular shape substantially similar to the shape of the rear plate convex portion 2594a.

The front plate protrusions 2594b of the right edge passage portion 2517b are provided in plurality along the arc-shaped distribution direction of the right edge passage portion 2517b so that the front and rear plate protrusions 2594a are alternately arranged in the front-rear direction. ing. The front plate protrusion 2594b has a rectangular shape elongated in the radial direction of the arc when viewed from the front, and is formed in a triangular shape (triangular roof shape) in which the center of the direction in which the short side of the rectangle extends is projected rearward. . A plurality of front plate convex portions 2594b in the right edge passage portion 2517b are provided at approximately equal intervals in the flow direction. The front plate concave portion 2595b of the right edge passage portion 2517b is provided in each front plate convex portion 2594b, and is recessed rearward in a triangular shape substantially similar to the shape of the front plate convex portion 2594b.

As shown in FIG. 138(c), the passage decoration portion 2590 of the right edge passage portion 2517b has the game panel 1100 as the specific member 2519 in contact with the rear surface of the flange portion 2511b. The game panel 1100 covers the rear of the rear plate recess 2595a, and the rear plate recess 2595a cannot be touched. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rear plate recessed portion 2595a from becoming dirty due to the operator's finger touching the rear plate recessed portion 2595a when manufacturing the game board 5, and the decorative light is reliably reflected in the rear plate recessed portion 2595a. can be bent or refracted. Further, since the specific member 2519 is provided, it is possible to prevent dust from entering the rear plate recessed portion 2595a, thereby avoiding deterioration of the appearance due to dirt such as dust. Although FIG. 138(c) shows that the specific member 2519 is in contact with the rear surface of the flange portion 2511b, there may be a gap between the specific member 2519 and the flange portion 2511b that is large enough to prevent a finger from entering. . In other words, even if a gap is provided, it is sufficient as long as the finger does not enter.

In the passage decoration portion 2590 of the right edge passage portion 2517b, the rear plate recess portion 2595a and the front plate recess portion 2595b are recessed from the rear and front, and are open to the peripheral surface of the flange portion 2511b and the peripheral surface of the front plate 2571. not In other words, the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b of the right edge passage portion 2517b do not extend to the flange portion 2511b and the side surface of the front plate 2571, and the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b do not extend. concave only from

The passage decoration portion 2590 of the right edge passage portion 2517b includes a flange portion 2511b provided with a rear plate protrusion 2594a and a rear plate recess 2595a, and a front plate 2571 provided with a front plate protrusion 2594b and a front plate recess 2595b. , and are made of a transparent material, so that they can reflect or refract the light (decorative light) from the LEDs of the LED substrate provided on the game board 5, respectively. Thereby, the projections 2594 such as the rear plate projections 2594a and the front plate projections 2594b and the recesses 2595 such as the rear plate recesses 2595a and the front plate recesses 2595b can be illuminated to be decorated with light. Therefore, by decorating the passage decoration portion 2590 of the attacker passage portion 2517a with light emission, the player's line of sight can be directed to the right edge passage portion 2517b.

The passage decoration portion 2590 of the right edge passage portion 2517b includes a plurality of rear plate protrusions 2594a projecting forward from the flange portion 2511b and a plurality of front plate protrusions 2594b projecting rearward from the front plate 2571. Since the game balls B are staggered (alternately) with respect to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B flow while meandering back and forth, and the distribution speed of the game balls B can be reduced. Therefore, even if the right edge passage portion 2517b is in a nearly vertical state, the circulation speed (falling speed) of the game ball B does not become too fast, and the flow rate is appropriate for the downstream first nailed passage portion 2517c. The game ball B can be made to flow down at a speed.

Further, in the right edge passage portion 2517b, the plurality of rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b can reduce the falling speed of the game ball B, so that the game ball circulating in the right edge passage portion 2517b B can be easily seen, and damage to the crank-shaped portion at the lower end of the right edge passage portion 2517b due to the impact caused by the contact of the game ball B can be avoided. That is, the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b of the right edge passage portion 2517b reduce the falling speed of the game ball B, unlike the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b of the attacker passage portion 2517a. The purpose is to reduce the speed to prevent damage to other members and to show the game ball B to the player.

Further, the passage decoration portion 2590 may be provided, for example, at the exit passage portion 2517g of the ball passage 2517 (ball passage 2591). First, the portion of the outlet passage portion 2517g where the passage decoration portion 2590 is provided is not provided with the front plate 2571 (front plate portion 2593), and is provided only with the flange portion 2511b (rear plate portion 2592). (See FIG. 118, etc.). Although illustration is omitted, the glass 120 of the door frame 3 is provided as a front plate portion 2593 in front of the passage decoration portion 2590 of the exit passage portion 2517g.

The passage decoration portion 2590 of the exit passage portion 2517g is provided below the normal prize winning opening 2002, as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. A rear plate convex portion 2594a having a shape is provided so as to surround it. In each rear plate convex portion 2594a, the V-shaped bent portion protrudes most forward, and the forward protrusion becomes smaller toward both ends of the V shape. That is, each rear plate convex portion 2594a is inclined so that the front surface thereof protrudes forward as it goes downward. In addition, of the two large and small rear plate protrusions 2594a, the larger rear plate protrusion 2594a protrudes forward more than the smaller rear plate protrusion 2594a.

Although not shown, a rear plate concave portion 2595a is also provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a in the passage decoration portion 2590 of the outlet passage portion 2517g. Also, in the passage decoration portion 2590 of the exit passage portion 2517g, the game panel 1100 as the specific member 2519 is in contact with the rear surface of the flange portion 2511b. The game panel 1100 covers the rear of the rear plate recess 2595a, and the rear plate recess 2595a cannot be touched. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rear plate recessed portion 2595a from becoming dirty due to the operator's finger touching the rear plate recessed portion 2595a when manufacturing the game board 5, and the decorative light is reliably reflected in the rear plate recessed portion 2595a. can be bent or refracted. Further, since the specific member 2519 is provided, it is possible to prevent dust from entering the rear plate recessed portion 2595a, thereby avoiding deterioration of the appearance due to dirt such as dust.

In the passage decoration portion 2590 of the exit passage portion 2517g, since the flange portion 2511b provided with the rear plate convex portion 2594a is formed of a transparent member, the LED of the LED board provided on the game board 5 Light (decorative light) can be reflected or refracted. As a result, the projections 2594 such as the rear plate projections 2594a and the recesses 2595 such as the rear plate recesses 2595a can be illuminated to be decorated with light. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be directed to the normal winning opening 2002 by lighting the passage decoration part 2590 provided near the normal winning opening 2002 in the exit passage part 2517g.

In addition, in the passage decoration portion 2590 of the exit passage portion 2517g, the two large and small rear plate convex portions 2594a are formed in a V-shape, respectively, so that they look like arrows, attracting the attention of the player to the nearby normal winning opening. 2002, and the expectations for the normal winning can be heightened.

In addition, since the passage decoration portion 2590 of the outlet passage portion 2517g is provided with rear plate convex portions 2594a having different projection amounts, the gap between the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front glass 120 becomes smaller toward the larger rear plate convex portion 2594a. Become. As a result, even if the game ball B flows down vigorously, it can be sufficiently decelerated, and the impact given to the lower right rail 1004 can be reduced.

Further, the passage decoration part 2590 may be provided, for example, in the guide passage group 2520 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, though detailed illustration is omitted. First, the guide passage group 2520 is provided so as to face the flange portion 2511b (rear plate portion 2592) and the flange portion 2511b in front of the flange portion 2511b with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow between them. and a front plate 2571 (front plate portion 2593). The passage decoration portion 2590 has a rear plate protrusion 2594a protruding forward from the flange portion 2511b and a front plate protrusion 2594b protruding rearward from the front plate 2571 (front plate portion 2593). there is

A plurality of rear plate protrusions 2594a of the guide passage group 2520 are provided at intervals along the circulation direction of the game ball B (see FIG. 134). The rear plate convex portion 2594a has a rectangular shape elongated in the distribution direction when viewed from the front, and the longitudinal center of the rectangular shape is formed in a triangular (triangular roof shape) projecting forward.

A plurality of front plate protrusions 2594b of the guide passage group 2520 are provided at intervals along the circulation direction of the game balls B so that the front-rear direction is alternated with the rear plate protrusions 2594a. The front plate convex portion 2594b has a rectangular shape elongated in the distribution direction when viewed from the front, and the center of the rectangular shape in the longitudinal direction is formed in a triangular (triangular roof shape) projecting rearward.

In the passage decoration portion 2590 of the guide passage group 2520, the flange portion 2511b provided with the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate 2571 provided with the front plate convex portion 2594b are formed of a transparent member. Therefore, it is possible to reflect or refract the light (decoration light) from the LED of the LED board provided on the game board 5 in each. Accordingly, the projections 2594 such as the rear plate projections 2594a and the front plate projections 2594b can be illuminated to be decorated with light. Therefore, by decorating the passage decoration part 2590 of the guide passage group 2520 with light emission, the player's line of sight can be directed to the guide passage group 2520 .

The passage decoration portion 2590 of the guide passage group 2520 includes a plurality of rear plate protrusions 2594a projecting forward from the flange portion 2511b and a plurality of front plate protrusions 2594b projecting rearward from the front plate 2571. Since the game balls B are provided in a zigzag pattern (alternately) with respect to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B flow while meandering back and forth, and the distribution speed of the game balls B can be reduced. Therefore, even if the guide passage group 2520 is in a nearly vertical state, the circulation speed (flow speed) of the game ball B does not become too fast, and the warp passage 2512 is provided in the downstream area where the entrance and the like are provided. In contrast, the game ball B can be made to flow down at an appropriate speed.

In the passage decoration portion 2590 of the guide passage group 2520, similarly to the above, the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b may be provided behind the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b. As a result, the decorative light can be reflected even at the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b, and the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

139, the passage decoration portion 2590 may be provided in the upper door passage portion 2416 above the big winning opening 2005 (large winning opening door 2413) in the attacker unit 2400. FIG. This attacker unit 2400 is provided on the game board 5 of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 96 and the like. First, the door upper passage portion 2416 of the attacker unit 2400 faces the base plate 2431 (rear plate portion 2592) and the base plate 2431 in front of the base plate 2431 with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow. A front plate 2432 (front plate portion 2593) provided as follows. The passage decoration portion 2590 includes a rear plate convex portion 2594a projecting forward from the base plate 2431, a rear plate concave portion 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a, a front plate 2432 (a front plate portion 2593 ) and a front plate recess 2595b provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b.

A plurality of rear plate protrusions 2594 a of the door upper passage portion 2416 are provided at intervals along the distribution direction of the door upper passage portion 2416 . The rear plate convex portion 2594a has a rectangular shape elongated in the direction of circulation when viewed from the front. It is The rear plate convex portion 2594a of the door upper passage portion 2416 is provided at a height from the passage bottom including half the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11/2 mm). The rear plate concave portion 2595a of the door upper passage portion 2416 is provided in each rear plate convex portion 2594a, and is recessed forward in a trapezoidal shape substantially similar to the shape of the rear plate convex portion 2594a.

A plurality of front plate protrusions 2594b of the door upper passage portion 2416 are provided at intervals along the flow direction of the door upper passage portion 2416 so that the front and rear plate protrusions 2594a are alternately arranged in the front-rear direction. The front plate convex portion 2594b has a rectangular shape elongated in the direction of flow when viewed from the front. It is The front plate convex portion 2594b of the door upper passage portion 2416 is provided at a height from the passage bottom including half the diameter of the game ball B (for example, 11/2 mm). The front plate concave portion 2595b of the door upper passage portion 2416 is provided in each front plate convex portion 2594b, and is recessed rearward in a trapezoidal shape substantially similar to the shape of the front plate convex portion 2594b.

As shown in FIG. 139(b), the passage decoration portion 2590 of the door upper passage portion 2416 is formed by opening a gap behind the base plate 2431 that is large enough to prevent a finger from entering, and attaching the attacker decoration substrate 2433 as the specific member 2519 and the substrate. A cover 2434 is provided. The specific member 2519 covers the rear side of the rear plate recess 2595a so that the rear plate recess 2595a cannot be touched with a finger. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rear plate recessed portion 2595a from becoming dirty due to the operator's finger touching the rear plate recessed portion 2595a when manufacturing the game board 5, and the decorative light is reliably reflected in the rear plate recessed portion 2595a. can be bent or refracted. Further, since the specific member 2519 is provided, it is possible to prevent dust from entering the rear plate recessed portion 2595a, thereby avoiding deterioration of the appearance due to dirt such as dust.

In addition, the passage decorative portion 2590 of the door upper passage portion 2416 has a decorative member 2435 attached to the front surface of the front plate 2432 and made of a translucent seal with a predetermined decoration. The decorative member 2435 covers the front of the front plate recessed portion 2595b so that the front plate recessed portion 2595b cannot be touched. As a result, it is possible to prevent the front plate recessed portion 2595b from becoming dirty due to the operator's finger touching the front plate recessed portion 2595b when manufacturing the game board 5, and the front plate recessed portion 2595b can reliably reflect the decoration light. can be tilted or refracted. In addition, since the decorative member 2435 is provided, it is possible to prevent dust from entering the front plate concave portion 2595b, thereby avoiding deterioration of the appearance due to dirt such as dust.

The passage decoration portion 2590 of the door upper passage portion 2416 includes a base plate 2431 provided with a rear plate protrusion 2594a and a rear plate recess 2595a, and a front plate 2432 provided with a front plate protrusion 2594b and a front plate recess 2595b. , and are made of a transparent material, so that they can reflect or refract the light (decoration light) from the LEDs of the LED substrate provided on the game board 5, respectively. Thereby, the projections 2594 such as the rear plate projections 2594a and the front plate projections 2594b and the recesses 2595 such as the rear plate recesses 2595a and the front plate recesses 2595b can be illuminated to be decorated with light. Therefore, by decorating the passage decoration portion 2590 of the door upper passage portion 2416 with light emission, the player's line of sight can be directed to the door upper passage portion 2416, so that the large winning opening provided in the door upper passage portion 2416 It is possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the prize in 2005, and to suppress the decline in the player's interest.

The passage decoration portion 2590 of the door upper passage portion 2416 includes a plurality of rear plate protrusions 2594a projecting forward from the base plate 2431 and a plurality of front plate protrusions 2594b projecting rearward from the front plate 2432. Since the game balls B are staggered (alternately) with respect to the distribution direction of the game balls B, the game balls B flow while meandering back and forth, and the distribution speed of the game balls B can be reduced. As a result, many game balls B can be retained for a long time on the big winning opening door 2413 forming part of the bottom surface of the door upper passage portion 2416 . In other words, the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b of the door upper passage portion 2416 decelerate the rolling speed of the game ball B so that many game balls B stay on the big winning opening door 2413. purpose.

In the door upper passage portion 2416, the base plate 2432 as the rear plate portion 2592 is provided with a rear plate convex portion 2594a and a rear plate concave portion 2595a. That is, in the door upper passage portion 2416, a member (base plate 2431) different from the flange portion 2511b of the center accessory 2500 is provided with the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the rear plate concave portion 2595a. Further, in the door upper passage portion 2416, the part of the base plate 2431 where the big winning opening door 2413 is recessed rearward from the general surface of the base plate 2431 (the front surface of the game panel 1100). The rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b of the door upper passage portion 2416 each have a trapezoidal convex shape. and the front plate protrusion 2594b. As a result, in the door upper passage portion 2416 (on the big winning opening door 2413), the passage largely meanders in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, since the speed of the game ball B rolling on the big winning gate door 2413 can be slowed down, the big winning gate door 2413 can be set at the timing when the game ball B rolls on the big winning gate door 2413. It is possible to excite and throb the player depending on whether or not the door is opened, thereby increasing the expectation for winning the prize at the big prize opening 2005 and suppressing the decrease in interest.

In the above description, the specific member 2519 such as the attacker decorative board 2433 is provided behind the rear plate portion 2592 such as the base plate 2431, and the decorative seal such as a decorative seal is provided in front of the front plate portion 2593 such as the front plate 2432. Although a configuration in which the decorative member 2435 is provided is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration as shown in FIG. 140 may be employed.

In the example shown in FIG. 140, a sheet-like rear decorative portion 2573 and an LED substrate 2519a are provided as the specific member 2519 behind the rear plate portion 2592 . In the example shown in FIG. 140, the decorative member 2435 in front of the front plate portion 2593 is a sheet-shaped front decorative portion 2572 . Each of the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 has translucency. Details of the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 will be described later with reference to FIG. The example shown in FIG. 140 can also provide the same effects as described above.

In the above description, the projections 2594 such as the rear plate projections 2594a and the front plate projections 2594b and the recesses 2595 such as the rear plate recesses 2595a and the front plate recesses 2595b are rectangular in plan view. It is not limited to this, and various front shapes such as circle, oval, rhombus, hexagon, octagon, and diamond may be used.

In addition, when providing a plurality of rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b, they are arranged as follows so that the game ball B can flow through the passage. The distance from the tip of the rear plate convex portion 2594a to the rear surface of the facing front plate portion 2593, the distance from the tip of the front plate convex portion 2594b to the front surface of the facing rear plate portion 2592, the rear plate convex portion 2594a and The distance between the closest adjacent front plate protrusions 2594b (for example, when the shape of the rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b is triangular or trapezoidal, the distance between the respective inclined surfaces provided to face each other) , is made larger than the diameter D of the game ball B. For example, each interval is set to 12 mm. As a result, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B cannot be circulated. Also, the closer the distance is to the diameter D of the game ball B, the more the deceleration effect can be enhanced.

As described above, according to the passage decoration portion 2590 of the present embodiment, the flow speed of the game ball B is affected in the flange portion 2511b (rear plate portion 2592) forming the flow-down area of the center accessory 2500. Since the decorative light can be reflected by the rear plate concave portion 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a, the reflected light can be used to light-embellish the flowing area (ball passage 2591) in which the game ball B circulates. can. Therefore, although the flange portion 2511b of the center accessory 2500 is not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional pachinko machine, since the flange portion 2511b is decorated with light, To provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting a player's interest by allowing the player to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is provided with decorations completely different from conventional pachinko machines. can be done.

In addition, since the rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, when viewed from the front, the shape of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate protrusion 2594a are different than when only the protrusion is provided. A complicated shape can be seen due to the shape of the plate recess 2595a, and the shape acts as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the rear plate convex portion 2594a is provided in the flowing area (ball passage 2591) where the game ball B flows down, the flowing speed of the game ball B can be reduced by the rear plate convex portion 2594a in the flowing area. The movement of the game ball B can be easily seen by slowing down the flow speed of the game ball B.例文帳に追加At this time, a rear plate concave portion 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a. The game ball B flowing down can be seen as a silhouette, and the movement of the game ball B can be more easily seen. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B flowing down the flowing region, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570 provided to face the flange portion 2511b forming the flow-down region (ball passage 2591) of the center accessory 2500 has the game ball B Since the decorative light can be reflected by the front plate concave portion 2595b provided on the back side of the front plate convex portion 2594b that affects the circulation speed of the game ball B, the reflected light is used to decorate the flowing area where the game ball B circulates. be able to. Therefore, although the front plate 2571 of the center accessory 2500 is not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional pachinko machine, the front plate 2571 is decorated with light, so that the player can To provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting a player's interest by allowing the player to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is provided with decorations completely different from conventional pachinko machines. can be done.

In addition, since the front plate recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b, when viewed from the front, the shape of the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate are different than when only the protrusion is provided. A complicated shape can be seen due to the shape of the plate recess 2595b, and the shape acts as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the front plate protrusion 2594b is provided in the flow-down region where the game ball B flows down, the flow-down speed of the game ball B can be reduced by the front plate projection 2594b in the flow-down region, and the game ball B flows down. By slowing down the speed, the movement of the game ball B can be easily seen. At this time, a front plate concave portion 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate convex portion 2594b. Since the front plate recess 2595b is provided in the front plate 2571 in front of the flow-down area (ball passage 2591), the front of the game ball B flowing down the flow-down area is decorated with light, and the game ball B shines brightly. can appear to be

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, in the center accessory 2500, the rear plate protrusion 2594a is provided on the flange portion 2511b, and the rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a. A front plate protrusion 2594b is provided on the front plate 2571, and a front plate recess 2595b is provided on the rear side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. As a result, the light reflected by the rear plate recess 2595a provided on the flange portion 2511b and the light reflected by the front plate recess 2595b provided on the front plate 2571 create a flow-down region (ball passage 2591) in which the game ball B circulates. ) can be decorated with light on the back and front. Therefore, since the flange part 2511b of the center accessory 2500 and the front plate 2571 are decorated with light, the player can recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is provided with decorations completely different from those of the past pachinko machines. is possible, and the highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of the players can be provided.

Further, as described above, since the flange portion 2511b and the front plate 2571 of the center accessory 2500 are provided with the rear plate protrusion 2594a, the rear plate recess 2595a, the front plate protrusion 2594b, and the front plate recess 2595b, When viewed from above, the shape of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the shape of the rear plate recess 2595a in the flange portion 2511b, and the shape of the front plate protrusion 2594b and the shape of the front plate recess 2595b in the front plate 2571 can be seen. The decorative effect can be further enhanced by their shapes acting as decorations.

In addition, as described above, the flange portion 2511b and the front plate 2571 of the center accessory 2500 are alternately (staggered) with the rear plate protrusions 2594a and the front plate protrusions 2594b in the flowing direction of the game ball B. Since it is provided, it is possible to swing the game ball B back and forth by the front plate convex portion 2594b on the front side and the rear plate convex portion 2594a on the rear side. The falling speed of the ball B can be further reduced, and the movement of the game ball B can be easily seen. At this time, a rear plate concave portion 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a, and a front plate concave portion 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate convex portion 2594b. Since the recessed portion 2595b reflects decorative light for luminous decoration, the luminous decoration of the rear plate recessed portion 2595a makes the game ball B look like a silhouette, while the luminous decoration of the front plate recessed portion 2595b makes it look like it is sparkling. It is possible to show the light-emitting decoration along with the movement of the game ball B, and to suppress the deterioration of interest in the game.

Further, in the center accessory 2500, the flange portion 2511b has a rear plate recess 2595a behind the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2571 has a front plate recess 2595b behind the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b compared to the case where the recesses are not provided in each of them, and the weight of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced. The cost of the item 2500 can be reduced. In addition, since the weight of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced, it becomes possible to dispense with the reinforcement required in the conventional pachinko machine, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the specific member 2519 covers the rear plate recessed portion 2595a so that it cannot be touched with a finger, the operator's fingers do not touch the rear plate recessed portion 2595a during manufacturing. Since it is not necessary to work in a timely manner, it is possible to suppress the increase in costs by making the work easier.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, in the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 that form the flow-down area (door upper passage portion 2416) in the attacker unit 2400 different from the center accessory 2500, the distribution speed of the game ball B Since the decorative light can be reflected by the concave portion 2595 provided on the back side of the influencing convex portion 2594, the falling region in which the game ball B circulates can be illuminated and decorated by the reflected light. Therefore, although the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 of the attacker unit 2400 are not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional pachinko machine, the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 are decorated with light. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is provided with decorations that are completely different from conventional pachinko machines, and has a high appealing power that can strongly attract the player's interest. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, in the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 of the attacker unit 2400, since the concave portion 2595 is provided on the back side of the convex portion 2594, compared with the case where only the convex portion is provided when viewed from the front, A complicated shape can be seen due to the shape of the convex portion 2594 and the shape of the concave portion 2595, and the shape acts as decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the convex portion 2594 is provided in the door upper passage portion 2416 above the large winning opening door 2413 in the attacker unit 2400, the flowing speed of the game ball B is reduced by the convex portion 2594 at the portion of the large winning opening door 2413. By slowing the downflow speed of the game ball B, the movement of the game ball B can be easily seen, and when the big winning opening door 2413 opens at that timing, the winning opening 2005 can be easily won. can be done. At this time, a concave portion 2595 is provided on the back side of the convex portion 2594, and the decorative light is reflected in the concave portion 2595 so that the decoration light is emitted. The falling (rolling) game ball B can be made to look like a silhouette and glittering, and the expectation for winning a prize in the big prize opening 2005 by the movement of the game ball B can be heightened. The luminous decoration can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, in the attacker unit 2400, the base plate 2431 has a rear plate recess 2595a behind the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2432 has a front plate recess 2595b behind the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, the weight of the rear plate recessed portion 2595a and the front plate recessed portion 2595b can be reduced compared to the case where recesses are not provided in each of them, and the weight of the attacker unit 2400 can be reduced. Such cost can be reduced. In addition, since the attacker unit 2400 can be made lighter, it becomes possible to dispense with the reinforcement required in the conventional pachinko machine, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the attacker decorative substrate 2433 and the decorative member 2435 cover the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b so that they cannot be touched, the operator's fingers touch the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b during manufacturing. Therefore, it is not necessary to work carefully so as not to stain the rear plate recessed portion 2595a.

In addition, since a gap is provided between the base plate 2431 of the attacker unit 2400 and the attacker decoration substrate 2433, the attacker decoration substrate 2433 moves backward from the base plate 2431, so that the LEDs mounted on the attacker decoration substrate 2433 It is possible to make it difficult to see electronic parts such as resistors and resistors, and it is possible to make it easy to exhibit the decorative effect of the convex portion 2594 and the concave portion 2595. , the heat from the plurality of LEDs can be easily dissipated.

Furthermore, in the flange portion 2511b and the front plate 2571 of the center accessory 2500, and the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 of the attacker unit 2400, since the concave portion 2595 is provided on the back side of the convex portion 2594, the concave portion 2595 is not provided. By comparison, the weight of the center accessory 2500 and the attacker unit 2400 can be reduced, the weight can be reduced, and the cost of the center accessory 2500 and the attacker unit 2400 can be reduced. In addition, since the weight of the center accessory 2500 and the attacker unit 2400 can be reduced, it becomes possible to dispense with the reinforcement required in the conventional pachinko machine, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加be able to.

In the above-described embodiment, in the center accessory 2500 and the attacker unit 2400, the passage decoration is composed of the convex portion 2594 that affects the circulation of the game ball B and the concave portion 2595 provided on the back side of the convex portion 2594. Although the part 2590 is provided, the passage decoration part 2590 may be provided in the starter unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the upper left side unit 2300, the normal prize winning unit 2600, and the like. good.

In addition, although a plurality of protrusions 2594 (rear plate protrusions 2594a and front plate protrusions 2594b) are all provided with recesses 2595 (rear plate recesses 2595a and front plate recesses 2595b), the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a specific convex portion 2596 having no concave portion 2595 on the back side may be mixed in the plurality of convex portions 2594 . As a result, unlike the concave portion 2595, decoration light cannot be reflected on the back side of the specific convex portion 2596, so that the convex portion 2594 and the specific convex portion 2596 can have different luminous decorations. Further, in this case, the convex portion 2594 having the concave portion 2595 on the back side and the specific convex portion 2596 having no concave portion 2595 on the back side have different shapes when viewed from the front. Compared to the case of providing a plurality of chisels, it is possible to change the decoration seen from the front.

[11-8e-1. Modified example of concave portion]
Next, a modification of the recess 2595 in the passage decoration 2590 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. In FIG. 141, the shape of the protrusion 2594 is triangular, and the relationship between the shape of the protrusion 2594 and the shape of the recess 2595 is shown. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 141(a), for a convex portion 2594 having a triangular shape, a concave portion 2595 on the back side of the convex portion 2594 has a triangular shape similar to the shape of the convex portion 2594. . In this example, similarly to the above, the decorative light can be reflected or refracted by the concave portion 2595 and the convex portion 2594 . In addition, when the shape of the concave portion 2595 is made similar to the shape of the convex portion 2594, the plate thickness of the member provided with the convex portion 2594 and the concave portion 2595 is substantially constant, so that partial sink marks during molding are avoided. and distortion can be reduced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 141(b), the concave portion 2595 on the back side of the convex portion 2594 having a triangular shape has a rectangular shape different from the shape of the convex portion 2594. As shown in FIG. Since the cross section of the recess 2595 may be square, the shape of the recess 2595 when viewed from the front may be square, circular, oval, or the like. In addition, since the cross-sectional shape of the concave portion 2595 may be different from the cross-sectional shape of the convex portion 2594, the shape of the concave portion 2595 when viewed from the front may be similar to the shape of the convex portion 2594 when viewed from the front. It can be good and it can be different. In this example, since the shape of the convex portion 2594 and the shape of the concave portion 2595 are different, the decorative light is reflected in different directions, and the decorative light is reflected in various directions by the convex portion 2594 and the concave portion 2595. Therefore, it is possible to show a brighter luminous decoration. Also, in this example, since the distance from the surface of the convex portion 2594 to the surface of the concave portion 2595 varies depending on the location, decorative light can be refracted in various directions, and a prism-like decorative effect can be exhibited. becomes.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 141(c), the concave portion 2595 on the back side of the convex portion 2594 having a triangular shape has a semicircular shape different from the shape of the convex portion 2594. As shown in FIG. Since the recess 2595 only needs to have a square cross section, the shape of the recess 2595 when viewed from the front may be circular, oval, square, or the like. In addition, since the cross-sectional shape of the concave portion 2595 may be different from the cross-sectional shape of the convex portion 2594, the shape of the concave portion 2595 when viewed from the front may be similar to the shape of the convex portion 2594 when viewed from the front. It can be good and it can be different. In this example, since the shape of the convex portion 2594 and the shape of the concave portion 2595 are different, the decorative light is reflected in different directions, and the decorative light is reflected in various directions by the convex portion 2594 and the concave portion 2595. Therefore, it is possible to show a brighter luminous decoration. Also, in this example, since the distance from the surface of the convex portion 2594 to the surface of the concave portion 2595 varies depending on the location, decorative light can be refracted in various directions, and a prism-like decorative effect can be exhibited. becomes.

Although FIG. 141 shows that the convex portion 2594 has a triangular shape, it is not limited to this, and may be a polygon such as a quadrangle, a pentagon, a hexagon, a rhombus, a semicircle, a star, or the like. Other irregular shapes, etc. may also be used.

[11-8e-2. Modified Example of Convex Part]
Next, a modified example of the convex portion 2594 in the passage decoration portion 2590 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 142(a), the shape of the convex portion 2594 may be a trapezoid formed by flattening the vicinity of the vertex of the triangle. In this example, the shape of the concave portion 2595 on the back side of the convex portion 2594 is a triangle that is substantially similar to the shape of the convex portion 2594 . In this example, similarly to the above, the decorative light can be reflected or refracted by the concave portion 2595 and the convex portion 2594 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 142(b), the shape of the projection 2594 may be semicircular. In this example, the shape of the concave portion 2595 on the back side of the convex portion 2594 is a semicircular shape that is substantially similar to the shape of the convex portion 2594, and the corners of the base end portion of the concave portion 2595 are rounded. there is

Further, as shown in FIG. 142(c), the shape of the convex portion 2594 may be an arc-shaped quadrangle whose base end portion is rounded. In this example, the shape of the concave portion 2595 on the back side of the convex portion 2594 is an elongated rectangle that is substantially similar to the shape of the convex portion 2594 . In addition, on the back side of the protrusion 2594, there is an outer recess 2595c that is recessed in an arc shape to a flat portion at the tip of the protrusion 2594 so as to follow the arc-shaped portion of the protrusion 2594. and the concave portion 2595, there is a seat-like flat portion 2595d parallel to the tip of the convex portion 2594. As shown in FIG. The recess 2595 is recessed from the flat portion 2595d. In this example, similarly to the above, the decoration light can be reflected or refracted by the concave portion 2595 and the convex portion 2594 .

In addition, since the decorative light can be reflected or refracted even in the outer concave portion 2595c, it is possible to display a more brilliant luminous decoration together with the concave portion 2595 and the convex portion 2594. FIG. Further, since the flat portion 2595d is provided, light from an LED or the like may be incident on the flat portion 2595d and guided to the convex portion 2594 so that the tip of the convex portion 2594 emits light. In addition, the flat portion 2595d can be used as a contact portion for an ejector pin used for demolding during molding. can be improved. Furthermore, it is possible to use the recessed portion 2595 as a screw hole and the flat portion 2595d as a seating surface for the screw, thereby eliminating the need to provide a separate screw hole for attachment.

Also in the example shown in FIG. 142, the shape of the projection 2594 when viewed from the front and the shape of the recess 2595 when viewed from the front may be similar or different.

[11-8e-3. Modified Example of Passage Decoration]
Next, in the passage decoration part 2590 described above, a plurality of protrusions 2594 (recesses 2595) of the same shape are provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. Different forms of convex portions 2594 (concave portions 2595 ) may be provided in one passage decoration portion 2590 . Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 143( a ), in a plurality of triangular protrusions 2594 , a plurality of protrusions 2594 having recesses 2595 provided on the back side and specific protrusions 2596 having no recesses 2595 are mixed. You can do it. This passage decoration portion 2590 can also achieve the same effects as described above. In addition, the light conditions such as the reflection and refraction of the ornamental light differ between the portion of the convex portion 2594 provided with the concave portion 2595 on the back side and the portion of the convex portion 2594 (specific convex portion 2596) not provided with the concave portion 2595. are different, the luminous decoration of the passage decoration part 2590 can be varied.

Also, as shown in FIG. 143(b), triangular convex portions 2594 and semicircular convex portions 2594 may be mixed. Here, concave portions 2595 similar in shape to the respective convex portions 2594 are provided on the back sides of the respective convex portions 2594 . This passage decoration portion 2590 can also achieve the same effects as described above. In addition, since the projections 2594 (recesses 2595) have different shapes, it is possible to change the decoration of the passage decoration part 2590 due to the difference in shape, even in a state in which no decorative light is applied. It is possible to further enhance the decorative effect. In addition, since the light conditions such as reflection and refraction of the decorative light differ depending on the shape of the convex portion 2594 (concave portion 2595), the luminous decoration of the passage decoration portion 2590 can be varied. Furthermore, since the shape of the convex portion 2594 is different, the degree of deceleration of the game ball B differs depending on the convex portion 2594, so that the flow of the game ball B can be given a change such as slowness and speed, and the game can be played. The movement of the game ball B can be more enjoyed by the player.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 143(c), protrusions 2594 (recesses 2595) having different shapes may be mixed with protrusions 2594 having different protrusion amounts (sizes). Here, each convex portion 2594 is triangular, and a concave portion 2595 on the back side of each convex portion 2594 is a concave portion 2595 similar in shape to each convex portion 2594 . This passage decoration portion 2590 can also achieve the same effects as described above. In addition, since the projections 2594 (recesses 2595) have different sizes, the decoration of the passageway decoration part 2590 can be varied due to the difference in size, even in a state where they are not decorated with decorative light. It is possible to further enhance the decorative effect. In addition, since the light conditions such as reflection and refraction of the decoration light differ depending on the difference in the size of the projection 2594 (or the recess 2595), the luminescence decoration of the passage decoration part 2590 can be varied. Furthermore, since the projections 2594 have different sizes, the degree of deceleration with respect to the game ball B differs depending on the projections 2594, so that the flow of the game ball B can be varied, such as speed and speed. The movement of the game ball B can be more enjoyed by the player.

FIG. 143 shows a mixture of convex portions 2594 (concave portions 2595) having different shapes (forms) in the cross-sectional shape, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the convex portions 2594 (concave portions 2594) having different shapes in plan view are shown. The concave portion 2595) may be mixed.

[11-8e-4. Another Embodiment of Passage Decoration Part]
Next, a passage decoration portion 2590A of an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 144 to 146 and the like. FIG. 144(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a passage decoration portion in which a first protrusion is provided with a second protrusion of the same shape, and (b) is a second protrusion having a different protrusion amount on the first protrusion. FIG. 4C is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a passage decoration portion provided with a convex portion, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a passage decoration portion in which a first convex portion is provided with a second convex portion having a different shape; (d) is an explanatory diagram showing a cross section of a passage decoration portion in which a second convex portion is also provided on an inclined surface of the first convex portion. FIG. 145(a1) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a passage decoration portion in which a first protrusion is provided with a second protrusion of the same shape, and (a2) is an explanatory view showing (a1) from the front. , (b) is an explanatory view showing from the front a passage decoration portion provided with a recess having a shape different from that of (a2). FIG. 146(a) is an explanatory view showing a cross section of a passage decoration part in the form of being fitted into an opening of a game panel, and (b) is an explanation showing a cross section of a passage decoration part of a form different from (a). It is a diagram.

The passage decoration part 2590A shown in FIG. 144(a) has a predetermined range from the base plate 2431 of the attacker unit 2400 and the rear plate part 2592 in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 such as the flange part 2511b of the center accessory 2500. A first protrusion 2594c protruding forward, a plurality of second protrusions 2594d protruding forward from the first protrusion 2594c, and a plurality of second protrusions 2594d provided on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c and recessed forward. and a second recess 2595f provided on the back side of the second protrusion 2594d and recessed forward.

The first protrusion 2594c has a flat front surface. The first convex portion 2594c also includes an inclined portion at the boundary with the rear plate portion 2592. As shown in FIG. The second convex portion 2594d has a semicircular cross section and extends in a direction intersecting with the direction of circulation of the game ball B (paper surface). The first recess 2595e is recessed in a shape similar to the shape of the first protrusion 2594c. The second concave portion 2595f is recessed in a shape similar to the shape of the second convex portion 2594d.

It should be noted that the first convex portion 2594c may be decorated with fine unevenness such as embossing. When texturing is provided on the first convex portion 2594c and the like, it is possible to hide wiring, members, and the like on the rear side by texturing. Further, at least one second convex portion 2594d may be a specific convex portion 2596 in which the second concave portion 2595f is not provided on the back side (see FIG. 144(b)). Furthermore, in front of the rear plate portion 2592, the glass 120 of the door frame 3 is provided with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow, but the front plate portion 2593 may be provided.

According to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(a), the first concave portion 2595e and the second concave portion 2595f are provided on the back side of the first convex portion 2594c and the second convex portion 2594d. The light (decorative light) from the LEDs of the LED board provided on the game board 5 can be reflected or refracted by the second concave portion 2595f. As a result, the passage decoration portion 2590A is decorated with light emission by the reflection of decorative light by the first convex portion 2594c and the second convex portion 2594d and by the reflection of decorative light by the first concave portion 2595e and the second concave portion 2595f. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be directed to the passage decoration portion 2590A, and the movement of the game ball B flowing through the passage decoration portion 2590A can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(a), due to the presence of the first protrusion 2594c, the first protrusion 2594c and the front member (for example, the glass 120, the front plate portion 2593, etc.) Since the gap in the front-rear direction is narrowed, the circulation speed of the game ball B entering the passage decoration portion 2590A can be reduced. Since the first protrusion 2594c is provided with a plurality of second protrusions 2594d, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be further reduced by the second protrusions 2594d. Therefore, since the circulation speed of the game ball B is slowed down in the passage decoration part 2590A, the game ball B can be easily seen, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest of the player. can.

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(a), since only the glass 120 is provided in front of the rear plate portion 2592, the first convex portion 2594c and the second convex portion 2594d can be combined. Therefore, the game ball B is decelerated between the glass 120 and the first protrusion 2594c or the second protrusion 2594d. At this time, since the game ball B hits the glass 120 relatively strongly, the collision sound can be heard loudly, thereby attracting the attention of the player.

The passage decoration part 2590A shown in FIG. 144(b) has a predetermined range from the base plate 2431 of the attacker unit 2400 and the rear plate part 2592 in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 such as the flange part 2511b of the center accessory 2500. A first protrusion 2594c protruding forward, a plurality of second protrusions 2594d protruding forward from the first protrusion 2594c, and a plurality of second protrusions 2594d provided on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c and recessed forward. and a second recess 2595f provided on the back side of some of the second protrusions 2594d and recessed forward.

A first convex portion 2594c of the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(b) has a flat front surface. The first convex portion 2594c also includes an inclined portion at the boundary with the rear plate portion 2592. As shown in FIG. The second convex portion 2594d has a semicircular cross section and extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which the game ball B flows. As shown in FIG. 144(b), some of the second protrusions 2594d have different amounts of forward protrusion, and the second protrusions 2594d having a smaller protrusion amount are provided with second recesses 2595f behind the second protrusions 2594d. A specific convex portion 2596 is provided. The first recess 2595e is recessed in a shape similar to the shape of the first protrusion 2594c. In addition, the second concave portion 2595f is provided on the back side of the second convex portion 2594d having a large amount of forward projection.

In addition, in the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(b), the game ball B can be circulated in front of the plurality of second convex portions 2594d. Therefore, the game ball B circulates even in front of the second convex portion 2594d having a large protrusion amount. Also, the first convex portion 2594c may be decorated with fine unevenness such as texturing. When texturing is provided on the first convex portion 2594c and the like, it is possible to hide wiring, members, and the like on the rear side by texturing. Further, all of the second protrusions 2594d may be specific protrusions 2596 that do not have the second recesses 2595f on the back side. Furthermore, in front of the rear plate portion 2592, the glass 120 of the door frame 3 is provided with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow, but the front plate portion 2593 may be provided.

According to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(b), the first concave portion 2595e and the second concave portion 2595f are provided on the back side of the first convex portion 2594c and the back side of some of the second convex portions 2594d. , the light (decoration light) from the LED of the LED board provided on the game board 5 can be reflected or refracted by the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f. As a result, the passage decoration portion 2590A is decorated with light emission by the reflection of decoration light by the first projection 2594c and the second projection 2594d, and the reflection of the decoration light by the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be directed to the passage decoration portion 2590A, and the movement of the game ball B flowing through the passage decoration portion 2590A can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(b), due to the presence of the first protrusion 2594c, the first protrusion 2594c and the front member (for example, the glass 120, the front plate portion 2593, etc.) Since the gap in the front-rear direction is narrowed, the circulation speed of the game ball B entering the passage decoration portion 2590A can be reduced. Since the first protrusion 2594c is provided with a plurality of second protrusions 2594d, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be further reduced by the second protrusions 2594d. Therefore, since the circulation speed of the game ball B is slowed down in the passage decoration part 2590A, the game ball B can be easily seen, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest of the player. can.

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(b), since only the glass 120 is provided in front of the rear plate portion 2592, the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d can be combined. Therefore, the game ball B is decelerated between the glass 120 and the first protrusion 2594c or the second protrusion 2594d. At this time, since the game ball B hits the glass 120 relatively strongly, the collision sound can be heard loudly, thereby attracting the attention of the player.

The passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(c) has a predetermined range from the base plate 2431 of the attacker unit 2400 and the rear plate portion 2592 in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, such as the flange portion 2511b of the center accessory 2500. A first protrusion 2594c protruding forward, a plurality of second protrusions 2594d protruding forward from the first protrusion 2594c, and a plurality of second protrusions 2594d provided on the back side of the first protrusion 2594c and recessed forward. and a second recess 2595f provided on the back side of at least a part of the second protrusions 2594d and recessed forward.

A first convex portion 2594c of the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(c) has a flat front surface. The first convex portion 2594c also includes an inclined portion at the boundary with the rear plate portion 2592. As shown in FIG. The second projecting portion 2594d has a semicircular cross-section extending in a direction intersecting with the direction of circulation of the game ball B, and a projecting long forward portion. . The second convex portion 2594d that protrudes forward for a long time protrudes forward with a length that prevents the game ball B from circulating in front of it, and the direction that intersects the distribution direction of the game ball B ( It is formed short in the left-right direction), and the game ball B can be circulated on both the left and right outer sides. The first recess 2595e is recessed in a shape similar to the shape of the first protrusion 2594c. The second concave portion 2595f is recessed in a shape similar to the shape of the second convex portion 2594d.

It should be noted that the first convex portion 2594c may be decorated with fine unevenness such as embossing. When texturing is provided on the first convex portion 2594c and the like, it is possible to hide wiring, members, and the like on the rear side by texturing. Further, at least one second convex portion 2594d may be a specific convex portion 2596 in which the second concave portion 2595f is not provided on the back side. Furthermore, in front of the rear plate portion 2592, the glass 120 of the door frame 3 is provided with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow, but the front plate portion 2593 may be provided.

According to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(c), the first concave portion 2595e and the second concave portion 2595f are provided on the back side of the first convex portion 2594c and the second convex portion 2594d. The light (decoration light) from the LEDs of the LED board provided on the game board 5 can be reflected or refracted by the second concave portion 2595f. As a result, the passage decoration portion 2590A is decorated with light emission by the reflection of decoration light by the first projection 2594c and the second projection 2594d, and the reflection of the decoration light by the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f. Therefore, the player's line of sight can be directed to the passage decoration portion 2590A, and the movement of the game ball B flowing through the passage decoration portion 2590A can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(c), due to the presence of the first convex portion 2594c, the first convex portion 2594c and the front member (for example, the glass 120, the front plate portion 2593, etc.) Since the gap in the front-rear direction is narrowed, the circulation speed of the game ball B entering the passage decoration portion 2590A can be reduced. Since the first protrusion 2594c is provided with a plurality of second protrusions 2594d, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be further reduced by the second protrusions 2594d. At this time, since the second convex portion 2594d that is short in the left-right direction and protrudes forward long is mixed, the second convex portion 2594d can change the circulation direction of the game ball B to the left-right direction, and the game is played. A complicated motion can be given to the sphere B. Therefore, since the circulation speed of the game ball B is slowed down in the passage decoration part 2590A, the game ball B can be easily seen, and the game ball B moves in a complicated manner in the horizontal direction. You can enjoy the movement of

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(c), since only the glass 120 is provided in front of the rear plate portion 2592, the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d can be combined. Therefore, the game ball B is decelerated between the glass 120 and the first protrusion 2594c or the second protrusion 2594d. At this time, since the game ball B hits the glass 120 relatively strongly, the collision sound can be heard loudly, thereby attracting the attention of the player.

The passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(d) extends forward from the rear plate portion 2592 in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100, such as the base plate 2431 of the attacker unit 2400 and the flange portion 2511b of the center accessory 2500. A protruding rear plate protrusion 2594a, a rear plate recess 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and recessed forward, and a predetermined range of the rear plate portion 2592 protruding forward. a convex portion 2594c, a plurality of second convex portions 2594d projecting forward from the first convex portion 2594c, a first concave portion 2595e provided on the back side of the first convex portion 2594c and recessed forward; and a second concave portion 2595f provided on the back side of the second convex portion 2594d and recessed forward. The rear plate convex portion 2594a has a semicircular cross section and extends in a direction intersecting with the game ball B distribution direction.

The first protrusion 2594c has a flat front surface. The first convex portion 2594c also includes an inclined portion at the boundary with the rear plate portion 2592. As shown in FIG. The second convex portion 2594d has a semicircular cross section and extends in a direction intersecting the direction in which the game ball B flows. As shown in FIG. 144(d), some of the second protrusions 2594d are provided so as to overlap the rear plate portion 2592 and the first protrusions 2594c. The second convex portion 2594d provided so as to hang over the rear plate portion 2592 is formed short in the direction (horizontal direction) intersecting the circulation direction of the game ball B, and the game ball B It is possible to change the distribution direction of the liquid to the left and right. The first recess 2595e is recessed in a shape similar to the shape of the first protrusion 2594c.

It should be noted that the first convex portion 2594c may be decorated with fine unevenness such as embossing. When texturing is provided on the first convex portion 2594c and the like, it is possible to hide wiring, members, and the like on the rear side by texturing. Further, at least one of the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the second convex portion 2594d may be a specific convex portion 2596 in which the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the second concave portion 2595f are not provided. Furthermore, in front of the rear plate portion 2592, the glass 120 of the door frame 3 is provided with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow, but the front plate portion 2593 may be provided.

According to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(d), the rear plate concave portion 2595a, the first concave portion 2595e and the second concave portion 2595f are provided behind the rear plate convex portion 2594a, the first convex portion 2594c and the second convex portion 2594d. is provided, the light (decorative light) from the LED of the LED board provided on the game board 5 is reflected or refracted by the rear plate recess 2595a, the first recess 2595e, and the second recess 2595f. can be done. As a result, the decorative light is reflected by the rear plate convex portion 2594a, the first convex portion 2594c, and the second convex portion 2594d, and the decorative light is reflected by the rear plate concave portion 2595a, the first concave portion 2595e, and the second concave portion 2595f. Since the passage decoration part 2590A is decorated with light emission, the player's line of sight can be directed to the passage decoration part 2590A, and the movement of the game ball B flowing through the passage decoration part 2590A can be enjoyed. .

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(d), due to the presence of the first protrusion 2594c, the first protrusion 2594c and the front member (for example, the glass 120, the front plate portion 2593, etc.) Since the gap in the front-rear direction is narrowed, the circulation speed of the game ball B entering the passage decoration portion 2590A can be reduced. Since the first protrusion 2594c is provided with a plurality of second protrusions 2594d, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be further reduced by the second protrusions 2594d. At this time, when it contacts the second convex portion 2594d provided so as to hang over the rear plate portion 2592, the horizontal direction of the second convex portion 2594d is formed to be short, so that the direction of circulation of the game ball B is changed. It can be changed in the left-right direction, and a complicated movement can be given to the game ball B. - 特許庁Therefore, since the circulation speed of the game ball B is slowed down in the passage decoration part 2590A, the game ball B can be easily seen, and the game ball B moves in a complicated manner in the horizontal direction. You can enjoy the movement of

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 144(d), since only the glass 120 is provided in front of the rear plate portion 2592, the first convex portion 2594c and the second convex portion 2594d can be combined. Therefore, the game ball B is decelerated between the glass 120 and the first protrusion 2594c or the second protrusion 2594d. At this time, since the game ball B hits the glass 120 relatively strongly, the collision sound can be heard loudly, thereby attracting the attention of the player.

Although FIGS. 144(a) to 144(d) show the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the second convex portion 2594d protruding in a semicircular shape, the present invention is not limited to this. A rear plate convex portion 2594a or a second convex portion 2594d may be used.

145(a1) and (a2) are in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 such as the base plate 2431 of the attacker unit 2400 and the flange portion 2511b of the center accessory 2500. A first convex portion 2594c protruding forward in a predetermined range from the rear plate portion 2592, a plurality of second convex portions 2594d protruding forward from the first convex portion 2594c, and provided on the back side of the first convex portion 2594c. It has a first concave portion 2595e concave forward and a second concave portion 2595f provided on the back side of the second convex portion 2594d and concave forward. The first protrusion 2594c has a flat front surface. The first convex portion 2594c also includes an inclined portion at the boundary with the rear plate portion 2592. As shown in FIG. The second convex portion 2594d has a semicircular cross section and extends in a direction intersecting with the direction of circulation of the game ball B (paper surface).

As shown in FIG. 145(a2), the first concave portion 2595e of the passage decoration portion 2590A is concave in the shape of a downward arrow when viewed from the front.

It should be noted that the first convex portion 2594c may be decorated with fine unevenness such as embossing. When texturing is provided on the first convex portion 2594c and the like, it is possible to hide wiring, members, and the like on the rear side by texturing. Further, at least one second convex portion 2594d may be a specific convex portion 2596 in which the second concave portion 2595f is not provided on the back side. Furthermore, in front of the rear plate portion 2592, the glass 120 of the door frame 3 is provided with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow, but the front plate portion 2593 may be provided.

According to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIGS. 145(a1) and (a2), the first concave portion 2595e and the second concave portion 2595f are provided on the back side of the first convex portion 2594c and the second convex portion 2594d. The light (decoration light) from the LEDs of the LED board provided on the game board 5 can be reflected or refracted by the one concave portion 2595e and the second concave portion 2595f. As a result, the passage decoration portion 2590A is decorated with light emission by the reflection of decorative light by the first convex portion 2594c and the second convex portion 2594d and by the reflection of decorative light by the first concave portion 2595e and the second concave portion 2595f. Become. At this time, since the first concave portion 2595e is recessed in the shape of an arrow, the arrow deviates from the luminous decoration, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the passage decoration portion 2590A. It is possible to raise expectations for the game by making the player feel that there is something there, and to entertain the movement of the game ball B flowing through the passage decoration part 2590A.

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIGS. 145(a1) and (a2), due to the presence of the first protrusion 2594c, the first protrusion 2594c and the front member (for example, the glass 120, the front plate portion 2593, etc.) becomes narrower, the circulation speed of the game ball B entering the passage decoration portion 2590A can be reduced. Since the first protrusion 2594c is provided with a plurality of second protrusions 2594d, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be further reduced by the second protrusions 2594d. Therefore, since the circulation speed of the game ball B is slowed down in the passage decoration part 2590A, the game ball B can be easily seen, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed to suppress the decrease in interest of the player. can.

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIGS. 145(a1) and (a2), since only the glass 120 is provided in front of the rear plate portion 2592, the first convex portion 2594c and the second convex portion 2594d By combining , the game ball B is decelerated between the glass 120 and the first protrusion 2594c or the second protrusion 2594d. At this time, since the game ball B hits the glass 120 relatively strongly, the collision sound can be heard loudly, thereby attracting the attention of the player.

In addition, although the first concave portion 2595e that is recessed in the shape of an arrow is shown above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first concave portion 2595e that is recessed in various shapes may be used. For example, as shown in FIG. 145(b), the shape of the first concave portion 2595e when viewed from the front may be a star shape. This makes it possible to enhance the decorative effect of the passage decorative portion 2590A.

The first recess 2595e may be composed of one recess or may be composed of a plurality of recesses. The shape of the first concave portion 2595e when viewed from the front includes, in addition to the arrow shape and star shape, a heart shape, a geometric pattern shape, a character shape consisting of predetermined logo characters, and a character shape imitating a predetermined character. , a pattern shape imitating a predetermined pattern, or the like. In order to make these figures (first concave portion 2595e) conspicuous, light may be incident from the end surface of the rear plate portion 2592, and the rear plate portion 2592 may be used as a light guide plate. At that time, these figures may be formed by embossing. Then, the incident light is emitted from the texturing portion, and the figure appears to shine. In addition, when texturing is provided, it is possible to hide wiring, members, etc. behind by the texturing.

Further, in the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 145, since the second protrusion 2594d has a semicircular shape, there is no (small) corner portion, so the shape of the first recess 2595e can be easily seen from the front. Of course, the triangular or trapezoidal second convex portion 2594d may be used.

Next, the passage decoration part 2590A shown in FIG. A rear plate protrusion 2594a, a rear plate recess 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and an LED as a specific member 2519 that covers the rear of the rear plate recess 2595a and makes the rear plate recess 2595a untouchable. and a substrate 2519a. Here, some of the rear plate protrusions 2594a are designated as specific protrusions 2596 having no rear plate recesses 2595a on the back side.

Note that the rear plate portion 2592 may be decorated with fine unevenness such as embossing. When texturing is provided on the rear plate portion 2592 or the like, it is possible to hide the rear wiring, members, and the like by the texturing. In addition, in all the rear plate convex portions 2594a, a specific convex portion 2596 having no rear plate concave portion 2595a on the back side may be used. Furthermore, in front of the rear plate portion 2592, the glass 120 of the door frame 3 is provided with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow, but the front plate portion 2593 may be provided.

A gap is provided between the rear plate portion 2592 and the LED board 2519a, but as shown in FIG. 1112 , the outer periphery of the gap between the rear plate portion 2592 and the LED board 2519 a is surrounded by the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 . Therefore, even if the gap between the rear plate portion 2592 and the LED board 2519a is large enough for a finger to fit into, the periphery of the gap is surrounded. A finger cannot be inserted between them, and the rear plate concave portion 2595a of the rear plate portion 2592 cannot be touched with a finger.

According to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 146(a), since the rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, the LED of the LED board 2519a provided behind the rear plate recess 2595a is It can reflect and refract the light (decorative light) from the As a result, the passage decoration portion 2590A is illuminated by the reflection of decoration light by the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the reflection of decoration light by the rear plate recess portion 2595a. 2590A, and the movement of the game ball B flowing through the passage decoration part 2590A can be enjoyed.

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent the rear plate recessed portion 2595a from being soiled by the operator's finger touching the rear plate recessed portion 2595a at the time of manufacturing, and the decorative light is reliably reflected or refracted in the rear plate recessed portion 2595a. be able to. In addition, since the LED substrate 2519a is provided to cover the rear plate recess 2595a, it is possible to make it difficult for dirt and dust to enter the rear plate recess 2595a. can be done.

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 146(a), since a plurality of rear plate convex portions 2594a are provided, the game ball B is brought into contact with the rear plate convex portion 2594a so that the game ball B The circulation speed can be reduced and the game balls B can be easily seen. Further, since the LED substrate 2519a is provided behind the rear plate portion 2592, the passageway decoration portion 2590A can be illuminated by lighting the LEDs of the LED substrate 2519a. can be seen in a silhouette form, and the movement of the game ball B can be easily seen to amuse the player.

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 146(a), since only the glass 120 is provided in front of the rear plate portion 2592, depending on the size and shape of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, the rear plate protrusion Since the game ball B that abuts on the part 2594a bounces forward and hits the glass 120, the collision sound can be heard, thereby attracting the attention of the player.

The passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 146(b) includes a rear plate portion 2592 inserted into an opening 1112 provided in the game panel 1100 and a rear plate concave portion provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a. 2595a, an LED board 2519a as a specific member 2519 that covers the rear of the rear plate recess 2595a to make the rear plate recess 2595a untouchable, and a plurality of rear plate protrusions 2594a projecting forward from the rear plate portion 2592. , a first projection 2594c projecting forward from the rear plate portion 2592 and extending forward of the game panel 1100, a plurality of second projections 2594d projecting forward from the first projection 2594c, and a It has a first concave portion 2595e provided on the back side of one convex portion 2594c and a second concave portion 2595f provided on the back side of the second convex portion 2594d.

In the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 146(b), the rear plate portion 2592 and the LED board 2519a are inserted into the opening portion 1112 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. A gap is provided between the rear plate portion 2592 and the LED board 2519a. there is Therefore, even if the gap between the rear plate portion 2592 and the LED board 2519a is large enough for a finger to fit into, the periphery of the gap is surrounded. A finger cannot be inserted between them, and the rear plate concave portion 2595a of the rear plate portion 2592 cannot be touched with a finger.

Note that the rear plate portion 2592 and the first convex portion 2594c may be decorated with fine unevenness such as texturing. When texturing is provided on the rear plate portion 2592, the first convex portion 2594c, and the like, it is possible to hide the rear wiring, members, and the like by texturing. Further, in at least one rear plate protrusion 2594a, first protrusion 2594c, and second protrusion 2594d, the rear plate recess 2595a, the first recess 2595e, and the second recess 2595f are not provided on the back side of the specific protrusion 2596. Also good. Furthermore, in front of the rear plate portion 2592 and the first convex portion 2594c, the glass 120 of the door frame 3 is provided with an interval that allows the game ball B to flow, but the front plate portion 2593 may be provided. .

According to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 146(b), the rear plate recessed portion 2595a, the first recessed portion 2595e and the second recessed portion 2595f are provided on the rear side of the rear plate projected portion 2594a, the first projected portion 2594c and the second projected portion 2594d. , the rear plate recess 2595a, the first recess 2595e, and the second recess 2595f can reflect or refract the light (decorative light) from the LEDs of the LED substrate 2519a provided behind. can. As a result, the decorative light is reflected by the rear plate convex portion 2594a, the first convex portion 2594c, and the second convex portion 2594d, and the decorative light is reflected by the rear plate concave portion 2595a, the first concave portion 2595e, and the second concave portion 2595f. Since the passage decoration part 2590A is decorated with light emission, the player's line of sight can be directed to the passage decoration part 2590A, and the movement of the game ball B flowing through the passage decoration part 2590A can be enjoyed. .

In addition, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 146(b), the LED board 2519a as the specific member 2519 covers the rear of the rear plate recess 2595a, and the game panel 1100 as the specific member 2519 covers the first recess. 2595e and the rear of the second recess 2595f. , By touching the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f, it is possible to prevent the rear plate recess 2595a, the first recess 2595e and the second recess 2595f from being soiled. And the decorative light can be reliably reflected or refracted in the second concave portion 2595f. Further, since the specific member 2519 is provided to cover the first recessed portion 2595e and the second recessed portion 2595f of the rear plate recessed portion 2595a, it is difficult for dirt and dust to enter the rear plate recessed portion 2595a, the first recessed portion 2595e and the second recessed portion 2595f. It is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance due to dirt such as dust.

Furthermore, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 146(b), due to the presence of the first protrusion 2594c, the first protrusion 2594c and the front member (for example, the glass 120, the front plate portion 2593, etc.) Since the gap in the front-rear direction is narrowed, the circulation speed of the game ball B entering the passage decoration portion 2590A can be reduced. Since the first protrusion 2594c is provided with a plurality of second protrusions 2594d, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be further reduced by the second protrusions 2594d. At this time, since the LED substrate 2519a is provided behind the rear plate portion 2592, the passageway decoration portion 2590A can be illuminated by lighting the LEDs of the LED substrate 2519a. The game ball B circulating in the part 2590A can be shown in a silhouette shape, and the movement of the game ball B can be easily seen to entertain the player.

Further, according to the passage decoration portion 2590A shown in FIG. 146(b), since only the glass 120 is provided in front of the rear plate portion 2592, the first protrusion 2594c and the second protrusion 2594d can be combined. Therefore, the game ball B is decelerated between the glass 120 and the first protrusion 2594c or the second protrusion 2594d. At this time, since the game ball B hits the glass 120 relatively strongly, the collision sound can be heard loudly, thereby attracting the attention of the player.

Although FIGS. 146(a) and 146(d) show the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the second convex portion 2594d protruding in a semicircular shape, the present invention is not limited to this. A rear plate convex portion 2594a or a second convex portion 2594d may be used.

[11-9. Flow of game balls within the game area]
Next, the flow of the game ball B within the game area 5a will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 124 and the like. In the state assembled on the game board 5, the center accessory 2500 is provided substantially in the center of the game area 5a. Although not shown, in the game area 5a, the left and right outer and lower portions of the center accessory 2500, and the first nailed passage portion 2517c and the second nailed passage portion 2517f in the ball passage 2517 , a plurality of obstacle nails are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. In addition, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided on the left side of the center accessory 2500 and above the side upper left unit 2300 .

Below the group of guide passages 2520 on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement between the guide passage group 2520 and the inner rail 1002 are provided. On the left side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, the entrance of the warp passage 2512 opens slightly upward from the left at a portion below the vertical center of the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511. there is A windmill (not shown) is provided between the warp passage 2512 and the shelf 2301 of the upper left side unit 2300 . Also, although illustration is omitted, a plurality of obstructing nails (so-called road nails) are obliquely arranged from near the lower right of the windmill to a portion near the lower left end of the stage 2513 along the lower side of the center accessory 2500. ) is provided.

The game ball B hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 passes through either the first guide path 2521 or the second guide path 2522 of the guide path group 2520, and then enters the warp path 2512 with a certain probability. enter in. In this embodiment, the game ball B guided to the second guide path 2522 is more likely to enter the warp path 2512 than the game ball B guided to the first guide path 2521 .

The game ball B that has entered the warp passage 2512 is supplied to the stage 2513 provided within the frame of the center accessory 2500, rolls on the stage 2513 in the left-right direction, and is ejected from the central release portion 2513a or the side release portion 2513b. It is discharged so as to flow back into the game area 5a from either. Since the central release portion 2513a of the stage 2513 is provided directly above the first starting port 2003 at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a, the game ball B released from the central release portion 2513a has a high probability of reaching the first It is received in the starting port 2003 . The game ball B released from the side release portions 2513b on both the left and right sides of the central release portion 2513a is received in the first starting port 2003 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the first starting port 2003 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3003 of the starting port unit 2100, and is guided to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. It is delivered and discharged downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100 . When the game ball B is detected by the first start sensor 3003, a privilege is given in which a predetermined number of game balls B are added to the number of balls held, and a state in which a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the first In a state where the reserved number of special symbols is less than 4), a lottery for the first special symbol is executed which enables the occurrence of an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player. In addition, the lottery 1st special design is also called a 1st special lottery result.

The game ball B released from the stage 2513 and not received in the first starting port 2003 is received in the out port 1008 and discharged out of the game area 5a. The game ball B received in the out port 1008 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 and discharged to the out ball receiving port 600a of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

A game ball B that is hit to the left outside of the center role 2500 and does not enter the warp passage 2512 has a high probability of moving along the lower side of the center role 2500 when it circulates on the right side of the center of the windmill. It flows down to the right so as to follow the road nails that are installed diagonally. A game ball B that has circulated on the right side of the center of the windmill may be received by the first starting opening 2003 or the general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 . Also, the game ball B that has circulated on the right side of the center of the windmill may be received by the sub-out port 2021 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B that has not been received by the first starting port 2003, the general prize winning port 2001, and the sub-out port 2021 is received by the out port 1008 and discharged out of the game area 5a.

The game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back ball guidance unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and downwardly moved. is discharged to When the game ball B is detected by the general prize winning hole sensor 3001, a privilege of adding a predetermined number to the number of possessed balls is given.

On the other hand, when the water flows leftward from the center of the windmill, it flows down onto the shelf 2301 of the side upper left unit 2300 and flows down the shelf 2301 to the right. A game ball B that circulates on the left side of the center of the windmill may be received by the general prize winning opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 provided in the side unit 2200 . The game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, then transferred to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and discharged downward from the back ball guide unit 3100. - 特許庁The game ball B that has not been received by the general winning opening 2001 and the sub-out opening 2021 is received by the out opening 1008 and discharged out of the game area 5a.

Next, on the right side of the center accessory 2500, a vertically long ball passage 2517 is provided. is provided. A plurality of obstructing nails are planted in the first nailed passage portion 2517c directly above the second starting opening 2004 and the second nailed passage portion 2517f immediately above the normal prize winning opening 2002, respectively.

A game ball B that is struck to the right into the game area 5a and enters the ball passage 2517 first circulates through the attacker passage portion 2517a and rolls on the large winning opening door 2413 that closes the large winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加The big winning opening 2005 is drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2003 and receiving the game ball B into the second starting opening 2004. Depending on the second special design (second special lottery result), The large winning opening door 2413 is retracted and opened by the attacker solenoid 2414 . The opening/closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 differs according to the lottery results of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

Therefore, when the game ball B circulates (rolls) in the attacker passage portion 2517a at the timing when the big winning hole 2005 is open, the game ball B is received in the big winning hole 2005.例文帳に追加As a result, when the special pattern of opening and closing the big winning hole 2005 is drawn, the ball path 2517 provided with the big winning hole 2005 is provided so that the game ball B can be received by the big winning hole 2005. "Right shot" can be performed so that the game ball B circulates in the middle.

The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2506 provided below. When the game ball B is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2506, a privilege of adding a predetermined number to the number of possessed balls is given.

By the way, when the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 and "per character" is drawn as the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the big winning port 2005 is a predetermined pattern. , and the sorting blades 2536 operate in a predetermined pattern.

When the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 at the time of "hit the character" is distributed to the losing opening 2009 by the distribution vane 2536, after being detected by the losing opening sensor 2504, it is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁After being handed over to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the ball is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600 below.

On the other hand, when the game ball B received in the big prize winning opening 2005 at the time of "hit the prize" is distributed to the V winning opening 2010 by the distribution vane 2536, after being detected by the V winning opening sensor 2507, the game panel 1100 After being delivered to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the ball is discharged to the safe ball socket 600b of the circulation ball path unit 600 below.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the loss opening 2009, no particular privilege is given to the player, but when the game ball B is received in the V winning opening 2010 , the player is given a privilege that a predetermined round (for example, 15 rounds) of jackpot games occurs.

The game ball B that is not received in the large winning opening 2005 in the attacker passage portion 2517a in the ball passage 2517 enters the first nailed passage portion 2517c through the right edge passage portion 2517b. Then, when the game ball B enters the second starting port passage entrance 2415 of the first nailed passage portion 2517c, there is a possibility that it will be received by the second starting port 2004.

The second starting port 2004 is closed in a normal state so that it cannot be accepted, and when a "normal hit" is drawn as a normal pattern (normal lottery result) by accepting the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002, it starts. The opening solenoid 2412 causes the second starting opening door 2411 to retreat and the guide piece 2411a to move forward to open the second starting opening 2004 so that it can be received. In this state, when the game ball B enters the second starting port passage entrance 2415 and is guided by the guide piece 2411a, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加

After being detected by the second starting port sensor 2505, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and then downward from the back ball guiding unit 3100. is discharged to the safe ball receptacle 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600. When the game ball B is detected by the second starting opening sensor 2505, a privilege to add a predetermined number of balls is given, and a state in which predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the number of reserved second special symbols is less than 4), a lottery for the second special symbol that enables the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is executed. In addition, the drawn second special pattern is also referred to as a second special drawing result.

The game ball B that has passed through the first nailed passage portion 2517c and has not been received by the second starting port 2004 enters the second nailed passage portion 2517f via the left passage portion 2517d or the right passage portion 2517e. A normal prize winning opening 2002 is always open at the center of the lower end of the second nailed passage portion 2517f, and the game ball B is accepted in the normal winning prize opening 2002 with a certain degree of probability.

The game ball B received in the normal winning hole 2002 is guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, passed to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, detected by the normal winning hole sensor 3002, and downwardly. is discharged to the safe ball receptacle 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600. When the game ball B is detected by the normal winning opening sensor 3002, a privilege to add a predetermined number of balls to the number of possession is given, and a state in which predetermined conditions are satisfied (for example, the number of reserved symbols in the normal pattern is less than 4) state), a normal symbol lottery that enables acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004 is executed. In addition, the normally drawn pattern is also called a normal lottery result.

Then, the game ball B that has not been received in the normal prize winning opening 2002 is discharged from the out opening 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a through the exit passage portion 2517g.

In this embodiment, in the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, in which the special symbol lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in which the advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous is generated by opening and closing the big winning opening 2005 and the accessory winning opening 2006, the first start While the opening 2003 is always open to accept the game ball B, the second starting opening 2004 is selected by receiving the game ball B into the normal winning opening 2002, and the ordinary lottery is "ordinary winning". Only the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined pattern. As a result, the first starting port 2003 is more likely to accept the game ball B than the second starting port 2004.例文帳に追加

For this reason, in a normal state, the game ball B flows down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game ball B can be received by the first start port 2003. The driving operation of B can be performed, the movement of the game ball B guided by a plurality of obstacle nails can be shown, and the original game of the pachinko machine 1 by the game ball B can be enjoyed, and the first start-up can be performed. It is possible to heighten expectations for receiving the game ball B into the mouth 2003 .

Then, when the game ball B is accepted into the first starting port 2003, the lottery result of the first special symbol is "hit" (for example, "small hit", "middle hit", "big hit", "special hit"). , etc.) is drawn, the big winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that the game ball B is hit toward the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the big winning hole 2005 can accept the game ball B. It is possible to make the player enjoy the insertion operation (so-called “right-handed hitting”) and heighten expectations for receiving the game ball B into the big winning opening 2005.例文帳に追加

A normal winning hole 2002 is provided on the right side of the center accessory 2500, and when the game ball B is received in the normal winning hole 2002, a normal lottery lottery is performed in which the second starting hole 2004 can be received. Therefore, the player can be entertained by whether or not the game ball B struck on the right side passes through the normal winning opening 2002, and when the second starting opening 2004 becomes acceptable, the second starting opening 2004 The player can also be entertained by whether or not the game ball B is accepted at the time.

In addition, at the time of the "game ball hit", since there is a possibility that the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 is distributed to the V winning opening 2010 by the sorting blade 2536, the game ball B goes to the V winning opening 2010. It is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether or not it is sorted, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Then, when the game ball B is received in the V winning opening 2010, or when the game ball B is received in the first start opening 2003 and the second start opening 2004, the first special symbol and the second special symbol "big hit" ' is drawn, the large winning hole 2005 opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, so that there is an opportunity for a large number of game balls B to be added to the number of balls held. In order to accept B, the operation of hitting the game ball B aimed at the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be performed, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

[11-10. Overall configuration of the back unit]
Next, the overall configuration of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123 and the like. The back unit 3000 includes a vibration sensor 1040 (see FIG. 154) for detecting vibration acting on the game board 5 (pachinko machine 1), and a game ball received in the general winning hole 2001 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100. A general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting B, a normal winning hole sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received by the normal winning hole 2002 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, and a first starting hole 2003. and 3003 for detecting the game ball B guided behind the game panel 1100 . A general winning opening sensor 3001 , a normal winning opening sensor 3002 , and a first starting opening sensor 3003 are provided in the back ball guidance unit 3100 .

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 and is open at the front. It has a lock slider 3020 which is slidable in the left-right direction for attaching and detaching the performance display device 1600, and a back substrate unit 3040 attached to the rear wall of the back box 3010 so as to be hinge-rotatable.

The back board unit 3040 includes a box-shaped board box 3041 that is L-shaped when viewed from the front and is thin in the front and back, and a panel relay board and effect drive board (not shown) housed in the board box 3041. I have. The board box 3041 has two shafts 3041a rotatably supported by the shaft support 3010f of the back box 3010 on the outer sides of the vertically extending L-shaped portion. Further, the circuit board box 3041 has locking claws 3041b that are locked to the locking portions 3010g of the back box 3010 at the ends of the L-shaped portions extending to the left and right.

Furthermore, the back unit 3000 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010, and the back ball guiding unit 3100 through which the game ball B guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 flows, and the back ball in the back box 3010. A back decoration unit 3200 provided behind the guiding unit 3100, a back front effect unit 3300 provided above the back ball guiding unit 3100 near the front end in the back box 3010, and a back front effect in the back box 3010. and a rear back effect unit 3400 provided behind the unit 3300. - 特許庁

The back decoration unit 3200, the back front effect unit 3300, and the back back effect unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 can show predetermined movable effects and light emitting effects to the player according to the progress of the game.

[11-10a. back box]
Next, the back case 3010 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 100 and 101 and the like. The back box 3010 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120), and the effect unit is attached to the inside of the box shape, and the effect display device 1600 and the back board unit 3040 are attached to the rear surface. is. The back box 3010 is formed transparent. As a result, the inside can be visually recognized from the outside even when assembled on the game board 5.例文帳に追加

The back box 3010 has a box-like shape with an open front and a rectangular opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall, and a mounting surface 3010b provided at the lower side of the opening 3010a on which the effect display device 1600 is mounted. , two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the opening 3010a, and a lock slider 3020 provided below the center of the mounting surface 3010b in the left-right direction. and a lock mechanism portion 3010d slidably attached.

The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed in a quadrangular shape with an aspect ratio of 3:4 when viewed from the front. The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size in the left-right direction as the rear wall of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction. In addition, the opening 3010a is provided at a position that is vertically offset (eccentric) with respect to the center of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The opening 3010a is formed to have the same size as the effect display device 1600 (19-inch liquid crystal display device).

Upper fixing pieces 1611 of the effect display device 1600 are inserted into the two fixing grooves 3010c of the back box 3010 from below. In addition, the lower fixed piece 1612 of the effect display device 1600 can be inserted from behind into the lock mechanism portion 3010d of the back box 3010 while the lock slider 3020 is slid leftward in a rear view. When the lock slider 3020 is slid to the right in a rear view with the lower fixed piece 1612 inserted into the lock mechanism portion 3010d, the lock slider 3020 prevents the rearward movement of the lower fixed piece 1612, thereby effecting the display device. 1600 can be installed.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the game panel 1100 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG.

Further, the back box 3010 has a pair of shaft support portions 3010f capable of supporting the shaft portion 3041a of the back substrate unit 3040 rotatably around the axis extending in the vertical direction on the rear surface, and a pair of shaft support portions 3010f. is provided on the rear surface on the opposite side in the left-right direction, and has an engaging portion 3010g to which the engaging claw 3041b of the rear substrate unit 3040 is engaged.

The back box 3010 can mount the back board unit 3040 on the rear side across the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) by means of a pair of shaft support portions 3010f and locking portions 3010g. When assembled to the game board 5, the vertically extending L-shaped portion of the back board unit 3040 is positioned to the left of the peripheral control unit 1500 in rear view. In addition, the L-shaped portion of the rear substrate unit 3040 extending to the left and right is located below the peripheral control unit 1500 .

In the state where the back box 3010 is assembled to the game board 5, the locking claws 3041b of the back board unit 3040 locked to the locking portion 3010g are released, and the locking claws 3041b are moved backward around the shaft portion 3041a. By rotating so as to move to the rear box 3010, the rear of the liquid crystal spacer 1610 attached to the back box 3010 can be opened, and the performance display device 1600 can be attached and detached without removing the back board unit 3040 from the back box 3010. be able to.

[11-10b. back ball induction unit]
Next, the back ball guiding unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 122 and the like. The back ball guide unit 3100 is provided in the lower part near the front end in the back box 3010 and attached to the back box 3010 via the back decoration unit 3200 . The back ball induction unit 3100 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the normal winning opening 2002, and a third winning opening sensor 3002. A first starting hole sensor 3003 for detecting a game ball B received in one starting hole 2003 and a plurality of magnetic sensors 1030 capable of detecting illegal magnetism acting in the game area 5a are provided.

The back ball guidance unit 3100 is accepted in the general winning opening 2001, the normal winning opening 2002, the first starting opening 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the losing opening 2009, and the V winning opening 2010 in the front unit 2000. The received game ball B can be received behind the game panel 1100, guided to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below.

In addition, the back ball guide unit 3100 receives the game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 of the front unit 2000 at the rear of the game panel 1100, guides it to the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction, and can be discharged to the out-ball socket 600a.

In addition, the back ball guiding unit 3100 is provided in the center in the left-right direction, and is provided with a lower front decoration body 3110 imitating the face of a demon, and a plurality of LEDs provided behind the front lower back decoration body 3110. and a back and front decoration substrate on which is mounted. By illuminating the LED of the front underside decorative substrate, the front underside decoration 3110 can be decorated with light emission.

[11-10c. Back decoration unit]
Next, the back decorative unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 122, 147, 148 and the like. The back decoration unit 3200 is provided behind the back ball guide unit 3100 in the back box 3010 and is attached to the front surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a. A back ball guidance unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the back decoration unit 3200 .

The back decoration unit 3200 includes a lower back left ornament 3210 and a lower back right ornament 3220, and a lower back left ornament 3210 and a lower back right ornament 3220, which are formed to resemble a single peach. A lower back drive mechanism (not shown) that lifts and lowers and rotates in a direction in which the upper ends are separated from each other, and a plurality of LEDs for illuminating the lower left decorative body 3210 and the right lower back decorative body 3220 are mounted. and a lower back left decoration substrate and a lower back right decoration substrate (not shown).

The lower back left ornament 3210 and the lower back right ornament 3220 are formed symmetrically to each other, and are formed so as to form one peach-like decoration by being combined (unified). In a normal state, the lower back left decoration 3210 and the lower back right decoration 3220 are combined and positioned behind the front lower back decoration 3110, and are in a retracted position that is invisible from the front. . The lower back left decoration body 3210 and the lower back right decoration body 3220 are raised from the back lower front decoration body 3110 while being united from the retracted position by the back lower driving mechanism, and are visible from the front. It is possible to move to In addition, the lower back left decoration body 3210 and the lower back right decoration body 3220 are moved by the lower back driving mechanism from the appearance position state to the spread position where the upper ends are rotated to separate and open. It is possible to

The lower back left decoration body 3210 and the lower back right decoration body 3220 can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from LEDs (full-color LEDs) mounted on the lower back left decoration substrate and the lower back right decoration substrate.

[11-10d. Back front production unit]
Next, the back front effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The back front effect unit 3300 is provided above the back ball guiding unit 3100 near the front end in the back box 3010 and attached near the front end of the back box 3010 .

The back front effect unit 3300 includes a back front decoration body 3360 having a predetermined decoration that is elongated in the left and right direction, and a back front decoration substrate provided on the rear side of the back front decoration body 3360 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted thereon. (illustration is omitted), and a back front drive mechanism (illustration is omitted) for moving the back front decorative body 3360 .

The back front decorative body 3360 is provided so as to be able to move up and down between a retracted position at the raised end and a position at which the lowered end appears by a back front drive mechanism, and is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. is provided in The back front decorative body 3360 is moved to the retracted position at the raised end in a normal state. In the state of the retracted position, the back front decorative body 3360 is located behind the decorative body 2570 provided along the upper side of the center accessory 2500, and cannot be visually recognized from the front.

When the back front decoration body 3360 is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position by the back front driving means, it is positioned substantially in the center within the frame of the center accessory 2500 and becomes visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500. . The back front decorative body 3360 can be rotated about an axis extending forward and backward passing through the center of the back front decorative body 3360 by the back front driving means in the state of the appearance position.

In addition, the back front decoration body 3360 can be decorated with light emission even while rotating by properly emitting light from LEDs (full-color LEDs) mounted on the back front decoration substrate.

[11-10e. Behind-the-scenes production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. It is attached behind the back front effect unit 3300 in the back box 3010. - 特許庁The rear rear effect unit 3400 includes a rear rear left decoration body 3420 having a predetermined decoration, and the left end side thereof being rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a predetermined decoration having the right end. A back rear right ornament 3430 mounted rotatably around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, a back rear left drive mechanism (not shown) for moving the back rear left ornament 3420, and a back rear. A back rear right drive mechanism (not shown) for moving the right ornament 3430 is provided.

The back-left decorative body 3420 and the back-right decorative body 3430 are provided behind the back-front decorative body 3360 . Further, the back rear left decorative body 3420 is provided behind the back rear right decorative body 3430 . Therefore, the back front decoration 3360, the back left decoration 3420, and the back right decoration 3430 do not interfere with each other.

The rear left decorative body 3420 is operated by the rear rear left drive mechanism to move between a retracted position where the left end and right end extend horizontally at the same height, and an appearance position where the right end is lowered and extends obliquely downward to the right. and can be moved between. The back rear left decorative body 3420 is moved to the retracted position extending horizontally in a normal state. In this retracted position, the back rear left decoration 3420 is located behind the decoration 2570 provided along the upper side of the center accessory 2500, and is invisible from the front. Then, when the rear back left decoration body 3420 moves from the retracted position to the appearing position, it becomes an oblique state so as to cross the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the upper left to the lower right, and is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500. state.

The back rear right decorative body 3430 has a retracted position where the left end and the right end extend horizontally at the same height and an appearance position where the left end is lowered and extends obliquely downward to the left by the rear rear right drive mechanism. , and can be moved between The back rear right decoration 3430 is moved to the retracted position extending horizontally in a normal state. In this retracted position, the back rear right decoration 3430 is located behind the decoration 2570 provided along the upper side of the center accessory 2500, and is invisible from the front. Then, when the back rear right decoration body 3430 moves from the retracted position to the appearing position, it becomes an oblique state so as to cross the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the upper right to the lower left, and is visible through the frame of the center accessory 2500. state.

The rear left decorative body 3420 and the rear right decorative body 3430 appropriately emit light from LEDs (full-color LEDs) mounted on the rear left decorative substrate and the rear right decorative substrate provided on the rear side, respectively. It can be used for luminous decoration.

[11-11. Production with a game board]
Next, the effects of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 118 and 147 to 153. FIG. FIG. 147 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the bottom left decoration and the bottom right decoration of the back decoration unit are moved from the retracted position to the appearing position in the normal state. FIG. 148 is a front view of the game board showing the state of FIG. 147 with the lower back left ornament and the lower back right ornament in the spread position. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-back left decorative body of the rear-back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position in the normal state. FIG. 150 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back-right decorative body of the back-back effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position in the normal state. FIG. 151 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the rear-left decoration and the rear-right decoration of the rear-back effect unit are moved from the retracted position to the appearing position in the normal state. FIG. 152 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the back front decorative body of the back front effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the appearing position in the normal state. FIG. 153 shows a game in which the back front decoration of the back front effect unit and the back rear left decoration and the back rear right decoration of the back rear effect unit are respectively moved from the retreat position to the appearance position in the normal state. It is a front view of a board.

As shown in FIG. 118 and the like, the game board 5 of the present embodiment is such that the back unit 3000 provided behind and the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized mainly through the frame of the center accessory 2500. It's becoming The game board 5 is provided so that the back lower front decorative body 3110 of the back ball guiding unit 3100 can always be seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500 .

In the normal state of the game board 5, the lower back left decoration 3210 and the lower right decoration 3220 of the back decoration unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 move to the retracted position at the lower end, and the lower front decoration 3110 moves to the rear. It is located at , and is not visible from the front. In addition, the back front decorative body 3360 of the back front effect unit 3300 moves to the retracted position at the raised end and is positioned behind the decorative body 2570 provided on the upper side of the center accessory 2500, and is invisible from the front. state. Furthermore, the back-left decorative body 3420 and the back-right right decorative body 3430 of the back-back effect unit 3400 move to the retracted positions extending horizontally, respectively, and are positioned behind the decorative body 2570 and the back-front decorative body 3360. and cannot be seen from the front.

In this normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be fully seen through the frame of the center accessory 2500 .

The game board 5 of the present embodiment can use the back decoration unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 to execute effects (movable effects) as shown in FIGS. In this effect, the lower back left decoration body 3210 and the lower back right decoration body 3220 are moved from the retracted position to the appearing position in a combined state (see FIG. 147). As a result, the peach-like decoration formed by the lower-back left decoration 3210 and the lower-back right decoration 3220 becomes visible, making the player think that something good will happen. be able to.

When the lower back left ornament 3210 and the lower right ornament 3220 are moved to the appearing position and further moved to the spread position, the upper ends of the lower left ornament 3210 and the lower right ornament 3220 are brought together. rotates so that As a result, the simulated peach is split open, and the player can be made to think that a chance has arrived.

Next, the game board 5 can execute an effect as shown in FIG. 149 using the back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 . This effect moves the back-left decoration body 3420 from the retracted position to the appearing position. As a result, the back left decorative body 3420 visibly appears obliquely across the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the upper left to the lower right, so that the player can be surprised and a chance has arrived. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the player think.

In addition, the game board 5 can execute an effect as shown in FIG. This effect moves the back-right decorative body 3430 from the retracted position to the appearing position. As a result, the back rear right decorative body 3430 visibly appears obliquely across the frame of the center accessory 2500 from the upper right to the lower left. It is possible to make the player think and raise expectations for the game.

Furthermore, the effect shown in FIG. 151 can be executed using the back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 . In this effect, the back-left decoration 3420 and the back-right decoration 3430 are moved from the retreat position to the appearance position. As a result, the rear left decorative body 3420 and the rear right decorative body 3430 visibly appear in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in such a manner as to obliquely cross each other, which greatly surprises the player. It is possible to make the user think that an opportunity has arrived.

The back left decoration 3420 and the back right decoration 3430 may be moved to the appearance position at the same time, or the timing of moving to the appearance position may be shifted.

Further, as the advance notice effect using the back-side effect unit 3400, the back-side left decorative body 3420 and the back-side right decorative body 3430 may be slightly moved from the retracted position to the appearing position or vibrated.

Next, the game board 5 can execute an effect as shown in FIG. 152 using the back front effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 . This effect moves the back front decorative body 3360 from the retracted position to the appearing position. As a result, the back front decorative body 3360 appears in the center of the frame of the center accessory 2500 and can be visually recognized, so that the player can be surprised, and the player will be made to think that the chance has arrived, and the expectation for the game will be increased. can be raised.

Further, as an effect using the back front effect unit 3300, the back front decoration 3360 may be rotated while the back front decoration 3360 is moved to the appearance position. This can greatly surprise the player.

Next, the game board 5 can use the back front effect unit 3300 and the back back effect unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 to execute the effect shown in FIG. In this effect, the back front decoration body 3360, the back rear left decoration body 3420, and the back rear right decoration body 3430 are moved from the retreat position to the appearance position. As a result, the three decorations of the back front decoration 3360, the back rear left decoration 3420, and the back rear right decoration 3430 appear in a state of being overlapped like "*" within the frame of the center accessory 2500. Since it becomes visible, it becomes possible to give a strong impact to the player. Then, when the back front decorative body 3360 is rotated in this state, a very strong impact can be given to the player, and a "jackpot" can be confirmed.

[11-12. Control configuration of the game board of the second embodiment]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the game board 5 of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 154 and the like. FIG. 154 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the game board of the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 154 omits some of the electronic components such as sensors, solenoids, motors, and LEDs connected to the frame control board 740 . Further, the description of the same configuration as that of the game board 5 of the first embodiment will be omitted.

The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a frame control board 740 attached to the body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and displays an effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control part 1511. and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the .

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 154, the main control board 1310 includes a first starting opening sensor 3003, a second starting opening sensor 2505, a general winning opening sensor 3001, a normal winning opening sensor 3002, and a large winning opening sensor. An opening sensor 2506, a V winning opening sensor 2507, a losing opening sensor 2504, etc. are connected. A magnetic sensor 1030 , a vibration sensor 1040 , etc. are connected to the main control board 1310 . Further, the main control board 1310 is connected with a starting solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a sorting solenoid 2537, and the like.

[12. Details of the center accessory on the game board]
Next, details of the center accessory 2500 provided on the game board 5 will be described.

[12-1. Center Accessory of First Embodiment]
The center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158 and the like. FIG. 155 is an explanatory view showing the center accessory of the first embodiment attached to the game panel, cut in the middle in the vertical direction, and showing the front constituent member. Fig. 156(a) is an explanatory view showing the decoration body in the center accessory in a state of being disassembled into a front decoration part and a rear decoration part from the front, and Fig. 156(b) is a decoration body composed of the front decoration part and the rear decoration part. It is an explanatory view showing from the front. FIG. 157 is an explanatory view showing the center accessory of FIG. 155 with the center frame placed on a table with the rear end facing down. FIG. 158 is an explanatory diagram showing a partial cross-section of a center accessory having a center frame to which a decoration different from that shown in FIG. 155 is attached.

The center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment is provided on the game board 5 of the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 96 to 101 and the like. The center accessory 2500 includes a transparent frame-shaped center frame 2511 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a warp passage 2512 capable of guiding game balls B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame. and a stage 2513 which is provided at the lower side within the frame of the center frame 2511 and releases the game ball B which has circulated in the warp passage 2512 into the game area 5a after rolling in the horizontal direction.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 further includes a decorative body 2570 attached to the center frame 2511 and having a predetermined decoration.

The center frame 2511 is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 to extend in the front-rear direction. A flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and flows down the game area 5a. An inflow restricting portion 2511c that restricts the game ball B from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511d projecting from the inner circumference of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a. have.

The rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion portion 2511a) is positioned forward of the rear end (rear surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The rear end of the center frame 2511 may not protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1100 or may protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1100 .

As shown in FIG. 155, the decorative body 2570 includes a flat transparent front plate 2571 attached to the front end of the center frame 2511, a front decorative portion 2572 attached to the front surface of the front plate, and the center frame 2511 (insert and a rear decorative portion 2573 provided in front of the rear end of the portion 2511a). In other words, the decorative body 2570 is provided so as to extend into the frame of the center frame 2511, and has a rear decorative portion 2573 provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511 and a and a front decorative portion 2572 provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front. The front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 are decorated in harmony with each other.

The front plate 2571 is provided such that its rear surface contacts the front end surface of the inflow restricting portion 2511c. This front plate 2571 forms a ball passage 2517 through which the game ball B can flow between the support portion 2511d.

As shown in FIG. 156, the front decoration portion 2572 of the decoration body 2570 is decorated with a predetermined pattern (here, a pattern in which cloud-like patterns are arranged around the demon's face). The front decorative portion 2572 includes a transparent transmissive portion 2572a provided in front of the ball passage 2517, and a point-like opaque transparent portion 2572a which is provided in the transmissive portion 2572a and constitutes a part of the design as decoration. and a plurality of dot portions 2572b (see FIG. 156(a)).

A transparent portion 2572a of the front decorative portion 2572 is formed to be colorless and transparent or colored and transparent. The colored transparent transparent portion 2572a is colored in the same color as the pattern so as to constitute a part of the pattern. In this embodiment, the transparent portion 2572a of the demon's face portion is colored and transparent, and the transparent portion 2572a of the cloud design portion is colorless and transparent.

Each dot portion 2572b of the front decorative portion 2572 is colored in the same color as the pattern. As shown in FIG. 156(a) in an enlarged manner, the plurality of dot portions 2572b are formed in a circle one by one, and are spaced at an angle equal to the diameter of the dot portion 2572b in an oblique direction at an angle of 45 degrees with respect to the horizontal. It is set open.

The rear decorative portion 2573 is attached to the rear side of the transparent support portion 2511d in the center frame 2511. As shown in FIG. The rear decorative portion 2573 is provided so as to extend into the frame of the frame-shaped insertion portion 2511 a of the center frame 2511 . The decoration of the rear decoration part 2573 is opaquely applied with the same pattern as that of the front decoration part 2572 provided in front. In addition, when the game panel 1100 is a transparent member, the rear decoration part 2573 may be on the back surface of the game panel 1100 . In this case, there is an effect that the area for decoration can be widened.

The front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 are formed by printing patterns as decorations on a transparent resin film. The front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 of this embodiment are formed in a film shape.

As shown in FIG. 156(b), this decorative body 2570 has a rear decorative portion 2573 provided behind through a transparent transparent portion 2572a in the decoration (pattern) of the front decorative portion 2572 when viewed from the front (front). Since the decoration (picture) is visible, the pattern of the rear decorative portion 2573 supplements the transparent portion 2572a, so that the original pattern without the transparent portion 2572a can be seen.

On the other hand, when the game ball B flows through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573, the game ball B can be seen through the transparent transmission part 2572a of the front decoration part 2572. As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player a sense of distrust or anxiety due to the game ball B being out of sight, even if only temporarily, and the enjoyment of the game with the game ball B reduces interest. can be suppressed.

The decorative body 2570 of this embodiment is attached to the center frame 2511 at a portion forward of the rear end of the insertion portion 2511a. In other words, when the decorative body 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511, the decorative body 2570 does not partially protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511. FIG. As a result, as shown in FIG. 157, when the center frame 2511 to which the decorative body 2570 is attached is placed on the table TA with the rear end of the center frame 2511 facing down, only the rear end surface of the insertion portion 2511a is placed on the table TA. abut (touch)

Although the details are omitted, the center accessory 2500 of this embodiment includes a pattern display device 2518, a first sorting device 2530, a second sorting device 2540, a lottery accessory 2550, etc. in addition to the decorative body 2570. It is attached to frame 2511 . The symbol display 2518 displays a special symbol, a fourth symbol, etc. drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 .

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, solenoids such as the first distribution solenoid 2534 of the first distribution device 2530 attached to the center frame 2511 and the second distribution solenoid 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 , and its metal case is positioned at the rear end. As a result, when the center frame 2511 (center accessory 2500) is placed on the table TA with the rear end of the center frame 2511 (center accessory 2500) facing down, the sturdy metal case of the solenoid comes into contact with the table TA, making it difficult to damage during assembly work. be able to. At this time, a resin cover may be provided to cover the metal case of the solenoid.

Further, although not shown, the center accessory 2500 is provided with wiring connected to an LED board, a relay board, a solenoid, and the like. The wiring is provided along the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511 of the center accessory 2500 and is provided so as to be hidden by the decoration of the decorative body 2570. As shown in FIG. As a result, deterioration in appearance due to the wiring being visible to the player is suppressed. It should be noted that the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511 may be formed in a double-walled shape, and the wiring may be passed between the walls. In this case, it is desirable to use a flexible flat cable (FFC) as wiring.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the transmissive portion 2572a and the dot portion 2572b may be reversed. More specifically, the transmissive portion 2572a may be an opaque patterned portion, and the dot portion 2572b may be a transparent portion.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the transmissive portion 2572a is a transparent portion, but it is not limited to this, and may be a portion penetrating back and forth.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the front decoration portion 2572 having the transparent portion 2572a and the dot portion 2572b as the decoration (picture) and the rear decoration portion 2573 having the decoration (picture) supplementing the transparent portion 2572a. The decorative body 2570 is provided on the center frame 2511 of the center accessory 2500, but it is not limited to this, and the starting unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the attacker unit 2400, the back unit 3000, etc. You may make it provide the decoration body 2570 in.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the decoration of the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 that constitute the decoration body 2570, a pattern is printed on a transparent film. A center accessory 2500 having a center frame 2511 to which a decorative body 2570A is attached as shown in FIG. 158 may be used. The decorative body 2570A is mounted within a flat plate-shaped front decorative portion 2572 attached to the front end of the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center frame 2511 and a frame-shaped insertion portion 2511a behind the front decorative portion 2572. and a rear decorative portion 2573 that is three-dimensionally formed.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 of the decoration body 2570A are each decorated with three-dimensionally shaped decorations. The front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 are each provided with decorations that coordinate with each other. In addition, the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 are provided so as to overlap at least partially when viewed from the front.

The decorative body 2570A (rear decorative portion 2573) is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the decorative body 2570A is attached to the center frame 2511, no part of the decorative body 2570A protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511. FIG.

The decorative body 2570A may be formed by molding pre-colored resin, or may be formed by painting or attaching a seal after molding. Metallic pigments or plating may be used as the decoration of the decoration body 2570A, and the glittering decoration can strongly attract the player's interest, thus providing the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal to the player. can provide.

Further, as the decorative body 2570A, a part of the rear decorative portion 2573 may protrude forward to the same position as the front decorative portion 2572 . This makes it possible to make it easier to give a sense of depth to the decorative body 2570A, thereby enhancing the decorative effect.

According to this embodiment, a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a rear decorative portion 2573 provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and the rear decorative portion 2573 Since the decoration body 2570 including the front decoration part 2572 provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front part is provided, the center frame 2511 is transparent, so that the decoration body 2570 is made relatively conspicuous by making it inconspicuous. In addition, by partially overlapping the front decorative portion 2572 and the rear decorative portion 2573 of the decorative body 2570, the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572 and the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2573 can be made difficult to understand. Thus, the decoration by the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 can be shown to the player in good condition. As a result, the decoration body 2570 having a high decorative effect can be formed by the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573, so that the decoration body 2570 can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored. , it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing the decline in interest of the player.

In addition, according to the present embodiment, a portion of the front decoration portion 2572 (a portion in front of the ball passage 2517) of the decoration body 2570 is made up of the transmission portion 2572a and the plurality of dot portions 2572b. In addition, since a rear decorative portion 2573 decorated with decorations (decoration with the same pattern) that cooperates with the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572 is provided behind the relevant part, the rear decorative portion 2573 can be seen through the transparent transparent portion 2572a. By supplementing the part of the transparent part 2572a, one good decoration (picture) can be shown as if the transparent part 2572a does not exist. can entertain.

Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as described above, the decoration of the portion in front of the ball passage 2517 in the front decoration portion 2572 is composed of the transparent portion 2572a and the plurality of dot portions 2572b. can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent portion 2572a. Thus, when the game ball B is not flowing through the ball passage 2517, the decoration of the rear rear decoration part 2573 can be seen through the transmission part 2572a, so that the good decoration by the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 can be enjoyed. On the other hand, when the game ball B is circulating in the ball passage 2517, the game ball B is visually recognized through the transmission part 2572a, and the game ball B becomes invisible, thereby giving the player a sense of distrust and anxiety. This can be avoided, and the game with the game ball B can be enjoyed and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2573 of the decorative body 2570 is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511, the center frame 2511 can be attached to the center frame 2511 while the decorative body 2570 is attached to the center frame 2511. When placed on the table TA with the rear end facing down, only the rear end surface of the insertion portion 2511a contacts the table TA. Therefore, when the center frame 2511 is put on the table TA with the rear end side down and the assembly work or disassembly work is performed, the center frame 2511 does not rattle and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily assembled. can do.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2573 of the decorative body 2570 is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame 2511, the decorative body 2570 does not protrude rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame 2511. As a result, the space behind the center frame 2511 (game panel 1100) can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large decorative body, a movable decorative body, or the like behind the center frame 2511, thereby facilitating the construction of the pachinko machine 1 capable of further entertaining the players.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the symbol display 2518 for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame 2511, the symbol display 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511. As compared with the case where the pattern display device 2518 is attached separately, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be saved.

The decoration of the center frame 2511 (decorative body 2570, decorative body 2570A) may be coordinated with the decoration applied to the game panel 1100. FIG.

[12-2. Center role of the second embodiment]
The center accessory 2500 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 159 and the like. FIG. 159(a) is an explanatory view of the main part of the center accessory of the second embodiment viewed from inside the frame, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in (a), and (c ) is an explanatory view showing the center accessory of (a) with the rear end facing down and the center frame placed on a table.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the center accessory 2500 of the second embodiment is a transparent frame-shaped center attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), similar to the center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment. A frame 2511, a warp passage 2512 capable of guiding the game ball B from the outside of the center frame 2511 to the inside of the frame, and the game ball B circulating through the warp passage 2512 provided at the lower side of the frame of the center frame 2511. , and a stage 2513 for releasing into the game area 5a after rolling in the horizontal direction.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 further includes a decorative body 2580 attached to the center frame 2511 and having a predetermined decoration.

The center frame 2511 is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 to extend in the front-rear direction. A flat plate-shaped flange portion 2511b that protrudes outward from the outer periphery of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a and contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and extends forward from the flange portion 2511b and flows down the game area 5a. An inflow restricting portion 2511c that restricts the game ball B from flowing into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a flat support portion 2511d projecting from the inner circumference of the front end of the insertion portion 2511a. have.

The rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion portion 2511a) is positioned forward of the rear end (rear surface) of the game panel 1100 (panel holder 1120). The rear end of the center frame 2511 may not protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1100 or may protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel 1100 .

The decoration body 2580 includes a front decoration portion 2581, a rear decoration portion 2582, a transparent front cover 2583 covering the front side of the rear decoration portion 2582, and a transparent front cover 2583 provided on the rear side of the rear decoration portion 2582. A flat diffuser lens 2584 capable of irradiating the diffused light forward, a transparent rear cover 2585 attached to the rear side of the front cover 2583 so as to cover the diffuser lens 2584 from behind, and and an LED substrate 2586 on which an LED 2586a for emitting light is mounted.

The front decorative portion 2581 is provided forward of the rear decorative portion 2582 . The front decorative portion 2581 is attached to the center frame 2511 behind the transparent support portion 2511d.

The rear decorative portion 2582 extends into the frame of the center frame 2511 and partially protrudes rearward beyond the rear end of the center frame 2511 (insertion portion 2511a).

The front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 are decorated in harmony with each other, and are provided so as to at least partially overlap when viewed from the front. Although illustration is omitted, the decoration of the front decorative portion 2581 and the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2582 are each provided with a pattern corresponding to a single pattern, with the portions overlapping each other as a boundary in front view. .

The front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 are formed entirely opaque. In other words, the front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 are composed of opaque portions. In addition, the front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 are translucent. It should be noted that the front decoration portion 2581 and the rear decoration portion 2582 may be partially provided with a transparent transparent portion (transmissive portion).

The front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 are formed by printing decorative patterns on a transparent resin film. The front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 of this embodiment are formed in a film shape.

The LED board 2586 is provided behind the front decorative portion 2581 . As a result, the LED board 2586 and the wiring connected to the LED board 2586 are hidden by the front decorative portion 2581 so as to be invisible from the front. The LED board 2586 can light-embellish the rear decorative portion 2582 by causing a plurality of mounted LEDs 2586a to emit light.

The decorative body 2580 of this embodiment partially protrudes rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511 when attached to the center frame 2511 . As a result, as shown in FIG. 159(c), when the center frame 2511 is placed on the table TA with the rear end of the center frame 2511 attached to the decoration 2580, the decoration 2580 (rear decoration part 2582) contacts (touches) the base TA, and a part of the rear end of the center frame 2511 contacts the base TA.

Although the details are omitted, the center accessory 2500 of the present embodiment includes a pattern display 2518, a first sorting device 2530, a second sorting device 2540, a lottery accessory 2550, etc. in addition to the decorative body 2580. It is attached to frame 2511 . The symbol display 2518 displays a special symbol, a fourth symbol, etc. drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2003 or the second starting port 2004 .

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, solenoids such as the first distribution solenoid 2534 of the first distribution device 2530 attached to the center frame 2511 and the second distribution solenoid 2544 of the second distribution device 2540 , and its metal case is positioned at the rear end. As a result, when the center frame 2511 (center accessory 2500) is placed on the table TA with the rear end of the center frame 2511 (center accessory 2500) facing down, the sturdy metal case of the solenoid comes into contact with the table TA, making it difficult to damage during assembly work. be able to. At this time, a resin cover may be provided to cover the metal case of the solenoid.

In the above-described embodiment, the insertion portion 2511a of the center frame 2511 may be formed in a double-wall shape, and the wiring of the LED substrate 2586 may be passed between the walls. In this case, it is desirable to use a flexible flat cable (FFC) as wiring.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the decoration of the front decoration portion 2581 and the rear decoration portion 2582 that constitute the decoration body 2580, a pattern is printed on a transparent film, but the invention is not limited to this. The front decorative portion 2581 and the rear decorative portion 2582 may be three-dimensionally shaped. Alternatively, the configuration of the decorative body 2570 shown in FIG. 156 may be applied to this embodiment.

According to this embodiment, the transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a rear decorative portion 2582 partially protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a rear decorative portion Since the decoration body 2580 including the front decoration part 2581 provided in front of the 2582 is provided, the decoration body 2580 can be relatively conspicuous because the center frame 2511 is transparent, making it inconspicuous. In addition, the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 of the decoration body 2580 allow the player to see a deep decoration. At this time, the rear decorative portion 2582 and the front decorative portion 2581 are decorated in cooperation with each other, and are provided so that each part overlaps when viewed from the front. Sometimes, it is possible to make the border between the decoration of the front decoration part 2581 and the decoration of the rear decoration part 2582 difficult to understand, and to show the player the large decoration by the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 in a good condition. The rear decorative portion 2582 and the front decorative portion 2581 can form a large, deep decorative body 2580 with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the center frame 2511 can be provided with the decorative body 2580 with a high decorative effect, the decorative body 2580 can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress the decline in the player's interest. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of

Further, according to this embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2582 that constitutes the decoration body 2580 is extended into the frame of the center frame 2511, the rear decoration part 2582 extends the game area in front of the game panel 1100. A player can enjoy the game with the game ball B in the game area 5a in a good condition without narrowing the game area 5a or making it difficult to see the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2582 constituting the decoration body 2580 is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, the effect display device provided behind the game panel 1100 1600, for the back front effect unit 3300, the back back effect unit 3400, etc., the periphery of the effect display device 1600 (display screen) is decorated, and the decoration body (movable decoration) of the back front effect unit 3300 and the back back effect unit 3400 It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of displaying or performing decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect in cooperation with the player's body, and capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player. .

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the wiring of electronic components such as the LED substrate 2586 is made difficult to see from the front by the opaque portion of the decorative body 2580, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion. The appearance can be prevented from deteriorating, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 2580 can be more easily exhibited.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the decoration 2580 (front decoration portion 2581) is provided in front of the LED board 2586, the LED board 2586 can be hidden by the decoration 2580 (decoration). It is possible to prevent the LED board 2586 from being seen and to make the appearance worse, and it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decoration body 2580 .

Further, according to this embodiment, since the symbol display 2518 for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame 2511, the symbol display 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511. As compared with the case where the pattern display device 2518 is attached separately, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be saved.

The decoration of the center frame 2511 (decorative body 2580) may be linked with the decoration applied to the game panel 1100. FIG.

[12-3. Center accessory of the third embodiment]
Next, the center accessory 2500A of the third embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 160 to 163 and the like. FIG. 160 is a front view showing the game board provided with the center accessory according to the third embodiment, with the rear side of the game panel omitted. 161 is an exploded perspective view of the central accessory and the game panel of FIG. 160, viewed from the front. 162 is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory of FIG. 160, viewed from the front. FIGS. 163(a) to (g) are explanatory diagrams showing various joining patterns between the first frame and the second frame in the center accessory. In the following description, the same components as those of the center accessory 2500 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The center accessory 2500A of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. Installed on the front. It should be noted that the game panel 1100 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161, is composed of a single plate material.

The center accessory 2500A includes a transparent center frame 2700 formed in a frame shape, a warp path 2512 capable of guiding game balls B from the outside of the center frame 2700 to the inside of the frame, and a A stage 2513 is provided on the lower side and releases the game ball B, which has flowed through the warp passage 2512, into the game area 5a after rolling in the left-right direction. Although the details will be described later, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 is divided into a plurality of frames in the circumferential direction of the frame. In this embodiment, a decoration body 2570 shown in FIG. 156 and a decoration body 2580 shown in FIG. 159 may be provided. Also, the decoration of the center frame 2700 (decoration body 2570, decoration body 2570A, decoration body 2580) may be coordinated with the decoration applied to the game panel 1100. FIG.

In addition, the center accessory 2500A has a connecting/holding portion 2710 that connects adjacent frames of the plurality of frames forming the center frame 2700 .

Furthermore, the center role 2500A includes a symbol display 2518 for displaying the lottery result of the special symbol drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2003 or the second start port 2004, the gate 2015 and the second start. It has a second starting opening unit 2720 having an opening 2004, an attacker unit 2730 having a big winning opening 2005, and a prize winning opening unit 2740 having a winning opening 2006. ing.

[12-3a. center frame]
The center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A of the third embodiment is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the game panel 1100, and the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a passes through the opening 1112. and a flange portion 2700b extending in a direction parallel to the front surface of the game panel 1100 from the rear end of the inflow restricting portion 2700a.

The inflow restricting portion 2700a of the center frame 2700 protrudes forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100 when the center frame 2700 is attached to the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG.

The flange portion 2700b extends in a flat plate shape to the outside or inside of the center frame 2700 depending on the position in the circumferential direction. A part of the rear surface of the flange portion 2700b is in contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 when the center frame 2700 is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 .

In addition, the center frame 2700 includes a non-flange portion 2700c where the flange portion 2700b does not extend from the rear end of the inflow restricting portion 2700a to at least one of the outside and inside of the frame, and a non-flange portion 2700c extending rearward from the flange portion 2700b. and an insertion portion (not shown) inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 . At the non-flange portion 2700c, the rear surface of the inflow restricting portion 2700a coincides with the rear surface of the flange portion 2700b. The insertion portion is provided partially around the entire circumference of the center frame 2700 .

The frame-shaped center frame 2700 of this embodiment is divided into a plurality of parts in the circumferential direction. Specifically, the center frame 2700 is divided into five frames, a first frame 2701, a second frame 2702, a third frame 2703, a fourth frame 2704, and a fifth frame 2705, each of which has a similar shape. formed into a configuration. This center accessory 2500A has a connection holding portion 2710 that connects adjacent frames.

The first frame 2701 constitutes the upper portion from the middle of the upper and left sides of the center frame 2700 . The second frame 2702 forms the lower and lower sides from the upper and lower middle of the left side of the center frame 2700 so as to be continuous with the lower end of the left side of the first frame 2701 . The third frame 2703 forms the upper part of the right side of the center frame 2700 so as to be continuous with the right end of the first frame 2701 . The fourth frame 2704 continues to the lower end of the third frame 2703 and constitutes the middle portion of the right side of the center frame 2700 . The fifth frame 2705 forms the lower part of the center frame 2700 so as to continue to the lower end of the fourth frame 2704 and the right end of the second frame 2702 .

A warp passage 2512 and a stage 2513 are attached to the second frame 2702 . A prize winning opening unit 2740 is attached to the third frame 2703 . A second starting port unit 2720 is attached to the fourth frame 2704 . An attacker unit 2730 is attached to the fifth frame 2705 .

A first frame 2701 and a second frame 2702 will be described in detail below as representatives of the plurality of frames forming the center frame 2700 .

First, the first frame 2701 of the center frame 2700 is made transparent. The first frame 2701 is formed so as to constitute the upper part and the upper part of the left side in the vertical direction in the center frame 2700 (center accessory 2500A).

The first frame 2701 is provided so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the game panel 1100, and restricts the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a from flowing into the opening 1112. a first inflow restricting portion 2701a, a flat first flange portion 2701b connected to the rear end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and extending along the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the first inflow restricting It has a first non-flange portion 2701c where the first flange portion 2701b is not provided on at least one of the outside and inside of the frame at the rear end of the portion 2701a.

The first inflow regulating portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 is linearly inclined so that the right side of the upper side near the center in the left-right direction becomes lower to the right, and the left side of the portion becomes lower as it goes to the left. It bends in multiple steps and shifts to the left side, and the lower end of the left side extends vertically downward.

One end of the connection holding portion 2710 is detachable from the inner portion of the frame near the right end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the inner portion of the frame extending vertically downward from the lower left end. mounted possible.

The first flange portion 2701b is provided so as to extend to both the outside and the inside of the frame at a portion that is linearly inclined so as to become lower rightward on the upper side of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a. In addition, the first flange portion 2701b is bent in multiple stages so as to become lower toward the left in the first inflow restricting portion 2701a so as to extend outside the frame except near the left end thereof. In the vicinity of its left end (a portion above the portion extending vertically downward from the lower left end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a), it is provided so as to extend to the inside of the frame.

Mounting holes for mounting to the game panel 1100 are provided at appropriate positions in the first flange portion 2701b.

The first non-flange portion 2701c is provided only inside the frame at the right end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a, and is provided outside the frame at a portion extending vertically downward from the lower left end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a. and inside.

Next, the second frame 2702 of the center frame 2700 is made transparent. The second frame 2702 is formed so as to constitute a vertically lower portion and a lower portion of the left side of the center frame 2700 (center accessory 2500A). A warp passage 2512 and a stage 2513 are attached to the second frame 2702 .

The second frame 2702 of the center frame 2700 is provided so as to correspond to the edge of the opening 1112 formed in the game panel 1100, and the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a flows into the opening 1112. a second inflow restricting portion 2702a that restricts the movement of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a; a flat second flange portion 2702b that is connected to the rear end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a and extends along the front surface of the game panel 1100; It has a second non-flange portion 2702c where the second flange portion 2702b is not provided on at least one of the outside and inside of the frame at the rear end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a.

The second inflow restricting portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 is divided into left and right portions extending vertically and a right end portion of the lower side. not More specifically, the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the left side extends downward along the left side from the upper end of the left side, moves to the lower side, and moves rightward (lower right) along the lower side so that the right end becomes lower. extended short. In addition, the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the right side extends vertically along the right end of the lower side.

One end of the connection holding portion 2710 can be detachably attached to the portion inside the frame at the upper end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the left side and the portion on the right side (right side) of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the right side. Mounted on.

The left second inflow restricting portion 2702a is provided with an entrance of the warp passage 2512, and a stage 2513 is provided between the left and right second inflow restricting portions 2702a.

The second flange portion 2702b is provided so as to extend inward of the frame at a portion (left side portion) extending vertically in the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the left side. A portion extending to the lower right along the lower side of the portion 2702a is provided so as to extend to both the outside and the inside of the frame. The second flange portion 2702b is provided so as to greatly extend to the outside of the frame at the lower side, and connects the two second inflow restricting portions 2702a that are separated left and right by the portion.

Mounting holes for mounting to the game panel 1100 are provided at appropriate positions on the second flange portion 2702b.

The second non-flange portion 2702c is provided outside the frame at the portion extending vertically along the left side of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the left side, and is provided on the right side (right side) of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a on the right side. surface).

The second frame 2702 extends rearward from the second flange portion 2702b and further has a second insertion portion (not shown) that is inserted into the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 . The second insertion portion protrudes rearward from the second flange portion 2702b so as to connect the two left and right second inflow restricting portions 2702a. A stage 2513 is attached to this second insertion portion.

Next, the attachment of the center frame 2700 to the game panel 1100 will be described using the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 as examples. The first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are attached to the game panel 1100 with attachment screws through attachment holes provided in the first flange portion 2701b and the second flange portion 2702b.

For example, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, as shown in FIGS. It is attached to the game panel 1100 so that the part 2702a is adjacent to the part 2702a.

More specifically, the second inflow regulating portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 is located on the right side of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 so as to slightly overlap in the vertical direction. , the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 . In other words, the right side of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a provided with the first non-flange portion 2701c and the left side of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a provided with the second non-flange portion 2702c are They are installed facing each other. This allows the first non-flange portion 2701c and the second non-flange portion 2702c to bring the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a as close as possible.

By the way, in the center accessory 2500 of the first embodiment that uses the center frame 2511 that is not divided in the circumferential direction, the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 is changed due to design changes. If it is desired to change the size, the center frame 2511 needs to be remade, which may increase the cost.

On the other hand, the center frame 2700 of this embodiment is divided into a plurality of frames (here, five of the first frame 2701 to the fifth frame 2705) in the circumferential direction of the frame. By changing the position, the size of the game area 5a can be freely changed.

Specifically, for example, when increasing the area below the second frame 2702 in the game area 5a, as shown in FIG. Install in the position moved to . This makes it possible to cope with enlargement and reduction of the game area 5a (the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100) in the vertical direction.

Alternatively, if the area to the left of the second frame 2702 in the game area 5a is made smaller, as shown in FIG. The second frame 2702 is moved leftward from the state shown in FIG. This makes it possible to cope with enlargement and reduction of the game area 5a (the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100) in the horizontal direction.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 163(d), the lower end of the first inflow regulating portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 and the upper end of the second inflow regulating portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 are made to face each other. , may be attached to the game panel 1100 by abutting each other. As a result, the left and lower areas of the second frame 2702 in the game area 5a can be made smaller than in the state of FIG. 163(a). Further, in this case, the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a are joined to each other, so that the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 can appear to be integrated.

Further, as shown in FIG. 163(e), a gap C is formed between the first inflow restricting portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a of the second frame 2702. Also good. At this time, it is desirable to make the gap C smaller than the diameter of the game ball B. If the clearance C is larger than the diameter of the game ball B, an obstacle nail may be planted so that the game ball B does not pass through the clearance C.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 163(f), second non-flange portions 2702c where the second flange portions 2702b are not formed are also provided on both left and right sides of the second frame 2702 on the side of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a. can be As a result, the first non-flange portions 2701c are provided on both left and right sides of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a, and the second non-flange portions 2702c are provided on both left and right sides of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a. The restricting portion 2701a and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a can be brought as close as possible in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the second frame 2702 with respect to the first frame 2701, and it is possible to correspond to the game areas 5a of various sizes due to design changes or the like. That is, the game area 5a (opening 1112 of the game panel 1100) can be easily scaled up and down in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Further, as shown in FIG. 163(g), the first flange portion 2701b may be provided on the first frame 2701 to the lower end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a. As a result, the presence of the first flange portion 2701b can increase the rigidity of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a, so that even if the game ball B comes into contact with the first inflow restricting portion 2701a, it can be prevented from being damaged.

In this center frame 2700, a margin is provided between adjacent frames. The marginal portion is a portion (a portion of the end portion of the frame) that allows relative movement with respect to the end portions of the adjacent frames, as shown in FIG. surrounding area). If there is a possibility that the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 expands or contracts in the horizontal direction, at least two marginal portions are required to allow horizontal movement. Similarly, if the opening 1112 may expand or contract in the vertical direction, at least two margins are required to allow vertical movement. Furthermore, if there is a possibility that the opening 1112 may be enlarged or reduced in the vertical and horizontal directions, at least two vertical and at least two horizontal movable margins are required.

Specifically, the vertical direction is provided at both ends of the second frame 2702, that is, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 and between the second frame 2702 and the fifth frame 2705. An allowance is provided (see Figures 160-162). In addition, there are two margins in the horizontal direction at both ends of the third frame 2703, that is, between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703 and between the third frame 2703 and the fourth frame 2704. is provided. Note that although the vertical clearance is shown in FIG. 163, the same applies to the horizontal clearance.

By the way, as an allowance in the left-right direction, for example, in the portion between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, the top surface of the portion extending left and right in the first inflow restricting portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 is used as the game area. Since the ball B rolls, when the first frame 2701 is moved to the left and attached, a gap is formed between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, and the gap prevents the game ball B from flowing. You are likely to be blocked. In such a case, the flow of the game ball B is not hindered by providing a spacer or arranging obstacle nails in the margin. For this reason, it is more difficult to expand the game area 5a (the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100) in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction because of the flow of the game balls B and the like.

Thus, according to this embodiment, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame. Therefore, when it is desired to change the size of the game area 5a due to a design change or the like, the entire center frame 2700 does not have to be remade by changing the mounting positions of the divided frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of design freedom.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, the design of the center accessory 2500A can be partially divided. In the case of systematic change, by changing only the frame corresponding to the part to be changed, the center accessory 2500A can be easily changed to a desired design, and the cost required for model change can be suppressed. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can easily cope with model changes.

Further, according to this embodiment, since the frame-shaped center frame 2700 is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame, each of the game panels can be By changing the mounting position of the frame, the size of the game area 5a can be easily changed without remaking the whole center frame 2700, so that the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Further, according to this embodiment, the frame-shaped center frame 2700 in the center accessory 2500A is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame. When a problem occurs in the pattern display 2518, the second starter unit 2720, the attacker unit 2730, etc. provided in the center accessory 2500A, the problem can be solved without removing the entire center frame 2700 from the game panel 1100. It is sufficient to remove only the frame on which the generated unit is installed, and maintenance work can be simplified.

[12-3b. Connection holding part]
The connection holding part 2710 connects adjacent frames in each frame of the center frame 2700 which is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame. It is.

By the way, since the center frame 2700 of the present embodiment is configured to be divided into a plurality of frames in the circumferential direction of the frame as described above, some of the frames may become dislodged during assembly or maintenance work. It may fall and be damaged. On the other hand, in this embodiment, a connection holding portion 2710 is provided to connect adjacent frames. As shown in FIGS. 160 to 162, the connection holding portion 2710 is formed as a flexible linear (cord-like) member. The length of the connection holding part 2710 is preferably such that it does not reach the lower end of the game board 5 when the center frame 2700 is removed with the game board 5 upright, for example, from the viewpoint of drop protection.

The connection holding part 2710 of this embodiment uses a decorative spherical chain. As a result, even if the connection holding portion 2710 is visible, it can serve as a decoration due to its decorativeness, so that the overall appearance of the game board 5 does not deteriorate.

For example, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, one end of the connection holding portion 2710 is detachably attached to the first inflow restricting portion 2701a of the first frame 2701, and the other is detachably attached to the second inflow restricting portion 2702 a of the second frame 2702 . The attachment of this connection holding portion 2710 is the same between other frames.

160 to 162, between the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, between the first frame 2701 and the third frame 2703, and between the second frame 2702 and the fifth frame 2705 Although those connected by the holding portion 2710 are shown, the third frame 2703 and the fourth frame 2704 and the fourth frame 2704 and the fifth frame 2705 are also connected by the similar connection holding portion 2710. It is

According to this connection holding portion 2710, in a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 that constitute the center frame 2700, adjacent frames are connected to each other. Even if one frame is removed, the removed frame will not drop onto the workbench, the floor, or the like, and damage to the frame due to dropping can be prevented.

In the above-described embodiment, the connecting/holding part 2710 is shown as a part that also serves as a decoration, but it is not limited to this, and it may be one that does not also serve as a decoration. In this case, it is desirable to provide the connection holding portion 2710 at a portion that is hidden by the center frame 2700, the decorative body, or the like and is difficult to see from the front.

Also, in the above embodiment, the connection holding part 2710 is shown to be visible to the player, but it is not limited to this, and may be completely invisible to the player in the normal state. In other words, if the connection holding portion 2710 is provided at a portion of the center frame 2700 that is not visible to the player, it will not be seen by the player during a game.

Also, in the above embodiment, all the adjacent frames are connected by the connection holding portion 2710, but the present invention is not limited to this. A frame that does not have a connection may not be connected to an adjacent frame by the connection holding portion 2710 . For example, since the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 do not have any movable parts, maintenance is not required, and since they are light in weight, there is no risk of damage even if they fall, so there is no need to connect them. Conversely, since the third to fifth frames 2703 to 2705 have movable objects and are heavy, the need for connection increases. Therefore, the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are not connected for simplification, and the third frame 2703 to the fifth frame 2705 are not other frames but other strong frames behind the game board 5 (game panel 1100). It is desirable to removably connect it to any member.

Further, a plurality (pieces) of connecting holding portions 2710 may be provided in the above embodiment. In this case, it is desirable to bundle a plurality of connection holding portions 2710 so that the connection holding portion 2710 does not get entangled in the obstacle nail or the like and bend the obstacle nail during manufacturing, maintenance, or the like.

In addition, when a plurality of connection holding portions 2710 are provided and they are connected to a plurality of locations on the back of the game board 5 (game panel 1100), the center frame 2700 can be attached to the game panel 1100 with the mounting screws removed. It becomes possible to maintain the posture of the center frame 2700 (each frame). Therefore, there is no need to support the center frame 2700 during manufacturing or maintenance, and workability is improved.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the center frame 2700 is divided into a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 in the circumferential direction of the frame, and then the adjacent frames are divided into the frames. are connected by the connection holding part 2710, so that when the mounting screws attached to the game panel 1100 are removed during detachment work in assembly or maintenance, a part of the frame comes off the game panel 1100 and falls. Even if it tries to do so, since it is connected to another frame by the flexible string-like connecting and holding part 2710, the connecting and holding part 2710 acts like a lifeline and the detached frame hangs. As a result, the detached frame will not drop onto the workbench, floor, or the like, and the frame will not be damaged.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the connection holding portion 2710 is detachably attached to the first inflow restricting portion 2701a, the second inflow restricting portion 2702a, etc., the attaching portion of the connection holding portion 2710 is attached to the first inflow restriction portion. The first frame 2701 or the like can be removed from the game panel 1100 by itself by removing it from the restricting portion 2701a or the like.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the adjacent frames are connected by the flexible string-like connecting and holding portion 2710, for example, the first frame 2701 may be connected to the first frame 2701 by changing the design. Even if the position of the second frame 2702 is changed, the connection holding part 2710 deforms to follow the position change, so that the pachinko machine 1 with a high degree of freedom in design can be provided.

163(a), a gap between the first inflow regulating portion 2701a of the first frame 2701 and the second inflow regulating portion 2702a of the second frame 2702 is provided as the connection holding portion 2710. When the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702 are attached to the game panel 1100 so that C is formed, the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a are connected (connected). The portion 2710 may have a function as a restricting portion that prevents the game ball B from passing through the gap C.

[13. Details of the side unit on the game board]
Next, the details of the side unit 2200 provided on the game board 5 will be described. The side unit 2200 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2200 is provided with three general winning openings 2001 which are always open to receive the game balls B, and one sub-out opening 2021 which is always open to receive the game balls B.

Although not shown in detail, the side unit 2200 forms a general prize-winning opening 2001 and a sub-out opening 2021, has a U-shaped cross section, extends short in the front-rear direction, and is open upward and rearward to the left-right direction. A plurality of ball receiving portions arranged in a row, and a shelf portion 2201 extending short in the front-rear direction in the same length as the ball receiving portion in a frame shape and provided to the right of the ball receiving portion on the right end in front view. , a flat plate-like front plate connecting the front ends of the plurality of ball receiving portions and shelf portions, and a flat plate shape extending outward from the rear ends of the ball receiving portion and shelf portion 2201 on the left end in front view, respectively. and a gutter portion extending rearward in a gutter shape from the rear end of each ball receiving portion.

The side unit 2200 also has two positioning projections projecting rearward from the flange portion and two mounting holes penetrating the flange portion. The positioning protrusion is for positioning the side unit 2200 with respect to the panel plate 1110 by being inserted into the positioning hole 1113 (see FIG. 165) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . With the flange part in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the mounting screw is inserted from the front and screwed into the mounting hole 1114 (see FIG. 165) of the panel plate 1110 to tighten the side unit. 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110. FIG.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, a plurality of ball receiving parts, that is, three general winning holes 2001 and one sub-out hole 2021 protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁Further, the rear end of the gutter portion extending rearward from the ball receiving portion is located within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and does not protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The side unit 2200 guides the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving portion) to the rear of the game panel 1100 by the gutter portion and delivers it to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 . Then, the game ball B delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 and discharged downward. On the other hand, the game ball B received in the sub-out port 2021 is delivered to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 and discharged to the safe ball receiving port 600b of the circulating ball path unit 600 below in the same manner as described above. .

In the side unit 2200, the front ends of the plurality of ball receiving portions having a U-shaped cross section and the front end of the shelf portion 2201 having a frame-shaped cross section are connected by a flat front plate. Compared to conventional side units in which a plurality of ball receiving parts protrude forward from the base plate, the rigidity is higher. Therefore, when the side unit 2200 is pulled forward after removing the mounting screw that attaches the side unit 2200 to the panel plate 1110 in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the side unit 2200 is enhanced. , the side unit 2200 does not bend. As a result, the positioning projections of the side unit 2200 are not tilted with respect to the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2200 can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the disassembly work.

In addition, since a part of the front plate of the side unit 2200 protrudes above the shelf 2201 at the front end of the shelf 2201, when the pachinko machine 1 is disassembled, the fingers of the operator cannot protrude from the shelf. The side unit 2200 can be easily pulled forward by hooking it on the part where the side unit 2200 is located, and the workability of the disassembly work is good.

In addition, when the side unit 2200 is assembled to the game board 5, the opening 1112 is blocked from the front by the flat base plate. Intrusion into the game area 5a on the front side of the panel board 1110 can be prevented.

[13-1. Side unit of the second embodiment]
Next, the side unit 2800 of the second embodiment will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 164 to 166 and the like. FIG. 164(a) is a front view showing the main part of the game board provided with the side unit of the second embodiment, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) seen from the front. 165(a) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit exploded from the game panel in the game board of FIG. 164, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing the side unit exploded from (a) from the front. , (c) is an exploded perspective view of the side unit as seen from the rear of (b), and (d) is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the game panel and the side unit in longitudinal section. FIG. 166 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the side unit and the game panel in FIG. 165 in cross section.

In the game board 5 provided with the side unit 2800 of the present embodiment, the parts having the same configurations as those of the game board 5 shown in FIG.

The side unit 2800 of the second embodiment extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. It is attached to the game panel 1100 from the front. The side unit 2800 is provided with three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times.

The side unit 2800, as shown in FIG. and a second component 2812 attached from. The side unit 2800 of this embodiment has a second component member 2812 attached to the rear side of the first component member 2811 .

A first constituent member 2811 of the side unit 2800 includes a flat base plate 2811a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a base plate 2811a that protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a and is open upward and rearward. and a plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b forming the general prize winning opening 2001.

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. The three ball receiving portions 2811b are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and are provided such that the right ball receiving portion 2811b is positioned downward. The ball receiving portion 2811b at the left end is formed such that the front end surface is parallel to the base plate 2811a to the lower end. The remaining (central and right end) ball receiving portions 2811b are inclined such that the front end faces move rearward toward the lower ends.

In addition, the first component member 2811 includes two positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a and a plurality of (three in this case) mounting members penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting on the game panel 1100. It has a hole 2811d and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided in the rear end surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b (base plate 2811a) for mounting the second component member 2812 thereon.

The two positioning protrusions 2811c are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the two positioning protrusions 2811c have the same length.

The three mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A mounting screw inserted through a mounting hole (not shown) of a second component member 2812, which will be described later, is screwed into the mounting hole.

The second component member 2812 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is placed on the surface (plate) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). surface), a passage outlet 2812b that opens rearward at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting to the first component member 2811. ) and

As shown in FIGS. 165(d) and 166, the second component 2812 of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and its depth is the thickness of the panel plate 1110. designed to fit inside. In addition, FIG. 165(d) is cut at the ball receiving portion 2811b in the center in the left-right direction.

The ball passage 2812a of the second component member 2812 is formed along the inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000 and along the surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to become lower toward the right. The passage outlet 2812b opens rearward at the right end of the second component 2812, which is the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a.

The attachment hole of the second component member 2812 is provided at a portion corresponding to the attachment hole of the first component member 2811 . The second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side by inserting the attachment screw from the rear into the attachment hole of the second component member 2812 and screwing it into the mounting hole of the first component member 2811. be done.

The side unit 2800 of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. and a main stream portion 2802 (a portion shown by dark shading in FIG. 166) extending along the surface (plate surface) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . The sphere passage 2812 a is composed of a plurality of tributary portions 2801 and a main flow portion 2802 .

The branch portion 2801 extends rearward from a portion forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 to a portion behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and above the main flow portion 2802 (thickness of the panel plate 1110). .

The main stream portion 2802 extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from near the left end of the base plate 2811a to near the right end so as to be lower rightward. The length of the main flow portion 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B (8 to 10 times in this embodiment).

In the side unit 2800 of this embodiment, the second component member 2812 is positioned behind the first component member 2811, and the mounting screws are inserted from the rear of the second component member 2812 through the mounting holes of the second component member 2812. It is assembled by screwing it into the attachment hole of 2811 . As a result, a side unit 2800 is constructed in which the second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side.

The ball passage 2812a of the second component 2812 is open to the front as shown, but when the first component 2811 is attached to the front side to construct the side unit 2800, the front end of the ball passage 2812a is opened. The side is closed by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811, and the game ball B does not fall forward from the ball passage 2812a. That is, the first component member 2811 and the second component member 2812 constitute the ball passage 2812a. In other words, a ball passage 2812a is provided between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812. As shown in FIG.

This side unit 2800 is configured such that the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110 from the front of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. It abuts against the front surface of 1110 . At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811 c of the first component member 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 . In this state, the mounting hole 2811 d of the first component member 2811 is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 .

Then, the side unit 2800 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the attachment screws into the attachment holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the attachment holes 2811d of the first component member 2811 and tightening them. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 is provided in the vicinity of the positioning projection 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be firmly pushed toward the panel plate 1110 and inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and the positioning projection 2811c can be prevented from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

When the side unit 2800 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the second component member 2812 is positioned within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . In other words, when assembled on the game board 5, the side unit 2800 does not protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and a wide space behind the panel plate 1110 can be secured.

In this embodiment, the side unit 2800 and the panel plate 1110 are made of transparent synthetic resin, and the decoration of the production unit provided behind the panel plate 1110 can be visually recognized from the front through the side unit 2800 and the like. . Here, behind the side unit 2800, a back side effect unit 3500 having a back side movable decorative body 3510 that can be raised and lowered according to the progress of the game is provided. This back and bottom movable decorative body 3510 has a standby position where most of the whole is located below the frame of the center accessory 2500, and a standby position that rises from the standby position and is located within the frame of the center accessory 2500. It is provided so as to be able to move up and down between the application position and . In the state of the standby position where the back lower movable decorative body 3510 is lowered, it can be visually recognized from the front through the transparent side unit 2800 and the panel plate 1110 .

In the side unit 2800, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, it is guided to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning hole 2001, and the ball passes. After flowing down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 by 2812a, it is transferred to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind from the passage exit 2812b. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the passage outlet 2812b of the second component member 2812 is provided below the underside movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. In other words, the general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is provided below the movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800, the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 and the like do not interfere with the back lower movable decorative body 3510. - 特許庁

Further, in this embodiment, the side unit 2800 is not provided with the general winning hole sensor 3001, and the back unit 3000 (back ball guiding unit 3100) is provided with the general winning hole sensor 3001. FIG. That is, the side unit 2800 has a non-wiring structure. In this way, for various units attached from the front side of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, by providing electronic components such as various sensors such as a ball sensor and a magnetic sensor with wiring in the back unit 3000, the panel When the mounting screw attached to the plate 1110 is removed and the unit is pulled forward, the wiring is connected to the unit through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. The unit can be removed forward from the panel plate 1110 without worrying about the wiring, and the disassembly work can be efficiently performed.

According to the side unit 2800 of the present embodiment, since the flat base plate 2811a is provided in the first component member 2811, the mounting screws can be inserted into the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2811d passing through the base plate 2811a. By screwing the first component member 2811 onto the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing it into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 can be blocked from the front side by the base plate 2811a. ), the back of the panel board 1110 (game panel 1100) can be hidden through the opening 1112, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be improved. On the other hand, since the second component member 2812 is provided with a ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110, the cross section of the portion of the ball passage 2812a is U-shaped. , the rigidity of the second component 2812 can be increased due to the presence of the ball passage 2812a. Since the base plate 2811a has a flat plate shape, the rigidity of the first component member 2811 may be lowered. Since the side unit 2800 is formed by attaching the first component member 2811 from the rear side with the attachment screws, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is disassembled for recycling or the like, the side unit 2800 is pulled forward by removing the mounting screws screwed into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2811d of the first component member 2811. At times, since the side unit 2800 does not bend due to the increased rigidity of the side unit 2800, the positioning projection of the side unit 2800 (first component member 2811) relative to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can easily remove the side unit 2800 from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) without tilting the 2811c, and can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

By the way, since the two positioning protrusions 2811c on the first component member 2811 are provided so as to be separated in the longitudinal direction of the first component member 2811, when the first component member 2811 is pulled forward during the disassembly work, The center of the first component member 2811 bends in a curved shape so as to move forward, and the bending causes the positioning projections 2811c separated in the longitudinal direction to approach each other at their tips. There is a risk that the positioning protrusion 2811c will not come off from the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 due to the force that tends to tilt the 2811c. However, in this embodiment, as described above, the side unit 2800 is formed by attaching the second component 2812 from the rear side of the first component 2811, and the rigidity of the side unit 2800 is increased. Even if the side unit 2800 is pulled forward, the side unit 2800 is not bent and the positioning projections 2811c separated in the longitudinal direction are not tilted, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the disassembly work for sorting.

Furthermore, since the plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b are projected forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the side unit 2800 is pulled forward in order to remove it from the panel plate 1110 when disassembling the pachinko machine 1. At this time, the ball receiving portion 2811b can be picked and pulled, and the removal work of the side unit 2800 can be facilitated.

In addition, since the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is blocked from the front by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811, foreign matter such as dust and dirt can pass through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110. Intrusion into the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 can be prevented.

In addition, since the second component member 2812 is attached from the rear side of the first component member 2811 by means of attachment screws through attachment holes (not shown), the attachment screws attaching the second component member 2812 are difficult to see from the front. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5).

In addition, the game ball B that enters the ball receiving portion 2811b (general winning opening 2001) between the first component member 2811 and the second component member 2812 is caused to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Since the passage 2812a is provided so as to protrude into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the game ball B entered into the general winning hole 2001 is pushed backward from the rear surface of the game panel 1100 like the conventional side unit. Compared to the case where a ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel 1100 to guide and flow down, the thickness of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) can be effectively used, and the back of the panel plate 1110 can be used. empty space can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as the back side effect unit 3500 (the back side movable decorative body 3510) in the empty space, and the pachinko machine 1 with higher appeal to the players can be provided.

Furthermore, since the two positioning protrusions 2811c on the first component member 2811 are provided so as to be separated in the longitudinal direction of the first component member 2811, when the side unit 2800 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, The side unit 2800 does not rotate along the surface of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be reliably positioned at the desired position of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁

In the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively.

Further, in the side unit 2800, the ball passage 2812a, which is composed of a plurality of branch flow portions 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving portions 2812c and a main flow portion 2802 where the plurality of branch flow portions 2801 join, Although shown as having one, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2812a may be independent for each ball receiving portion 2811b.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800 described above, the ball sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 2811b is not provided, but the side unit 2800 is not limited to this, and a ball sensor is provided. Also good. When the side unit 2800 is provided with a ball sensor, it is desirable to provide the ball sensor within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, or to provide the ball sensor below the rear effect device (back and bottom effect unit 3500). .

Also, in the side unit 2800 described above, an LED board is not provided on the rear side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an LED for emitting decoration may be provided. When the side unit 2800 is provided with an LED board, a unit cover is provided which covers the LED board from the rear and whose front end surface abuts the rear surface of the side unit 2800 (second component member 2812), and the unit cover and the side unit contact each other. It is desirable to provide non-contact surface portions that are not in contact with each other on the contact surface portions that are in contact with each other. As a result, the side unit 2800 can be decorated with light using the LEDs of the LED substrate, and the heat from the LEDs can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion.

[13-2. Modification of side unit]
Next, various modifications of the side unit 2800 of the above embodiment will be described in detail.

[13-2a. Modification 1 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800A having a form different from the side unit 2800 shown in FIG. 164 and the like will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 167 and the like. FIG. 167 is an explanatory view showing a longitudinal cross-section of a side unit with a form different from that of FIG. 164 together with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800A extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. A plurality of (2 to 4) general prize winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be able to receive the prizes at all times.

The side unit 2800A consists of a first component 2811 attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstacle nail of the game panel 1100 is implanted, and a second component provided behind the first component 2811. The member 2813 and .

A first constituent member 2811 of the side unit 2800A includes a flat base plate 2811a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a base plate 2811a that protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a and is open upward and rearward. and a plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b forming the general prize winning opening 2001. In addition, the first component member 2811 has a plurality of positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, and a plurality of mounting holes 2811d passing through the base plate 2811a for mounting to the game panel 1100. (see Figure 165).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. A plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning projections 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting decorative seal 2803 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 2811a and the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component member 2811. As shown in FIG.

The second component member 2813 of the side unit 2800A is configured so that the game ball B entering the ball receiving portion 2811b (general prize winning port 2001) of the first component member 2811 is within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. A ball passage 2813a that can flow down along the plate surface of the panel plate 1110 in the opening 1112 that penetrates the panel plate 1110 as described above, and a ball sensor that detects the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2813a. 2813b and .

The second component member 2813 may be configured by one member, or may be configured by combining a plurality of members.

As shown in the figure, this ball passage 2813a is placed near the lower end of the opening 1112 and bent rearward, and then bent downward along the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 so that the downstream end is lower than the opening 1112. extended to In other words, the ball passage 2813a is bent rearward at a portion lower than the back-bottom effect unit 3500 (back-bottom movable decorative body 3510) provided at the rear. As a result, the space for arranging the underside effect unit 3500 can be sufficiently secured, and the movable range (lifting range) of the underside movable decorative body 3510 can be widened or the underside movable decorative body 3510 can be enlarged. can be done.

The ball sensor 2813b is provided at a portion extending along the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2813a. In other words, the sphere sensor 2813b is provided at a portion lower than the back side effect unit 3500 (back side movable decoration 3510) provided behind in the ball passage 2813a, and the back side movable decoration 3510 does not interfere with the ball sensor 2813b. will not be.

The first component member 2811 of the side unit 2800A moves the base plate 2811a from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 so that the base plate 2811a closes the corresponding opening 1112 in the panel plate 1110. , and a plurality of positioning projections 2811c protruding rearward from the base plate 2811a are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, the mounting screws are inserted into the panel through the mounting holes 2811d. It is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing it into the attachment hole 1114 of the plate 1110 and tightening it.

On the other hand, the second component 2813 of the side unit 2800A is attached to the back case 3010 of the back unit 3000. As shown in FIG. In the state where the second component member 2813 is attached to the rear unit 3000, although not shown, a part of the ball passage 2813a (a portion accommodated in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110) is located forward of the rear box 3010. protruding to

When the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100, the portion of the second component member 2813 protruding forward from the back box 3010 is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from behind. The side unit 2800A is constructed with the part being inserted and positioned on the rear side of the first component member 2811 .

When the side unit 2800A is assembled on the game board 5, the rear surface of the portion of the ball passage 2813a of the second component member 2813 that extends into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 extends rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. Protruding. The projection amount TL is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a in which the obstacle nail is implanted depends on whether the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made of plywood or cut from a resin plate. Therefore, the part along the surface of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2813a of the second component member 2813 cannot fit within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 There is a risk that it will protrude backwards. If the amount of protrusion of the second component member 2813 to the rear from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is large, a sufficient rear space cannot be secured. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the projection amount TL from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the portion of the ball passage 2813a in the second component member 2813 is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, space can be sufficiently secured, and a desired size of the back side effect unit 3500 (back side movable decorative body 3510) can be provided.

In the side unit 2800A, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the ball passage 2813a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 is moved by the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component member 2811 forming the general winning opening 2001. , and delivered to the ball passage 2813 a of the second component 2813 . Then, the game ball B delivered to the ball passage 2813a of the second component member 2813 first flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to fall within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the lower end of the opening 1112 In the vicinity, after flowing rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 , it flows downward along the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . After that, the game ball B is ejected downward from an exit (not shown) after being detected by the ball sensor 2813b.

According to the side unit 2800A of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

Further, according to the side unit 2800A, since the second component member 2813 provided with the ball sensor 2813b is attached to the back unit 3000 provided behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), the panel plate A first component 2811 attached to 1110 does not have a ball sensor 2813b. Therefore, since the electronic parts such as the ball sensor 2813b are integrated in the back unit 3000 and the wiring from the ball sensor 2813b is not extended from the game panel 1100 side, the game panel 1100 is When assembling the rear unit 3000, the wiring from the ball sensor 2813b will not be caught by obstacle nails, etc., and cutting of the wiring due to being caught can be avoided, and the workability of the assembly work can be improved. .

Further, according to the side unit 2800A, by assembling it to the game board 5, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side.

The side unit 2800A may be provided with an independent ball passage 2813a for each ball receiving portion 2811b. 2813a may be provided to merge the game balls B entering the respective ball receiving portions 2811b.

In the above side unit 2800A, the second component member 2813 is attached to the back unit 3000, but the second component member 2813 is attached to the rear side of the first component member 2811. It is good to be able to do so.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively.

[13-2b. Modification 2 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800B having a form different from that of the side units 2800 and 2800A described above will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 168(a) is an explanatory view showing a vertical cross section of a side unit with a form different from the side unit shown in FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a main part in a perspective view. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800B extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. A plurality of (2 to 4) general prize winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be able to receive the prizes at all times.

The side unit 2800B includes a unit body 2810 attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail is planted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810, and the unit body 2810. and an LED board 2825 provided between the unit cover 2820 and having a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. A unit body 2810 and a unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800B are made of transparent synthetic resin.

In addition, the side unit 2800B has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and not in contact with each other. ing.

The unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800B includes a first component 2811 attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail of the game panel 1100 is implanted, and a second component 2811 attached from the rear to the first component 2811. It has a second component member 2812 and a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820 . In this embodiment, the second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811 . Further, in this embodiment, the support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the second component member 2812 .

A first constituent member 2811 of the unit main body 2810 includes a flat plate-like base plate 2811a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a base plate 2811a that protrudes forward and is open upward and rearward. and a plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b forming the general prize winning opening 2001. The first component member 2811 includes a plurality of positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d passing through the base plate 2811a for mounting to the game panel 1100, a base plate 2811a has a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812 (see FIG. 165).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. A plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning projections 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting decorative seal 2803 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 2811a and the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component member 2811. As shown in FIG.

The second component member 2812 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is placed on the surface (plate) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). a ball passage 2812a that flows down along the surface), a passage outlet (not shown) that opens rearward at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and a plurality of mounting holes for attachment to the first component member 2811 (illustration omitted), and an attachment hole (illustration omitted) provided on the rear surface for attaching the unit cover 2820 .

The second component member 2812 is provided on the rear side with a support frame portion 2814 whose rear end contacts the front end of the unit cover 2820 . In other words, the second component member 2812 has a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end face abuts the front end face of the unit cover 2820. . The rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 abuts on the front end surface of a peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later, by assembling the side unit 2800B. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830) of the second component member 2812 is provided above a passage outlet (not shown) that is the outlet of the ball passage 2812a. In other words, the passage outlet of the second component member 2812 is provided below the support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830).

In the unit body 2810, the second component member 2812 is positioned behind the first component member 2811, and the mounting screw is passed from the rear of the second component member 2812 through the mounting hole of the second component member 2812 to be attached to the first component member 2811. It is assembled by screwing it into the hole. As a result, a unit body 2810 is constructed in which the second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 168, the second component member 2812 of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that the depth fits within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110. It is

A unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800B is formed into a shallow container shape that opens forward, and an LED substrate 2825 is housed inside. As shown in FIG. 168, the unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-like cover portion 2820a, a frame-like peripheral wall portion 2820b projecting forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover portion 2820a, and a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b extending from the front end. and a recessed notch 2820c. A plurality of slits for ventilation may be provided in the cover portion 2820a.

The unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and penetrates through the cover portion 2820a and a plurality of boss portions 2820d for mounting the LED substrate 2825. and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) through which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

A cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is sized to cover the LED substrate 2825 from behind. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has the same outer shape as the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810 . The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b contacts the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810 by assembling the side unit 2800B. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The notch portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. By assembling the notch 2820c into the side unit 2800B, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810. FIG. That is, the notch portion 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a portion of the contact surface portion 2830 that is configured by the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. The notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-like unit cover 2820, and allows the heat from the LED substrate 2825 attached inside to be radiated to the outside. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800B is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss 2820d of the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them into the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800B can be decorated with various emission colors.

In the side unit 2800B, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820. It can be assembled by abutting (contacting) the unit cover 2820 and screwing the mounting screw into the mounting hole of the second component member 2812 of the unit main body 2810 through the mounting hole of the unit cover 2820 from behind.

To attach the side unit 2800B to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110. Then, the base plate 2811 a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811 c of the first component member 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 . In this state, the mounting hole 2811 d of the first component member 2811 is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 .

Then, the side unit 2800B is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 and tightening. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 is provided in the vicinity of the positioning projection 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be firmly pushed toward the panel plate 1110 and inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and the positioning projection 2811c can be prevented from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

In the side unit 2800B, the second component 2812 of the unit body 2810 is provided with a ball passage 2812a through which the game ball B flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. Since the cross section of the ball passage 2812a in the second component member 2812 is U-shaped, the rigidity of the second component member 2812 can be increased due to the presence of the ball passage 2812a. Then, the second component member 2812, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage 2812a, is attached to the first component member 2811, which may have low rigidity due to the flat base plate 2811a. Since the side unit 2800B is formed by attaching from the rear side of 2811, the rigidity of the side unit 2800B can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when the side unit 2800B is pulled forward after removing the mounting screw that attaches the side unit 2800B to the panel plate 1110 in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the side unit 2800B is increased. , the side unit 2800B does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800B (first component member 2811) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800B can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be removed and that can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

When the side unit 2800B is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the second component 2812 of the unit body 2810 is positioned within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

In addition, in the side unit 2800B of the present embodiment, when assembled on the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the cutout portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) of the unit cover 2820 ) protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, since the cutout portions 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) are provided on the upper and lower sides, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 is discharged upward through the cutout portions 2820c on the upper side, and the outside air is released from the cutout portions 2820c on the lower side. can be taken inside. In addition, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the outer circumference of the portion of the unit main body 2810 of the side unit 2800B inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, that is, the outer circumference of the second component member 2812 and the opening 1112 A gap is provided between the inner circumference of the As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be easily released to the outside through the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), and the heat can be efficiently released.

In addition, in the side unit 2800B of the present embodiment, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (the non-contact surface 2831) when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820. FIG. In other words, in plan view, the LED substrate 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). As a result, even if dust or dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch portion 2820c, it is possible to prevent the LED board 2825 from being affected by the dust and dirt. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2820c.

In addition, since the side unit 2800B of this embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5 a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110 .

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800B is assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the second component member 2813 of the unit body 2810 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. This protrusion amount is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B similarly to the side unit 2800A of FIG.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a in which the obstacle nail is implanted depends on whether the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made of plywood or cut from a resin plate. Therefore, the portion of the ball passage 2812a of the unit main body 2810 that is along the surface of the panel plate 1110 and the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2810 may be thinner than the panel plate 1110. There is a risk that the panel plate 1110 may protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 without being completely accommodated within the plate thickness. If the side unit 2800B protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 by a large amount, a sufficient rear space cannot be secured. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the side unit 2800B, the ball passage 2813a extends from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 at a portion extending along the surface of the panel plate 1110 and extending within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110. Since the amount of protrusion is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, it is possible to secure a sufficient rear space, and the desired size of the back side effect unit 3500 (back side movable decorative body 3510) can be provided. can be provided.

In the side unit 2800B, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning opening 2001, and the ball passes. After flowing down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 by 2812a, it is delivered to the rear ball guide unit 3100 of the rear unit 3000 provided behind from a passage exit (not shown). The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

Although detailed illustration of the side unit 2800B of this embodiment is omitted, the passage exit (not shown) of the second component member 2812 in the unit main body 2810 is provided below the underside movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. . In other words, the general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is provided below the movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800B, the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 and the like do not interfere with the back lower movable decorative body 3510. FIG.

Although the detailed illustration of the side unit 2800B of this embodiment is omitted, the unit main body 2810 is the same as the side unit 2800 of FIG. and a main stream portion 2802 which merges with the branch portion 2801 and extends along the surface (plate surface) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . The sphere passage 2812 a is composed of a plurality of tributary portions 2801 and a main flow portion 2802 .

According to the side unit 2800B of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

In the above-described side unit 2800B, the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with the notch portion 2820c (the non-contact surface portion 2831). A notch portion (non-contact surface portion 2831) cut forward from the rear end may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 without providing the notch portion 2820c in 2820b. Alternatively, both the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 may be provided with notches (non-contact surface portions).

In the side unit 2800B described above, the frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 protruding rearward is provided on the unit main body 2810, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the side unit 2800B is not limited to this. The front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may contact the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 without providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810, and the contact surface portion 2830 may be used as the contact surface portion. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 protruding rearward is not provided, the amount of rearward projection from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the side unit 2800B can be reduced, and the empty space behind the panel plate 1110 can be further reduced. It can be secured widely.

Furthermore, in the above-described side unit 2800B, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the LED board 2825 is mounted behind the unit main body 2810 (second component member 2812). It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800B described above, a diffusing lens portion composed of a plurality of uneven surfaces for diffusing the light from the LEDs 2825a may be provided in front of the LED substrate 2825. FIG. This diffuser lens section may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 (second component member 2812), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810. FIG.

Further, in the above-described side unit 2800B, the ball passage 2812a composed of a plurality of branch portions 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving portions 2811b and a main flow portion 2802 where the plurality of branch portions 2801 join, Although shown as having one, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2812a may be independent for each ball receiving portion 2811b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED substrate 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 through the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate There is a risk that the light will diffuse within 1110 and reduce the amount of light emitted forward, weakening the presentation effect of light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112. Since the light can be reflected by the inner peripheral surface of 1112, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to sufficiently exhibit the presentation effect of light emission.

[13-2c. Modification 3 of side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800C having a form different from that described above will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 169 and the like. FIG. 169 is an explanatory view showing a longitudinal section of a side unit having a form different from that of the side unit shown in FIG. 168 together with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800B described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800C extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. A plurality of (2 to 4) general prize winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be able to receive the prizes at all times.

The side unit 2800C includes a unit body 2810 attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail is planted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810, and the unit body 2810. and an LED board 2825 provided between the unit cover 2820 and having a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. A unit body 2810 and a unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800B are made of transparent synthetic resin.

In addition, the side unit 2800C has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and not in contact with each other. ing.

The unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800B includes a first component 2811 attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail of the game panel 1100 is implanted, and a second component 2811 attached from the rear to the first component 2811. a second component member 2812, a support frame portion 2814 projecting rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and having a rear end surface in contact with the front end surface of the unit cover 2820; It has a ball sensor 2815 (general prize winning opening sensor 3001) which is provided between the constituent member 2812 and detects the game ball B received in the general winning prize opening 2001. In this embodiment, the second component 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component 2811 . Further, in this embodiment, the support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the second component member 2812 .

A first constituent member 2811 of the unit main body 2810 includes a flat plate-like base plate 2811a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a base plate 2811a that protrudes forward and is open upward and rearward. and a plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b forming the general prize winning opening 2001. The first component member 2811 includes a plurality of positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d passing through the base plate 2811a for mounting to the game panel 1100, a base plate 2811a has a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812 (see FIG. 165).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. A plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning projections 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting decorative seal 2803 is attached to the front surface of the base plate 2811a and the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component member 2811. As shown in FIG.

The second component member 2812 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is placed on the surface (plate) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). surface), a passage outlet 2812b that opens rearward at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting to the first component member 2811. ) and an attachment hole (not shown) provided on the rear surface for attaching the unit cover 2820 .

The second component member 2812 is provided on the rear side with a support frame portion 2814 whose rear end contacts the front end of the unit cover 2820 . In other words, the second component member 2812 has a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end face abuts the front end face of the unit cover 2820. . The rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 abuts on the front end surface of a peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later, by assembling the side unit 2800C. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830 ) of the second component member 2812 is provided above the passage outlet 2812 b of the ball passage 2812 a and the ball sensor 2815 . In other words, the passage outlet 2812b and the ball sensor 2815 of the second component member 2812 are provided below the support frame portion 2814 (contact surface portion 2830). As a result, the ball sensor 2815 is less likely to interfere with the lighting decoration by the LEDs 2825a of the LED substrate 2825. FIG.

In the unit body 2810, the second component member 2812 is positioned behind the first component member 2811, and the mounting screw is passed from the rear of the second component member 2812 through the mounting hole of the second component member 2812 to be attached to the first component member 2811. It is assembled by screwing it into the hole. At this time, the ball sensor 2815 is arranged and assembled at a predetermined position of the ball passage 2812 a so as to be sandwiched between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812 . As a result, a unit body 2810 is constructed in which the second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side.

As shown in FIG. 169, the second component member 2812 of the present embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and formed so that the depth is within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110. It is

A unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800C is formed into a shallow container shape that opens forward, and an LED substrate 2825 is accommodated therein. The unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b projecting forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. ,have. A plurality of slit holes for ventilation may be provided in the cover portion 2820a.

The unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and penetrates through the cover portion 2820a and a plurality of boss portions 2820d for mounting the LED substrate 2825. and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) through which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

A cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is sized to cover the LED substrate 2825 from behind. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has the same outer shape as the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810 . The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b contacts the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810 by assembling the side unit 2800C. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The notch portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. The cutout portion 2820c can form a gap between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810 by assembling the side unit 2800C. That is, the notch portion 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a portion of the contact surface portion 2830 that is configured by the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. The notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-like unit cover 2820, and allows the heat from the LED substrate 2825 attached inside to be radiated to the outside. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800C is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss portion 2820d of the unit cover 2820 . A plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them into the side unit 2800C, the side unit 2800C can be decorated with various emission colors.

In this side unit 2800C, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820. It can be assembled by abutting (contacting) the unit cover 2820 and screwing the mounting screw into the mounting hole of the second component member 2812 of the unit main body 2810 through the mounting hole of the unit cover 2820 from behind.

To attach the side unit 2800C to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110. Then, the base plate 2811 a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811 c of the first component member 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 . In this state, the mounting hole 2811 d of the first component member 2811 is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 .

Then, the side unit 2800C is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 and tightening. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 is provided in the vicinity of the positioning projection 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be firmly pushed toward the panel plate 1110 and inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and the positioning projection 2811c can be prevented from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

In the side unit 2800C, the second component 2812 of the unit main body 2810 is provided with a ball passage 2812a through which the game ball B flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. Since the cross section of the ball passage 2812a in the second component member 2812 is U-shaped, the rigidity of the second component member 2812 can be increased due to the presence of the ball passage 2812a. Then, the second component member 2812, whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage 2812a, is attached to the first component member 2811, which may have low rigidity due to the flat base plate 2811a. Since the side unit 2800C is formed by attaching from the rear side of 2811, the rigidity of the side unit 2800C can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800C to the panel plate 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800C is pulled forward in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the side unit 2800C is increased. , the side unit 2800C does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800C (first component member 2811) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800C can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be removed and that can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

When the side unit 2800C is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the second component 2812 and the ball sensor 2815 of the unit main body 2810 are positioned within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It is positioned within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 and is positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

In addition, in the side unit 2800C of the present embodiment, when assembled on the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 (non-contact surface portion 2831 ) protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, since the cutout portions 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) are provided on the upper and lower sides, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 is discharged upward through the cutout portions 2820c on the upper side, and the outside air is released from the cutout portions 2820c on the lower side. can be taken inside. In addition, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the outer periphery of the portion inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the unit body 2810 of the side unit 2800C, that is, the outer periphery of the second component member 2812 and the opening 1112 A gap is provided between the inner circumference of the As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be easily released to the outside through the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), and the heat can be efficiently released.

In addition, in the side unit 2800C of the present embodiment, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface 2831) when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820. FIG. In other words, in plan view, the LED substrate 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). As a result, even if dust or dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch portion 2820c, it is possible to prevent the LED board 2825 from being affected by the dust and dirt. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2820c.

Further, the side unit 2800C of the present embodiment is assembled to the game board 5, and the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5 a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110 .

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800C is assembled to the game board 5, the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the second component member 2813 of the unit body 2810 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. This protrusion amount is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B similarly to the side unit 2800A of FIG.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a in which the obstacle nail is implanted depends on whether the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made of plywood or cut from a resin plate. Therefore, the portion of the ball passage 2812a of the unit main body 2810 that is along the surface of the panel plate 1110 and the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2810 may be thinner than the panel plate 1110. There is a risk that the panel plate 1110 may protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 without being completely accommodated within the plate thickness. If the amount of protrusion of the side unit 2800C to the rear from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is large, a sufficient rear space cannot be secured. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the side unit 2800C, the ball passage 2813a extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. Since the amount of protrusion is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, it is possible to secure a sufficient rear space, and the desired size of the back side effect unit 3500 (back side movable decorative body 3510) can be provided. can be provided.

In the side unit 2800C, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning opening 2001, and the ball passes. By 2812a, it flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, is detected by the ball sensor 2815, and is discharged from the passage outlet 2812b that opens toward the rear.

In the side unit 2800C of this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the passage outlet 2812b of the second component member 2812 in the unit main body 2810 is provided below the back lower movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. In addition, the ball sensor 2815 (general prize winning opening sensor 3001) for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is located within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 and the panel plate It is provided within the plate thickness of 1110. Therefore, the side unit 2800C, the ball sensor 2815, and the like do not interfere with the underside movable decorative body 3510. FIG.

Although detailed illustration of the side unit 2800C of this embodiment is omitted, the unit main body 2810 is the same as the side unit 2800 of FIG. and a main stream portion 2802 which merges with the branch portion 2801 and extends along the surface (plate surface) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 . The sphere passage 2812 a is composed of a plurality of tributary portions 2801 and a main flow portion 2802 .

According to the side unit 2800C of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as the side unit 2800 described above.

In the above-described side unit 2800C, the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with the notch portion 2820c (the non-contact surface portion 2831). A notch portion (non-contact surface portion 2831) cut forward from the rear end may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 without providing the notch portion 2820c in 2820b. Alternatively, both the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 may be provided with notches (non-contact surface portions).

In the side unit 2800C described above, the unit main body 2810 is provided with the frame-like support frame portion 2814 projecting rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the side unit 2800C is not limited to this. The front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may contact the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 without providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810, and the contact surface portion 2830 may be used as the contact surface portion. Accordingly, since the support frame portion 2814 protruding rearward is not provided, the amount of rearward projection from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 in the side unit 2800C can be reduced, and the empty space behind the panel plate 1110 can be further reduced. It can be secured widely.

Furthermore, in the above-described side unit 2800C, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but this is not a limitation, and the LED board 2825 is mounted behind the unit main body 2810 (second component member 2812). It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800C described above, a diffusing lens portion composed of a plurality of uneven surfaces for diffusing the light from the LEDs 2825a may be provided in front of the LED substrate 2825. FIG. This diffuser lens section may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 (second component member 2812), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810. FIG.

Further, in the above-described side unit 2800C, the ball passage 2812a composed of a plurality of branch flow portions 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving portions 2811b and a main flow portion 2802 where the plurality of branch flow portions 2801 join, Although shown as having one, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2812a may be independent for each ball receiving portion 2811b.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED substrate 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 through the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate There is a risk that the light will diffuse within 1110 and reduce the amount of light emitted forward, weakening the presentation effect of light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112. Since the light can be reflected by the inner peripheral surface of 1112, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to sufficiently exhibit the presentation effect of light emission.

[13-2d. Modified example 4 of the side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800D having a form different from that described above will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 170 and the like. FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing a longitudinal section of a side unit with a different form together with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800, the side unit 2800B, and the side unit 2800C are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800D extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. A plurality of (2 to 4) general prize winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be able to receive the prizes at all times.

The side unit 2800D consists of a unit body 2810A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail is planted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810A, and a unit body 2810A. and an LED board 2825 provided between the unit cover 2820 and having a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. A unit main body 2810A and a unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800D are made of transparent synthetic resin.

The side unit 2800D also has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and not in contact with each other. ing.

The unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800D includes a first component 2811A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstacle nail of the game panel 1100 is implanted, and a second component 2811A attached from the rear to the first component 2811A. and a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820 . In this embodiment, the second component 2812A is attached to the front side of the first component 2811A. A support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the first component member 2811A.

A first constituent member 2811A of the unit main body 2810A includes a flat base plate 2811a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a ball that passes through the base plate 2811a and allows the game ball B to circulate. and a passage 2811e. The upstream end of the ball passage 2811e of the first component member 2811A is located behind the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component member 2812A, which will be described later.

The first component member 2811A includes a plurality of positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the game panel 1100, and a base plate 2811a. 2811a and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812A, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear surface for mounting the unit cover 2820. , (see FIG. 165).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. A plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning projections 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A support frame portion 2814 whose rear end contacts the front end of the unit cover 2820 is provided on the rear side of the first component member 2811A. In other words, the first component member 2811A has a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. . The support frame portion 2814 is provided at a portion below the ball passage 2811e on the rear surface of the base plate 2811a. The rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 abuts on the front end surface of a peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later, by assembling the side unit 2800D. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The second component member 2812A extends short in the front-rear direction and is open at the top and rear to form the general prize winning opening 2001. The plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c and the front ends of the plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c are connected to each other. It has a connecting flat front plate 2812d and a plurality of attachment holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component member 2811A. The ball receiving portion 2812c is positioned in front of the ball passage 2811e of the first component member 2811A.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting decorative seal 2803 is attached to the front surface of the front plate 2812d of the second component member 2812A.

In the unit body 2810A, the second component member 2812A is positioned in front of the first component member 2811A, and the mounting screw is screwed into the mounting hole of the second component member 2812A from behind through the mounting hole of the first component member 2811A. Assembled. As a result, a unit main body 2810A is constructed in which the second component 2812A is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear side. In this unit main body 2810A, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A.

As shown in FIG. 170, the first component 2811A of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and is formed so that the depth fits within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110. It is

A unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800D is formed into a shallow container shape that opens forward, and an LED substrate 2825 is housed inside. The unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b projecting forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. ,have. A plurality of slit holes for ventilation may be provided in the cover portion 2820a.

Further, the unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and penetrates through the cover portion 2820a and a plurality of boss portions 2820d for attaching the LED substrate 2825 to the unit body 2810A. and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) through which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

A cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is sized to cover the LED substrate 2825 from behind. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has the same outer shape as the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b contacts the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A by assembling the side unit 2800D. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The notch portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. By assembling the cutout portion 2820c to the side unit 2800D, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. That is, the notch portion 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a portion of the contact surface portion 2830 that is configured by the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. The notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-like unit cover 2820, and allows the heat from the LED substrate 2825 attached inside to be radiated to the outside. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800D is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss 2820d of the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED substrate 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling the side unit 2800D, the side unit 2800D can be decorated with various emission colors.

In the side unit 2800D, with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A. It can be assembled by abutting (contacting) the unit cover 2820 and screwing the mounting screws from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting holes of the unit cover 2820 into the mounting holes of the first component member 2811A of the unit main body 2810A.

To attach the side unit 2800D to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110. Then, the base plate 2811 a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, the two positioning projections 2811c of the first component member 2811A are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811A is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG.

Then, the side unit 2800D is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screws into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the mounting holes 2811d of the first component member 2811A. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811A is provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be firmly pushed toward the panel plate 1110 and inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and the positioning projection 2811c can be prevented from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

In the side unit 2800D, by assembling the unit main body 2810A, the plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c of the second component member 2812A are arranged such that the front end side and the rear end side thereof are aligned with the front plate 2812d of the second component member 2812A and the first Since it has a structure sandwiched between the base plate 2811a of the component 2811A, it is possible to increase the rigidity as compared with the conventional side unit. Therefore, in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, when the attachment screws attaching the side unit 2800D to the panel plate 1110 are removed and the side unit 2800D is pulled forward, the rigidity of the side unit 2800D is increased. , the side unit 2800D does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800D (first component member 2811A) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800D can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be removed and that can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

When the side unit 2800D is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the ball passage 2811e and the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) of the first component member 2811A in the unit main body 2810A are connected to the panel plate. It is positioned within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and is positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . As a result, since the LED board 2825 is provided within the board thickness of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100, the inside of the board thickness of the panel board 1110 is effectively used. empty space can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a part of the performance device in the empty space, and to provide the pachinko machine 1 with a higher appeal to the players.

In addition, in the side unit 2800D of the present embodiment, since the cutouts 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) of the unit cover 2820 are provided at the top and bottom, heat from the LED substrate 2825 is discharged upward by the cutouts 2820c on the upper side. , external air can be taken into the interior from the lower notch 2820c. In addition, when assembled on the game board 5, there is a gap between the outer periphery of the portion of the unit main body 2810 of the side unit 2800D inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and the inner periphery of the opening 1112. is provided. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be easily released to the outside through the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), and the heat can be efficiently released.

In addition, in the side unit 2800D of the present embodiment, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface 2831) when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. In other words, in plan view, the LED substrate 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). As a result, even if dust or dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch portion 2820c, it is possible to prevent the LED board 2825 from being affected by the dust and dirt. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800D of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 is positioned within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and within the thickness of the panel plate 1110. , it is difficult for dust and dirt to enter the unit cover 2820 from above through the notch 2820c.

In addition, when the side unit 2800D of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, a gap is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 from the front. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 in the unit cover 2820 can be dissipated toward the rear of the panel plate 1110 through the gap between the notch 2820c and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the panel plate It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5 a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110 .

In the side unit 2800D, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second constituent member 2812A forming the general winning opening 2001 moves the ball to the ball passage 2811e of the rear first constituent member 2811A. After being guided and circulated rearward within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 by the ball passage 2811e, the ball is transferred to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind the panel plate 1110 (game panel 1100). The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

According to the side unit 2800D of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the side unit 2800 and the like.

In the above-described side unit 2800D, the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with the notch portion 2820c (the non-contact surface portion 2831), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the peripheral wall portion of the unit cover 2820 A notch portion (non-contact surface portion 2831) cut forward from the rear end may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A without providing the notch portion 2820c in 2820b. Alternatively, both the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A may be provided with notches (non-contact surface portions).

In the side unit 2800D described above, the unit body 2810A is provided with a frame-like support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the side unit 2800D is not limited to this. The front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may contact the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A without providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810A, and the contact surface portion 2830 may be used as the contact surface portion. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 protruding backward is not provided, the LED board 2825 can be positioned further forward, and a brighter light emitting decoration (light emitting effect) can be presented to the player.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800D described above, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800D described above, a diffusing lens portion composed of a plurality of uneven surfaces for diffusing the light from the LEDs 2825a may be provided in front of the LED substrate 2825. FIG. This diffuser lens portion may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A (the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810A.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED substrate 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 through the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate There is a risk that the light will diffuse within 1110 and reduce the amount of light emitted forward, weakening the presentation effect of light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112. Since the light can be reflected by the inner peripheral surface of 1112, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to sufficiently exhibit the presentation effect of light emission.

[13-2e. Modified example 5 of the side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800E having a form different from that described above will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 171 and the like. FIG. 171 is an explanatory diagram showing a longitudinal section of a side unit with a different form together with a game panel. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800D described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800E extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a into which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. A plurality of (2 to 4) general prize winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be able to receive the prizes at all times.

The side unit 2800E consists of a unit body 2810A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which obstacle nails are implanted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810A, and a unit body 2810A. and an LED board 2825 provided between the unit cover 2820 and having a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. A unit main body 2810A and a unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800E are made of transparent synthetic resin.

Further, the side unit 2800E has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and not in contact with each other. ing.

The unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800E includes a first component 2811A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail of the game panel 1100 is implanted, and a second component 2811A attached from the rear to the first component 2811A. and a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820 . In this embodiment, the second component 2812A is attached to the front side of the first component 2811A. A support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the first component member 2811A.

A first constituent member 2811A of the unit main body 2810A includes a flat plate-like base plate 2811a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the base plate 2811a that penetrates and opens forward to serve as a general winning opening. 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c), the game ball B received in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) along the surface (board surface) of the ball passage 2811e, and the downstream end of the ball passage 2811e toward the rear and an open passageway outlet (not shown).

The first component member 2811A includes a plurality of positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the game panel 1100, and a base plate 2811a. 2811a and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812A, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear surface for mounting the unit cover 2820. , (see FIG. 165).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. A plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning projections 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A support frame portion 2814 whose rear end contacts the front end of the unit cover 2820 is provided on the rear side of the first component member 2811A. In other words, the first component member 2811A has a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. . The support frame portion 2814 is provided on the rear surface of the base plate 2811a. The rear end face of the support frame portion 2814 abuts on the front end face of a peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later, by assembling the side unit 2800E. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The second component member 2812A has a plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c that extend short in the front-rear direction and are open at the top and rear to form the general winning opening 2001, and the rear ends of the plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c. and a plurality of attachment holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component member 2811A.

In this embodiment, a transparent decorative seal 2803 is attached to the front surface of the ball receiving portion 2812c and the front surface of the rear plate 2812e of the second component member 2812A.

In the unit body 2810A, the second component member 2812A is positioned in front of the first component member 2811A, and the mounting screw is screwed into the mounting hole of the second component member 2812A from behind through the mounting hole of the first component member 2811A. Assembled. As a result, a unit main body 2810A is constructed in which the second component 2812A is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear side. In this unit main body 2810A, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A.

A unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800E includes a branch portion 2801 communicating with the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c), and a surface (plate surface) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, which joins the branch portion 2801. and a main stream portion 2802 extending along. The sphere passage 2811 e is composed of a plurality of tributary portions 2801 and a main flow portion 2802 .

The branch portion 2801 extends rearward from a portion forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 to a portion behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and above the main flow portion 2802 (thickness of the panel plate 1110). .

The main stream portion 2802 extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from near the left end of the base plate 2811a to near the right end so as to be lower rightward. The length of the main flow portion 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B (8 to 10 times in this embodiment).

In addition, in the state assembled to the unit main body 2810A, in the forwardly open ball passage 2811e of the first component member 2811A, the portion other than the rear of the ball receiving portion 2812c is covered by the rear plate 2812e of the second component member 2812A. It will be in a closed state, and the game ball B will not drop forward from the ball passage 2811e. That is, the first component member 2811A and the second component member 2812A constitute the ball passage 2811e. In other words, a ball passage 2811e is provided between the first component 2811A and the second component 2812A.

As shown in FIG. 171, the first structural member 2811A of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 except for the base plate 2811a, and the depth of the panel plate 1110 is the same as that of the panel plate 1110. It is formed to fit within the plate thickness of

A unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800E is formed into a shallow container shape that opens forward, and an LED substrate 2825 is accommodated therein. The unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b projecting forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. ,have. A plurality of slit holes for ventilation may be provided in the cover portion 2820a.

Further, the unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and penetrates through the cover portion 2820a and a plurality of boss portions 2820d for attaching the LED substrate 2825 to the unit body 2810A. and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) through which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

A cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is sized to cover the LED substrate 2825 from behind. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has the same outer shape as the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b contacts the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A by assembling the side unit 2800E. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The notch portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. By assembling the cutout portion 2820c to the side unit 2800D, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. That is, the notch portion 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a portion of the contact surface portion 2830 that is configured by the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. The notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-like unit cover 2820, and allows the heat from the LED substrate 2825 attached inside to be radiated to the outside. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800E is mounted inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss 2820d of the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED substrate 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling them into the side unit 2800E, the side unit 2800E can be decorated with various emission colors.

In the side unit 2800E, with the LED board 2825 attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A. It can be assembled by abutting (contacting) the unit cover 2820 and screwing the mounting screws from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting holes of the unit cover 2820 into the mounting holes of the first component member 2811A of the unit main body 2810A.

To attach the side unit 2800E to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110. Then, the base plate 2811 a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, the two positioning projections 2811c of the first component member 2811A are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811A is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG.

Then, the side unit 2800E is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screws into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the mounting holes 2811d of the first component 2811A. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811A is provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be firmly pushed toward the panel plate 1110 and inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and the positioning projection 2811c can be prevented from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

In the side unit 2800E, the first component member 2811A is provided with a ball passage 2811e that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110, and the cross section of the portion of the ball passage 2811e is U-shaped. Therefore, the presence of the ball passage 2811e increases the rigidity of the first component member 2811A. On the other hand, the second component member 2812A has a form in which a plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c protrude forward from a flat plate-shaped rear plate 2812e. By assembling the unit main body 2810A, the first component member 2811A having increased rigidity can increase the rigidity more than the conventional side unit. Therefore, when the side unit 2800E is pulled forward after removing the mounting screw that attaches the side unit 2800E to the panel plate 1110 in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the side unit 2800E is increased. , the side unit 2800E does not bend. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800E (first component member 2811A) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800E can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be removed and that can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

When the side unit 2800E is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the first component 2811A of the unit body 2810A is positioned within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

Also, in the side unit 2800E of the present embodiment, the unit cover 2820 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 when assembled on the game board 5 . At this time, since the cutout portions 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) are provided on the upper and lower sides, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 is discharged upward through the cutout portions 2820c on the upper side, and the outside air is released from the cutout portions 2820c on the lower side. can be taken inside. In addition, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the outer circumference of the portion of the unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800E inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, that is, the outer circumference of the ball passage 2811e in the first component member 2811A. , and the inner periphery of the opening 1112, a gap is provided. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be easily released to the outside through the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), and the heat can be efficiently released.

In addition, in the side unit 2800E of the present embodiment, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch 2820c (non-contact surface 2831) when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. In other words, in plan view, the LED substrate 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). As a result, even if dust or dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch portion 2820c, it is possible to prevent the LED board 2825 from being affected by the dust and dirt. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800E of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 is positioned within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and within the thickness of the panel plate 1110. , it is difficult for dust and dirt to enter the unit cover 2820 from above through the notch 2820c.

In addition, when the side unit 2800E of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, a gap is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 from the front. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 in the unit cover 2820 can be dissipated toward the rear of the panel plate 1110 through the gap between the notch 2820c and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the panel plate It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5 a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110 .

Further, the side unit 2800E is assembled on the game board 5, and as shown in FIG. protrudes forward beyond the front of the Here, the ball passage 2811e protrudes forward by the thickness of the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A. As a result, the amount of protrusion of the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) that protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 can be further reduced, so that a sufficient space behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) can be secured. It is possible to provide a back side effect unit 3500 (back side movable decorative body 3510) of a desired size.

The amount of protrusion from the panel plate 1110 to the rear is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, like the side unit 2800A of FIG.

By the way, when the game panel 1100 is formed by injection molding, the thickness of the part of the game area 5a in which the obstacle nail is implanted depends on whether the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made of plywood or cut from a resin plate. Therefore, the part along the surface of the panel plate 1110 in the ball passage 2811e of the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 attached to the rear side of the unit main body 2810A do not have the thickness of the panel plate 1110. There is a risk that the panel plate 1110 may protrude rearward beyond the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 without being completely accommodated within the plate thickness. If the side unit 2800E protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 by a large amount, a sufficient rear space cannot be secured. On the other hand, in this embodiment, in the side unit 2800E, since the amount of protrusion from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 is set to 1/2 or less of the diameter D of the game ball B, a sufficient rear space can be secured. can be provided, and a desired size of the back side effect unit 3500 (the back side movable decorative body 3510) can be provided.

In the side unit 2800E, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, it is guided to the rear ball passage 2811e by the ball receiving portion 2812c forming the general winning opening 2001, and the board of the panel board 1110 is guided by the ball passage 2811e. After flowing down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 while being applied within the thickness, it is delivered to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind from a passage exit (not shown). The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

In the side unit 2800E of this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the passage exit (not shown) of the first component member 2811A in the unit main body 2810A is provided below the underside movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. . In other words, the general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) is provided below the movable ornament 3510 at the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800E, the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 and the like do not interfere with the back bottom movable decorative body 3510. FIG.

According to the side unit 2800E of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the side unit 2800 and the like.

In the above-described side unit 2800E, the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with the notch portion 2820c (the non-contact surface portion 2831), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the peripheral wall portion of the unit cover 2820 A notch portion (non-contact surface portion 2831) cut forward from the rear end may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A without providing the notch portion 2820c in 2820b. Alternatively, both the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A may be provided with notches (non-contact surface portions).

In addition, in the side unit 2800E described above, the unit body 2810A is provided with the frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 projecting rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the side unit 2800E is not limited to this. The front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may contact the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A without providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810A, and the contact surface portion 2830 may be used as the contact surface portion. As a result, since the support frame portion 2814 that projects rearward is not provided, the amount of rearward projection of the side unit 2800E from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 can be reduced, and the empty space behind the panel plate 1110 can be further reduced. It can be secured widely.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800E described above, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800E described above, a diffusing lens portion composed of a plurality of uneven surfaces for diffusing the light from the LEDs 2825a may be provided in front of the LED substrate 2825. FIG. This diffuser lens portion may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A (the first component member 2811A), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810A.

Further, in the above-described side unit 2800E, the ball passage 2811e, which is composed of a plurality of branch portions 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving portions 2812c and a main flow portion 2802 where the plurality of branch portions 2801 join, Although shown as having one, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2811e may be independent for each ball receiving portion 2812c.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED substrate 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 through the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate There is a risk that the light will diffuse within 1110 and reduce the amount of light emitted forward, weakening the presentation effect of light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112. Since the light can be reflected by the inner peripheral surface of 1112, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to sufficiently exhibit the presentation effect of light emission.

[13-2f. Modified example 6 of the side unit]
Next, a side unit 2800F having a form different from that described above will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 172 and the like. FIG. 172(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a side unit of a different form together with the game panel in cross section, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing (a) in longitudinal section. Here, the same components as those of the side unit 2800D described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800F extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. A plurality of (2 to 4) general prize winning openings 2001 are provided so as to be able to receive the prizes at all times.

The side unit 2800F consists of a unit body 2810A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which obstacle nails are implanted in the game panel 1100, a unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit body 2810A, and a unit body 2810A. and an LED board 2825 provided between the unit cover 2820 and having a plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted thereon. A unit main body 2810A and a unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800F are made of transparent synthetic resin.

Further, the side unit 2800F has a contact surface portion 2830 where the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other, and a non-contact surface portion 2831 provided in a part of the contact surface portion 2830 and not in contact with each other. ing.

The unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800F includes a first component 2811A attached from the front to the flat panel plate 1110 in which the obstruction nail of the game panel 1100 is implanted, and a second component 2811A attached from the rear to the first component 2811A. and a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820 . In this embodiment, the second component 2812A is attached to the front side of the first component 2811A. A support frame portion 2814 protrudes from the rear surface of the first component member 2811A.

A first constituent member 2811A of the unit main body 2810A includes a flat plate-like base plate 2811a that can contact the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the base plate 2811a that penetrates and opens forward to serve as a general winning opening. 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c), the game ball B received in the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) along the surface (board surface) of the ball passage 2811e, and the downstream end of the ball passage 2811e toward the rear and an open passageway outlet (not shown).

The first component member 2811A includes a plurality of positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a, a plurality of mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting to the game panel 1100, and a base plate 2811a. 2811a and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting the second component 2812A, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided on the rear surface for mounting the unit cover 2820. , (see FIG. 165).

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. Also, in the side unit 2800F, the ball passage 2811e of the first component member 2811A is provided below the center of the base plate 2811a in the vertical direction.

A plurality of positioning protrusions 2811c are provided spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, each positioning protrusion 2811c has the same length. A plurality of mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning projections 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A support frame portion 2814 whose rear end contacts the front end of the unit cover 2820 is provided on the rear side of the first component member 2811A. In other words, the first component member 2811A has a support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward in a frame shape along the outer peripheral edge of the unit cover 2820 and whose rear end surface contacts the front end surface of the unit cover 2820. . The support frame portion 2814 is provided on the rear surface of the base plate 2811a above the ball passage 2811e. The rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 abuts on the front end surface of a peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820, which will be described later, when assembled to the side unit 2800F. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The second component member 2812A extends short in the front-rear direction and is open at the top and bottom, and connects the front ends of the plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c forming the general winning opening 2001 and the front ends of the plurality of ball receiving portions 2812c. A flat plate-like front plate 2812d connected to the front plate 2812d and a ball provided below the ball receiving portion 2812c behind the front plate 2812d and opened rearward, through which the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 2812c circulates. It has a passage 2812f and a plurality of attachment holes (not shown) for attachment to the first component 2811A.

In this embodiment, a light-transmitting decorative seal 2803 is attached to the front surface of the front plate 2812d of the second component member 2812A.

In the unit body 2810A, the second component member 2812A is positioned in front of the first component member 2811A, and the mounting screw is screwed into the mounting hole of the second component member 2812A from behind through the mounting hole of the first component member 2811A. Assembled. As a result, a unit main body 2810A is constructed in which the second component 2812A is attached to the first component 2811A from the rear side. In this unit main body 2810A, the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812A protrudes forward from the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811A.

A unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800F joins the tributary portion 2801 (portion shown by light hatching in FIG. 172) communicating with the general prize winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) and the tributary portion 2801 to form a game panel. and a main stream portion 2802 extending along the surface (plate surface) of the panel plate 1110 in 1100 (the portion indicated by dark hatching in FIG. 172). The sphere passage 2811e and the sphere passage 2812f are composed of a plurality of branch flow portions 2801 and a main flow portion 2802. As shown in FIG.

The branch portion 2801 extends forward and downward from the panel plate 1110 at the ball receiving portion 2812c at the center in the left-right direction and the ball receiving portion 2812c at the left end thereof when viewed from the front. It extends rearward from a portion forward of the plate 1110 to a portion within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 .

The main flow portion 2802 extends from a portion below the ball receiving portion 2812c at the left end to a portion below the center ball receiving portion 2812c in the left-right direction in front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. , bends backward at a portion below the ball receiving portion 2812c in the center in the left-right direction, and after extending into the thickness of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 It extends along the plate surface of 1110 to a portion behind the ball receiving portion 2812c on the right end. The length of the main flow portion 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B (8 to 15 times in this embodiment).

When assembled into the unit main body 2810A, the forwardly open ball passage 2811e in the first component member 2811A is closed by the ball passage 2812f and the rear surface of the second component member 2812A. Also, the ball passage 2812f that is open rearward in the second component member 2812A is closed by the base plate 2811a and the ball passage 2811e of the first component member 2811A. As a result, the game ball B does not fall out of the ball passage 2811e and the ball passage 2812f. That is, the first component member 2811A and the second component member 2812A constitute the ball passage 2811e and the ball passage 2812f. In other words, a ball passage 2811e and a ball passage 2812f are provided between the first component 2811A and the second component 2812A.

As shown in FIG. 172, the first structural member 2811A of this embodiment is inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 except for the base plate 2811a, and the depth of the panel plate 1110 is the same as that of the panel plate 1110. It is formed to fit within the plate thickness of

A unit cover 2820 of the side unit 2800F is formed into a shallow container shape that opens forward, and an LED substrate 2825 is accommodated therein. The unit cover 2820 includes a flat plate-shaped cover portion 2820a, a frame-shaped peripheral wall portion 2820b projecting forward from the outer peripheral edge of the cover portion 2820a, and a notch portion 2820c recessed from the front end of a part of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. ,have. A plurality of slit holes for ventilation may be provided in the cover portion 2820a.

Further, the unit cover 2820 protrudes forward from the front surface of the cover portion 2820a shorter than the peripheral wall portion 2820b, and penetrates through the cover portion 2820a and a plurality of boss portions 2820d for attaching the LED substrate 2825 to the unit body 2810A. and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) through which mounting screws for mounting are inserted.

A cover portion 2820a of the unit cover 2820 is sized to cover the LED substrate 2825 from behind. The peripheral wall portion 2820b has the same outer shape as the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. The front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b contacts the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A by assembling the side unit 2800F. That is, the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b constitute the contact surface portion 2830. As shown in FIG.

The notch portions 2820c are provided on the upper side and the lower side of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. By assembling the cutout portion 2820c to the side unit 2800D, a gap can be formed between the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b and the front end surface of the support frame portion 2814 in the unit main body 2810A. That is, the notch portion 2820c forms a non-contact surface portion 2831 that is not in contact with each other in a portion of the contact surface portion 2830 that is configured by the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b. The notch 2820c allows ventilation inside the container-like unit cover 2820, and allows the heat from the LED substrate 2825 attached inside to be radiated to the outside. do not have.

The LED board 2825 of the side unit 2800F is attached inside the unit cover 2820 with its rear surface in contact with the front end of the boss 2820d of the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 2825a mounted on the LED board 2825 are full-color LEDs, and by assembling the side unit 2800F, the side unit 2800F can be decorated with various emission colors.

In the side unit 2800F, the LED board 2825 is attached to the boss portion 2820d inside the unit cover 2820, and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is attached to the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A. It can be assembled by abutting (contacting) the unit cover 2820 and screwing the mounting screws from the rear of the unit cover 2820 through the mounting holes of the unit cover 2820 into the mounting holes of the first component member 2811A of the unit main body 2810A.

To attach the side unit 2800F to the game panel 1100, first, from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A closes the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110. Then, the base plate 2811 a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . At this time, the two positioning projections 2811c of the first component member 2811A are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. In this state, the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811A is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG.

The side unit 2800F is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screws into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the mounting holes 2811d of the first component member 2811A. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811A is provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be firmly pushed toward the panel plate 1110 and inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and the positioning projection 2811c can be prevented from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

In the side unit 2800F, the first component member 2811A is provided with a ball passage 2811e that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110, and the cross section of the portion of the ball passage 2811e is U-shaped. Therefore, the presence of the ball passage 2811e increases the rigidity of the first component member 2811A. On the other hand, the second component member 2812A is also provided with a ball passage 2812f that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110. Since the cross section of the ball passage 2812f is U-shaped, The presence of the ball passage 2812f increases the rigidity of the second component 2812A. Since the side unit 2800F is constructed by combining the first component member 2811A and the second component member 2812A with increased rigidity, the rigidity can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when the side unit 2800F is pulled forward after removing the mounting screw that attaches the side unit 2800F to the panel plate 1110 in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the side unit 2800F is increased. , the side unit 2800F does not bend. For this reason, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800F (first component member 2811A) is not tilted with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is moved from the side unit 2800F. can be easily removed, and the pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the disassembly work for sorting can be provided.

When the side unit 2800F is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the ball passage 2811e and the unit cover 2820 (LED board 2825) of the first component member 2811A in the unit main body 2810A are connected to the panel plate. It is positioned within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and is positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . In other words, when assembled on the game board 5, the side unit 2800 does not protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and a wide space behind the panel plate 1110 can be secured.

In addition, in the side unit 2800F of the present embodiment, the cutouts 2820c (non-contact surface portions 2831) of the unit cover 2820 are provided at the top and bottom. , external air can be taken into the interior from the lower notch 2820c. In addition, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the outer circumference of the portion of the unit main body 2810A of the side unit 2800F inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, that is, the outer circumference of the support frame portion 2814 of the first component member 2811A and the inner periphery of the opening 1112, a gap is provided. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be easily released to the outside through the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831), and the heat can be efficiently released.

In addition, in the side unit 2800F of the present embodiment, when the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, the LED board 2825 is located behind the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). In other words, in plan view, the LED substrate 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch portion 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831). As a result, even if dust or dirt enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch portion 2820c, it is possible to prevent the LED board 2825 from being affected by the dust and dirt. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2820c.

Furthermore, when the side unit 2800F of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, the notch 2820c of the unit cover 2820 is positioned within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and within the thickness of the panel plate 1110. , it is difficult for dust and dirt to enter the unit cover 2820 from above through the notch 2820c.

In addition, when the side unit 2800F of the present embodiment is assembled on the game board 5, a gap is provided between the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. In addition, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 from the front. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 in the unit cover 2820 can be dissipated toward the rear of the panel plate 1110 through the gap between the notch 2820c and the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112, and the panel plate It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the game area 5 a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the panel plate 1110 .

Further, the side unit 2800F is assembled to the game board 5, and as shown in FIG. A passage 2812f is provided forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. - 特許庁As a result, the unit cover 2820 (LED substrate 2825) provided on the rear side of the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811A can be accommodated within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It is possible to prevent it from protruding rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . Therefore, a sufficient space behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in the side unit 2800F can be secured, and the desired size of the lower back effect unit 3500 (lower back movable decorative body 3510) can be provided. .

In the side unit 2800F, when the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001, the ball receiving portion 2812c forming the general winning opening 2001 flows downward into the ball passage 2812f, and the ball passage 2812f passes through the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Anteriorly, it flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110, bends backward in the middle in a crank shape, flows down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and then flows down a passage (not shown) The ball is transferred from the exit to the back ball guiding unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 . On the other hand, when the game ball B flowing down toward the side unit 2800F is not received by the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) of the side unit 2800F, the game ball B is transferred to the base plate 2811a and the front plate 2812d. It flows down to the out port 1008 through the space between and is discharged rearward and downward of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 .

In the side unit 2800F of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 172(b), the passage exit (not shown) of the first component member 2811A in the unit main body 2810A is provided below the underside movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. ing. In other words, the general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving portion 2812c) is provided below the movable ornament 3510 at the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800F, the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 and the like do not interfere with the movable decorative body 3510 under the back.

According to the side unit 2800F of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the side unit 2800 and the like.

In the above-described side unit 2800F, the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 is provided with the notch portion 2820c (the non-contact surface portion 2831). A notch portion (non-contact surface portion 2831) cut forward from the rear end may be provided in the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A without providing the notch portion 2820c in 2820b. Alternatively, both the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 and the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A may be provided with notches (non-contact surface portions).

In addition, in the side unit 2800F described above, the unit body 2810A is provided with the frame-shaped support frame portion 2814 projecting rearward, and the rear end surface is the contact surface portion 2830. However, the side unit 2800F is not limited to this. The front end of the unit cover 2820 (peripheral wall portion 2820b) may contact the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A without providing the support frame portion 2814 on the main body 2810A, and the contact surface portion 2830 may be used as the contact surface portion. Since the support frame portion 2814 that protrudes rearward is not provided, the amount of rearward projection of the side unit 2800F can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the above side unit 2800F, the LED board 2825 is attached to the unit cover 2820, but this is not a limitation, and the LED board 2825 is mounted behind the unit main body 2810A (first component member 2811A). It may be attached to the side.

Further, in the side unit 2800F described above, a diffusing lens portion composed of a plurality of uneven surfaces for diffusing the light from the LEDs 2825a may be provided in front of the LED substrate 2825. FIG. This diffuser lens portion may be provided on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A (the first component member 2811A), or may be provided on a separate member from the unit main body 2810A.

Furthermore, in the above-described side unit 2800F, the ball passage 2811e, which is composed of a plurality of branch portions 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving portions 2812c and a main flow portion 2802 where the plurality of branch portions 2801 join, Although shown as having one, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2811e may be independent for each ball receiving portion 2812c.

Further, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively. By the way, if the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) is made transparent, the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED substrate 2825 enters the panel plate 1110 through the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate There is a risk that the light will diffuse within 1110 and reduce the amount of light emitted forward, weakening the presentation effect of light emission. On the other hand, by making the game panel 1100 wooden (opaque), the light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the inside of the game panel 1100 from the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112. Since the light can be reflected by the inner peripheral surface of 1112, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to sufficiently exhibit the presentation effect of light emission.

[13-3. Side unit, etc. of the third embodiment]
Next, the side unit 2800G of the third embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 173 and 175 and the like. FIG. 173(a) is a front view showing a main part of a game board provided with a side unit and the like of the third embodiment, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the out port in (a). , and (c) is an explanatory diagram showing (b) in a longitudinal section. FIG. 174(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an enlarged view of an out port portion of a game board provided with a side unit having a finger hook portion of a form different from that of FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing a vertical cross section of FIG. FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the panel plate of the game panel in which the opening to which the side unit is attached and the out port are continuously connected. Here, the same components as those described above are assigned the same reference numerals.

The side unit 2800G of the third embodiment extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting unit 2100 in the game area 5a where the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 160. It is attached to the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) from the front. The side unit 2800G is provided with three general prize winning openings 2001 which are open to receive game balls B at all times.

In this embodiment, the game panel 1100 has an opening region 1101 penetrating the panel plate 1110 through which the game ball B can flow from the front side to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 . This opening area 1101 consists of a normal opening area 1102 through which game balls B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2800G can circulate, and a specific opening area through which game balls B not received in the general winning opening 2001 can circulate. 1103 and . The normal opening area 1102 is the opening 1112 at the site where the side unit 2800G is attached, and the specific opening area 1103 is the out port 1008. As shown in FIG. This out port 1008 is formed in the shape of a notch that opens downward in the panel plate 1110 .

In the embodiment of FIG. 173 and FIG. 174, which will be described later, the normal opening region 1102 and the specific opening region 1103 that constitute the opening region 1101 are independent without being connected to each other. That is, the specific opening area 1103 is formed on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 separately from the normal opening area 1102 . In other words, the out port 1008 is constituted by a specific opening area 1103 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, separate from the normal opening area 1102 to which the side unit 2800G is fitted. As a result, in the panel plate 1110, it is possible to reduce the width of the portion of the panel plate 1110 that is notched outward from the outer peripheral surface. can be suppressed.

The side unit 2800G has a finger hook portion 2816 that partially overlaps the outer edge of the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103) passing through the panel plate 1110 when attached to the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG. In other words, the side unit 2800G is attached to the panel plate 1110 so that part of the outer edge overlaps with the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103).

Since the side unit 2800G is provided with the finger hooking portion 2816, when the pachinko machine 1 is disassembled for recycling or the like, a finger or a finger can be placed in the out port 1008 after the mounting screws that attach the side unit 2800G to the panel plate 1110 are removed. By inserting a tool or the like, a finger or the like can be hooked on the finger hook portion 2816 to pull the side unit 2800G forward. As a result, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced.

To further explain the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, the side unit 2800G, like the side unit 2800 shown in FIG. It is composed of a first component member 2811 to be attached and a second component member 2812 attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side. The side unit 2800 of this embodiment has a second component member 2812 attached to the rear side of the first component member 2811 .

The first constituent member 2811 of the side unit 2800G includes a flat base plate 2811a that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and a base plate 2811a that protrudes forward and is open upward and rearward. and a plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b forming the general prize winning opening 2001.

The base plate 2811a extends along the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 173, the right end of the base plate 2811a of the present embodiment extends further to the right than the ball receiving portion 2811b at the right end so as to approach the starting port unit 2100. As shown in FIG. The base plate 2811a is provided so that a part of the outer edge overlaps with the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103). In other words, when attached to the panel plate 1110, a portion of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a is formed to protrude forward of the out port 1008 so as to overlap the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103) in a front view. ing. In this embodiment, the portion of the base plate 2811a that protrudes forward of the out port 1008 is the finger hook portion 2816 .

The outer edge of the base plate 2811a is inclined such that the front surface moves rearward toward the edge of the outer edge. Therefore, the portion of the out port 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811 a , that is, the front end surface of the finger hook portion 2816 is inclined toward the out port 1008 .

The three ball receiving portions 2811b are provided so as to be spaced apart from each other in the left and right directions, and are provided such that the right ball receiving portion 2811b is positioned downward. The ball receiving portion 2811b at the left end is formed such that the front end surface is parallel to the base plate 2811a to the lower end. The remaining (central and right end) ball receiving portions 2811b are inclined such that the front end faces move rearward toward the lower ends.

In addition, the first component member 2811 includes two positioning projections 2811c projecting rearward from the base plate 2811a and a plurality of (three in this case) mounting members penetrating the base plate 2811a for mounting on the game panel 1100. It has a hole 2811d and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) provided in the rear end surface of the ball receiving portion 2811b (base plate 2811a) for mounting the second component member 2812 thereon.

The two positioning protrusions 2811c are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate 2811a. Here, two positioning projections 2811c are provided at a portion near the out port 1008 and a portion far from the out port 1008. As shown in FIG. The positioning protrusion 2811c is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 provided in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the two positioning protrusions 2811c have the same length.

The three mounting holes 2811d are provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c in the base plate 2811a and in the upper part of the base plate 2811a near the center in the left-right direction. These mounting holes 2811d are countersunk on the front side, and countersunk head mounting screws (not shown) screwed into the mounting holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are inserted from the front. When attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the head of the mounting screw does not protrude forward beyond the front surface of the base plate 2811a.

A mounting screw inserted through a mounting hole (not shown) of a second component member 2812, which will be described later, is screwed into the mounting hole.

The second component member 2812 is formed in the shape of a container that opens forward, and the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is placed on the surface (plate) of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). surface), a passage outlet 2812b that opens rearward at the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a, and a plurality of mounting holes (not shown) for mounting to the first component member 2811. ) and

The second component member 2812 of this embodiment is inserted (inserted) into the opening 1112 (ordinary opening region 1102) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the depth is within the thickness of the panel plate 1110. is formed in

The ball passage 2812a of the second component member 2812 is formed along the inner rail 1002 of the front component member 1000 and along the surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to become lower toward the right. The passage outlet 2812b opens rearward at the right end of the second component 2812, which is the downstream end of the ball passage 2812a.

The attachment hole of the second component member 2812 is provided at a portion corresponding to the attachment hole of the first component member 2811 . The second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side by inserting the attachment screw from the rear into the attachment hole of the second component member 2812 and screwing it into the mounting hole of the first component member 2811. be done.

The side unit 2800G of this embodiment includes a branch portion 2801 that communicates with the general winning port 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b), and a surface (board surface) of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 that merges with the branch portion 2801. and a main stream portion 2802 extending along. The sphere passage 2812 a is composed of a plurality of tributary portions 2801 and a main flow portion 2802 .

The branch portion 2801 extends rearward from a portion forward of the front surface of the panel plate 1110 to a portion behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and above the main flow portion 2802 (thickness of the panel plate 1110). .

The main stream portion 2802 extends along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and extends from near the left end of the base plate 2811a to near the right end so as to be lower rightward. The length of the main flow portion 2802 is at least twice the diameter of the game ball B (8 to 10 times in this embodiment).

In the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, the second component member 2812 is positioned behind the first component member 2811, and the mounting screws are inserted from the rear of the second component member 2812 through the mounting holes of the second component member 2812. It is assembled by screwing it into the attachment hole of 2811 . As a result, a side unit 2800G is constructed in which the second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811 from the rear side.

The ball passage 2812a of the second component member 2812 is open forward, but when the first component member 2811 is attached to the front side, the front end side of the ball passage 2812a is closed by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811. In this state, the game ball B does not fall forward from the ball passage 2812a. That is, the first component member 2811 and the second component member 2812 constitute the ball passage 2812a. In other words, a ball passage 2812a is provided between the first component 2811 and the second component 2812. As shown in FIG.

This side unit 2800G closes the opening 1112 (ordinary opening region 1102 of the opening region 1101) through which the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 penetrates the panel plate 1110 from the front of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The base plate 2811a is brought into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 so as to do so. At this time, the two positioning protrusions 2811 c of the first component member 2811 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 . In this state, the mounting hole 2811 d of the first component member 2811 is aligned with the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 .

Then, the side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screw into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 from the front through the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 and tightening. At this time, since the mounting hole 2811d of the first component member 2811 is provided in the vicinity of the positioning projection 2811c, the mounting screw can be screwed into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting hole 2811d. Therefore, the positioning projection 2811c can be firmly pushed toward the panel plate 1110 and inserted into the positioning hole 1113, and the positioning projection 2811c can be prevented from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

When the side unit 2800G of this embodiment is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 (the game board 5 is assembled), the finger hook portion 2816 of the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 is out. It protrudes forward from the mouth 1008 (the specific opening area 1103 of the opening area 1101).

In addition, when the side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 (the game board 5 is assembled), the second component member 2812 is positioned within the thickness of the panel plate 1110 within the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and positioned forward of the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 . In other words, when assembled on the game board 5, the side unit 2800G does not protrude rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110, and a wide space behind the panel plate 1110 can be secured.

In the side unit 2800G, when the game ball B is received in the general winning hole 2001, it is guided to the ball passage 2812a behind the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by the ball receiving portion 2811b forming the general winning hole 2001, and the ball passes. After flowing down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 by 2812a, it is transferred to the back ball guide unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 provided behind from the passage exit 2812b. The game ball B delivered to the back ball guidance unit 3100 is discharged downward after being detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 .

In this embodiment, although detailed illustration is omitted, the passage outlet 2812b of the second component member 2812 is provided below the underside movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. In other words, the general winning hole sensor 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning hole 2001 (ball receiving portion 2811b) is provided below the movable decorative body 3510 at the standby position. Therefore, the side unit 2800G, the general prize winning opening sensor 3001 and the like do not interfere with the movable decorative body 3510 under the back.

According to the side unit 2800G of this embodiment, it is possible to achieve the same effects as those of the side unit 2800 and the like.

According to the side unit 2800G of the present embodiment, the second component member 2812 is provided with the ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the cross section of the portion of the ball passage 2812a is U-shaped, the rigidity of the second component member 2812 can be increased due to the presence of the ball passage 2812a. Since the side unit 2800G is formed by attaching the second component member 2812 having increased rigidity from the rear side of the first component member 2811, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. can be done. Therefore, when the side unit 2800G is pulled forward after removing the mounting screw that attaches the side unit 2800G to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 increases. The side unit 2800 does not bend because it is held. As a result, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the side unit 2800G (first component member 2811) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110). It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be removed and that can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

Further, according to the side unit 2800G of the present embodiment, since the finger hooking portion 2816 overlapping the out port 1008 of the panel plate 1110 is provided on a part of the outer edge, the side unit 2800G can be easily disassembled for recycling or the like. By inserting a finger, a tool, or the like into the out port 1008 in a state in which the mounting screw that attaches the unit 2800G to the panel plate 1110 is removed, the finger or the like can be hooked on the finger hook portion 2816 to pull the side unit 2800G forward. can be done. As a result, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced.

Further, in the side unit 2800G of the present embodiment, the finger hooking portion 2816 is provided so as to overlap with the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103), and the out port 1008 has a size of two or more game balls B. Therefore, the operator's finger or the like can be easily inserted into the outlet 1008 and the finger or the like can be easily hooked on the finger hooking portion 2816 .

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800G, since the finger hook portion 2816 of the base plate 2811a is projected forward of the out port 1008 so as to overlap the out port 1008, the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a passes through the out port 1008. When discharged, the game ball B flowing down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 from above the out port 1008 licks the corner of the front end of the out port 1008 and enters the out port 1008 or enters the out port. It is possible to prevent the game ball B rebounded upward in the out guide portion 1003 in front of the out port 1008 from coming into contact with the corner of the front end of the out port 1008 . That is, the finger hook 2816 can protect the game ball B from coming into contact with the front corner of the out port 1008 on the panel plate 1110 . This can prevent the front end of the out port 1008 from being chipped.

Further, in the side unit 2800G, since the front surface of the finger hook portion 2816 on the base plate 2811a is inclined toward the out port 1008, the outer edge has an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the disassembling work of the pachinko machine 1, the finger hooking portion 2816 (finger hooking portion) overlapping the out port 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G 2817), even if the operator's finger or the like touches the corner of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, the corner is obtuse, compared with the case where the corner is right. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to damage a finger or the like, and the side unit 2800G can be safely removed with a finger or the like.

In addition, in the side unit 2800G, since the front surface of the finger hook portion 2816 on the base plate 2811a is inclined toward the out port 1008, the game ball B flowing down to the out port 1008 along the front surface of the base plate 2811a can be smoothly moved. can be guided to the out port 1008 immediately, and the game ball B can be suppressed from being stagnated near the out port 1008.例文帳に追加Further, since the front surface of the finger hooking portion 2816 is inclined, the angle of the front end of the finger hooking portion 2816 is obtuse.

Also, in the side unit 2800G, by assembling it to the game board 5, the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front. Foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from entering the game area 5a on the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the side.

By the way, since the side unit 2800G is provided with two positioning protrusions 2811c and each is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, when the side unit 2800G is removed from the panel plate 1110 in the disassembly work, In addition, if the two positioning projections 2811c are to be pulled out from the positioning hole 1113 at the same time, it is necessary to pull the side unit 2800G forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the positioning protrusions 2811c are provided at a portion close to the outlet 1008 and a portion far from the outlet 1008, when the pachinko machine 1 is disassembled for recycling or the like, the panel of the game panel 1100 can be disassembled. When removing the side unit 2800G from the plate 1110, the worker's finger or the like is hooked on the finger hook portion 2816 overlapping the out port 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800, and the out port is pulled forward. A strong pullout force can be applied to the positioning projection 2811c near 1008 . As a result, in the disassembly work, of the two positioning projections 2811c, the positioning projection 2811c closer to the out port 1008 can be pulled out from the positioning hole 1113 first, and then the remaining positions farther from the out port 1008 can be pulled out. Since the positioning projection 2811c can be pulled out from the positioning hole 1113, it can be pulled out with a weaker force than when pulling out two positioning projections 2811c at the same time.

In the above-described side unit 2800G, the finger hooking portion 2816 has a flat plate shape along the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. However, it is not limited to this, and has a form as shown in FIG. may be used as the finger hooking portion 2817.

When the side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the finger hook portion 2817 overlaps with the out port 1008 passing through the panel plate 1110 in a front view, and extends along the inner surface of the out port 1008. It extends rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 . This finger hook portion 2817 is provided on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 of the side unit 2800G. Further, the front surface of the finger hook portion 2817 is inclined toward the out port 1008 .

In the embodiment of FIG. 174, the depth of the finger hook portion 2817 overlapping the out port 1008 (specific opening region 1103) at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is increased, and the finger hook portion 2817 is inserted into the out port 1008. The part has a certain thickness. Therefore, the size of the out port 1008 becomes smaller due to the thickness of the finger hooking portion 2817 (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B becomes smaller), but in this embodiment, the thickness of the finger hooking portion 2817 is taken into consideration. , the size of the out port 1008 is widened (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B is increased). As a result, the game ball B can be ejected from the out port 1008 without delay.

According to this finger hooking portion 2817, it is possible to obtain the same effects as the finger hooking portion 2816 described above. Therefore, in disassembly work of the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, with the attachment screw attaching the side unit 2800G to the panel plate 1110 removed, by inserting a finger or a tool into the outlet 1008, the finger hook portion can be removed. A finger or the like can be hooked on 2817 to pull the side unit 2800G forward. As a result, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced.

In addition, since the finger hook portion 2817 protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 along the inner surface of the out port 1008 , the finger hook portion 2817 can protect the inner surface of the out port 1008 . Also, when using the wooden game panel 1100, the inner surface of the out port 1008 where the wooden part is exposed can be hidden by the finger hook part 2817, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) can be improved.

Further, in the above embodiment, the side unit 2800G is provided with the finger hooking portion 2816 and the finger hooking portion 2817. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The starting port unit 2100 and the attacker unit 2400 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 may be provided with a finger hooking portion 2816 and a finger hooking portion 2817 whose outer edge partially overlaps the out port 1008 .

More specifically, the starting port unit 2100 has a flat base plate 2103 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a finger hook portion 2816 and a A finger hook 2817 is provided. Although illustration is omitted, the starting port unit 2100 has a plurality of positioning projections that protrude rearward from the base plate 2103 and are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 .

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a flat base plate 2431 that abuts on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and a finger hook portion 2816 or a finger hook portion 2817 are provided. Although not shown, the attacker unit 2400 has a plurality of positioning projections that protrude backward from the base plate 2431 and are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 .

These starting port unit 2100 and attacker unit 2400 can also provide the same effects as the side unit 2800G described above.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the opening 1112 closed by the side unit 2800G and the out port 1008 are not connected and are provided separately. However, the opening 1112 and the out port 1008 may be continuously connected as shown in FIG. 175 . In other words, the panel plate 1110 may have an opening area 1101 in which the normal opening area 1102 closed by the side unit 2800G and the specific opening area 1103 forming the out port 1008 are connected. In other words, the out port 1008 is formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 so as to continue from the normal opening area 1102 to which the side unit 2800G is fitted, but is formed by the specific opening area 1103 to which the side unit 2800G is not fitted. You may make it be comprised.

Also according to the embodiment of FIG. 175, in the side unit 2800G, a finger hooking portion 2816 is provided so that a portion of the base plate 2811a overlaps with the out port 1008 (the specific opening region 1103), and the same effect as above is achieved. In addition, since the specific opening area 1103 is formed on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 so as to be continuous from the normal opening area 1102, a cutting tool such as an end mill is not used for the panel plate 1110. When forming the normal opening region 1102 and the specific opening region 1103 by cutting the normal opening region 1102 and the specific opening region 1103 continuously, the cost of the panel plate 1110 can be reduced.

In the above embodiment, the base plate 2811a (base plate 2103, base plate 2431) in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided with the finger hook portion 2816 (finger hook portion 2817) overlapping the out port 1008. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a finger hook portion is provided on a portion separated in the front-rear direction from the plate surface of the panel plate 1110 (for example, the front plate 2812d separated forward from the panel plate 1110). 2816 (finger hooking portion 2817) may be provided.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the game panel 1100 is provided with a panel plate 1110 made of transparent resin. As a result, by making the game panel 1100 of wood, the thickness of the game panel 1100 becomes thicker than that of a resin one, so that the inside of the thickness of the game panel 1100 can be used more effectively.

In addition, in the side unit 2800G, the ball passage 2812a, which is composed of a plurality of branch flow portions 2801 communicating with the respective ball receiving portions 2812c and a main flow portion 2802 where the plurality of branch flow portions 2801 join, Although shown as having one, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball passage 2812a may be independent for each ball receiving portion 2811b.

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800G described above, the ball sensor for detecting the game ball B received in the ball receiving portion 2811b is not provided, but the side unit 2800G is not limited to this, and a ball sensor is provided. Also good. When the side unit 2800G is provided with a ball sensor, it is desirable to provide the ball sensor within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, or to provide the ball sensor below the rear effect device (lower back effect unit 3500). .

In the above side unit 2800G, the LED board is not provided on the rear side. When the side unit 2800G is provided with an LED board, a unit cover is provided which covers the LED board from the rear and whose front end face abuts the rear surface of the side unit 2800G (second component member 2812), and the unit cover and the side unit contact each other. It is desirable to provide non-contact surface portions that are not in contact with each other on the contact surface portions that are in contact with each other. As a result, the side unit 2800G can be decorated with light using the LEDs of the LED substrate, and the heat from the LEDs can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion.

In the above-described embodiment, the side units 2800 (side unit 2800A, side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, side unit 2800D, side unit 2800E, side unit 2800D, side unit 2800E, side unit 2800F, side unit 2800G), but is not limited to this, starting unit 2100, attacker unit 2400 (attacker unit 2730), normal winning unit 2600, second starting unit 2720, accessories The thickness of the panel plate 1110 may be effectively used in the prize winning unit 2740 and the like.

[13-4. Regarding the relationship between the LED board and the non-contact surface part in the side unit]
Next, the relationship between the LED board 2825 and the non-contact surface portion 2831 in the side units 2800B to 2800F provided with the LED board 2825 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 176 and the like. FIG. 176(a) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the LED substrate, and (b) is a different form from (a) in which the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the LED substrate. (c) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided so as to cover the LED substrate, and (d) is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which the non-contact surface portion is provided over the entire circumference of the unit cover. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing an example in which a 176(a) and (c) show the side unit 2800B of FIG. 168 as an example, and FIGS. 176(c) and (d) show the side unit 2800D of FIG. 170 as an example. Here, the same components as those described above are assigned the same reference numerals.

In the LED board 2825 shown in FIGS. 168 to 172, a resistor for limiting the current driving the mounted LED 2825a is mounted on another board. Therefore, in the LED board 2825, the amount of heat generated by the LED 2825a is the largest. That is, in the LED substrate 2825, much heat is emitted from the front side on which the LEDs 2825a are mounted. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 168 to 172, a non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided near the front surface of the LED substrate 2825 where the amount of heat generated is large. As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be quickly radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c), and the heat will not stay inside the unit cover 2820.

In the above embodiment, the resistor (current limiting resistor) is mounted on a different board than the LED board 2825, but this is not a limitation, and the resistor is mounted on the LED board. H.2825 may be implemented. For example, the resistor may be mounted on the same surface of the LED substrate 2825 as the LED 2825a is mounted. In this case, as in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 168 to 172, a non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided on the side of the LED substrate 2825 near the surface (here, the front surface) on which the LEDs 2825a and resistors are mounted. should be set.

When the LEDs 2825a and the resistors are mounted on the same surface of the LED substrate 2825, it is desirable that the LEDs 2825a and the resistors do not overlap in the vertical direction. This can prevent the heat emitted from the LED 2825a and the resistor from affecting each other.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176, on the LED board 2825, the LED 2825a and the resistor 2825b for limiting the current supplied to the LED 2825a may be mounted on different surfaces. In other words, the resistor 2825b is mounted on the surface of the LED substrate 2825 opposite to the surface on which the LEDs 2825a are mounted. In this case, since the resistor 2825b is larger in heat quantity than the LED 2825a, as shown in FIG. A non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) may be provided.

More specifically, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 176(a), the unit cover 2820 is arranged so that the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is located on the side closer to the resistor 2825b mounted on the rear surface of the LED 2825a. The boss portion 2820 d protrudes forward and the LED board 2825 is positioned within the frame of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810 . As a result, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be quickly radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c), and the heat will not stay inside the unit cover 2820.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 176(a), the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch 2820c (non-contact surface portion 2831) in plan view. Even if dust or dirt enters the LED board 2825, the influence of the dust or dirt can be prevented as much as possible. In addition, since the notch 2820c is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2820c can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2820c.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 176(a), the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided on the unit cover 2820 side. It may be provided on the frame portion 2814 ) side, or may be provided on both the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 .

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 176(b), a plurality of bosses 2814a projecting rearward from a portion within the frame of the support frame 2814 on the rear surface of the unit main body 2810 to which the LED boards 2825 are attached, and a frame-shaped support frame. and a cutout portion 2814b that is cut forward from the rear end surface of the portion 2814 . In this embodiment, the unit cover 2820 has only a flat cover portion 2820a, but may have a peripheral wall portion 2820b as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 176(b), the LED 2825a is mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825, and the resistor 2825b is mounted on the rear surface. , the notch portion 2814b is located behind the rear surface of the LED substrate 2825. As shown in FIG. In other words, the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b) is provided on the side of the LED substrate 2825 near the surface (here, the rear surface) on which the resistor 2825b is mounted. As a result, heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be quickly dissipated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b), and the heat will not stay inside the unit cover 2820.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 176(b), the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the notch 2814b (non-contact surface portion 2831) in plan view. Even if dust or dirt enters the LED board 2825, the influence of the dust or dirt can be prevented as much as possible. In addition, since the notch 2814b is also provided on the lower side of the unit cover 2820, dust entering through the upper notch 2814b can be discharged downward through the lower notch 2814b.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 176(b), the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b) is provided on the unit main body 2810 (support frame portion 2814) side, but the present invention is not limited to this. , may be provided on the unit cover 2820 side, or may be provided on both the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 .

In addition, in the above embodiment, the LED substrate 2825 does not overlap the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2814b, notch portion 2820c) in plan view. As shown in FIG. 176(c), the LED board 2825 may overlap the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c). More specifically, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 176(c), the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 attached to the support frame portion 2814 are connected to the opening of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100. 1112 , it is provided so as to be located within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 . That is, the space formed by the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820 and in which the LED substrate 2825 is accommodated is provided within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 . As a result, even if the LED substrate 2825 and the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) are provided so as to overlap each other, the notch portion 2820c is located within the thickness of the opening portion 1112 of the panel plate 1110. It is possible to reduce the possibility that foreign matter such as dust outside the 1110 enters the opening 1112 and further enters the unit cover 2820 through the notch 2820c. Foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from getting on the LED substrate 2825, and the influence of dust can be prevented as much as possible.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 176(c), since the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) is provided so as to cover the LED substrate 2825, heat from the LED 2825a mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 2825 and Heat from the resistor 2825b mounted on the rear surface can be efficiently radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831, and the heat does not stay inside the unit cover 2820.

Although FIG. 176(c) shows that the LED 2825a and the resistor 2825b are mounted on different surfaces with respect to the LED substrate 2825, the LED 2825a and the resistor 2825b are not limited to this. may be provided on the same surface of the LED substrate 2825.

Also, FIG. 176(c) shows that the unit cover 2820 is provided with the notch portion 2820c as the non-contact surface portion 2831; 2814) side, or may be provided on both the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820. FIG.

In the embodiment of FIG. 176(c), part of the LED board 2825 is inserted into the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) between the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A and the unit cover 2820. Alternatively, it may protrude outward as long as it does not block the opening of the non-contact surface portion 2831 . By entering the LED substrate 2825 into the non-contact surface portion 2831 or protruding outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831, the LED substrate 2825 is exposed to the outside air, and the heat radiation effect can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the contact surface portion 2830 between the unit main body 2810A (support frame portion 2814) and the unit cover 2820 is partially provided with the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c). 176(d), the non-contact surface portion 2831 may be provided over the entire circumference of the unit cover 2820. As shown in FIG. In other words, a gap is provided over the entire circumference between the rear end surface of the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A and the front end surface of the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820 . In this embodiment, the unit cover 2820 is attached to a boss 2814a projecting rearward from the rear surface of the unit main body 2810A.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 176(d), part of the LED board 2825 is placed in the non-contact surface portion 2831 (gap) between the support frame portion 2814 of the unit main body 2810A and the peripheral wall portion 2820b of the unit cover 2820. They are letting it in and jumping out. Even in this case, the LED substrate 2825 does not block the opening of the non-contact surface portion 2831 . According to this embodiment, the LED substrate 2825 can be exposed to the outside air more easily, and the heat radiation effect can be further enhanced. In addition, from the viewpoint of preventing entry of foreign matter such as dust and dirt, the usefulness of using the opening of the non-contact surface portion 2831 increases.

Although not shown, the LED board 2825 prevents solder from adhering to unnecessary parts when mounting electronic components on at least the board surface where the LED 2825a is mounted, and protects the circuit pattern from oxidation and insulation protection. A light-colored (for example, white) solder resist is used as the solder resist applied for . As a result, light from the LEDs 2825a and the like is reflected by the bright-colored solder resist, so that the luminous efficiency can be improved. Alternatively, when a full-color LED is used as the LED 2825a, the white solder resist allows the user to tune in to the viewer's sense of color with respect to the various colors of emitted light, thereby making it possible to present a natural light-emitting decoration.

On this LED board 2825, information (characters and symbols) such as the part number and mounting position of the electronic component to be mounted, the name, mounting position, mounting direction, etc. of the LED board 2825 is printed in a similar color (for example, , yellow) and applied by printing (eg, silkscreening).

By the way, electronic components such as resistors and LED drivers mounted on LED boards are often molded with black resin in their packages. Even when the LEDs are turned off, the electronic components stand out, and there is a risk of affecting the appearance of the gaming machine. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 176, since the resistor 2825b is mounted on the rear surface of the LED board 2825, the resistor 2825b can be hidden from the player and the appearance of the gaming machine can be improved. can.

Also, in the embodiment shown in FIGS. 168 to 172, when the resistor 2825b is mounted on the front surface of the LED board 2825, it is desirable that the resistor 2825b is inconspicuous from the player. In the present embodiment, since the decorative seal 2803 having predetermined decoration and translucency is provided in front of the LED substrate 2825, the decorative seal 2803 can make the resistor 2825b inconspicuous.

Alternatively, when the resistor 2825b is mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 2825, the resistor 2825b may be made inconspicuous by providing a plate-like or sheet-like diffusion lens for diffusing light in front of the LED substrate 2825. good. In addition, in front of the LED substrate 2825, a plate-like or sheet-like decorative body designed to be partially opaque is provided, and the design of the decorative body hides the resistor 2825b so that it is not noticeable. Also good. Also, the resistor 2825b mounted on the front surface of the LED substrate 2825 may be colored with bright paint or ink. These decorative seal 2803, diffuser lens, decorative body, and the like may be used in combination as appropriate.

As the game panel 1100, there are wooden ones that do not have translucency and ones made of resin that have translucency. Although light is blocked, if the opening 1112 is made of a transparent resin having translucency, even if the opening 1112 has the same tunnel shape, the outside can be seen through. If the configuration of (1) is used together, the effects as described above can be exhibited in utilizing the thickness of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110).

[14. Summary of the present invention]
[14-1. Relationship between the present invention and the embodiment]
The first count button switch 180 in this embodiment corresponds to the checkout switch of the above solution.

Further, the shelf unit 200 itself and the shelf part 201 (including the design part) of the shelf unit 200 to which the first counting button switch 180 is attached in the present embodiment correspond to the unit of the above solution means.

[14-2. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, when the first counting button switch 180 operated by the player is broken, the first counting button switch 180 can be replaced in unit units.

As a result, even if an unexpected situation occurs in the first counting button switch 180, it is possible to operate a new first counting button switch 180 to settle the account.

By the way, it is conceivable that the design portion of the shelf unit 200 may be damaged by hitting the shelf unit 200 too hard in spite of being too hot in the game.

Even in such a situation, the entire shelf unit 200 can be replaced.

Further, only the shelf portion 201 of the shelf unit 200 may be replaceable together with the design portion. It may be configured separately from the part (140) and individually replaceable together with the design part.

Depending on the degree of damage, the shelf part 201 and the design part can be replaced together, or the first counting button switch part (180) and the design part can be replaced together.

[15. Regarding another feature included in this embodiment]
[15-1. First technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-1a. Background of the first technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a main body frame detachably supporting a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls, and a main body frame are provided so as to be openable and closable. A door frame that allows the game area to be visually recognized from the front, and a ball shooting unit that is detachably provided to the front below the game board in the main body frame and shoots game balls to the game area. have been proposed (for example, Patent Document A1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-186935). According to the technique of Patent Document A1, by removing the ball shooting unit forward while the door frame is open with respect to the body frame, the member provided behind through the part where the ball shooting unit was attached is removed. It is possible to confirm.

By the way, as in Patent Document A1, when a detachable unit such as a ball shooting unit is provided on the front surface of the main body frame, if the detachable unit is detached during a game, the game will be interrupted and the player's interest will be reduced. Therefore, it is conceivable to provide locking means to prevent the detachable unit from coming off.

However, when the lock means is provided, if the door frame is closed while the lock means is incompletely locked, the detachable unit may come off or the lock means may be damaged by the door frame.

Therefore, in view of the above situation, the following means prevent the locking means from being damaged or the removable unit from coming off even if the door frame is closed in a state in which the locking means for locking the removable unit is incomplete. An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of

[15-1b. Means for solving the first technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A body frame that detachably supports from the front a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls,
a door frame that can be opened and closed from the front with respect to the body frame and that allows the game area to be viewed from the front;
a ball launching means provided in the body frame and capable of supplying game balls to the game area;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The body frame is
A detachable unit that is detachable from the front, and locking means that is movable between a lock position that disables detachment of the attached detachable unit and a release position that unlocks the lock. and
The door frame is
It has a protrusion that protrudes toward the main body frame and lifts the door frame by closing the door frame with respect to the main body frame and moves the lock means to the lock position.
It is characterized by

Here, the ``detachable unit'' includes ``a ball polishing cassette having a polishing cloth for polishing a game ball'', ``ball shooting means for shooting a game ball into a game area'', and ``shot by a ball shooting means''. A foul unit that collects game balls that have not been hit into the game area even though they have been hit", and a "ball receiving tray that stores game balls that have been ejected from the ball circulation means".

Further, as the "locking means", it is defined as "a lock that is rotatably supported at one end and rotates from the unlocked position to the locked position by abutting the projection on the other end on the opposite side. having a piece”, “having a pressing piece that pushes the detachable unit backward when it moves from the release position to the locking position due to the contact of the projection”, “the contact of the projection” having a lock pin that is inserted into the detachable unit from a direction that intersects the front-rear direction when it moves from the unlocked position to the locked position by means of "that slides from the unlocked position to the locked position by coming into contact with it", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 1, a main body frame detachably supports a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls from the front, and a main body frame is provided so as to be openable and closable from the front, and a game board is provided to the main frame. A door frame which makes the area visible from the front, a ball shooting means which is provided in the body frame and can supply the game balls to the game area, and recovers the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and shoots the balls again. a ball circulation means for supplying the means, wherein the ball shooting means shoots game balls based on the data of the player's ball possession, wherein the body frame comprises: A detachable unit that is detachable from the front, and locking means that is movable between a lock position that disables detachment of the attached detachable unit and a release position that unlocks the lock. The door frame has a protrusion that protrudes toward the body frame and lifts the door frame by closing the door frame with respect to the body frame and moves the lock means to the lock position ([Invention Embodiment], the protrusion 102 of the door frame main body 100, the chapter [4-5. Sphere lifting unit], see the description of FIG.

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the balls are collected based on the ball holding data of the player. In a game machine (a so-called enclosed type game machine, a managed game machine) in which game balls are shot from a shooting means, when the lock means is set to the lock position with the detachable unit attached to the body frame, the detachable unit Since the detachable unit can be made unremovable, it is possible to prevent the detachable unit from being detached due to some reason such as vibration during the game, and to prevent interruption of the game due to detachment of the detachable unit. It can be avoided, and the decline in the interest of the player can be suppressed. Further, when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame supporting the game board and the lock means is moved from the lock position to the release position, the detachable unit provided on the body frame can be removed forward. Therefore, by removing the detachable unit, it becomes possible to check the members provided behind it, and it is possible to improve the workability of the maintenance of the gaming machine. When the door frame is closed to the main body frame, even if the locking means is not in the locking position, the projection of the door frame can move the locking means to the locking position. It is possible to prevent the user from forgetting and to prevent the detachable unit from coming off during a game, and the lock means and the detachable unit are not damaged by contact with the door frame.

In addition, when the door frame is closed with respect to the main body frame, the door frame is lifted by the protruding part of the door frame. As a result, the hinge can be made difficult to be distorted, and even if the hinge is distorted, the door frame can be lifted by the protrusion, so that the door frame can be closed with respect to the body frame at an appropriate position.

In addition, one end side is rotatably supported by the locking means, and the other end side on the opposite side has a locking piece that moves from the unlocked position to the locked position when the protrusion abuts. can be As a result, when the door frame is closed in an imperfect state in which the lock piece as the locking means has not moved to the lock position, the protrusion of the door frame comes into contact with the lock piece, causing the lock piece to rotate and lock. Since it can be moved to any position, it is possible to construct a specific configuration of the lock means that can be manufactured, and it is possible to provide a game machine that can reliably achieve the above-described effects. .

Further, when the lock means has a lock piece as described above, the lock means may have a push piece that pushes the detachable unit rearward when the lock piece moves from the unlocked position to the locked position. . As a result, when the door frame is closed in an imperfect state in which the lock piece as the locking means has not moved to the lock position, the protrusion of the door frame comes into contact with the lock piece, causing the lock piece to rotate and lock. As it moves to the position, the pressing piece pushes the detachable unit rearward. Therefore, even if the detachable unit is not completely attached in addition to the locking means, the detachable unit can be attached in a good condition, and the detachable unit can be attached and detached. It is possible to reliably prevent the unit from coming off.

Further, the locking means may have an insert body that is inserted into the detachable unit from a direction that intersects the front-rear direction when the lock means is moved from the unlocked position to the locked position. Accordingly, when the locking means is moved from the unlocked position to the locked position, the inserter is inserted into the detachable unit in a direction that intersects the front-rear direction. , it is possible to reliably provide a gaming machine capable of achieving the above-described effects. Further, in this case, when the door frame is closed to the body frame, even if the locking means is not in the locked position, the protrusion of the door frame moves the locking means to the locked position, so that the insertion body can be removed. Since it is inserted into the unit, even if the locking means is incomplete, the attachment of the detachable unit can be maintained in a good condition, and the detachable unit can be reliably prevented from coming off.

Further, the locking means may have a fixing means (for example, a nylatch) that is fixed by expanding the diameter of the distal end by pressing and pushing the operating portion. As a result, since the lock means has a fixing means that is fixed by expanding the diameter of the distal end of the operation part by pressing and pushing the operation part, the fixing means can be easily fixed by looking at the position of the operation part in the fixing means. Whether or not it is in the locked position can be easily determined, and the possibility of forgetting to lock can be reduced.

Further, as described above, when the locking means has a pressing piece that presses the detachable unit rearward when the locking piece moves from the unlocked position to the locked position, the pressing piece is made immovable by the fixing means. can be Thus, by fixing the pressing piece so that it cannot move with the fixing means in a state in which the pressing piece presses the detachable unit rearward, even if the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, the attaching/detaching unit can be removed by the pressing piece. is maintained, it is possible to prevent the detachable unit from coming off immediately forward.

Further, the detachable unit may have a polishing cloth for polishing the game balls circulated by the ball circulating means. As a result, since the detachable unit has a polishing cloth for polishing the circulating game balls, when the polishing cloth becomes dirty, the detachable unit is removed and a new detachable device having a clean polishing cloth is used. It can be replaced with a unit, and the circulating game balls can be kept in good condition without dirt. Also, in this case, by applying the present means using a kuma cassette or the like for which maintenance such as periodic replacement is performed as a detachable unit, troubles associated with detachment of the detachable unit at the time of maintenance can be minimized.

In addition, as described above, when the detachable unit has a polishing cloth for polishing game balls, by removing the detachable unit, the inside of the ball circulation means can be visually recognized, and the ball circulation means can be viewed from the front. You can check inside the means.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The locking means
One end side is rotatably supported, and has a lock piece that moves from the unlocked position to the locked position by abutting the protrusion on the other end side on the opposite side.
characterized by being

Here, the "lock piece" includes "rotating about a vertical axis", "rotating about a horizontal axis", "rotating about a horizontal axis", and the like. is mentioned.

According to the structure of the means 2, one end side is rotatably supported by the lock means, and the lock moves from the unlocked position to the locked position by abutting the projection on the opposite end side. (See the description of the balled motor base 686 of the balled mechanism 680 in the Detailed Description).

As a result, if the door frame is closed in an imperfect state in which the lock piece as the lock means has not moved to the lock position, the door will be closed. When the projecting portion of the frame comes into contact with the lock piece, the lock piece can be rotated and moved to the lock position. , it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably achieve the above-described effects.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The locking means are
It has a pressing piece that presses the detachable unit rearward when the locking piece moves from the unlocking position to the locking position.
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, the locking means has a pressing piece that presses the detachable unit backward when the locking piece moves from the unlocked position to the locked position (see [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] , see the description regarding the cassette pressing piece 693).

As a result, when the door frame is closed in an imperfect state in which the lock piece as the locking means has not moved to the lock position, the protrusion of the door frame comes into contact with the lock piece, causing the lock piece to rotate and lock. As it moves to the position, the pressing piece pushes the detachable unit rearward. Therefore, even if the detachable unit is not completely attached in addition to the locking means, the detachable unit can be attached in a good condition, and the detachable unit can be attached and detached. It is possible to reliably prevent the unit from coming off.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The locking means
It has an inserter that is inserted into the attachable/detachable unit from a direction that intersects the front-rear direction when it moves from the unlocked position to the locked position.
characterized by being

Here, the "insertion body" includes "a columnar shape with a sharp tip", "a joint for transmitting power to the detachable unit", and the like.

In the configuration of means 4, the lock means has an insert body that is inserted into the detachable unit from a direction that intersects the front-rear direction when the lock means is moved from the unlocked position to the locked position. Form for doing], see the description regarding the positioning pin 686b of the Kuma motor base 686).

Accordingly, when the locking means is moved from the unlocked position to the locked position, the inserter is inserted into the detachable unit in a direction that intersects the front-rear direction. , it is possible to reliably provide a gaming machine capable of achieving the above-described effects. Also, when the door frame is closed to the body frame, even if the locking means is not in the locking position, the projection of the door frame moves the locking means to the locking position and the insertion body is inserted into the detachable unit. Therefore, even if the lock means is incomplete, the attachment of the detachable unit can be maintained in a good state, and the detachable unit can be reliably prevented from coming off.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The lock means has a fixing means that is fixed by expanding the diameter of the distal end by pressing and pushing the operation part."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 5, the lock means has a fixing means (for example, Nairatch) whose tip diameter is expanded and fixed by pressing and pushing the operation part ([Practice the invention Form for], see the description of Nairat 694).

As a result, since the lock means has a fixing means that is fixed by expanding the diameter of the distal end of the operation part by pressing and pushing the operation part, the fixing means can be easily fixed by looking at the position of the operation part in the fixing means. Whether or not it is in the locked position can be easily determined, and the possibility of forgetting to lock can be reduced.

Further, when the locking means has a pressing piece that presses the detachable unit backward when the locking piece moves from the unlocked position to the locked position, the pressing piece may be made immovable by the fixing means. Thus, by fixing the pressing piece so that it cannot move with the fixing means in a state in which the pressing piece presses the detachable unit rearward, even if the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, the attaching/detaching unit can be removed by the pressing piece. is maintained, it is possible to prevent the detachable unit from coming off immediately forward.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 4,
"The detachable unit
It has a polishing cloth for polishing the game balls circulated by the ball circulation means."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 6, the detachable unit has a polishing cloth for polishing the game balls circulated by the ball circulation means (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the See description regarding cassette 681).

As a result, since the detachable unit has a polishing cloth for polishing the circulating game balls, when the polishing cloth becomes dirty, the detachable unit is removed and a new detachable device having a clean polishing cloth is used. It can be replaced with a unit, and the circulating game balls can be kept in good condition without dirt. Further, by applying this means to a detachable unit, such as a kuma cassette that undergoes maintenance such as replacement on a regular basis, it is possible to minimize troubles associated with detachment of the detachable unit during maintenance.

In addition, since the detachable unit has a polishing cloth for polishing the game balls, the inside of the ball circulation means can be visually recognized by removing the detachable unit, and the inside of the ball circulation means can be confirmed from the front. can do.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"A body frame that detachably supports from the front a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls,
a door frame that can be opened and closed from the front with respect to the body frame and that allows the game area to be viewed from the front;
a ball launching means provided in the body frame and capable of supplying game balls to the game area;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The body frame is
A detachable unit which is detachably mounted from the front and has a polishing cloth for polishing the game balls circulated by the ball circulation means, and a lock position which disables detachment of the detachable unit. a lock means provided movably between a release position for releasing the lock,
The door frame is
a projecting portion that protrudes toward the main body frame and lifts the door frame by closing the door frame with respect to the main body frame and moves the lock means to the lock position;
The locking means
a locking piece that is rotatably supported on one end side and moves from the unlocking position to the locking position by abutting the projecting portion on the other end side on the opposite side; an inserter that is inserted into the detachable unit from a direction intersecting the front-rear direction when moved from the position to the locked position, and pushes the detachable unit rearward when the lock piece moves from the unlocked position to the locked position. It has a pressing piece, and a fixing means for immovably fixing the pressing piece by expanding the diameter of the tip by pressing and pushing the operation part.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 7, the body frame detachably supports from the front a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls, and the body frame is provided so as to be openable and closable from the front, and a game board is provided to the body frame. A door frame which makes the area visible from the front, a ball shooting means which is provided in the body frame and can supply the game balls to the game area, and recovers the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and shoots the balls again. and ball circulation means for supplying the means, wherein the ball shooting means shoots the game balls based on the data of the player's possession of the ball, wherein the body frame is positioned forward. A detachable unit having a polishing cloth for polishing the game balls circulated by the ball circulating means which is detachably provided from the ball circulating means; and a locking means provided movably between a release position and a lock means, wherein the door frame protrudes toward the main body frame and closes the door frame with respect to the main body frame to lift the door frame. The locking means has a protrusion for moving the locking means to the locked position, and the locking means is rotatably supported at one end and released by contacting the other end on the opposite side with the protrusion. a lock piece that moves from a position to a locked position; an insert that is inserted into the detachable unit from a direction intersecting the front-rear direction when the lock piece moves from the unlocked position to the locked position; and a lock piece that moves from the unlocked position to the locked position. It has a pressing piece that presses the detachable unit rearward when it moves, and a fixing means that fixes the pressing piece immovably by expanding the diameter of the front end by pressing and pushing the operation part.

In this configuration, the game balls fired from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and based on the player's ball data. In a game machine (a so-called closed-type game machine, a management game machine) in which game balls are shot from a ball shooting means, a lock piece of a lock means is set to a lock position with a detachable unit attached to a body frame. Then, the insert body is inserted into the detachable unit in a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, and the detachable unit is pushed rearward by the pressing piece. In this state, the pressing piece is immovably fixed by pressing and pushing the operating portion of the fixing means such as the ny latch in the locking means. Thus, even if the attachment of the detachable unit is incomplete, the attachment of the detachable unit can be maintained in a favorable state by pressing backward, and the inserter prevents the detachable unit from coming off forward. In addition, it is possible to keep the detachable unit pressed by the pressing piece by the fixing means, so that the detachable unit cannot be detached. At this time, by looking at the position of the operating part in the fixing means of the locking means, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the fixing means has fixed the pressing piece so as not to move, thereby reducing forgetting to lock. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the detachable unit from coming off arbitrarily due to some reason such as vibration during the game, and to avoid the interruption of the game caused by the detachment of the detachable unit. can be suppressed.

In this state, when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame for maintenance or the like, since the pressing piece is prevented from moving by the fixing means in a state where the detachable unit is pushed backward by the pressing piece, Even if the door frame is opened, the pressure of the detachable unit is maintained by the pressing piece, and the detachable unit can be prevented from coming off immediately forward. The detachable unit is removed by opening the door frame with respect to the main body frame supporting the game board, operating the fixing means of the locking means to make the pressing piece movable, and then rotating the locking piece. When it is moved from the locking position to the unlocking position, the inserter is separated from the detachable unit, and the detachable unit attached to the body frame can be removed forward. As a result, by removing the detachable unit having the polishing cloth for polishing the circulating game balls, it becomes possible to check the inside of the ball circulation means provided behind it, which contributes to the maintenance of the game machine. Workability can be improved.

When closing the door frame with respect to the body frame, even if the lock piece of the lock means is not in the lock position, when the door frame is closed, the protrusion of the door frame comes into contact with the lock piece. Since the lock piece rotates and moves to the locked position, and the insertion body is inserted into the detachable unit from a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to lock the detachable unit. In addition to preventing the door frame from coming off, the locking means and the detachable unit will not be damaged by contact with the door frame.

Further, when the door frame is closed in an incomplete state in which the lock piece of the lock means has not moved to the lock position, the projection of the door frame comes into contact with the lock piece, causing the lock piece to rotate to the lock position. Since the pressing piece pushes the detachable unit rearward as it moves, even if the detachable unit is not completely attached in addition to the locking means, the detachable unit can be attached in a favorable state. You can reliably prevent it from coming off.

Furthermore, the projection of the door frame lifts the door frame when the door frame is closed with respect to the main body frame, thereby avoiding excessive load on the hinge that opens and closes the door frame. As a result, the hinge can be made difficult to be distorted, and even if the hinge is distorted, the door frame can be lifted by the protrusion, so that the door frame can be closed with respect to the body frame at an appropriate position.

Also, since the detachable unit has a polishing cloth for polishing the circulating game balls, when the polishing cloth becomes dirty, the detachable unit is removed and a new detachable unit having a clean polishing cloth is installed. , and the circulating game balls can be kept in good condition without dirt. Further, by applying this means to a detachable unit, such as a kuma cassette that undergoes maintenance such as replacement on a regular basis, it is possible to minimize troubles associated with detachment of the detachable unit during maintenance.

Thus, according to the above solution, even if the door frame is closed in a state in which the lock means for locking the removable unit is incomplete, it is possible to prevent the lock means from being damaged or the removable unit from coming off. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of

[15-1c. Relationship between Solution Means of First Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The projecting portion 102 of the door frame body 100 of the door frame 3 of this embodiment is the projecting portion of the above solving means, and the ball shooting unit 550 of the body frame 4 of this embodiment is the ball shooting means of the above solving means. The foul unit 570, the circulation ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball feeding unit 700 are the ball circulation means of the above solution, and the ball polishing cassette 681 of the present embodiment is the detachable unit of the above solution. The Kuma motor base 686 in the embodiment is a locking piece of the locking means of the above solution, the positioning pin 686b and the rotary connection part 692 in this embodiment are the inserts of the above solution, and the cassette pressing piece 693 in this embodiment is the above The pressing piece of the solving means and the Nairatch 694 in this embodiment correspond to the fixing means of the above solving means, respectively.

[15-1d. Characteristic action and effect of the first technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 that shoots the game ball B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 is sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball lifter. Collected by the upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 and supplied to the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 based on the player's ball holding data. Then, in this pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed type game machine, management game machine), with the kuma cassette 681 attached to the body frame 4, the kuma motor base 686 of the kuma mechanism 680 in the ball lifting unit 650 is moved to the locked position. In this state, the positioning pin 686b and the rotary connecting portion 692 are inserted into the ball polishing cassette 681 in a direction intersecting the front-rear direction, and the ball polishing cassette 681 is pushed rearward by the cassette pressing piece 693 (spring 695). be. In this state, the pressing piece is immovably fixed by the ny latch of the locking means. As a result, even if the mounting of the kuma cassette 681 is incomplete, the mounting of the kuma cassette 681 can be brought into a favorable state by pressing backward, and the positioning pin 686b and the like can move the kuma cassette 681 forward. In addition to being able to prevent detachment, the ny latch 694 allows the pressing of the cassette pressing piece 693 to continue to press the balled cassette 681, so that the balled cassette 681 cannot be removed. At this time, by looking at the position of the operating portion 694a of the ny latch 694, it can be easily determined whether or not the ny latch 694 fixes the cassette pressing piece 693 immovably, thereby reducing the possibility of forgetting to lock. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the Kuma cassette 681 from being arbitrarily detached due to some reason such as vibration during the game, and to avoid interruption of the game caused by the detachment of the Kuma cassette 681. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 for maintenance or the like, the cassette pressing piece 693 is made immovable by the ny latch 694 in a state in which the kuma cassette 681 is pressed backward by the cassette pressing piece 693 . Therefore, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the body frame 4, the pressing of the balled cassette 681 by the cassette pressing piece 693 is maintained, and the balled cassette 681 can be prevented from coming off immediately forward. To remove the Kuma cassette 681, after opening the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 supporting the game board 5, operate the Nairatch 694 to make the cassette pressing piece 693 movable, and then remove the Kuma motor. When the base 686 is rotated to move from the locked position to the unlocked position, the positioning pins 686b and the like are separated from the kneading cassette 681 and attached to the body frame 4 (cassette mounting recess 668b of the lifting mechanism base 668). The ball polishing cassette 681 can be removed forward. As a result, by removing the ball polishing cassette 681 having the polishing cloth 682 for polishing the circulating game balls B, the inside of the ball lifting mechanism 660 of the ball lifting unit 650 provided behind it (lifting spiral shaft 661 etc.) can be confirmed, and workability|operativity concerning the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

When closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, even if the Kuma motor base 686 is not in the lock position, when the door frame 3 is closed, the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 is pushed into the Kuma motor base. 686, the Kuma motor base 686 rotates and moves to the locked position, and the positioning pin 686b and the like are inserted into the Kuma cassette 681 in a direction intersecting the front-rear direction. In addition to preventing the Kuma cassette 681 from coming off during play, the Kuma motor base 686, the cassette pressing piece 693, the Kuma cassette 681, etc., will not be damaged due to contact with the door frame 3. do not have.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed in an incomplete state in which the Kuma motor base 686 has not moved to the locked position, the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the Kuma motor base 686, causing the Kuma motor base 686 to rotate. At the same time, the cassette pressing piece 693 pushes the kuma cassette 681 rearward by the biasing force of the spring 695. Therefore, in addition to the locking by the positioning pin 686b of the kuma motor base 686, the kuma cassette 681 is locked. Even if the attachment is incomplete, the attachment of the ball polishing cassette 681 can be maintained in a good condition, and the detachment of the ball polishing cassette 681 can be reliably prevented.

Furthermore, the protrusion 102 of the door frame 3 lifts the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the door frame hinge mechanism 110 and the like that can open and close the door frame 3 are provided. It is possible to prevent excessive load from being continuously applied to the door frame 3, and it is possible to prevent the hinge from being distorted. 4 can be closed at the proper position.

Further, since the kuma cassette 681 has a polishing cloth 682 for polishing the circulating game balls B, when the polishing cloth 682 becomes dirty, the kuma cassette 681 is removed and the polishing cloth 682 is cleaned. , and the circulating game balls B can be kept in good condition without dirt. Further, by applying the above configuration to the Kuma cassette 681 (detachable unit) for which maintenance such as replacement is periodically performed, troubles associated with detachment of the detachable unit during maintenance can be minimized.

[15-2. Second technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-2a. Background of the second technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball shooting means shoots a game ball into a game area based on data of a player's ball holding data, and when the game ball is shot, the shot ball is shot from the ball holding data. It is proposed to add the recovered game ball to the held ball data when it is recovered by the foul ball recovery means without being supplied to the game area even if it is shot by the ball shooting means. (For example, Patent Document A2: JP-A-2020-89489). According to the technique disclosed in Patent Document A2, it is possible to circulate game balls in the game machine and reduce the burden on the game hall in which the game machine is installed.

However, in the technique of Patent Document A2, if a game ball shot by the ball shooting means returns to the ball shooting means for some reason, the game ball is not recovered by the foul ball recovery means. The number of balls remains subtracted, and there is a risk that an error from the actual number of game balls shot into the game area will occur, giving a disadvantage to the player.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, the following means provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating the error between the actual number of game balls shot into the game area and the error caused by the return of the shot game balls. .

[15-2b. Means for solving the second technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
foul ball recovery means for recovering game balls that have not been supplied to the game area even though they have been shot by the ball shooting means;
a ball circulation means for collecting game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The ball launching means is
It has a launch rail on which the game ball to be launched is placed, and the launch rail has a length that allows only one game ball to be placed,
When a game ball is newly supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means while the game ball is placed on the launch rail, the game ball supplied to the launch rail later is transferred to the foul ball recovery means. will be collected by
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 1, a game board having a game area where a game is played with game balls, a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and even if the ball is shot by the ball shooting means, it will reach the game area. A player provided with a foul ball collecting means for collecting game balls not supplied and a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again, and converted into data. A game machine configured to shoot a game ball by means of ball shooting means based on ball holding data of (1), wherein the ball shooting means has a shooting rail on which the game ball to be shot is placed, and the shooting rail is It has a length that allows only one game ball to be placed, and when a game ball is newly supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means while the game ball is placed on the launch rail, it will be placed on the launch rail later. The supplied game balls are recovered by the foul ball recovery means (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [4-2. Ball launching unit] and [7-4. Launch control processing] sections , FIG. 27, FIG. 76, etc.).

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (so-called enclosed type gaming machine, controlled gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from the ball shooting means based on the number of balls of 1 or more), the length of the shooting rail in the ball shooting means is is the length that only one can be placed, so if the fired game ball returns to the launch rail for some reason, if the next game ball has already been placed on the launch rail, it will be placed on the launch rail. It is possible to flip the returned game ball by the placed game ball to make it a foul ball. On the other hand, when the game ball that has been shot returns before the next game ball is placed on the shooting rail, the game ball that has returned will be placed on the shooting rail, but is supplied from the ball circulation means. The next game ball to be hit comes back and is repelled by the game ball placed on the launch rail to become a foul ball. Therefore, the player's ball data is subtracted by being shot from the launch rail, but even if the shot game ball returns to the launch rail, only one game ball is placed on the launch rail. Therefore, either the returning game ball or the next game ball becomes a foul ball and is recovered by the foul ball recovery means. The ball data can be returned to the state before shooting, and the error from the actual number of the game balls shot to the game area is eliminated so that the player does not suffer any disadvantages.

Since the launch rail is long enough for only one game ball to be placed, there is a risk that it may fall from the launch rail due to vibrations, etc. In the event of a fall, even if it is misidentified as having been fired as a result of the fall and the ball holding data (number of balls held) is subtracted, it will be treated as a foul ball by being recovered by the foul ball recovery means in the same manner as above. to return to the state before the fall by adding to the holding ball data. On the other hand, when there is no held ball data (the number of held balls is 0) and the game ball falls from the launch rail and is recovered by the foul ball recovery means, it may not be added to the held ball data. Alternatively, an alarm may be issued to the game hall side where the game machine is installed.

Further, the ball circulation means may supply one game ball to the launch rail after the game ball shooting operation by the ball launching means. As a result, when a game ball is launched from the launch rail, the ball circulation means always supplies one game ball to the launch rail. A game ball supplied to the launch rail by the circulation means can be flipped into a foul ball, and the game machine can reliably provide the above-described effects.

Further, as described above, when one game ball is supplied to the shooting rail after the game ball is shot by the ball circulation means, the shooting of the game ball by the ball shooting means and the ball shooting means (shooting rail) by the ball circulation means Since it is possible to make a series of actions between the supply of game balls to the Compared to the case of judging whether or not the player has returned to the launch rail (judging by programming), it is possible to reduce the load on the control of the game machine.

Further, when the game machine has the ball holding data and the game ball on the launch rail changes from being present to being absent, the ball holding subtracting means for subtracting one game ball from the ball holding data and the foul collecting means. Possessed ball addition means for adding one game ball to the possessed ball data when is collected may be further provided. As a result, when the ball shooting means shoots a game ball toward the game area of the game board in a state where the player's ball data exists (the number of balls in his possession is one or more), the ball holding data is subtracted from the ball holding data by the ball holding means. One game ball is subtracted from the number, and the game ball is supplied to the game area so that the player can enjoy the game with the game ball. On the other hand, when the game ball shot by the ball shooting means is not supplied to the game area, it is recovered as a foul ball by the foul ball recovery means, and the game ball is added to the possession ball data by the held ball addition means. Therefore, the player can continue to enjoy the game without being disadvantaged by the fact that the game balls are not supplied to the game area. Then, when the shot game ball returns to the shooting rail for some reason, the shooting rail has a length that allows only one game ball to be placed, so the next game ball has already been placed on the shooting rail. If so, it is possible to repel the returning game ball by the game ball placed on the launch rail to make it a foul ball, and the returning game ball is placed on the launch rail, ball circulation. The next game ball supplied from the means returns and is repelled by the placed game ball to become a foul ball. By adding one ball, the ball holding data can be returned to the state before shooting, and the error with the actual number of game balls shot into the game area can be eliminated.

Further, the game ball dropped from the launch rail may be recovered by the foul ball recovery means. As a result, since the game balls that have fallen from the launch rail are recovered by the foul ball recovery means, the game balls that have been released and returned or the next game balls that are supplied from the ball circulation means can be recovered from the launch rail. To reliably provide a game machine capable of being added to ball possession data as a foul ball when flipped by a placed game ball, since the foul ball can be recovered by a foul ball recovery means. be able to.

Further, as described above, when the game ball that has fallen from the launch rail is recovered by the foul ball recovering means, even if the game ball falls from the launch rail due to vibration or the like, it can be recovered by the foul ball recovering means so that the foul ball is recovered. It can be added as a ball to the data of held balls to return to the state before falling, and the player will not be disadvantaged.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The sphere circulation means
One game ball is supplied to the shooting rail after the game ball shooting operation by the ball shooting means.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the ball circulation means supplies one game ball to the shooting rail after the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means. [7-4.

As a result, when a game ball is launched from the launch rail, the ball circulation means always supplies one game ball to the launch rail. A game ball supplied to the launch rail by the circulation means can be flipped into a foul ball, and the game machine can reliably provide the above-described effects.

In addition, since it is possible to perform a series of operations in which the ball shooting means shoots game balls and the ball circulation means feeds game balls to the ball shooting means (shooting rail), for example, a game on the shooting rail can be performed. Compared to the case of judging whether or not a game ball has returned to the launch rail based on the presence or absence of the ball, the operation of the ball launching means and the ball circulation means, etc. (judging by making a program) Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load on the control of the game machine.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"holding ball subtracting means for subtracting one game ball from said holding ball data when the game ball on said launch rail changes from being present to being absent while said holding ball data is present;
Possessed ball addition means for adding one game ball to said possessed ball data when a game ball is recovered by said foul recovering means;
is further provided.

According to the configuration of the means 3, when the game machine has the ball holding data and the game ball on the launch rail changes from being present to being absent, the ball holding subtracting means for subtracting one game ball from the ball holding data; Possessed ball addition means for adding one game ball to the possessed ball data when the game ball is recovered by the recovering means (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [7 Possessed ball subtraction processing] and [7-3 Possessed ball addition processing], see the descriptions in FIGS.

As a result, when the ball shooting means shoots a game ball toward the game area of the game board in a state where the player's ball data exists (the number of balls in his possession is one or more), the ball holding data is subtracted from the ball holding data by the ball holding means. One game ball is subtracted from the number, and the game ball is supplied to the game area so that the player can enjoy the game with the game ball. On the other hand, when the game ball shot by the ball shooting means is not supplied to the game area, it is recovered as a foul ball by the foul ball recovery means, and the game ball is added to the possession ball data by the held ball addition means. Therefore, the player can continue to enjoy the game without being disadvantaged by the fact that the game balls are not supplied to the game area. Then, when the shot game ball returns to the shooting rail for some reason, the shooting rail has a length that allows only one game ball to be placed, so the next game ball has already been placed on the shooting rail. If so, it is possible to repel the returning game ball by the game ball placed on the launch rail to make it a foul ball, and the returning game ball is placed on the launch rail, ball circulation. The next game ball supplied from the means returns and is repelled by the placed game ball to become a foul ball. By adding one ball, the ball holding data can be returned to the state before shooting, and the error with the actual number of game balls shot into the game area can be eliminated.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The foul ball collecting means is
It is possible to collect game balls that have fallen from the launch rail.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, game balls that have fallen from the launch rail can be recovered by the foul ball recovering means (in [Description of the Invention], the descriptions of the ball launching unit 550 and the foul unit 570 are described. reference).

As a result, since the game balls that have fallen from the launch rail are recovered by the foul ball recovery means, the game balls that have been released and returned or the next game balls that are supplied from the ball circulation means can be recovered from the launch rail. To reliably provide a game machine capable of being added to ball possession data as a foul ball when flipped by a placed game ball, since the foul ball can be recovered by a foul ball recovery means. be able to.

In addition, since the game balls dropped from the launch rail are recovered by the foul ball recovering means, even if the game balls fall from the launch rail due to vibration or the like, they can be recovered by the foul ball recovering means. can be added to the held ball data to return to the state before the fall, and the player is not at a disadvantage.

In addition, when there is no ball holding data (the number of balls held is 0) and the game ball falls from the launch rail and is recovered by the foul ball recovery means, it may not be added to the ball holding data. Alternatively, an alarm may be issued to the game hall side where the game machine is installed.

Means 5: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board and having a shooting rail on which the game balls to be shot are placed;
a foul ball recovering means for recovering a game ball that has not been supplied to the game area after being shot by the ball shooting means and a game ball that has fallen from the shooting rail;
a ball circulation means for collecting game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
Possessed ball subtracting means for subtracting one game ball from the possessed ball data when the game ball on the launch rail changes from present to absent in a state where the possessed ball data exists;
Possessed ball addition means for adding one game ball to said possessed ball data when a game ball is recovered by said foul recovering means;
further comprising
The launch rail has a length on which only one game ball can be placed,
The ball circulation means supplies one game ball to the shooting rail after the game ball shooting operation by the ball shooting means,
When a game ball is newly supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means while the game ball is placed on the launch rail, the game ball supplied to the launch rail later is transferred to the foul ball recovery means. will be collected by
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, it has a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls, and a shooting rail on which game balls can be supplied to the game area of the game board and the game balls to be shot are placed. ball shooting means, game balls that were not supplied to the game area even though they were shot by the ball shooting means, and foul ball recovery means for recovering game balls that fell from the shooting rails, and ball shooting means that were shot by the ball shooting means. A game machine comprising a ball circulation means for recovering game balls and supplying them to the ball shooting means again, and having the ball shooting means shoot the game balls based on the data of the player's ball holding data converted into data. When the game ball on the launch rail changes from being present to being absent in a state where the ball data is present, the game ball is recovered by the ball possession subtracting means for subtracting one game ball from the ball holding data and the foul recovery means. and a ball possession adding means for adding one game ball to the ball possession data, the launch rail has a length that allows only one game ball to be placed, and the ball circulation means is a ball launch means. One game ball is supplied to the launch rail after the game ball is launched by the means, and when a new game ball is supplied to the launch rail by the ball circulation means while the game ball is placed on the launch rail. In (3), the game balls supplied to the launch rail are recovered by the foul ball recovery means.

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (a so-called enclosed gaming machine, a management gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from the ball shooting means based on the number of balls being 1 or more), the state in which the player's ball data is present (the number of balls being held) is 1 or more), when the ball shooting means shoots the game ball toward the game area of the game board, the game ball is subtracted by one from the held ball data by the held ball subtracting means, and the game ball is supplied to the game area. By doing so, the player can enjoy the game with the game balls. On the other hand, when the game ball shot by the ball shooting means is not supplied to the game area, it is recovered as a foul ball by the foul ball recovery means, and the game ball is added to the possession ball data by the held ball addition means. Therefore, the player can continue to enjoy the game without being disadvantaged by the fact that the game balls are not supplied to the game area.

Then, when the shot game ball returns to the shooting rail for some reason, since the shooting rail has a length on which only one game ball can be placed, the next game is already placed on the shooting rail by the ball circulation means. If the ball is placed, the returning game ball is flipped by the game ball placed on the launch rail, falls from the launch rail, and is recovered as a foul ball by the foul ball recovering means. On the other hand, when the game ball that has been shot returns before the next game ball is placed on the shooting rail by the ball circulation means, the game ball that has returned will be placed on the shooting rail, but the ball The next game ball supplied from the circulation means falls from the launch rail by being flipped by the game ball placed on the launch rail, and is recovered as a foul ball by the foul ball recovery means. Therefore, in the ball held data of the player, one game ball is subtracted from the ball held data by the ball held subtracting means when the game ball is shot from the shooting rail. Since only one game ball is placed on the launch rail, either the returned game ball or the next game ball becomes a foul ball and is recovered by the foul ball recovery means. One game ball is added to the held ball data by the ball addition means, the held ball data can be returned to the state before shooting, and the game is played by eliminating the error from the actual number of the game balls shot into the game area. no person will be disadvantaged.

In addition, when a game ball is launched from the launch rail, the ball circulation means always supplies one game ball to the launch rail. The game ball supplied to the launch rail by the means can be flipped into a foul ball, and the game machine can reliably provide the above-described effects.

In addition, after the game ball is shot by the ball circulation means, one game ball is supplied to the shooting rail. Since it is possible to make the supply of game balls a series of operations, for example, the game balls fired based on the presence or absence of game balls on the launch rail, the operation of the ball launching means and the ball circulation means, etc. It is possible to reduce the load on the control of the game machine compared to the case of determining whether or not the game has returned to the normal state (when determining by forming a program).

Furthermore, since the length of the launch rail is such that only one game ball can be placed, there is a risk that the game ball may fall from the launch rail due to vibrations, etc. is 1 or more), if the game ball falls from the launch rail due to vibrations, etc., it will be misidentified as having been launched as a result of the drop, and even if the possession ball data (number of possession balls) is subtracted, the foul ball recovery means will By being collected, one game ball can be added to the held ball data by the held ball addition means as a foul ball, and the state before falling can be restored, so that the player is not at a disadvantage.

In addition, since the length of the launch rail is such that only one game ball can be placed, in a state where there is no possession data (the number of possession balls is 0), the game ball falls from the launch rail and is fouled. When collected by the collection means, the game balls may not be added to the possession ball data by the possession ball addition means, or an alarm may be issued to the game hall side where the game machine is installed.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of eliminating the error from the actual number of game balls shot to the game area due to the return of the shot game balls.

[15-2c. Relationship between Solution Means for Second Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The ball launching unit 550 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment is the ball launching means of the above solution, the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550 in this embodiment is the launch rail of the above solution, and the foul unit in this embodiment. 570 is the foul ball collecting means of the above solution, the circulation ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, and the ball feeding unit 700 of the present embodiment are the ball circulation means of the above solution, and the frame control board of this embodiment. The ball possession subtraction process in 740 corresponds to the ball possession subtraction means of the above solution means, and the ball possession addition process in the frame control board 740 of the present embodiment corresponds to the ball possession addition means of the above solution means.

[15-2d. Characteristic action and effect of the second technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 that shoots the game ball B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 is sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball lifter. Collected by the upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 and supplied to the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 based on the player's holding ball data (the number of holding balls is 1 or more). I'm trying In this pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed type game machine, management game machine), in a state in which the player's ball data exists (state in which the number of balls in his possession is one or more), the ball shooting unit 550 shoots the game area of the game board 5. When the game ball B is shot toward the 5a, the game ball B is subtracted by one from the possession ball data by the possession ball subtraction processing, and the game ball B is supplied to the game area 5a, whereby the game ball B is delivered to the player. You can enjoy the game by On the other hand, when the game ball B shot by the ball shooting unit 550 is not supplied to the game area 5a, it is recovered as a foul ball by the foul unit 570, and the game ball B is added to the held ball data by the held ball addition process. Since the game ball B is not supplied to the game area 5a, the player is not disadvantaged and can continue to enjoy the game.

When the game ball B that has been shot returns to the ball launch pad 552b for some reason, since the ball launch pad 552b has a length on which only one game ball B can be placed, the ball feeding unit 700 If the next game ball B is already placed on the ball launch pad 552b, the returning game ball B is flipped by the game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b and falls from the ball launch pad 552b. is recovered to the foul unit 570 as a foul ball. On the other hand, when the game ball B that has been shot is returned before the next game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b by the ball feeding unit 700, the returned game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b. However, the next game ball B supplied from the ball feeding unit 700 is flipped by the game ball B placed on the ball launch pad 552b and falls from the ball launch pad 552b, resulting in a foul ball. is collected in the foul unit 570 as a Therefore, in the player's ball data, one game ball B is subtracted from the ball data by the ball subtraction process by being shot from the ball launch pad 552b. Since only one game ball B is placed on the ball launch pad 552b even after returning, either the returning game ball B or the next game ball B becomes a foul ball and becomes a foul unit. Since it is collected by 570, one game ball B is added to the ball holding data by the ball holding addition process, and the ball holding data can be returned to the state before shooting, and the game ball shot to the game area 5a is returned. The player will not be disadvantaged by eliminating the error from the real number of B.

In addition, when the game ball B is launched from the ball launch pad 552b, the ball feeding unit 700 always supplies one game ball B to the ball launch pad 552b. To surely provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of repelling a game ball B supplied to a ball launching pad 552b by a ball feeding unit 700 to make a foul ball even after returning to a table 552b and exhibiting the above-mentioned effects. can be done.

In addition, after the game ball B is shot by the ball sending unit 700, one game ball B is supplied to the ball launch pad 552b. Since the supply of the game ball B to the launch pad 552b is a series of operations, for example, based on the presence or absence of the game ball B on the ball launch pad 552b, the operations of the ball launch unit 550 and the ball feed unit 700, etc. Compared to the case of judging whether or not the launched game ball B has returned to the ball launch pad 552b (judging by programming), the load on the control of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. can.

Furthermore, since the length of the ball launch pad 552b is such that only one game ball B can be placed thereon, there is a risk that the game ball B may fall from the ball launch pad 552b due to vibration or the like. When the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b due to vibration or the like in a certain state (the number of held balls is 1 or more), as a result of the fall, it is mistakenly recognized as having been launched, and the held ball data (the number of held balls) is subtracted. Even if the ball is recovered by the foul unit 570, it is possible to add one game ball B to the held ball data by carrying ball addition processing as a foul ball to return to the state before falling, and the player is disadvantaged. will not be.

In addition, when there is no held ball data (the number of held balls is 0) and the game ball B falls from the ball launch pad 552b and is collected by the foul unit 570, the held ball data is added by the held ball addition process. The game ball B may not be added, or an alarm may be issued to the game hall side where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

[15-3. Third technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-3a. Background of the third technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a main body frame detachably supports a game board, a ball circulation means provided in the main body frame for circulating game balls in the game machine, and a rear surface of the main body frame. A substrate unit attached to a portion below the game board has been proposed (for example, Patent Document A3: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-188537). According to the technique of Patent Document A3, since the board unit having the control board for controlling the ball circulation means and the like is provided below the game board, the depth direction of the game board can be utilized as much as possible. , it is possible to achieve further differentiation from other gaming machines.

However, in the technique disclosed in Patent Document A3, part of the ball circulation means is positioned between the rear surface of the body frame and the board unit, and it is difficult to check or maintain that part. , it is necessary to remove the substrate unit, and there is a problem that it takes time and effort for maintenance and the like. As a solution to this problem, it is conceivable to provide a rear unit such as a substrate unit that can be opened and closed with respect to the body frame, thereby omitting the trouble of removing it and improving maintainability. There is a possibility that it may cause a malfunction.

Therefore, in the following means, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, it is proposed to provide a game machine capable of preventing the rear unit, which is provided to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame, from being forgotten to be closed during maintenance or the like. Make it an issue.

[15-3b. Means for solving the third technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A body frame that detachably supports from the front a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls,
a back cover that is openable and closable rearwardly with respect to the body frame so as to cover the game board supported by the body frame from the rear;
a ball launching means provided in the body frame and capable of supplying game balls to the game area;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
A rear unit is provided at a portion below the game board on the rear surface of the main body frame so as to be openable and closable rearward,
The rear unit is provided so as to interfere with the back cover when an attempt is made to close the back cover to the main body frame while it is open from the main body frame.
characterized by being

Here, the ``rear unit'' includes ``a board unit having a frame control board for controlling the ball launching means, the ball circulation means, etc., a power supply board for supplying power, etc.,'' and a ``ball circulation means. ball passage unit that constitutes a part of the ball passage in the above", "speaker unit having a speaker", "protective cover that protects the rear side of the substrate, passage member, etc.", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 1, a main body frame detachably supports a game board having a game area where a game is played with game balls from the front, and a main body covering the game board supported by the main body frame from the rear. A back cover provided to be openable and closable rearwardly with respect to the frame, a ball shooting means provided on the main body frame capable of supplying game balls to the game area, and recovering the game balls shot by the ball shooting means. and a ball circulation means for supplying the ball to the ball shooting means again, wherein the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the data of the ball held by the player converted into data, A rear unit is provided so as to be openable and closable rearward at a portion below the game board on the rear surface of the main body frame, and the rear unit closes the back cover to the main body frame while being open from the main body frame. (In [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [4-8. Frame Substrate Unit] section, FIGS. 63 to 65, etc.). reference).

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (so-called enclosed type gaming machine, management gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from the ball shooting means based on the number of balls of 1 or more), Since the rear unit is provided, the member provided behind the game board in the conventional game machine is used as the rear unit of this configuration, so that the depth direction of the game board can be widened by the amount of the member. As a game machine having a wide game board in the depth direction, it is possible to further differentiate the game machine from other game machines, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is highly appealing to players. Since the rear unit is openable and closable, by opening the rear unit backward, the members provided in front of the rear unit on the rear surface of the body frame, the front side of the rear unit, etc. can be checked. Maintenance can be performed, and workability related to maintenance and the like can be improved. At this time, the rear unit and the back cover interfere with each other (contact), so when performing maintenance, etc., first open the back cover and then open the rear unit. , Close the rear unit and then the back cover. Therefore, if the back cover covering the back of the game board is closed while the rear unit is open with respect to the main body frame, the rear unit that is not closed interferes with the back cover. Since the back cover is prevented from being closed by the rear unit that is not closed, it is possible to make the user aware that the rear unit is not closed, and to prevent forgetting to close it during maintenance or the like.

In addition, since the rear unit and the back cover are designed to interfere with each other, even if the rear unit tries to open from the body frame for some reason such as vibration during the game, the back cover interferes (blocks). , the large opening of the rear unit can be avoided, and the occurrence of trouble due to the opening of the rear unit can be prevented.

It is desirable that the rear unit be opened from the body frame so that at least part of the ball circulation means can be viewed from behind. As a result, by opening the rear unit with respect to the body frame, it is possible to check and perform maintenance on the portion between the body frame and the rear unit in the ball circulation means, thereby eliminating problems in the ball circulation means. can be made easier. Even if you forget to close the rear unit with respect to the body frame after maintenance, etc., when you try to close the back cover, the unclosed rear unit and the back cover interfere (abut) and close. Since it is blocked, it is possible to make the user aware that the rear unit is not closed, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close it during maintenance or the like.

Further, the game machine is provided with a lock means which is movable between a lock position and a release position, and locks the rear unit so that it cannot be opened and closed when the rear unit is moved to the lock position in a closed state with respect to the main body frame. Further, the locking means is provided so as to move to the locked position when the back cover is closed to the body frame in the unlocked position and the rear unit is closed to the body frame. can be As a result, when the locking means is moved to the locking position with the rear unit closed with respect to the body frame, the rear unit can be locked so that it cannot be opened or closed. It is possible to prevent the rear unit from opening and to prevent the occurrence of trouble due to the opening of the rear unit. Also, even if you forget to lock the rear unit with the locking means after closing the rear unit with respect to the body frame at the end of maintenance or the like, the locking means can be moved to the locking position by closing the back cover and locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock.

Further, when the locking means as described above is provided, since the locking means is adapted to move between the locking position and the unlocking position, whether or not it is locked can be determined by confirming the position of the locking means. It can be easily discriminated, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock.

Furthermore, the game machine is further provided with a frame-like outer frame that supports the main body frame so as to be openable and closable forward, and the back cover is configured so that the main body frame is open with respect to the outer frame and attached to the main body frame. On the other hand, when the body frame is closed to the outer frame while the back cover is open, it may be provided so as to interfere with the outer frame. As a result, when the main body frame is opened forward with respect to the outer frame while the outer frame is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the rear side of the main body frame can be confirmed, and in this state, the back cover is opened. , the rear side of the game board can be checked, and when the rear unit is opened, members between the main body frame and the rear unit can be checked, and workability such as confirmation and maintenance can be improved. be able to. When closing the body frame against the outer frame, if you try to close the back cover without closing the rear unit, the back cover interferes (contacts) with the rear unit and cannot be closed. It is possible to make the user aware of forgetting to close the door, and to prevent forgetting to close the rear unit. Furthermore, if the rear unit is closed and the back cover is open, or if both the rear unit and the back cover are open, and you try to close the body frame against the outer frame, the back cover interferes with the outer frame. Since it is prevented from being closed by (abutting), it is possible to make the user aware that the back cover or the like is open, and to prevent forgetting to close the back cover or the like.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The said rear unit
By opening from the body frame, at least a part of the ball circulation means is provided so as to be visible from the rear.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 2, the rear unit is provided so that at least a part of the ball circulation means can be visually recognized from the rear by opening from the body frame ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] ], see the description regarding the circulating ball path unit 600, the ball lifting unit 650, the frame substrate unit 730, etc.).

As a result, by opening the rear unit with respect to the body frame, it is possible to check and perform maintenance on the portion between the body frame and the rear unit in the ball circulation means, thereby eliminating problems in the ball circulation means. can be made easier. Even if you forget to close the rear unit with respect to the body frame after maintenance, etc., when you try to close the back cover, the unclosed rear unit and the back cover interfere (abut) and close. Since it is blocked, it is possible to make the user aware that the rear unit is not closed, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to close it during maintenance or the like.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"Locking means that is movable between a locking position and a releasing position, and locks the rear unit so that it cannot be opened and closed when the rear unit is moved to the locking position in a state in which the rear unit is closed with respect to the body frame, It is also equipped with
The locking means are
When the back cover is closed with respect to the body frame at the release position and the rear unit is closed with respect to the body frame, it is provided to move to the lock position.
characterized by being

Here, the ``locking means'' includes ``what is fixed by enlarging the diameter of the front end by pushing the operating part into the locking position when the back cover abuts (for example, Nairatch)'', ``one end and has a locking piece that rotates from the unlocked position to the locked position when the back cover comes into contact with the other end on the opposite side. having a pressing piece that presses the rear unit against the main body frame when it moves from the unlocked position to the locked position by coming into contact with it; "having a lock pin inserted into the rear unit or body frame from a direction that intersects with it", and "having a slide from the unlocked position to the locked position when the back cover abuts", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 3, the game machine is movable between the locked position and the unlocked position, and when the rear unit is moved to the locked position in a closed state with respect to the body frame, the rear unit cannot be opened and closed. A locking means for locking is further provided, and the locking means moves to the locked position when the back cover is closed to the body frame in the unlocked position and the rear unit is closed to the body frame. (See description of back cover 505 and nylatch 774 in Detailed Description).

As a result, when the locking means is moved to the locking position with the rear unit closed with respect to the body frame, the rear unit can be locked so that it cannot be opened or closed. It is possible to prevent the rear unit from opening and to prevent the occurrence of trouble due to the opening of the rear unit. Also, even if you forget to lock the rear unit with the locking means after closing the rear unit with respect to the body frame at the end of maintenance or the like, the locking means can be moved to the locking position by closing the back cover and locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock.

In addition, since the locking means is designed to move between the locking position and the unlocking position, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the locking means is locked by confirming the position of the locking means. Forgetting to do so can be prevented.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"Further comprising a frame-shaped outer frame that supports the body frame so that it can be opened and closed forward,
The back cover is
When the main body frame is open with respect to the outer frame and the back cover is open with respect to the main body frame, if the main body frame is to be closed to the outer frame, it interferes with the outer frame. It is set up as
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, the game machine is further provided with a frame-shaped outer frame that supports the main body frame so that it can be opened and closed forward, and the back cover has the main body frame open with respect to the outer frame, Moreover, when the body frame is closed to the outer frame in a state where the back cover is open with respect to the body frame, it interferes with the outer frame ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] See the description regarding the back cover 505).

As a result, when the main body frame is opened forward with respect to the outer frame while the outer frame is attached to the island equipment of the game hall, the rear side of the main body frame can be confirmed, and in this state, the back cover is opened. , the rear side of the game board can be checked, and when the rear unit is opened, members between the main body frame and the rear unit can be checked, and workability such as confirmation and maintenance can be improved. be able to. When closing the body frame against the outer frame, if you try to close the back cover without closing the rear unit, the back cover interferes (contacts) with the rear unit and cannot be closed. It is possible to make the user aware of forgetting to close the door, and to prevent forgetting to close the rear unit. Furthermore, if the rear unit is closed and the back cover is open, or if both the rear unit and the back cover are open, and you try to close the body frame against the outer frame, the back cover interferes with the outer frame. Since it is prevented from being closed by (abutting), it is possible to make the user aware that the back cover or the like is open, and to prevent forgetting to close the back cover or the like.

Means 5: In the gaming machine,
"With a frame-like outer frame,
a main body frame which is supported forwardly to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable, and which detachably supports from the front a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls;
a back cover that is openable and closable rearwardly with respect to the body frame so as to cover the game board supported by the body frame from the rear;
a ball launching means provided in the body frame and capable of supplying game balls to the game area;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
a rear unit that is openable and closable rearward at a portion below the game board on the rear surface of the main body frame so that at least a part of the ball circulation means can be visually recognized from the rear by opening from the main body frame; ,
a lock means movable between a lock position and a release position for locking the rear unit so that it cannot be opened and closed when the rear unit is moved to the lock position in a state in which the rear unit is closed with respect to the body frame;
is further equipped with
the rear unit is provided so as to interfere with the back cover when an attempt is made to close the back cover to the body frame while the rear unit is open from the body frame;
The locking means is provided so as to move to the locking position when the back cover is closed with respect to the body frame in the unlocked position and in a state in which the rear unit is closed with respect to the body frame. and
When the body frame is opened with respect to the outer frame and the back cover is opened with respect to the body frame, when the body frame is to be closed to the outer frame, the back cover is closed. It is designed to interfere with the outer frame.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 5, the frame-like outer frame and the game board which is supported forwardly to the outer frame so as to be openable and closable and which has a game area in which games are played with game balls are detachably supported from the front. a back cover that can be opened and closed rearward with respect to the main body frame so as to cover the game board supported by the main body frame from behind; The ball data possessed by the player, which is provided with a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls and a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again, is converted into data. A game machine configured to shoot a game ball by a ball shooting means according to , wherein a part below the game board on the rear surface of the body frame is provided so as to be openable and closable rearward, and can be opened from the body frame. At least a part of the ball circulation means is visible from the rear, and the rear unit is movable between the locked position and the unlocked position, and the rear unit is moved to the locked position in a closed state with respect to the body frame. and locking means for locking the rear unit so that it cannot be opened and closed, and the rear unit interferes with the back cover when the back cover is closed to the main body frame while the rear unit is open from the main body frame. The locking means is provided so as to move to the locked position when the back cover is closed with respect to the body frame in the unlocked position and in a state where the rear unit is closed with respect to the body frame. The back cover is designed to interfere with the outer frame when the body frame is open with respect to the outer frame and the back cover is open with respect to the main body frame, and when the body frame is closed to the outer frame. It is provided in

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (so-called enclosed type gaming machine, management gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from the ball shooting means based on the number of balls of 1 or more), Since the rear unit is provided, the member provided behind the game board in the conventional game machine is used as the rear unit of this configuration, so that the depth direction of the game board can be widened by the amount of the member. As a game machine having a wide game board in the depth direction, it is possible to further differentiate the game machine from other game machines, and it is possible to provide a game machine that is highly appealing to players. In this game machine, when the main body frame is opened forward with respect to the outer frame while the outer frame is attached to the island facility of the game hall, the rear side of the main body frame can be seen. When opened, the rear side of the game board can be checked, and when the rear unit is opened, the part between the main body frame and the rear unit in the ball circulation means, the front of the rear unit on the rear surface of the main body frame The members provided, the front side of the rear unit, and the like can be checked and maintained, and workability related to maintenance and the like can be improved.

When closing the body frame against the outer frame, if you try to close the back cover without closing the rear unit, the back cover interferes (contacts) with the rear unit and cannot be closed. It is possible to make the user aware of forgetting to close the door, and to prevent forgetting to close the rear unit. Furthermore, if the rear unit is closed and the back cover is open, or if both the rear unit and the back cover are open, and you try to close the body frame against the outer frame, the back cover interferes with the outer frame. Since it is prevented from being closed by (abutting), it is possible to make the user aware that the back cover or the like is open, and to prevent forgetting to close the back cover or the like. For this reason, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to close the rear unit or the back cover during maintenance or the like.

In addition, since the rear unit and the back cover are designed to interfere (abut) each other, even if the rear unit tries to open from the body frame for some reason such as vibration during game play, the back cover interferes (is blocked). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the rear unit from being opened wide, and to prevent the occurrence of problems due to the opening of the rear unit.

Further, when the locking means is moved to the locking position while the rear unit is closed with respect to the main body frame, the rear unit can be locked so that it cannot be opened and closed, so that the rear unit opens without permission due to vibration or other reasons. can be prevented, and the occurrence of problems due to the opening of the rear unit can be prevented. Also, even if you forget to lock the rear unit with the locking means after closing the rear unit with respect to the body frame at the end of maintenance or the like, the locking means can be moved to the locking position by closing the back cover and locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock.

Furthermore, since the locking means is designed to move between the locking position and the unlocking position, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the lock is locked by confirming the position of the locking means. Forgetting to do so can be prevented.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a game machine capable of preventing the rear unit, which is openable and closable on the rear side of the body frame, from being forgotten to be closed during maintenance or the like. can be done.

[15-3c. Relationship between Solution Means for Third Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The ball launching unit 550 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment serves as the ball launching means of the above solving means, and the foul unit 570, circulating ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit 700 in this embodiment are the above solving means. The sphere circulation means of the means, the frame substrate unit 730 in the present embodiment as the rear unit of the above solution, the Nairatch 774 in the present embodiment as the lock means of the above solution, and the back cover 505 in the present embodiment as the above solution. corresponding to the back cover of the .

[15-3d. Characteristic action and effect of the third technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 that shoots the game ball B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 is sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball lifter. Collected by the upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 and supplied to the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 based on the player's holding ball data (the number of holding balls is 1 or more). In the pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed type game machine, management game machine), the frame board unit 730 as a rear unit is provided at a portion below the game board 5 on the rear surface of the main body frame 4, By using the frame substrate unit 730 of the present embodiment as the member provided behind the game board in the conventional pachinko machine, the depth direction of the game board 5 can be widened by the amount of the member. The pachinko machine 1 having a wide game board 5 can be differentiated from other pachinko machines, and the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to players can be provided. In this pachinko machine 1, when the main body frame 4 is opened forward with respect to the outer frame 2 with the outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall, the rear side of the main body frame 4 can be confirmed. In this state, when the back cover 505 is opened, the rear side of the game board 5 can be seen, and when the frame substrate unit 730 is opened, the main body frame speaker 503, the main body frame speaker box 504, and the circulation ball path unit 600 are displayed. , the sphere lifting unit 650, the front side of the frame substrate unit 730, and the like can be checked and maintained, and workability related to maintenance and the like can be improved.

When the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, if the rear cover 505 is closed without closing the frame substrate unit 730, the rear cover 505 interferes (contacts) with the frame substrate unit 730 and closes. Therefore, it is possible to make the user aware that the frame substrate unit 730 has been left unclosed, thereby preventing the frame substrate unit 730 from being left unclosed. Furthermore, if the frame substrate unit 730 is closed and the back cover 505 is open, or if both the frame substrate unit 730 and the back cover 505 are open, the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2. Since the back cover 505 interferes (contacts) with the outer frame 2 and is prevented from being closed, it is possible to make the user aware that the back cover 505 or the like is open, thereby preventing forgetting to close the back cover 505 or the like. be able to. For this reason, it is possible to prevent forgetting to close the frame substrate unit 730 and the rear cover 505 during maintenance or the like.

Further, since the frame substrate unit 730 and the back cover 505 are designed to interfere (abut) each other, even if the frame substrate unit 730 tries to open from the main body frame 4 for some reason such as vibration during the game, the back cover does not open. By interfering with (blocking) 505, it is possible to prevent the frame substrate unit 730 from being opened wide, and to prevent problems due to the opening of the frame substrate unit 730.

Further, when the frame substrate unit 730 is pressed against the main body frame 4 and moved to the lock position by pressing the ny latch 774 as a locking means, the frame substrate unit 730 can be locked so that it cannot be opened and closed. Unintentional opening of the frame substrate unit 730 due to some reason such as vibration can be prevented, and problems caused by the opening of the frame substrate unit 730 can be prevented. Also, even if you forget to lock the ny latch 774 after closing the frame substrate unit 730 with respect to the main body frame 4 at the end of maintenance or the like, the ny latch 774 can be moved to the lock position by closing the back cover 505 and locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock.

Furthermore, since the Nylatch 774 as the locking means is designed to move between the locked position and the unlocked position, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the Nylatch 774 is locked by checking the position of the operating portion 774a of the Nylatch 774. It can be discriminated, and it is possible to prevent forgetting to lock.

[15-4. Fourth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-4a. Background of the fourth technical feature]
In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball sensor having a detection hole extending vertically in a ball passage through which game balls circulate is provided so as to detect a game ball circulating through the ball passage. (For example, Patent Document A4: JP-A-2016-96868).

By the way, if a ball sensor having a detection hole as in Patent Document A4 is provided in a portion of the ball passage through which game balls flow in the left-right direction (or in the front-rear direction), the passage becomes narrow at the portion of the detection hole. As a result, there is a risk that the circulation speed of game balls will decrease or that ball jams will occur. Therefore, it is conceivable to use a photosensor that does not have a detection hole as the ball sensor. Frequent contact with the side wall may cause the side surface to become worn or scratched, making dirt such as dirt and dust more likely to occur. .

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, it is an object of the following means to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of game balls flowing through the ball passage.

[15-4b. Means for solving the fourth technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The sphere circulation means is
a ball passage through which game balls circulate;
a photosensor for detecting a game ball circulating in the ball passage,
The ball passage is
At least the part where the photosensor is provided is provided so as to contact at two points below the center of the game ball."
characterized by being

Here, the part of the ball passage that "contacts at two points below the center of the game ball" is defined as "having a pair of sloped surfaces (with a V shape, inverted trapezoidal shape with a cross section narrowing downward, etc.), and having a pair of ridges extending in the distribution direction at intervals narrower than the diameter of the gaming machine.

According to the configuration of means 1, a game board having a game area where a game is played with game balls, a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and a game ball shot by the ball shooting means are collected. and a ball circulation means for supplying the ball to the ball shooting means again, wherein the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the data of the ball held by the player converted into data, The ball circulation means has a ball passage through which game balls circulate, and a photosensor for detecting the game balls circulating in the ball passage. , are provided so as to contact at two points below the center of the game ball (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [4-5. Ball Lifting Unit] chapter, FIG. and the description of FIG. 58, etc.).

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. At least a photosensor portion in a ball passage through which game balls circulate in a game machine (a so-called closed-type game machine, a controlled game machine) configured to shoot game balls from a ball shooting means based on a ball number of 1 or more). However, since the game ball is in contact with two points below the center, the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage at the photosensor portion, and the game ball contacts the side wall of the ball passage. Thus, it is possible to avoid the generation of contamination such as dirt and dust due to abrasion or damage to the side wall. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of game balls circulating in the ball passage.

In addition, since the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage at least at the photosensor portion in the ball passage, the positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball can be kept constant, and the displacement of the positional relationship can be prevented. To surely detect a game ball circulating in a ball passage without erroneous detection.

In addition, a pair of inclined surfaces are provided in the ball passage at least at a portion where the photo sensor is provided, and the game ball touches (contacts) with each of them. You may make it have the first shape passage part which has. As a result, since the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of inclined surfaces in the first shape passage portion in which the photosensor is provided in the ball passage, compared with the case where the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of ridges. As a result, it is possible to reduce the wear and damage of the contact portion due to the game ball, prevent the occurrence of stains such as dirt and dust, and reduce the erroneous detection of the game ball by the photosensor.

In addition, as described above, when the ball passage is provided with the first shape passage portion, the first shape passage portion of the ball passage is provided with a pair of slanted surfaces, so dirt such as dirt and dust can be prevented from coming into contact with the game ball. Even if it occurs, the inclined surface can guide the dirt downward from the contact part with the game ball, reduce the influence of the dirt on the photosensor, and prevent the dirt from adhering to the game ball. can be avoided.

In addition, the ball passage may have an opening that is provided upstream of the portion where the photosensor is provided and opens downward to a size that does not hinder the circulation of game balls. As a result, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be discharged from the opening to the outside, so that the influence of dirt on the photosensor can be reduced, and the game ball caused by dirt on the photosensor can be discharged. false positives can be reduced.

Further, the ball passage is provided on at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the portion where the photosensor is provided, and a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and a flat bottom surface in contact with the game ball, and a width direction of the bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends. As a result, at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the portion where at least the photosensor is provided in the ball passage is the second shape passage portion composed of the flat bottom surface and the pair of side wall surfaces, so that the second shape passage When a plurality of game balls stop at the part, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls from the downstream side are lined up so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces. That is, when a plurality of game balls stop in the second shape passage portion, they are arranged in a zigzag pattern and are not arranged in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game balls to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, compared to the case where a plurality of game balls are arranged in a line on the axis, It is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the stationary member, to make it difficult to damage the member, and to suppress the increase in the cost of the game machine without the need to reinforce the member excessively. can.

In addition, if the part of the ball passage where the photosensor is provided can temporarily stop the flow of the game ball, when the time and non-detection time of the game ball by the photosensor exceeds a predetermined threshold, It may be determined whether or not there is a game ball at a part of the ball passage where the game ball stays. By the way, the detection of a game ball at a winning opening or the like is performed by checking the output from a photo sensor (ball sensor) at predetermined interrupt intervals (for example, 4 ms). Then, when it becomes "011"), it is determined that the game ball has been detected (ON). That is, when the output from the photosensor is "011", it is determined to be ON, and when it is other than "011", it is determined to be OFF. However, if a photosensor provided in a portion (stationary portion) where the flow of game balls temporarily stops is used to determine the presence or absence of a game ball by the determination method described above, the photosensor may , When there are no game balls in the stationary portion, only OFF occurs, and when game balls are supplied to the stationary portion, ON occurs frequently at short intervals, and the game balls stored in the stationary portion are released one by one. When the ball is moving (the game ball is moving at intervals of shooting), many short-interval OFFs occur. Therefore, with the determination method as described above, it was not possible to accurately determine that there is no game ball in the stationary portion. On the other hand, the presence or absence of the game ball is determined when the detection time and the non-detection time of the game ball by the photosensor exceed a predetermined threshold value. In other words, a threshold value is provided for each of ON (presence) determination and OFF (absence) determination, and ON or OFF is determined only when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the photosensor is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, it is possible to reliably determine the presence or absence of a game ball in the stationary portion of the ball passage where a plurality of game balls are stationary.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The sphere passage is
A first shape passage portion provided at least in a portion where the photosensor is provided, and having a pair of inclined surfaces with which a game ball is in contact with each other and which is inclined so that the interval widens as it goes upward. , have
characterized by being

According to the structure of the means 2, the ball passage is provided at least in the part where the photo sensor is provided, and the game ball touches (contacts) with each of them, and is inclined so that the interval increases as it goes upward. It has a first shape passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], a V-shaped passage portion 651a of a sphere-lifting entrance passage 651 and a sphere-lifting exit See the description regarding the V-shaped passage portion 652a of the passage 652).

As a result, since the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of inclined surfaces in the first shape passage portion in which the photosensor is provided in the ball passage, compared with the case where the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of ridges. As a result, it is possible to reduce the wear and damage of the contact portion due to the game ball, prevent the occurrence of stains such as dirt and dust, and reduce the erroneous detection of the game ball by the photosensor.

In addition, since a pair of inclined surfaces are provided in the first shape passage portion of the ball passage, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surfaces remove the dirt from the contact portion with the game ball. It is possible to guide the ball further downward, reduce the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and avoid the adhesion of dirt to the game ball.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The sphere passage is
It is provided on the upstream side of the part where the photosensor is provided, and has an opening that opens downward in a size that does not hinder the circulation of game balls.
characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 3, the ball passage has an opening portion which is provided upstream of the portion where the photosensor is provided and opens downward to a size that does not hinder the circulation of the game balls. (Refer to the description regarding the ball lift inlet ground sheet metal 655 and the ball lift outlet ground sheet metal 656 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

As a result, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be discharged from the opening to the outside, so that the influence of dirt on the photosensor can be reduced, and the game ball caused by dirt on the photosensor can be discharged. false positives can be reduced.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The sphere passage is
It is provided on at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the part where the photosensor is provided, a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and a game ball, and from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface and a second shape passage portion having a pair of standing side wall surfaces."
characterized by being

By the way, if the shape of the ball passage is such that it touches at two points below the center of the game ball, as described above, the game ball will not swing in the width direction of the ball passage. game balls are parked, the plurality of game balls are lined up in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, a large ball pressure due to the plurality of game balls acts on the member that holds the plurality of game balls, and there is a risk that the member will be easily damaged. Costs may increase.

According to the configuration of means 4, the ball passage is provided on at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the portion where the photosensor is provided, and a flat bottom surface that is in contact with the game ball and has a width larger than the diameter of the game ball. , and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface. (See the description regarding the U-shaped passage portion 651b of the inlet passage 651 and the U-shaped passage portion 652b of the ball lifting outlet passage 652).

As a result, at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the portion where at least the photosensor is provided in the ball passage is the second shape passage portion composed of the flat bottom surface and the pair of side wall surfaces, so that the second shape passage When a plurality of game balls stop at the part, they are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls from the downstream side are lined up so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces. That is, when a plurality of game balls stop in the second shape passage portion, they are arranged in a zigzag pattern and are not arranged in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game balls to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, compared to the case where a plurality of game balls are arranged in a line on the axis, It is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the stationary member, to make it difficult to damage the member, and to suppress the increase in the cost of the game machine without the need to reinforce the member excessively. can.

The second-shaped passage portion may be provided only on the downstream side of the photosensor, may be provided only on the upstream side of the photosensor, or may be provided on both the downstream side and the upstream side of the photosensor. . In the case of a ball passage in which many game balls are parked on the downstream side of the photosensor, it is desirable to provide the second shape passage portion at least on the downstream side of the photosensor.

Means 5: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The sphere circulation means is
a ball passage through which game balls circulate;
a photosensor for detecting a game ball circulating in the ball passage,
The ball passage is
It is provided in the part where the photosensor is provided, and the game balls are in contact with each other so that they are in contact with each other at two points below the center of the game ball. a first shape passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces that
an opening provided on the upstream side of the first shape passage portion and opening downward in a size that does not hinder the circulation of game balls;
It is provided on at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the first shape passage portion, a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball. a second shape passage portion having a pair of side wall surfaces that
characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 5, there are a game board having a game area where a game is played with game balls, a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and a game ball shot by the ball shooting means being collected. and a ball circulation means for supplying the ball to the ball shooting means again, wherein the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the data of the ball held by the player converted into data, The ball circulation means has a ball passage through which game balls circulate and a photosensor for detecting the game balls circulating in the ball passage, and the ball passage is provided at a portion where the photosensor is provided. A first shape having a pair of slanted surfaces that are slanted so that the game ball touches them at two points below the center of the game ball, and the interval widens as it goes upward. A passage portion, an opening provided on the upstream side of the first shape passage portion and opening downward in a size that does not hinder the circulation of the game ball, and a downstream or upstream side of the first shape passage portion A second shape passage portion provided on at least one side and having a flat bottom surface in contact with the game ball and having a width larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface; ,

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. At least a photosensor portion in a ball passage through which game balls circulate in a game machine (a so-called closed-type game machine, a controlled game machine) configured to shoot game balls from a ball shooting means based on a ball number of 1 or more). as a first shape passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so that the interval increases as it goes upward, and the pair of inclined surfaces contact the game ball at two points below the center. Therefore, the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage at the portion of the photosensor, and the game ball contacts the side wall of the ball passage and the side wall is worn or scratched, and dirt such as dust and dirt is removed. can be avoided from occurring. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball passage can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of game balls circulating in the ball passage.

In addition, in the first shape passage portion where the photosensor is provided in the ball passage, the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the ball passage, so the positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball can be kept constant. Thus, it is possible to reliably detect a game ball circulating in the ball passage without erroneous detection due to the displacement of the positional relationship.

In addition, since the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of inclined surfaces in the first shape passage portion where the photosensor is provided, compared to the case where the game ball is brought into contact with the pair of ridges, the game ball It is possible to reduce the wear and scratching of the contact portion due to the contact area, prevent the occurrence of dirt such as dirt and dust, and reduce the erroneous detection of the game ball by the photosensor.

Furthermore, since a pair of inclined surfaces are provided in the first shape passage portion of the ball passage, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surfaces remove the dirt from the contact portion with the game ball. It is possible to guide the ball further downward, reduce the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and avoid the adhesion of dirt to the game ball.

In addition, since the opening is provided on the upstream side of the first shape passage portion in which the photosensor is provided in the ball passage, dirt such as dirt and dust inside the ball passage can be discharged to the outside through the opening. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and to reduce erroneous detection of a game ball caused by dirt in the photosensor.

In addition, since at least one of the downstream side and the upstream side of the first-shaped passage portion in which at least the photosensor is provided in the ball passage is the second-shaped passage portion composed of the flat bottom surface and the pair of side wall surfaces, When a plurality of game balls stop in the two-shaped passage portion, the game balls are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls are arranged so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. That is, when a plurality of game balls stop in the second shape passage portion, they are arranged in a zigzag pattern and are not arranged in a line on the axis of the ball passage. Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game balls to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, compared to the case where a plurality of game balls are arranged in a line on the axis, It is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the stationary member, making it difficult to damage the member, and avoiding an increase in the cost of the game machine because the strength and rigidity of the member do not need to be increased more than necessary. can be suppressed.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of game balls circulating in the ball passage.

[15-4c. Relationship between the solution means of the fourth technical feature and the embodiment]
The ball launching unit 550 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment serves as the ball launching means of the above solving means, and the foul unit 570, circulating ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit 700 in this embodiment are the above solving means. In the ball circulation means of the means, the ball lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting outlet passage 652 of the ball lifting unit 650 in this embodiment, and the ball feeding passage 703 of the ball feeding unit 700 are the ball passages of the above solving means, The V-shaped passage portion 651a and the V-shaped passage portion 652a in the present embodiment are the first shape passage portions of the above solution, and the U-shaped passage portion 651b, the U-shaped passage portion 652b, and the ball feeding passage 703 in the present embodiment are the above-mentioned The portions where the sphere-lifting entrance earth sheet metal 655 and the sphere-lifting exit earth sheet metal 656 in this embodiment are attached to the second shape passage portion of the solving means correspond to the openings of the solving means.

[15-4d. Characteristic action and effect of the fourth technical feature]
In the following, the actions and effects of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 in the ball lifting unit 650 will be described as the ball passage. Description is omitted. According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 that shoots the game ball B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 is sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball lifter. Collected by the upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 and supplied to the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 based on the player's holding ball data (the number of holding balls is 1 or more). In the pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed type game machine, management game machine), the ball lifting exit passage 652 of the ball lifting unit 650 through which the game ball B circulates. The portion is a V-shaped passage portion 652a having a V-shaped cross section having a pair of slanted surfaces that are slanted so that the interval widens as it goes upward, and the pair of slanted surfaces allows the game ball B to be positioned below its center. Since they are in contact with each other at two points, the game ball B does not swing in the width direction of the ball lifting exit passage 652 at the portion of the lifting exit sensor 654, and the game ball B does not hit the side wall of the ball lifting exit passage 652. It is possible to avoid the generation of stains such as dirt and dust due to the side walls being worn or scratched due to contact. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the sphere lifting exit passage 652 can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing the occurrence of the above and reducing erroneous detection of the game ball B flowing through the ball lifting exit passage 652.例文帳に追加

In addition, in the V-shaped passage portion 652a provided with the lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of a photo sensor in the ball lifting exit passage 652, the game ball B does not swing in the width direction of the ball lifting exit passage 652. The positional relationship between the lifting exit sensor 654 (photosensor) and the game ball B can be made constant, and the game ball circulating in the ball lifting exit passage 652 can be eliminated by eliminating erroneous detection due to the deviation of the positional relationship. B can be reliably detected.

In addition, since the game ball B is brought into contact with the pair of inclined surfaces in the V-shaped passage portion 652a provided with the lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of a photo sensor, the game ball B is brought into contact with the pair of ridges. Compared to the case where the game ball B is brought into contact with the ball, it is possible to reduce the wear and damage of the contact part by the game ball B, prevent the occurrence of stains such as dirt and dust, and prevent the erroneous detection of the game ball B by the lifting exit sensor 654. can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage portion 652a of the ball lifting exit passage 652 is provided with a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to the contact of the game ball B, the inclined surfaces remove the dirt. It can be guided downward from the contact portion with the ball B, the influence of dirt on the lifting exit sensor 654 can be reduced, and the adhesion of dirt to the game ball B can be avoided.

In addition, an opening to which a sphere lifting outlet ground sheet metal 656 is attached is provided on the upstream side of the V-shaped passage 652a in the sphere lifting outlet passage 652 where the lifting outlet sensor 654 consisting of a photo sensor is provided. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball lifting outlet passage 652 can be discharged to the outside from the opening, so that the influence of dirt on the lifting outlet sensor 654 can be reduced. False detection of the game ball B caused by dirt in the upper exit sensor 654 can be reduced.

In addition, at least one of the downstream side or the upstream side (here, both the upstream side and the downstream side) of the V-shaped passage portion 652a in which the lifting exit sensor 654 consisting of the photo sensor in the ball lifting exit passage 652 is provided Since the U-shaped passage 652b and the ball feeding passage 703 are formed with a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces, when a plurality of game balls B stop in the U-shaped passage 652b and the ball feeding passage 703, , By being pushed by the game ball B on the upstream side, the game balls B are arranged so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. That is, when a plurality of game balls B are stopped in the U-shaped passage portion 652b and the ball feeding passage 703, they are arranged in a staggered manner and are not arranged in a line on the axis of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 and the ball feeding passage 703. Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game ball B to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, compared to the case where the game balls are arranged in a row on the axis, the plurality of game balls It is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the ball-feeding movable member 705 (the ball stop portion 705e) of the ball-feeding unit 700 that stops the ball B, thereby making it difficult to damage the ball-feeding movable member 705. There is no need to reinforce the movable member 705 excessively, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[15-5. Fifth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-5a. Background of the fifth technical feature]
A game machine such as a pachinko machine is proposed in which a ball sensor is provided in a ball passage through which game balls circulate, and the presence or absence of a game ball in the ball passage is determined by detection of the game ball by the ball sensor. (For example, Patent Document A5: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-188537). In the technique of Patent Document A5, two ball sensors are provided at intervals in the ball passage, and the presence or absence of game balls is determined by combining detection signals from the two ball sensors.

However, in the technique of Patent Document A5, since a plurality of ball sensors are provided to determine the presence or absence of a game ball at a predetermined portion of the ball passage, the cost increases and the load on the control means involved in the determination is increased. There was a problem of increasing Therefore, it is conceivable to determine the presence or absence of a game ball by a single ball sensor, but it is difficult to accurately determine the absence of a game ball at a portion (stationary portion) where the circulation of the game ball temporarily stops. was difficult.

Therefore, in the following solution means, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, a game ball that can reliably detect the presence or absence of a game ball at a stationary portion where the game ball is temporarily stopped in the passage through which the game ball circulates. The challenge is to provide the machine.

[15-5b. Means for solving the fifth technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
a control means capable of controlling the ball circulation means and the ball launch means;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The ball launching means and the ball circulation means are
a stopping part provided on a circulating ball path through which the game balls circulate and capable of temporarily stopping the circulation of the game balls;
a ball sensor for detecting a game ball stationary at the stationary portion;
and
The control means is
When the game ball detection time and non-detection time by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold value, the presence or absence of the game ball in the stationary portion is determined, and the ball circulation means is controlled.
characterized by being

Here, the ``retaining portion'' includes a ``launching rail (launch pad) in the ball launching means'', a ``ball feeding passage of the ball feeding unit that supplies game balls one by one to the ball firing means in the ball circulation means'', and a ``ball feeding passage''. A ball lifting inlet passage and a ball lifting outlet passage of a ball lifting unit that lifts game balls in the ball circulation means, a ball storage passage of a circulation ball path unit that stores game balls in the ball circulation means, etc. mentioned.

Further, the "ball sensor" includes a "photosensor having a light-emitting portion and a light-receiving portion," a "dielectric sensor that detects changes in induced current," a "contact sensor that detects contact with a game ball," and a "magnetic change sensor." magnetic sensor for detecting ", "capacitance sensor for detecting change in electrostatic capacitance", and the like. When a plurality of stationary portions are provided, the ball sensors provided in the respective stationary portions may be of the same type or of different types.

By the way, conventionally, the detection of a game ball at a prize-winning hole or the like is performed by checking the output from a photo sensor (ball sensor) at predetermined interrupt intervals (for example, 4 ms). (In other words, "011"), it is determined that the game ball has been detected (ON). That is, when the output from the photosensor is "011", it is determined to be ON, and when it is other than "011", it is determined to be OFF. However, when a ball sensor is provided in a stationary portion where the flow of a game ball temporarily stops, if the presence or absence of a game ball is determined by the conventional determination method as described above, the ball sensor cannot detect the stationary portion. When there are no game balls in the stationary portion, only OFF occurs, and when game balls are supplied to the stationary portion, ON occurs frequently at short intervals, and the game balls stored in the stationary portion move one by one. If there is (the game ball is moving at the shooting interval), many short-interval OFFs will occur. Therefore, in the conventional determination method, it was not possible to accurately determine that there is no game ball in the stationary portion.

According to the configuration of means 1, a game board having a game area where a game is played with game balls, a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and a game ball shot by the ball shooting means are collected. and a control means capable of controlling the ball circulation means and the ball launching means, and the ball launching means is operated based on the data of the player's ball held in the form of data. A gaming machine that shoots game balls, wherein the ball shooting means and the ball circulation means are provided on a circulation ball path through which the game balls circulate, and a stopping section that can temporarily stop the circulation of the game balls. and a ball sensor for detecting a game ball stationary at the stationary portion, and the control means detects when the game ball detection time and non-detection time by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold value, and the stationary portion (In [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [4-5. Ball Lifting Unit] chapter, Figures 57 and 58, etc.). see description).

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (a so-called enclosed-type gaming machine, a controlled gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from a ball shooting means based on a number of balls of 1 or more), game balls on a circulating ball path through which game balls circulate are A ball sensor is provided in the stationary portion which can be temporarily stopped, and when the detection time and the non-detection time of the game ball by the ball sensor exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the presence or absence of the game ball in the stationary portion is determined by the control means. It is arranged to control the circulation means. In other words, in the conventional determination, only the condition (threshold value) that the game ball is present (ON) is used to determine the presence or absence (ON/OFF) of the game ball. A threshold value is provided for each of the (present) determination and the OFF (absent) determination, and ON or OFF is determined only when the non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the ball sensor is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, it is possible to reliably determine the presence or absence of a game ball in the stationary portion of the ball passage where a plurality of game balls are stationary.

In addition, since the presence or absence of game balls in the stationary portion is reliably determined and the ball circulation means is controlled, the ball running out occurs in the circulating ball path (stationary portion) and the held ball data (number of held balls) is lost. In spite of the presence of the game balls, the game balls cannot be shot, or the ball circulation means is damaged or the balls are clogged due to the further supply of the game balls in the state where the retaining part is full. It can be avoided, and the player can continue to enjoy the game.

If the threshold value is too small, even a slight vibration or the like causes erroneous detection and noise in control. Also, if the threshold is too large, the state of the game ball will be missed. Therefore, the appropriate threshold varies depending on the location where the sphere sensor is installed, but it is desirable that the minimum is 10 ms or more and the maximum is 300 ms or less. Also, if the threshold value is determined to be a multiple of the interrupt period, it is only necessary to count the number of interrupts in terms of software control, so the load on the software can be reduced.

Also, a plurality of stationary parts may be provided on the circulating ball path, and the presence or absence of game balls may be determined by the same threshold value or different threshold value according to the stationary part by the control means. As a result, the threshold for determining the presence or absence of game balls can be changed according to the stationary portion (ball sensor). For the ball sensor in the stationary part such as the passage, the threshold value is decreased, and the ball sensor in the stationary part such as the ball lifting inlet passage and the ball lifting outlet passage of the ball lifting unit that lifts the game ball to the ball feeding unit , it is possible to increase or decrease the threshold. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game balls according to the circulation speed (stop frequency) of game balls in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls, etc., it is possible to efficiently perform control by the control means. , the load on the control can be reduced.

Further, a plurality of stationary parts are provided on the circulating ball path, and the control means determines the presence and absence of game balls with the same threshold value or the presence and absence of game balls with different threshold values according to the stationary parts. You can let them do it. As a result, it is possible to change the threshold value for the existence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball according to the stationary portion (ball sensor). In the ball sensor of the stationary part such as the launch rail, the threshold value for the presence of the game ball and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball are made the same, and the ball lifting entrance passage and the ball lifting It is possible to make the threshold value for the presence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball different from each other in the ball sensor at the stationary portion such as the upper exit passage. Therefore, depending on the circulation speed (stop frequency) of the game balls in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls, etc., the threshold value for the existence of the game ball and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball may be made the same or different. , the control by the control means can be efficiently performed in accordance with the stationary portion, and the load on the control can be reduced.

In addition, at least a part of the stopping portion has a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and with which the game ball comes into contact, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface. A passage may be provided. As a result, at least a part of the stopping portion where the game balls temporarily stay is provided with a U-shaped passage portion consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces, so that a plurality of game balls can pass through the U-shaped passage portion. When stopped, the game balls are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls are arranged so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. That is, when a plurality of game balls stop in the U-shaped passage, they are arranged in a staggered manner, and the game balls are not arranged in a row on the axis of the stop (passage). Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game ball to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, it is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the predetermined member that stops the game ball. This makes it possible to make the member less likely to break, and to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine without the need to reinforce the member excessively.

Further, a photo sensor is included as the ball sensor, and at least the part of the photo sensor in the stationary portion has a pair of slanted surfaces which are in contact with the game ball and are slanted so that the interval widens as it goes upward. A V-shaped passage may be provided. As a result, since the V-shaped passage portion is provided in the portion where the photosensor is provided in the stopping portion, the game ball contacts the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage portion, and the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the passage (ball passage) of the stationary part, and the game ball contacts the side wall and the side wall is worn or damaged, thereby avoiding the generation of stains such as dust and dirt. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dirt such as dirt and dust in the stationary portion as much as possible, so that it is possible to prevent erroneous detection from occurring due to interference of light receiving and emitting of the photosensor due to dirt etc. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of a game ball parked at a parking portion.

Further, as described above, when the V-shaped passage is provided, at least at the portion of the photo sensor in the stopping portion, the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage prevent the game ball from swinging in the width direction of the ball passage. The positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball can be made constant, and erroneous detection due to deviation of the positional relationship can be eliminated, and the game ball can be reliably detected.

Furthermore, when the V-shaped passage portion is provided as described above, since the V-shaped passage portion has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to contact with the game ball, the The slanted surface can guide the dirt below the contact part with the game ball, reduce the influence of the dirt on the photosensor, and prevent the dirt from adhering to the game ball. The V-shaped passage portion may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage having a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected to each other. It may be an inverted trapezoidal passage narrowing down.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The said stop is
A plurality are provided on the circulation ball path,
The control means is
Determining whether or not there is a game ball with the same threshold value or different threshold values according to the stationary portion.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 2, a plurality of stationary parts are provided on the circulating ball path, and the presence or absence of game balls is determined by the same threshold value or different threshold value according to the stationary part by the control means. Yes (see descriptions regarding launch subtraction sensor 554, lift entry sensor 653, lift exit sensor 654, pre-launch sensor 704, etc. in Detailed Description).

As a result, the threshold for determining the presence or absence of game balls can be changed according to the stationary portion (ball sensor). For the ball sensor in the stationary part such as the passage, the threshold value is decreased, and the ball sensor in the stationary part such as the ball lifting inlet passage and the ball lifting outlet passage of the ball lifting unit that lifts the game ball to the ball feeding unit , it is possible to increase or decrease the threshold. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game balls according to the circulation speed (stop frequency) of game balls in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls, etc., it is possible to efficiently perform control by the control means. , the load on the control can be reduced.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The said stop is
A plurality are provided on the circulation ball path,
The control means is
Depending on the stationary part, the presence and absence of the game ball are determined by the same threshold value, or the presence and absence of the game ball are determined by different threshold values.
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, a plurality of stationary parts are provided on the circulating ball path, and the control means sets the presence and absence of game balls to the same threshold value or the presence and absence of game balls according to the stationary parts. Different thresholds are used for determination (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], see the descriptions regarding the launch subtraction sensor 554, the lift entrance sensor 653, the lift exit sensor 654, the before-fire sensor 704, etc. ).

As a result, it is possible to change the threshold value for the existence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball according to the stationary portion (ball sensor). In the ball sensor of the stationary part such as the launch rail, the threshold value for the presence of the game ball and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball are made the same, and the ball lifting entrance passage and the ball lifting It is possible to make the threshold value for the presence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball different from each other in the ball sensor at the stationary portion such as the upper exit passage. Therefore, depending on the circulation speed (stop frequency) of the game balls in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls, etc., the threshold value for the existence of the game ball and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball may be made the same or different. , the control by the control means can be efficiently performed in accordance with the stationary portion, and the load on the control can be reduced.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The said stop is
A U-shaped passage portion having a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends of the bottom surface in the width direction is provided at least in part. ing"
characterized by being

By the way, since the circulation of the game balls is temporarily stopped by a predetermined member in the retaining portion of the circulating ball path, the more game balls are retained in the retaining portion, the more the game balls are retained. There is a risk that the ball pressure applied to a given member that is in contact will increase, and that member will be more likely to break, and if the member is reinforced to avoid breakage, the cost will increase.

According to the configuration of means 4, at least a part of the stopping portion is provided with a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and with which the game ball is in contact, and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface. (In the [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], a U-shaped passage portion 651b of the rising inlet passage 651 and a U-shaped passage portion of the rising outlet passage 652 are provided. See the description regarding section 652b).

As a result, at least a part of the stopping portion where the game balls temporarily stay is provided with a U-shaped passage portion consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces, so that a plurality of game balls can pass through the U-shaped passage portion. When stopped, the game balls are pushed by the game balls on the upstream side, so that the game balls are arranged so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. That is, when a plurality of game balls stop in the U-shaped passage, they are arranged in a staggered manner, and the game balls are not arranged in a row on the axis of the stop (passage). Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game ball to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, it is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the predetermined member that stops the game ball. This makes it possible to make the member less likely to break, and to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine without the need to reinforce the member excessively.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The sphere sensor
contains a photosensor,
The stop portion is
A V-shaped passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces inclined so that a game ball touches them and the interval widens as it goes upward is provided at least at the location of the photosensor.”
characterized by being

By the way, when a photo sensor is used as a ball sensor, if the inner peripheral shape of the photo sensor portion in the stationary portion is square, the game ball tends to swing in the width direction of the stationary portion (ball passage). By contacting the side wall, the side surface is worn or damaged, and dirt such as dirt and dust is likely to be generated, and the dirt may interfere with light reception and light emission of the photosensor, resulting in erroneous detection.

According to the configuration of the means 5, a photo sensor is included as the ball sensor, and a game ball is in contact with at least the part of the photo sensor in the stationary portion, and the pair is inclined so that the distance increases as it goes upward. (In the [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the V-shaped passage portion 651a of the upper ball-lifting inlet passage 651 and the V-shaped portion of the ball-lifting outlet passage 652 are provided. (See the passage 652a, the lift inlet sensor 653, lift outlet sensor 654, etc.).

As a result, since the V-shaped passage portion is provided in the portion where the photosensor is provided in the stopping portion, the game ball contacts the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage portion, and the game ball does not swing in the width direction of the passage (ball passage) of the stationary part, and the game ball contacts the side wall and the side wall is worn or damaged, thereby avoiding the generation of stains such as dust and dirt. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dirt such as dirt and dust in the stationary portion as much as possible, so that it is possible to prevent erroneous detection from occurring due to interference of light receiving and emitting of the photosensor due to dirt etc. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of a game ball parked at a parking portion.

In addition, at least at the portion of the photosensor in the stationary portion, the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage prevents the game ball from swinging in the width direction of the ball passage, so that the positional relationship between the photosensor and the game ball is kept constant. It is possible to eliminate erroneous detection due to the displacement of the positional relationship and reliably detect the game ball.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage portion has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to contact with the game ball, the inclined surface removes the dirt from the contact portion with the game ball. It is possible to guide it downward, reduce the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and avoid the adhesion of dirt to the game ball.

The V-shaped passage portion may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage having a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected to each other. It may be an inverted trapezoidal passage narrowing down.

Means 6: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
a control means capable of controlling the ball circulation means and the ball launch means;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The ball launching means and the ball circulation means are
a plurality of stopping portions provided on a circulation ball path through which game balls circulate and capable of temporarily stopping the circulation of game balls;
a plurality of ball sensors including photosensors for detecting game balls stationary at each of the stationary portions;
and
The stop portion is
``V-shaped passages having a pair of sloping surfaces which are inclined so that game balls are in contact with each other and the distance between them increases as they go upward'' is provided at least at the location of the photosensor, and ``a game ball is provided. A U-shaped passage portion having a flat bottom surface with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface” excludes the V-shaped passage portion is provided in the part,
The control means is
When the game ball detection time and non-detection time by the ball sensor exceed a predetermined threshold value, the presence or absence of the game ball in the stationary portion is determined to control the ball circulation means, and further, "according to the stationary portion , determine the presence or absence of a game ball by the same threshold value or a different threshold value”, and “depending on the stationary portion, the same threshold value or the presence and absence of a game ball are determined. and are determined by different thresholds.
It is characterized by

According to the configuration of means 6, there are a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls, a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and a game ball shot by the ball shooting means being recovered. and a control means capable of controlling the ball circulation means and the ball launching means, and the ball launching means is operated based on the data of the player's ball held in the form of data. A gaming machine that shoots game balls, wherein the ball shooting means and the ball circulation means are provided on a circulation ball path through which the game balls circulate, and a plurality of devices capable of temporarily stopping the circulation of the game balls. It has a stationary portion and a plurality of ball sensors including a photosensor that detects a game ball stationary at each stationary portion. A V-shaped passage portion having a pair of inclined surfaces that are inclined so as to widen the distance" is provided at least in the photosensor portion, and a "flat passage portion with a width larger than the diameter of the game ball and in contact with the game ball. A U-shaped passage portion having a bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces erected from both ends in the width direction of the bottom surface is provided in a portion other than the V-shaped passage portion, and the control means is a game ball using a ball sensor. When the detection time and the non-detection time exceed a predetermined threshold value, the presence or absence of the game ball in the stationary portion is determined to control the ball circulation means, and further, "the same threshold value or a different threshold value depending on the stationary portion, "Determine the presence or absence of the game ball by" and "Determine the presence and absence of the game ball with the same threshold value or the presence and absence of the game ball with different threshold values according to the stationary part". It is.

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (a so-called enclosed-type gaming machine, a controlled gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from a ball shooting means based on a number of balls of 1 or more), game balls on a circulating ball path through which game balls circulate are A ball sensor is provided in the stationary portion which can be temporarily stopped, and when the detection time and the non-detection time of the game ball by the ball sensor exceeds a predetermined threshold value, the presence or absence of the game ball in the stationary portion is determined by the control means. It is arranged to control the circulation means. In other words, in the conventional determination, only the condition (threshold value) that the game ball is present (ON) is used to determine the presence or absence (ON/OFF) of the game ball. A threshold value is provided for each of the (present) determination and the OFF (absent) determination, and ON or OFF is determined only when the non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the ball sensor is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, it is possible to reliably determine the presence or absence of a game ball in the stationary portion of the ball passage where a plurality of game balls are stationary.

In addition, since the presence or absence of game balls in the stationary portion is reliably determined and the ball circulation means is controlled, the ball running out occurs in the circulating ball path (stationary portion) and the held ball data (number of held balls) is lost. In spite of the presence of the game balls, the game balls cannot be shot, or the ball circulation means is damaged or the balls are clogged due to the further supply of the game balls in the state where the retaining part is full. It can be avoided, and the player can continue to enjoy the game.

Furthermore, the threshold for determining the presence or absence of game balls can be changed according to the stationary portion (ball sensor). For ball sensors in stationary parts such as It is possible to increase or decrease the threshold. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of game balls according to the circulation speed (stop frequency) of game balls in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls, etc., it is possible to efficiently perform control by the control means. , the load on the control can be reduced.

In addition, since the threshold value for the presence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball may be changed according to the stationary portion (ball sensor), for example, the ball shooting means for shooting the game ball In the ball sensor of the stationary part such as the launch rail, the threshold value for the presence of the game ball and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball are set to be the same, or the ball lifting entrance passage and the ball lifting It is possible to make the threshold value for the presence of a game ball and the threshold value for the absence of a game ball different from each other in the ball sensor at the stationary portion such as the exit passage. Therefore, depending on the circulation speed (stop frequency) of the game balls in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls, etc., the threshold value for the existence of the game ball and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball may be made the same or different. , the control by the control means can be efficiently performed in accordance with the stationary portion, and the load on the control can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage is provided in the portion where the photo sensor is provided in the stationary portion, the game ball contacts the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage, and the game ball is moved to the photo sensor. To prevent a game ball from swinging in the width direction of a passage (ball passage) of a stationary part and preventing the side wall from being worn or scratched by a game ball coming into contact with the side wall, thereby preventing dirt such as dirt and dust from being generated. can be done. Therefore, it is possible to reduce dirt such as dirt and dust in the stationary portion as much as possible, so that it is possible to prevent erroneous detection from occurring due to interference of light receiving and emitting of the photosensor due to dirt etc. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing erroneous detection of a game ball parked at a parking portion.

In addition, since a U-shaped passage consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces is provided in a portion other than the V-shaped passage where the photo sensor is provided in the stopping portion, a plurality of games can be played in the U-shaped passage. When the ball stops, it is pushed by the game ball on the upstream side, and the game balls are arranged so as to alternately contact the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. That is, when a plurality of game balls stop in the U-shaped passage, they are arranged in a staggered manner, and the game balls are not arranged in a row on the axis of the stop (passage). Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game ball to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, it is possible to reduce the ball pressure applied to the predetermined member that stops the game ball. This makes it possible to make the member less likely to break, and to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine without the need to reinforce the member excessively.

Furthermore, at the location of the photo sensor in the stationary portion, the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage prevent the game ball from swinging in the width direction of the ball passage, so the positional relationship between the photo sensor and the game ball is kept constant. It is possible to eliminate erroneous detection due to the displacement of the positional relationship, and to reliably detect the game ball.

In addition, since the V-shaped passage has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to the contact of the game ball, the inclined surface removes the dirt from the contact area with the game ball. It is possible to guide it downward, reduce the influence of dirt on the photosensor, and avoid the adhesion of dirt to the game ball. The V-shaped passage portion may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage having a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected to each other. It may be an inverted trapezoidal passage narrowing down.

If the threshold value is too small, even a slight vibration or the like causes erroneous detection and noise in control. Also, if the threshold is too large, the state of the game ball will be missed. Therefore, the appropriate threshold varies depending on the location where the sphere sensor is installed, but it is desirable that the minimum is 10 ms or more and the maximum is 300 ms or less. Also, if the threshold value is determined to be a multiple of the interrupt period, it is only necessary to count the number of interrupts in terms of software control, so the load on the software can be reduced.

Thus, according to the above solution, a gaming machine is provided that can reliably detect the presence or absence of a game ball at a stationary portion where the game ball is temporarily stopped in the path through which the game ball circulates. can provide.

[15-5c. Relationship between solution means for fifth technical feature and embodiment]
The ball launching unit 550 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment serves as the ball launching means of the above solving means, and the foul unit 570, circulating ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit 700 in this embodiment are the above solving means. In the ball circulation means of the means, the circulation path R in this embodiment is the circulation ball path in the above solution, the ball launch pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550 in this embodiment, the ball meandering passage 604 of the circulation ball path unit 600, the ball The ball-lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball-lifting outlet passage 652 in the ball-lifting unit 650, the ball-feeding passage 703 of the ball-feeding unit 700, and the ball-feeding subtraction sensor 554 of the ball-launching unit 550 in this embodiment , the circulating ball shortage sensor 621 and the circulating ball excess sensor 622 of the circulation ball path unit 600, the lifting inlet sensor 653 and the lifting outlet sensor 654 of the ball lifting unit 650, and the before-fire sensor 704 of the ball feeding unit 700 are the above solving means. , and the launch subtraction sensor 554, the lift entrance sensor 653, and the lift exit sensor 654 in this embodiment correspond to the photosensors of the above solution.

The ball launch pad 552b, the V-shaped passage portion 651a of the ball lifting inlet passage 651, and the V-shaped passage portion 652a of the ball lifting outlet passage 652 in this embodiment are the V-shaped passage portions of the above-described solution means, and the ball in this embodiment The meandering passage 604, the U-shaped passage portion 651b of the ball lifting inlet passage 651, the U-shaped passage portion 652b of the ball lifting outlet passage 652, and the ball feeding passage 703 are the U-shaped passage portions of the above-described means for solving the problem. The control board 740 corresponds to the control means of the above solution.

[15-5d. Characteristic action and effect of the fifth technical feature]
In the following, the function and effect of a ball lifting entrance sensor 653 of a ball lifting entrance passage 651 in a ball lifting unit 650 as a stationary part in which the circulation of the game ball B is temporarily stopped to be in a fixed position stop state will be described. Since the subtraction sensor 554, the circulating ball shortage sensor 621, the circulating ball excess sensor 622, the lifting exit sensor 654, the firing front sensor 704, and the like have similar effects, their actions are omitted unless particularly necessary. Description of effects is omitted. According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 that shoots the game ball B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 is sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball lifter. Collected by the upper unit 650 and the ball feeding unit 700 and supplied to the ball shooting unit 550, the game ball B is shot from the ball shooting unit 550 based on the player's holding ball data (the number of holding balls is 1 or more). In a pachinko machine 1 (so-called enclosed type game machine, management game machine), a ball lifting unit as a stopping part capable of temporarily stopping a game ball B on a circulation route R in which the game ball B circulates. A lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photo sensor is provided in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 of 650, and the frame control board 740 detects when the detection time and non-detection time of the game ball B by the lifting entrance sensor 653 exceeds a predetermined threshold value. , the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 is determined to control the drive of the lifting motor 664 . In other words, in the conventional determination, the presence (ON/OFF) of the game ball B is determined using only the condition (threshold value) that the game ball B is present (ON), whereas this embodiment determines whether the game ball B is present (ON/OFF). , a threshold value is set for each of the determination of ON (presence) and the determination of OFF (absence), and ON or OFF is determined only when non-detection or detection continues beyond the threshold. That is, for example, when the output from the lifting inlet sensor 653 is "01111...", it is determined to be ON, and when it is "10000...", it is determined to be OFF. Thereby, it is possible to reliably determine the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 where the plurality of game balls B stay.

In addition, since the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball lifting inlet passage 651 is reliably determined and the driving of the lifting motor 664 is controlled, the circulation route R (here, the ball lifting inlet passage 651) A game ball B cannot be fired despite having ball data (the number of balls held) due to run out of balls, or a game ball B is supplied while the ball-lifting inlet passage 651 is full. As a result, the ball lifting unit 650 can be prevented from being damaged or clogged with balls, and the player can continue to enjoy the game.

Furthermore, since the threshold for determining the presence or absence of the game ball B may be changed according to the stationary portion where the circulation of the game ball B is temporarily stopped, the game ball B is supplied to the ball shooting unit 550. The ball of the ball lifting unit 650 that lifts the game ball B to the ball feeding unit 700 is reduced in the sensor 704 before firing provided in the stationary part such as the ball feeding passage 703 of the ball feeding unit 700. A lifting inlet sensor 653 and a lifting outlet sensor 654 provided in a stationary portion such as the lifting inlet passage 651 and the ball lifting outlet passage 652 can increase or decrease the threshold value. Therefore, by determining the presence or absence of the game ball B according to the circulation speed (stop frequency) of the game ball B in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls B, etc., the control by the frame control board 740 can be efficiently performed. can be performed, and the load on control can be reduced.

In addition, the threshold value for presence of game ball B and the threshold value for absence of game ball B may be different according to the stationary portion where the circulation of game ball B is temporarily stopped. A launch subtraction sensor 554 provided in a stationary portion such as the ball launching pad 552b of the ball launching unit 550 that launches the game ball B makes the threshold for the presence of the game ball B equal to the threshold for the absence of the game ball, In the lifting entrance sensor 653 and the lifting exit sensor 654 provided in the stationary part such as the ball lifting entrance passage 651 and the ball lifting exit passage 652 of the ball lifting unit 650 that lifts the game ball B, the game ball It is possible to make the threshold for B present and the threshold for no game ball B different. Therefore, depending on the circulation speed (stop frequency) of the game ball B in the stationary portion, the number of stationary game balls B, etc., the threshold value for the presence of the game ball B and the threshold value for the absence of the game ball may be set to be the same or different. By making a judgment by setting the frame control board 740 to the stationary portion, the control can be efficiently performed in accordance with the stationary portion, and the load on the control can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped passage portion 651a is provided in the portion of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 where the lifting entrance sensor 653 made of a photo sensor is provided, the game ball B is placed on the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage portion 651a. By contacting, the game ball B does not swing in the width direction of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 at the part of the lifting entrance sensor 653, and the game ball B contacts the side wall and the side wall is worn or damaged. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of contamination such as dirt and dust. Therefore, dirt such as dirt and dust in the ball lifting entrance passage 651 can be reduced as much as possible. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of preventing the occurrence of detection and reducing erroneous detection of a game ball B stationary at a stationary portion.

In addition, a U-shaped passage portion 651b consisting of a flat bottom surface and a pair of side wall surfaces is provided in a portion other than the V-shaped passage portion 651a in which the lifting entrance sensor 653, which is a photo sensor, is provided in the ball lifting entrance passage 651. Therefore, when a plurality of game balls B stop in the U-shaped passage portion 651b, the game balls B are pushed by the game balls B on the upstream side, thereby alternately contacting the pair of side wall surfaces from the downstream side. Line up like this. In other words, when a plurality of game balls B are stopped in the U-shaped passage portion 651b, they are arranged in a staggered manner, and the game balls B are not arranged in a line on the axis of the ball lifting entrance passage 651.例文帳に追加Therefore, since part of the ball pressure of the game ball B to the downstream side can be alternately released to the contacting side wall surface, the ball pressure applied to the lifting spiral shaft 661 that stops the game ball B can be reduced. It is possible to make the lifting spiral shaft 661 less likely to be damaged, and it is not necessary to reinforce the lifting spiral shaft 661 excessively, so that an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, at the part of the lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photo sensor in the ball lifting entrance passage 651, the game ball B is prevented from swinging in the width direction of the ball lifting entrance passage 651 due to the pair of inclined surfaces of the V-shaped passage portion 651a. Therefore, the positional relationship between the lift entrance sensor 653 and the game ball B can be kept constant, and the game ball B can be reliably detected without erroneous detection due to deviation of the positional relationship.

In addition, since the V-shaped passage portion 651a of the ball-lifting entrance passage 651 has a pair of inclined surfaces, even if dirt such as dirt or dust occurs due to the contact of the game ball B, the inclined surface will stain the ball. can be guided downward from the contact portion with the game ball B, the influence of dirt on the lifting entrance sensor 653 consisting of a photo sensor can be reduced, and the adhesion of dirt to the game ball B can be avoided. can be made The V-shaped passage portion 651a may have a pair of inclined surfaces, and may be a passage having a V-shaped cross section where the lower ends of the pair of inclined surfaces are connected to each other. It may be an inverted trapezoidal passage narrowing downward.

[15-6. 6th technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-6a. Background of the sixth technical feature]
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that circulates a large number of game balls enclosed inside during play and prevents the player from touching the game balls (so-called enclosed type game machine, management game machine) is known (for example, Patent Document A6: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-162850). In a gaming machine such as that disclosed in Patent Document A6, game balls hit into the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means.

Such a so-called enclosed game machine is not popular at present, and it is expected that in the process of popularization, it will be mixed with conventional pachinko machines in island facilities for conventional pachinko machines.

For this reason, even in a so-called enclosed type gaming machine, it is placed in an environment where supplied balls flow above the back surface of the gaming machine and collected balls flow below the back surface of the gaming machine. For this reason, game balls, metal powder generated from the game balls, and screws that have been forgotten to be collected during replacement work fall from above.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means are intended to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately processing objects falling from above the gaming machine.

[15-6b. Solution for the sixth technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game machine that encloses game balls in the game machine and plays games with game balls that circulate inside the machine,
The game machine is one in which a game board is housed in a game machine frame, and the game machine frame includes a top cover that protects the game board from above and a rear cover that protects the game board from behind,
The upper surface of the upper surface cover is provided with a gentle slope that allows game balls that are spherical in shape to flow down backward, while the non-spherical member can stay on the upper surface of the upper surface cover.

Here, "game machines in which game balls are enclosed and games are played with game balls that circulate inside the machine" correspond to game machines called enclosed pachinko machines, circulating pachinko machines, and controlled game machines. do.

Further, the "upper surface cover" and the "rear surface cover" include a plate-shaped member made of synthetic resin. As for the "rear cover", it is desirable that it can be opened and closed for maintenance, but it is desirable that it cannot be opened and closed easily from the viewpoint of crime prevention.

The gentle slope has an angle of several degrees to 15 degrees from the horizontal plane, and a deeper angle than that is not suitable because non-spherical screws and metal powder may slide down.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine in which game balls are enclosed and a game is played with game balls circulating inside the game machine, the game machine accommodates a game board in a game machine frame, and The game machine frame includes a top cover that protects the game board from above and a rear cover that protects the game board from behind. It has a gentle slope that can be retained on the top surface of the top cover (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [4-1. ).

With the above configuration, game balls falling from the ball supply path, for example, flow down the upper surface of the top cover, drop as they are, and fall into the game ball recovery passage to be recovered, so no problem occurs. In addition, metal powder, screws, etc. do not flow down because of the gentle slope, but remain on the upper surface of the cover that protects the upper surface. For this reason, there is no problem that a foreign object such as a screw falls into the collection path and hinders the collection of the game balls.

By making the slope gentle as described above, the falling object selectively flows down or stays there. In other words, it is possible to appropriately process objects falling from above the gaming machine.

In the embodiment of this means, the inclination of the upper surface of the cover that protects from the upper surface is 2.00 degrees from the horizontal plane, and the so-called laying (generally tilting backward about 0.75 degrees) in the installed state of the pachinko machine is prevented. Considering this, the downward slope is 2.75 degrees.

It should be noted that the protective cover for the game machine frame that houses the game board must have ventilation holes to dissipate the heat generated by the game board. desirable. By not providing ventilation holes in the top cover, it is possible to prevent metal powder from adversely affecting electrical parts of the game board. In addition, unevenness due to ventilation holes does not hinder the flow of game balls.

Furthermore, when the top cover is molded by a resin injection molding machine, it is desirable not to provide a so-called gate for injecting resin into the mold on the top surface of the top cover. This is because if a gate is provided, irregularities may occur, which may hinder the flow of game balls.

Also, when the top cover is molded by a resin injection molding machine, it is desirable not to leave marks of ejector pins, which are caused by ejecting the molded product from the mold, similarly to the gate. Naturally, although the ejector pin marks are few, unevenness may occur, which may hinder the flow of game balls, and when cleaning is performed, metal powder may enter and make the appearance worse.

By maintaining the top surface of the top cover as smooth as possible in this way, the effect of the present invention, which is the effect of appropriately handling objects falling from above the game machine, can be exhibited more effectively.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
It is characterized in that ``no ventilation holes are provided in the upper surface of the upper surface cover, but ventilation holes are provided in the rear cover''.

According to the configuration of means 2, the upper surface of the upper cover is not provided with ventilation holes, but the rear cover is provided with ventilation holes. In other words, the ventilation holes are an essential component of the protective cover for the game machine frame that houses the game board, in order to dissipate heat from the game board that generates heat. It is desirable that there be none (see the description regarding the ventilation holes 502f in the Detailed Description).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the electrical parts of the game board from being adversely affected by falling metal powder by not providing ventilation holes on the top surface of the top cover. In addition, unevenness due to ventilation holes does not hinder the flow of game balls.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
It is characterized in that "the top cover is made of resin, and a resin injection port is not provided on the top surface of the top cover."

According to the configuration of means 3, the top cover is made of resin, and a resin injection port is not provided on the top surface of the top cover. See the description regarding top cover 502a).

With this configuration, unevenness caused by a resin injection port (a so-called gate) does not occur on the top surface of the top cover, so that game balls do not flow down.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
The feature is that the upper surface cover is made of resin, and the upper surface of the upper surface cover is not provided with traces of ejector pins.

According to the configuration of means 4, the top cover is made of resin, and the top surface of the top cover is designed not to leave traces of ejector pins (in the [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the description of the top cover 502a ).

With this configuration, the smoothness of the top surface of the top cover is improved because the ejector pin does not leave marks when the molded product is pushed out of the mold during injection molding. Although the marks of the ejector pins do not form such large irregularities, the absence of the marks of the ejector pins does not hinder the flow of the game ball. Also, when cleaning, there is no unevenness left by the marks of the ejector pin, so metal powder or the like does not enter, and the appearance is improved.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The game machine frame includes an outer frame fixed to the game hall island equipment and a game board housing frame pivotally supported by the outer frame, and the top cover is molded integrally with the game board housing frame. It is characterized by

According to the configuration of means 5, the game machine frame includes an outer frame fixed to the game hall island equipment and a game board accommodation frame pivotally supported by the outer frame, and the top cover is molded integrally with the game board accommodation frame. (See the description regarding the main body frame base 501 in [Description of the Invention]).

By constructing in this way, it is possible to save the assembly man-hours by integrally molding and to improve the strength of the entire game board housing frame (body frame).

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
``When the game board is accommodated in the game board accommodation frame, the upper surface cover includes a positioning portion for positioning the game board in contact with the inner side thereof''.

According to the configuration of the means 6, when the game board is accommodated in the game board accommodation frame, the upper surface cover is provided with a positioning portion for positioning the game board by coming into contact with the inside of the upper cover. Embodiment], see the description of the abutment surface 502j).

With this configuration, the positional relationship between the game board and the top cover is firmly fixed, and the purpose of protecting the game board of the game board housing frame can be achieved.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately handling objects falling from above the gaming machine.

[15-6c. Relationship between solution means of sixth technical feature and embodiment]
The main body frame 4 of the game board 5 of the present embodiment serves as the game board accommodation frame of the above solving means, the upper surface cover 502a of the main body frame base 501 of this embodiment serves as the upper surface cover of the above solving means, and the rear cover 502b of the present embodiment. corresponds to the rear cover of the above solution, and the ventilation hole 502f in this embodiment corresponds to the ventilation hole of the above solution.

[15-6d. Characteristic effects of the sixth technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a of the main body frame base 501 that protects the game board 5 housed in the main body frame 4 from above has a gently sloping rearward slope. Game balls B, metal powders, screws, etc. falling from above 1 can be properly treated. Specifically, since the game ball B, which is spherical, can be dropped under the pachinko machine 1 by causing the upper surface of the upper cover 502a to flow down, the game ball B can be recovered as it is without causing any trouble. In addition, non-spherical metal powder, screws, etc. can be retained on the upper surface cover 502a without flowing down, so that troubles do not occur.

Further, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a is not provided with the ventilation holes 502f. This prevents metal powder, screws, etc. from entering through the ventilation holes 502f, and does not adversely affect the electrical components of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the top surface of the top cover 502a molded by the injection molding machine is not provided with a gate for injecting molten resin into the mold during molding. As a result, unevenness derived from the gate does not occur on the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a, so that the game ball B does not flow down.

Similarly, care is taken not to leave traces of ejector pins when the injection-molded body frame base 501 is removed from the mold. Usually, the marks of the ejector pins are less likely to hinder the flow of the game ball B by properly treating the burrs, but when cleaning the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a where metal powder etc. are deposited, the ejector pin marks It may leave marks and spoil the aesthetic appearance. Therefore, by not leaving marks of the ejector pin, it is possible to easily restore the aesthetic appearance by cleaning.

Also, the top cover 502a is molded integrally with the main body frame base 501. As shown in FIG. By molding in this way, it is possible to save the number of assembly man-hours and improve the strength of the entire main body frame base unit 500 (game board accommodation frame).

The upper surface cover 502a not only protects the game board 5 housed inside on its upper surface, but also has a positioning portion (abutment surface 502j) for positioning the game board 5 in contact with the game board 5 inside. ing. As a result, the positional relationship between the game board 5 and the top cover 502a is fixed, and the purpose of the game board housing frame (body frame 4) to protect the game board 5 can be achieved.

In addition, the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a is not provided with ribs for reinforcement, so that the ribs do not make cleaning difficult, and maintenance is facilitated. Other members (for example, the frame 501a, the outer frame 2, etc.) may be provided to cover the upper surface of the upper surface cover 502a, and ribs may be provided in areas where foreign matter does not fall.

[15-7. Seventh technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-7a. Background of the seventh technical feature]
In recent years, the effective use of resources has become more important against the background of environmental problems. From such a point of view, in game machines, development is underway to form more parts from recyclable materials. On the other hand, the replacement cycle of machines at game halls (amusements) where game machines are installed is becoming shorter, and the number of discarded and dismantled game machines is on the rise. As a result, the burden of disassembling and sorting game machines is increasing, and there is a demand to reduce the work as much as possible.

For example, in a conventional gaming machine as shown in Patent Document A7 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018185), a side unit (ball entry unit) provided with a plurality of general winning holes as ball entry holes is disassembled. If you try to pull it forward to remove it from the game panel, the ball-entering unit bends and the positioning projections inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel tilt, causing a problem that takes time and effort to disassemble. rice field.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means provide a game machine capable of reducing the disassembly work required for sorting for recycling or the like.

[15-7b. Means for solving the seventh technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entering unit
It has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, and an opening provided to penetrate the game panel is opened from the front side. a first component attached to the gaming panel in a blocking manner;
a second component having a second attachment hole for attachment to the first component and attached from the rear side of the first component;
It is characterized by having ".

Here, the "entrance" is defined as "a winning opening that provides a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters (for example, a general winning opening, a normal winning opening, a starting winning opening (starting opening), a large winning opening, a special winning opening, etc.). , ``out slot for ejecting a game ball out of the gaming machine without returning it to the player without awarding a privilege even if it enters the game ball'', and the like.

Further, the "entrance" may be provided in the first structural member or may be provided in the second structural member.

In addition, the "game panel" includes "things made of wooden plywood such as plywood" and "things made up of a panel plate made by cutting a transparent resin plate and a panel holder holding the outer periphery of the panel plate. , "Injection-molded transparent resin", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit is , a positioning projection to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, so as to block the opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. and a second component that has a second mounting hole for attaching to the first component and is attached from the rear side of the first component. There is (see [12-1. Side unit of second embodiment] in [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention] and the descriptions of FIGS. 164 to 166, etc.).

As a result, the second component is attached to the front surface of the game panel by the mounting screws through the first mounting holes, and the second component is attached by the mounting screws through the second mounting holes. It is possible to increase the rigidity of the ball-entering unit configured by the and the second component. Therefore, when disassembling the game machine for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws screwed into the game panel through the first mounting holes are removed and the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased. Since the ball-entering unit does not bend due to the positioning hole in the game panel, the positioning protrusion of the ball-entering unit (first component) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole of the game panel, and the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel. It is possible to provide a game machine which can be easily removed and can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

In addition, since the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component with the mounting screws through the second mounting holes, it is possible to make it difficult to see the mounting screws attaching the second component from the front. , the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, it is desirable to provide the first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel in the first structural member in the vicinity of the positioning projection. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole, the positioning projection can be strongly pressed against the game panel side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

Also, the second component may be attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening. As a result, the second component attached from the back side of the first component projects into the opening of the game panel. The board thickness of the game panel can be effectively used, and empty spaces in front and behind the game panel can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decorative body, an LED board, or a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening, and the game ball that has entered the ball entrance between the first component and the first component is moved along the surface of the game panel. It is also possible to have a ball passage through which the water flows down. As a result, since the second component member is provided with a ball passage that allows the game ball to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the cross section of the part of the ball passage is U-shaped, so the existence of the ball passage can increase the rigidity of the second component. Since the ball-entering unit is formed by attaching the second component whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage from the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit can be further increased. It is possible to provide a game machine that can reliably achieve the above effects.

In addition, as described above, the second component attached from the back side of the first component is projected into the opening of the game panel, and the ball entrance is between the first component and the second component. Since a ball passage is provided to allow a game ball that enters the game panel to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the board thickness of the game panel is effectively used compared to the case where the ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel. This makes it easier to secure an empty space behind the game panel. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decorative body, an LED board, or a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Also, it is desirable to provide at least two positioning projections spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member. As a result, since the plurality of positioning projections on the first component member are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member, when the ball-entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball-entering unit is positioned on the game panel. The ball entering unit can be reliably positioned at the desired position of the game panel without rotating along the surface.

By the way, in the case where a plurality of positioning projections are provided separately in the longitudinal direction of a conventional ball-entering unit with low rigidity, the center of the ball-entering unit moves forward when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward during disassembly work. As a result of the bending, the respective positioning projections tend to tilt so that the ends of the positioning projections separated in the longitudinal direction approach each other, and the game panel is bent. The positioning projection cannot be removed from the positioning hole. On the other hand, as described above, when the plurality of positioning projections on the first component member are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member, the second component member is attached to the first component member. This increases the rigidity of the ball-entering unit, so even if the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, the positioning projections separated in the longitudinal direction will not tilt due to the bending of the ball-entering unit. To provide a game machine in which a ball unit can be easily removed and disassembly work for sorting can be reduced.

Furthermore, it is desirable to provide the ball entrance in the first component member so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel. As a result, since the plurality of ball entrances protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel, when pulling the ball entrance unit forward in order to remove it from the game panel during disassembly of the game machine, the ball entrances can be easily removed. It can be picked and pulled, making it easier to remove the ball-entering unit.

Further, the second component member has a plurality of ball entrances projecting forward from the front surface of the first component member, and a flat plate-like front plate connecting the front ends of the plurality of ball entrances to each other. You can do it. As a result, the second component, which connects the front ends of the plurality of ball entrances protruding forward with the flat plate-like front plate, is attached to the front surface of the game panel through the first attachment hole. Since the ball-entering unit is configured by attaching the ball-entering unit from the rear side, the rigidity can be increased compared to the conventional ball-entering unit, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Also, the first component member may have a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel. As a result, since the first component member is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the first component member to the front surface of the game panel through the first mounting hole, the base plate can cover the opening of the game panel from the front side. The back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved. At this time, since the base plate is flat, the rigidity of the first component may be low, but since the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component, The rigidity of the ball-entering unit with the second component can be made higher than the rigidity of the conventional ball-entering unit, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The second component is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 2, the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to protrude into the opening (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the side unit 2800 for second component 2812).

As a result, the second component attached from the back side of the first component projects into the opening of the game panel. The board thickness of the game panel can be effectively used, and empty spaces in front and behind the game panel can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decorative body, an LED board, or a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The second component member is attached from the rear side of the first component member so as to protrude into the opening, and the game ball entering the ball entrance between the first component member and the first component member It has a ball passage that allows the to flow down along the surface of the game panel.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, the second component member is attached from the rear side of the first component member so as to protrude into the opening, and the game in which a ball is entered into the ball entrance between the first component member and the first component member. It has a ball passage that allows balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel (see the description of the second component member 2812 of the side unit 2800 in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the second component member is provided with a ball passage that allows the game ball to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the cross section of the part of the ball passage is U-shaped, so the existence of the ball passage can increase the rigidity of the second component. Since the ball-entering unit is formed by attaching the second component whose rigidity is increased by the ball passage from the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit can be further increased. It is possible to provide a game machine that can reliably achieve the above effects.

In addition, the second component attached from the back side of the first component is projected into the opening of the game panel, and the game in which the ball is entered between the first component and the second component Since the ball passage for causing the balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel is provided, the board thickness of the game panel can be effectively used compared to the case where the ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel. An empty space behind the game panel can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decorative body, an LED board, or a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

When providing a ball sensor for detecting game balls circulating in the ball passage, it is desirable to provide the ball sensor within the plate thickness (inside the opening) of the game panel. Alternatively, it is desirable to provide the ball sensor below the production device (movable accessory) provided behind. As a result, the ball sensor does not interfere with the performance device, and the movable range of the movable accessory can be increased.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"At least two positioning projections are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, at least two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be separated in the longitudinal direction of the first component member (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the side unit 2800 See description regarding first component 2811).

As a result, since the plurality of positioning projections on the first component member are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member, when the ball-entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball-entering unit is positioned on the game panel. The ball entering unit can be reliably positioned at the desired position of the game panel without rotating along the surface.

By the way, in the case where a plurality of positioning projections are provided separately in the longitudinal direction of a conventional ball-entering unit with low rigidity, the center of the ball-entering unit moves forward when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward during disassembly work. As a result of the bending, the respective positioning projections tend to tilt so that the ends of the positioning projections separated in the longitudinal direction approach each other, and the game panel is bent. The positioning projection cannot be removed from the positioning hole. In contrast, in this configuration, as described above, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased by attaching the second component to the first component, so even if the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, , the ball-entering unit does not bend and the positioning projections separated in the longitudinal direction are not tilted, the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel, and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. Amusement machines can be provided.

Means 5: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
"The ball entrance is provided in the first structural member so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, the ball entrance is provided in the first component member so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the side unit 2800 for first component 2811).

As a result, since the plurality of ball entrances protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel, when pulling the ball entrance unit forward in order to remove it from the game panel during disassembly of the game machine, the ball entrances can be easily removed. It can be picked and pulled, making it easier to remove the ball-entering unit.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
"The second structural member includes a plurality of ball entrances projecting forward from the front surface of the first structural member, a flat front plate connecting the front ends of the plurality of ball entrances, have"
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 6, the second component includes a plurality of ball entrances projecting forward from the front surface of the first component, and a flat front plate connecting the front ends of the plurality of ball entrances. and (see the description of the second component 2812A of the side unit 2800D in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, the second component, which connects the front ends of the plurality of ball entrances protruding forward with the flat plate-like front plate, is attached to the front surface of the game panel through the first attachment hole. Since the ball-entering unit is configured by attaching the ball-entering unit from the rear side, the rigidity can be increased compared to the conventional ball-entering unit, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Means 7: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 6,
"The first constituent member has a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 7, the first component member has a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the side unit 2800 (see description of first component 2811 in ).

As a result, since the first component member is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the first component member to the front surface of the game panel through the first mounting hole, the base plate can cover the opening of the game panel from the front side. The back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved. At this time, since the base plate is flat, the rigidity of the first component may be low, but since the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component, The rigidity of the ball-entering unit with the second component can be made higher than the rigidity of the conventional ball-entering unit, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

Means 8: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entering unit
It has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, and an opening provided to penetrate the game panel is opened from the front side. a first component attached to the gaming panel in a blocking manner;
a second component having a second attachment hole for attachment to the first component and attached from the rear side of the first component;
with
The first component member has a flat base plate from which the positioning projection protrudes and the first mounting hole penetrates and is capable of coming into contact with the front surface of the game panel, and the positioning projection is At least two ball entrances are provided so as to be separated in the longitudinal direction of the base plate, and the ball entrance is provided so as to protrude forward from the front surface of the base plate,
The second component member is attached from the rear side of the first component member so as to protrude into the opening, and a game ball entered into the ball entrance between the first component member and the first component member It has a ball passage that flows down along the surface of the game panel.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 8, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which a game ball can enter and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game panel through which a game ball can flow down, the ball entry unit is , a positioning projection to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, so as to block the opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. A first component that is attached to the game panel, and a second component that has a second attachment hole for attachment to the first component and is attached from the rear side of the first component, The constituent member has a flat plate-shaped base plate having a positioning protrusion protruding therethrough and a first mounting hole penetrating therethrough and capable of coming into contact with the front surface of the game panel, and the positioning protrusion is spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the base plate. At least two ball entrances are provided so as to project forward from the front surface of the base plate, and the second component member protrudes into the opening. It is attached from the rear side and has a ball passage between it and the first structural member for allowing a game ball that has entered the ball inlet to flow down along the surface of the game panel.

As a result, since the first component member is provided with a flat base plate, the mounting screw is screwed into the game panel through the first mounting hole penetrating the base plate, and the first component member is attached to the front surface of the game panel. By attaching it to the base plate, the opening of the game panel can be closed from the front side, and the back side of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), improving the appearance of the game machine. be able to. On the other hand, since the second component member is provided with a ball passage that allows game balls to flow down along the surface of the game panel, the cross section of the part of the ball passage is U-shaped, so the existence of the ball passage can increase the rigidity of the second component. Since the base plate is a flat plate, the rigidity of the first component may be low. Since the ball-entering unit is formed by attaching from the rear side of the first component member, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit can be made higher than that of the conventional ball-entering unit. Therefore, when disassembling the game machine for recycling or the like, when the mounting screws screwed into the game panel through the first mounting holes are removed and the ball-entering unit is pulled forward, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased. Since the ball-entering unit does not bend due to the positioning hole in the game panel, the positioning protrusion of the ball-entering unit (first component) does not tilt with respect to the positioning hole of the game panel, and the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel. It is possible to provide a game machine which can be easily removed and can reduce the disassembly work for sorting.

By the way, since the plurality of positioning projections on the first component member are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member, when the first component member is pulled forward during disassembly work, the first component member The force that causes the respective positioning projections to tilt so that the tips of the positioning projections that are separated in the longitudinal direction approach each other due to the bending. will act, and there is a risk that the positioning projections will not come off from the positioning holes of the game panel. However, in this configuration, as described above, the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component to form the ball-entering unit, and the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased. Even if the unit is pulled forward, the ball-entering unit does not bend and the positioning projections separated in the longitudinal direction are not tilted, and the ball-entering unit can be easily removed from the game panel, enabling disassembly work for sorting. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of reducing

Furthermore, since the plurality of ball entrances protrude forward from the front surface of the game panel, the ball entrances can be easily pulled forward to remove the ball entrance unit from the game panel during disassembly of the game machine. It can be pulled by pressing, and the work of removing the entering ball unit can be facilitated.

In addition, since the second component is attached from the rear side of the first component with the mounting screws through the second mounting holes, it is possible to make it difficult to see the mounting screws attaching the second component from the front. , the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, a ball passage is provided between the first component member and the second component member so as to protrude into the opening of the game panel for allowing the game ball that has entered the ball entrance to flow down along the surface of the game panel. Therefore, there is a case where a game ball entering the ball entrance is guided backward from the rear surface of the game panel as in the conventional ball entry unit, and a ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel to flow downward. In comparison, the board thickness of the game panel can be effectively utilized, and an empty space behind the game panel can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decorative body, an LED board, or a movable accessory in the empty space, and it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is more appealing to players.

Furthermore, since the plurality of positioning projections on the first component member are spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member, when the ball-entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball-entering unit is positioned on the surface of the game panel. The ball-entering unit can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the game panel without rotating along the axis.

In addition, if the first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel in the first component member is provided in the vicinity of the positioning projection, the positioning projection can be obtained by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole. can be securely inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel by strongly pressing it against the game panel side, and lifting due to incomplete insertion of the positioning projection can be prevented.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a game machine that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting for recycling or the like.

[15-7c. Relationship between the solution means of the seventh technical feature and the embodiment]
The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of this embodiment is the game panel of the above solving means, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of this embodiment is the opening of the above solving means, and the positioning hole of this embodiment is 1113 is the positioning hole of the solving means, and the general winning hole 2001 in this embodiment, the ball receiving portion 2811b of the first component 2811, and the ball receiving portion 2812c of the second component 2812 are the ball entrances of the above solving means. In addition, the side unit 2800, side unit 2800B, side unit 2800C, side unit 2800D, side unit 2800E, side unit 2800F, and side unit 2800G in this embodiment correspond to the ball entering units of the above solving means, respectively.

Further, the first component member 2811 and the first component member 2811A in the present embodiment are the first component members of the above-described solving means, the base plate 2811a in the present embodiment is the base plate of the above-described solving means, and the positioning in this embodiment. The protrusion 2811c serves as the positioning protrusion of the solving means, the mounting hole 2811d in this embodiment serves as the first mounting hole of the solving means, and the second component 2812 and the second component 2812A in this embodiment serve as the positioning protrusion of the solving means. As the second component, the ball passages 2812a and 2812f in this embodiment are the ball passages of the above solution, the front plate 2812d in this embodiment is the front plate of the above solution, and the second component in this embodiment. The mounting holes of 2812 respectively correspond to the second mounting holes of the above solution.

[15-7d. Characteristic effects of the seventh technical feature]
Here, the side unit 2800 will be described as a representative of the features of the side unit 2800, the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800C, the side unit 2800D, the side unit 2800E, the side unit 2800F, and the side unit 2800G in this embodiment. According to this embodiment, in the side unit 2800 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, since the first component member 2811 is provided with the flat base plate 2811a, the base plate 2811a is penetrated. By screwing mounting screws into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2811d and mounting the first component member 2811 on the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 is closed from the front side by the base plate 2811a. The members behind the game panel 1100 can be hidden by the base plate 2811a through the opening 1112 from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. On the other hand, since the second component member 2812 is provided with a ball passage 2812a that allows the game ball B to flow down along the surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the cross section of the portion of the ball passage 2812a is U-shaped. Therefore, the rigidity of the second component member 2812 can be increased due to the existence of the ball passage 2812a. Since the base plate 2811a has a flat plate shape, the rigidity of the first component member 2811 may be lowered. Since the side unit 2800 is formed by attaching the first component member 2811 from the rear side with the attachment screws, the rigidity of the side unit 2800 can be increased compared to the conventional side unit. Therefore, when disassembling the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) for recycling or the like, when the side unit 2800 is pulled forward by removing the mounting screws screwed into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2811d, Since the side unit 2800 does not bend due to the increased rigidity of the side unit 2800, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the first component member 2811 of the side unit 2800 does not flex with respect to the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that does not tilt, allows the side unit 2800 to be easily removed from the panel plate 1110, and reduces the disassembly work for sorting.

By the way, in the side unit 2800, since the plurality of positioning projections 2811c on the first component member 2811 are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member 2811, the first component member 2811 can be disassembled. When pulled forward, the center of the first component member 2811 bends in a curved shape so as to move forward. A force acts to tilt each positioning projection 2811c, and there is a possibility that the positioning projection 2811c cannot be removed from the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. However, in this embodiment, as described above, the side unit 2800 is formed by attaching the second component 2812 from the rear side of the first component 2811, and the rigidity of the side unit 2800 is increased. Even if the side unit 2800 is pulled forward, the side unit 2800 is not bent and the positioning projections 2811c separated in the longitudinal direction are not tilted, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100.例文帳に追加It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of reducing the disassembly work for sorting.

Furthermore, according to the side unit 2800, since the plurality of ball receiving portions 2811b (general prize winning opening 2001) protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, the panel plate When pulling the side unit 2800 forward to remove it from 1110, the ball receiving portion 2811b can be picked and pulled, making the removal of the side unit 2800 easier.

In addition, according to the side unit 2800, the second component member 2812 is attached from the rear side of the first component member 2811 with the attachment screw through the attachment hole, so the second component member 2812 is attached from the front. The screw can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

In addition, according to the side unit 2800, the game ball B entered into the ball receiving portion 2811b (general winning opening 2001) between the first component member 2811 and the second component member 2812 is placed on the surface of the panel board 1110 in the game panel 1100. Since the ball passage 2812a that flows down along is provided so as to protrude into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110, the game ball B that has entered the general winning hole 2001 can be transferred to the game panel 1100 like the conventional side unit. Compared to the case where a ball passage is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel 1100 to guide the balls backward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 and flow downward, the thickness of the panel plate 1110 can be effectively used. , the empty space behind the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) can be easily secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a performance device such as a decorative body, an LED board, and a movable accessory (back and bottom performance unit 3500) in the empty space, thereby providing a pachinko machine 1 with a higher appeal to players. can.

Furthermore, according to the side unit 2800, since the plurality of positioning projections 2811c on the first component member 2811 are provided so as to be spaced apart in the longitudinal direction of the first component member 2811, the side unit 2800 can be attached to the panel of the game panel 1100. When attached to the plate 1110, the side unit 2800 does not rotate along the surface of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be reliably positioned at the desired position on the panel plate 1110.

Further, according to the side unit 2800, since the mounting hole 2811d for mounting the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the first component member 2811 is provided in the vicinity of the positioning projection 2811c, the mounting hole 2811d By screwing the mounting screw into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 and tightening it, the positioning protrusion 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110. Lifting due to incomplete insertion of the projection 2811c can be prevented.

[15-8. 8th technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-8a. Background of the eighth technical feature]
In recent years, the effective use of resources has become more important against the background of environmental problems. From such a point of view, in game machines, development is underway to form more parts from recyclable materials. On the other hand, the replacement cycle of machines at game halls (amusements) where game machines are installed is becoming shorter, and the number of discarded and dismantled game machines is on the rise. As a result, the burden of disassembling and sorting game machines is increasing, and there is a demand to reduce the work as much as possible.

For example, in a conventional gaming machine as shown in Patent Document A8 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2017-018185), a side unit (ball entry unit) provided with a plurality of general winning holes as ball entry holes is disassembled. When you try to remove it from the game panel by pulling it forward, the positioning projection of the ball-in unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel, so it is difficult to remove the positioning projection due to the resistance with the inner surface of the positioning hole. , there was a problem that the disassembly work was time-consuming.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means provide a game machine capable of reducing the disassembly work required for sorting for recycling or the like.

[15-8b. Solution for the eighth technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The game panel is
It has an opening area where game balls can flow from the front side to the rear side,
The ball entering unit
Positioning projections to be inserted into positioning holes provided in the game panel, and mounting holes for mounting to the game panel, allowing game balls entering the ball entrance of the opening area to flow. It is attached to the game panel so as to block the normal opening area from the front side, and the outer edge of the ball entry unit is attached to the specific opening area in which the game ball that has not entered the ball entrance can flow. It is attached to the game panel so that a part overlaps."
characterized by being

Here, the "entrance" is defined as "a winning opening that provides a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters (for example, a general winning opening, a normal winning opening, a starting winning opening (starting opening), a large winning opening, a special winning opening, etc.). , ``out slot for ejecting a game ball out of the gaming machine without returning it to the player without awarding a privilege even if it enters the game ball'', and the like.

In addition, the "game panel" includes "things made of wooden plywood such as plywood" and "things made up of a panel plate made by cutting a transparent resin plate and a panel holder holding the outer periphery of the panel plate. , "Injection-molded transparent resin", and the like.

Furthermore, as the "opening area", there are "a hole-shaped thing that penetrates the game panel and the inner peripheral surface is connected over the entire circumference", "a hole that penetrates the game panel and is partially A notch that opens to the side of the panel", etc. In addition, as the "opening area", there are a normal opening area where game balls that have entered the ball entrance can circulate, and a specific opening area (out opening) where game balls that have not entered the ball entrance can circulate. , and the specific opening area may be connected to the normal opening area, or the specific opening area may be independent from the normal opening area without being connected.

In addition, as a "ball entry unit", there is a "first component attached to the front surface of the game panel so as to block the normal opening area penetrating the game panel from the front, and a first component attached from the rear side of the game panel. and a second component, wherein the ball entrance is provided in the first component or the second component”, “so as to block the normal opening area penetrating the game panel from the front A flat base plate attached to the front surface of the game panel, and a ball receiving portion projecting forward from the base plate and opening upward and rearward to form a ball entrance. At least a plate-shaped base plate attached to the front of the game panel so as to block the normal opening area penetrating the game panel from the front, and a ball entrance penetrating the base plate. What is being done", etc.

Furthermore, the ``portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps the ball discharge port'' may be any part that overlaps the ball discharge port when viewed from the front, and the outer edge that constitutes the portion is the game panel. It may be in contact with the front surface of the game panel, or the outer edge may be separated from the surface of the game panel.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the game panel: It has an opening area through which game balls can flow from the front side to the rear side. It has a hole and is attached to the game panel so as to block from the front side a normal opening area through which a game ball that enters the ball entrance of the opening area can flow, and does not enter the ball entrance of the opening area. It is attached to the game panel so that a part of the outer edge of the ball entry unit overlaps with the specific opening area through which the game ball can flow ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], see [12-3. Side Unit, etc. of the Embodiment] section, see descriptions in FIGS. 173 and 175, etc.).

As a result, after inserting the positioning projections of the ball-entering unit into the positioning holes of the game panel from the front, the mounting screws are screwed into the game panel through the mounting holes and tightened, whereby the ball-entering unit is mounted on the front surface of the game panel. A game ball entered into the ball entrance of the ball entry unit can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the opening areas of the game panel. At this time, since the normal opening area of the game panel is closed from the front by the ball entry unit, the rear side of the game panel can be hidden through the normal opening area so that it is difficult to see, and the appearance of the game machine is improved. can be done. When the ball-entering unit is attached to the front surface of the game panel, part of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit overlaps the specific opening area of the opening area (in a front view, the projection range of the specific opening area is part of the outer edge). overlap), a portion of the outer edge protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. When disassembling a gaming machine for recycling or the like, when removing the ball-entering unit from the game panel, it is possible that a worker's finger or a tool, etc., may be caught in a portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps the specific opening area. Therefore, by hooking a finger or the like, the ball-entering unit can be pulled forward with a strong force. Therefore, to provide a game machine in which a ball entry unit can be easily removed from a game panel against resistance between a positioning hole and a positioning projection, and disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. be able to.

In addition, it is desirable to provide an attachment hole for attaching the ball-entering unit to the game panel in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screws into the game panel through the mounting holes and tightening them, the positioning projections can be strongly pressed against the game panel side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

Also, the front surface of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit may be inclined rearward. Since the front surface of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is slanted toward the rear, the angle of the outer edge is obtuse. Therefore, in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel during disassembly work of the game machine, when a worker's finger or the like is hooked on a portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps the specific opening area, the finger or the like may be caught at the corner of the outer edge. Even if the ball comes into contact with the ball, the angle is obtuse, so compared to the case where the angle is right, it is less likely to damage the finger, etc., and the ball entry unit can be safely removed by the finger, etc. be able to.

Also, as described above, when the front surface of the outer edge is inclined, the angle of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit becomes an obtuse angle. Even if the game ball rolls so as to lick the outer edge in order to enter the area, the corner of the outer edge is not chipped, and the durability of the ball-entering unit can be improved.

In addition, by tilting the outer edge of the ball-entering unit backward as described above, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the specific opening area, and the stagnation of the game ball in the specific opening area can be avoided.

Furthermore, it is desirable to make the outer edge of the ball entry unit transparent. As a result, since the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is made transparent, it is possible to prevent the size of the specific opening area from appearing small even if part of the outer edge overlaps the specific opening area.

Moreover, it is desirable to provide the positioning projections at a portion close to the specific opening area and a portion far from the specific opening area. As a result, since the two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be separated from each other, when the ball entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball entering unit does not rotate along the surface of the game panel. can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the game panel.

By the way, in the case where the ball-entering unit is provided with two positioning projections to be inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel, the two positioning projections must be removed when the ball-entering unit is removed from the game panel during the disassembly work. At the same time, if the ball-entering unit is to be pulled out from the positioning hole, it is necessary to pull the ball-entering unit forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. On the other hand, as described above, when the positioning projections are provided at a portion close to the specific opening area and at a portion far from the specific opening area, since one positioning projection is provided near the specific opening area, recycling, etc. When removing the ball-entering unit from the game panel during the disassembly work of the game machine, by hooking the operator's finger or the like on the part overlapping the specific opening area on the outer edge of the ball-entering unit and pulling it forward, the specified A strong pull-out force can be applied to the positioning projections near the opening area. As a result, in the disassembly work, of the two positioning projections, the positioning projection closer to the specific opening region can be pulled out from the positioning hole first, and then the remaining positioning projection farther from the specific opening region can be pulled out. Since it can be pulled out from the positioning hole, it can be pulled out with a weaker force than when pulling out two positioning projections at the same time, and the burden on the type of work can be reduced.

Also, the portion of the outer edge that overlaps the specific opening area may penetrate the specific opening area and protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel. By the way, in the disassembly work of the game machine, in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel, when a worker's finger or the like is hooked on a portion of the outer edge overlapping the specific opening area and pulled forward, the strength of the portion is reduced. If it is weak, the outer edge may crack and the ball-entering unit may remain on the game panel side. On the other hand, as described above, since the depth of the portion overlapping the specific opening area in the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is increased, the outer edge (extended portion) is partially overlapped on the front surface of the game panel. Compared to the method, the size of the specific opening area (ball discharge port) becomes smaller (the passage volume for discharging game balls becomes smaller), or the size of the specific opening region (ball discharge port) is expanded in advance ( However, since the strength of this part can be increased, even if a worker's finger or the like is hooked on this part and pulled forward, it will break (damage The ball-entering unit can be reliably removed from the game panel.

Further, as described above, if the portion of the outer edge that overlaps the specific opening region is caused to penetrate the specific opening region and protrude rearward from the rear surface of the game panel, the portion covers the inner surface of the specific opening region and prevents the player from It can be made difficult to see, and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

Further, the ball-entering unit may have a base plate having a positioning protrusion protruding therethrough and a mounting hole penetrating therethrough. As a result, since the ball-entering unit is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the ball-entering unit to the front surface of the game panel through the mounting hole, the normal opening area of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate. The back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the normal opening area from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

Means 2: In the game machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game panel that allows game balls to flow down,
a ball entry unit having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
a ball outlet into which game balls that have not entered the ball inlet can enter,
The ball-entering unit has a positioning projection inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and an attachment hole for attachment to the game panel, and fits into a normal opening area formed in the game panel. attached to the gaming panel so as to fit together;
The ball discharge port is configured by a specific opening area formed in the game panel separately from the normal opening area in which the ball entry unit is fitted,
An extended portion is formed on the outer edge of the ball entering unit,
The extension part is formed so that at least a part thereof overlaps the edge of the specific opening area in a state in which the positioning protrusion of the ball-entering unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. Become"
characterized by being

Here, the "ordinary opening area" and the "specific opening area" include "a hole-shaped opening that penetrates the game panel and whose inner peripheral surface is connected over the entire circumference", and "a hole that penetrates the game panel." and a cut-out part of which is open to the side of the game panel.

According to the configuration of means 2, in a gaming machine having a game panel through which a game ball can flow down, a ball-entering unit having a ball-entering opening into which a game ball can enter and a game ball not entering the ball-entering opening are provided. and a ball discharge port into which a ball can be entered, the ball entry unit has a positioning projection inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, and the game panel The ball discharge port is attached to the game panel so as to fit in the normal opening area formed in the An extension part is formed on the outer edge of the ball-entering unit, and at least a part of the extension part is a specific opening in a state in which the positioning protrusion of the ball-entering unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. It is formed so as to overlap the edge of the region (see the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 173 and 174 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

As a result, after inserting the positioning projections of the ball-entering unit into the positioning holes of the game panel from the front, the mounting screws are screwed into the game panel through the mounting holes and tightened, whereby the ball-entering unit is mounted on the front surface of the game panel. can be attached, and a game ball entered into the ball entrance of the ball entry unit can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the game panel. At this time, since the ball-entering unit is attached to the game panel so as to be fitted into the normal opening area of the game panel, the back of the game panel can be hidden through the normal opening area so that it is difficult to see, and the game machine is equipped with a ball-entering unit. It can make you look better. When the ball-entering unit is attached to the front surface of the game panel, the extending portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit partially overlaps the edge of the specific opening area (in front view, the projection range of the specific opening area part of the outer edge overlaps with the opening), part of the extension protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. In the disassembly work of the game machine for recycling, etc., when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel, the part (extended part) overlapping the edge of the specific opening area in the outer edge of the ball entry unit is attached to the operator. Since it is possible to hook a finger, a tool, or the like, the ball-entering unit can be pulled forward with a strong force by hooking the finger or the like. Therefore, to provide a game machine in which a ball entry unit can be easily removed from a game panel against resistance between a positioning hole and a positioning projection, and disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. be able to.

In addition, since the ball discharge port (specific opening area) is formed in the game panel separately from the normal opening area, the strength of the game panel is greater than when the normal opening area and the specific opening area are connected. can be suppressed.

Means 3: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game panel that allows game balls to flow down,
a ball entry unit having a ball entry opening into which a game ball can enter;
a ball outlet into which game balls that have not entered the ball inlet can enter,
The ball-entering unit has positioning protrusions to be inserted into positioning holes provided in the game panel, and mounting holes for attachment to the game panel, and is inserted into a normal opening area formed in the game panel. attached to the gaming panel so as to
The ball discharge port is formed in the game panel so as to be continuous from the normal opening area to which the ball entering unit is fitted, but is configured by a specific opening area to which the ball entering unit is not fitted,
An extended portion is formed on the outer edge of the ball entering unit,
The extension part is formed so that at least a part thereof overlaps the edge of the specific opening area in a state in which the positioning protrusion of the ball-entering unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. Become"
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, in a gaming machine having a game panel through which a game ball can flow down, a ball-entering unit having a ball-entering opening into which a game ball can enter and a game ball not entering the ball-entering opening are provided. and a ball discharge port into which a ball can be entered, the ball entry unit has a positioning projection inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, and the game panel The ball discharge port is formed in the game panel so as to be continuous from the normal opening area in which the ball entering unit is fitted, It is composed of a specific opening area where the ball unit is not fitted, and an extension part is formed on the outer edge of the ball entry unit, and the extension part has the positioning projection of the ball entry unit inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. 175 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].

As a result, after inserting the positioning projections of the ball-entering unit into the positioning holes of the game panel from the front, the mounting screws are screwed into the game panel through the mounting holes and tightened, whereby the ball-entering unit is mounted on the front surface of the game panel. can be attached, and a game ball entered into the ball entrance of the ball entry unit can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the game panel. At this time, since the ball-entering unit is attached to the game panel so as to be fitted into the normal opening area of the game panel, the back of the game panel can be hidden through the normal opening area so that it is difficult to see, and the game machine is equipped with a ball-entering unit. It can make you look better. When the ball-entering unit is attached to the front surface of the game panel, the extending portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit partially overlaps the edge of the specific opening area (in front view, the projection range of the specific opening area part of the outer edge overlaps with the opening), part of the extension protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. In the disassembly work of the game machine for recycling, etc., when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel, the part (extended part) overlapping the edge of the specific opening area in the outer edge of the ball entry unit is attached to the operator. Since it is possible to hook a finger, a tool, or the like, the ball-entering unit can be pulled forward with a strong force by hooking the finger or the like. Therefore, to provide a game machine in which a ball entry unit can be easily removed from a game panel against resistance between a positioning hole and a positioning projection, and disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. be able to.

In addition, since the ball discharge port (specific opening area) is formed in the game panel so as to be continuous from the normal opening area, the normal opening area and the specific opening can be formed by using a cutting tool such as an end mill on the game panel. When forming the regions, the normal opening region and the specific opening region can be cut continuously, and the cost of the game panel can be reduced.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The ball-entering unit is inclined so that the front surface of the outer edge faces backward."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, the ball-entering unit is inclined so that the front surface of the outer edge faces backward (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811, (See description regarding finger hook 2816 and finger hook 2817).

As a result, since the front surface of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is inclined backward, the angle of the outer edge is an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel during disassembly work of the game machine, when a worker's finger or the like is hooked on a portion of the outer edge (extending portion) of the ball-entering unit that overlaps with the specific opening area, the outer edge Even if a finger or the like comes into contact with the corner of the ball, the angle is obtuse. The unit can be safely removed.

In addition, as described above, since the angle of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is an obtuse angle, compared to the case where the angle is a right angle, the game ball is more likely to lick the outer edge to enter the specific opening area. Even if the game ball rolls on the ground, the corners of the outer edge are not chipped, and the durability of the ball-entering unit can be improved.

In addition, since the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is inclined backward, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the specific opening area, and the stagnation of the game ball in the specific opening area can be avoided.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The outer edge of the ball-entering unit is transparent."
It is characterized by

According to the configuration of means 5, the ball-entering unit is characterized by having a transparent outer edge (see the description of the base plate 2811a of the first component 2811 in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is made transparent, it is possible to prevent the size of the specific opening area from appearing small even if part of the outer edge overlaps the specific opening area.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
"The positioning projections are provided at a portion close to the specific opening area and at a portion far from the specific opening area."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 6, the positioning projections are provided at a portion close to the specific opening area and a portion far from the specific opening area (see [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] , see the description of the positioning projection 2811c of the first component 2811).

As a result, since the two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be separated from each other, when the ball entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball entering unit does not rotate along the surface of the game panel. can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the game panel.

By the way, in the case where the ball-entering unit is provided with two positioning projections to be inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel, the two positioning projections must be removed when the ball-entering unit is removed from the game panel during the disassembly work. At the same time, if the ball-entering unit is to be pulled out from the positioning hole, it is necessary to pull the ball-entering unit forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. On the other hand, in this configuration, one positioning protrusion is provided near the specific opening area. A strong pull-out force acts on the positioning protrusion near the specific opening area by hooking a worker's finger or the like on the part overlapping the specific opening area in the outer edge (extending part) of the and pulling it forward. becomes possible. As a result, in the disassembly work, of the two positioning projections, the positioning projection closer to the specific opening region can be pulled out from the positioning hole first, and then the remaining positioning projection farther from the specific opening region can be pulled out. Since it can be pulled out from the positioning hole, it can be pulled out with a weaker force than when pulling out two positioning projections at the same time, and the burden on the type of work can be reduced.

Means 7: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 6,
"A portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the game panel through the specific opening area."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 7, the portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening area protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the game panel through the specific opening area (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], See the description regarding finger hook 2817).

By the way, in the disassembly work of the game machine, in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel, when a worker's finger or the like is hooked on a portion of the outer edge (extended portion) overlapping the specific opening area and pulled forward, If the strength of this portion is weak, the outer edge may crack and the ball-entering unit may remain on the game panel side. On the other hand, in this configuration, since the depth of the part overlapping the specific opening area in the outer edge of the ball entry unit is increased, a method of overlapping a part of the outer edge (extended portion) on the front surface of the game panel. Compared to , the size of the specific opening area (ball discharge port) is smaller (the passage volume for discharging game balls is smaller), or the size of the specific opening area (ball discharge port) is expanded in advance (game However, since the strength of the part can be increased, even if the operator's finger etc. is hooked on the part and pulled forward, it will break (damage ), and the ball-entering unit can be reliably removed from the game panel.

In addition, since the portion of the outer edge that overlaps with the specific opening region penetrates the specific opening region and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the game panel, the portion covers the inner surface of the specific opening region and makes it difficult for the player to see it. It is possible to improve the appearance of the gaming machine.

Means 8: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 7,
"The ball-entering unit has a base plate in which the positioning projection protrudes and the mounting hole penetrates, and which is a flat plate capable of coming into contact with the front surface of the game panel and forms the outer edge. ” is characterized by

According to the configuration of means 8, the ball-entering unit has a base plate having a positioning projection protruding therethrough and a mounting hole penetrating therethrough. (See the description regarding the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

As a result, since the ball-entering unit is provided with a flat base plate, by attaching the ball-entering unit to the front surface of the game panel through the mounting hole, the normal opening area of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate. The back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the normal opening area from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

Means 9: In any one configuration of Means 1 and Means 4 to Means 8,
"The specific opening area is provided so as to pass through the game panel independently without being connected to the normal opening area."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 9, the specific opening area is provided so as to pass through the game panel independently without being connected to the normal opening area (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the figure 173 and the description of the embodiment shown in FIG. 174).

As a result, in addition to the same effect as the above, since the specific opening area is provided independently on the game panel without being connected to the normal opening area, when the normal opening area and the specific opening area are connected , it is possible to suppress a decrease in the strength of the game panel.

Means 10: In any one configuration of Means 1 and Means 4 to Means 8,
"The specific opening area is provided so as to be connected to the normal opening area."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 10, the specific opening area is provided so as to be connected to the normal opening area (see the description of the embodiment shown in FIG. 175 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

As a result, in addition to the same effects as above, since the specific opening area and the normal opening area are provided so as to be connected, a cutting tool such as an end mill is used for the game panel. area and specific opening area), the normal opening area and the specific opening area can be cut continuously, and the cost of the game panel can be reduced.

Means 11: In the game machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The game panel is
A game ball can circulate from the front side to the rear side, and a normal opening area in which a game ball that has entered the ball entrance can circulate and a game ball that has not entered the ball entrance can circulate. a specific opening area, and the specific opening area penetrates the game panel independently without being connected to the normal opening area, or the specific opening area is connected to the normal opening area, has an open area,
The ball entering unit
A flat plate-shaped base plate that can abut on the front surface of the game panel, a positioning projection protruding from the base plate and inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a positioning projection that penetrates the base plate. It has an attachment hole for attachment to the game panel, and is attached to the game panel so as to block the normal opening area from the front side of the opening area, and the base plate is attached to the specific opening area of the opening area. attached to the game panel so that a part of the transparent outer edge overlaps;
Further, the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate is inclined rearward, and the positioning projections are provided at a portion close to the ball discharge port and a portion far from the ball discharge port. ing"
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 11, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the game panel includes: A game ball can circulate from the front side to the rear side, and a normal opening area in which game balls that enter the ball entrance can circulate, and a game ball that does not enter the ball entrance can circulate. The opening area consists of an opening area in which the specific opening area penetrates the game panel independently without being connected to the normal opening area, or the specific opening area is connected to the normal opening area. , the ball-entering unit includes a flat base plate that can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel, a positioning projection that protrudes from the base plate and is inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a base plate that penetrates. It has an attachment hole for attachment to the game panel, and is attached to the game panel so as to block the normal opening area from the front side of the opening area, and one of the transparent outer edges of the base plate is attached to the specific opening area of the opening area. In addition, the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate is slanted toward the rear, and the positioning projections are positioned near the ball discharge port and from the ball discharge port. It is provided at a distant site.

As a result, the positioning protrusion protruding from the base plate of the ball-entering unit is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front, and after the base plate is brought into contact with the front surface of the game panel, it penetrates the base plate. By screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the mounting hole and tightening it, the ball entry unit can be attached to the front surface of the game panel, and the game ball that has entered the ball entry port of the ball entry unit can be removed from the game panel. It can be guided to the rear of the game panel through the normal opening area of the opening areas. At this time, since the normal opening area of the game panel is blocked from the front by the base plate of the ball entry unit, the back of the game panel can be hidden by making it difficult to see through the normal opening area, thereby improving the appearance of the game machine. can do better. When the ball-entering unit is attached to the front surface of the game panel, part of the transparent outer edge of the base plate of the ball-entering unit overlaps the specific opening area of the opening area (when viewed from the front, the projection of the specific opening area part of the outer edge overlaps the area), the part of the outer edge protrudes toward the center of the specific opening area. When dismantling a game machine for recycling, etc., when removing the ball entry unit from the game panel, it is possible to hook a worker's finger or a tool on the part overlapping the specific opening area on the outer edge of the base plate. Therefore, by hooking a finger or the like, the ball-entering unit can be pulled forward with a strong force together with the base plate. Therefore, to provide a game machine in which a ball entry unit can be easily removed from a game panel against resistance between a positioning hole and a positioning projection, and disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. be able to.

By the way, in the case where the ball-entering unit is provided with two positioning projections to be inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel, the two positioning projections must be removed when the ball-entering unit is removed from the game panel during the disassembly work. At the same time, if the ball-entering unit is to be pulled out from the positioning hole, it is necessary to pull the ball-entering unit forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. On the other hand, in this configuration, since the positioning protrusions are provided at the part close to the specific opening area and the part far from the specific opening area, when the game machine is disassembled for recycling, etc., the ball entering unit is removed from the game panel. At this time, a strong pulling force is applied to the positioning protrusions near the specific opening area by hooking the operator's finger or the like on the portion overlapping the specific opening area on the outer edge of the ball entry unit and pulling it forward. becomes possible. As a result, in the disassembly work, of the two positioning projections, the positioning projection closer to the specific opening region can be pulled out from the positioning hole first, and then the remaining positioning projection farther from the specific opening region can be pulled out. Since it can be pulled out from the positioning hole, it can be pulled out with a weaker force than when pulling out two positioning projections at the same time, and the burden on the type of work can be reduced.

In addition, since the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate of the ball-entering unit is inclined backward, the angle of the outer edge is an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the ball-entering unit from the game panel during disassembly work of the game machine, when a worker's finger or the like is hooked on a portion of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit that overlaps the specific opening area, the finger or the like may be caught at the corner of the outer edge. Even if the ball comes into contact with the ball, the angle is obtuse, so compared to the case where the angle is right, it is less likely to damage the finger, etc., and the ball entry unit can be safely removed by the finger, etc. be able to.

In addition, as described above, since the angle of the outer edge of the ball-entering unit is an obtuse angle, compared to the case where the angle is a right angle, the game ball is more likely to lick the outer edge to enter the specific opening area. Even if the game ball rolls on the ground, the corners of the outer edge are not chipped, and the durability of the ball-entering unit can be improved.

In addition, since the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate of the ball-entering unit is inclined backward, the angle of the outer edge is an obtuse angle. Therefore, even if the game ball rolls so as to lick the outer edge in order to enter the specific opening area, the outer edge is not chipped because the angle of the outer edge is obtuse, and the durability of the ball-entering unit is improved. can improve sexuality.

Further, since the outer edge of the base plate of the ball-entering unit is inclined backward, the game ball can be smoothly guided to the specific opening area, and the stagnation of the game ball in the specific opening area can be avoided.

Furthermore, since the outer edge of the base plate in the ball-entering unit is made transparent, it is possible to prevent the size of the specific opening area from appearing small even if part of the outer edge overlaps the specific opening area.

In addition, since the two positioning protrusions are provided so as to be separated from each other, when the ball-entering unit is attached to the game panel, the ball-entering unit does not rotate along the surface of the game panel, so that the ball-entering unit can be moved. The game panel can be reliably positioned at a desired position.

In addition, it is desirable to provide an attachment hole for attaching the ball-entering unit to the game panel in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screws into the game panel through the mounting holes and tightening them, the positioning projections can be strongly pressed against the game panel side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning holes of the game panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a game machine that can reduce the disassembly work required for sorting for recycling or the like.

[15-8c. Relationship between Solution Means for Eighth Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The out-port 1008 and the specific opening area 1103 in the game board 5 of this embodiment are the ball discharge opening (specific opening area) of the above solving means, and the opening area 1101 of the game panel 1100 in this embodiment is the opening area of the above solving means. , the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in this embodiment is the game panel of the above solution, the opening 1112 and the normal opening area 1102 of the panel plate 1110 in this embodiment are the normal opening area of the above solution, and the present embodiment The positioning hole 1113 in the above is the positioning hole of the solving means, the general winning hole 2001 in this embodiment and the ball receiving part 2811b of the first component member 2811 are the ball entrance of the above solving means, the side The unit 2800G corresponds to the ball-entering unit of the above solution.

In addition, the base plate 2811a in the present embodiment is the base plate (extended portion) of the above solution means, the positioning protrusion 2811c in the present embodiment is the positioning protrusion of the above solution means, and the mounting hole 2811d in the present embodiment is the above They correspond respectively to the mounting holes of the solution. Furthermore, the finger hooking portion 2816 and the finger hooking portion 2817 in the present embodiment are the outer edge (base plate, extension) of the ball discharge port (out port 1008, specific opening region 1103) of the ball entry unit (side unit 2800G) in the above solution. It corresponds to a part where a part of the set part) overlaps.

[15-8d. Characteristic effects of the eighth technical feature]
According to this embodiment, the positioning projection 2811c projecting from the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G in the game board 5 is inserted from the front into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100, and the base plate 2811a is inserted. After abutting on the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate of the game panel 1100 is attached by screwing the mounting screws into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2811d penetrating the base plate 2811a and tightening them. The side unit 2800G can be attached to the front surface of the side unit 2800G. It can be guided to the rear of the game panel 1100 through the normal opening area 1102). At this time, since the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is blocked from the front by the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G, the rear of the game panel 1100 can be hidden by making it difficult to see through the opening 1112. It is possible to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). When the side unit 2800G is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, part of the transparent outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G (finger hooking portion 2816 and finger hooking portion 2817) is an out port 1008. (Specific opening area 1103 of opening area 1101) (a part of the outer edge overlaps the projection range of out port 1008 in a front view). 2817) protrudes toward the center of the out port 1008 . When the side unit 2800G is removed from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in disassembling the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the finger hooking portion 2816 (finger hooking portion) overlapping the out port 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a 2817), a worker's finger, a tool, or the like can be hooked on the base plate 2811a to pull the side unit 2800G forward with a strong force. Therefore, the side unit 2800G can be easily removed from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 against the resistance between the positioning hole 1113 and the positioning projection 2811c, and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. A possible pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

By the way, since the side unit 2800G is provided with two positioning protrusions 2811c and each is inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, when the side unit 2800G is removed from the panel plate 1110 in the disassembly work, In addition, if the two positioning projections 2811c are to be pulled out from the positioning hole 1113 at the same time, it is necessary to pull the side unit 2800G forward with a strong force, which may increase the burden on the operator. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the positioning protrusions 2811c are provided at a portion close to the outlet 1008 and a portion far from the outlet 1008, when the pachinko machine 1 is disassembled for recycling or the like, the panel of the game panel 1100 can be disassembled. When removing the side unit 2800G from the plate 1110, the operator's finger or the like is hooked on the finger hooking portion 2816 (finger hooking portion 2817) overlapping the out port 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800 and pushed forward. By pulling, it is possible to apply a strong pull-out force to the positioning protrusion 2811c near the out port 1008. FIG. As a result, in the disassembly work, of the two positioning projections 2811c, the positioning projection 2811c closer to the out port 1008 can be pulled out from the positioning hole 1113 first, and then the remaining positions farther from the out port 1008 can be pulled out. Since the positioning projection 2811c can be pulled out from the positioning hole 1113, it can be pulled out with a weaker force than when pulling out two positioning projections 2811c at the same time.

In addition, since the front surface of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is inclined rearward, the outer edge has an obtuse angle. Therefore, in order to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the disassembling work of the pachinko machine 1, the finger hooking portion 2816 (finger hooking portion) overlapping the out port 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G 2817), even if the operator's finger or the like touches the corner of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, the corner is obtuse, compared with the case where the corner is right. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to damage a finger or the like, and the side unit 2800G can be safely removed with a finger or the like.

In addition, as described above, since the angle of the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is formed at an obtuse angle, the game ball B enters the out port 1008 compared to when the angle is a right angle. Even if the game ball B rolls so as to lick the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, the outer edge is not chipped, and the durability of the side unit 2800G can be improved.

In addition, since the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is inclined backward, the game ball B can be smoothly guided to the outlet 1008, and the stagnation of the game ball B at the outlet 1008 can be avoided. can be done.

Furthermore, since the outer edge of the base plate 2811a in the side unit 2800G is transparent, even if part of the outer edge overlaps with the out port 1008 like the finger hooking portion 2816 (finger hooking portion 2817), the out port 1008 does not. It is possible to prevent the size from appearing small.

In addition, since the two positioning protrusions 2811c are provided so as to be separated from each other, when the side unit 2800G is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the side unit 2800G can be rotated along the surface of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, the side unit 2800G can be reliably positioned at a desired position on the panel plate 1110. As shown in FIG.

Also, since the mounting hole 2811d for mounting the game panel 1100 on the panel plate 1110 of the side unit 2800G is provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw can be inserted into the mounting hole 1114 of the panel plate 1110 through the mounting hole 2811d. By screwing in and tightening, the positioning projection 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 and can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning projection 2811c from rising due to incomplete insertion. be able to.

By the way, in disassembling the pachinko machine 1, in order to remove the side unit 2800G from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the worker's finger or the like is hooked on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a, which overlaps with the out port 1008, and the operator's finger or the like is hooked forward. When pulled to the side, if the strength of the relevant portion is weak, the outer edge may crack and the side unit 2800G may remain on the game panel 1100 side. On the other hand, in the embodiment shown in FIG. 174, since the depth of the finger hook portion 2817 overlapping the out port 1008 at the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G is increased, the panel plate of the game panel 1100 Compared to the method of partially overlapping the outer edge (extended portion) of the base plate 2811a on the front surface of 1110, the size of the specific opening area 1103 (out port 1008) is smaller (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B is smaller). ), or the size of the specific opening area 1103 (out port 1008) is expanded in advance (the passage volume for discharging the game ball B is increased), but the strength of the finger hook portion 2817 Therefore, the side unit 2800G can be reliably removed from the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 without being broken (damaged) even if the operator's finger or the like is hooked on the finger hooking portion 2817 and pulled forward. be able to.

In addition, since the finger hook portion 2817 overlapping the out port 1008 on the outer edge of the base plate 2811a of the side unit 2800G penetrates the out port 1008 and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. , the finger hook portion 2817 can cover the inner surface of the outlet 1008 to make it difficult for the player to see, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

[15-9. Ninth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-9a. Background of the ninth technical feature]
In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as a means for performing an effect that can attract the interest of a player, the effect device is enlarged, the movable area of the effect device is widened, and the effect device is used. are decorated with flashy luminescence.

By the way, in a conventional gaming machine such as Patent Document A9 (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-018185), a plurality of ball entry holes (for example, general winning holes) are provided in front of a game panel through which game balls flow down. The incoming ball unit is installed. A game ball that enters the ball entrance of the ball entry unit is guided to the rear of the game panel, and discharged downward after being detected by a ball sensor in a ball guide unit provided behind the game panel. be done. In order to make such a ball-entering unit luminous and decorated, it is necessary to provide an LED mounted with an LED on the rear side of the ball guiding unit provided behind the ball-entering unit, and an LED substrate is provided. , the space behind the ball-entering unit becomes narrower, and it becomes difficult to secure a wider space for installing the effect device.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine capable of presenting a more impactful presentation by making it easier to secure a space behind the ball-entering unit. .

[15-9b. Solution for the ninth technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entering unit
It has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, and an opening provided to penetrate the game panel is opened from the front side. a first component attached to the game panel so as to block it;
A second configuration that has a second attachment hole for attachment to the first component and is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to form a predetermined space in the opening together with the first component and
An LED board on which an LED is mounted is provided in the space formed by the first component and the second component.”
characterized by being

Here, the "entrance" is defined as "a winning opening that provides a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters (for example, a general winning opening, a normal winning opening, a starting winning opening (starting opening), a large winning opening, a special winning opening, etc.). , ``out slot for ejecting a game ball out of the gaming machine without returning it to the player without awarding a privilege even if it enters the game ball'', and the like.

In addition, the "game panel" includes "things made of wooden plywood such as plywood" and "things made up of a panel plate made by cutting a transparent resin plate and a panel holder holding the outer periphery of the panel plate. , "Injection-molded transparent resin", and the like.

Further, the "LED board" may be attached to the first component or may be attached to the second component. Further, the "non-contact surface portion" may be provided in the first component portion, may be provided in the second component portion, or may be provided in both the first component portion and the second component portion. It's okay to be there.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game panel through which game balls can flow down, the ball entry unit is , a positioning projection to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, so as to block the opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. It has a first component to be attached to the game panel and a second mounting hole for attaching to the first component, and the first component so as to form a predetermined space in the opening with the first component. and a second component that is attached from the rear side, and an LED board on which LEDs are mounted in a space formed by the first component and the second component ([Invention Mode for implementation], refer to the chapter [12-2b.

As a result, after attaching the second component from the rear side of the first component with the mounting screw through the second mounting hole, the positioning protrusion of the first component is inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front. After that, by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole and tightening it, the ball entry unit can be mounted on the front surface of the game panel, and the game panel is penetrated by the first component. Since the opening can be blocked, the rear side of the game panel can be made difficult to see through the opening, the appearance of the game machine can be improved, and foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the game through the opening from the rear side of the game panel. Intrusion into the front side of the panel can be prevented. Then, a space is formed in the opening of the game panel by the first component and the second component that is attached from the rear side of the first component by means of a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, and the space is Since the LED board is provided in the , the ball entry unit can be decorated with light by the LED of the LED board. At this time, since the space in which the LED board is provided is formed in the opening of the game panel, it is possible to fit the space and the LED board within the board thickness of the game panel. It is possible to reduce the amount of protrusion to the ball as much as possible, and it is possible to secure a wider space behind the ball entering unit. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large performance device or a performance device with a wide movable area behind the ball-entering unit, so that it is possible to present a performance with a greater impact to the player, which is highly appealing to the player. It is possible to provide high-end gaming machines.

In addition, it is desirable to provide the first attachment hole for attaching the ball-entering unit to the game panel in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole and tightening it, the positioning protrusion can be strongly pressed against the game panel side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion of the projection can be prevented.

In addition, it is desirable to provide the ball-entering unit with a non-contact surface portion that is not in contact with a part of the contact surface portion where the first component portion and the second component portion are in contact with each other. As a result, the LED substrate is provided in the space between the first component and the second component, and a part of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other is in contact with each other. Since the non-contact surface portion is provided, the heat from the LED substrate can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion, and the influence of heat can be avoided.

Furthermore, when the non-contact surface portion is provided as described above, the front end side of the opening of the game panel is blocked by the first component, so the heat released from the non-contact surface portion to the outside flows to the front side of the game panel. Therefore, the heat can be dissipated to the rear side of the game panel.

In addition, when the non-contact surface portion is provided as described above, the ball entry unit is formed so as to have a gap between it and the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel, and the non-contact surface portion is at least the upper contact surface. It is desirable to provide it on the face portion. Thereby, the non-contact surface portion capable of dissipating heat from the LED substrate provided in the space formed by the first component portion and the second component portion to the outside is provided on at least the upper portion of the contact surface portion. Therefore, the heat from the LED substrate can be reliably radiated to the outside by the non-contact surface portion, and the heat will not stay in the space. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer circumference of the portion of the ball-entering unit inserted into the opening of the game panel and the inner circumference of the opening. In other words, since a gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion and the inner periphery of the opening, the heat from the LED board can be reliably radiated from the non-contact surface portion to the gap, and the heat is exhausted from the opening through the gap. can do.

Further, when providing the non-contact surface portion as described above, it is desirable to provide the LED substrate so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in plan view. As a result, even if foreign matter such as dust enters the space in which the LED substrate is provided through the non-contact surface portion, it is possible to prevent the LED substrate from being easily affected, and the influence of the foreign matter can be prevented as much as possible.

Furthermore, it is desirable that the gaming panel be opaque. As a result, since the game panel is made opaque, light from the LEDs of the LED board does not enter the inside of the game panel from the inner peripheral surface of the opening of the game panel, and is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the opening. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the presentation effect of the light emission of the LED.

Further, when the non-contact surface portion is provided as described above, the non-contact surface portion may be provided behind the rear surface of the game panel. As a result, the heat from the LED board provided in the space between the first component and the second component can be reliably radiated backward from the rear surface of the game panel through the non-contact surface portion, It is possible to avoid the influence of heat.

In addition, the first component part may have a flat plate-like base plate which has a positioning projection projecting therethrough and a mounting hole penetrating therethrough, and which can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel. As a result, since the ball entry unit is provided with a flat base plate, the opening of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate by attaching the ball entry unit to the front surface of the game panel through the mounting hole. , the back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

Further, as described above, if the first component has a base plate, the opening of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate of the ball-entering unit. Heat from the LED substrate provided in the space between can be radiated to the rear side of the game panel through the non-contact surface portion, and foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be removed from the back side of the game panel. Intrusion into the front side of the game panel through the opening of the game panel can be prevented.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The ball-entering unit
A non-contact surface portion that is not in contact with each other is provided in a part of the contact surface portion where the first component portion and the second component portion are in contact with each other.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 2, the ball-entering unit is provided with a non-contact surface portion that does not contact each other in a part of the contact surface portion where the first component portion and the second component portion are in contact with each other ([Invention Embodiments], see the description regarding the side unit 2800B, the contact surface portion 2830, and the non-contact surface portion 2831).

As a result, the LED substrate is provided in the space between the first component and the second component, and a part of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other is in contact with each other. Since the non-contact surface portion is provided, the heat from the LED substrate can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion, and the influence of heat can be avoided.

In addition, since the front end side of the opening of the game panel is blocked by the first component, the heat released from the non-contact surface portion to the outside does not flow to the front side of the game panel, and is radiated to the rear side of the game panel. can be made

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 2,
"The ball-entering unit is formed so that a gap is provided between it and the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel,
The non-contact surface portion is provided at least on the contact surface portion on the upper side."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, the ball entry unit is formed so as to have a gap between it and the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel, and the non-contact surface portion is provided at least on the upper contact surface portion. (See the description regarding the side unit 2800B and the non-contact surface portion 2831 in [Description of the Invention]).

Thereby, the non-contact surface portion capable of dissipating heat from the LED substrate provided in the space formed by the first component portion and the second component portion to the outside is provided on at least the upper portion of the contact surface portion. Therefore, the heat from the LED substrate can be reliably radiated to the outside by the non-contact surface portion, and the heat will not stay in the space. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer circumference of the portion of the ball-entering unit inserted into the opening of the game panel and the inner circumference of the opening. In other words, since a gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion and the inner periphery of the opening, the heat from the LED board can be reliably radiated from the non-contact surface portion to the gap, and the heat is exhausted from the opening through the gap. can do.

Means 4: In the configuration of Means 2 or Means 3,
"The LED substrate is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in plan view."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, the LED substrate is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in plan view (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the description regarding the LED substrate 2825 and the non-contact surface portion 2831 ).

As a result, even if foreign matter such as dust enters the space in which the LED substrate is provided through the non-contact surface portion, it is possible to prevent the LED substrate from being easily affected, and the influence of the foreign matter can be prevented as much as possible.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The game panel is opaque"
It is characterized by

By the way, if the game panel is made transparent, the light from the LED substrate enters the inside of the game panel from the inner peripheral surface of the opening of the game panel and diffuses, thereby reducing the amount of light emitted forward. As a result, there is a risk that the effect of light emission from the LED will be weakened.

According to the configuration of means 5, the game panel is made opaque (see the description regarding the game panel 1100 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

As a result, since the game panel is made opaque, light from the LEDs of the LED board does not enter the inside of the game panel from the inner peripheral surface of the opening of the game panel, and is reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the opening. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the presentation effect of the light emission of the LED.

Means 6: In the configuration of any one of Means 2 to 5,
"The non-contact surface portion is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel"
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 6, the non-contact surface portion is provided behind the rear surface of the game panel (see the description regarding the side unit 2800B in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, the heat from the LED board provided in the space between the first component and the second component can be reliably radiated backward from the rear surface of the game panel through the non-contact surface portion, It is possible to avoid the influence of heat.

Means 7: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 6,
"The first component part has a flat base plate through which the positioning projection protrudes and the mounting hole penetrates, and which can come into contact with the front surface of the game panel."
characterized by being

According to the structure of the means 7, the first component part has a positioning projection protruding and a mounting hole penetrating therethrough, and has a flat base plate that can abut on the front surface of the game panel. (See the description regarding the unit main body 2810 of the side unit 2800B in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the ball entry unit is provided with a flat base plate, the opening of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate by attaching the ball entry unit to the front surface of the game panel through the mounting hole. , the back of the game panel can be hidden by the base plate through the opening from the front side (player side), and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

In addition, since the opening of the game panel can be blocked from the front side by the base plate of the ball entry unit, the heat from the LED board provided in the space between the first component and the second component is Heat can be dissipated to the rear side of the game panel through the contact surface portion, and foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the front side of the game panel through the opening of the game panel from the rear side of the game panel. .

Means 8: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front of a game panel through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entering unit
It has a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, and an opening provided to penetrate the game panel is opened from the front side. a first component attached to the game panel so as to block it;
A second configuration that has a second attachment hole for attachment to the first component and is attached from the rear side of the first component so as to form a predetermined space in the opening together with the first component Department and
and is formed so that a gap is provided between the game panel and the inner circumference in the opening,
A non-contact surface portion that is not in contact with each other is provided at least on the upper side of the contact surface portion where the first component portion and the second component portion are in contact with each other,
An LED board on which an LED is mounted is provided in the space formed by the first component and the second component so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in plan view.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 8, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which a game ball can enter and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game panel through which a game ball can flow down, the ball entry unit is , a positioning projection to be inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game panel, and a first mounting hole for mounting to the game panel, so as to block the opening provided to penetrate the game panel from the front side. It has a first component to be attached to the game panel and a second mounting hole for attaching to the first component, and the first component so as to form a predetermined space in the opening with the first component. and a second component that is attached from the rear side, and is formed so that a gap is provided between the inner periphery of the opening of the game panel and the first component and the second component. A non-contact surface part that is not in contact with each other is provided at least on the upper side of the contact surface part, and the LED is placed in the space formed by the first component part and the second component part so as not to overlap the non-contact surface part in plan view. is provided with an LED substrate on which is mounted.

As a result, after attaching the second component from the rear side of the first component with the mounting screws through the second mounting holes, the positioning protrusion protruding from the flat base plate in the first component is moved forward. After inserting it into the positioning hole of the game panel from the front of the game panel, screw the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole and tighten it so that the base plate comes into contact with the front of the game panel. Since the ball-entering unit can be attached and the opening penetrating the game panel can be blocked by the base plate of the first component, it is possible to make it difficult to see behind the game panel through the opening. The appearance can be improved, and foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the front side of the game panel through the opening from the rear side of the game panel. Then, a space is formed in the opening of the game panel by the first component and the second component that is attached from the rear side of the first component by means of a mounting screw through the second mounting hole, and the space is Since the LED board is provided in the , the ball entry unit can be decorated with light by the LED of the LED board. At this time, since the space in which the LED board is provided is formed in the opening of the game panel, it is possible to fit the space and the LED board within the board thickness of the game panel. It is possible to reduce the amount of protrusion to the ball as much as possible, and it is possible to secure a wider space behind the ball entering unit. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large performance device or a performance device with a wide movable area behind the ball-entering unit, so that it is possible to present a performance with a greater impact to the player, which is highly appealing to the player. It is possible to provide high-end gaming machines.

Further, the LED board is provided in the space between the first component and the second component, and at least the upper part of the contact surface portion where the first component and the second component are in contact with each other, Since the non-contact surface portions that are not in contact with each other are provided, the heat from the LED substrate can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portions, and the influence of heat can be avoided. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer circumference of the portion of the ball-entering unit inserted into the opening of the game panel and the inner circumference of the opening. That is, since the gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion and the inner periphery of the opening, the heat from the LED substrate can be reliably radiated from the non-contact surface portion to the gap. Since the front end side of the opening of the game panel is closed by the base plate of the first component, the heat emitted from the non-contact surface portion to the gap does not flow to the front side of the game panel through the gap. It can be guided to the rear surface side of the game panel, and the heat from the LED substrate can be reliably radiated.

In addition, since the LED substrate is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion in a plan view, even if foreign matter such as dust enters the space where the LED substrate is provided through the non-contact surface portion, the LED substrate It is possible to prevent the influence of foreign matter as much as possible.

Furthermore, since the game panel is made opaque, light from the LEDs of the LED substrate does not enter the inside of the game panel from the inner peripheral surface of the opening of the game panel, and can be reflected by the inner peripheral surface of the opening. Since it becomes possible, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the presentation effect of the light emission of the LED.

In addition, since the base plate of the ball entry unit blocks the opening of the game panel from the front side, the heat from the LED board provided in the space between the first component and the second component is It is possible to dissipate heat to the rear side of the game panel through the non-contact surface portion, and to prevent foreign matter such as dust from the rear side of the game panel from entering the front side of the game panel through the opening of the game panel. can.

In addition, in the first component part of the ball-entering unit, it is desirable to provide a first attachment hole passing through the base plate for attachment to the game panel, near the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screw into the game panel through the first mounting hole and tightening it, the positioning protrusion can be strongly pressed against the game panel side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole of the game panel. Lifting due to incomplete insertion of the projection can be prevented.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of presenting a more impactful presentation by making it easier to secure the space behind the ball-entering unit.

[15-9c. Relationship between the solution of the ninth technical feature and the embodiment]
The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of this embodiment is the game panel of the above solving means, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of this embodiment is the opening of the above solving means, and the positioning hole of this embodiment is 1113 is the positioning hole of the solving means, the general winning hole 2001 in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 2811b of the first component member 2811 is the entrance of the above solving means, the side unit 2800B in this embodiment, the side A unit 2800C, a side unit 2800D, a side unit 2800E, and a side unit 2800F correspond to the ball-entering units of the above solution.

In addition, the unit main body 2810 and the unit main body 2810A in this embodiment are the first constituent parts of the above solving means, the base plate 2811a in this embodiment is the base plate of the above solving means, and the positioning protrusion 2811c in this embodiment is the above The positioning protrusion of the solving means, the mounting hole 2811d in this embodiment to the mounting hole of the solving means, the unit cover 2820 in this embodiment to the second component of the solving means, and the LED board 2825 in this embodiment These correspond to the LED substrates of the above solution. In addition, the contact surface portion 2830 (the portion where the support frame portion 2814 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact) in this embodiment is the contact surface portion of the above solution, and the non-contact surface portion 2831 (the cutout portion of the support frame portion 2814) in this embodiment. 2814b and the notched portion 2820c) of the unit cover 2820 correspond to the non-contact surface portion of the above solution, respectively.

[15-9d. Characteristic action and effect of the ninth technical feature]
Here, as a feature of the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800C, the side unit 2800D, the side unit 2800E, and the side unit 2800F in this embodiment, the side unit 2800B will be described as a representative. According to this embodiment, in the side unit 2800B attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, after attaching the unit cover 2820 from the rear side of the unit body 2810 with the attachment screws through the attachment holes, the unit body After inserting the positioning projection 2811c protruding from the flat base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 of 2810 into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the base plate 2811a is inserted into the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2800B can be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 by screwing the mounting screws into the panel plate 1110 through the mounting holes 2811d so as to abut on the front surface of the panel plate 1110. Since the opening 1112 passing through can be blocked, it is possible to make it difficult to see the back of the game panel 1100 through the opening 1112, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the panel in the game panel 1100 Foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the front side (game area 5a) of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 from the rear side of the plate 1110 . A space is formed in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 by the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 attached from the rear side of the unit main body 2810 by mounting screws through the mounting holes. Since the substrate 2825 is provided, the LED 2825a of the LED substrate 2825 can be used to decorate the side unit 2800B. At this time, since the space in which the LED board 2825 is provided is formed in the opening 1112 of the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100, the space and the LED board 2825 can be accommodated within the board thickness of the panel board 1110. As a result, the amount of rearward projection from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 can be minimized, and a wider space behind the side unit 2800B can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large production device, a production device with a wide movable area, etc. behind the side unit 2800B, so that a more impactful production can be presented to the player, and the appeal to the player can be increased. An expensive pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, an LED board 2825 is provided in the space between the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 in the side unit 2800B, and at least the upper part of the contact surface portion 2830 where the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 are in contact with each other. Since the non-contact surface portion 2831 (notch portion 2820c) that is not in contact with each other is provided, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be radiated to the outside through the non-contact surface portion 2831, and the influence of heat can be avoided. can. At this time, a gap is provided between the outer circumference of the portion of the side unit 2800B inserted into the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 and the inner circumference of the opening 1112 . That is, since the gap is provided between the non-contact surface portion 2831 and the inner periphery of the opening 1112, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be reliably radiated from the non-contact surface portion 2831 to the gap. Since the front end side of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is blocked by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 of the unit main body 2810, the heat released from the non-contact surface portion 2831 to the gap is Through the gap, the heat from the LED substrate 2825 can be reliably dissipated by being guided to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 without flowing to the front side of the panel plate 1110 .

In addition, since the LED board 2825 is provided so as not to overlap the non-contact surface portion 2831 in plan view, foreign matter such as dust and dirt cannot enter the space where the LED board 2825 is provided through the non-contact surface portion 2831. Also, it is possible to make it difficult for the LED substrate 2825 to get caught, and the influence of foreign matter can be prevented as much as possible.

Furthermore, when the game panel 1100 is made opaque, light from the LEDs 2825a of the LED board 2825 does not enter the game panel 1100 through the inner peripheral surface of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100. Since it is possible to reflect the light, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the amount of light emitted forward, and it is possible to make it easy to fully exhibit the presentation effect of the light emission of the LED 2825a.

In addition, since the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is blocked from the front side by the base plate 2811a of the first component member 2811 in the side unit 2800B, the space between the unit main body 2810 and the unit cover 2820 is closed. The heat from the LED substrate 2825 provided in the panel plate 1110 can be radiated to the rear side of the panel plate 1110 through the non-contact surface portion 2831, and foreign matter such as dust and dirt can be prevented from the rear side of the panel plate 1110. Intrusion into the front side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 can be prevented.

In addition, in the side unit 2800B, in the first component member 2811 of the unit main body 2810, a mounting hole 2811d passing through the base plate 2811a for mounting on the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is provided near the positioning projection 2811c. Therefore, by screwing the mounting screws into the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 through the mounting holes 2811d and tightening them, the positioning protrusions 2811c are strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and securely fit into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110. It is possible to prevent the positioning projection 2811c from being lifted due to incomplete insertion.

[15-10. Tenth technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-10a. Background of the tenth technical feature]
In recent years, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, as a means for performing an effect that can attract the interest of a player, the effect device is enlarged, the movable range of the effect device is widened, and the effect device is used. are decorated with flashy luminescence.

As this type of gaming machine, for example, in a conventional gaming machine such as Patent Document A10 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018185), a plurality of ball entrances (for example, and a ball guide unit that detects a game ball that has entered the ball entrance of the ball entry unit at the rear of the game panel and discharges it downward. It is

However, in the technique of Patent Document A10, since the ball guiding unit is provided behind the game panel, the presence of the ball guiding unit narrows the space behind the ball entering unit, and the space for providing the effect device. could not be secured more widely.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine capable of presenting a more impactful presentation by making it easier to secure a space behind the ball-entering unit. .

[15-10b. Solution for the tenth technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game board through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entering unit
It has a positioning projection inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board, and an attachment hole for attachment to the game board, and closes an opening extending through the game board from the front side. a first component attached to the game board in
It is provided on the rear side of the first component part, and along the board surface of the game board in the opening so that the game ball that enters the ball entrance enters the board thickness of the game board a second component having a flowable sphere passage; and
characterized by comprising

Here, the "entrance" is defined as "a winning opening that provides a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters (for example, a general winning opening, a normal winning opening, a starting winning opening (starting opening), a large winning opening, a special winning opening, etc.). , ``out slot for ejecting a game ball out of the gaming machine without returning it to the player without awarding a privilege even if it enters the game ball'', and the like.

In addition, the "game board" includes obstacle nails planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, "made of wooden plywood such as plywood", and "made of panel board cut from transparent resin board". "mono", "transparent resin injection-molded", and the like.

Further, the "ball passage" may extend so as to extend entirely within the thickness of the game board, or may extend so as to partially extend within the thickness of the game board.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which a game ball can enter and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game board through which a game ball can flow down, the ball entry unit is , a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board, and a mounting hole for mounting to the game board, and the opening provided to penetrate the game board is closed from the front side. A first constituent part attached to the board, and a first constituent part provided on the rear side of the first constituent part. and a second component having a ball passage that can flow down along the plate surface (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [12-1. Side unit of second embodiment] section , see descriptions in FIGS. 164 to 169, etc.).

As a result, after inserting the positioning projections of the first component into the positioning holes of the game panel from the front, the mounting screws are screwed into the game board through the mounting holes and tightened, so that the front surface of the game board is secured to the first position. Since the constituent part (ball entry unit) can be attached and the opening penetrating the game board can be blocked by the first constituent part, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear side of the game board through the opening, thereby improving the gaming machine. The appearance of the game board can be improved, and foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the front side of the game board through the opening from the rear side of the game board. A ball passage extending along the board surface of the game board in the opening is provided in the second component part provided on the rear side of the first component part so as to extend within the thickness of the game board. Therefore, the game ball entering the ball entrance through the ball passage can flow down so as to fall within the thickness of the game board. The amount of rearward protrusion of the unit from the rear surface of the game board can be minimized, and a wider space behind the ball-entering unit can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large performance device or a performance device (movable accessory) with a wide movable area behind the ball-entering unit, so that a more impactful performance can be presented to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly appealing to people.

In addition, it is desirable to provide a mounting hole for mounting the ball-entering unit to the game board in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screws into the game board through the mounting holes and tightening them, the positioning projections can be strongly pressed against the game board side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning holes of the game board. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

Also, at least the portion in front of the movable accessory in the ball passage may be provided within the thickness of the game board. As a result, since the front part of the movable accessory as a production device in the ball passage is made to extend within the plate thickness of the game board, there is sufficient space in the front-rear direction of the part where the movable accessory is provided. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of ensuring a wide range of movement of a movable accessory and showing a player a performance with a higher impact.

Further, as described above, when the front part of the movable accessory in the ball passage is provided within the thickness of the game board, the movable accessory is provided behind the game board as described above. Since it is possible to secure a sufficient space in the front-rear direction of the part where it is, for example, a decoration can be placed between the ball-entering unit and the movable accessory, and the movable accessory in the lowered position can be moved by the decoration. It can be hidden so that it is difficult for the player to see it. To provide a game machine capable of showing a player a performance in which a movable accessory appears when the movable accessory is lifted from a lowered position, giving a strong impact to the player and entertaining the player. be able to.

Further, a ball sensor for detecting a game ball flowing down the ball passage may be provided at a portion below the movable accessory provided behind the ball passage. As a result, the ball sensor for detecting the game ball entering the ball entrance is provided at a portion below the movable accessory provided behind, so that the ball sensor does not interfere with the movable accessory. However, it is possible to sufficiently exhibit the desired performance effect of the movable accessory.

In addition, the ball passage includes a branch portion communicating with the ball entrance and extending backward, and a main flow portion joining the branch portion and extending downward along the board surface of the game board. You may make it have. As a result, since the respective tributaries communicating with each ball entrance are merged with the main stream and flowed down, there is no need to provide ball passages for each of the plurality of ball entrances. It is possible to collectively discharge balls in one ball passage and to easily secure a space behind the ball-entering unit.

Also, the second component may be attached to the rear side of the first component. Accordingly, since the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the first component can be increased by the second component. More specifically, for example, in disassembling a game machine for recycling or the like, when the first component is pulled forward to be removed from the game board, if the rigidity of the first component is low, the first component may bend. Due to the deflection, the positioning projections inserted into the positioning holes of the game board are tilted, making it difficult to get out of the positioning holes, and there is a risk that the disassembly work will be troublesome. On the other hand, if the second constituent part is attached to the rear side of the first constituent part, the second constituent part is provided with a ball passage, and the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped. Since the rigidity of the second component is increased by the presence of the ball passage, the rigidity of the first component (ball-entering unit) can be increased by attaching the second component. Therefore, when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward in disassembly work of the game machine for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased, so that the first constituent part from which the positioning projection protrudes does not bend. Therefore, the positioning protrusions are not inclined with respect to the positioning holes of the game board, the ball entry unit can be easily removed from the game board, and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. can be provided.

Furthermore, the second component may be attached to a back member provided behind the game board. As a result, since the second component part of the ball-entering unit is attached to the rear surface member behind the game board, the ball passage extends downward from the opening penetrating through the game board on the rear side of the game board. becomes possible. More specifically, when the second component is attached to the first component, the first component closes the opening of the game board from the front side, so the second component where the ball passage is provided is positioned closer to the opening than the opening. Therefore, it is difficult to extend part of the ball passage below the opening on the rear side of the game board. On the other hand, if the second component part is attached to the back surface member provided behind the game board, a part of the ball passage extends below the opening on the rear side of the game board. be able to. Therefore, since the ball passage can be extended to the lower end of the game board, the drop height of the game balls discharged downward can be reduced, and the impact caused by the discharged game balls can be reduced. can. In addition, since part of the ball passage can be extended downward from the opening on the rear side of the game board, it is necessary to extend the opening penetrating through the game board downward to the lower end of the game board. There is no loss, and the strength of the game board does not decrease.

Also, as described above, if the second component of the ball-entering unit is attached to the rear surface member behind the game board, when the ball sensor is provided in the ball passage, the electronic parts such as the ball sensor are installed behind the game board. Therefore, electronic parts can be arranged on the back member side, and there is no need to provide electronic parts such as ball sensors on the game board side. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling the game machine, since the wiring of the electronic parts does not extend from the game board side, the wiring may get caught on a member such as an obstructing nail, which may interfere with the work or break the wiring. never do.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
``The second component part is provided so that at least the front part of the movable accessory in the ball passage is within the thickness of the game board.''
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 2, the second component part is provided so that at least the part in front of the movable accessory in the ball passage is within the thickness of the game board ([In order to carry out the invention form], see the description regarding the ball passage 2812a of the second component member 2812).

As a result, since the front part of the movable accessory as a production device in the ball passage is made to extend within the plate thickness of the game board, there is sufficient space in the front-rear direction of the part where the movable accessory is provided. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of ensuring a wide range of movement of a movable accessory and showing a player a performance with a higher impact.

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to secure a sufficient space in the front-rear direction of the part where the movable accessory is provided on the rear side of the game board, for example, the ball-entering unit and the movable accessory can be separated from each other. By arranging the decoration between them, the movable accessory at the lowered position can be hidden from the player so that it is difficult to see. To provide a game machine capable of showing a player a performance in which a movable accessory appears when the movable accessory is lifted from a lowered position, giving a strong impact to the player and entertaining the player. be able to.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The second component part is provided with a ball sensor for detecting a game ball flowing down the ball passage at a portion below a movable accessory provided at the rear of the ball passage."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 3, the second constituent part is provided with a ball sensor for detecting a game ball flowing down the ball passage at a portion below the movable accessory provided at the rear of the ball passage. (See description regarding sphere sensor 2813b in Detailed Description).

As a result, the ball sensor for detecting the game ball entering the ball entrance is provided at a portion below the movable accessory provided behind, so that the ball sensor does not interfere with the movable accessory. However, it is possible to sufficiently exhibit the desired performance effect of the movable accessory.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The ball passage includes a branch portion that communicates with the ball entrance and extends backward, and a main stream portion that joins the branch portion and extends downward along the board surface of the game board. and have
characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 4, the ball passage has a branch portion communicating with the ball entrance and extending backward, and a branch portion joining the branch portion and extending downward along the board surface of the game board. (See the description of the tributary portion 2801 and the main flow portion 2802 in the ball passage 2812a in [Description of the Invention]).

As a result, since the respective tributaries communicating with each ball entrance are merged with the main stream and flowed down, there is no need to provide ball passages for each of the plurality of ball entrances. It is possible to collectively discharge balls in one ball passage and to easily secure a space behind the ball-entering unit.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The second component is attached to the rear of the first component."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component (see [Description of the Invention] for the second component 2812 of the side unit 2800). see description).

Accordingly, since the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the first component can be increased by the second component. More specifically, for example, in disassembling a game machine for recycling or the like, when the first component is pulled forward to be removed from the game board, if the rigidity of the first component is low, the first component may bend. Due to the deflection, the positioning projections inserted into the positioning holes of the game board are tilted, making it difficult to get out of the positioning holes, and there is a risk that the disassembly work will be troublesome. On the other hand, in the present means, the ball passage is provided in the second component, and the ball passage has a U-shaped cross section. The rigidity of the first component (ball-entering unit) can be increased by attaching this second component because it is enhanced by its presence. Therefore, when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward in disassembly work of the game machine for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased, so that the first constituent part from which the positioning projection protrudes does not bend. Therefore, the positioning protrusions are not inclined with respect to the positioning holes of the game board, the ball entry unit can be easily removed from the game board, and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. can be provided.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 4,
"The second constituent part is attached to a back member provided behind the game board"
characterized by being

Here, the "back member" includes a "back decoration", a "back unit", a "back box", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 6, the second component is attached to the back member provided behind the game board (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the second component of the side unit 2800A See description for component 2813).

As a result, since the second component part of the ball-entering unit is attached to the rear surface member behind the game board, the ball passage extends downward from the opening penetrating through the game board on the rear side of the game board. becomes possible. More specifically, when the second component is attached to the first component, the first component closes the opening of the game board from the front side, so the second component where the ball passage is provided is positioned closer to the opening than the opening. Therefore, it is difficult to extend part of the ball passage below the opening on the rear side of the game board. On the other hand, in this means, since the second constituent part is attached to the back surface member behind the game board, a part of the ball passage extends below the opening on the rear side of the game board. be able to. Therefore, since the ball passage can be extended to the lower end of the game board, the drop height of the game balls discharged downward can be reduced, and the impact caused by the discharged game balls can be reduced. can. In addition, since part of the ball passage can be extended downward from the opening on the rear side of the game board, it is necessary to extend the opening penetrating through the game board downward to the lower end of the game board. There is no loss, and the strength of the game board does not decrease.

In addition, since the second component part of the ball entry unit is attached to the back member behind the game board, when a ball sensor is provided in the ball passage, electronic parts such as the ball sensor are attached to the back member side behind the game board. Therefore, the electronic parts can be put together on the back member side, and there is no need to provide electronic parts such as ball sensors on the game board side. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling the game machine, since the wiring of the electronic parts does not extend from the game board side, the wiring may get caught on a member such as an obstructing nail, which may interfere with the work or break the wiring. never do.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which game balls can enter, and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game board through which game balls can flow down,
The ball entering unit
It has a positioning projection inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board, and an attachment hole for attachment to the game board, and closes an opening extending through the game board from the front side. a first component attached to the game board in
It is provided on the rear side of the first component part, and along the board surface of the game board in the opening so that the game ball that enters the ball entrance enters the board thickness of the game board a second component having a flowable ball passage;
with
The second component part is attached to the rear side of the first component part or to a rear member provided behind the game board, and the ball passage is positioned below the movable accessory. A ball sensor is provided to detect the flowing game ball,
The ball passage includes a branch portion communicating with the ball entrance and extending rearward, and a main flow portion joining the branch portion and extending downward along the board surface of the game board. , and is provided so that at least the front portion of the movable accessory is within the thickness of the game board.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 7, in a gaming machine having a plurality of ball entrances into which a game ball can enter and a ball entry unit attached to the front surface of a game board through which a game ball can flow down, the ball entry unit is , a positioning protrusion inserted into a positioning hole provided in the game board, and a mounting hole for mounting to the game board, and the opening provided to penetrate the game board is closed from the front side. A first constituent part attached to the board, and a first constituent part provided on the rear side of the first constituent part. a second component having a ball passage that can flow down along the plate surface, and the second component is on the rear side of the first component or on the back member provided behind the game board A ball sensor for detecting a game ball flowing down the ball passage is provided at a portion below the movable accessory, and the ball passage communicates with the ball entrance and extends rearward. It has a protruding tributary part and a main stream part which merges with the tributary part and extends downward along the board surface of the game board, and at least the part to be the front of the movable accessory is the board of the game board. It is provided so as to be applied within the thickness.

As a result, after inserting the positioning projections of the first component into the positioning holes of the game panel from the front, the mounting screws are screwed into the game board through the mounting holes and tightened, so that the front surface of the game board is secured to the first position. Since the constituent part (ball entry unit) can be attached and the opening penetrating the game board can be blocked by the first constituent part, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear side of the game board through the opening, thereby improving the gaming machine. The appearance of the game board can be improved, and foreign matter such as dust can be prevented from entering the front side of the game board through the opening from the rear side of the game board. A ball passage extending along the board surface of the game board in the opening is provided in the second component part provided on the rear side of the first component part so as to extend within the thickness of the game board. Therefore, the game ball entering the ball entrance through the ball passage can flow down so as to fall within the thickness of the game board. The amount of rearward protrusion of the unit from the rear surface of the game board can be minimized, and a wider space behind the ball-entering unit can be secured. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large performance device or a performance device (movable accessory) with a wide movable area behind the ball-entering unit, so that a more impactful performance can be presented to the player. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that is highly appealing to people.

In addition, since the front part of the movable accessory as a production device in the ball passage is placed within the thickness of the game board, there is sufficient space in the front and back direction of the part where the movable accessory is provided. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of ensuring a wide range of movement of a movable accessory and showing a performance with a higher impact to a player.

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to secure a sufficient space in the front-rear direction of the part where the movable accessory is provided on the rear side of the game board, for example, the ball-entering unit and the movable accessory can be separated from each other. By arranging the decoration between them, the movable accessory at the lowered position can be hidden from the player so that it is difficult to see. To provide a game machine capable of showing a player a performance in which a movable accessory appears when the movable accessory is lifted from a lowered position, giving a strong impact to the player and entertaining the player. be able to.

Furthermore, since the ball sensor for detecting the game ball that has entered the ball entrance is provided below the movable accessory provided behind, the ball sensor does not interfere with the movable accessory. Therefore, it is possible to sufficiently exhibit the desired performance effect of the movable accessory.

In addition, since the tributaries communicating with each ball inlet are merged with the main stream to flow down, there is no need to provide ball passages for each of the plurality of ball inlets. It is possible to collectively discharge the ball through one ball passage, and to easily secure a space behind the ball entering unit.

Moreover, if the second component is attached to the rear side of the first component, the rigidity of the first component can be increased by the second component. More specifically, for example, in disassembling a game machine for recycling or the like, when the first component is pulled forward to be removed from the game board, if the rigidity of the first component is low, the first component may bend. Due to the deflection, the positioning projections inserted into the positioning holes of the game board are tilted, making it difficult to get out of the positioning holes, and there is a risk that the disassembly work will be troublesome. On the other hand, if the second constituent part is attached to the rear side of the first constituent part, the second constituent part is provided with a ball passage, and the cross section of the ball passage is U-shaped. Since the rigidity of the second component is increased by the presence of the ball passage, the rigidity of the first component (ball-entering unit) can be increased by attaching the second component. Therefore, when the ball-entering unit is pulled forward in disassembly work of the game machine for recycling or the like, the rigidity of the ball-entering unit is increased, so that the first constituent part from which the positioning projection protrudes does not bend. Therefore, the positioning protrusions are not inclined with respect to the positioning holes of the game board, the ball entry unit can be easily removed from the game board, and the disassembly work for sorting can be reduced. can be provided.

Furthermore, when the second component part of the ball-entering unit is attached to the back surface member behind the game board, the ball passage extends downward from the opening penetrating the game board on the rear side of the game board. becomes possible. More specifically, when the second component is attached to the first component, the first component closes the opening of the game board from the front side, so the second component where the ball passage is provided is positioned closer to the opening than the opening. Therefore, it is difficult to extend part of the ball passage below the opening on the rear side of the game board. On the other hand, if the second component part is attached to the back surface member provided behind the game board, a part of the ball passage extends below the opening on the rear side of the game board. be able to. Therefore, since the ball passage can be extended to the lower end of the game board, the drop height of the game balls discharged downward can be reduced, and the impact caused by the discharged game balls can be reduced. can. In addition, since part of the ball passage can be extended downward from the opening on the rear side of the game board, it is necessary to extend the opening penetrating through the game board downward to the lower end of the game board. There is no loss, and the strength of the game board does not decrease.

Also, if the second component of the ball-entering unit is attached to the rear member behind the game board, the electronic parts such as the ball sensor provided in the ball passage are provided on the back member side behind the game board. As a result, electronic parts can be put together on the back member side, and there is no need to provide electronic parts such as ball sensors on the game board side. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling the game machine, since the wiring of the electronic parts does not extend from the game board side, the wiring may get caught on a member such as an obstructing nail, which may interfere with the work or break the wiring. never do.

In addition, it is desirable to provide a mounting hole for mounting the ball-entering unit to the game board in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion. As a result, by screwing the mounting screws into the game board through the mounting holes and tightening them, the positioning projections can be strongly pressed against the game board side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning holes of the game board. Lifting due to incomplete insertion can be prevented.

Thus, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of presenting a more impactful presentation by making it easier to secure the space behind the ball-entering unit.

[15-10c. Relationship between the solution of the tenth technical feature and the embodiment]
The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of the present embodiment is the game plate of the above solving means, the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the present embodiment is the opening of the above solving means, and the positioning hole of the present embodiment. 1113 is the positioning hole of the solving means, the general winning hole 2001 in this embodiment, the ball receiving part 2811b of the first component member 2811 is the entrance of the above solving means, the side unit 2800 in this embodiment, the side The unit 2800A, the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800C, and the side unit 2800G correspond to the ball-entering units of the above solution.

In addition, the first component 2811 of the unit main body 2810 in this embodiment is the first component of the solving means, the positioning protrusion 2811c in this embodiment is the positioning protrusion of the solving means, and the mounting hole in this embodiment 2811d is the mounting hole of the above solution, the second component 2812 and the second component 2813 in this embodiment are the second component of the above solution, and the ball passages 2812a and 2813a in this embodiment are the above solution. The ball passage of the means, the ball sensor 2813b and the ball sensor 2815 in this embodiment as the ball sensor of the above solution, the back unit 3000 (back box 3010) in this embodiment as the back member of the above solution, this embodiment The back and bottom effect unit 3500 in the above corresponds to the movable accessory of the above-described solution means.

[15-10d. Characteristic effects of the tenth technical feature]
Here, the side unit 2800 will be described as a representative feature of the side unit 2800, the side unit 2800A, the side unit 2800B, the side unit 2800C, and the side unit 2800G in this embodiment. According to this embodiment, in the game board 5, the positioning protrusion 2811c of the first component member 2811 of the side unit 2800 is inserted from the front into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and then the mounting hole 2811d is inserted. By screwing the mounting screws into the panel plate 1110 and tightening them, the first component member 2811 (side unit 2800) can be attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the first component member 2811 penetrates the panel plate 1110. Since the opening 1112 can be closed, the rear of the panel plate 1110 can be made difficult to see through the opening 1112, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved, and the panel plate 1110 can be seen from the rear side. It is possible to prevent foreign substances such as dust and dirt from entering the front surface (game area 5 a ) side of the panel plate 1110 through the opening 1112 . Then, the second component member 2812 provided on the rear side of the first component member 2811 extends along the plate surface of the panel plate 1110 in the opening 1112 so as to cover the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110 . Since the ball passage 2812a is provided, the game ball B entered into the ball receiving portion 2811b (general prize winning port 2001) through the ball passage 2812a is allowed to fall within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110. Therefore, by utilizing the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, the amount of rearward projection of the side unit 2800 from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 can be minimized, and the space behind the side unit 2800 can be secured more widely. Therefore, it is possible to provide a large production device such as the back and bottom production unit 3500 or a production device with a wide movable area behind the side unit 2800, so that a more impactful production can be presented to the player. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that is highly appealing to players.

In addition, since the part of the ball passage 2812a that is in front of the lower back effect unit 3500 is placed within the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, the space in the front and back direction of the part where the lower back effect unit 3500 is provided is reduced. To provide a Pachinko machine 1 capable of sufficiently securing, widening the movable range of the back side performance unit 3500, and capable of showing a player a performance with a higher impact.

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to secure a sufficient space in the front-rear direction of the portion where the backside effect unit 3500 is provided on the rear side of the panel plate 1110, for example, the side unit 2800 and the backside By arranging the decoration between the performance unit 3500 and the decoration, the back and bottom movable decoration 3510 at the lowered position can be hidden from the player. As a result, when the back bottom movable decorative body 3510 is lifted from the lowered position, the player can see an effect in which the back bottom movable decorative body 3510 appears, and the player can be entertained with a strong impact. A possible pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, in the side unit 2800, each of the tributary portions 2801 communicating with each ball receiving portion 2811b is made to join the main flow portion 2802 and flow down. There is no need to provide the ball passage 2812a, and the ball passage 2812a can be used to collectively discharge the ball, and the space behind the side unit 2800 can be easily secured.

Further, in the side unit 2800A, a ball sensor 2813b for detecting a game ball B that has entered the ball receiving portion 2811b (general prize winning opening 2001) is provided at a portion below the back and bottom effect unit 3500 provided behind. Therefore, the ball sensor 2813b does not interfere with the backside effect unit 3500, and the desired effect of the backside effect unit 3500 can be sufficiently exhibited.

Moreover, if the second component member 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component member 2811 as in the side unit 2800, the rigidity of the first component member 2811 can be increased by the second component member 2812. More specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is disassembled for recycling or the like, when the first component member 2811 is pulled forward to be removed from the panel plate 1110, if the rigidity of the first component member 2811 is low, the first component member 2811 is bent, and the bending tilts the positioning protrusion 2811c inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, making it difficult to remove from the positioning hole 1113, and the disassembly work may be troublesome. On the other hand, when the second component member 2812 is attached to the rear side of the first component member 2811, the second component member 2812 is provided with a ball passage 2812a, and the cross section of the ball passage 2812a is a cone. Since the second component member 2812 is shaped like a letter, the rigidity of the second component member 2812 is enhanced by the existence of the ball passage 2812a. Rigidity can be increased. Therefore, when the side unit 2800 is pulled forward in disassembly of the pachinko machine 1 for recycling or the like, the increased rigidity of the side unit 2800 bends the first component member 2811 from which the positioning protrusion 2811c protrudes. Therefore, the positioning projections 2811c do not incline with respect to the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the side unit 2800 can be easily removed from the panel plate 1110, reducing the disassembly work for sorting. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of

Furthermore, in the side unit 2800A, since the second component member 2813 is attached to the back member such as the back unit 3000 behind the panel plate 1110, the ball passage 2813a is positioned behind the panel plate 1110 so that the panel plate 1110 is attached. It is possible to extend downward beyond the penetrating opening 1112 . More specifically, when the second component member 2812 is attached to the first component member 2811, the first component member 2811 closes the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 from the front side. It is necessary to make the second component 2812 smaller than the opening 1112, which makes it difficult to partially extend the ball passage 2812a below the opening 1112 on the rear side of the panel plate 1110. On the other hand, in the side unit 2800A, since the second component member 2813 is attached to a rear member such as the rear unit 3000 provided behind the panel plate 1110, part of the ball passage 2813a is It can be made to extend below the opening 1112 on the rear side of 1110 . Therefore, since the ball passage 2813a can be extended to the lower end of the panel plate 1110, the drop height of the game balls B discharged downward can be reduced, and the impact of the discharged game balls B can be reduced. can be reduced. Further, since a part of the ball passage 2813a can be made to extend below the opening 1112 on the rear side of the panel plate 1110, the opening 1112 passing through the panel plate 1110 can be There is no need to extend downward to the lower end of the panel plate 1110, and the strength of the panel plate 1110 is not lowered.

In addition, in the side unit 2800A, since the second component member 2813 is attached to the back member such as the back unit 3000 behind the panel plate 1110, electronic components such as the ball sensor 2813b provided in the ball passage 2813a is provided on the back member side behind the panel plate 1110, electronic components can be integrated on the back member side, and there is no need to provide electronic components such as the ball sensor 2813b on the panel plate 1110 side. Therefore, when assembling or disassembling the pachinko machine 1, since the wiring of the electronic parts does not extend from the panel board 1110 side, the wiring may get caught on a member such as an obstructing nail, which may hinder the work or may break the wiring. Never chill out.

In addition, in the side unit 2800, since the mounting hole 2811d for mounting the first component member 2811 to the panel plate 1110 is provided in the vicinity of the positioning protrusion 2811c, the mounting screw can be attached to the panel plate 1110 through the mounting hole 2811d. By screwing and tightening, the positioning projection 2811c can be strongly pressed against the panel plate 1110 side and can be reliably inserted into the positioning hole 1113 of the panel plate 1110, thereby preventing the positioning projection 2811c from being lifted due to incomplete insertion. can be done.

[15-11. Eleventh technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-11a. Background of the 11th technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a center accessory having a decorative body with a predetermined decoration is attached from the front to an opening of a game panel forming a game area in which game balls can flow down, There is a known one provided (for example, Patent Document A11: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074434). In the technique disclosed in Patent Document A11, the appearance of the game machine is improved by the decorative body provided on the center accessory.

However, in the technique of Patent Document A11, since the flat plate-shaped decoration is provided near the front end of the center role, even if the decoration is decorated with a relief-like decoration, the depth feeling is poor. There is a risk that the player will get tired of watching it and lose interest in the player.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the decline in the player's interest by providing a decorative body with a higher decorative effect.

[15-11b. Solution for the 11th technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed,
The game board is
a frame-shaped center frame mounted from the front in an opening formed in the game panel;
a decoration attached to the center frame and having a predetermined decoration;
with
The decoration is
a rear decorative portion extending into the frame of the center frame and partly protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame; a front decorative portion provided forward of the rear decorative portion; has
The rear decoration and the front decoration are decorated in harmony with each other."
characterized by being

Here, the "game panel" includes an "opaque panel such as plywood (plywood)", a "panel plate made of transparent resin", and a "panel plate made of transparent resin and a frame for holding the outer peripheral edge of the panel plate". and a panel holder having a shape.

In addition, the ``center frame'' includes a ``flat plate-shaped flange that can contact the front surface of the game panel, and a game ball that extends forward from the flange and flows down the game area inside the opening of the game panel. having an inflow restricting portion that restricts inflow”, “an inserting portion that is inserted into the opening of the game panel and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening, and the front end of the inserting portion A flat plate-shaped flange portion that extends in a direction along the surface of the game panel and can contact the front surface of the game panel, and a game ball that extends forward from the flange portion and flows down the game area is an opening in the game panel. and an inflow regulating part that regulates the inflow into the interior of the

In addition, as the "decorative body", there are "things that are decorated with patterns by printing or painting", "things that are three-dimensionally shaped decorations", and "metallic luster like plating". "A thing decorated with", etc.

Furthermore, the "decorative body" includes "things that are decorated with light emitted by LEDs mounted on the LED board", "electronic parts provided behind (for example, LED boards, relay boards, ball sensors, magnetic Sensors, indicators (displays with special patterns), solenoids, etc.) have an opaque part to make it difficult to see the wiring from the front", "It protrudes backward beyond the rear end of the center frame. Those having electronic components (for example, LED substrates, relay substrates, ball sensors, magnetic sensors, indicators (indicators with special patterns), solenoids, etc.).

In addition, "decoration that cooperates with each other" includes "decoration that constitutes one decoration (picture) with the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part", "the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part". Pattern (figure) decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the front part", "The decoration of the front decoration part or the decoration of the rear decoration part complements (emphasizes) the decoration of the rear decoration part or the decoration of the front decoration part. such as decoration”, and the like.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine provided with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed, the game board is a frame mounted from the front in an opening formed in the game panel. and a decorative body attached to the center frame and having a predetermined decoration, the decorative body extending into the frame of the center frame and partly behind the center frame. It has a rear decoration part projecting rearward from the end and a front decoration part provided in front of the rear decoration part, and the rear decoration part and the front decoration part are decorations that cooperate with each other. It is applied. (In [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], see the chapter [11-2. Center function of the second embodiment] and the description of FIG. 159, etc.)

As a result, the center frame attached to the game panel of the game board is provided with a rear decorative portion partially protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame and a front decorative portion provided forward of the rear decorative portion. Since the decoration body is provided, the decoration with depth can be shown to the player by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part of the decoration body. At this time, since the rear decoration part and the front decoration part are decorated in cooperation with each other, a large decoration can be shown to the player, and the rear decoration part and the front decoration part are large and deep. A decorative body having a high decorative effect can be configured. Therefore, since the center frame can be provided with a decorative body with a high decorative effect, the decorative body can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing. It is possible to provide a game machine that is possible.

In addition, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration body extends into the frame of the center frame, the rear decoration part narrows the game area in front of the game panel or causes the game ball to flow down the game area. The player can enjoy the game with the game ball in the game area in a good condition without making it hard to see.

Furthermore, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration body is extended into the frame of the center frame, when the performance display device, the movable decoration body, the decoration body, etc. are provided behind the game panel. , the rear decoration part can decorate the periphery of the performance display device (display screen), and cooperate with the decoration body (movable decoration body) to show decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect, It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

In addition, it is desirable to provide the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion so that at least a portion thereof overlaps when viewed from the front. As a result, the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion, which are decorated with decorations that cooperate with each other, are provided so that they partially overlap when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the boundary between the decoration of the decoration and the decoration of the rear decoration part, and the large decoration by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part can be shown to the player in a better state, and the decoration effect of the decoration body. can be further enhanced.

Also, it is desirable to form the center frame transparent. Thereby, since the center frame is transparent, the center frame can be hardly seen by the player and can be made inconspicuous, and the decorations (the front decoration part and the rear decoration part) can be made relatively conspicuous, The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, the decorative body may have an opaque portion that makes the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front. As a result, since the wiring of the electronic component is difficult to see from the front due to the opaque part of the decorative body, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque part, so that the visibility of the wiring can be prevented from deteriorating. , the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exhibited more easily.

Also, the decorative body may be provided in front of the LED substrate on which the LEDs are mounted. As a result, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration). It is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Further, the center frame may be provided with a display capable of displaying the lottery result of the special symbols drawn by the start ball entry by the game ball in the game area. As a result, since the display for displaying the special pattern is attached to the center frame, the display can be attached to the game panel together with the center frame, and the display can be attached separately. In comparison, it is possible to save labor for assembling the game machine.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The front decorative part and the rear decorative part are provided so that at least a part thereof overlaps when viewed from the front."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 2, the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion are provided so that at least a portion thereof overlaps when viewed from the front. (Refer to the description regarding the decorative body 2580 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention])

As a result, the front decorative portion and the rear decorative portion, which are decorated with decorations that cooperate with each other, are provided so that they partially overlap when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the boundary between the decoration of the decoration and the decoration of the rear decoration part, and the large decoration by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part can be shown to the player in a better state, and the decoration effect of the decoration body. can be further enhanced.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 and Means 2,
It is characterized in that "the center frame is transparently formed".

According to the configuration of means 3, the center frame is made transparent. In other words, the center frame is made of a transparent member. (See the description regarding the center frame 2511 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

Thereby, since the center frame is transparent, the center frame can be hardly seen by the player and can be made inconspicuous, and the decorations (the front decoration part and the rear decoration part) can be made relatively conspicuous, The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the center frame is transparent, when the game panel is made transparent and a decorative body or effect display device is provided behind the game panel, the center frame becomes inconspicuous and can be seen through the transparent game panel. To provide a game machine capable of making a decoration body, a performance image and the like more conspicuous and entertaining a player more.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The said ornament is
It has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame from the front.
characterized by being

Here, the "electronic parts" include "LED board", "relay board", "ball sensor for detecting game balls", "magnetic sensor", "display for displaying special symbols", "variable winning "solenoid for opening and closing the mouth", "solenoid or driving motor for moving the movable decoration", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 4, the decorative body has an opaque portion that makes the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front. (Refer to the description regarding the decorative body 2580 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention])

As a result, since the wiring of the electronic component is difficult to see from the front due to the opaque part of the decorative body, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque part, so that the visibility of the wiring can be prevented from deteriorating. , the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exhibited more easily.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The said ornament is
It is installed in front of the LED board on which the LED is mounted.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board on which the LED is mounted. (See the description regarding the LED substrate 2586 of the decoration 2580 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration). It is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

In addition, when light from the LEDs mounted on the LED board is irradiated onto the decorative body, the decorative body can be illuminated by the LED board. It is possible to entertain the person and suppress the decline of interest.

Means 6: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 5,
"In the center frame,
A display capable of displaying the lottery result of the special symbols drawn by the starting ball entry of the game ball in the game area is attached.
characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 6, a display capable of displaying the lottery result of the special symbols drawn by the start ball entry of the game ball in the game area is attached to the center frame. (See the description regarding the pattern display 2518 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the display for displaying the special pattern is attached to the center frame, the display can be attached to the game panel together with the center frame, and the display can be attached separately. In comparison, it is possible to save labor for assembling the game machine.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed,
The game board is
A frame-shaped transparent display that can display the lottery result of the special pattern drawn by the starting ball entry of the game ball in the game area is attached, and is attached from the front to the opening formed in the game panel. center frame and
It is attached to the center frame and has a predetermined decoration, and has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame from the front, and the LED is mounted. a decorative body provided in front of the LED board located in the
with
The decoration is
a rear decorative portion extending into the frame of the center frame and partly protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame; a front decorative portion provided forward of the rear decorative portion; has
The rear decorative portion and the front decorative portion are decorated with decorations that cooperate with each other, and are provided so that at least a portion of them overlaps when viewed from the front.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 7, in a game machine having a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed, the game board is configured such that a game ball starts entering the game area within the game area. A display that can display the lottery result of the special pattern drawn by the game panel is attached, and it is attached to the frame-shaped transparent center frame that is attached from the front to the opening formed in the game panel. It has a predetermined decoration and has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame from the front, and is provided in front of the LED board on which the LED is mounted. a decorative body extending into the frame of the center frame and partially projecting rearward from the rear end of the center frame; and a rear decorative part extending forward from the rear decorative part. and a front decorative part provided, wherein the rear decorative part and the front decorative part are provided with decorations that cooperate with each other and are provided so that at least a part of them overlaps when viewed from the front. It is.

As a result, the transparent center frame attached to the game panel of the game board is provided with a rear decorative portion partially protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame, and a front decorative portion provided forward of the rear decorative portion. Since the decorative body is provided with the decorative part, the transparent center frame makes it inconspicuous and makes the decorative body relatively conspicuous, and the front decorative part and the rear decorative part of the decorative body are combined. A decoration with depth can be shown to a player. At this time, since the rear decorative part and the front decorative part are decorated in cooperation with each other and are provided so that each part overlaps when viewed from the front, when viewed from the front (front), The boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part can be made difficult to understand, and the large decoration by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part can be shown to a player in a good condition, and the rear decoration part can be displayed. A large and deep decorative body with a high decorative effect can be formed by the front decorative portion and the front decorative portion. Therefore, since the center frame can be provided with a decorative body with a high decorative effect, the decorative body can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing. It is possible to provide a game machine that is possible.

In addition, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration body extends into the frame of the center frame, the rear decoration part narrows the game area in front of the game panel or causes the game ball to flow down the game area. The player can enjoy the game with the game ball in the game area in a good condition without making it hard to see.

Furthermore, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration body is extended into the frame of the center frame, when the performance display device, the movable decoration body, the decoration body, etc. are provided behind the game panel. , the rear decoration part can decorate the periphery of the performance display device (display screen), and cooperate with the decoration body (movable decoration body) to show decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect, It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

In addition, since the wiring of the electronic parts is difficult to see from the front due to the opaque part of the decorative body, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque part, so that the visibility of the wiring can be prevented from deteriorating. It is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Furthermore, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration). , the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exhibited more easily.

In addition, since the center frame is equipped with a display for displaying special patterns, the display can be installed on the game panel together with the center frame, compared to the case where the display is installed separately. As a result, the labor involved in assembling the game machine can be saved.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the player's interest by providing a decorative body with a higher decorative effect.

[15-11c. Relationship between solution means of eleventh technical feature and embodiment]
The game panel 1100 consisting of the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120 in the game board 5 of the present embodiment is the game panel of the above solving means, and the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the present embodiment is the opening of the game panel of the above solving means. In addition, the center frame 2511 of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment is the center frame of the above solution, the pattern display 2518 in this embodiment is the display of the above solution, and the decorative body 2580 in this embodiment is the above solution. The front decoration part 2581 in this embodiment is the front decoration part of the solution means, the rear decoration part 2582 in this embodiment is the rear decoration part of the solution means, and the LED board 2586 in this embodiment is These correspond to the LED substrates of the above solution.

[15-11d. Characteristic effects of the eleventh technical feature]
According to this embodiment, the transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a rear decorative portion 2582 partially protruding rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511, and a rear decorative portion Since the decoration body 2580 including the front decoration part 2581 provided in front of the 2582 is provided, the decoration body 2580 can be relatively conspicuous because the center frame 2511 is transparent, making it inconspicuous. In addition, the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 of the decoration body 2580 allow the player to see a deep decoration. At this time, the rear decorative portion 2582 and the front decorative portion 2581 are decorated in cooperation with each other, and are provided so that each part overlaps when viewed from the front. Sometimes, it is possible to obscure the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part 2581 and the decoration of the rear decoration part 2582, and to show the player the large decoration by the front decoration part 2581 and the rear decoration part 2582 in a good condition. The rear decorative portion 2582 and the front decorative portion 2581 can form a large, deep decoration body 2580 with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the center frame 2511 can be provided with the decorative body 2580 with a high decorative effect, the decorative body 2580 can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored, thereby suppressing the decline in the interest of the player. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of

Further, according to this embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2582 that constitutes the decoration body 2580 is extended into the frame of the center frame 2511, the rear decoration part 2582 extends the game area in front of the game panel 1100. A player can enjoy the game with the game ball B in the game area 5a in a good condition without narrowing the game area 5a or making it difficult to see the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decoration part 2582 constituting the decoration body 2580 is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, the effect display device provided behind the game panel 1100 1600, for the back front effect unit 3300, the back back effect unit 3400, etc., the periphery of the effect display device 1600 (display screen) is decorated, and the decoration body (movable decoration) of the back front effect unit 3300 and the back back effect unit 3400 It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of displaying or performing decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect in cooperation with the player's body, and capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player. .

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the wiring of electronic components such as the LED substrate 2586 is made difficult to see from the front by the opaque portion of the decorative body 2580, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion. The appearance can be prevented from deteriorating, and the decorative effect of the decorative body 2580 can be more easily exhibited.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the decoration 2580 (front decoration portion 2581) is provided in front of the LED board 2586, the LED board 2586 can be hidden by the decoration 2580 (decoration). It is possible to prevent the LED board 2586 from being seen and to make the appearance worse, and it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decoration body 2580 .

Further, according to this embodiment, since the symbol display 2518 for displaying special symbols is attached to the center frame 2511, the symbol display 2518 can be attached to the game panel 1100 together with the center frame 2511. As compared with the case where the pattern display device 2518 is attached separately, the labor required for assembling the pachinko machine 1 can be saved.

[15-12. 12th technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-12a. Background of the 12th technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a center accessory having a decorative body with a predetermined decoration is attached from the front to an opening of a game panel forming a game area in which game balls can flow down, There is a known one provided (for example, Patent Document A12: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074434). In the technique disclosed in Patent Document A12, the appearance of the game machine is improved by the decorative body provided on the center accessory.

However, in the technique of Patent Document A12, since the flat plate-shaped decoration is provided near the front end of the center role, even if the decoration is decorated with a relief-like decoration, the depth is poor, and depending on the player, it may be difficult for the player to feel the depth. There is a risk that the player will get tired of watching it and lose interest in the player.

On the other hand, it is conceivable to enhance the decorativeness by providing the center accessory with a three-dimensionally formed decoration in the front-rear direction, but the rear end of the decoration is behind the center accessory (center frame). If it protrudes outward, the protruding portion tends to be a hindrance during the manufacturing of the game machine, and there is a risk that the manufacturing cost will increase due to poor handling (handleability).

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means provide a game machine capable of improving handleability at the time of manufacturing while maintaining decorativeness.

[15-12b. Solution for the 12th technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed,
The game board is
a frame-shaped center frame mounted from the front in an opening formed in the game panel;
a decoration attached to the center frame and having a predetermined decoration;
with
The decoration is
a rear decorative portion extending into the frame of the center frame and provided forward of the rear end of the center frame;
and a front decorative portion provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front of the rear decorative portion.

Here, the "game panel" includes an "opaque panel such as plywood (plywood)", a "panel plate made of transparent resin", and a "panel plate made of transparent resin and a frame for holding the outer peripheral edge of the panel plate". and a panel holder having a shape.

In addition, the ``center frame'' includes a ``flat plate-shaped flange that can contact the front surface of the game panel, and a game ball that extends forward from the flange and flows down the game area inside the opening of the game panel. having an inflow restricting portion that restricts inflow”, “an inserting portion that is inserted into the opening of the game panel and is provided along the inner peripheral surface of the opening, and the front end of the inserting portion A flat plate-shaped flange portion that extends in a direction along the surface of the game panel and can contact the front surface of the game panel, and a game ball that extends forward from the flange portion and flows down the game area is an opening in the game panel. and an inflow regulating part that regulates the inflow into the interior of the

In addition, as the "decorative body", there are "things that are decorated with patterns by printing or painting", "things that are three-dimensionally shaped decorations", and "metallic luster like plating". "A thing decorated with", etc.

Furthermore, the "decorative body" includes "things that are decorated with light emitted by LEDs mounted on the LED board", "electronic parts provided behind (for example, LED boards, relay boards, ball sensors, magnetic Sensors, indicators (displays with special patterns), solenoids, etc.) have an opaque part to make it difficult to see the wiring from the front", "It protrudes backward beyond the rear end of the center frame. Those having electronic components (for example, LED substrates, relay substrates, ball sensors, magnetic sensors, indicators (indicators with special patterns), solenoids, etc.).

In addition, the relationship between the rear decorative part and the front decorative part that constitute the decorative body is as follows: "the rear decorative part is decorated with decorations that are coordinated with the decoration of the front decorative part"; The same decoration is given to the part as to coordinate with the decoration of the front decoration part", "The decoration different from the decoration of the front decoration part is given to the posterior decoration part", "The front decoration part is decorated The decoration of the front decoration (front decoration) has a transparent part that allows the decoration of the rear decoration part (rear decoration) to be visible", "The decoration of the front decoration part (front decoration) has a rear decoration part a transparent part where the decoration (rear decoration) is visible, and a plurality of dot parts with decorations that are provided in the transparent part and constitute a part of the front decoration", etc. is mentioned.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine provided with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed, the game board is a frame mounted from the front in an opening formed in the game panel. and a decorative body attached to the center frame and having a predetermined decoration, the decorative body extending into the frame of the center frame and extending from the rear end of the center frame. It has a rear decorative portion provided in front and a front decorative portion provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front of the rear decorative portion. (In [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention], see the chapter [11-1. Center role of the first embodiment] and the descriptions of Figures 155 to 158, etc.)

As a result, the center frame attached to the game panel of the game board has a rear decorative portion provided in front of the rear end of the center frame, and a rear decorative portion provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front side of the rear decorative portion. Since the decoration body is provided with the front decoration part and the rear decoration part of the decoration body, the player can see the decoration with depth by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part of the decoration body. At this time, since a part of the rear decorative part and the front decorative part overlap each other, the boundary between the decoration of the front decorative part and the decoration of the rear decorative part is difficult to understand when viewed from the front (front). Thus, a player can see a large decoration by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, and the rear decoration part and the front decoration part form a large, deep decoration with a high decorative effect. can. Therefore, since the center frame can be provided with a decorative body with a high decorative effect, the decorative body can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing. It is possible to provide a game machine that is possible.

In addition, since the rear decorative part is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame, there is no part that protrudes backward from the center frame and interferes with the manufacturing of the game machine, so It is possible to improve the handling (handleability) and improve the workability, thereby suppressing an increase in manufacturing costs. Specifically, for example, when the center frame is placed on a workbench or the like with the rear end side down, the center frame does not rattle. Alternatively, when handling the center frame during assembly work, transportation work, etc., since part of the decorative body does not protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame, the part protruding from the center frame may not interfere with other members. There is no risk of damage or damage due to contact. For this reason, it is not necessary to perform the work while paying close attention, and workability can be improved.

Furthermore, since the rear decoration part constituting the decoration body is extended into the frame of the center frame, the rear decoration part narrows the game area in front of the game panel or causes the game ball to flow down the game area. The player can enjoy the game with the game ball in the game area in a good condition without making it hard to see.

In addition, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration body is extended into the frame of the center frame, there is a case where the performance display device, the movable decoration body, the decoration body, etc. are provided behind the game panel. , the rear decoration part can decorate the periphery of the performance display device (display screen), and cooperate with the decoration body (movable decoration body) to show decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect, It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

It is desirable that the rear decorative portion be decorated in harmony with the decoration of the front decorative portion. As a result, since the rear decoration part is decorated in cooperation with the decoration of the front decoration part, the decoration of the rear decoration part and the decoration of the front decoration part make it possible for the player to see one large decoration, The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

It is also desirable to make the center frame transparent. Thereby, since the center frame is transparent, the center frame can be hardly seen by the player and can be made inconspicuous, and the decorations (the front decoration part and the rear decoration part) can be made relatively conspicuous, The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

Also, the decorative body may have an opaque portion that makes the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front. As a result, since the wiring of the electronic component is difficult to see from the front due to the opaque part of the decorative body, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque part, so that the visibility of the wiring can be prevented from deteriorating. , the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exhibited more easily.

Further, the rear decoration part is provided with the same rear decoration as the part overlapping the front decoration of the front decoration part in the front view, and the front decoration part has at least the front decoration part in the front decoration. At a part in front of the ball passage through which the game balls circulate, which is provided in part between the rear decoration portion, there is a transparent portion that allows the game balls circulating through the rear decoration and the ball passage to be visually recognized from the front. You can do it. Thereby, when the game ball is not flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration portion and the rear decoration portion, the transparent portion provided in front of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decoration portion is provided. The rear decoration of the rear decoration portion provided at the rear can be visually recognized through it. At this time, since the rear decoration of the rear decoration part is the same decoration as the front decoration of the front decoration part, the rear decoration of the rear decoration part supplements the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration part, so that the front decoration of the front decoration part The original decoration can be shown to the player so that the decoration does not have a transparent part, and the decoration effect of the decoration body can be surely exhibited. On the other hand, when the game ball circulates through the ball passage provided between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, the game ball can be seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration part. In any case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the game ball being out of sight, and to enjoy the game with the game ball and suppress the decrease in interest.

Further, as described above, in the case where the transmission part is provided in the front part of the front decoration of the front decoration part in front of the ball passage, and the rear decoration part behind the transmission part is given the same rear decoration as the front decoration, the front decoration part is Alternatively, the transparent part may have a plurality of dot parts with decorations that are smaller than the game ball and form a part of the front decoration. As a result, the decoration of the rear decoration seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration is blocked by the game balls flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration and the rear decoration. Even if it disappears, the decoration of a plurality of dot parts provided in the transparent part in front of the game ball can be seen, thereby making the game ball in the ball passage visually recognizable to the player and making the appearance of the decoration worse. This can be avoided, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be fully exhibited.

Also, the decorative body may be provided in front of the LED substrate on which the LEDs are mounted. As a result, since the decorative body is provided in front of the LED board, the LED board can be hidden by the decorative body (decoration). It is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

Further, the center frame may be provided with a display capable of displaying the lottery result of the special symbols drawn by the start ball entry by the game ball in the game area. As a result, since the display for displaying the special pattern is attached to the center frame, the display can be attached to the game panel together with the center frame, and the display can be attached separately. In comparison, it is possible to save labor for assembling the game machine.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"said posterior decoration has a decoration that is in harmony with the decoration of said front decoration"
characterized by being

Here, "collaborating decoration" includes "decoration that constitutes one decoration (picture) with the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part", "the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part". Pattern (figure) decoration that is continuous with the decoration of the front part", "The decoration of the front decoration part or the decoration of the rear decoration part complements (emphasizes) the decoration of the rear decoration part or the decoration of the front decoration part. such as decoration”, and the like.

According to the configuration of means 2, the rear decoration part is provided with a decoration that cooperates with the decoration of the front decoration part. (Refer to the description regarding the decoration 2570 and the decoration 2570A in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the rear decoration part is decorated in cooperation with the decoration of the front decoration part, the decoration of the rear decoration part and the decoration of the front decoration part make it possible for the player to see one large decoration, The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The center frame is transparently formed"
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, the center frame is made transparent. In other words, the center frame is made of a transparent member. (See the description regarding the center frame 2511 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

Thereby, since the center frame is transparent, the center frame can be hardly seen by the player and can be made inconspicuous, and the decorations (the front decoration part and the rear decoration part) can be made relatively conspicuous, The decorative effect of the decorative body can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the center frame is transparent, when the game panel is made transparent and a decorative body or effect display device is provided behind the game panel, the center frame becomes inconspicuous and can be seen through the transparent game panel. To provide a game machine capable of making a decoration body, a performance image and the like more conspicuous and entertaining a player more.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The said ornament is
It has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame from the front.
characterized by being

Here, the "electronic parts" include "LED board", "relay board", "ball sensor for detecting game balls", "magnetic sensor", "display for displaying special symbols", "variable winning "solenoid for opening and closing the mouth", "solenoid or driving motor for moving the movable decoration", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 4, the decorative body has an opaque portion that makes the wiring of the electronic parts attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front. (Refer to the description regarding the decoration 2570 and the decoration 2570A in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the wiring of the electronic component is difficult to see from the front due to the opaque part of the decorative body, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque part, so that the visibility of the wiring can be prevented from deteriorating. , the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exhibited more easily.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The rear decoration part has the same rear decoration as the part that overlaps the front of the front decoration of the front decoration part when viewed from the front,
In the front decoration part, the rear decoration and the It has a transparent part that allows the game balls circulating in the ball passage to be seen from the front.
characterized by being

Here, the “transmissive portion” includes a “colorless and transparent portion”, a “colored and transparent portion”, a “through hole portion”, and the like.

According to the configuration of means 5, the rear decoration is provided with the same decoration as the portion overlapping the front decoration of the front decoration in the front view in front view, and the front decoration is provided with the same decoration as that of the front decoration. A game ball circulating in the rear decoration and the ball passage is visible from the front at a portion in front of the ball passage through which the game balls circulate provided at least partly between the front decoration portion and the rear decoration portion. It is intended to have a transmission portion. (Refer to the description regarding the decorative body 2570 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention])

Thereby, when the game ball is not flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration portion and the rear decoration portion, the transparent portion provided in front of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decoration portion is provided. The rear decoration of the rear decoration portion provided at the rear can be visually recognized through it. At this time, since the rear decoration of the rear decoration part is the same decoration as the front decoration of the front decoration part, the rear decoration of the rear decoration part supplements the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration part, so that the front decoration of the front decoration part The original decoration can be shown to the player so that the decoration does not have a transparent part, and the decoration effect of the decoration body can be surely exhibited.

On the other hand, when the game ball circulates through the ball passage provided between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, the game ball can be seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration part. In any case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the game ball being out of sight, and to enjoy the game with the game ball and suppress the decrease in interest.

Means 6: In the configuration of Means 5,
"The front decoration part
It has a plurality of dot portions which are provided in the transparent portion and are decorated with decorations that are smaller than a game ball and constitute a part of the front decoration.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of the means 6, the front decoration part has a plurality of dot parts provided in the transmission part and decorated with decorations smaller than the game ball and constituting a part of the front decoration. It is. (Refer to the description regarding the decorative body 2570 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention])

As a result, the decoration of the rear decoration seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration is blocked by the game balls flowing through the ball passage provided between the front decoration and the rear decoration. Even if it disappears, the decoration of a plurality of dot parts provided in the transparent part in front of the game ball can be seen, thereby making the game ball in the ball passage visually recognizable to the player and making the appearance of the decoration worse. This can be avoided, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be fully exhibited.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed,
The game board is
a frame-shaped transparent center frame mounted from the front in an opening formed in the game panel;
a decoration attached to the center frame, having a predetermined decoration, and having an opaque portion that makes wiring of electronic components attached to the center frame difficult to see from the front;
with
The decoration is
a rear decorative portion extending into the frame of the center frame and provided forward of the rear end of the center frame;
a front decorative portion provided so as to overlap at least a part of the rear decorative portion in front;
The rear decorative portion is provided with the same rear decoration as the portion of the front decoration that overlaps the front of the front decoration in a front view in cooperation with the front decoration of the front decorative portion,
In the front decoration part, the rear decoration and the There are a transparent part through which the game balls circulating in the ball passage can be seen from the front, and a decoration that is provided in the transparent part and that is smaller than the game ball and constitutes a part of the front decoration. and a plurality of dot portions that are
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 7, in a game machine provided with a game board having a game panel in which a game area in which game balls can flow down is formed, the game board is a frame mounted from the front in an opening formed in the game panel. and a transparent center frame attached to the center frame, which is decorated with a predetermined decoration, and has an opaque part that makes it difficult to see the wiring of electronic parts attached to the center frame from the front. a decorative body, wherein the decorative body extends into the frame of the center frame and is provided in front of a rear end of the center frame; and a front decoration part provided so as to overlap, and the rear decoration part has the same decoration as the front overlapping part of the front decoration of the front decoration part in a front view in cooperation with the front decoration of the front decoration part. The front decoration is provided with a rear decoration, and the front decoration is provided at least in a part between the front decoration and the rear decoration in the front part of the ball passage through which the game balls circulate, There is a transparent part where the game balls circulating in the rear decoration and the ball passage can be seen from the front, and a decoration that is smaller than the game ball and forms part of the front decoration provided in the transparent part. and a plurality of dot portions.

As a result, the transparent center frame attached to the game panel of the game board is provided with a rear decorative portion provided in front of the rear end of the center frame, and a rear decorative portion provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front side of the rear decorative portion. Since the center frame is transparent, it is difficult to stand out and the decoration can be made relatively conspicuous, and the front decoration and the rear of the decoration are provided. A player can see a decoration with a depth with the decoration part. At this time, since the rear decorative part and the front decorative part are decorated in cooperation with each other and are provided so that each part overlaps when viewed from the front, when viewed from the front (front), The boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part and the decoration of the rear decoration part can be made difficult to understand, and the large decoration by the front decoration part and the rear decoration part can be shown to a player in a good condition, and the rear decoration part can be displayed. A large and deep decorative body with a high decorative effect can be formed by the front decorative portion and the front decorative portion. Therefore, since the center frame can be provided with a decorative body with a high decorative effect, the decorative body can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player's interest can be suppressed from decreasing. It is possible to provide a game machine that is possible.

In addition, the rear decoration part is provided with the same decoration as the part overlapping the front decoration of the front decoration part in the front view, and the front decoration part includes at least the front decoration part and the rear decoration part in the front decoration. In the front part of the ball passage through which the game balls circulate, which is provided in part between the and a plurality of decorated dot portions that are smaller than the size of the game ball and form a part of the front decoration, so that the front decoration portion and the rear decoration portion are separated from each other. When the game ball is not flowing through the provided ball passage, the rear decoration of the rear decoration provided behind is passed through the transparent portion provided in the front portion of the ball passage in the front decoration of the front decoration. can be visually recognized. At this time, since the rear decoration of the rear decoration part is the same decoration as the front decoration of the front decoration part, the rear decoration of the rear decoration part supplements the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration part, so that the front decoration of the front decoration part The original decoration can be shown to the player so that the decoration does not have a transparent part, and the decoration effect of the decoration body can be surely exhibited.

On the other hand, when the game ball circulates through the ball passage provided between the front decoration part and the rear decoration part, the game ball can be seen through the transparent part in the front decoration of the front decoration part. In any case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the game ball being out of sight, and to enjoy the game with the game ball and suppress the decrease in interest. At this time, since a plurality of dot portions constituting a part of the front decoration are provided in the transmission portion, the decoration of the rear decoration portion visible through the transmission portion in the front decoration of the front decoration portion is the front decoration portion and the rear decoration portion. The decoration of a plurality of dot parts provided in the transmission part in front of the game ball can be seen even if it is blocked by the game ball circulating in the ball passage provided between the decoration part and cannot be seen. Thus, the game ball in the ball passage can be visually recognized by the player while the appearance of the decorative body is prevented from being deteriorated, and the decorative effect of the decorative body can be exhibited sufficiently.

In addition, since the rear decorative part is provided forward of the rear end of the center frame, there is no part that protrudes backward from the center frame and interferes with the manufacturing of the game machine, so It is possible to improve the handling (handleability) and improve the workability, thereby suppressing an increase in manufacturing costs. Specifically, for example, when the center frame is placed on a workbench or the like with the rear end side down, the center frame does not rattle. Alternatively, when handling the center frame during assembly work, transportation work, etc., since part of the decorative body does not protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame, the part protruding from the center frame may not interfere with other members. There is no risk of damage or damage due to contact. For this reason, it is not necessary to perform the work while paying close attention, and workability can be improved.

In addition, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration body extends into the frame of the center frame, the rear decoration part narrows the game area in front of the game panel or causes the game ball to flow down the game area. The player can enjoy the game with the game ball in the game area in a good condition without making it hard to see.

Furthermore, since the rear decoration part that constitutes the decoration body is extended into the frame of the center frame, when the performance display device, the movable decoration body, the decoration body, etc. are provided behind the game panel. , the rear decoration part can decorate the periphery of the performance display device (display screen), and cooperate with the decoration body (movable decoration body) to show decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect, It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

In addition, since the wiring of the electronic parts is difficult to see from the front due to the opaque part of the decorative body, the wiring can be hidden by the opaque part, so that the visibility of the wiring can be prevented from deteriorating. It is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the handleability at the time of manufacturing while maintaining the decorativeness.

[15-12c. Relationship between the solution means of the twelfth technical feature and the embodiment]
The game panel 1100 consisting of the panel plate 1110 and the panel holder 1120 in the game board 5 of the present embodiment is the game panel of the above solving means, and the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 of the present embodiment is the opening of the game panel of the above solving means. In addition, the center frame 2511 of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment is the center frame of the above solution, the ball passage 2517 in this embodiment is the ball passage of the above solution, and the decorations 2570 and 2570A in this embodiment. is the decoration body of the above solving means, the front decoration part 2572 in this embodiment is the front decoration part of the above solving means, the transparent part 2572a in this embodiment is the transparent part of the above solving means, and the dot part 2572b in this embodiment corresponds to the dot portion of the above solution, and the rear decoration portion 2573 in this embodiment corresponds to the rear decoration portion of the above solution.

[15-12d. Characteristic effects of the 12th technical feature]
According to this embodiment, a transparent center frame 2511 attached to the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has a rear decorative portion 2573 provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and the rear decorative portion 2573 Since the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A) composed of the front decoration portion 2572 provided so as to overlap at least a part of the front side is provided, the center frame 2511 is transparent so that it is relatively inconspicuous. The decoration 2570 (decoration 2570A) can be conspicuous, and the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 of the decoration 2570 (decoration 2570A) can show the player a deep decoration. At this time, the rear decorative portion 2573 and the front decorative portion 2572 are decorated in cooperation with each other, and are provided so that each part overlaps when viewed from the front. Sometimes, it is possible to obscure the boundary between the decoration of the front decoration part 2572 and the decoration of the rear decoration part 2573, so that the player can see the large decoration by the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 in a good condition. The rear decorative portion 2573 and the front decorative portion 2572 can form a large, deep decoration 2570 (decoration 2570A) with a high decorative effect. Therefore, since the center frame 2511 can be provided with the decorative body 2570 (the decorative body 2570A) with a high decorative effect, the decorative body 2570 (the decorative body 2570A) can strongly attract the player's interest and make it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing the decline in interest of the player.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the decorative body 2570, the rear decoration portion 2573 has the same decoration (rear decoration) as the portion that overlaps in front of the decoration (front decoration) of the front decoration portion 2572 in front view. The front decoration part 2572 is provided at least in part between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 in the decoration of the front decoration part 2572. A transmission part 2572a that allows the decoration of the rear decoration part 2573 and the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2517 to be visible from the front, and a size smaller than the game ball B provided in the transmission part 2572a. and a plurality of decorated dot portions 2572b forming part of the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572. When the game ball B is not circulating in the ball passage 2517, the decoration of the front decoration portion 2572 passes through the transmission portion 2572a provided in the front part of the ball passage 2517, and the rear decoration portion 2573 provided behind. decoration can be seen. At this time, since the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2573 is the same decoration as the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572, the decoration of the rear decorative portion 2573 supplements the transparent portion 2572a in the decoration of the front decorative portion 2572. The original decoration can be shown to the player so that the decoration does not have the transparent part 2572a, and the decoration effect of the decoration body 2570 can be surely exhibited.

On the other hand, when the game ball B is flowing through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573, the game ball B can be seen through the transparent part 2572a in the decoration of the front decoration part 2572. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or anxiety due to the game ball B being out of sight, even if only for a short period of time. A decrease can be suppressed. At this time, since a plurality of dot portions 2572b forming part of the decoration of the front decoration portion 2572 are provided in the transmission portion 2572a, the rear decoration portion 2573 visible through the transmission portion 2572a in the decoration of the front decoration portion 2572 Even if the decoration is blocked by the game ball B flowing through the ball passage 2517 provided between the front decoration part 2572 and the rear decoration part 2573 and becomes invisible, the transparent part 2572a in front of the game ball B is displayed. By making the decorations of the plurality of dot portions 2572b provided in the can be seen, it is possible for the player to visually recognize the game ball B in the ball passage 2517 while avoiding the deterioration of the appearance of the decoration body 2570. The decorative effect of the decorative body 2570 can be fully exhibited.

Further, according to the present embodiment, in the decoration body 2570 (decoration body 2570A), the rear decoration part 2573 is provided in front of the rear end of the center frame 2511, and protrudes rearward from the center frame 2511, whereby the pachinko machine can be used. Since there is no part that will interfere with the manufacturing of 1, it is possible to improve the handling (handleability) during manufacturing, and the increase in manufacturing costs is suppressed by improving workability. can be made Specifically, for example, when the center frame 2511 is placed on the workbench TA or the like with the rear end side of the center frame 2511 facing down, the center frame 2511 does not rattle. Alternatively, when handling the center frame 2511 in assembly work, transportation work, or the like, a part of the decoration 2570 (decoration 2570A) does not protrude rearward from the rear end of the center frame 2511, so it does not protrude from the center frame 2511. There is no risk that the part where the contact is made will be damaged or damaged by coming into contact with other members or the like. For this reason, it is not necessary to perform the work while paying close attention, and workability can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2573 constituting the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, the rear decorative portion 2573 can be used to open the game panel 1100. The game area 5a on the front side of the game area 5a is not narrowed and the game balls B flowing down the game area 5a are not difficult to see, and the player can enjoy the game with the game balls B in the game area 5a in a good condition. can let

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, since the rear decorative portion 2573 constituting the decorative body 2570 (decorative body 2570A) is extended within the frame of the center frame 2511, it is provided behind the game panel 1100. For the effect display device 1600, the back front effect unit 3300, the back rear effect unit 3400, etc., the periphery of the effect display device 1600 (display screen) is decorated, and the back front effect unit 3300 and the back back effect unit 3400 are displayed. To provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of showing or performing decoration (performance) with a higher decorative effect in cooperation with a decoration body (movable decoration body) and capable of strongly attracting the interest of a player. can provide.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since the wiring of electronic components such as an LED substrate is made difficult to see from the front by the opaque portion of decoration 2570 (decoration 2570A), the wiring can be hidden by the opaque portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the appearance due to the wiring being visible, and it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the decorative effect of the decorative body 2570 (the decorative body 2570A).

[15-13. 13th technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-13a. Background of the 13th technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is attached from the front to an opening of a game panel forming a game area in which game balls can flow down, so that the game balls flowing down the game area are prevented from flowing into the opening of the game panel. There is a known one provided with a center function serving as an inflow regulating portion for regulating (for example, Patent Document A13: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-074434). According to the technique of Patent Document A13, it is possible to divide the game area into a desired size by the center accessory.

However, in the technique of Patent Document A13, when the size of the opening of the game panel differs depending on the model of the gaming machine, it is necessary to separately manufacture the center accessory (inflow control portion), and it is not possible to divert the inflow control portion. It was difficult.

Therefore, in view of the above situation, the following means aims to provide a game machine capable of using the inflow restricting portion even if the opening of the game panel differs depending on the model.

[15-13b. Solution for the 13th technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down,
The game board is
a game panel in which the game area is formed on the front side;
an inflow regulating portion provided corresponding to an edge of an opening formed in the game panel and regulating game balls flowing down the game area from flowing into the opening;
with
The inflow restricting portion has at least a first inflow restricting portion and a second inflow restricting portion,
The first inflow regulating portion and the second inflow regulating portion are each formed with a flange portion along the front surface of the game panel, and at least one of each end portion is formed with the flange portion. A non-flange portion is formed so that the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion are adjacent to each other on the front surface of the game panel by the mounting portion provided on the flange portion. be mounted on
characterized by being

Here, the "game panel" includes an "opaque panel such as plywood (plywood)", a "panel plate made of transparent resin", and a "panel plate made of transparent resin and a frame for holding the outer peripheral edge of the panel plate". and a panel holder having a shape.

In addition, the ``flange portion'' may be ``extending toward the outside of the opening of the game panel bordering on the inflow restricting portion'', or ``extending toward the inside of the opening of the game panel bordering on the inflow restricting portion. "extending", "extending in both directions of the outside and inside of the opening in the game panel with the inflow restricting portion as a boundary", and the like.

In addition, as the "non-flange portion", it may be provided on the side surface of the inflow restricting portion facing the center of the game panel, or it may be provided in the inflow restricting portion facing outward opposite to the center of the game panel. It may be provided on the side surface, or may be provided on both side surfaces of the inflow restricting portion.

Furthermore, as a configuration in which "the end of the first inflow restricting portion and the end of the second inflow restricting portion are attached so as to be adjacent to each other", "the end face of the end of the first inflow restricting portion and the second inflow restricting portion The inner side surface of the end of the first inflow restricting portion and the outer side surface of the end of the second inflow restricting portion are attached so as to face each other. and "attached so that the outer side surface of the end of the first inflow restricting part and the inner side surface of the end of the second inflow restricting part face each other", etc. . Also, the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion may be in contact with each other or may be separated from each other.

According to the configuration of means 1, in a game machine provided with a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down, the game board comprises a game panel having a game area formed on the front side and an opening formed in the game panel. and an inflow regulating portion that is provided corresponding to the edge of the game area and regulates that the game ball flowing down the game area flows into the opening, and the inflow regulating portion includes the first inflow regulating portion and the second inflow a regulating portion, wherein the first inflow regulating portion and the second inflow regulating portion each have a flange portion along the front surface of the game panel, and a flange portion at least one of each end portion. is formed so that the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion are adjacent to each other on the front surface of the game panel by the mounting portion provided on the flange. It can be attached to (In [Modes for Carrying Out the Invention], see the chapter [11-3. Center role of the third embodiment] and the descriptions of Figures 160 to 163, etc.)

As a result, the inflow restricting portion provided corresponding to the edge of the opening of the game panel having the game area formed on the front side and restricting the inflow of game balls into the opening is at least the first inflow restricting portion. and a second inflow regulating portion, and the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion are adjacent to each other on the front surface of the game panel via the mounting portions of the flange portions provided respectively. Since it is attached so as to match, by appropriately selecting the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow restricting portion and the second inflow restricting portion with respect to the game panel, various inflow restricting portions can be manufactured without newly manufacturing the inflow restricting portion. It can be attached to a game panel having an opening of any size and shape, and the inflow restricting part can be used even if the model is different.

More specifically, for example, by mounting the ends of the first inflow restricting portion and the end of the second inflow restricting portion away from each other, a game panel with a large opening can be accommodated. In this case, the gap between the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion is preferably of a size that the game ball cannot pass through, but it is of a size that the game ball can pass through. In that case, the game ball may be made impossible to pass by planting obstacle nails.

Alternatively, by attaching the end portion of the first inflow restricting portion and the end portion of the second inflow restricting portion so that the respective side faces face each other, it is possible to correspond to a game panel with a small opening. At this time, since the non-flanged portion is provided at the end of at least one of the first inflow restricting portion and the second inflow restricting portion, the side surface of the end of the first inflow restricting portion and the end of the second inflow restricting portion Since it is possible to bring the side of the part as close as possible, the degree of freedom in arranging the first inflow regulating part and the second inflow regulating part can be increased, and the game panel having openings of various sizes can be made easier to deal with.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to deal with game panels having openings of various sizes, when it is desired to change the size of the game area due to design changes, etc., the first inflow restricting portion and the second The size of the game area can be easily changed by changing the mounting position relationship with the inflow restricting portion, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be enhanced. Therefore, there is no need to newly manufacture an inflow restricting portion that matches the size of the game area to be changed, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

In addition, on the game board, a plurality of frames from the first frame provided with the first inflow restricting portion to the nth frame provided with the nth inflow restricting portion (n is an integer of two or more), and at least one A connection holding portion that prevents the two frames from falling from the game panel may be further provided. As a result, since the inflow restricting portion is composed of a plurality of frames, by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame with respect to the game panel, the same effect as described above can be obtained. In addition, since the inflow restricting portion is composed of a plurality of frames, when a problem occurs in some of the frames, it is sufficient to replace only the relevant frames, and maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connection holding portion is provided, it is possible to avoid damage or breakage of the frame due to falling from the game panel during assembly or maintenance of the game machine.

Further, as described above, when the connection holding portion is provided, it is desirable that the connection holding portion be formed in a flexible cord-like shape. As a result, since the connecting and holding portion is formed in a flexible string-like shape, for example, the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow regulating portion (first frame) and the second inflow regulating portion (second frame) Even if is changed, the connection holding portion can be flexibly deformed to follow, and it is possible to cope with the size and shape of the opening of the game panel while preventing the frame from falling from the game panel.

In addition, as described above, if a flexible string-like connection holding portion is provided, when the frame is about to be removed from the game panel, the connection holding portion tends to be flexibly deformed to create resistance, and the game can be played immediately. Detachment from the panel can be suppressed. Then, when the frame is detached from the game panel, the connection holding portion is flexibly deformed, which makes it possible to reduce the falling speed and absorb the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame. .

Furthermore, as described above, when the connection holding portion is provided, it is desirable that adjacent frames are connected by the connection holding portion. As a result, compared to the case where one end of the connection holding portion is connected to the game panel or other member, the plurality of frames can be easily handled as a single unit, and the workability at the time of manufacturing the game machine can be improved. can be improved.

Further, as described above, when the connection holding portion is provided, it is desirable to provide the connection holding portion so as to be detachable from the frame. As a result, for example, when a plurality of frames are attached to the game panel in order, or some frames are removed from the game panel for maintenance or the like, the connection holding portion can be removed or attached. As a result, the frame can be easily routed and handled, and workability can be improved.

Also, as described above, if the connection holding portion is detachable, it is possible to connect the frame by the connection holding portion until the frame is attached to the game panel, and then remove the connection holding portion after the frame is attached to the game panel. As a result, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance due to the presence of the connection holding portion.

Furthermore, as described above, when a plurality of frames are provided, the game board may further include electronic components attached to at least one frame. As a result, electronic components are attached to at least one frame, and since the weight of the frame to which the electronic components are attached increases, the frame may come off from the game panel and fall during the assembly work of the game machine. Then, although the frame is easily damaged by its weight, the frame is prevented from being damaged by falling onto a workbench, floor, or the like, because a connection holding part is provided to prevent the frame from falling. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably exhibit the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The game board is
a plurality of frames from a first frame provided with the first inflow restricting portion to an nth frame provided with an nth inflow restricting portion (n is an integer of two or more);
A connection holding part for preventing the at least one frame from falling from the game panel.

Here, the number "n" of the plurality of frames is preferably in the range of 2-6. This is because if the number of frames exceeds this range, it will take time and effort to attach the frames when manufacturing the game machine, and there is a risk that the cost will increase. An electronic component such as an LED board may be attached to some of the frames.

Further, the "connection holding part" includes a "flexible cord-like part", a "flexible belt-like part", and the like. In addition, the ``connecting and holding portion'' includes ``connecting adjacent frames'', ``connecting a frame to another member'', and ``connecting a frame to a game panel''. , etc. Furthermore, the "connection holding part" may or may not have decorativeness. Further, it is desirable that the "connection holding part" has a length that prevents the frame from coming into contact with the table or floor when the frame is detached from the game panel with the game board upright and falls.

According to the configuration of means 2, the game board includes a plurality of frames from the first frame provided with the first inflow restricting portion to the nth frame provided with the nth inflow restricting portion (n is an integer of two or more). It further comprises a frame and a connection holding part for preventing the at least one frame from falling from the game panel. (See the description regarding the center frame 2700 and the connection holding portion 2710 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the inflow restricting portion is composed of a plurality of frames, by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame with respect to the game panel, the same effect as described above can be obtained. In addition, since the inflow restricting portion is composed of a plurality of frames, when a problem occurs in some of the frames, it is sufficient to replace only the relevant frames, and maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connection holding portion is provided, it is possible to avoid damage or breakage of the frame due to falling from the game panel during assembly or maintenance of the game machine.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 2,
"The connection holding part
It is characterized by being "formed in a string-like shape having flexibility".

According to the structure of the means 3, the connection holding part is formed in a flexible cord shape. (See the description regarding the connection holding portion 2710 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, since the connecting and holding portion is formed in a flexible string-like shape, for example, the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow regulating portion (first frame) and the second inflow regulating portion (second frame) Even if is changed, the connection holding portion can be flexibly deformed to follow, and it is possible to cope with the size and shape of the opening of the game panel while preventing the frame from falling from the game panel.

In addition, since the connecting and holding part is formed in a flexible string shape, when the frame is about to be removed from the game panel, the flexible deformation of the connecting and holding part acts as a resistance, and the frame is immediately removed from the game panel. can be suppressed. Then, when the frame is detached from the game panel, the connection holding portion is flexibly deformed, which makes it possible to reduce the falling speed and absorb the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame. .

Means 4: In the configuration of Means 2 or Means 3,
"The connection holding part
It is characterized by connecting the adjacent frames.

According to the configuration of the means 4, the connection holding part connects adjacent frames. (See the description regarding the connection holding portion 2710 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, compared to the case where one end of the connection holding portion is connected to the game panel or other member, the plurality of frames can be easily handled as a single unit, and the workability at the time of manufacturing the game machine can be improved. can be improved.

Means 5: In any one configuration from Means 2 to 4,
"The connection holding part
It is provided detachably with respect to the frame.

According to the configuration of the means 5, the connection holding part is detachably provided with respect to the frame. (See the description regarding the connection holding portion 2710 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, for example, when a plurality of frames are attached to the game panel in order, or some frames are removed from the game panel for maintenance or the like, the connection holding portion can be removed or attached. As a result, the frame can be easily routed and handled, and workability can be improved.

In addition, since the connection holding portion is detachable, it is possible to connect the frame by the connection holding portion until the frame is attached to the game panel, and then remove the connection holding portion after the frame is attached to the game panel. It is possible to prevent the appearance from becoming poor due to the existence of the part.

Means 6: In the configuration of any one of Means 2 to 5,
"The game board is
an electronic component attached to at least one of said frames;
It is characterized by being "further provided".

Here, the "electronic parts" include "LED board", "relay board", "ball sensor", "magnetic sensor", "display (display with special pattern)", "solenoid", "motor", etc.

According to the configuration of means 6, the game board further comprises electronic components attached to at least one frame. (See the description regarding the pattern display 2518 and the center frame 2700 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

As a result, electronic components are attached to at least one frame, and since the weight of the frame to which the electronic components are attached increases, the frame may come off from the game panel and fall during the assembly work of the game machine. Then, although the frame is easily damaged by its weight, the frame is prevented from being damaged by falling onto a workbench, floor, or the like, because a connection holding part is provided to prevent the frame from falling. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably exhibit the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

Means 7: In the gaming machine,
"In a game machine equipped with a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down,
The game board is
a game panel in which the game area is formed on the front side;
It is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening formed in the game panel, and regulates the inflow of the game ball flowing down the game area into the opening, and the first inflow regulating portion to the nth inflow regulating portion (n is an integer of 2 or more);
a plurality of frames from a first frame provided with the first inflow restricting portion to an nth frame provided with an nth inflow restricting portion (n is an integer of two or more);
a connection holding part for preventing the at least one frame from falling from the game panel;
an electronic component attached to at least one of said frames;
with
The inflow control unit is
The m-th inflow regulating portion (m is an integer between 1 and n−1) and the (m+1)th inflow regulating portion are each formed with a flange portion along the front surface of the game panel, A non-flange portion having no flange portion is formed on at least one of the respective ends, and the end of the m-th inflow restricting portion is attached to the front surface of the game panel by a mounting portion provided on the flange portion. is attached so that the part and the end of the (m+1)th inflow regulating part are adjacent to each other,
The connection holding part is
It is formed in a flexible cord-like shape, connects the adjacent frames, and is detachably attached to the frame.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 7, in a game machine provided with a game board having a game area in which game balls can flow down, the game board comprises a game panel having a game area formed on the front side and an opening formed in the game panel. It is provided corresponding to the edge of the game area, and regulates that the game ball flowing down the game area flows into the inside of the opening, from the first inflow regulation part to the nth inflow regulation part (n is an integer of two or more) an inflow restricting portion having an inflow restricting portion, a plurality of frames from a first frame provided with the first inflow restricting portion to an nth frame provided with an nth inflow restricting portion (n is an integer of two or more), and at least one The inflow regulating portion comprises a connection holding portion that prevents the two frames from falling from the game panel, and an electronic component attached to at least one frame. Integer up to 1) and (m+1)-th inflow restricting portion are each formed with a flange portion along the front surface of the game panel, and at least one of each end portion is formed with a flange portion. A non-flanged portion is formed, and the end of the m-th inflow regulating portion and the end of the (m+1)th inflow regulating portion are attached to the front of the game panel by the mounting portion provided on the flange so that the end is adjacent. The connecting/holding portion is formed in a flexible cord-like shape, connects adjacent frames, and is provided detachably with respect to the frames.

As a result, the inflow restricting portion provided corresponding to the edge of the opening of the game panel having the game area formed on the front side and restricting the inflow of game balls into the opening is at least the first inflow restricting portion. to the n-th inflow regulating portion (n is an integer of 2 or more), and the m-th inflow regulating portion (m is from 1 to n−1) end and the end of the (m+1)th inflow regulating portion are attached adjacent to each other, so that the mth inflow regulating portion and the (m+1)th inflow regulating portion with respect to the game panel By appropriately selecting the relationship of the mounting position with the restricting part, it is possible to attach the inflow restricting part to game panels having openings of various sizes and shapes without manufacturing a new inflow restricting part, and even if the model is different, the inflow is possible. A regulation part can be diverted.

In the following, m is assumed to be 1. For example, by attaching the end of the first inflow control part and the end of the second inflow control part away from each other, it is possible to correspond to a game panel with a large opening. can. In this case, the gap between the end of the first inflow regulating portion and the end of the second inflow regulating portion is preferably of a size that the game ball cannot pass through, but it is of a size that the game ball can pass through. In that case, the game ball may be made impossible to pass by planting obstacle nails.

Alternatively, by attaching the end portion of the first inflow restricting portion and the end portion of the second inflow restricting portion so that the respective side faces face each other, it is possible to correspond to a game panel with a small opening. At this time, since the non-flanged portion is provided at the end of at least one of the first inflow restricting portion and the second inflow restricting portion, the side surface of the end of the first inflow restricting portion and the end of the second inflow restricting portion Since it is possible to bring the side of the part as close as possible, the degree of freedom in arranging the first inflow regulating part and the second inflow regulating part can be increased, and the game panel having openings of various sizes can be made easier to deal with.

Further, as described above, since it is possible to deal with game panels having openings of various sizes, when it is desired to change the size of the game area due to design changes, etc., the first inflow restricting portion and the second The size of the game area can be easily changed by changing the mounting position relationship with the inflow restricting portion, and the degree of freedom in designing the game machine can be enhanced. Therefore, there is no need to newly manufacture an inflow restricting portion that matches the size of the game area to be changed, and an increase in the cost of the gaming machine can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the inflow restricting portion is composed of a plurality of frames, by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame with respect to the game panel, it is possible to achieve the same effect as described above. In addition, since the inflow restricting portion is composed of a plurality of frames, when a problem occurs in some of the frames, it is sufficient to replace only the relevant frames, and maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connection holding portion is provided, it is possible to avoid damage or breakage of the frame due to falling from the game panel during assembly or maintenance of the game machine.

In addition, since the connecting and holding portion is a flexible string-like member, for example, the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow regulating portion (first frame) and the second inflow regulating portion (second frame) can be changed. Even if it is changed, it can be followed by the flexible deformation of the connection holding part, and it is possible to cope with the size and shape of the opening of the game panel while preventing the frame from falling from the game panel.

In addition, since a flexible string-like connecting and holding part is provided, when the frame is about to be detached from the game panel, the connecting and holding part flexibly deforms and acts as a resistance, and the frame is immediately removed from the game panel. can be suppressed. Then, when the frame is detached from the game panel, the connection holding portion is flexibly deformed, which makes it possible to reduce the falling speed and absorb the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame. .

Furthermore, since the adjacent frames are connected by the connection holding portion, it is possible to combine a plurality of frames as a single unit compared to the case where one end of the connection holding portion is connected to a game panel or other member. It is possible to make it easy to handle, and to improve workability at the time of manufacturing the game machine or the like.

In addition, since the connection holding part is detachably attached to the frame, for example, when attaching a plurality of frames to the game panel in order or when removing some frames from the game panel for maintenance etc. By detaching or attaching the connecting/holding portion, it is possible to improve the handling and handling of the frame, thereby improving the workability.

In addition, since the connection holding portion is detachable, it is possible to connect the frame by the connection holding portion until the frame is attached to the game panel, and then remove the connection holding portion after the frame is attached to the game panel. It is possible to prevent the presence of the holding portion from deteriorating the appearance.

Furthermore, since the electronic components are attached to at least one frame, the weight of the frame to which the electronic components are attached increases. Although the frame tends to be damaged due to its weight, the frame is prevented from being damaged by falling onto a workbench, floor, or the like, because a connection holding portion is provided to prevent the frame from falling. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can reliably exhibit the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a game machine in which the inflow restricting portion can be used even if the opening of the game panel differs depending on the model.

[15-13c. Relationship between Solution Means for 13th Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The game panel 1100 (see FIG. 161) on the game board 5 of the present embodiment is the game panel of the above solution, and the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 of the present embodiment is the opening of the game panel of the above solution. The pattern display device 2518, the second starter unit 2720, the attacker unit 2730, and the character prize winning unit 2740 in the form are the electronic components of the above solution, and the inflow regulating part 2700a of the center frame 2700 in the center character 2500A in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the flange portion 2700b of the center frame 2700, the first flange portion 2701b of the first frame 2701, and the second flange portion 2702b of the second frame 2702 are the flange portions of the above solving means. In addition, the non-flange portion 2700c of the center frame 2700, the first non-flange portion 2701c of the first frame 2701, and the second non-flange portion 2702c of the second frame 2702 in this embodiment correspond to the non-flange portions of the above solution. are doing.

Further, the first frame 2701, the second frame 2702, the third frame 2703, the fourth frame 2704, and the fifth frame 2705 in this embodiment are the frames of the above solution means, and the first inflow regulating portion 2701a in this embodiment is the above-mentioned The second inflow regulating part 2702a in this embodiment is the first inflow regulating part of the solving means, and the flanges such as the first flange part 2701b and the second flange part 2702b in this embodiment The mounting hole provided in the portion 2700b corresponds to the mounting portion of the above solution, and the connection holding portion 2710 in this embodiment corresponds to the connection holding portion of the above solution.

[15-13d. Characteristic effects of the thirteenth technical feature]
According to this embodiment, the center frame 2700 of the center accessory 2500A of the game board 5 is provided corresponding to the edge of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 on which the game area 5a is formed on the front side. The inflow restricting portion 2700a that restricts B from flowing into the opening 1112 is composed of at least a first inflow restricting portion 2701a and a second inflow restricting portion 2702a, and flange portions 2700b ( It is attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100 via the mounting portions of the first flange portion 2701b and the second flange portion 2702b) so that the end portion of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the end portion of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a are adjacent to each other. Therefore, by appropriately selecting the relationship between the mounting positions of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a with respect to the game panel 1100, the inflow restricting portion 2700a (center frame 2700) is newly manufactured. It can be attached to game panels 1100 having openings 1112 of various sizes and shapes, and the inflow restricting portion 2700a (center frame 2700) can be used even if the model is different.

More specifically, for example, by attaching the end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a away from each other, the game panel 1100 having the large opening 1112 can be supported. . In this case, the gap C between the end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a is desirably large enough to prevent the game ball B from passing through. In the case of a possible size, the game ball B may be prevented from passing by planting an obstacle nail.

Alternatively, the end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a are attached so that the respective side faces face each other, so that the game panel 1100 with the small opening 1112 can be supported. can. At this time, since the non-flange portion 2700c (the first non-flange portion 2701c or the second non-flange portion 2702c) is provided at the end of at least one of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a, Since the side surface of the end of the first inflow restricting portion 2701a and the side surface of the end of the second inflow restricting portion 2702a can be brought as close as possible, the first inflow restricting portion 2701a (first frame 2701) and second inflow restricting portion 2702a (second frame 2702) can be arranged more freely, and it is possible to easily deal with game panels 1100 having openings 1112 of various sizes.

In addition, as described above, since it is possible to correspond to the game panel 1100 having openings 1112 of various sizes, when it is desired to change the size of the game area 5a due to design change or the like, the first inflow regulation By changing the mounting position relationship between the portion 2701a (first frame 2701) and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a (second frame 2702), the size of the game area 5a can be easily changed. 1 can be improved in design freedom. Therefore, there is no need to newly manufacture an inflow restricting portion 2700a (center frame 2700) that matches the size of the game area 5a to be changed, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the inflow restricting portion 2700a (center frame 2700) is composed of a plurality of frames such as the first frame 2701 to the fifth frame 2705, by appropriately setting the mounting position of each frame with respect to the game panel 1100, Effects similar to those described above can be obtained. In addition, since the inflow restricting portion 2700a is composed of a plurality of frames, if a problem occurs in a part of the frames, only the relevant frames need to be replaced, and maintenance costs can be reduced. Furthermore, since the connection holding part 2710 is provided, it is possible to prevent the frame from being damaged or damaged by falling from the game panel 1100 during assembly or maintenance of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the connection holding portion 2710 is formed in a flexible string-like shape, for example, the first inflow restricting portion 2701a (first frame 2701) and the second inflow restricting portion 2702a (second frame 2702) Even if the relationship of the mounting position is changed, it can be followed by the flexible deformation of the connection holding part 2710, and while preventing the frame from falling from the game panel 1100, the size of the opening 1112 of the game panel 1100 and the It can correspond to the shape and the like.

In addition, since the flexible string-like connection holding portion 2710 is provided, when the frame such as the first frame 2701 is about to be detached from the game panel 1100, the connection holding portion 2710 is prevented from being flexibly deformed. , it becomes a resistance, and it is possible to suppress the immediate separation from the game panel 1100 . Then, when the frame is detached from the game panel 1100, the connection holding portion 2710 is flexibly deformed, which makes it possible to reduce the falling speed and absorb the impact, thereby preventing damage to the frame. can be done.

Furthermore, since the connection holding portion 2710 connects adjacent frames such as the first frame 2701 and the second frame 2702, one end of the connection holding portion 2710 can be connected to the game panel 1100 or other members. A plurality of frames can be handled more easily as a single unit compared to the case of connecting to , and workability in manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or the like can be improved.

In addition, since the connection holding part 2710 is detachably attached to the frame, for example, a plurality of frames can be sequentially attached to the game panel 1100, or some frames can be removed from the game panel for maintenance or the like. In this case, by detaching or attaching the connection holding portion 2710, the frame can be easily routed and handled, and workability can be improved.

In addition, since the connection holding part 2710 is detachable, the connection holding part 2710 is connected until the frame is attached to the game panel 1100, and the connection holding part 2710 is removed after the frame is attached to the game panel 1100. is possible, and it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the appearance due to the presence of the connection holding portion 2710 .

Furthermore, electronic parts such as the pattern display 2518 are attached to at least one frame. If the frame comes off from the game panel 1100 and falls, the frame is likely to be damaged due to its weight. it will not be damaged. Therefore, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 that can reliably exhibit the effects of the electronic components attached to the frame.

[15-14. 14th technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-14a. Background of the 14th technical feature]
Conventionally, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not a big win is made based on the winning of a game ball in a starting hole, and when the result of the lottery is a big win, the big win pattern is stopped and displayed on a display device to generate a big win game. There is known a gaming machine that allows In addition, many gaming machines have been proposed that control the game to a state more advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game than during normal times (for example, Patent Document A14: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26097).

By the way, in recent years, even if a large number of balls are awarded to a fraudulent player due to a new fraudulent act, etc., it is difficult to distinguish from a case where a large number of balls are awarded to a player due to a bias in the probability of winning or losing. First, there are cases where it is difficult for the game hall side to prompt the illegal player to stop playing, which poses a problem that it is difficult to manage the game machine. In addition, there are cases where a large number of balls are awarded to legitimate players due to biased odds of winning and losing, and problems such as so-called "addiction" have also arisen.

The following means have been made in view of such circumstances, and the purpose thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of optimizing the management of a gaming machine with a large number of paid balls. That's what it is.

[15-14b. Solution for the 14th technical feature]
Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

In order to achieve the above object, in the configuration according to solution 1,
A game board having a plurality of winning holes is provided, a pattern variation game is performed based on the entry of a ball into a starting hole provided on the game board, and a predetermined winning game is executed when the result of the pattern variation game is a win. In gaming machines,
a prize ball awarding means for awarding a prize ball based on winning in the prize winning opening;
difference ball determination means for determining whether or not the difference ball for a predetermined period has reached a specific value;
a game control means for controlling the progress of a game;
prepared,
The difference ball is the difference between a first count value counted based on the game balls consumed in the game and a second count value counted based on the prize balls,
The specific value is a value preset based on a difference when at least the second count value is greater than the first count value,
The game control means is
It is characterized by comprising game suppressing means for controlling a subsequent game in a suppressing mode when it is determined by the differential ball determining means that the differential ball has reached the specific value.

In the above configuration, when it is determined by the differential ball determination means that the differential balls have reached a specific value, subsequent games are controlled in a restrained mode, so that a large amount of balls are awarded in the subsequent games. It is possible to prompt the game to stop without any problems, and to optimize the management of the gaming machine that has provided a large number of balls (for example, [10-1. See the description of FIG. 117, etc.).

[15-14c. Characteristic effects of the 14th technical feature]
Thus, according to the above-described solution means, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of optimizing the management of a gaming machine that provides a large number of paid balls.

[15-15. 15th technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-15a. Background of the 15th technical feature]
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which a large decorative body is provided to enhance the appeal to the player in order to make it easier for the player to select the gaming machine to play (Patent Document A15). : JP-A-2016-154728). However, with conventional gaming machines such as those disclosed in Patent Document A15, there is a risk that some players will become accustomed to seeing the ornaments early because of the high initial impact due to the large decorations, making it difficult for them to choose the gaming machine to play. . In addition, a large decoration increases the manufacturing cost and is heavy, so reinforcement is required to provide the decoration, which increases the cost of the game machine.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means provide a game machine equipped with decorations that can reduce the weight of the machine while increasing the appeal to the players with unprecedented decorations.

[15-15b. Solution for the 15th technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game machine having a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side,
The game board has an opening penetrating back and forth,
The opening is provided with a center accessory,
The center role is
a peripheral wall portion extending forward from the game board and preventing game balls from entering the inside of the opening;
an extending portion extending outside the peripheral wall portion in a front view and having a flow-down area on the front side where game balls flow down;
a convex portion formed on the extending portion and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
has
A concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the concave portion.”
characterized by being

Here, the "protrusion" may be any shape as long as it can affect the flow speed of the game ball by contact, and the cross-sectional shape of the side surface is "semicircle", "triangle", or "trapezoid". , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,

Further, the "concave portion" may be a concave shape, and examples thereof include "a shape similar to the shape of the convex portion" and "a shape different from the shape of the convex portion". In addition, it is desirable that the "concave portion" has a curved surface or a plurality of flat surfaces with different angles, so that light can be reflected in various directions.

According to the configuration of means 1, the game machine is provided with a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side, the game board has an opening penetrating back and forth, and the opening has a A center function is provided, and the center function extends forward from the game board, and extends to the outside of the peripheral wall portion in a front view and the peripheral wall portion that prevents the entry of game balls into the inside of the opening. The game ball has an extension portion having a flow-down region on the front side where the game ball flows down; is provided so that decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the recess (see [11-8e. Corridor decoration section] in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], and the description in FIG. 138, etc.).

According to this configuration, the decorative light can be reflected by the concave portion provided on the back side of the convex portion that affects the circulation speed of the game ball in the extending portion that forms the flow-down region of the center accessory. Therefore, the reflected light can illuminate and decorate the flowing area in which game balls circulate. Therefore, although the extending portion of the center accessory is not provided with a ostentatious decoration like the conventional game machine, the extending portion is decorated with light, so that the player can enjoy this effect. It is possible to provide a highly appealing game machine capable of strongly attracting the player's interest by allowing the player to recognize that the game machine is provided with decorations completely different from those of the previous game machines.

In addition, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, when viewed from the front, a more complicated shape can be seen due to the shape of the convex portion and the shape of the concave portion, compared to the case where only the convex portion is provided. Therefore, the shape acts as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the projection is provided in the flow-down region where the game ball flows, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be reduced by the projection in the flow-down region. Movement can be made visible. At this time, a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the decorative light is reflected in the concave portion to make the luminous decoration, so that the game ball flowing down the flowing area is caused by the luminous decoration. It is possible to make it look like a silhouette, and to make the movement of the game ball easier to see. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball flowing down the flowing region, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the weight of the center role can be reduced compared to the case where the concave portion is not provided, and the weight can be reduced, and the cost of the center role can be reduced. can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the weight of the center accessory, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that is required in conventional gaming machines, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

Means 2: In the game machine,
"A game machine having a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side,
The game board has an opening penetrating back and forth,
The opening is provided with a center accessory,
The center role is
a peripheral wall portion extending forward from the game board and preventing game balls from entering the inside of the opening;
a flange portion extending outside the peripheral wall portion in a front view;
with
A front member that is different from the center accessory and is fixed to the game board,
The front member is
an extending portion extending along the game board and having a flow-down area on the front side where game balls flow down;
a convex portion formed on the extending portion and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
has
A concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the concave portion.”
characterized by being

Here, as the "front member", "at least a large prize winning opening is provided (for example, an attacker unit)", "at least a special prize winning opening is provided (for example, a special prize winning opening unit) ", "At least a starting prize opening (for example, a starting opening unit)", "At least a gate (for example, a gate unit)", "At least a general winning opening or a normal winning opening is provided (for example, a prize winning unit)”, and the like.

Also, the "protrusion" may be any shape that can affect the flow speed of the game ball when it contacts the ball. , “quadrilateral”, “polygons such as pentagons and hexagons”, “undefined shapes by free-form curves”, and the like.

Further, the "concave portion" may be a concave shape, and examples thereof include "a shape similar to the shape of the convex portion" and "a shape different from the shape of the convex portion". In addition, it is desirable that the "concave portion" has a curved surface or a plurality of flat surfaces with different angles, so that light can be reflected in various directions.

According to the configuration of means 2, the game machine is provided with a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side, the game board has an opening penetrating back and forth, and the opening has A center function is provided, and the center function extends forward from the game board, and extends to the outside of the peripheral wall portion in a front view and the peripheral wall portion that prevents the entry of game balls into the inside of the opening. and a protruding flange portion, and a front member that is different from the center accessory and fixed to the game board, the front member extends along the game board, and the game balls flow down to the front side. It has an extending portion having a flow-down region and a convex portion formed in the extending portion that affects the flow-down speed of the game ball. It is made to be reflective (see [11-8e. Corridor decoration section] section in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], description in Fig. 139, etc.).

According to this configuration, in the extending portion forming the flow-down region in the front member different from the center accessory, the decorative light is emitted by the concave portion provided on the back side of the convex portion that affects the circulation speed of the game ball. Since the reflected light can be reflected, the falling area in which the game balls circulate can be decorated with light. Therefore, although the extending part of the front member is not provided with a ostentatious decoration like the conventional game machine, the extending part is decorated with light, so that the player can enjoy It is possible to provide a highly appealing game machine capable of strongly attracting the player's interest by allowing the player to recognize that the game machine is provided with decorations completely different from those of the other game machine.

In addition, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, when viewed from the front, a more complicated shape can be seen due to the shape of the convex portion and the shape of the concave portion, compared to the case where only the convex portion is provided. Therefore, the shape acts as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the projection is provided in the flow-down region where the game ball flows, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be reduced by the projection in the flow-down region. Movement can be made visible. At this time, a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the decorative light is reflected in the concave portion to make the luminous decoration, so that the game ball flowing down the flowing area is caused by the luminous decoration. It is possible to make it look like a silhouette, and to make the movement of the game ball easier to see. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball flowing down the flowing region, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the weight of the front member can be reduced compared to the case where the concave portion is not provided. can be made In addition, since the weight of the front member can be reduced, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement, which is required in conventional game machines, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine.

Means 3: In the gaming machine,
"A game machine having a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side,
The game board has an opening penetrating back and forth,
The opening is provided with a center accessory,
The center role is
a peripheral wall portion extending forward from the game board and preventing game balls from entering the inside of the opening;
an extending portion extending outside the peripheral wall portion in a front view and having a flow-down area on the front side where game balls flow down;
a front plate facing the front of the extending portion with a gap that allows the game ball to flow down;
a convex portion formed on the front plate and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
has
A concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the concave portion.”
characterized by being

Here, the "protrusion" may be any shape as long as it can affect the flow speed of the game ball by contact, and the cross-sectional shape of the side surface is "semicircle", "triangle", or "trapezoid". , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,

Further, the "concave portion" may be a concave shape, and examples thereof include "a shape similar to the shape of the convex portion" and "a shape different from the shape of the convex portion". In addition, it is desirable that the "concave portion" has a curved surface or a plurality of flat surfaces with different angles, so that light can be reflected in various directions.

According to the configuration of the means 3, the game machine is provided with a game board having a game area on the front side through which game balls circulate. A center function is provided, and the center function extends forward from the game board, and extends to the outside of the peripheral wall portion in a front view and the peripheral wall portion that prevents the entry of game balls into the inside of the opening. An extension part having a flow-down area on the front side where the game balls flow down and a front plate facing each other with a gap in front of the extension part so that the game balls can flow down are formed in the front plate. and a convex portion that affects the flow speed of the ball, and a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion so that the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the concave portion ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] Then, refer to the chapter [11-8e. Passage decoration part], the description of Fig. 138, etc.).

According to this configuration, in the front plate provided so as to face the extending portion forming the flow-down area of the center accessory, it is provided on the back side of the convex portion that affects the circulation speed of the game ball. Since the decorative light can be reflected by the concave portion, the reflected light can be used to light-embellish the flowing-down region in which the game balls circulate. Therefore, although the front plate of the center accessory is not provided with a ostentatious decoration like the conventional game machine, the extension part is decorated with light, so that the player can enjoy It is possible to provide a highly appealing game machine capable of strongly attracting the player's interest by allowing the player to recognize that the game machine is provided with decorations completely different from those of the other game machine.

In addition, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, when viewed from the front, a more complicated shape can be seen due to the shape of the convex portion and the shape of the concave portion, compared to the case where only the convex portion is provided. Therefore, the shape acts as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the projection is provided in the flow-down region where the game ball flows, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be reduced by the projection in the flow-down region. Movement can be made visible. At this time, a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the decorative light is reflected in the concave portion to make the luminous decoration. As a result, the front of the game ball flowing down in the flow-down region is decorated with light emission, and the game ball can be made to look like it is sparkling.

Furthermore, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion of the front plate of the center accessory, the weight of the center accessory can be reduced compared to the case where the concave portion is not provided, and the weight can be reduced. , the cost of center accessories can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the weight of the center accessory, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that is required in conventional gaming machines, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

In addition, the extending portion of the center accessory is further provided with an extending portion convex portion that affects the flow speed of the game ball, and an extending portion concave portion that can reflect decorative light on the back side of the extending portion convex portion. You can do it. As a result, the decorative light can be reflected even in the recessed portion of the extended portion for luminous decoration, so that the light reflected by the recessed portion and the light reflected by the recessed portion of the extended portion circulate the game ball. The front and back of the flowing down area can be decorated with light. Therefore, since the extending portion and the front plate are decorated with light, it is possible for the player to recognize that the game machine is provided with decorations that are completely different from the conventional game machines. It is possible to provide a highly appealing game machine capable of strongly attracting interest.

Further, as described above, in the case where the extending portion of the center accessory is provided with the extending portion convex portion and the extending portion concave portion on the back side of the extending portion convex portion, when viewed from the front, the convex portion on the front plate and the shape of the concave portion, and further, the shape of the convex portion of the extension portion and the shape of the concave portion of the extension portion can be seen, and these shapes act as decoration, thereby further enhancing the decorative effect. can be done.

In addition, as described above, when the extension convex portion is provided on the extension portion of the center accessory, the game ball can be swung back and forth by the front convex portion and the rear extension convex portion. As a result, compared with the case where only the convex portion is provided, the falling speed of the game ball can be further reduced, and the movement of the game ball can be easily seen. At this time, a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and an extending portion concave portion is provided on the back side of the extending portion convex portion, and the decorative light is reflected by the concave portion and the extending portion concave portion. Since the luminous decoration is applied, the luminous decoration of the recessed part of the extension part makes the game ball look like a silhouette, and the luminous decoration of the concave part makes it look like it is shining, and the luminous decoration is displayed along with the movement of the game ball. It is possible to keep the player entertained and suppress the decline in interest in the game. In this case, it is desirable that the protrusions of the front plate and the extension protrusions of the extension are provided alternately (staggered) in the downward direction of the game ball.

Means 4: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"A front plate that is opposed to the front of the extending portion with a gap that allows the game ball to flow down,
a second convex portion formed on the front plate and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
has
A second concave portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion, and the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the second concave portion.”
characterized by being

Here, the "second convex portion" may have a similar shape similar to the convex portion provided on the extension portion, or may have a shape different from the convex portion. Further, the "second concave portion" may have a shape similar to that of the second convex portion, or may have a shape different from that of the second convex portion.

According to the configuration of the means 4, when the protrusion and the recess are provided in the extension, the front plate facing the front of the extension with a gap that allows the game ball to flow down is formed on the front plate. and a second convex portion that affects the flow speed of the game ball, a second concave portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion, and the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the second concave portion. (See the description regarding the front plate 2571, the front plate protrusion 2594b, and the front plate recess 2595b in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, the extension provided on the center accessory and the front member is provided with a protrusion, and the back side of the protrusion is provided with a recess capable of reflecting decorative light, Furthermore, a front plate is provided in front of the extension, a second protrusion is provided on the front plate, and a second recess that can reflect decorative light is provided on the back side of the second protrusion, so that the reflection by the recess The light and the reflected light from the second concave portion can be used to illuminate and decorate the back and front of the downflow area through which the game balls circulate. Therefore, although the extension part of the center accessory and the front member and the front plate are not provided with a ostentatious decoration like the conventional game machine, the extension part and the front plate are not provided. Since the is decorated with light, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game machine is equipped with decorations that are completely different from the conventional game machines, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player. It is possible to provide a game machine with high power.

In addition, a convex portion and a concave portion are provided on the back side of the convex portion on the extending portion behind the flow-down region, and a second convex portion and a second convex portion are provided on the back side of the second convex portion on the front plate in front of the flow-down region. Since two recesses are provided, when viewed from the front, the shape of the protrusion and the shape of the recess, as well as the shape of the second protrusion and the shape of the second recess, can be seen, and those shapes can be used as decoration. By acting, the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, the projecting portion forming the rear wall of the flow-down area where the game ball flows down is provided with a projection, and the front plate forming the front wall of the flow-down area is provided with a second projection. Therefore, the game ball can be rocked back and forth by the convex portion and the second convex portion, and the falling speed of the game ball can be further reduced compared to the case where only the convex portion is provided. Movement can be made visible. At this time, a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and a second concave portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion. As a result, the luminous decoration of the concave portion makes the game ball look like a silhouette, while the luminous decoration of the second concave portion makes it look as if it is sparkling. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"A plurality of the convex portions are provided, and some of them have a specific convex portion on the back side of which the concave portion is not provided."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, a plurality of convex portions are provided, and a specific convex portion having no concave portion is provided on the back side of some of them ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] Then, see the description regarding the specific convex portion 2596).

According to this configuration, some of the plurality of protrusions have specific protrusions that do not have recesses on the back side. In other words, a convex portion having a concave portion on the back side and a convex portion having no concave portion on the back side (specific convex portion) are mixed. As a result, since decoration light cannot be reflected on the back side of the specific convex portion unlike the concave portion, the aspect of the luminous decoration can be made different between the convex portion portion and the specific convex portion portion.

In addition, since the convex portion having the concave portion on the back side and the specific convex portion having no concave portion on the back side have different shapes when viewed from the front, compared to the case where only a plurality of convex portions having concave portions on the back side are provided. , you can change the decoration visible from the front.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a game machine equipped with decorations that can be reduced in weight while increasing the appeal to the player with unprecedented decorations.

[15-15c. Relationship between the solution means of the fifteenth technical feature and the embodiment]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of the second embodiment is the game board of the above solving means, the attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment is the front member of the above solving means, and the door upper passage portion of the attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment. 2416, the attacker passage portion 2517a, the right edge passage portion 2517b, the outlet passage portion 2517g, and the ball passage 2591 of the ball passage 2517 of the center accessory 2500 are located in the flow-down region of the above-described solution means, and the platform of the attacker unit 2400 in this embodiment. The plate 2431, the flange portion 2511b of the center accessory, and the rear plate portion 2592 are the extending portions of the above solution, and the front plate 2432 of the attacker unit 2400 and the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570 of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment are They correspond respectively to the front plate of the above solution.

In addition, the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment is the peripheral wall portion of the solving means, and the convex portion 2594, the rear plate convex portion 2594a, and the front plate convex portion 2594b in this embodiment are the convex portions of the solving means. In addition, the front plate convex portion 2594b in this embodiment is the second convex portion of the above solving means, the concave portion 2595, the rear plate concave portion 2595a, and the front plate concave portion 2595b in this embodiment are the concave portions of the above solving means, The front plate recesses 2595b respectively correspond to the second recesses of the above solution.

[15-15d. Characteristic action and effect of the fifteenth technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, in the flange portion 2511b (rear plate portion 2592) forming the flow-down area in the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5 of the second embodiment, the circulation speed of the game ball B Since the decorative light can be reflected by the rear plate concave portion 2595a provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a that affects, the flowing area (ball passage 2591) in which the game ball B circulates is illuminated by the reflected light. can be made Therefore, although the flange portion 2511b of the center accessory 2500 is not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional pachinko machine, since the flange portion 2511b is decorated with light, To provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting a player's interest by allowing the player to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is provided with decorations completely different from conventional pachinko machines. can be done.

In addition, since the rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the rear side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a in the flange portion 2511b, the rear plate protrusion 2594a is larger than the case where only the protrusion is provided when viewed from the front. and the shape of the rear plate recessed portion 2595a, a complicated shape can be seen, and the shape acts as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the rear plate convex portion 2594a is provided in the flowing area (ball passage 2591) where the game ball B flows down, the flowing speed of the game ball B can be reduced by the rear plate convex portion 2594a in the flowing area. The movement of the game ball B can be easily seen by slowing down the flow speed of the game ball B.例文帳に追加At this time, a rear plate concave portion 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a. The game ball B flowing down can be seen as a silhouette, and the movement of the game ball B can be more easily seen. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B flowing down the flowing area, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570 provided so as to face the flange portion 2511b forming the flow-down area (ball passage 2591) in the center accessory 2500 affects the circulation speed of the game ball B. Since the decoration light can be reflected by the front plate concave portion 2595b provided on the back side of the front plate convex portion 2594b, the falling region in which the game ball B circulates can be illuminated with the reflected light. Therefore, although the front plate 2571 of the center accessory 2500 is not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional pachinko machine, the front plate 2571 is decorated with light, so that the player can To provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting a player's interest by allowing the player to recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is provided with decorations completely different from conventional pachinko machines. can be done.

In addition, since the front plate recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b, when viewed from the front, the shape of the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate are different than when only the protrusion is provided. A complicated shape can be seen due to the shape of the plate recess 2595b, and the shape acts as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the front plate convex portion 2594b is provided in the flow-down region where the game ball B flows down, the flow-down speed of the game ball B can be reduced by the front plate convex portion 2594b in the flow-down region, and the game ball B flows down. By slowing down the speed, the movement of the game ball B can be easily seen. At this time, a front plate concave portion 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate convex portion 2594b. Since the front plate recess 2595b is provided in the front plate 2571 in front of the flow-down region (ball passage 2591), the front of the game ball B flowing down the flow-down region is decorated with light, and the game ball B shines brightly. can appear to be

Furthermore, in the center accessory 2500, a rear plate protrusion 2594a is provided on the flange portion 2511b, and a rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a. A plate protrusion 2594b and a front plate recess 2595b are provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. As a result, the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a provided on the flange portion 2511b and the reflected light from the front plate recess 2595b provided on the front plate 2571 create a flow-down region (ball passage 2591) in which the game ball B circulates. ) can be decorated with light on the back and front. Therefore, since the flange part 2511b and the front plate 2571 of the center accessory 2500 are decorated with light, the player can recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is provided with decorations completely different from those of the past pachinko machines. is possible, and the highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of the players can be provided.

In addition, as described above, since the flange portion 2511b and the front plate 2571 of the center accessory 2500 are provided with the rear plate protrusion 2594a, the rear plate recess 2595a, the front plate protrusion 2594b, and the front plate recess 2595b, When viewed from above, the shape of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the shape of the rear plate recess 2595a in the flange portion 2511b, and further, the shape of the front plate protrusion 2594b and the shape of the front plate recess 2595b in the front plate 2571 can be seen. The decorative effect can be further enhanced by their shapes acting as decorations.

In addition, as described above, the flange portion 2511b and the front plate 2571 of the center accessory 2500 are alternately (staggered) with the rear plate protrusions 2594a and the front plate protrusions 2594b in the flowing direction of the game ball B. Since it is provided, it is possible to swing the game ball B back and forth by the front plate convex portion 2594b on the front side and the rear plate convex portion 2594a on the rear side. The falling speed of the ball B can be further reduced, and the movement of the game ball B can be easily seen. At this time, a rear plate concave portion 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a, and a front plate concave portion 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate convex portion 2594b. Since the recessed portion 2595b reflects the decorative light for luminous decoration, the luminous decoration of the rear plate recessed portion 2595a makes the game ball B look like a silhouette, while the luminous decoration of the front plate recessed portion 2595b makes it look like it is sparkling. The light emitting decoration can be enjoyed along with the movement of the game ball B, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 forming the flow-down area (door upper passage part 2416) in the attacker unit 2400 different from the center accessory 2500, the convex part 2594 that affects the circulation speed of the game ball B Since the decorative light can be reflected by the concave portion 2595 provided on the back side, the flowing area in which the game ball B circulates can be illuminated with the reflected light. Therefore, although the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 of the attacker unit 2400 are not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional pachinko machine, the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 are decorated with light. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is provided with decorations completely different from those of the conventional pachinko machines, and has a high appealing power capable of strongly attracting the player's interest. A pachinko machine 1 can be provided.

In addition, in the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 of the attacker unit 2400, since the concave portion 2595 is provided on the back side of the convex portion 2594, compared with the case where only the convex portion is provided when viewed from the front, A complicated shape can be seen by the shape of the convex portion 2594 and the shape of the concave portion 2595, and the shape acts as decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, since the convex portion 2594 is provided in the door upper passage portion 2416 above the large winning opening door 2413 in the attacker unit 2400, the flowing speed of the game ball B is reduced by the convex portion 2594 at the portion of the large winning opening door 2413. By slowing the downflow speed of the game ball B, the movement of the game ball B can be easily seen, and when the big winning opening door 2413 opens at that timing, the winning opening 2005 can be easily won. can be done. At this time, a concave portion 2595 is provided on the back side of the convex portion 2594, and the decorative light is reflected in the concave portion 2595 so that the decoration light is emitted. The falling (rolling) game ball B can be made to look like a silhouette and glittering, and the expectation for winning a prize in the big prize opening 2005 by the movement of the game ball B can be enhanced. The luminous decoration can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in the flange portion 2511b and the front plate 2571 of the center accessory 2500, and the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 of the attacker unit 2400, since the concave portion 2595 is provided on the back side of the convex portion 2594, the concave portion 2595 is not provided. By comparison, the weight of the center accessory 2500 and the attacker unit 2400 can be reduced, the weight can be reduced, and the cost of the center accessory 2500 and the attacker unit 2400 can be reduced. Further, since the weight of the center accessory 2500 and the attacker unit 2400 can be reduced, the reinforcement required in the conventional pachinko machine can be made unnecessary, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. be able to.

[15-16. 16th technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-16a. Background of the 16th technical feature]
A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which a large decorative body is provided to enhance the appeal to the player in order to make it easier for the player to select the gaming machine to play (Patent Document A16). : JP-A-2016-154728). However, in conventional gaming machines such as those disclosed in Patent Document A16, the large decorations have a high initial impact, so some players may get used to seeing them in an early stage, making it difficult for them to choose the gaming machine to play. . In addition, a large decoration increases the manufacturing cost and is heavy, so reinforcement is required to provide the decoration, which increases the cost of the game machine.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means provide a game machine equipped with decorations that can reduce the weight of the machine while increasing the appeal to the players with unprecedented decorations.

[15-16b. Solution for the 16th technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game machine having a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side,
The game board has an opening penetrating back and forth,
The opening is provided with a center accessory,
The center role is
a peripheral wall portion extending forward from the game board and preventing game balls from entering the inside of the opening;
an extending portion extending outside the peripheral wall portion in a front view and having a flow-down area on the front side where game balls flow down;
a convex portion formed on the extending portion and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
has
A concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the concave portion is covered with a specific member different from the game board, and the concave portion cannot be touched.”
characterized by being

Here, the "protrusion" may be any shape as long as it can affect the flow speed of the game ball by contact, and the cross-sectional shape of the side surface is "semicircle", "triangle", or "trapezoid". , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,

Further, the "concave portion" may be a concave shape, and examples thereof include "a shape similar to the shape of the convex portion" and "a shape different from the shape of the convex portion". In addition, it is desirable that the "concave portion" has a curved surface or a plurality of flat surfaces with different angles, so that light can be reflected in various directions.

Furthermore, as a "specific member", an "LED board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted",

In addition, "not touchable" may be a configuration in which the fingers of an operator or the like cannot touch the concave portion, and "the extending portion and the specific member are in contact with each other and there is no gap between them. "Things that do not allow a finger to enter even if there is a gap between the extension and the specified member (they have a gap that is large enough to prevent the finger from entering)", "The extension and the specified member A gap large enough for a finger to enter is provided between it and a member, but the outer periphery of the gap is surrounded by a specific member or another member so that the finger cannot enter the gap."

By the way, when a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion formed in the extending portion, if the inside of the concave portion is soiled by the operator's finger touching the inner surface of the concave portion during manufacturing of the game machine, the appearance of the concave portion is not good. Deteriorate. In addition, if the inside of the recess becomes dirty, it takes time to wipe off the dirt because it is recessed, so it is necessary to work carefully so that the recess does not become dirty, which unnecessarily lengthens the work time and increases the cost. There is fear.

According to the configuration of means 1, the game machine is provided with a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side, the game board has an opening penetrating back and forth, and the opening has a A center function is provided, and the center function extends forward from the game board, and extends to the outside of the peripheral wall portion in a front view and the peripheral wall portion that prevents the entry of game balls into the inside of the opening. The game ball has an extension portion having a flow-down region on the front side where the game ball flows down; is provided, and the recess is covered with a specific member different from the game board, and the recess is made impossible to touch ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [11-8e. Passage decoration part] chapter (see the description of the center accessory 2500, the specific member 2519, FIG. 138, etc.).

According to this configuration, in the extending portion forming the flow-down area of the center accessory, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion that affects the circulation speed of the game ball, when viewed from the front, it is simply Compared to the case where only the projections are provided, a complicated shape can be seen by the shape of the projections and the shape of the recesses, and the shapes act as decorations, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced. . At this time, since the concave portion is made non-touchable by the specific member, the operator's fingers do not touch the concave portion and become dirty during manufacturing of the game machine, and the appearance is improved and the decorative effect of the concave portion can be achieved. You can definitely make it work. Therefore, even though the extension of the center accessory is not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional game machine, an unprecedented decoration made up of the projections and recesses can be seen. To provide a highly appealing gaming machine capable of strongly attracting the attention of players by making it possible for the player to recognize that the gaming machine is equipped with decorations that are completely different from conventional gaming machines. can provide.

In addition, since the projection is provided in the flow-down region where the game ball flows, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be reduced by the projection in the flow-down region. Movement can be made visible. At this time, since a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, it is possible to show an unprecedented decoration by the convex portion and the concave portion. The back of the ball can be decorated to make the game ball stand out. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball flowing down the flowing region, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the weight of the center role can be reduced compared to the case where the concave portion is not provided, and the weight can be reduced, and the cost of the center role can be reduced. can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the weight of the center accessory, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that is required in conventional gaming machines, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since the recess is covered by the specific member so that it cannot be touched with fingers, the operator's fingers do not touch the recess during manufacturing, so there is no need to carefully work to prevent the recess from getting dirty, making the work easier. As a result, an increase in costs can be suppressed.

Further, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, it is possible to reflect the decoration light on the surface of the concave portion. As a result, the falling area in which the game balls circulate can be illuminated by the reflected light reflected by the concave portion, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest by the illumination decoration of the extension. In addition, when the decorative light is reflected in the concave portion of the extending portion to be decorated with light, the game ball flowing down in front of the extending portion is decorated with light from behind, and the game ball can be made to look like a silhouette. , the movement of the game ball can be easily seen.

Means 2: In the game machine,
"A game machine having a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side,
The game board has an opening penetrating back and forth,
The opening is provided with a center accessory,
The center role is
a peripheral wall portion extending forward from the game board and preventing game balls from entering the inside of the opening;
a flange portion extending outside the peripheral wall portion in a front view;
with
A front member that is different from the center accessory and is fixed to the game board,
The front member is
an extending portion extending along the game board and having a flow-down area on the front side where game balls flow down;
a convex portion formed on the extending portion and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
has
A concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the concave portion is covered with a specific member different from the game board, and the concave portion cannot be touched.”
characterized by being

Here, as the "front member", "at least a large prize winning opening is provided (for example, an attacker unit)", "at least a special prize winning opening is provided (for example, a special prize winning opening unit) ", "At least a starting prize opening (for example, a starting opening unit)", "At least a gate (for example, a gate unit)", "At least a general winning opening or a normal winning opening is provided (for example, a prize winning unit)”, and the like.

Also, the "protrusion" may be any shape that can affect the flow speed of the game ball when it contacts the ball. , “quadrilateral”, “polygons such as pentagons and hexagons”, “undefined shapes by free-form curves”, and the like.

Further, the "concave portion" may be a concave shape, and examples thereof include "a shape similar to the shape of the convex portion" and "a shape different from the shape of the convex portion". In addition, it is desirable that the "concave portion" has a curved surface or a plurality of flat surfaces with different angles, so that light can be reflected in various directions.

Furthermore, as the "specific member", "LED board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted", "decorative sheet or decorative cell with predetermined decoration", "decorative body with three-dimensional decoration , ``ball guiding member for ejecting game balls behind the game board'', ``drive mechanism for moving the movable ornament'', and the like.

In addition, "not touchable" may be a configuration in which the fingers of an operator or the like cannot touch the concave portion, and "the extending portion and the specific member are in contact with each other and there is no gap between them. "Things that do not allow a finger to enter even if there is a gap between the extension and the specified member (they have a gap that is large enough to prevent the finger from entering)", "The extension and the specified member A gap large enough for a finger to enter is provided between it and a member, but the outer periphery of the gap is surrounded by a specific member or another member so that the finger cannot enter the gap."

By the way, when a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion formed in the extending portion, if the inside of the concave portion is soiled by the operator's finger touching the inner surface of the concave portion during manufacturing of the game machine, the appearance of the concave portion is not good. Deteriorate. In addition, if the inside of the recess becomes dirty, it takes time to wipe off the dirt because it is recessed, so it is necessary to work carefully so that the recess does not become dirty, which unnecessarily lengthens the work time and increases the cost. There is fear.

According to the configuration of means 2, the game machine is provided with a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side, the game board has an opening penetrating back and forth, and the opening has A center function is provided, and the center function extends forward from the game board, and extends to the outside of the peripheral wall portion in a front view and the peripheral wall portion that prevents the entry of game balls into the inside of the opening. and a protruding flange portion, and a front member that is different from the center accessory and fixed to the game board, the front member extends along the game board, and the game balls flow down to the front side. It has an extending portion having a flow-down area and a convex portion formed in the extending portion and affecting the flow-down speed of the game ball. It is covered with a member, and the recessed portion is made non-touchable (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the attacker unit 2400, the specific member 2519, the specific member 2519, and the 139, etc.).

According to this configuration, in the extending portion forming the flow-down region in the front member different from the center accessory, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion that affects the circulation speed of the game ball, When viewed, a complex shape can be seen due to the shape of the protrusions and the shape of the recesses, compared to the case where only the protrusions are provided, and the shapes act as decorations, thereby providing a decorative effect. can be higher. At this time, since the concave portion is made non-touchable by the specific member, the operator's fingers do not touch the concave portion and become dirty during manufacturing of the game machine, and the appearance is improved and the decorative effect of the concave portion can be achieved. You can definitely make it work. Therefore, although the extending portion of the front member is not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional game machine, the unprecedented decoration by the convex portion and the concave portion can be seen, so that the game can be played. To provide a highly appealing game machine capable of making a player recognize that the game machine is provided with decorations that are completely different from conventional game machines, and capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player. can do.

In addition, since the projection is provided in the flow-down region where the game ball flows, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be reduced by the projection in the flow-down region. Movement can be made visible. At this time, since a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, it is possible to show an unprecedented decoration by the convex portion and the concave portion. The back of the ball can be decorated to make the game ball stand out. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball flowing down the flowing region, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the weight of the front member can be reduced compared to the case where the concave portion is not provided. can be made In addition, since the weight of the front member can be reduced, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement, which is required in conventional game machines, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine. Furthermore, since the recess is covered by the specific member so that it cannot be touched with fingers, the operator's fingers do not touch the recess during manufacturing, so there is no need to carefully work to prevent the recess from getting dirty, making the work easier. As a result, an increase in costs can be suppressed.

Further, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, it is possible to reflect the decoration light on the surface of the concave portion. As a result, the falling area in which the game balls circulate can be illuminated by the reflected light reflected by the concave portion, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest by the illumination decoration of the extension. In addition, when the decorative light is reflected in the concave portion of the extending portion to be decorated with light, the game ball flowing down in front of the extending portion is decorated with light from behind, and the game ball can be made to look like a silhouette. , the movement of the game ball can be easily seen.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"A front plate that is opposed to the front of the extending portion with a gap that allows the game ball to flow down,
a second convex portion formed on the front plate and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
with
A second concave portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion, a decorative member is provided on the back side of the second concave portion, and the second concave portion is untouchable.”
characterized by being

Here, the "second convex portion" may have a similar shape similar to the convex portion provided on the extension portion, or may have a shape different from the convex portion. Further, the "second concave portion" may have a shape similar to that of the second convex portion, or may have a shape different from that of the second convex portion.

Further, the "decorative member" includes a "sheet-like decorative seal with a predetermined decoration", a "plate-like decorative panel with a predetermined decoration", and the like.

According to the configuration of means 3, the game machine is provided with a front plate facing the front of the extending portion with a gap that allows the game ball to flow down, and the front plate to affect the flow speed of the game ball. A second convex portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion, a decorative member is provided on the back side of the second concave portion, and the second concave portion is made impossible to touch ( In [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], see the description regarding the front plate 2571, the front plate protrusion 2594b, the front plate recess 2595b, and the front decorative member 2572).

According to this configuration, the extending portion provided on the center accessory and the front member is provided with a convex portion, and the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion. A front plate is provided at the front, a second protrusion is provided on the front plate, and a second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion, so when viewed from the front, the shape of the protrusion and the shape of the recess, Furthermore, the shape of the second convex portion and the shape of the second concave portion can be seen, and these shapes act as decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced. At this time, the specific member makes the recess untouchable, and the decorative member makes the second recess untouchable. The decorative effect of the concave portion and the second concave portion can be surely brought out by improving the appearance of the concave portion and the second concave portion. Therefore, although the center accessory, the extension of the front member, and the front plate are not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional game machine, the projections and recesses, and the Since the second convex part, the second concave part, and the decorative member can be seen, the game machine is provided with decorations that are completely different from those of the past game machines for the player. It is possible to provide a highly appealing game machine capable of making the player recognize and strongly attract the interest of the player.

In addition, the projecting portion forming the rear wall of the flow-down area where the game ball flows down is provided with a projection, and the front plate forming the front wall of the flow-down area is provided with a second projection. Therefore, the game ball can be rocked back and forth by the convex portion and the second convex portion, and the falling speed of the game ball can be further reduced compared to the case where only the convex portion is provided. Movement can be made visible. At this time, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion and the second concave portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion, the convex portion and the concave portion, and the second convex portion and the first Since unprecedented decoration by the two recesses can be shown, the rear and front sides of the game ball flowing down the flow-down region can be decorated with the decoration, and the game ball can be conspicuous. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball flowing down the flowing region, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion in the front plate, the weight of the front plate can be reduced compared to the case where the second recess is not provided, and the center accessory and the front member can be reduced in weight, and the cost of the center accessory and the front member can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the weight of the center accessory and the front member, it is possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that is required in conventional game machines, and it is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the game machine. . Furthermore, since the specific member covers the concave portion in a non-touchable manner and the decorative member covers the second concave portion in a non-touchable manner, the operator's fingers cannot touch the concave portion or the second concave portion during manufacturing. Therefore, it is not necessary to work carefully so as not to stain the recess and the second recess.

Further, since the second concave portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion on the front plate, it is possible to reflect the decorative light on the surface of the second concave portion. As a result, the forward portion of the flowing area in which the game balls circulate can be luminous-decorated by the reflected light reflected by the second concave portion, and the game balls flowing down the flowing-down area are sparkling by the luminous decoration of the second concave portion. You can make it look like At this time, if the decorative light is also reflected by the concave portion provided in the rear extension of the front plate, the light reflected by the second concave portion and the light reflected by the concave portion form a flow-down area in which the game ball circulates. The rear and front can be decorated with light. As a result, the luminous decoration of the concave portion can make the game ball look like a silhouette, while the luminous decoration of the second concave portion can make it look as if it is sparkling, so that the luminous decoration can be enjoyed together with the movement of the game ball. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"A gap is provided between the extending portion and the specific member."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, a gap is provided between the extending portion and the specific member (see the description regarding the specific member 2519 in [Description of the Invention]).

According to this configuration, since the gap is provided between the extending portion and the specific member, when the specific member has a decorative property, the decoration by the specific member is different from the decoration by the convex portion and the concave portion. A sense of depth can be imparted by separating backward, and the decorative effect can be further enhanced. Further, when an LED board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted is used as the specific member, the electronic components mounted on the LED board can be made difficult to see by separating the LED board rearward from the extending portion. The decorative effect of the portion and the recess can be easily exhibited, and the gap between the extension portion and the specific member can facilitate the release of heat from the plurality of LEDs.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"A plurality of the convex portions are provided, and some of them have a specific convex portion on the back side of which the concave portion is not provided."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, a plurality of convex portions are provided, and a specific convex portion having no concave portion is provided on the back side of some of them ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] Then, see the description regarding the specific convex portion 2596).

According to this configuration, some of the plurality of protrusions have specific protrusions that do not have recesses on the back side. In other words, a convex portion having a concave portion on the back side and a convex portion having no concave portion on the back side (specific convex portion) are mixed. As a result, the convex portion having the concave portion on the back side and the specific convex portion having no concave portion on the back side have different shapes when viewed from the front. It is possible to change the decoration visible from the front.

In addition, when the decorative light is reflected at the concave portion, since the decorative light cannot be reflected on the back side of the specific convex portion unlike the concave portion, the luminous decoration is performed at the convex portion portion and the specific convex portion portion. can be different.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a game machine equipped with decorations that can be reduced in weight while increasing the appeal to the player with unprecedented decorations.

[15-16c. Relationship between the solution means of the 16th technical feature and the embodiment]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of the second embodiment is the game board of the above solving means, the attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment is the front member of the above solving means, and the door upper passage portion of the attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment. 2416, the attacker passage portion 2517a, the right edge passage portion 2517b, the outlet passage portion 2517g, and the ball passage 2591 of the ball passage 2517 of the center accessory 2500 are located in the flow-down region of the above-described solution means, and the platform of the attacker unit 2400 in this embodiment. The plate 2431, the flange portion 2511b of the center accessory, and the rear plate portion 2592 are the extending portions of the above solution, and the front plate 2432 of the attacker unit 2400 and the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570 of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment are They correspond respectively to the front plate of the above solution.

In addition, the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment is the peripheral wall portion of the solving means, and the convex portion 2594, the rear plate convex portion 2594a, and the front plate convex portion 2594b in this embodiment are the convex portions of the solving means. In addition, the front plate convex portion 2594b in this embodiment is the second convex portion of the above solving means, the concave portion 2595, the rear plate concave portion 2595a, and the front plate concave portion 2595b in this embodiment are the concave portions of the above solving means, The front plate concave portion 2595b is the second concave portion of the above solving means, the attacker decoration substrate 2433, the substrate cover 2434, the specific member 2519, and the rear decorative portion 2573 in this embodiment are the specific members of the above solving means, and the decoration in this embodiment The member 2435 and the front decorative portion 2572 respectively correspond to the decorative members of the above solution.

[15-16d. Characteristic effects of the 16th technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the flange portion 2511b (rear plate portion 2592) provided in the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5 of the second embodiment is provided with a rear plate convex portion 2594a. At the same time, a rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, a front plate 2571 is provided in front of the flange portion 2511b, and a front plate protrusion 2594b is provided on the front plate 2571. Since the front plate concave portion 2595b is provided on the back side of the convex portion 2594b, when viewed from the front, the shape of the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the shape of the rear plate concave portion 2595a, and the shape of the front plate convex portion 2594b and the front plate concave portion are different. The shape of 2595b can be seen, and these shapes act as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced. At this time, since the rear plate recessed portion 2595a cannot be touched by the specific member 2519, the operator's fingers touch the rear plate recessed portion 2595a and get dirty when manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5). Instead, the decorative effect of the rear plate recessed portion 2595a can be reliably exhibited by improving the appearance. Therefore, although the flange portion 2511b and the front plate 2571 of the center accessory 2500 are not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional pachinko machine, the flange portion 2511b and the front plate 2571 have a rear Since the plate projection 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate projection 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b can be seen, the player can see decorations that are completely different from conventional pachinko machines. It is possible to provide the highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be recognized as the pachinko machine 1 that is being used and that can strongly attract the interest of the players.

In addition, in the center accessory 2500, the flange portion 2511b constituting the rear wall of the flow-down area (ball passage 2591) where the game ball B flows down is provided with a rear plate convex portion 2594a, and the front wall of the flow-down area is Since the front plate 2571 is provided with the front plate protrusion 2594b, the game ball B can be swung back and forth by the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b, and only the protrusion is formed. The falling speed of the game ball B can be further reduced compared to the case of providing it, and the movement of the game ball B can be easily seen. At this time, the rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. and the rear plate concave portion 2595a, and the front plate convex portion 2594b and the front plate concave portion 2595b. The front can be decorated, and the game ball B can be conspicuous. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B flowing down the flowing area, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the center accessory 2500, the flange portion 2511b has a rear plate recess 2595a behind the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2571 has a front plate recess 2595b behind the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b compared to the case where the recesses are not provided in each, and the weight of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced. The cost of the item 2500 can be reduced. In addition, since the weight of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced, it becomes possible to dispense with the reinforcement required in the conventional pachinko machine, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the specific member 2519 covers the rear plate recessed portion 2595a so that it cannot be touched with a finger, the operator's fingers do not touch the rear plate recessed portion 2595a during manufacturing. Since it is not necessary to work in a timely manner, the increase in costs can be suppressed by making the work easier.

Furthermore, the base plate 2431 (rear plate portion 2592) provided in the attacker unit 2400 of the game board 5 is provided with a rear plate convex portion 2594a, and a rear plate concave portion 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a. Further, a front plate 2432 is provided in front of the base plate 2431, a front plate protrusion 2594b is provided on the front plate 2432, and a front plate recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. When viewed from the front, the shape of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, the shape of the rear plate recess 2595a, and the shape of the front plate protrusion 2594b and the shape of the front plate recess 2595b can be seen, and these shapes are used as decorations. By acting, the decorative effect can be further enhanced. At this time, the attacker decoration board 2433 makes the rear plate recess 2595a untouchable, and the decorative member 2435 makes the front plate recess 2595b untouchable. The operator's fingers do not touch the rear plate recessed portion 2595a or the front plate recessed portion 2595b and become dirty, and the appearance can be improved, and the decorative effect of the rear plate recessed portion 2595a and the front plate recessed portion 2595b can be reliably exhibited. . Therefore, although the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 of the attacker unit 2400 are not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional pachinko machine, in the attacker unit 2400, the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the Since the rear plate concave portion 2595a, the front plate convex portion 2594b, the front plate concave portion 2595b, and the decorative member 2435 can be seen, the player can see a completely different decoration from the past pachinko machines. It is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 that can be recognized as a pachinko machine 1 provided with and can strongly attract a player's interest.

Further, in the attacker unit 2400, a rear plate convex portion 2594a is provided on the base plate 2431 constituting the rear wall of the flow-down region (door upper passage portion 2416) where the game ball B flows down, and the front wall of the flow-down region Since the front plate 2432 constituting the front plate 2432 is provided with the front plate protrusion 2594b, the game ball B can be swung back and forth by the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b, and only the protrusion As compared with the case of providing , the falling speed of the game ball B can be further reduced, and the movement of the game ball B can be easily seen. At this time, the rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate recess 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate protrusion 2594b. and the rear plate concave portion 2595a, and the front plate convex portion 2594b and the front plate concave portion 2595b. The front can be decorated, and the game ball B can be conspicuous. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B flowing down the flowing area, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in the attacker unit 2400, the base plate 2431 has a rear plate recess 2595a behind the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2432 has a front plate recess 2595b behind the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, the weight of the rear plate recessed portion 2595a and the front plate recessed portion 2595b can be reduced compared to the case where recesses are not provided in each of them, and the weight of the attacker unit 2400 can be reduced. Such costs can be reduced. In addition, since the attacker unit 2400 can be made lighter, it becomes possible to omit the reinforcement required in the conventional pachinko machine, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the attacker decorative substrate 2433 and the decorative member 2435 cover the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b so that they cannot be touched, the operator's fingers touch the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b during manufacturing. Therefore, there is no need to work carefully so as not to stain the rear plate recessed portion 2595a.

Furthermore, since a gap is provided between the base plate 2431 of the attacker unit 2400 and the attacker decoration board 2433, the attacker decoration board 2433 moves backward from the base plate 2431, so that the LED mounted on the attacker decoration board 2433 It is possible to make it difficult to see electronic parts such as resistors and resistors, and it is possible to make it easy to exhibit the decorative effect of the convex part 2594 and the concave part 2595. , the heat from the plurality of LEDs can be easily dissipated.

[15-17. 17th technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-17a. Background of the 17th technical feature]
A game machine such as a pachinko machine has been proposed in which a large decorative body is provided to enhance the appeal to the player in order to make it easier for the player to select the game machine to play (Patent Document A17). : JP-A-2016-154728). However, with conventional gaming machines such as those disclosed in Patent Document A17, there is a risk that some players will quickly become accustomed to seeing the decorations because of the high initial impact due to the large ornaments, making it difficult for them to choose the gaming machine for playing games. . In addition, a large decoration increases the manufacturing cost and is heavy, so reinforcement is required to provide the decoration, which increases the cost of the game machine.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means provide a game machine equipped with decorations that can reduce the weight of the machine while increasing the appeal to the players with unprecedented decorations.

[15-17b. Solution for the 17th technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game machine having a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side,
The game board has an opening penetrating back and forth,
The opening is provided with a center accessory,
The center role is
a peripheral wall portion extending forward from the game board and preventing game balls from entering the inside of the opening;
an extending portion extending outside the peripheral wall portion in a front view and having a flow-down area on the front side where game balls flow down;
a convex portion formed on the extending portion and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
has
A concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the concave shape of the concave portion is substantially similar to the convex shape of the convex portion.”
characterized by being

Here, the "protrusion" may be any shape as long as it can affect the flow speed of the game ball by contact, and the cross-sectional shape of the side surface is "semicircle", "triangle", or "trapezoid". , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , ,

According to the configuration of means 1, the game machine is provided with a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side, the game board has an opening penetrating back and forth, and the opening has a A center function is provided, and the center function extends forward from the game board, and extends to the outside of the peripheral wall portion in a front view and the peripheral wall portion that prevents the entry of game balls into the inside of the opening. The game ball has an extension portion having a flow-down region on the front side where the game ball flows down; is provided, and the concave shape of the concave portion is substantially similar to the convex shape of the convex portion (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the center accessory 2500 in the chapter [11-8e. rear plate convex portion 2594a and rear plate concave portion 2595a, see the description of FIG. 138, etc.).

According to this configuration, in the extending portion forming the flow-down area of the center accessory, the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion that affects the circulation speed of the game ball, and the concave shape of the concave portion is the convex shape of the convex portion. Because it has a shape that is approximately similar to , when viewed from the front, compared to the case where only the convex portion is provided, the shape of the convex portion overlaps with the shape of the similar concave portion, and the convex portion is doubled. It will be visible. Since the projection and the recess are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the degree of deviation between the shape of the overlapping projection and the shape of the recess changes. The recesses and decorations appear to move. Therefore, although the extending part of the center accessory is not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional game machine, it has unprecedented movement due to the convex part and the concave part. Since the decorations are visible, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the game machine is equipped with decorations that are completely different from conventional game machines, and the appealing power that can strongly attract the attention of the players. It is possible to provide a game machine with a high

In addition, in the extending portion of the center accessory, the shape of the concave portion is substantially similar to the shape of the convex portion, so that the thickness from the surface of the convex portion to the surface of the concave portion is substantially constant. When an impact is applied to the projection due to the contact of the ball, it is possible to suppress the concentration of the impact on a part of the projection, thereby making it difficult to damage the projection (extending portion). In addition, since the thickness between the convex portion and the concave portion is substantially constant, it is possible to reduce sink marks of the resin when molding the center accessory, and the center accessory can be formed with less distortion. , the center accessory, which is close to the player and conspicuous, can be made to have a good appearance with little distortion.

In addition, since the projection is provided in the flow-down region where the game ball flows, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be reduced by the projection in the flow-down region. Movement can be made visible. At this time, since a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, it is possible to show an unprecedented decoration by the convex portion and the concave portion. The back of the ball can be decorated to make the game ball stand out. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball flowing down the flowing region, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the weight of the center role can be reduced compared to the case where the concave portion is not provided, and the weight can be reduced, and the cost of the center role can be reduced. can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the weight of the center accessory, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that is required in conventional gaming machines, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine. Furthermore, since the recess is covered by the specific member so that it cannot be touched with fingers, the operator's fingers do not touch the recess during manufacturing, so there is no need to carefully work to prevent the recess from getting dirty, making the work easier. As a result, an increase in costs can be suppressed.

Means 2: In the game machine,
"A game machine having a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side,
The game board has an opening penetrating back and forth,
The opening is provided with a center accessory,
The center role is
a peripheral wall portion extending forward from the game board and preventing game balls from entering the inside of the opening;
a flange portion extending outside the peripheral wall portion in a front view;
with
A front member that is different from the center accessory and is fixed to the game board,
The front member is
an extending portion extending along the game board and having a flow-down area on the front side where game balls flow down;
a convex portion formed on the extending portion and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
has
A concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the concave shape of the concave portion is substantially similar to the convex shape of the convex portion.”
characterized by being

Here, as the "front member", "at least a large prize winning opening is provided (for example, an attacker unit)", "at least a special prize winning opening is provided (for example, a special prize winning opening unit) ", "At least a starting prize opening (for example, a starting opening unit)", "At least a gate (for example, a gate unit)", "At least a general winning opening or a normal winning opening is provided (for example, a prize winning unit)”, and the like.

Also, the "protrusion" may be any shape that can affect the flow speed of the game ball when it contacts the ball. , “quadrilateral”, “polygons such as pentagons and hexagons”, “undefined shapes by free-form curves”, and the like.

According to the configuration of means 2, the game machine is provided with a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side, the game board has an opening penetrating back and forth, and the opening has A center function is provided, and the center function extends forward from the game board, and extends to the outside of the peripheral wall portion in a front view and the peripheral wall portion that prevents the entry of game balls into the inside of the opening. and a protruding flange portion, and a front member that is different from the center accessory and fixed to the game board, the front member extends along the game board, and the game balls flow down to the front side. An extending portion having a flow-down region and a convex portion formed in the extending portion and affecting the flow-down speed of the game ball. (In [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the rear plate concave portion 2595a of the attacker unit 2400 in the chapter [11-8e. , see the description of FIG. 138, etc.).

According to this configuration, in the extending portion forming the flow-down region in the front member different from the center accessory, the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion that affects the circulation speed of the game ball, and the concave shape of the concave portion is formed. Since the shape is substantially similar to the projection shape of the convex portion, when viewed from the front, compared to the case where only the convex portion is provided, the shape of the convex portion overlaps with the shape of the similar concave portion. The part will appear double. Since the projection and the recess are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the degree of deviation between the shape of the overlapping projection and the shape of the recess changes. The recesses and decorations appear to move. Therefore, although the extension of the front member is not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional game machine, a decoration with unprecedented movement by the convex and concave parts can be seen. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game machine is equipped with decorations that are completely different from the conventional game machines, and a highly appealing game that can strongly attract the interest of the player. machine can be provided.

In addition, since the shape of the concave portion is substantially similar to the shape of the convex portion in the extending portion of the front member, the thickness from the surface of the convex portion to the surface of the concave portion is substantially constant, so that the game ball When an impact is applied to the projection due to the contact of the contact, it is possible to prevent the impact from concentrating on a part of the projection, thereby making it difficult to damage the projection (extending portion). In addition, since the thickness between the convex portion and the concave portion is substantially constant, sink marks in the resin can be reduced when the front member is molded, and the front member can have a good appearance with little distortion.

In addition, since the projection is provided in the flow-down region where the game ball flows, the flow-down speed of the game ball can be reduced by the projection in the flow-down region. Movement can be made visible. At this time, since a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, it is possible to show an unprecedented decoration by the convex portion and the concave portion. The back of the ball can be decorated to make the game ball stand out. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball flowing down the flowing region, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the weight of the front member can be reduced compared to the case where the concave portion is not provided. can be made In addition, since the weight of the front member can be reduced, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement, which is required in conventional game machines, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the game machine. Furthermore, since the recess is covered by the specific member so that it cannot be touched with fingers, the operator's fingers do not touch the recess during manufacturing, so there is no need to carefully work to prevent the recess from getting dirty, making the work easier. As a result, an increase in costs can be suppressed.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"A front plate that is opposed to the front of the extending portion with a gap that allows the game ball to flow down,
a second convex portion formed on the front plate and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
with
A second concave portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion, and the concave shape of the second concave portion is substantially similar to the convex shape of the second convex portion.”
characterized by being

Here, the "second convex portion" may have a similar shape similar to the convex portion provided on the extension portion, or may have a shape different from the convex portion.

According to the configuration of means 3, the game machine is provided with a front plate facing the front of the extending portion with a gap that allows the game ball to flow down, and the front plate to affect the flow speed of the game ball. A second convex portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion, and the concave shape of the second concave portion is substantially similar to the convex shape of the second convex portion. Embodiment], see the descriptions regarding the front plate 2571, the front plate convex portion 2594b, and the front plate concave portion 2595b).

According to this configuration, the extending portion provided on the center accessory and the front member is provided with a convex portion, and the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion. A front plate is provided at the front, a second protrusion is provided on the front plate, a second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion, and the recess shape of the recess is substantially similar to the protrusion shape of the protrusion, Since the concave shape of the second concave portion is substantially similar to the convex shape of the second convex portion, when viewed from the front, the shape of the convex portion overlaps with the shape of the similar concave portion, so that the convex portion appears double. At the same time, the shape of the second protrusion overlaps with the shape of the similar second recess, so that the second protrusion appears double. Since the convex portion and the concave portion, and the second convex portion and the second concave portion are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, the shape of the overlapping convex portion and the concave portion change. The degree of deviation from the shape and the degree of deviation between the shape of the overlapping second convex portion and the shape of the second concave portion will change, respectively, and the convex portion and the concave portion, and the second convex portion and the second concave portion will change. , decorations appear to move. Therefore, although the center accessory, the extension of the front member, and the front plate are not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional game machine, the projections and recesses, and the To make a player recognize that the game machine is provided with decorations completely different from those of the past game machines, because the second convex part and the second concave part make the decoration with unprecedented movement visible. is possible, and it is possible to provide a highly appealing game machine capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

In addition, in the front plate provided in front of the extension part of the center accessory and the front member, the shape of the second concave part is substantially similar to the shape of the second convex part, so that the second convex part Since the thickness from the surface of the second concave portion to the surface of the second concave portion is substantially constant, when the impact is applied to the second convex portion due to the contact of the game ball, the impact is suppressed from being concentrated in one part. It is possible to make it difficult to damage the second convex portion (front plate). In addition, since the thickness between the second convex portion and the second concave portion is substantially constant, it is possible to reduce the sink marks of the resin when molding the front plate, and the front plate is close to the player and conspicuous. It can be made into a good-looking thing with little distortion.

Furthermore, since the second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion in the front plate, the weight of the front plate can be reduced compared to the case where the second recess is not provided, and the center accessory and the front member can be reduced in weight, and the cost of the center accessory and the front member can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the weight of the center accessory and the front member, it is possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that is required in conventional game machines, and it is possible to suppress the increase in the cost of the game machine. . Furthermore, since the specific member covers the concave portion in a non-touchable manner and the decorative member covers the second concave portion in a non-touchable manner, the operator's fingers cannot touch the concave portion or the second concave portion during manufacturing. Therefore, it is not necessary to work carefully so as not to stain the recess and the second recess.

In addition, in the center accessory and the front member, the extending portion constituting the rear wall of the flowing area where the game ball flows down is provided with a convex portion, and the front plate constituting the front wall of the flowing area is provided with a convex portion. Since the second convex portion is provided, the game ball can be swung back and forth by the convex portion and the second convex portion, and the downflow speed of the game ball is further reduced compared to the case where only the convex portion is provided. It is possible to make the movement of the game ball easy to see. At this time, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion and the second concave portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion, the convex portion and the concave portion, and the second convex portion and the first Since unprecedented decoration by the two recesses can be shown, the rear and front sides of the game ball flowing down the flow-down region can be decorated with the decoration, and the game ball can be conspicuous. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball flowing down the flowing region, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"A plurality of the convex portions are provided, and some of them have a specific convex portion on the back side of which the concave portion is not provided."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, a plurality of protrusions are provided, and a part of them has a specific protrusion on the back side without a recess ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] Then, see the description regarding the specific convex portion 2596).

According to this configuration, some of the plurality of protrusions have specific protrusions that do not have recesses on the back side. In other words, a convex portion having a concave portion on the back side and a convex portion having no concave portion on the back side (specific convex portion) are mixed. As a result, the convex portion having the concave portion on the back side and the specific convex portion having no concave portion on the back side have different shapes when viewed from the front. It is possible to change the decoration visible from the front.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"The concave portion is capable of reflecting decorative light on the surface."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, the concave portion can reflect decorative light on its surface (see the description of the rear plate concave portion 2595a in [Description of the Invention]).

According to this configuration, since the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the recess provided in the center accessory or the extension of the front member, the reflected light reflected by the recess causes the game ball to flow downward. Areas can be decorated with luminescence. Therefore, in the center accessory and the extending portion of the front member, a decoration with unprecedented movement by the convex portion and the concave portion can be seen, and the concave portion is decorated with light. It is possible to provide a highly appealing gaming machine capable of strongly attracting the player's interest.

In addition, in the center accessory and the front member, the projecting portion provided in the downflow area slows down the downflow speed of the game ball so that the movement of the game ball can be easily seen. At this time, a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the decorative light is reflected in the concave portion to make the luminous decoration, so that the game ball flowing down the flowing area is caused by the luminous decoration. It is possible to make it look like a silhouette, and to make the movement of the game ball easier to see. As a result, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball flowing down the flowing region, and the loss of interest in the game can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a game machine equipped with decorations that can be reduced in weight while increasing the appeal to the player with unprecedented decorations.

[15-17c. Relationship between the solution means of the 17th technical feature and the embodiment]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of the second embodiment is the game board of the above solving means, the attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment is the front member of the above solving means, and the door upper passage portion of the attacker unit 2400 of this embodiment. 2416, the attacker passage portion 2517a, the right edge passage portion 2517b, the outlet passage portion 2517g, and the ball passage 2591 of the ball passage 2517 of the center accessory 2500 are located in the flow-down region of the above-described solution means, and the platform of the attacker unit 2400 in this embodiment. The plate 2431, the flange portion 2511b of the center accessory, and the rear plate portion 2592 are the extending portions of the above solution, and the front plate 2432 of the attacker unit 2400 and the front plate 2571 of the decorative body 2570 of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment are They correspond respectively to the front plate of the above solution.

In addition, the inflow restricting portion 2511c of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment is the peripheral wall portion of the solving means, and the convex portion 2594, the rear plate convex portion 2594a, and the front plate convex portion 2594b in this embodiment are the convex portions of the solving means. In addition, the front plate convex portion 2594b in this embodiment is the second convex portion of the above solving means, the concave portion 2595, the rear plate concave portion 2595a, and the front plate concave portion 2595b in this embodiment are the concave portions of the above solving means, The front plate recesses 2595b respectively correspond to the second recesses of the above solution.

[15-17d. Characteristic action and effect of the 17th technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the flange portion 2511b provided in the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5 of the second embodiment is provided with the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the rear plate protrusion 2594a is provided. A rear plate recess 2595a is provided on the back side of 2594a, a front plate 2571 is provided in front of the flange portion 2511b, and a front plate protrusion 2594b is provided on the front plate 2571. A front plate recessed portion 2595b is provided, and the recessed shape of the rear plate recessed portion 2595a is substantially similar to the projecting shape of the rear plate projecting portion 2595a. When viewed from the front, the shape of the rear plate protrusion 2594a overlaps with the shape of the rear plate recess 2595a, which is similar to the shape of the rear plate protrusion 2594a. Since the shape overlaps with the shape of the front plate recess 2595b which is similar, the front plate protrusion 2594b appears double. Since the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, they overlap. The degree of deviation between the shape of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the shape of the rear plate recess 2595a, and the degree of deviation between the shape of the overlapping front plate protrusion 2594b and the shape of the front plate recess 2595b will change. , the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b appear to move. Therefore, although the flange portion 2511b and the front plate 2571 of the center accessory 2500 are not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional pachinko machine, the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the rear plate A pachinko machine in which a player is provided with decorations that are completely different from conventional pachinko machines, since decorations with movement that has never existed before can be seen by the concave portion 2595a and the front plate convex portion 2594b and the front plate concave portion 2595b. It is possible to provide the highly appealing pachinko machine 1 which can be recognized as the machine 1 and which can strongly attract the interest of the players.

In addition, in the flange portion 2511b and the front plate 2571 of the center accessory 2500, the shapes of the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b are substantially similar to the shapes of the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b. Therefore, since the thickness from the surface of the rear plate convex portion 2594a or the front plate convex portion 2594b to the surface of the rear plate concave portion 2595a or the front plate concave portion 2595b is substantially constant, the contact of the game ball B causes the rear plate convex portion 2594a When an impact is applied to the front plate convex portion 2594b, it is possible to suppress the concentration of the impact to a part, and the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b (the flange portion 2511b and the front plate 2571) can be suppressed. can be made difficult to damage. In addition, since the thickness between the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b and the thickness between the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b is substantially constant, when molding the center accessory 2500 and the front plate 2571, , the sink mark of the resin can be reduced, the center role 2500 and the front plate 2571 with little distortion can be obtained, and the center role 2500 and the front plate 2571, which are close to the player and stand out, can have a good appearance with little distortion. can be

In the center accessory 2500, the flange portion 2511b has a rear plate recess 2595a behind the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2571 has a front plate recess 2595b behind the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b compared to the case where the recesses are not provided in each, and the weight of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced. The cost of the item 2500 can be reduced. In addition, since the weight of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced, it becomes possible to dispense with the reinforcement required in the conventional pachinko machine, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Further, the base plate 2431 provided in the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a rear plate convex portion 2594a, and a rear plate concave portion 2595a is provided on the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a. A front plate 2432 is provided in front of the front plate 2432, a front plate convex portion 2594b is provided on the front plate 2432, a front plate concave portion 2595b is provided on the back side of the front plate convex portion 2594b, and the concave shape of the rear plate concave portion 2595a is the rear plate convex portion 2595a, and the concave shape of the front plate concave portion 2595b is made substantially similar to the convex shape of the front plate convex portion 2595b. The shape of the similar rear plate recess 2595a overlaps to make the rear plate protrusion 2594a look double, and the shape of the front plate protrusion 2594b and the similar shape of the front plate recess 2595b overlap to form a front plate protrusion. 2594b will appear double. Since the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, when the position of the player's eyes moves, they overlap. The degree of deviation between the shape of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the shape of the rear plate recess 2595a, and the degree of deviation between the shape of the overlapping front plate protrusion 2594b and the shape of the front plate recess 2595b will change. , the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the rear plate recess 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b appear to move. Therefore, although the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 of the attacker unit 2400 are not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional pachinko machine, the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the rear plate concave portion 2594a are not provided. 2595a, and the front plate protrusion 2594b and the front plate recess 2595b provide a decoration with unprecedented movement, so that the player is provided with a decoration that is completely different from conventional pachinko machines. 1, and it is possible to provide a highly appealing pachinko machine 1 capable of strongly attracting the interest of players.

In addition, in the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 of the attacker unit 2400, the shapes of the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b are substantially similar to the shapes of the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b. , Since the thickness from the surface of the rear plate convex portion 2594a or the front plate convex portion 2594b to the surface of the rear plate concave portion 2595a or the front plate concave portion 2595b is substantially constant, the contact of the game ball B causes the rear plate convex portion 2594a or When an impact is applied to the front plate convex portion 2594b, it is possible to suppress the concentration of the impact to a part, and the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b (base plate 2431 and front plate 2432) can be suppressed. It can be made difficult to break. In addition, since the thicknesses between the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b and between the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b are substantially constant, during molding of the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432, The sink marks of the resin can be reduced, the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432 with less distortion can be obtained, and the base plate 2431 and the front plate 2432, which are close to the player and stand out, have a good appearance with less distortion. be able to.

In addition, in the attacker unit 2400, the base plate 2431 has a rear plate recess 2595a behind the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2432 has a front plate recess 2595b behind the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, the weight of the rear plate recessed portion 2595a and the front plate recessed portion 2595b can be reduced compared to the case where recesses are not provided in each of them, and the weight of the attacker unit 2400 can be reduced. Such costs can be reduced. In addition, since the attacker unit 2400 can be made lighter, it becomes possible to omit the reinforcement required in the conventional pachinko machine, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the rear plate recess 2595a provided on the flange portion 2511b of the center accessory 2500 and the attacker unit 2400 and the base plate 2431, the reflection reflected by the rear plate recess 2595a The flowing area in which the game ball B circulates can be decorated with light by light. Therefore, the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the rear plate concave portion 2595a can be seen on the flange portion 2511b and the base plate 2431 of the center accessory 2500 and the attacker unit 2400, and the rear plate concave portion 2595a emits light. Since the machine is decorated, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a decoration completely different from that of the conventional pachinko machines, and has an appealing power capable of strongly attracting the interest of the player. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with high

[15-18. 18th technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-18a. Background of the 18th technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a winning device such as an attacker unit having a movable piece movable between an easy winning state in which game balls can easily enter a winning opening and an impossible winning state in which winning is impossible is provided. What is provided is known (Patent Document A18: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-118989). In the technique of Patent Document A18, an LED board is provided behind the prize winning opening so that the player can be entertained by the lighting mode of the LED of the LED board. However, in the conventional technology such as Patent Document A18, since the LEDs simply light up, some players may get tired of looking at them early, lose their interest in the prize winning openings, and lose interest in the game. there were.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player by attracting the player's interest to the prize winning opening and suppress the decline in interest. be.

[15-18b. Solution for the 18th technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game machine having a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side,
The game area is equipped with a prize winning device for awarding a privilege to a player by winning a game ball,
The winning device is
a movable piece for switching the state of a prize winning opening in which a game ball can win a prize between an easy winning state and a non-winning state;
a convex portion that changes the direction in which the game ball flows;
with
A concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the concave portion.”
characterized by being

Here, the "winning opening" includes a "starting winning opening (second starting opening) where a small number of game balls are paid out and a lottery for special symbols is performed by winning a game ball", and "a large number of winning openings for game balls". A large prize winning port where game balls are paid out”, “a special prize winning port that can supply the winning game balls to the V winning port or the losing port while paying out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball wins”, etc. is mentioned.

The ``winning device'' includes a ``large winning opening as a winning opening, and a movable piece moves to open and close the big winning opening according to the lottery result of a special pattern drawn when a game ball starts winning a prize. "Attacker unit", "Equipped with a prize winning opening as a prize winning opening, and a movable piece moves according to the lottery result of a special pattern drawn when a game ball starts winning and opens and closes the prize winning opening. "Equipment", "Equipped with a second starting opening as a prize winning opening, and a movable piece moves to open and close the second starting opening according to the lottery result of a normal pattern drawn by passing a game ball through a gate or winning a normal prize. starting port unit”, and the like.

Also, the "protrusion" may be any shape that can affect the flow speed of the game ball when it contacts the ball. , “quadrilateral”, “polygons such as pentagons and hexagons”, “undefined shapes by free-form curves”, and the like.

Further, the "concave portion" may be a concave shape, and examples thereof include "a shape similar to the shape of the convex portion" and "a shape different from the shape of the convex portion". In addition, it is desirable that the "concave portion" has a curved surface or a plurality of flat surfaces with different angles, so that light can be reflected in various directions.

Further, the "protrusions and recesses" include "provided on an extension extending along the front surface of the game board (for example, a flange, a base plate, etc.)", "the front of the game board provided on the front plate where a space is formed between the game plate and the game plate so that game balls can flow through it”, “extending portion extending along the front surface of the game plate (e.g., flange portion , base plate, etc.) and a front plate disposed in front of the extension and forming a space between the extension and the space through which game balls can flow. mentioned.

According to the configuration of means 1, the game machine is equipped with a game board provided with a game area on the front side through which game balls circulate. The prize-winning device includes a movable piece for switching the state of a prize-winning opening into which a game ball can win a prize between an easy-to-win state and an impossible-to-win state, and a convex portion for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, A concave portion is provided on the back side so that decorative light can be reflected by the surface of the concave portion ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], chapter [11-8e. 139, etc.).

According to this configuration, in the prize winning device that provides a privilege by winning a game ball, the decorative light can be reflected by the concave portion provided on the back side of the convex portion that changes the flowing direction of the game ball. The reflected light can be used to light-embellish the portion of the winning device where the game balls flow down. Since this luminous decoration is reflected light from the concave portion, it is possible to present a luminous decoration that is completely different from the conventional direct light from the LED, and directs the player's attention to the prize winning device and, in turn, to the prize winning opening. be able to. In addition, since the convex portion provided with a concave portion on the back side can give a change in the flowing direction of the game ball, the flowing direction of the game ball can be directed to the winning opening (movable piece), or the winning opening (movable piece ), it is possible to decelerate the flow speed of the game ball. As described above, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the winning opening by the reflected light of the concave portion, and the movement of the movable piece brings the winning opening into an easy-to-win state by the player's attention to the winning opening. Whether or not the game ball wins at certain timing can make the player nervous and excited, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, when viewed from the front, a more complicated shape can be seen due to the shape of the convex portion and the shape of the concave portion, compared to the case where only the convex portion is provided. Therefore, the appearance of the prize-winning device can be improved by the shape acting as a decoration.

Furthermore, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the weight of the prize winning device can be reduced compared to the case where the concave portion is not provided, and the weight and cost of the prize winning device can be reduced. can be made In addition, since the weight of the prize winning device can be reduced, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement, which is required in conventional gaming machines, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

Means 2: In the game machine,
"A game machine having a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side,
The game area has a winning port for awarding a privilege to a player by winning a game ball,
a movable piece that switches the state of the winning opening between an easy-winning state and a non-winning state;
a ball passage that communicates with the winning opening by the movement of the movable piece and through which game balls can flow;
a convex portion formed in the ball passage and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
with
A concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the concave portion.”
characterized by being

Here, the "winning opening" includes a "starting winning opening (second starting opening) where a small number of game balls are paid out and a lottery for special symbols is performed by winning a game ball", and "a large number of winning openings for game balls". A large prize winning port where game balls are paid out”, “a special prize winning port that can supply the winning game balls to the V winning port or the losing port while paying out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball wins”, etc. is mentioned.

In addition, the "ball passage" includes "a thing provided in the center accessory provided at the opening of the game board", "a thing provided in a front member different from the center accessory", and the like. . Further, the "ball passage" may be on the upstream side of the movable piece or may be on the downstream side of the movable piece.

Further, the "protrusion" may be any shape as long as it can affect the flow speed of the game ball when it comes into contact with the ball, and the cross-sectional shape of the side surface is "semicircle", "triangle", or "trapezoid". , “quadrilateral”, “polygons such as pentagons and hexagons”, “undefined shapes by free-form curves”, and the like.

Further, the "concave portion" may be a concave shape, and examples thereof include "a shape similar to the shape of the convex portion" and "a shape different from the shape of the convex portion". In addition, it is desirable that the "concave portion" has a curved surface or a plurality of flat surfaces with different angles, so that light can be reflected in various directions.

Furthermore, the "projections and recesses" include "provided on the rear plate portion (for example, flange portion, base plate, etc.) forming the rear wall of the ball passage", "the front wall of the ball passage provided in the front plate portion (e.g., the front plate) forming the ball passage, the rear plate portion forming the rear wall of the ball passage, e.g. provided on both the front plate portion (for example, the front plate) forming the front wall of the

According to the configuration of the means 2, the game machine is provided with a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side, and the game area has a prize winning port for awarding a privilege to a player by winning a game ball. , a movable piece for switching the state of the winning opening between an easy-winning state and a winning-impossible state, a ball passage through which game balls can flow, and a ball passage, which communicates with the winning opening by the movement of the movable piece, and a ball passage. and a convex portion that affects the flow rate, and a concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion so that the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the concave portion ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [ 11-8e. Passage decoration part], attacker passage part 2517a, see the description of Fig. 137, etc.).

According to this configuration, in the ball passage that can communicate with the winning opening provided in the game area where the game ball circulates, the decorative light is generated by the concave portion provided on the back side of the convex portion that affects the flowing speed of the game ball. can be reflected, the ball passage through which game balls circulate can be decorated with light by the reflected light. Since this luminous decoration is reflected light from the concave portion, it is possible to present a luminous decoration that is completely different from the direct light from the conventional LED, and directs the player's attention to the ball passage and, by extension, to the prize winning opening. be able to. In addition, since the convex portion provided with the concave portion on the back side can affect the flow speed of the game ball, it is possible to slow down the flow speed of the game ball flowing through the ball passage. To easily see game balls circulating in a ball passage. As described above, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the winning opening by the reflected light of the concave portion, and the movement of the movable piece brings the winning opening into an easy-to-win state by the player's attention to the winning opening. Whether or not the game ball wins at certain timing can make the player nervous and excited, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, when viewed from the front, a more complicated shape can be seen due to the shape of the convex portion and the shape of the concave portion, compared to the case where only the convex portion is provided. As a result, the shape acts as a decoration, so that the appearance of the member provided with the ball passage can be improved.

Furthermore, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the weight of the member provided with the ball passage can be reduced compared to the case where the concave portion is not provided. The cost of the member provided with the passage can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the weight of the member provided with the ball passage, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement, which is required in conventional game machines, thereby suppressing an increase in the cost of the game machine. can be done.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"A decorative member is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the concave portion cannot be touched by the decorative member."
characterized by being

Here, the "decorative member" includes a "sheet-shaped decorative seal with a predetermined decoration", a "plate-shaped decorative panel with a predetermined decoration", and a "decorative member with a predetermined decoration". "decorative sheet or decorative cell with three-dimensional decoration", "decorative body with three-dimensional decoration", and the like.

In addition, "not touchable" may be a configuration in which the fingers of an operator or the like cannot touch the concave portion, and "the back side surface of the convex portion and the decorative member are in contact with each other and a gap is provided between them." "No fingers can be inserted even if there is a gap between the back side of the convex part and the decorative member (the gap is large enough to prevent the finger from entering)", "Convex There is a gap large enough for a finger to fit between the back side of the part and the decorative member, but the outer circumference is surrounded by the decorative member or another member so that the finger cannot enter the gap.” , etc.

By the way, in the case of providing a concave portion on the back side of the convex portion, if the inside of the concave portion is soiled by the operator's finger touching the inner surface of the concave portion during the manufacturing of the game machine, the appearance deteriorates. In addition, if the inside of the recess becomes dirty, it takes time to wipe off the dirt because it is recessed, so it is necessary to work carefully so that the recess does not become dirty, which unnecessarily lengthens the work time and increases the cost. There is fear.

According to the configuration of means 3, the game machine is provided with a decorative member on the back side of the convex portion, and the concave portion is made impossible to touch by the decorative member (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the decorative member 2435).

According to this configuration, in the ball passage that can communicate with the prize winning device that gives a privilege when the game ball wins and the prize opening provided in the game area through which the game ball circulates, the flow direction of the game ball is changed. Since the decorative light can be reflected by the concave portion provided on the back side of the convex portion that affects the flow speed, the reflected light can be used to decorate the part where the game ball flows down and the ball passage in the winning device. can be done. Since this luminous decoration is light reflected by the concave portion, it is possible to show a luminous decoration that is completely different from the direct light from the conventional LED, and attracts the attention of the player to the winning device, the ball passage, and the winning opening. can be directed to At this time, since the concave portion is made non-touchable by the decorative member, the concave portion is not soiled by the operator's finger touching the concave portion during manufacturing of the game machine, and the decorative light can be well reflected in the concave portion. , and the decorative effect of the luminous decoration can be exhibited reliably. The convex portion provided with a concave portion on the back side can change the flowing direction of the game ball and affect the flowing speed, so that the flowing direction of the game ball can be directed to the winning opening (movable piece). It is possible to direct the game ball, and to decelerate the flow speed of the game ball in the vicinity of the winning opening (movable piece). As described above, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the winning opening by the reflected light of the concave portion, and the movement of the movable piece brings the winning opening into an easy-to-win state by the player's attention to the winning opening. Whether or not the game ball wins at certain timing can make the player nervous and excited, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Moreover, in addition to the decoration by the shape of the convex portion and the shape of the concave portion, the decoration is also made by the decorative member, so that the appearance of the winning device and the member provided with the ball passage can be improved.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
``It further comprises an extending portion extending parallel to the game board, and the extending portion is provided with the convex portion and the concave portion.''
characterized by being

Here, the ``extending part'' includes ``a rear plate part extending along the front surface of the game board (for example, a flange part, a base plate, etc.)'', and a ``a game board disposed in front of the game board A front plate portion (e.g., front plate) in which a space is formed between which game balls can flow, "a rear plate portion extending along the front surface of the game board (e.g., a flange portion, a base plate, etc. ) and a front plate portion (for example, a front plate) arranged in front of the rear plate portion and forming a space between the rear plate portion and through which game balls can flow.

According to the configuration of means 4, the game machine is further provided with an extending portion extending parallel to the game board, and the extending portion is provided with a convex portion and a concave portion. form], see the description regarding the rear plate portion 2592 and the front plate portion 2593).

According to this configuration, when the extending portion provided with the convex portion and the concave portion is the rear plate portion (flange portion or base plate) provided along the game board, it is positioned behind the circulating game ball. Since the convex part and the concave part are provided, and the concave part reflects the decorative light and is decorated with light emission, the player's interest is strongly attracted to the winning opening, and the game ball circulating in front is caused by the light emission decoration. can be seen in a silhouette form, and the movement of the game ball can be made more visible. On the other hand, when the extending portion provided with the convex portion and the concave portion is the front plate portion (front plate) provided along the game board, the convex portion and the concave portion are provided in front of the game balls in circulation. As a result, since the concave portion is decorated with light by reflecting decorative light, the reflected light from the concave portion provided in front of the game ball in circulation makes the game ball look like it is sparkling. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the winning opening. Further, the extending portion provided with the convex portion and the concave portion is arranged between the rear plate portion extending along the front surface of the game board and the rear plate portion disposed in front of the rear plate portion so that the game balls can flow. In the case of both the front plate part in which a space is formed, and the convex part and the concave part are provided in front and behind the circulating game balls, the luminous decoration of the concave part provided in the rear plate part While the game ball looks like a silhouette, it can be made to look as if it is shining by the luminous decoration of the concave part provided on the front plate part, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the winning hole and the game ball can be played. The movement of the ball can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, a game ball can flow between the rear plate portion extending along the front surface of the game board and the rear plate portion disposed in front of the rear plate portion, and the extension portion provided with the convex portion and the concave portion is provided. and a front plate portion in which a space is formed, and when the convex portions of the rear plate portion and the convex portions of the front plate portion are provided alternately (staggered) in the direction of circulation of the game balls, As described above, the luminous decoration of the recess can strongly attract the player's attention to the winning opening, and the circulation speed of the game ball can be greatly reduced near the winning opening. It is possible to lengthen the residence time of the ball. As a result, at the timing when the winning opening becomes easy to win due to the movement of the movable piece, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited as to whether or not the game ball wins, thereby entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest. can be done.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"A plurality of the convex portions are provided, and some of them have a specific convex portion on the back side of which the concave portion is not provided."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, a plurality of convex portions are provided, and a specific convex portion having no concave portion is provided on the back side of some of them ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] Then, see the description regarding the specific convex portion 2596).

According to this configuration, some of the plurality of protrusions have specific protrusions that do not have recesses on the back side. In other words, a convex portion having a concave portion on the back side and a convex portion having no concave portion on the back side (specific convex portion) are mixed. As a result, since decoration light cannot be reflected on the back side of the specific convex portion unlike the concave portion, the aspect of the luminous decoration can be made different between the convex portion portion and the specific convex portion portion.

In addition, since the convex portion having the concave portion on the back side and the specific convex portion having no concave portion on the back side have different shapes when viewed from the front, compared to the case where only a plurality of convex portions having concave portions on the back side are provided. , you can change the decoration visible from the front.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain a player by attracting the player's interest to the prize winning opening and suppress the decline in interest.

[15-18c. Relationship between the solution means of the 18th technical feature and the embodiment]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 of the second embodiment is the game board of the above solving means, the second start opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005 of this embodiment are the winning openings of the above solving means, and the attacker of this embodiment. The unit 2400 is the winning device of the above solving means, the second starting door 2411 and the big winning opening door 2413 in this embodiment are the movable pieces of the above solving means, the door upper passage part 2416 and the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment The attacker passage portion 2517a is the ball passage of the above solution, the base plate 2431, the front plate 2432, the flange portion 2511b, and the front plate 2571 of the present embodiment are the extension portions of the solution, and the attacker decoration substrate of the present embodiment 2433, the decorative member 2435, and the front decorative portion 2572 correspond to the decorative members of the above solution.

In addition, the convex portion 2594, the rear plate convex portion 2594a, and the front plate convex portion 2594b in this embodiment are the convex portions of the above solving means, and the concave portion 2595, the rear plate concave portion 2595a, and the front plate concave portion 2595b in this embodiment are the above solving means. , respectively.

[15-18d. Characteristic effects of the eighteenth technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the attacker unit 2400 that gives a privilege when the game ball B wins, the back side of the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b that change the flow direction of the game ball B Since the decorative light can be reflected by the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b provided, the above door passage portion 2416 in the attacker unit 2400, through which the game ball B flows down, can be illuminated and decorated with the reflected light. . Since this luminous decoration is light reflected by the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b, it is possible to present a luminous decoration that is completely different from the conventional direct light from the LED, and attracts the attention of the player to the attacker unit. 2400 and, by extension, the big winning opening 2005. In addition, the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate concave portion 2594b, which are provided with the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b on the back side, can give a change in the flowing direction of the game ball B. It is possible to decelerate the flowing speed of the game ball B in the vicinity of the large winning opening 2005 (large winning opening door 2413) in the flowing direction. As described above, the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b can strongly draw the player's attention to the large winning slot 2005, and the player's attention to the large winning slot 2005 can At the timing when the large winning opening 2005 becomes easy to win by the movement of the large winning opening door 2413, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited as to whether or not the game ball B wins, thereby amusing the player and reducing the interest. can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the ball passage 2517 (attacker passage portion 2517a) in which the game ball B circulates in the center accessory 2500 and the big winning opening 2005 is provided, the flow rate of the game ball B is Since the decorative light can be reflected by the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b provided on the back side of the rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b, the game ball B is reflected by the reflected light. The circulating attacker passage portion 2517a can be decorated with light. Since this luminous decoration is reflected light from the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b, it is possible to present a luminous decoration that is completely different from the conventional direct light from the LED, and attracts the attention of the player. It can be directed to the part 2517a and, by extension, the big prize opening 2005. In addition, since the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b having the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b provided on the back side can affect the flow speed of the game ball B, the attacker passage portion 2517a , the circulation speed of the game ball B circulating can be slowed down, and the game ball B circulating through the attacker passage portion 2517a can be easily seen. As described above, the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b can strongly draw the player's attention to the large winning slot 2005, and the player's attention to the large winning slot 2005 can At the timing when the large winning opening 2005 becomes easy to win by the movement of the large winning opening door 2413, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited as to whether or not the game ball B wins, thereby amusing the player and reducing the interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the attacker passage portion 2517a provided with the attacker unit 2400 and the large winning opening 2005 of the center accessory 2500, a rear plate convex portion 2594a that changes the flowing direction of the game ball B or affects the flowing speed And since the decorative light can be reflected by the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b provided on the back side of the front plate convex portion 2594b, the reflected light reaches the door upper passage portion 2416 of the attacker unit 2400 and the attacker passage portion. 2517a can be decorated with light. Since this luminous decoration is reflected light from the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b, it is possible to present a luminous decoration that is completely different from the conventional direct light from the LED, and the player's interest is greatly appreciated. It can be directed to mouth 2005 . At this time, since the decorative member 2435 and the like make the rear plate recessed portion 2595a and the front plate recessed portion 2595b inaccessible to the fingers, when the pachinko machine 1 is manufactured, the operator's fingers may touch the rear plate recessed portion 2595a and the front plate recessed portion 2595b. The decorative light can be well reflected in the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b without being soiled by touching, and the decorative effect of the luminous decoration can be exhibited reliably. The rear plate protrusion 2594a and the front plate protrusion 2594b, which are provided with the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b on the back side, change the flow direction of the game ball B or affect the flow speed. Therefore, it is possible to slow down the flow speed of the game ball B in the vicinity of the big winning opening 2005 (big winning opening door 2413). As described above, the reflected light from the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b can strongly draw the player's attention to the large winning slot 2005, and the player's attention to the large winning slot 2005 can At the timing when the large winning opening 2005 becomes easy to win by the movement of the large winning opening door 2413, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited as to whether or not the game ball B wins, thereby amusing the player and reducing the interest. can be suppressed.

Further, in addition to decoration by the shapes of the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b and the shapes of the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b, decoration is also provided by the decorative member 2435 and the like. The appearance of the member provided with the passage portion 2517a can be improved.

Furthermore, the game ball B is placed between the rear plate portion 2592 such as the base plate 2431 and the flange portion 2511b extending along the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the rear plate portion 2592 arranged in front of the rear plate portion 2592. A convex portion 2594 and a concave portion 2595 are provided on both the front plate portion 2593 such as the front plate 2432 and the front plate 2571 in which a space in which the ball B can circulate is formed. Since the part 2594 and the recessed part 2595 are provided, the game ball B is shown in a silhouette shape by the luminous decoration of the rear plate recessed part 2595a provided in the rear plate part 2592, and the front part provided in the front plate part 2593 is displayed. The luminous decoration of the plate recess 2595b can make it look like it is shining, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the big winning opening 2005, and the movement of the game ball B can be entertained, and the interest in the game can be obtained. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the rear plate convex portion 2594a of the rear plate portion 2592 and the front plate convex portion 2594b of the front plate portion 2593 are provided alternately (staggered) in the circulation direction of the game ball B, as described above, , The luminous decoration of the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b can strongly attract the attention of the player to the big prize winning port 2005, and the circulation speed of the game ball B is greatly reduced in the vicinity of the big prize winning port 2005. , and it is possible to lengthen the residence time of the game ball B on the big winning opening door 2413 . As a result, at the timing when the large winning opening 2005 becomes easy to win by the movement of the large winning opening door 2413, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited as to whether or not the game ball B wins, thereby amusing the player. can be suppressed.

Further, in the attacker unit 2400, the base plate 2431 has a rear plate recess 2595a behind the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2432 has a front plate recess 2595b behind the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, the weight of the rear plate recessed portion 2595a and the front plate recessed portion 2595b can be reduced compared to the case where recesses are not provided in each of them, and the weight of the attacker unit 2400 can be reduced. Such costs can be reduced. In addition, since the attacker unit 2400 can be made lighter, it becomes possible to omit the reinforcement required in the conventional pachinko machine, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the center accessory 2500, the flange portion 2511b has a rear plate recess 2595a behind the rear plate protrusion 2594a, and the front plate 2571 has a front plate recess 2595b behind the front plate protrusion 2594b. Therefore, the weight can be reduced by the amount of the rear plate recess 2595a and the front plate recess 2595b compared to the case where the recesses are not provided in each, and the weight of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced. The cost of the item 2500 can be reduced. In addition, since the weight of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced, it becomes possible to dispense with the reinforcement required in the conventional pachinko machine, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[15-19. 19th technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-19a. Background of the 19th technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a winning device such as an attacker unit having a movable piece movable between an easy winning state in which game balls can easily enter a winning opening and an impossible winning state in which winning is impossible is provided. What is provided is known (Patent Document A19: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-118989). In the technique of Patent Document A19, an LED board is provided behind the prize winning opening so that the player can be entertained by the lighting mode of the LED of the LED board. However, in the conventional technology such as Patent Document A19, since the LEDs simply light up, some players may get tired of looking at them early, lose interest in the prize winning openings, and lose interest in the game. there were.

Therefore, in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, the following means aims to provide a gaming machine that can entertain the player by attracting the player's interest to the prize winning opening and suppress the decline in interest. be.

[15-19b. Solution for the 19th technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game machine having a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side,
The game area has a winning port for awarding a privilege to a player by winning a game ball,
a movable piece that switches the state of the winning opening between an easy-winning state and a non-winning state;
a convex portion formed on the upstream side of the movable piece and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
with
A concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the concave portion.”
characterized by being

Here, the "winning opening" includes a "starting winning opening (second starting opening) where a small number of game balls are paid out and a lottery for special symbols is performed by winning a game ball", and "a large number of winning openings for game balls". A large prize winning port where game balls are paid out”, “a special prize winning port that can supply the winning game balls to the V winning port or the losing port while paying out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball wins”, etc. is mentioned.

Also, the "protrusion" may be any shape that can affect the flow speed of the game ball when it contacts the ball. , “quadrilateral”, “polygons such as pentagons and hexagons”, “undefined shapes by free-form curves”, and the like.

Further, the "concave portion" may be a concave shape, and examples thereof include "a shape similar to the shape of the convex portion" and "a shape different from the shape of the convex portion". In addition, it is desirable that the "concave portion" has a curved surface or a plurality of flat surfaces with different angles, so that light can be reflected in various directions.

Further, the "projections and recesses" include "provided on a thin plate-like rear plate portion (e.g., flange portion, base plate, etc.) extending along the front surface of the game board", "game Those provided on a thin plate-shaped front plate portion (for example, front plate) that is arranged in front of the plate and forms a space between the game plate and the game plate so that game balls can circulate”, “Along the front surface of the game plate A space through which game balls can flow is formed between a thin plate-like rear plate portion (for example, a flange portion, a base plate, etc.) extending from the rear plate portion and the rear plate portion disposed in front of the rear plate portion. provided on both a thin plate-shaped front plate portion (for example, front plate), and the like.

According to the configuration of means 1, the game machine is provided with a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side, and the game area includes a prize winning port for awarding a privilege to a player by winning a game ball. a movable piece for switching the state of the winning opening between an easy-to-win state and an impossible-to-win state; is provided with a concave portion so that decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the concave portion (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [11-8e. Section 2590, see the description of FIG. 139, etc.).

According to this configuration, the convex portion that affects the flow speed of the game ball is provided on the upstream side of the movable piece that switches the winning opening provided in the game area through which the game ball circulates between the easy winning state and the impossible winning state. In addition, since the concave portion that reflects the decorative light is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the decorative light can be reflected by the concave portion, so that the vicinity of the movable piece can be decorated with light emission by the reflected light. . Since this luminous decoration is the light reflected by the concave portion, it is possible to present a luminous decoration that is completely different from the direct light from the conventional LED, and directs the player's attention to the movable piece and, by extension, to the prize winning opening. be able to. In addition, since the convex portion having the concave portion on the back side is provided on the upstream side of the movable piece and can affect the flow speed of the game ball, it slows down the circulation speed of the game ball. It is possible to make it easier to see the game balls flowing toward the movable piece (winning hole). Further, since the convex portion is provided on the upstream side of the movable piece, for example, it is possible to lengthen the residence time of the game ball on the movable piece. As described above, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the winning opening by the reflected light of the concave portion, and the movement of the movable piece brings the winning opening into an easy-to-win state by the player's attention to the winning opening. Whether or not the game ball wins at certain timing can make the player nervous and excited, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, when viewed from the front, a more complicated shape can be seen due to the shape of the convex portion and the shape of the concave portion, compared to the case where only the convex portion is provided. As a result, the shape acts as a decoration, so that the appearance of the member provided with the convex portion and the concave portion can be improved.

Furthermore, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the weight of the member provided with the convex portion and the concave portion can be reduced compared to the case where the concave portion is not provided, and the weight can be reduced. , the cost of the member provided with the protrusion and the recess can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the weight of the member in which the convex portion and the concave portion are provided, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement, which is required in conventional game machines, and suppress the increase in the cost of the game machine. can be made

Means 2: In the game machine,
"A game machine having a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side,
The game area has a winning port for awarding a privilege to a player by winning a game ball,
a movable piece that switches the state of the winning opening between an easy-winning state and a non-winning state;
a convex portion formed on the downstream side of the movable piece and affecting the flow speed of the game ball;
with
A concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the concave portion.”
characterized by being

Here, the "winning opening" includes a "starting winning opening (second starting opening) where a small number of game balls are paid out and a lottery for special symbols is performed by winning a game ball", and "a large number of winning openings for game balls". A large prize winning port where game balls are paid out”, “a special prize winning port that can supply the winning game balls to the V winning port or the losing port while paying out a predetermined number of game balls when the game ball wins”, etc. is mentioned.

Also, the "protrusion" may be any shape that can affect the flow speed of the game ball when it contacts the ball. , “quadrilateral”, “polygons such as pentagons and hexagons”, “undefined shapes by free-form curves”, and the like.

Further, the "concave portion" may be a concave shape, and examples thereof include "a shape similar to the shape of the convex portion" and "a shape different from the shape of the convex portion". In addition, it is desirable that the "concave portion" has a curved surface or a plurality of flat surfaces with different angles, so that light can be reflected in various directions.

Further, the "projections and recesses" include "provided on a thin plate-like rear plate portion (e.g., flange portion, base plate, etc.) extending along the front surface of the game board", "game Those provided on a thin plate-shaped front plate portion (for example, front plate) that is arranged in front of the plate and forms a space between the game plate and the game plate so that game balls can circulate”, “Along the front surface of the game plate A space through which game balls can flow is formed between a thin plate-like rear plate portion (for example, a flange portion, a base plate, etc.) extending from the rear plate portion and the rear plate portion disposed in front of the rear plate portion. provided on both a thin plate-shaped front plate portion (for example, front plate), and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 2, the game machine is provided with a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side, and the game area has a prize winning port for awarding a privilege to a player by winning a game ball. a movable piece for switching the state of the winning opening between an easy-to-win state and an impossible-to-win state; is provided with a concave portion so that decorative light can be reflected on the surface of the concave portion ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], chapter [11-8e. Edge passage portion 2517b, see the description of FIG. 137, etc.).

According to this configuration, the convex portion that affects the flow speed of the game ball is provided on the downstream side of the movable piece that switches the winning opening provided in the game area through which the game ball circulates between the easy winning state and the impossible winning state. In addition, since the concave portion that reflects the decorative light is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the decorative light can be reflected by the concave portion, so that the vicinity of the movable piece can be decorated with light emission by the reflected light. . Since this luminous decoration is the light reflected by the concave portion, it is possible to present a luminous decoration that is completely different from the direct light from the conventional LED, and directs the player's attention to the movable piece and, by extension, to the prize winning opening. be able to.

In addition, since the convex portion is provided on the downstream side of the movable piece, the convex portion and the concave portion are positioned downstream of the winning opening in the game area, and another winning opening is located downstream of the movable piece. is provided, the part between the winning opening with the movable piece and another winning opening is decorated with light by the concave portion, so that the player's attention can be directed to both winning openings. . Even if the game ball does not enter the winning hole with the movable piece, it may enter another winning hole on the downstream side, so that the player can continue to be entertained. At this time, since the convex part having the recessed part on the back side is provided upstream of another winning hole, the circulation speed of the game ball circulating toward the different winning hole by the convex part can be decelerated and slowed down, and the expectation for winning a prize in another prize opening can be heightened.

Furthermore, since the convex portion is provided downstream of the movable piece, when the convex portion and the concave portion are provided inside the winning opening, the winning opening can be illuminated and decorated by the light reflected by the concave portion. The player's attention to the winning opening can be strongly attracted to the winning opening, and whether or not the game ball wins at the timing when the winning opening becomes easy to win due to the movement of the movable piece. It is possible to make the player feel nervous and excited, to entertain the player, and to suppress the decline in interest. In addition, when a convex portion having a concave portion on the back side is provided inside the winning opening, the convex portion slows down the circulation speed of the game balls that have entered the winning opening, thereby making it difficult to damage (the inside of) the winning opening. can do.

In addition, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, when viewed from the front, a more complicated shape can be seen due to the shape of the convex portion and the shape of the concave portion, compared to the case where only the convex portion is provided. As a result, the shape acts as a decoration, so that the appearance of the member provided with the convex portion and the concave portion can be improved.

Furthermore, since the concave portion is provided on the back side of the convex portion, the weight of the member provided with the convex portion and the concave portion can be reduced compared to the case where the concave portion is not provided, and the weight can be reduced. , the cost of the member provided with the protrusion and the recess can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the weight of the member in which the convex portion and the concave portion are provided, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement, which is required in conventional game machines, and suppress the increase in the cost of the game machine. can be made

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"A decorative member is provided on the back side of the convex portion, and the concave portion cannot be touched by the decorative member."
characterized by being

Here, the "decorative member" includes a "sheet-shaped decorative seal with a predetermined decoration", a "plate-shaped decorative panel with a predetermined decoration", and a "decorative member with a predetermined decoration". "decorative sheet or decorative cell with three-dimensional decoration", "decorative body with three-dimensional decoration", and the like.

In addition, "not touchable" may be a configuration in which the fingers of an operator or the like cannot touch the concave portion, and "the back side surface of the convex portion and the decorative member are in contact with each other and a gap is provided between them." "No fingers can be inserted even if there is a gap between the back side of the convex part and the decorative member (the gap is large enough to prevent the finger from entering)", "Convex There is a gap large enough for a finger to fit between the back side of the part and the decorative member, but the outer circumference is surrounded by the decorative member or another member so that the finger cannot enter the gap.” , etc.

By the way, in the case of providing a concave portion on the back side of the convex portion, if the inside of the concave portion is soiled by the operator's finger touching the inner surface of the concave portion during the manufacturing of the game machine, the appearance deteriorates. In addition, if the inside of the recess becomes dirty, it takes time to wipe off the dirt because it is recessed, so it is necessary to work carefully so that the recess does not become dirty, which unnecessarily lengthens the work time and increases the cost. There is fear.

According to the configuration of means 3, the game machine is provided with a decorative member on the back side of the convex portion, and the concave portion is made impossible to touch by the decorative member (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the decorative member 2435).

According to this configuration, in the vicinity of the movable piece that switches the winning opening between the easy winning state and the impossible winning state, it is provided on the back side of the convex portion that changes the flowing direction of the game ball or affects the flowing speed. Since the decorative light can be reflected by the concave portion, the vicinity of the movable piece (award-winning opening) can be illuminated with the reflected light. Since this luminous decoration is the light reflected by the concave portion, it is possible to present a luminous decoration that is completely different from the direct light from the conventional LED, and directs the player's attention to the movable piece and, by extension, to the prize winning opening. be able to. At this time, since the concave portion is made non-touchable by the decorative member, the concave portion is not soiled by the operator's finger touching the concave portion during manufacturing of the game machine, and the decorative light can be well reflected in the concave portion. , and the decorative effect of the luminous decoration can be exhibited reliably. And, since the convex portion provided with the concave portion on the back side can affect the flow speed of the game ball, the flowing direction of the game ball can be directed to the winning opening (movable piece), or the winning opening (movable piece ), it is possible to decelerate the flow speed of the game ball. As described above, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the winning opening by the reflected light of the concave portion, and the movement of the movable piece brings the winning opening into an easy-to-win state by the player's attention to the winning opening. Whether or not the game ball wins at certain timing can make the player nervous and excited, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Moreover, in addition to the decoration by the shape of the projection and the shape of the recess, the decoration is also made by the decorative member, so that the appearance of the member provided with the projection and the recess can be improved.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"It further comprises a thin-plate-shaped passage plate portion extending parallel to the game board, and the passage plate portion is provided with the convex portion and the concave portion."
characterized by being

Here, the "passage plate portion" includes "a rear plate portion (for example, a flange portion, a base plate, etc.) extending along the front surface of the game board", and a "positioned in front of the game board and connected to the game board." A front plate portion (e.g., front plate) in which a space is formed between which game balls can flow, "a rear plate portion extending along the front surface of the game board (e.g., a flange portion, a base plate, etc. ) and a front plate portion (for example, a front plate) arranged in front of the rear plate portion and forming a space between the rear plate portion and through which game balls can flow.

According to the configuration of means 4, the gaming machine further comprises a thin-plate-shaped passage plate portion extending parallel to the game plate, and the passage plate portion is provided with projections and recesses. Embodiments], see the description regarding the rear plate portion 2592 and the front plate portion 2593).

According to this configuration, when the passage plate portion provided with the convex portion and the recessed portion is the rear plate portion (flange portion or base plate) provided along the game plate, it is positioned behind the circulating game ball. Since the convex part and the concave part are provided, and the concave part reflects the decorative light and is decorated with light emission, the player's interest is strongly attracted to the winning opening, and the game ball circulating in front is caused by the light emission decoration. can be seen in a silhouette form, and the movement of the game ball can be made more visible. On the other hand, when the passage plate portion provided with the convex portion and the concave portion is the front plate portion (front plate) provided along the game plate, the convex portion and the concave portion are provided in front of the game balls in circulation. As a result, since the concave portion is decorated with light by reflecting decorative light, the reflected light from the concave portion provided in front of the game ball in circulation makes the game ball look like it is sparkling. The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the winning opening. Further, the passage plate portion provided with the convex portion and the concave portion is arranged between the rear plate portion extending along the front surface of the game board and the rear plate portion disposed in front of the rear plate portion so that the game balls can flow. In the case of both the front plate part in which a space is formed, and the convex part and the concave part are provided in front and behind the circulating game balls, the luminous decoration of the concave part provided in the rear plate part While the game ball looks like a silhouette, it can be made to look as if it is shining by the luminous decoration of the concave part provided on the front plate part, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the winning hole and the game ball can be played. The movement of the ball can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, the passage plate portion provided with the convex portion and the concave portion is arranged between the rear plate portion extending along the front surface of the game board and the rear plate portion arranged in front of the rear plate portion so that the game balls can flow. and a front plate portion in which a space is formed, and on the upstream side of the movable piece, the convex portion of the rear plate portion and the convex portion of the front plate portion are alternately arranged in the direction of circulation of the game ball. When provided in a zigzag pattern, as described above, the luminous decoration of the concave portion can strongly attract the player's attention to the winning opening, and the circulation speed of the game balls can be greatly reduced in the vicinity of the winning opening. It is possible to lengthen the residence time of the game ball on the movable piece. As a result, at the timing when the winning opening becomes easy to win due to the movement of the movable piece, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited as to whether or not the game ball wins, thereby entertaining the player and suppressing the decline in interest. can be done.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"A plurality of the convex portions are provided, and some of them have a specific convex portion on the back side of which the concave portion is not provided."
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, a plurality of convex portions are provided, and a specific convex portion having no concave portion is provided on the back side of some of them ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] Then, see the description regarding the specific convex portion 2596).

According to this configuration, some of the plurality of protrusions have specific protrusions that do not have recesses on the back side. In other words, a convex portion having a concave portion on the back side and a convex portion having no concave portion on the back side (specific convex portion) are mixed. As a result, since decoration light cannot be reflected on the back side of the specific convex portion unlike the concave portion, the aspect of the luminous decoration can be made different between the convex portion portion and the specific convex portion portion.

In addition, since the convex portion having the concave portion on the back side and the specific convex portion having no concave portion on the back side have different shapes when viewed from the front, compared to the case where only a plurality of convex portions having concave portions on the back side are provided. , you can change the decoration visible from the front.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can entertain a player by attracting the player's interest to the prize winning opening and suppress the decline in interest.

[15-19d. Characteristic effects of the 19th technical feature]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 of the second embodiment is the game board of the above solving means, the second start opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005 in this embodiment are the winning openings of the above solving means, The second starting entrance door 2411 and the big winning entrance door 2413 are the movable pieces of the above solving means, and the base plate 2431, the front plate 2432, the flange portion 2511b, and the front plate 2571 in this embodiment are the passage plate portion of the above solving means. The attacker decoration substrate 2433, the decoration member 2435, and the front decoration portion 2572 in the embodiment respectively correspond to the decoration members of the above solution.

In addition, the convex portion 2594, the rear plate convex portion 2594a, and the front plate convex portion 2594b in this embodiment are the convex portions of the above solving means, and the concave portion 2595, the rear plate concave portion 2595a, and the front plate concave portion 2595b in this embodiment are the above solving means. , respectively.

[15-19d. Characteristic effects of the 19th technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the large winning opening 2005 provided in the game area 5a through which the game ball B circulates is upstream of the large winning opening door 2413 that switches between the easy winning state and the impossible winning state. Since the convex portion 2594 that affects the flow speed of the game ball B is provided and the concave portion 2595 that reflects the decorative light is provided on the back side of the convex portion 2594, the decorative light can be reflected by the concave portion 2595. Therefore, the vicinity of the big winning entrance door 2413 can be illuminated with the reflected light. Since this luminous decoration is light reflected by the recessed portion 2595, it is possible to present a luminous decoration that is completely different from that of direct light from LEDs as in the prior art. It can be directed to the winning opening 2005 . In addition, the convex portion 2594 having the concave portion 2595 provided on the back side is provided on the upstream side of the big winning opening door 2413 and can affect the flow speed of the game ball B. The circulation speed can be slowed down to make it easier to see the game balls B flowing toward the big winning opening door 2413 (big winning opening 2005). Further, since the convex portion 2594 is provided on the upstream side of the big winning opening door 2413, it is possible to lengthen the residence time of the game ball B on the big winning opening door 2413. For this reason, the reflected light of the concave portion 2595 can strongly attract the player's attention to the large winning opening 2005, and the player's attention to the large winning opening 2005 allows the movement of the large winning opening door 2413. Therefore, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited as to whether or not the game ball B wins at the timing when the big winning hole 2005 is in the winning easy state, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005 provided in the game area 5a through which the game ball B circulates is switched between the easy winning state and the non-winning state. On the downstream side of the starting door 2411 or the big prize winning door 2413, a convex portion 2594 that affects the flow speed of the game ball B is provided, and a concave portion 2595 that reflects decorative light is provided on the back side of the convex portion 2594. Since the recessed part 2595 can reflect the decorative light, the reflected light causes the vicinity of the second start door 2411 (second start port 2004) and the vicinity of the large prize winning door 2413 (large prize winning port 2005). Can be decorated with luminescence. Since this luminous decoration is light reflected by the concave portion 2595, it is possible to present a luminous decoration that is completely different from the conventional direct light from the LED, and attracts the attention of the player to the second start door 2411 and the big prize. The entrance door 2413, and by extension, can be directed to the second starting opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005 winning opening.

In addition, since the convex portion 2594 is provided on the downstream side of the second start opening door 2411 or the large winning opening door 2413, the convex portion 2594 and the concave portion 2595 are arranged in the second starting opening 2004 or the large winning opening in the game area 5a. 2005, furthermore, another winning opening (for example, normal winning opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, big winning opening 2005 , etc.), the part between the second starting opening door 2411 or the second starting opening door 2413 or the second starting opening 2005 with the big winning opening door 2413 and another winning opening is It is decorated with light emission, and the player's attention can be directed to both winning openings. And even if the game ball B does not enter the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005 with the second starting opening door 2411 or the big winning opening door 2413, there is a possibility of winning another winning opening on the downstream side. and can continue to entertain players. At this time, since the convex portion 2594 having the concave portion 2595 provided on the back side is provided on the upstream side of another winning hole, the game ball B circulating toward the other winning hole by the convex portion The circulation speed of the money can be slowed down, and the expectation for winning a prize to another prize winning port can be heightened.

Furthermore, since the convex portion 2594 is provided downstream of the second starting opening door 2411 or the big winning opening door 2413, the convex portion 2594 and the concave portion 2595 are placed inside the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005. When provided, the second starting port 2004 or the big prize winning port 2005 can be illuminated and decorated by the light reflected by the concave portion 2595, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the second starting port 2004 or the big prize winning port 2005. At the same time, when the player pays attention to the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005, the movement of the second starting opening door 2411 or the big winning opening door 2413 causes the second starting opening 2004 or the big winning opening 2005 to enter the winning easy state. At this timing, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited as to whether or not the game ball B wins a prize, so that the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, when a convex portion 2594 having a concave portion 2595 provided on the back side is provided inside the second start port 2004 or the big winning port 2005, the game ball that has won the second starting port 2004 or the big winning port 2005 by the convex portion 2594 By slowing down the flow speed of B, it is possible to make the second starting port 2004 or the big prize winning port 2005 less likely to be damaged.

Further, since the recessed portion 2595 cannot be touched by the decorative member 2435, the front decorative portion 2572, and the like, the recessed portion 2595 is prevented from being soiled by the operator's finger touching the recessed portion 2595 during manufacturing of the pachinko machine 1. , the decorative light can be reflected well, and the decorative effect of the luminous decoration can be exhibited reliably. And, since the convex portion 2594 provided with the concave portion 2595 on the back side can affect the flowing speed of the game ball B, the second starting port 2004 or the big winning port 2005 (the second starting port door 2411 or the large It is possible to decelerate the flow speed of the game ball B in the vicinity of the winning opening door 2413). For this reason, the reflected light of the concave portion 2595 can strongly attract the player's attention to the second starting port 2004 or the big winning port 2005, and the player can press the second starting port 2004 or the big winning port 2005. By paying attention, whether or not the game ball B wins at the timing when the second start opening 2004 or the large winning opening 2005 becomes easy to win due to the movement of the second starting opening door 2411 or the large winning opening door 2413 It is possible to make the player feel nervous and excited, entertain the player, and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition to decoration by the shape of the convex portion 2594 and the shape of the concave portion 2595, the decorative member 2435 or the like is used for decoration, so that the appearance of the member provided with the convex portion 2594 and the concave portion 2595 can be improved. .

Furthermore, before a space is formed between the rear plate portion 2592 provided along the front surface of the game panel 1100 and the rear plate portion 2592 arranged in front of the rear plate portion 2592 so that the game balls B can flow. Both the plate portion 2593 and the convex portion 2594 and the concave portion 2595 are provided, and the convex portion 2594 and the concave portion 2595 are provided in front and behind the game ball B in circulation. While the luminous decoration of the rear plate recess 2595a provided on the front plate 2593 makes the game ball B look like a silhouette, the luminous decoration of the front plate recess 2595b provided on the front plate 2593 makes it look like it is shining. 's interest can be strongly attracted to the big winning hole 2005, the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, on the upstream side of the big winning opening door 2413, the rear plate convex portion 2594a and the front plate convex portion 2594b of the front plate portion 2593 are provided alternately (staggered) with respect to the circulation direction of the game ball B. As described above, the luminous decoration of the rear plate concave portion 2595a and the front plate concave portion 2595b can strongly attract the player's attention to the big winning hole 2005, and the circulation speed of the game ball B in the vicinity of the big winning hole 2005 can be increased. can be greatly decelerated, and the staying time of the game ball B on the big winning opening door 2413 can be lengthened. As a result, at the timing when the large winning opening 2005 becomes easy to win by the movement of the large winning opening door 2413, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited as to whether or not the game ball B wins, thereby amusing the player. can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since the concave portion 2595 is provided on the back side of the convex portion 2594, the weight can be reduced by the concave portion 2595 as compared with the case where the concave portion is not provided, and the convex portion 2594 and the concave portion 2595 are provided. The weight of the member can be reduced, and the cost of the member provided with the convex portion 2594 and the concave portion 2595 can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the weight of the member provided with the convex portion 2594 and the concave portion 2595, it is possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that is required in the conventional pachinko machine, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. increase can be suppressed.

[15-20. 20th technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-20a. Background of the 20th technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, it is known to provide a plurality of convex portions in order to reduce the flow speed of the game ball in the area where the game ball flows (for example, Patent Document A20: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-2017). 196204). However, in the conventional technique such as Patent Document A20, although it is possible to slow down the flow speed of the game ball, since the protrusions with the same amount of projection are lined up, the movement of the game ball is monotonous. , and it was not something that could entertain players.

Therefore, in view of the above circumstances, the following means provide a game machine that can entertain the movement of the game ball while reducing the flow speed of the game ball.

[15-20b. Solution for the 20th technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game machine having a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side,
The game board has an opening penetrating back and forth,
The opening is provided with a center accessory,
The center role is
a peripheral wall portion extending forward from the game board and preventing game balls from entering the inside of the opening;
an extending portion extending outside the peripheral wall portion in a front view;
a flow-down region provided outside the peripheral wall portion where game balls flow down;
with
In the flow-down region, there are a first convex portion projecting forward from the game plate and having a front surface on which game balls flow down, and a second convex portion further projecting from the front surface of the first convex portion and affecting the circulation of game balls. We have set up a department and
characterized by being

Here, the "first convex portion" includes "a front surface protruding forward that is smooth and flat", "a front surface protruding forward that is flat and has fine unevenness by embossing or the like", and the like. is mentioned. Further, as the first convex portion, the first concave portion recessed forward may be provided on the back side, or the first concave portion recessed on the back side may not be provided. Furthermore, it is desirable that the first convex portion has a size of one or more game balls in the circulation direction of the game balls.

In addition, the "second convex part" may be any shape as long as it can affect the flow speed of the game ball by contacting it, and the cross-sectional shape of the side surface is "semicircular", "triangular", " trapezoid", "quadrilateral", "polygons such as pentagons and hexagons", "undefined shapes by free-form curves", and the like. Further, as the second convex portion, only one may be provided on the first convex portion, or a plurality of the second convex portions may be provided on the first convex portion. It may be provided as follows. The second convex portion may have a size that allows the game ball to climb over it, or may have a size that the game ball cannot climb over. Furthermore, as the second convex portion, the second concave portion recessed forward may be provided on the back side, or the second concave portion recessed on the back side may not be provided.

Furthermore, the "first convex portion and second convex portion" may be provided in the downflow area of the game ball, or may be provided in the extension portion (for example, the flange portion) of the center accessory. , may be provided at a location different from the extending portion of the center accessory. Further, as the extending portion, a front plate may be provided with a gap in front of which the game balls can flow, or the front plate may not be provided.

According to the configuration of means 1, the game machine is provided with a game board provided with a game area in which game balls circulate on the front side, the game board has an opening penetrating back and forth, and the opening has a A center function is provided, and the center function extends forward from the game board, and extends to the outside of the peripheral wall portion in a front view and the peripheral wall portion that prevents the entry of game balls into the inside of the opening. and a downward flow area provided outside the peripheral wall for the game balls to flow down. A convex portion and a second convex portion that further protrudes from the front surface of the first convex portion and affects the circulation of game balls are provided ([Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], [11 -8e-4. Another embodiment of passageway decoration section], passageway decoration section 2590A, see descriptions of FIGS. 144 to 146, etc.).

According to this configuration, since the first convex portion that affects the circulation speed of the game ball is provided in the flow area where the game ball flows down in the center accessory, the game ball is placed on the stage at the upstream end of the first convex portion. As the ball comes into contact with the ball, the presence of the first protrusion reduces the front-rear depth of the front side of the first protrusion, so that the circulation speed of the game ball can be reduced and the game ball can be easily seen. Furthermore, since the second convex portion is provided on the front surface of the first convex portion, by contacting the first convex portion and further contacting the second convex portion, the circulation speed of the game ball is further increased. By decelerating the speed, the movement of the game ball can be easily seen, and the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball.

In addition, when the game ball hits the first convex part or the second convex part, the game ball bounces forward and collides with the front glass or front plate, so the collision sound attracts the attention of the player. It can be directed to the part of the first convex part, and the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed by making the first convex part and the second convex part pay attention to the game ball in circulation. Incidentally, when only the glass is provided in front of the first convex portion, the collision sound of the game ball becomes louder, so that the player's attention can be further directed to the first convex portion. Also, even if the front plate is provided in front of the first convex portion, the same effect as described above can be achieved by making the front plate such that a sound is produced when the game ball collides with the front plate.

In addition, since the second protrusion is provided on the front surface of the first protrusion, when viewed from the front, compared to the case where only the first protrusion or the second protrusion is provided, the shape of the first protrusion and the shape of the second convex portion, a complicated shape can be seen, and the shape acts as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, it is desirable that the first concave portion is provided on the back side of the first convex portion. As a result, since the first concave portion is provided on the back side of the first convex portion, when viewed from the front, the shape of the first convex portion and the shape of the first convex portion are different from the case where only the first convex portion is provided. A complicated shape can be seen due to the shape of one recess, and the shape acts as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced and the appearance of the center accessory can be improved.

Moreover, as described above, when the first concave portion is provided on the back side of the first convex portion, it is desirable that the decorative light can be reflected by the surface of the second concave portion. As a result, the decorative light can be reflected by the first concave portion on the back side of the first convex portion, so that the first convex portion can be decorated with light from behind by the reflected light. The game ball flowing down the part can be seen in a silhouette shape, and the movement of the game ball can be made easier to see. Therefore, the player can enjoy the motion of the game ball flowing down the flow-down area, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

Moreover, it is desirable that the size of the first convex portion in the distribution direction of the game ball is larger than one game ball. As a result, it is possible to secure to some extent an area where the depth in the front-rear direction is narrow and the game ball can be decelerated in the downflow area of the game ball, and a plurality of second protrusions are provided in the first protrusion. Therefore, while the circulation speed of the game ball is sufficiently reduced by the first convex portion, various movements can be imparted to the game ball by the plurality of second convex portions, making the movement of the game ball more enjoyable. It is possible to provide a game machine that can be played.

Means 2: In the game machine,
"A first concave portion is provided on the back side of the first convex portion"
characterized by being

Here, the "first concave portion" may have a concave shape that is substantially similar to the convex shape of the first convex portion, or may have a concave shape that is completely different from the convex shape of the first convex portion. Further, examples of the concave shape of the first concave portion include an arrow shape, a star shape, a geometric pattern shape, a letter shape, a character shape, and the like. Further, the first concave portion may be capable of reflecting decorative light, or may be textured.

According to the configuration of means 2, the first concave portion is provided on the back side of the first convex portion (see the description of the first concave portion 2595e in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, since the first concave portion is provided on the back side of the first convex portion, when viewed from the front, compared to the case where only the first convex portion is provided, the first convex portion is A complicated shape can be seen by the shape and the shape of the first concave portion, and the shape acts as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced and the appearance of the center accessory can be improved.

In addition, since the first concave portion is provided on the back side of the first convex portion, the weight of the center accessory can be reduced compared to the case where the first concave portion is not provided, and the weight can be reduced. The cost for center accessories can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the weight of the center accessory, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that is required in conventional gaming machines, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The first convex part
It has the size of one game ball or more in the direction of circulation of game balls.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 3, the first convex portion has a size of one or more game balls in the direction of circulation of game balls (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], the first convex portion (see discussion of section 2594c).

According to this configuration, since the first convex portion is the size of one or more game balls in the direction of circulation of the game balls, the depth in the front-rear direction is narrow in the flowing-down area of the game balls, and the game balls can be decelerated. It is possible to secure a certain amount of the region where the second protrusion is provided, and to provide a plurality of the second protrusions in the first protrusion. As a result, while the circulation speed of the game ball is sufficiently reduced by the first convex portion, various movements can be imparted to the game ball by the plurality of second convex portions, thereby making the movement of the game ball more enjoyable. It is possible to provide a game machine that is possible.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The surface on the back side of the first convex portion can reflect decorative light."
characterized by being

Here, in order to reflect the decorative light, a second concave portion that reflects the decorative light may be provided on the back side of the first convex portion, or a sheet with high reflectance may be provided on the back side of the first convex portion. .

According to the configuration of means 4, the decorative light can be reflected by the back surface of the first convex portion (see the description of the first concave portion 2595e in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, since the first convex portion that affects the circulation speed of the game ball is provided in the flow area where the game ball flows down in the center accessory, the game ball is placed on the stage at the upstream end of the first convex portion. Since the ball abuts and the presence of the first convex portion reduces the depth in the front-rear direction on the front side of the first convex portion, the circulation speed of the game ball can be reduced. Furthermore, since the second convex portion is provided on the front surface of the first convex portion, by contacting the first convex portion and further contacting the second convex portion, the circulation speed of the game ball is further increased. It can be decelerated, and the movement of the game ball can be easily seen. At this time, since the decorative light can be reflected on the back surface of the first convex portion, the first convex portion can be decorated with light from behind by the reflected light. The game ball flowing down can be seen in a silhouette shape, and the movement of the game ball can be made more visible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the motion of the game ball flowing down the flow-down area, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, in the flow-down region where the game ball flows down in the center role, the decoration light can be reflected on the back side of the first convex portion that affects the circulation speed of the game ball, so the game ball circulates due to the reflected light. The downflow area can be decorated with light. Therefore, in spite of the fact that the flow-down area provided in the center accessory is not provided with a ostentatious decoration like a conventional game machine, the flow-down area is decorated with light, so that the player can enjoy it. To provide a highly appealing game machine capable of strongly attracting a player's interest by allowing the player to recognize that the game machine is equipped with decorations completely different from those of the conventional game machines. can be done.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
"A second recess is provided on the back side of the second protrusion"
characterized by being

Here, the "second recess" may be a recess, and examples thereof include "a shape similar to the shape of the second protrusion" and "a shape different from the shape of the second protrusion". Also, the "second concave portion" may be one that can reflect decorative light.

According to the configuration of means 5, the second concave portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion (see the description regarding the second concave portion 2595f in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention]).

According to this configuration, since the second concave portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion, when viewed from the front, compared to the case where only the second convex portion is provided, the second convex portion is A complicated shape can be seen by the shape and the shape of the second concave portion, and the shape acts as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced and the appearance of the center accessory can be improved.

In addition, since the second concave portion is provided on the back side of the second convex portion, the weight of the center accessory can be reduced compared to the case where the second concave portion is not provided, and the weight can be reduced. The cost for center accessories can be reduced. In addition, since it is possible to reduce the weight of the center accessory, it becomes possible to eliminate the need for reinforcement that is required in conventional gaming machines, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the gaming machine.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a game machine that allows the user to enjoy the movement of the game ball while slowing down the flow speed of the game ball.

[15-20c. Relationship between the solution means of the 20th technical feature and the embodiment]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 of the second embodiment is the game board of the above solving means, and the flange portion 2511b and the rear plate portion 2592 of the center accessory 2500 in this embodiment are the extending portions of the above solving means. The inflow restricting portion 2511c in the embodiment is the peripheral wall portion of the solution, the ball passage 2591 in the present embodiment is the flow-down area of the solution, and the first protrusion 2594c in the embodiment is the first protrusion of the solution. , the second convex portion 2594d in this embodiment corresponds to the second convex portion of the above solving means, the first concave portion 2595e in this embodiment corresponds to the first concave portion of the above solving means, and the second concave portion 2595f in this embodiment corresponds to the above solving means. Each corresponds to a second recess of the means.

[15-20d. Characteristic effects of the 20th technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball passage 2591 through which the game ball B flows down in the center accessory 2500 of the game board 5 of the second embodiment is provided with a first convex portion that affects the circulation speed of the game ball B. 2594c is provided, the game ball B comes into contact with the stage at the upstream end of the first convex portion 2594c, and the presence of the first convex portion 2594c reduces the depth in the front-rear direction on the front side of the first convex portion 2594c. Therefore, the circulation speed of the game ball B can be reduced and the game ball B can be easily seen. Furthermore, since the second convex portion 2594d is provided on the front surface of the first convex portion 2594c, the game ball B , the movement of the game ball B can be easily seen, and the movement of the game ball B can be enjoyed by the player.

In addition, when the game ball B contacts the first convex portion 2594c or the second convex portion 2594d, the game ball bounces forward and collides with the front glass. can be directed to the portion of the first convex portion 2594c, and the first convex portion 2594c and the second convex portion 2594d can be made to pay attention to the game ball B in circulation so that the movement of the game ball can be enjoyed.

In addition, since the second protrusion 2594d is provided on the front surface of the first protrusion 2594c, when viewed from the front, the first protrusion 2594c or the second protrusion 2594d alone is provided. A complicated shape can be seen by the shape of the convex portion 2594c and the shape of the second convex portion 2594d, and the shape acts as decoration, so that the decoration effect can be further enhanced.

Furthermore, since the first concave portion 2595e is provided on the back side of the first convex portion 2594c, when viewed from the front, the first convex portion 2594c is larger than the case where only the first convex portion 2594c is provided. A complicated shape can be seen by the shape and the shape of the first recess 2595e, and the shape acts as a decoration, so that the decorative effect can be further enhanced and the appearance of the center accessory 2500 can be improved.

In addition, since decoration light can be reflected by the first concave portion 2595e on the back side of the first convex portion 2594c, the first convex portion 2594c can be decorated with light from behind by the reflected light. The game ball B flowing down in front of the one convex portion 2594c can be seen in a silhouette shape, and the movement of the game ball B can be made easier to see. Therefore, the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball B flowing down the ball passage 2591, and the decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the size of the first convex portion 2594c in the distribution direction of the game ball B is larger than the size of one game ball B, the depth in the front-rear direction is narrow in the area where the game ball B flows down (the ball passage 2591). While it becomes possible to secure a certain area in which the game ball B can be decelerated, it becomes possible to provide a plurality of second convex portions 2594d in the first convex portion 2594c. Therefore, while the circulation speed of the game ball B is sufficiently reduced by the first convex portion 2594c, various movements can be imparted to the game ball B by the plurality of second convex portions 2594d, and the movement of the game ball B can be further enhanced. It is possible to provide a pachinko machine 1 that can be enjoyed.

In addition, since the first concave portion 2595e and the second concave portion 2595f are provided on the back side of the first convex portion 2594c and the second convex portion 2594d, the central The weight of the accessory 2500 can be reduced, the weight can be reduced, and the cost of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced. In addition, since the weight of the center accessory 2500 can be reduced, it becomes possible to dispense with the reinforcement required in the conventional pachinko machine, and the increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

[15-21. 21st technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-21a. Background of the 21st Technical Features]
In a so-called circulation type (enclosed type) game machine, the game progresses without paying out game balls by increasing or decreasing the number of balls held by an electronic storage means. This has the advantage that the player does not need to touch the game ball. However, on the other hand, since the game progresses without the substance of the game ball, careful consideration is required for the handling of the player's own ball.

In particular, at the end of the game, when the game is settled with the number of balls remaining, the player pays attention to the number of balls remaining, and if there is a discrepancy in the number, the player is likely to feel distrustful.

For example, as in Patent Document A21 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-215033 [paragraphs 0060 and 0061]), a ball feeding detection switch detects that one game ball is supplied from the supply passage to the ball launching unit. In the case of the method of subtracting 1 from the circulating ball number memory (so-called holding ball), even if the player releases the shooting handle and stops shooting, the game ball is not supplied from the ball feeding device onto the shooting rail. If it is put away, even if there is no act of shooting the game ball, the ball possessed by the player is subtracted.

Therefore, in the following means, in view of the above-mentioned actual situation, by matching the number of balls held at the time of settlement with the actual state of the game, distrust of the player is eliminated and the decline in interest of the player due to distrust is reduced. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of

[15-21b. Solution for the 21st technical feature]
Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

Means 1:
"The ball feeding device that sends the game ball to the launch rail operates, and when it is detected that the game ball has been sent to the launch rail, the number of balls held is subtracted, and even if the game ball is launched, it does not reach the game board and is fouled. In a gaming machine that adds the number of held balls when detected by a ball sensor,
When a settlement operation is performed to return the information on the number of balls held to the player,
Without operating the ball feeding device, a game ball is shot so that the game ball does not reach the game board, and when it is detected by the foul ball sensor, the number of held balls is added to the held ball information and then the number of held balls information is returned to the player".

In the above configuration, the ball feeding device that feeds the game ball to the launch rail operates, and when it is detected that the game ball has been delivered to the launch rail, the number of balls held is subtracted, and even if the game ball is launched, it does not reach the game board. In a game machine that adds the number of held balls when a foul ball is detected by the sensor without being detected as a foul ball, when the settlement operation is performed, first, the game ball on the launch rail (the ball is subtracted when it moves onto the launch rail) ) to eliminate it by firing it so that it does not reach the game board when it is fired. As a result, the game ball on the launch rail becomes a foul ball, which is detected by the foul ball sensor and added to the possession ball. By adjusting the added value in this way, the information regarding the game balls that have been subtracted but are not used in the game is consistent with the information about the balls in hand, so that the player does not feel distrustful (for example, [7-4c Settlement processing of pachinko machine of second embodiment], [4-2a. Ball launching unit of second embodiment], [4-6a. Foul unit of embodiment], [7-2a. Possession ball subtraction process of pachinko machine of second embodiment], [7-4b. Launch control process of pachinko machine of second embodiment]).

By the way, when shooting a game ball so that it does not reach the game board, it may be either automatic shooting starting from the checkout operation or manual shooting by the player. Since the player must wait for the player's operation, and it is assumed that the player may forget to operate, it is desirable to automatically and forcibly fire the game starting from the checkout operation.

Also, as a method of shooting game balls so that the game balls do not reach the game board, it may be realized by setting the excitation voltage of the shooting solenoid to be low and shooting weakly. At that time, if the launch rail is long and the launch intensity is weak, the game ball may not fly to the end of the rail and return. When this happens, the game ball cannot be detected by the foul ball sensor. A short firing rail is desirable to prevent such failures. In the present invention, the launch rail has a length on which only one game ball can be placed.

Furthermore, as a method of shooting game balls so that the game balls do not reach the game board, the game balls are ejected to the game board side between the shooting device including the shooting rail and the exit of the game balls to the game board. A foul shutter may be provided to block. It is desirable that this foul shutter appears by being driven in time with the firing when the checkout operation is performed. With this configuration, the foul ball sensor can reliably detect the game ball without weakening the intensity of the shot of the game ball. Here, driving by a motor, driving by a solenoid, or the like can be considered as means for driving the false shutter.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
It is characterized by ``when the settlement operation is performed, the game ball is shot so that the game ball does not reach the game board by setting the excitation voltage of the shooting solenoid to a low value and forcibly shooting the game ball''.

A game machine automatically forcibly shoots a game ball so that the game ball does not reach a game board without depending on a player's operation when the game ball is shot, thereby preventing omission of operation and more surely playing the game ball.例文帳に追加The information about is consistent with the information about the ball you have.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
It is characterized by ``a foul shutter that prevents the game ball from being ejected to the game board side when the settlement operation is performed and the forced shooting is performed''.

If the foul shutter that prevents the game ball from being ejected to the game board when necessary operates in this manner, the information on the game ball will surely match the information on the ball in hand. Furthermore, by closing the foul shutter, the game ball B becomes a foul ball without reciprocating a long distance along the outer rail 1001, thereby shortening the time until the foul ball is detected. In addition, since the game ball can be reliably prevented from being ejected to the game board side by the foul shutter, when the game ball is forcibly shot, the setting of the shooting intensity can be rough, and the development man-hours of the game machine can be reduced. .

[15-21c. Characteristic effects of the 21st technical feature]
In this way, according to the above-described solution means, by matching the number of balls held with the actual state of the game at the time of settlement, it is possible to dispel the distrust of the player and reduce the decline in the interest of the player due to the distrust. It is possible to provide a game machine that

[15-22. 22nd technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-22a. Background of the 22nd technical feature]
In a so-called circulation type (enclosed type) game machine, by increasing or decreasing the number of balls held by an electronic storage means, the game proceeds without paying out game balls. This has the advantage that the player does not need to touch the game ball. However, on the other hand, since the game progresses without the substance of the game ball, careful consideration is required for the handling of the player's own ball. In particular, if the settlement cannot be made at the end of the game, the trust of the hall may be lost.

For example, as in Patent Document A22 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-215033 (paragraphs 0038 to 0040)), in an in-machine circulation pachinko machine in which settlement processing is executed when the return button 75 is operated, the return button 75 malfunctions. Otherwise, the settlement process will not be executed.

Therefore, in view of the above situation, the following solving means aims to provide a game machine capable of performing settlement processing even in an unforeseen situation of the operating unit.

[15-22b. Solution for the 22nd technical feature]
Means 1:
"A game board that is removably supported from the front by a main body frame and has a game area in which a game is played with game balls, and a ball launcher that is provided below the game board and capable of supplying game balls to the game area. means, foul ball recovery means for recovering game balls that have been shot by the ball shooting means but have not been supplied to the game area, and ball shooting means for recovering the game balls shot by the ball shooting means. and ball circulation means for supplying to
A gaming machine in which a game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
a first settlement switch for the player to execute settlement processing of the ball data;
A second settlement switch is provided for the amusement facility manager to execute the settlement processing of the possession ball data.”
It is. (In [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], see the description in the chapter [4-10. Second counting button switch] and Figures 2, 4, 18, 68, etc.)

According to the above means 1, when the first settlement switch operated by the player is broken, the second settlement switch operated by the game facility manager is operated to execute settlement processing. Thereby, even if an unforeseen situation arises in the first settlement switch, the settlement can be made by operating the second settlement switch.

Means 2: In the gaming machine of Means 1,
"While the first checkout switch is provided on the door frame of the game machine so that it can be operated from the front side of the game machine, the second checkout switch can be operated from the back side of the machine with the main frame open. It is operably provided on the rear side of the game machine.” (See the description regarding the first counting button switch 180 and the second counting button switch 180B in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention].)

According to the above means 2, the second payment switch is not for normal use, but for dealing with unforeseen circumstances such as when the first payment switch is broken. is located behind the This can prevent the player from being misled.

Means 3: In the gaming machine of Means 2,
"The second settlement switch is provided so as to be located on the open side of the main body frame from the center of the gaming machine." reference)

According to the above-mentioned means 3, it is provided at a position in front of the open side so that it can be operated without fully opening the body frame when it is operated in front of the player. This makes it possible to quickly respond to requests from players.

Means 4: In the game machine of Means 1 to 3,
"The printed circuit board on which the first adjustment switch and the second adjustment switch are mounted, and the printed circuit board on which the first adjustment switch is mounted and the printed circuit board on which the second adjustment switch is mounted are common." , see the description regarding the first counting button switch 180 and the second counting button switch 180B)

According to the above means 4, the printed circuit board and the like on which the first settlement switch and the second settlement switch are mounted are shared. This can reduce costs.

Means 5: The game machine of Means 1 to 4,
"The surface of the operation part of the second adjustment switch is electrically grounded." [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], see the description regarding the second count button switch 180B)

According to the above means 5, the operating portion of the second payment switch, which is touched by the player or the manager of the gaming facility, is electrically grounded. As a result, it is possible to avoid the risk of the control board malfunctioning due to static electricity accumulated by the player or the game facility manager.

As described above, according to the above solution, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that allows settlement even if an unforeseen situation occurs during the execution of settlement processing.

[15-22c. Relationship between Solution Means of 22nd Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The first count button switch 180 of this embodiment corresponds to the first checkout switch of the above solution, and the second count button switch 180B of this embodiment corresponds to the second checkout switch of the above solution.

[15-22d. Characteristic effects of the 22nd technical feature]
According to this embodiment, when the first counting button switch 180 operated by the player is broken, the second counting button switch 180B operated by the gaming facility manager is operated to execute the settlement process. As a result, even if an unexpected situation occurs in the first counting button switch 180, the second counting button switch 180B can be operated to settle the balance.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the second counting button switch 180B is not for normal use but for dealing with unexpected situations such as when the first counting button switch 108 is broken. It is provided on the back side of the game machine that only people know. This can prevent the player from being misled.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is provided at a position in front of the open side so that it can be operated without fully opening the body frame 4 when operating in front of the player. This makes it possible to quickly respond to requests from players.

Furthermore, according to this embodiment, the printed circuit board and the like on which the first counting button switch 180 and the second counting button switch 180B are mounted are shared. This can reduce costs.

Further, according to this embodiment, the operating portion of the second counting button switch 180B, which is touched by the player or the game facility manager, is electrically grounded. As a result, it is possible to avoid the risk of the control board malfunctioning due to static electricity accumulated by the player or the game facility manager.

[15-23. 23rd technical feature]
This specification has the following technical features different from those described above.

[15-23a. Background of the 23rd technical feature]
As a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a ball shooting means shoots a game ball into a game area based on data of a player's ball holding data, and when the game ball is shot, the shot ball is shot from the ball holding data. It is proposed to add the recovered game ball to the held ball data when it is recovered by the foul ball recovery means without being supplied to the game area even if it is shot by the ball shooting means. (For example, Patent Document 1). According to the technique disclosed in Patent Document 1, it is possible to circulate the game balls in the game machine, thereby reducing the burden on the game hall in which the game machine is installed.

In a gaming machine such as Patent Document A23 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-89489), when the amount of a plurality of game balls stored (enclosed) for circulation exceeds the appropriate range and becomes excessive, the balls Problems such as clogging are more likely to occur. Therefore, when game balls are put in and stored for maintenance or the like, it is necessary to prevent the number of game balls from becoming excessive, which is troublesome.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Accordingly, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine that facilitates replacement and replenishment of enclosed game balls.

[15-23b. Solution for the 23rd technical feature]
Means 1: In the game machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The sphere circulation means is
a ball passage through which game balls circulate;
a passage dividing portion that divides the ball passage into a first passage portion on the downstream side and a second passage portion on the upstream side;
a bridging portion that connects the first passage portion and the second passage portion so as to straddle the passage dividing portion and allows a game ball to roll;
has
When the game ball is supplied from the second passage portion to the first passage portion side through the installation portion in a state where the game ball is filled in the first passage portion, the game ball is released from the installation portion. It comes off and is discharged out of the ball circulation means through the passage dividing portion."
characterized by being

Here, the ``passage dividing portion'' includes ``passing through at least the bottom wall of the ball passage downward'', ``passing through at least one side wall of the ball passage so as to notch'', and the like. mentioned.

In addition, as the ``construction part'', there are ``those whose width is smaller than the diameter of the game ball'', ``those whose width is larger than the diameter of the game ball'', and ``that which connects the first passage part and the second passage part on the upper surface. and the like.

According to the configuration of means 1, a game board having a game area where a game is played with game balls, a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and a game ball shot by the ball shooting means are collected. and a ball circulation means for supplying the ball to the ball shooting means again, wherein the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the data of the ball held by the player converted into data, The ball circulation means includes a ball passage through which game balls circulate, a passage dividing portion that divides the ball passage into a first passage portion on the downstream side and a second passage portion on the upstream side, and a passage dividing portion so as to straddle the passage dividing portion. a bridging portion that connects the first passage portion and the second passage portion and on which game balls can roll; When the game ball is supplied to the first passage portion side through the installation portion, the game ball is released from the installation portion and discharged out of the ball circulation means through the passage dividing portion ([Practice the invention configuration], refer to the section [4-4c.

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (a so-called enclosed type gaming machine, a management gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from a ball shooting means based on a number of balls of 1 or more), a ball passage through which game balls circulate is divided by a passage dividing portion. The first passage portion on the downstream side and the second passage portion on the upstream side are divided, and the first passage portion and the second passage portion are connected by the bridging portion so as to straddle the divided passage portion. In a state in which the game balls are fired and circulated (circulated) by the ball circulation means, the game balls cannot come off the installation section due to the inertia of the circulation speed of the game balls flowing down the second passage section on the upstream side. do not have. Therefore, during the game, the game balls can flow from the second passage through the installation portion to the first passage, so that the game balls can be reliably circulated even if the ball passage is divided by the passage dividing portion. This enables the player to enjoy the game on the gaming machine.

On the other hand, when replacing or replenishing game balls for maintenance or the like, the game balls to be replenished are thrown into the second passage portion. Then, in a state where the replenished game balls fill the first passage portion of the ball passage, the first passage from the second passage portion on the upstream side of the first passage portion through the bridging portion straddling the passage dividing portion. When the game ball is further supplied to the part side, the game ball is detached from the installation part and discharged out of the ball circulation means through the passage dividing part. Therefore, by setting the upstream end of the first passage portion (the boundary between the first passage portion and the installation portion) as the upper limit of the appropriate range of the game balls to be stored, the game balls exceeding the upper limit are removed from the passage dividing portion. It is possible to provide a game machine capable of automatically discharging game balls to the outside of a circulation means and facilitating replacement work and replenishment work of game balls during maintenance or the like. In addition, when discharging surplus game balls, the number of circulating game balls (circulating balls) can be maintained at an appropriate number without requiring any power for detecting or discharging game balls.

In addition, the bridging portion may have a guide groove extending so as to connect the first passage portion and the second passage portion. As a result, since the guide groove is provided in the installation part, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball passing through the installation part to come off the installation part, and the game ball can be reliably circulated during the game in which the game ball needs to be circulated. It is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the lack of circulating game balls (running out of balls), thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest of the player.

Also, as described above, when the guide groove is provided in the installation portion, the guide groove allows the game balls to be arranged in a row, so that the second passage portion is filled with the game balls in the first passage portion. When a plurality of game balls are supplied (flowed down) from the side to the installation section, the ball pressure applied to the game balls on the downstream side increases as the game balls try to line up on the installation section. And even if it tries to move to the first passage part side on the downstream side by the ball pressure applied to the game ball, it cannot move to the downstream side because the first passage part is filled with the game ball, so the game ball will be pushed out in the width direction of the bridging portion by the ball pressure, will come off the bridging portion and will be discharged out of the ball circulating means through the passage dividing portion. As a result, the game balls exceeding the upper limit of the proper range of the amount of storage can be reliably discharged from the passage dividing portion to the outside of the ball circulation means. .

Furthermore, when the guide groove is provided in the bridging portion as described above, the guide groove may extend from the bridging portion to the second passage portion further upstream. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the above-described effects.

Also, an aligning portion capable of aligning the game balls in a line may be provided in a portion of the second passage portion in the vicinity of the bridging portion. As a result, since the alignment part is provided in the second passage part, the straightness of the game ball can be improved by the alignment part, so the game ball can be moved from the second passage part (alignment part) toward the installation part. It is possible to make the game ball flow straight down, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to come off the installation part, and the game ball can be reliably circulated.

Further, as described above, when the aligning portion is provided in the vicinity of the installation portion in the second passage portion, in the state where the game balls are filled in the first passage portion, the game balls do not come off from the installation portion and can be placed on the installation portion. When the game balls are lined up, the game balls are lined up in a line in the aligning section on the upstream side of the installation section. By the pressing, the game balls on the bridge that cannot move downstream can be pushed out in the width direction and discharged out of the ball circulation means. As a result, the game balls exceeding the upper limit of the proper range of the stored amount can be reliably discharged from the passage dividing portion to the outside of the ball circulation means. Amusement machines can be provided.

By the way, during a game in which the game balls are circulating, by docking the game machine, the game balls are removed from the installation portion and discharged out of the ball circulation means through the passage dividing portion, thereby reducing the number of game balls stored. It is assumed that fraudulent acts such as On the other hand, if the aligning portion provided in the second passage portion as described above is a passage having a pair of slopes such as a V-shaped cross section or a trapezoid that narrows downward, the Even if the path (alignment part) shakes due to a bump, the slope of the alignment part allows the external force to escape diagonally upward in the direction in which the game ball travels, and the game ball deviates from the center of the alignment part. By making it harder, you can reduce the Dotsuki effect.

Further, when the alignment portion is provided in the second passage portion as described above, it is desirable that the boundary between the upstream end of the alignment portion and the installation portion is smoothly connected so that the game ball does not bounce. As a result, since it is possible to suppress the decrease in the circulation speed of the game balls in the alignment section, it is possible to quickly pass through the installation section, the timing at which the ball can be beaten can be shortened as much as possible, and the achievement of cheating can be prevented. It is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use.

Furthermore, the portion of the first passage portion near the bridging portion may be wider than the downstream side. As a result, since the width of the first passage portion near the bridge portion is wider than that of the downstream side, the game ball flowing down from the second passage portion side to the bridge portion will be displaced from the central axis of the bridge portion. Also, the game ball can be received by the widened part of the first passage part, and the game ball can be reliably circulated.

Further, as described above, if the width of the first passage portion near the bridging portion is increased from the downstream width, when the game balls B are replenished due to maintenance or the like, the last game ball filling the first passage portion is Since it is in contact with one of the pair of widened side walls, the center of the last game ball is away from the central axis of the first passage (central axis of the bridge). In this state, when the game ball flows down from the second passage part to the first passage part side through the installation part, the game ball moves to a part away from the rearmost game ball of the first passage part. It comes into contact. The tangent line of the part away from the back of the game ball is not perpendicular to the direction of circulation of the game ball, but is inclined. , and is discharged from the ball circulating means outside the installation portion. Therefore, compared with the case where the portion of the first passage portion is not widened, the game balls exceeding the upper limit of the appropriate range of the amount of storage can be easily discharged, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of

In addition, as described above, when widening the vicinity of the construction part of the first passage part, even if the game ball circulating in the construction part deviates from the center axis of the construction part due to pounding, the width of the first passage part is expanded. The game ball can be received by the part where it is, and the pounding effect can be reduced.

Furthermore, the game machine may further include a ball receiving tray for receiving a game ball that has detached from the installation portion and passed through the path dividing portion. Thus, since the ball receiving tray is provided to receive the game balls discharged from the ball circulation means through the passage dividing portion, the discharged game balls are not scattered, and the recovery of the game balls is facilitated, and maintenance, etc. is facilitated. It is possible to provide a game machine that facilitates replacement work and replenishment work of game balls in the case of.

Further, when the ball receiving tray is provided as described above, when the game balls discharged from the ball circulating means are received by the ball receiving tray, a sound may be produced by the contact of the game balls. As a result, the operator can be notified that the storage amount has exceeded the upper limit of the appropriate range by making a sound. Also, when a sound is heard during a game, it is possible to notify the staff of the game hall or the like that a fraudulent act is being carried out.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1,
"The construction part
It has a guide groove extending so as to connect the first passage portion and the second passage portion.”
characterized by being

Here, the "guide groove" includes "a groove with a V-shaped cross section", "a trapezoidal groove with a cross section that narrows downward", "a concave groove with a width smaller than the diameter of a game ball", and the like. is mentioned.

According to the configuration of means 2, the bridging portion has a guide groove extending so as to connect the first passage portion and the second passage portion (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] , see the description regarding the guide groove 642a).

As a result, since the guide groove is provided in the installation part, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball passing through the installation part to come off the installation part, and the game ball can be reliably circulated during the game in which the game ball needs to be circulated. It is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the lack of circulating game balls (running out of balls), thereby suppressing the decrease in the interest of the player.

In addition, since the guide groove is provided in the installation part, the game balls can be arranged in a row by the guide groove, so that when the game balls are filled in the first passage part, from the second passage part side When a plurality of game balls are supplied (flow down) to the installation section, the ball pressure applied to the game balls on the downstream side increases as the game balls try to line up on the installation section. And even if it tries to move to the first passage part side on the downstream side by the ball pressure applied to the game ball, it cannot move to the downstream side because the first passage part is filled with the game ball, so the game ball will be pushed out in the width direction of the bridging portion by the ball pressure, will come off the bridging portion and will be discharged out of the ball circulating means through the passage dividing portion. As a result, the game balls exceeding the upper limit of the proper range of the amount of storage can be reliably discharged from the passage dividing portion to the outside of the ball circulation means. .

In addition, the guide groove may extend from the bridging portion to the second passage portion on the upstream side. As a result, it is possible to make it easier to exhibit the above-described effects.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2,
"The second passage part
An aligning section is provided in the vicinity of the above-mentioned installation section so that the game balls can be aligned in a row."
characterized by being

Here, the ``alignment part'' includes ``a part with a V-shaped cross section so as to contact at two points below the center of the game ball'', and ``at two points below the center of the game ball. A trapezoidal part with a cross section narrowed downward so as to touch", "a part with a concave cross section so that it touches at two points below the center of the game ball", "A part below the center of the game ball" A portion consisting of a pair of ridges separated in the width direction so as to contact at two points of ".

According to the configuration of the means 3, the second passage portion is provided with an alignment portion capable of aligning the game balls in a line near the installation portion (in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention], alignment See the description regarding section 644).

As a result, since the alignment part is provided in the second passage part, the straightness of the game ball can be improved by the alignment part, so the game ball can be moved from the second passage part (alignment part) toward the installation part. It is possible to make the game ball flow straight down, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to come off the installation part, and the game ball can be reliably circulated.

In addition, since the aligning section is provided near the installation section in the second passage section, the game balls do not come off the installation section while the game balls are filled in the first passage section, and the game balls are placed on the installation section. When the game balls are lined up, since the game balls are lined up in a row in the aligning portion on the upstream side of the installation portion, the game balls on the installation portion can be pressed downstream by the ball pressure of the game balls lined up in the row. A game ball on the installation portion that cannot be moved to the downstream side by pressing can be pushed out in the width direction and discharged out of the ball circulation means. As a result, the game balls exceeding the upper limit of the proper range of the stored amount can be reliably discharged from the passage dividing portion to the outside of the ball circulation means. Amusement machines can be provided.

By the way, during a game in which the game balls are circulating, by docking the game machine, the game balls are removed from the installation portion and discharged out of the ball circulation means through the passage dividing portion, thereby reducing the number of game balls stored. It is assumed that fraudulent acts such as On the other hand, if the aligning portion is a passage having a pair of slopes such as a V-shaped cross section or a trapezoid that tapers downward, the passage ( Even if the aligning part sways, the slope of the aligning part allows the external force to escape diagonally upward with respect to the direction in which the game ball travels, making it difficult for the game ball to come off the center of the aligning part, thereby reducing the pounding effect. can.

It should be noted that it is desirable that the boundary between the upstream end of the aligning portion and the installation portion be smoothly connected so that the game ball does not bounce. As a result, since it is possible to suppress the decrease in the circulation speed of the game balls in the alignment section, it is possible to quickly pass through the installation section, the timing at which the ball can be beaten can be shortened as much as possible, and the achievement of cheating can be prevented. It is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use.

Means 4: In any one configuration from Means 1 to 3,
"The first passage portion
The part near the bridge is wider than the downstream side.”
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 4, the first passage portion has a portion near the bridging portion that is wider than the downstream side (see the description regarding the widened portion 643 in [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] ).

As a result, since the width of the first passage portion near the bridge portion is wider than that of the downstream side, the game ball flowing down from the second passage portion side to the bridge portion will be displaced from the central axis of the bridge portion. Also, the game ball can be received by the widened part of the first passage part, and the game ball can be reliably circulated.

In addition, since the width of the first passage portion near the installation portion is wider than that of the downstream portion, when the game balls B are replenished due to maintenance or the like, the last game ball filling the first passage portion is widened. Since the center of the last game ball is in contact with either of the pair of side walls that are in contact with each other, the center of the last game ball is away from the central axis of the first passage portion (the central axis of the bridge portion). In this state, when the game ball flows down from the second passage part to the first passage part side through the installation part, the game ball moves to a part away from the rearmost game ball of the first passage part. It comes into contact. The tangent line of the part away from the back of the game ball is not perpendicular to the direction of circulation of the game ball, but is inclined. , and is discharged from the ball circulating means outside the installation portion. Therefore, compared with the case where the portion of the first passage portion is not widened, the game balls exceeding the upper limit of the appropriate range of the amount of storage can be easily discharged, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved. It is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of

In addition, since the vicinity of the bridge portion of the first passage portion is widened, even if the game ball circulating in the bridge portion deviates from the central axis of the bridge portion due to a thud, the widened portion of the first passage portion will The game ball can be received, and the pounding effect can be reduced.

Means 5: In the configuration of any one of Means 1 to 4,
``It further has a ball receiving tray for receiving a game ball that has deviated from the installation portion and passed through the passage dividing portion.''
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 5, the game machine further has a ball receiving tray for receiving a game ball that has deviated from the installation portion and passed through the passage dividing portion (see [Mode for Carrying Out the Invention] , the description regarding the ball serpentine member 613A and the ball receiving tray 720).

Thus, since the ball receiving tray is provided to receive the game balls discharged from the ball circulation means through the passage dividing portion, the discharged game balls are not scattered, and the recovery of the game balls is facilitated, and maintenance, etc. is facilitated. It is possible to provide a game machine that facilitates replacement work and replenishment work of game balls in the case of.

When the game balls discharged from the ball circulating means are received in the ball receiving tray, a sound may be produced by the contact of the game balls. As a result, the operator can be notified that the storage amount has exceeded the upper limit of the appropriate range by making a sound. Also, when a sound is heard during a game, it is possible to notify the staff of the game hall or the like that a fraudulent act is being carried out.

Means 6: In the gaming machine,
"A game board having a game area where games are played with game balls,
a ball launching means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board;
a ball circulation means for collecting the game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
, wherein the ball shooting means shoots a game ball based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
The sphere circulation means is
a ball passage through which game balls circulate;
a passage dividing portion that divides the ball passage into a first passage portion on the downstream side and a second passage portion on the upstream side;
The guide groove connects the first passage portion and the second passage portion so as to straddle the passage dividing portion and extends to connect the first passage portion and the second passage portion. and an installation portion on which the game ball can roll;
has
In the first passage portion, a portion near the bridging portion is wider than the downstream side,
The second passage portion is provided with an alignment portion capable of aligning the game balls in a row at a portion near the installation portion,
When the game ball is supplied from the second passage portion to the first passage portion side through the installation portion in a state where the game ball is filled in the first passage portion, the game ball is released from the installation portion. It comes off and is discharged to the ball receiving tray outside the ball circulation means through the passage dividing portion.
characterized by being

According to the configuration of means 6, there are a game board having a game area in which a game is played with game balls, a ball shooting means capable of supplying game balls to the game area of the game board, and a game ball shot by the ball shooting means being recovered. and a ball circulation means for supplying the ball to the ball shooting means again, wherein the game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the data of the ball held by the player converted into data, The ball circulation means includes a ball passage through which game balls circulate, a passage dividing portion that divides the ball passage into a first passage portion on the downstream side and a second passage portion on the upstream side, and a passage dividing portion so as to straddle the passage dividing portion. It has a guide groove that connects the first passage portion and the second passage portion and extends so as to connect the first passage portion and the second passage portion so that the game ball can roll. The first passage part has a part near the bridging part wider than the downstream side, and the second passage part has a part near the bridging part for aligning the game balls in a row. is provided, and in a state in which the first passage portion is filled with game balls, when the game balls are supplied from the second passage portion to the first passage portion side via the erection portion, the game balls are erected. outside the ball circulation means and discharged to a ball receiving tray outside the ball circulation means.

As a result, the game balls shot from the ball shooting means for shooting game balls to the game area of the game board are collected by the ball circulation means and supplied to the ball shooting means, and the player's ball data (for example, possession data) is collected. In a gaming machine (a so-called enclosed type gaming machine, a management gaming machine) in which game balls are shot from a ball shooting means based on a number of balls of 1 or more), a ball passage through which game balls circulate is divided by a passage dividing portion. The first passage portion on the downstream side and the second passage portion on the upstream side are divided, and the first passage portion and the second passage portion are connected by the bridging portion so as to straddle the divided passage portion. When the game balls are fired and circulated (circulated) by the ball circulation means, the first passage portion is not filled with game balls, so the first passage portion passes through the installation portion from the second passage portion. Game balls can circulate to the passage. At this time, since the alignment part is provided in the vicinity of the installation part in the second passage part, the straightness of the game ball can be improved by the alignment part. It is possible to make the game ball flow straight down toward the part. Moreover, since the guide groove is provided in the bridge portion, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball passing through the bridge portion to come off the bridge portion. Furthermore, since the width of the first passage portion near the bridge portion is wider than that of the downstream side, even if the game ball that flows down from the second passage side to the bridge portion deviates from the center axis of the bridge portion. , the game ball can be received by the widened portion of the first passage. For these reasons, during a game in which game balls need to circulate, game balls can be circulated from the second passage through the installation portion to the first passage, so the ball passage is divided by the passage dividing portion. The game balls can be reliably circulated even when the game balls are being held, the players can enjoy the game in the game machine, and the game balls are circulated by being discharged from the passage dividing part. It is possible to avoid the loss of the ball (running out of the ball), eliminate the interruption of the game due to the running out of the ball, and suppress the decrease in the interest of the player.

On the other hand, when replacing or replenishing game balls for maintenance or the like, the game balls to be replenished are thrown into the second passage portion. Then, in a state where the replenished game balls fill the first passage portion of the ball passage, the first passage from the second passage portion on the upstream side of the first passage portion through the bridging portion straddling the passage dividing portion. When the game ball is further supplied to the part side, the game ball is released from the installation part and discharged to the ball receiving tray outside the ball circulation means through the passage dividing part. To be more specific, first, since the width in the vicinity of the bridging portion in the first passage portion is widened from the downstream side, the last game ball that fills the first passage portion is either one of the widened side walls. , the center of the last game ball moves away from the center axis of the first passage (the center axis of the installation portion). In this state, when the game ball flows down from the second passage part to the first passage part side through the installation part, the game ball moves to a part away from the rearmost game ball of the first passage part. It comes into contact. The tangent line of the part away from the back of the game ball is not perpendicular to the direction of circulation of the game ball, but is inclined. A game ball that exceeds the upper limit of the appropriate range of the amount of storage compared to the case where the relevant part of the first passage part is not widened. can be easily discharged. In addition, since the guide groove is provided in the installation part, the game balls can be arranged in a row by the guide groove, so that when the game balls are filled in the first passage part, from the second passage part side When a plurality of game balls are supplied (flow down) to the installation section, the ball pressure applied to the game balls on the downstream side increases as the game balls try to line up on the installation section. And even if it tries to move to the first passage part side on the downstream side by the ball pressure applied to the game ball, it cannot move to the downstream side because the first passage part is filled with the game ball, so the game ball will be pushed out in the width direction of the bridging portion by the ball pressure, will come off the bridging portion and will be discharged out of the ball circulating means through the passage dividing portion. Furthermore, since the aligning portion is provided near the installation portion in the second passage portion, the game balls can be placed on the installation portion without being released from the installation portion while the first passage portion is filled with game balls. Even if the game balls are lined up, the game balls are lined up in a row in the alignment part on the upstream side of the installation part, so the game balls on the installation part can be pushed downstream by the ball pressure of the game balls lined up in a row. By this pressing, the game balls on the installation portion that cannot move downstream can be pushed out in the width direction and discharged out of the ball circulation means. From the above, by setting the upstream end of the first passage (the boundary between the first passage and the bridge) as the upper limit of the appropriate range of game balls to be stored, game balls exceeding the upper limit The game balls can be automatically discharged from the passage dividing part to the ball receiving tray outside the ball circulation means, the discharged game balls are not scattered by receiving them in the ball receiving tray, and the recovery of the game balls is facilitated and maintenance is performed. It is possible to provide a game machine that facilitates replacement work and replenishment work of game balls in such cases. In addition, when discharging surplus game balls, the number of circulating game balls (circulating balls) can be maintained at an appropriate number without requiring any power for detecting or discharging game balls.

By the way, during a game in which the game balls are circulating, by docking the game machine, the game balls are removed from the installation portion, passed through the passage dividing portion, discharged to the ball receiving tray outside the ball circulation means, and stored. It is assumed that fraudulent acts such as reducing the number of game balls will be performed. On the other hand, if the aligning portion provided in the second passage portion is a passage having a pair of slopes such as a V-shaped cross section or a trapezoidal shape narrowing downward, the game ball may come into contact with the game ball obliquely. Therefore, even if the passage (alignment part) shakes due to a bump, the slope of the alignment part allows the external force to escape diagonally upward with respect to the traveling direction of the game ball, and the game ball is less likely to come off the center of the alignment part. This can reduce the thumping effect.

In addition, since the width of the first passage portion is widened in the vicinity of the bridge portion, even if a game ball circulating in the bridge portion deviates from the central axis of the bridge portion due to pounding, the width of the first passage portion is widened. The game ball can be received by the part, and the pounding effect can be reduced.

It should be noted that, in the aligning portion of the second passage portion, it is desirable to connect smoothly so that the game ball does not bounce at the boundary between the upstream end and the bridge portion. As a result, since it is possible to suppress the decrease in the circulation speed of the game balls in the alignment section, it is possible to quickly pass through the installation section, the timing at which the ball can be beaten can be shortened as much as possible, and the achievement of cheating can be prevented. It is possible to provide a game machine that is easy to use.

Further, when the game balls discharged from the ball circulation means are received in the ball receiving tray, a sound may be produced by the contact of the game balls. As a result, the operator can be notified that the storage amount has exceeded the upper limit of the appropriate range by making a sound. Also, when a sound is heard during a game, it is possible to notify the staff of the game hall or the like that a fraudulent act is being carried out.

Means 7: In any one configuration of Means 1 to 6,
The game machine is
The pachinko machine is characterized in that it is provided in the game area and has a prize winning opening for awarding a predetermined privilege when a game ball is entered.

Here, the ``winning opening'' includes a ``general winning opening that is always open within the game area'', and a ``general winning opening that is always open within the game area, and which is advantageous to the player as a predetermined privilege due to the entry of a game ball. A special lottery is held to determine whether or not to generate an advantageous gaming state. Inside, a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, prize winning opening, etc.) that allows game balls to enter as a predetermined privilege, "Specific area within the game area (gate, through chucker, etc.) Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn by passing the ball, a variable winning opening (variable starting opening, accessory winning opening, etc.) that allows game balls to enter as a predetermined privilege, "within the game area Depending on the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., gate, chucker, etc.), it is possible to enter the game ball as a predetermined privilege, and the game ball enters a predetermined As a special benefit, a special lottery is held as to whether or not to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player. "V prize opening that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous as a predetermined privilege when the ball is sorted and entered," "V prize opening that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous as a predetermined privilege, in a predetermined pattern A large winning opening and a prize winning opening that can be opened and closed to allow game balls to enter.

In addition, the ``pachinko machine'' includes ``lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous as a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters the starting hole, and a lottery means. a special lottery result display means as a display device for displaying the special lottery result drawn by the combination of the stopped and displayed special symbols after variably displaying the special symbols according to the lottered special lottery result; Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state by opening and closing a large winning opening in a predetermined pattern when a special lottery result for generating an advantageous game state is displayed on the special lottery result display means (so-called , Digipachi machine), ``distributing means for distributing game balls that enter the prize winning opening, and when the game ball distributed by the distributing means enters the V prize winning opening, the prize is given as a predetermined privilege. Advantageous game state generating means for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by opening and closing the mouth in a predetermined pattern (so-called Hanemono machine); According to the result of a special lottery drawn by entering a game ball into the starting hole (starting ball), the big winning hole or the prize winning hole is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and the ball enters the winning hole. An advantageous game state generating means is provided for generating an advantageous game state in which the player is advantageous by opening and closing the accessory winning opening or the big winning opening in a predetermined pattern as a predetermined privilege when the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening. (So-called multi-function machine)”, etc.

According to the configuration of the means 7, the game machine is a pachinko machine having a prize winning opening which is provided in the game area and gives a predetermined privilege when a game ball enters. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, it is possible to obtain the effects of any of the means described above.

[15-23c. Relationship between Solution Means for 23rd Technical Feature and Embodiment]
The ball launching unit 550 of the body frame 4 in this embodiment is the ball launching means of the present invention, and the foul unit 570, circulating ball path unit 600, ball lifting unit 650, and ball feeding unit 700 in this embodiment are the ball launching means of the present invention. In the ball circulation means, the meandering ball passage 604 of the meandering ball member 613A in this embodiment is the ball passage of the present invention, the first passage portion 604a of the meandering ball passage 604 in the present embodiment is the first passage of the present invention, The second passage portion 604b of the spherical meandering passage 604 in the embodiment respectively corresponds to the second passage portion of the present invention.

Further, the passage dividing portion 641 of the surplus ball discharge mechanism 640 in this embodiment is the passage dividing portion of the present invention, the bridging portion 642 of the present embodiment is the bridging portion of the present invention, and the guide groove of the bridging portion 642 of the present embodiment is 642a is the guide groove of the present invention, the widened portion 643 of the present embodiment is the widened portion of the first passage portion of the present invention, the aligning portion 644 of the present embodiment is the aligning portion of the present embodiment, The ball receiving tray 720 provided below the meandering ball member 613A in , corresponds to the ball receiving tray of the present invention.

[15-23d. Characteristic effects of the 23rd technical feature]
According to the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the game ball B shot from the ball shooting unit 550 that shoots the game ball B to the game area 5a of the game board 5 is sent to the foul unit 570, the circulating ball path unit 600, and the ball lifter. Collected by the upper unit 650 and the ball circulation means such as the ball feeding unit 700 and supplied to the ball shooting unit 550, the ball shooting unit 550 is based on the player's ball holding data (for example, the number of balls held is 1 or more). In a pachinko machine 1 (a so-called enclosed type game machine, a management game machine) configured to shoot game balls B from a ball serpentine passage 604 of a meandering ball member 613A through which game balls B circulate, a passage dividing portion 641 divides the serpentine ball passage 604 downstream. The first passage portion 604a on the upstream side and the second passage portion 604b on the upstream side are divided, and the first passage portion 604a and the second passage portion 604b are connected by a bridging portion 642 so as to straddle the passage dividing portion 641. Therefore, when the player shoots the game ball B and the game ball B is circulated (circulated) by the ball circulation means, since the first passage portion 604a is not filled with the game ball B, the second passage The game ball B can flow from the portion 604b through the bridge portion 642 to the first passage portion 604a. At this time, since the aligning portion 644 is provided in the vicinity of the bridging portion 642 in the second passage portion 604b, the straightness of the game ball B can be improved by the aligning portion 644, so the second passage portion 604b It is possible to make the game ball B flow straight down from (aligning portion 644 ) toward the installation portion 642 . Further, since the guide groove 642 a is provided in the bridge portion 642 , it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B passing through the bridge portion 642 to come off the bridge portion 642 . Furthermore, since the widened portion 643 wider than the downstream side is provided in the first passage portion 604a near the installation portion 642, the game ball B flowing down from the second passage portion 604b side to the installation portion 642 is installed. Even if it deviates from the central axis of the portion 642, the game ball B can be received by the widened portion 643 of the first passage portion 604a. From these things, during the game in which the game ball B needs to circulate, since the game ball B can be circulated from the second passage portion 604b through the bridge portion 642 to the first passage portion 604a, the passage dividing portion Even if the ball meandering passage 604 is divided by 641, the game balls B can be surely circulated, the players can enjoy the game in the pachinko machine 1, and the passage of the game balls B is divided. Discharge from the part 641 can prevent the circulating game balls B from running out (running out of balls), thereby eliminating the interruption of the game due to the running out of balls and suppressing the decrease in interest of the player.

On the other hand, when replacing or replenishing the game ball B for maintenance or the like, the upstream side of the passage dividing portion 641 (here, the power switch 751 is turned off, the out ball receiving port 600a or the safe ball receiving port 600b, or an out port 1008 of the game board 5, a prize winning port such as the general winning port 2001 or the first starting port 2003, etc.). Then, in a state in which the replenished game ball B fills the first passage portion 604a of the meandering ball passage 604, the construction straddling the passage dividing portion 641 from the second passage portion 604b on the upstream side of the first passage portion 604a When the game ball B is further supplied to the first passage portion 604a side through the portion 642, the game ball B comes off the installation portion 642 and passes through the passage dividing portion 641 to the ball receiving tray 720 outside the circulation ball passage unit 600. will be discharged to In detail, first, since the widened portion 643 wider than the downstream is provided in the vicinity of the bridging portion 642 in the first passage portion 604a, the last game ball B filling the first passage portion 604a is the widened portion. Since it touches either of the pair of side walls of 643, the center of the last game ball B is away from the central axis of the first passage portion 604a (the central axis of the bridging portion 642). In this state, when the game ball B flows down from the second passage portion 604b through the bridge portion 642 to the first passage portion 604a side, the game ball B is the last game ball B of the first passage portion 604a. It comes into contact with a part away from directly behind. Since the tangent line of the part away from directly behind the game ball B is not perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B but is inclined, the distribution direction of the game ball B passing through the erection part 642 is caused by the inclination. The ball is directed in the width direction of the portion 642, falls from the bridging portion 642, and is discharged to the ball receiving tray 720 below the meandering ball member 613A. As a result, the game balls B exceeding the upper limit of the proper range of the amount of storage can be easily discharged. In addition, since the guide groove 642a is provided in the bridging portion 642, the game balls B can be arranged in a row by the guide groove 642a. When a plurality of game balls B are supplied (flowing down) from the second passage portion 604b side to the installation portion 642, the game balls B are arranged in a row on the installation portion 642, thereby causing the game balls B on the downstream side. The ball pressure applied to is increased. And even if it tries to move to the first passage portion 604a side on the downstream side by the ball pressure applied to the game ball B, it cannot move to the downstream side because the first passage portion 604a is filled with the game ball B. , the game ball B is pushed out in the width direction of the bridge portion 642 by the ball pressure, is released from the bridge portion 642, passes through the passage dividing portion 641, and is discharged to the outside of the circulating ball path unit 600 (ball meandering member 613A). It will happen. Furthermore, since the alignment portion 644 is provided near the bridging portion 642 in the second passage portion 604b, the game ball B does not come off from the bridging portion 642 while the game ball B is filled in the first passage portion 604a. Even if the game balls B are lined up on the bridge 642, since the game balls B are lined up in a row in the alignment part 644 on the upstream side of the bridge 642, the ball pressure of the game balls B lined up in the row causes the bridge to move. The game ball B on the 642 can be pushed to the downstream side, and the game ball B on the bridging portion 642 that cannot move to the downstream side can be pushed out in the width direction by the pushing, and can be discharged outside the ball meandering member 613A. . From the above, the game ball B beyond the upstream end of the first passage portion 604a (the boundary between the first passage portion 604a and the installation portion 642), which is the upper limit of the appropriate range of the game ball B to be stored, is divided into passages. It can be automatically discharged from the part 641 to the ball receiving tray 720 outside the ball meandering member 613A, and the discharged game balls B are not scattered by being received by the ball receiving tray 720, and the game balls B can be easily collected. In addition, it is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 in which the game balls B can be easily replaced or replenished during maintenance or the like. Further, in discharging the surplus game balls B, the number of circulating game balls B (circulating balls) can be maintained at a proper number without requiring any power for detecting and discharging the game balls B.

By the way, during a game in which the game balls B are circulating, by docking the pachinko machine 1, the game balls B fall from the installation portion 642 and pass through the path dividing portion 641 to reach the ball receiving tray 720 below the meandering ball member 613A. It is assumed that a fraudulent act such as reducing the number of game balls B that are stored by discharging the game balls B is performed. On the other hand, the aligning portion 644 provided in the second passage portion 604b is a passage having a pair of slopes such as a V-shaped cross section or a trapezoidal shape narrowing downward, and is arranged diagonally with respect to the game ball B. Since it is in contact, even if the ball meandering passage 604 (alignment part 644) shakes due to a bump, the slope of the alignment part 644 can release the external force obliquely upward with respect to the traveling direction of the game ball B, and the alignment part The pounding effect can be reduced by making it difficult for the game ball B to come off the center of the 644.例文帳に追加

In addition, since a wide widened portion 643 is provided near the bridging portion 642 of the first passage portion 604a, even if the game ball B flowing through the bridging portion 642 deviates from the central axis of the bridging portion 642 due to a thud, The game ball B can be received by the widened portion 643 of the first passage portion 604a, and the pounding effect can be reduced.

Furthermore, in the aligning portion 644 of the second passage portion 604b, at the upstream end and the boundary with the bridge portion 642, the game ball B is smoothly connected so that it does not bounce, so that the game ball B circulates in the aligning portion 644. To provide a pachinko machine 1 capable of suppressing a decrease in speed, allowing the player to quickly pass through the installation part 642, shortening the timing at which the player can pound as much as possible, and easily preventing the achievement of fraud. can.

In addition, since the bottom wall of the ball receiving tray 720 is set as the upper base and the game ball B ejected from the meandering ball member 613A makes a sound when it comes into contact with the game ball B, the sound makes a sound to the operator. It is possible to notify that the upper limit of the appropriate range of the amount of storage has been exceeded. Also, when a sound is heard during a game, it is possible to notify the staff of the game hall or the like that a fraudulent act is being carried out.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

That is, in the above embodiment, the game machine is applied to the pachinko machine 1 or the slot machine, but the game machine is not limited to this, and the game is a pachislot machine or a game that fuses a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same effects as those described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is applied to a so-called enclosed type game machine or a game machine called a management game machine in which the player does not touch the game balls B, but this is the case. , but may be applied to a gaming machine in which the player can touch the game ball B, and in this case also, the same effects as described above can be achieved. In this game machine, for example, a game ball stored in a plate of a door frame is driven into a game area of a game board by a player's operation, and the driven game ball is provided within the game area. There is a pachinko machine that pays out a predetermined number of game balls corresponding to the winning opening to a tray of a door frame when the game balls are accepted into the winning opening.

1 pachinko machine 2 outer frame 3 door frame 4 body frame 5 game board 5a game area 550 ball shooting unit (ball shooting means)
570 Foul Unit (ball circulation means)
600 circulation ball path unit (ball circulation means)
604 Ball meandering passage (ball passage)
604a first passage portion 604b second passage portion 613A meandering ball member 640 surplus ball discharging mechanism 641 passage dividing portion 642 bridging portion 642a guide groove 643 widening portion 644 alignment portion 650 ball lifting unit (ball circulation means)
700 ball feeding unit (ball circulation means)

Claims (1)

a game board detachably supported from the front by the body frame and having a game area in which a game is played with game balls;
a ball launching means provided below the game board and capable of supplying game balls to the game area;
foul ball recovery means for recovering game balls that have not been supplied to the game area even though they have been shot by the ball shooting means;
a ball circulation means for collecting game balls shot by the ball shooting means and supplying them to the ball shooting means again;
and
A gaming machine in which a game ball is shot by the ball shooting means based on the player's ball holding data converted into data,
A settlement switch is provided for the player to execute settlement processing for the ball data,
The gaming machine, wherein the first settlement switch is provided as a unit so that the unit can be exchanged.

Images